la celula

SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS A GUIDE TO PHYSICS About the Author Carlos I Calle received his PhD in theoretical nuclear physics from Ohio University. He is a senior research scientist at NASA Kennedy Space Center where he leads the electromagnetic physics research group. Dr Calle is currently working on the problem of electrostatic phenomena on planetary surfaces, particularly on Mars and the Moon, developing instrumentation for future planetary exploration missions. He is the principal investigator for the electrostatic studies of Martian soil and dust and for the electrometer calibration project for the Mars Surveyor mission. He is also project manager for the study of the electrostatic properties of lunar soil and dust. His earlier research work involved the development of a theoretical model for a microscopic treatment of particle scattering. He also introduced one-particle excitation operators in a separable particle-hole Hamiltonian for the calculation of particle excitations. As a professor of physics for many years, he taught the whole range of college physics courses. He has published over eighty scienti®c papers and been invited to participate in international scienti®c conferences. He has been the recipient of ten research grants from NSF, from NASA, and from private foundations. SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS A GUIDE TO PHYSICS CARLOS I CALLE NASA Kennedy Space Center Institute of Physics Publishing Bristol and Philadelphia # IOP Publishing Ltd 2001 All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior permission of the publisher. Multiple copying is permitted in accordance with the terms of licences issued by the Copyright Licensing Agency under the terms of its agreement with the Committee of ViceChancellors and Principals. British Library Cataloguing-in-Publication Data A catalogue record for this book is available from the British Library. ISBN 0 7503 0707 2 Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data are available Commissioning Editor: Nicki Dennis Production Editor: Simon Laurenson Production Control: Sarah Plenty Cover Design: FreÂdeÂrique Swist Marketing Executive: Laura Serratrice Published by Institute of Physics Publishing, wholly owned by The Institute of Physics, London Institute of Physics, Dirac House, Temple Back, Bristol BS1 6BE, UK US Of®ce: Institute of Physics Publishing, The Public Ledger Building, Suite 1035, 150 South Independence Mall West, Philadelphia, PA 19106, USA Typeset by Academic ‡ Technical Typesetting, Bristol Printed in the UK by J W Arrowsmith Ltd, Bristol To Dr Luz Marina Calle, Fellow NASA Scientist and Wife and to our son Daniel CONTENTS PREFACE xv PART 1: INTRODUCTORY CONCEPTS 1 PHYSICS: THE FUNDAMENTAL SCIENCE What is physics? The scienti®c method: learning from our mistakes Physics and other sciences Sizes of things: measurement Fundamental units Physics and mathematics Frontiers of physics: Very small numbers Pioneers of physics: Measuring the circumference of the Earth 3 3 7 9 13 15 18 19 20 PART 2: THE LAWS OF MECHANICS 2 THE DESCRIPTION OF MOTION 25 Understanding motion Uniform motion Average speed The frontiers of physics: Friction Instantaneous speed Velocity: Speed and direction Vectors Acceleration Uniformly accelerated motion Falling bodies Pioneers of physics: Galileo's method The motion of projectiles 25 26 27 29 30 31 31 34 35 37 39 40 vii SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS 3 4 5 6 THE LAWS OF MECHANICS: NEWTON'S LAWS OF MOTION 43 The concept of force The ancient idea of motion The birth of modern science Pioneers of physics: Galileo's dialog with Aristotle Galileo formulates the Law of Inertia Physics in our world: The Leaning Tower of Pisa Newton's First Law: Law of inertia Physics in our world: Car seat belt Newton's Second Law: Law of force Newton's Third Law: Law of action and reaction 43 44 45 47 48 50 52 54 56 59 ENERGY 62 What is energy? The concept of work Units of work and energy The concept of energy Pioneers of Physics: James Prescott Joule (1818±1889) The work-energy theorem Conservative and nonconservative forces 62 62 66 66 67 74 75 CONSERVATION OF ENERGY AND MOMENTUM 78 Transformation of energy The principle of conservation of energy The energy of mass Ef®ciency Pioneers of physics: The physicists' letters Power Physics in our world: Automobile ef®ciency Impulse and momentum Physics in our world: Air bags Conservation of momentum Elastic and inelastic collisions Cannons and rockets 78 80 81 82 83 85 86 88 90 91 94 95 ROTATION AND THE UNIVERSAL LAW OF GRAVITATION 98 Rotational motion The frontiers of physics: CD-ROM drives Torque and angular momentum viii 98 101 102 Contents Physics in our world: Twisting cats Centripetal acceleration Satellites Origins of our view of the universe Kepler's laws of planetary motion Newton's law of universal gravitation The frontiers of physics: Measuring the distance to the Moon Spacecraft and orbital motion The frontiers of physics: The Global Positioning Satellite System 106 108 110 110 114 118 124 125 128 PART 3: THE STRUCTURE OF MATTER 7 8 9 ATOMS: BUILDING BLOCKS OF THE UNIVERSE 133 The underlying structure of matter The Atomic Hypothesis Early concept of the atom First models of the atom Waves and quanta The Bohr model of the atom Molecules Physics in our world: Winemaking 133 133 134 136 141 145 147 149 THE HEART OF THE ATOM: THE NUCLEUS 151 Raw material: Protons and neutrons Pioneers of physics: Heisenberg's failing grade The composition of the nucleus The glue that keeps the nucleus together Size and shape of the nucleus Nuclear energy levels 151 152 153 155 159 161 FLUIDS 164 States of matter Density Pressure Buoyancy Surface tension and capillarity Fluids in motion The human cardiovascular system Physics in our world: Curve balls 164 165 166 176 179 184 186 187 ix SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS PART 4: THERMODYNAMICS 10 H E A T A N D T E M P E R A T U R E Heat as a form of energy Pioneers of physics: Count Rumford Measuring temperature Temperature and heat Physics in our world: Thermography Heat capacity Heat of fusion and heat of vaporization Evaporation and boiling Physics in our world: Instant ice cream Humidity Thermal expansion The unusual expansion of water 11 T H E L A W S O F T H E R M O D Y N A M I C S The four laws of thermodynamics The ideal gas law Physics in our world: Automobile engines The zeroth law of thermodynamics The ®rst law of thermodynamics The second law of thermodynamics The third law of thermodynamics The frontiers of physics: Entropy that organizes? Entropy and the origin of the Universe Entropy and the arrow of time 195 195 197 199 201 204 205 207 210 213 213 215 218 221 221 221 224 225 226 229 233 234 235 239 PART 5: ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 12 E L E C T R I C I T Y 247 Electromagnetism Electric charge Coulomb's law The electric ®eld The fundamental charge The frontiers of physics: Electrostatics on Mars Electric potential Storing electrical energy The frontiers of physics: Storing single electrons Physics in our world: Inkjet printers x 247 248 250 253 256 258 260 262 264 265 Contents 13 A P P L I E D E L E C T R I C I T Y Conductors and insulators Electric current and batteries Ohm's Law Physics in our world: Electric cars The frontiers of physics: Electric dentists Simple electric circuits Resistor combinations Electrical energy and power Semiconductors Superconductors 14 E L E C T R O M A G N E T I S M The discovery of magnets The magnetic ®eld Physics in our world: Magneto-optical drives Electric currents and magnetism A moving charge in a magnetic ®eld Particle accelerators Magnetism of the earth Physics in our world: Avian magnetic navigation The source of magnetism Faraday's law of induction Motors and generators Maxwell's equations Physics in our world: Microwave ovens 267 267 268 270 271 275 275 278 280 281 287 291 291 292 295 295 298 301 304 307 307 309 312 315 317 PART 6: WAVES 15 W A V E M O T I O N 321 The nature of waves The principle of superposition Resonance and chaos The frontiers of physics: Chaos in the brain Water waves Seismic waves 16 S O U N D 321 325 333 336 337 339 342 The nature of sound The speed of sound Physics in our world: Telephone tones Intensity of sound waves xi 342 343 344 346 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS The ear The frontiers of physics: Electronic ear implants The sound of music Musical instruments The Doppler effect Shockwaves Ultrasound 17 O P T I C S 347 352 352 357 362 365 367 370 Waves of light Re¯ection of light Re¯ection from mirrors Curved mirrors Refraction of light The frontiers of physics: Gradient-index lenses Total internal re¯ection Optical instruments The human eye The frontiers of physics: Arti®cial vision 18 T H E N A T U R E O F L I G H T The wave nature of light The speed of light The electromagnetic spectrum Color Spectra: The signature of atoms Young's experiment Polarization Lasers Physics in our world: Compact disc player Holography 370 370 374 376 380 389 390 393 399 403 405 405 406 411 413 417 421 425 430 434 435 PART 7: MODERN PHYSICS 19 T H E S P E C I A L T H E O R Y O F R E L A T I V I T Y Galilean relativity The Michelson±Morley experiment Einstein's postulates Time dilation The frontiers of physics: Intergalactic travel Simultaneity Length contraction xii 441 441 445 449 453 458 460 462 Contents Addition of velocities E ˆ mc2 464 465 20 T H E G E N E R A L T H E O R Y O F R E L A T I V I T Y The principle of equivalence Warped spacetime continuum The bending of light The perihelion of Mercury The gravitational time dilation The frontiers of physics: Orbiting clocks Black holes The frontiers of physics: Spacetime drag 21 T H E E A R L Y A T O M I C T H E O R Y The physics of the atom Black body radiation The photoelectric effect The Bohr model of the atom revisited Physics in our world: Using photons to detect tumors De Broglie's waves Quantum mechanics 22 Q U A N T U M M E C H A N I C S The beginnings of quantum mechanics The new mechanics of the atom Wave mechanics Pioneers of physics: SchroÈdinger's inspired guess Heisenberg's uncertainty principle The new physics The frontiers of physics: Knowledge and certainty Physics in our world: Electron microscopes The frontiers of physics: Quantum teleportation 23 N U C L E A R P H Y S I C S 469 469 473 479 483 485 488 489 494 496 496 496 499 503 504 506 509 511 511 511 514 516 517 521 522 523 530 532 Beyond the atom Radioactivity Nuclear reactions Nuclear energy: Fission and fusion Applications of nuclear physics Pioneers of physics: Enrico Fermi (1901±1954) Physics in our world: Proton beams for cancer therapy xiii 532 532 538 540 546 547 552 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS 24 E L E M E N T A R Y P A R T I C L E S Antimatter The fundamental forces Exchange forces Pions Particle classi®cation: Hadrons and leptons Conservation laws Strange particles Quarks Pioneers of physics: Gell-Mann's quark Particles with charm 25 S U P E R F O R C E : E I N S T E I N ' S D R E A M Symmetry Global and local symmetries The electroweak uni®cation The color force GUTs, the third uni®cation Supersymmetry and superstrings The creation of the universe The ®rst moments of the universe The frontiers of physics: The cosmic background explorer 553 553 555 557 559 561 563 565 565 568 568 571 571 573 575 581 584 585 588 591 594 Appendix A P O W E R S O F T E N 596 Appendix B T H E E L E M E N T S 599 Appendix C N O B E L P R I Z E W I N N E R S I N PHYSICS 602 Appendix D P H Y S I C S T I M E - L I N E 608 Glossary 615 Index 632 xiv PREFACE As a research scientist at NASA Kennedy Space Center working on planetary exploration, I am very fortunate to be able to experience ®rst hand the excitement of discovery. As a physicist, it is not surprising that I ®nd science in general and physics in particular captivating. I have written this book to try to convey my excitement and fascination with physics to those who are curious about nature and who would like to get a feeling for the thrills that scientists experience at the moment of discovery. The advances in physics that have taken place during the twentieth century have been astounding. One hundred years ago, Max Planck and Albert Einstein introduced the concept of the quantum of energy that made possible the development of quantum mechanics. This revolutionary theory opened the doors for the breathtaking pace of innovation and discovery that we have witnessed during the last ®fty years. At the beginning of the new century, physics continues its inexorable pace toward new discoveries. An exciting new theory might give us the ``theory of everything,'' the uni®cation of all the forces of nature into one single force which would reveal to us how the universe began and perhaps how it will end. Although these exciting new theories are highly mathematical, their conceptual foundations are not dif®cult to understand. As a college professor for many years, I had the occasion to teach physics to nonscience students and to give public lectures on physics topics. In those lectures and presentations, I kept the mathematics to a minimum and concentrated on the concepts. The idea for this book grew out of those experiences. This book is intended for the informed reader who is interested in learning about physics. It is also useful to scientists in other disciplines and to professionals in non-scienti®c ®elds. The book takes the reader from the basic introductory concepts xv SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS to discussions about the current theories about the structure of matter, the nature of time, and the beginning of the universe. Since the book is conceptual, I have kept simple mathematical formulas to a minimum. I have used short, simple algebraic derivations in places where they would serve to illustrate the discovery process (for example, in describing Newton's incredible beautiful discovery of the universal law of gravitation). These short forays into elementary algebra can be skipped without loss of continuity. The reader who completes the book will be rewarded with a basic understanding of the fundamental concepts of physics and will have a very good idea of where the frontiers of physics lie at the present time. I have divided the book into seven parts. Part 1 starts with some introductory concepts and sets the stage for our study of physics. Part 2 presents the science of mechanics and the study of energy. Part 3 follows with an introduction to the structure of matter, where we learn the story of the atom and its nucleus. The book continues with thermodynamics in Part 4, the conceptual development of electricity and magnetism in Part 5, waves and light (Part 6), and ®nally, in Part 7, with the rest of the story of modern physics, from the development of quantum theory and relativity to the present theories of the structure of matter. Acknowledgments I wish to thank ®rst my wife, Dr Luz Marina Calle, a fellow NASA research scientist and my invaluable support throughout the many years that writing this book took. She witnessed all the ups and downs, the dif®culties, setbacks, and the slow progress in the long project. She read the entire manuscript and offered many suggestions for clari®cation, especially in the chapters where, as a physical chemist, she is an expert. I wish to thank Professor Karen Parshall, of the University of Virginia, who very carefully and thoroughly read the ®rst draft of the ®rst four chapters and made many suggestions. I also thank Professors George H Lenz, Scott D Hyman, Joseph Giammarco, and Robert L Chase in the physics department at Sweet Briar College, who read all or part of the manuscript and offered xvi Preface many comments. I am grateful to Karla Faulconer for many of the illustrations that appear in the book. For their help with different aspects of the preparation of the manuscript, I am indebted to Gwen Hudson, Rebecca Harvey, and Rachelle Raphael. I would especially like to acknowledge the invaluable help of my son Daniel, now a software engineer at Digital Paper, who read the entire manuscript, made many important suggestions and was my early test for the readability of many dif®cult sections. No book can be written without the important peer review process. The criticisms, corrections and, sometimes, praise made the completion of this book possible. Over a dozen university physics professors reviewed this book during the different stages of its development. I wish to thank them for their invaluable advice. The work of two reviewers was particularly important in the development of the book. I appreciate the comprehensive reviews of Professor Michael J Hones at Villanova University, who reviewed the manuscript four times, offering criticism and advice every time. Professor Kirby W Kemper at Florida State University, reviewed the book several times and suggested changes, corrections, and better ways to describe or explain a concept. The book is better because of them. Finally, I wish to thank Nicki Dennis, Simon Laurenson and Victoria Le Billon at IOP Publishing, and Graham Saxby, for their understanding and for their ef®ciency in converting my manuscript into this book. Carlos I Calle Kennedy Space Center, Florida xvii 1 PHYSICS: THE FUNDAMENTAL SCIENCE What is physics? Physics deals with the way the universe works at the most fundamental level. The same basic laws apply to the motion of a falling snow¯ake, the eruption of a volcano, the explosion of a distant star, the ¯ight of a butter¯y or the formation of the early universe. It is not dif®cult to imagine that, some thirty thousand years ago, during a cold, dark spring night, a young child, moved perhaps by the pristine beauty of the starry sky, looked at his mother and, in a language incomprehensible to any of us today, asked her: ``Mother, who made the world?'' To wonder how things come about is, of course, a universal human quality. As near as we can tell, human beings have been preoccupied with the origin and nature of the world for as long as we have been human. Each of us echoes the words of the great Austrian physicist Erwin SchroÈdinger, ``I know not whence I came nor whither I go nor who I am,'' and seeks the answers. Here lies the excitement that this quest for answers brings to our minds. Today, scientists have been able to pierce a few of the veils that cloud the fundamental questions that whisper in our minds with a new and wonderful way of thinking which is ®rmly anchored in the works of Galileo, Newton, Einstein, Bohr, SchroÈdinger, Heisenberg, Dirac and many others whom we shall meet in our incursion into the world of physics. Physics, then, attempts to describe the way the universe works at the most basic level. Although it deals with a great variety of phenomena of nature, physics strives for explanations with as few laws as possible. Let us, through a few examples, taste some of the ¯avor of physics. 3 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 1.1. The laws of physics apply to a falling snow¯ake (courtesy W P Wirgin), the explosion of a star or the eruption of a volcano (courtesy NASA). We all know that if we drop a sugar cube in water, the sugar dissolves in the water and as a result the water becomes thicker, denser; that is, more viscous. We, however, are not likely to pay a great deal of attention to this well-known phenomenon. One inquisitive mind did. One year after graduating from college, the young Albert Einstein considered the same phenomenon and did, indeed, pay attention to it. Owing to his rebellious character, Einstein had been unable to ®nd a university position as he had wanted and was supporting himself with temporary jobs as tutor or as a substitute teacher. While substituting for a mathematics teacher in the Technical School in Winterthur, near Zurich, from May to July 1901, Einstein started thinking about the sweetened water 4 Physics: The Fundamental Science problem. ``The idea . . . may well have come to Einstein as he was having tea,'' writes a former collaborator of Einstein. Einstein simpli®ed the problem by considering the sugar molecules to be small hard bodies swimming in a structureless ¯uid. This simpli®cation allowed him to perform calculations that had been impossible until then and that explained how the sugar molecules would diffuse in the water, making the liquid more viscous. This was not suf®cient for the twenty-two-year-old scientist. He looked up actual values of viscosities of different solutions of sugar in water, put these numbers into his theory and obtained from his equations the size of sugar molecules! He also found a value for the number of molecules in a certain mass of any substance (Avogadro's number). With this number, he could calculate the mass of any atom. Einstein wrote a scienti®c paper with his theory entitled ``A New Determination of the Sizes of Molecules.'' Figure 1.2. Albert Einstein. 5 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS On the heels of this paper, Einstein submitted for publication another important paper on molecular motion, where he explained the erratic, zigzag motion of individual particles of smoke. Again, always seeking the fundamental, Einstein was able to show that this chaotic motion gives direct evidence of the existence of molecules and atoms. ``My main aim,'' he wrote later, ``was to ®nd facts that would guarantee as far as possible the existence of atoms of de®nite ®nite size.'' Almost a century earlier, Joseph von FraunhoÈfer, an illustrious German physicist, discovered that the apparent continuity of the sun's spectrum is actually an illusion. This seemingly unrelated discovery was actually the beginning of the long and tortuous road toward the understanding of the atom. The eleventh and youngest child of a glazier, FraunhoÈfer became apprenticed to a glass maker at the age of twelve. Three years later, a freak accident turned the young lad's life around; the rickety boarding house he was living in collapsed and he was the only survivor. Maximilian I, the elector of Bavaria, rushed to the scene and took pity of the poor boy. He gave the young man eighteen ducats. With this small capital, FraunhoÈfer was able to buy books on optics and a few machines with which he started his own glass-working shop. While testing high-quality prisms FraunhoÈfer found that the spectrum formed by sunlight after it passed through one of his prisms was missing some colors; it was crossed by numerous minuscule black lines, as in ®gure 1.3 (color plate). FraunhoÈfer, intrigued, continued studying the phenomenon, measuring the position of several hundred lines. He placed a prism behind the eyepiece of a telescope and discovered that the dark lines in the spectrum formed by the light from the stars did not have quite the same pattern as that of sunlight. He later discovered that looking at the light from a hot gas through a prism produced a set of bright lines similar to the pattern of dark lines in the solar spectrum. Today we know that the gaps in the spectrum that FraunhoÈfer discovered are a manifestation of the interaction between light and matter. The missing colors in the spectrum are determined by the atoms that make up the body emitting the light. In the spring of 1925 a twenty-four-year old physicist named Werner Heisenberg, suffering from severe hay fever, decided to take a two week vacation on a small island in the North Sea, 6 Physics: The Fundamental Science away from the ¯owers and the pollen. During the previous year, Heisenberg had been trying to understand this interaction between light and matter, looking for a mathematical expression for the lines in the spectrum. He had decided that the problem of the relationship between these lines and the atoms could be analyzed in a simple manner by considering the atom as if it were an oscillating pendulum. In the peace and tranquility of the island, Heisenberg was able to work out his solution, inventing the mechanics of the atom. Heisenberg's new theory turned out to be extremely powerful, reaching beyond the original purpose of obtaining a mathematical expression for the spectral lines. In 1984, this idea of thinking about the atom as oscillations took a new turn. John Schwarz of the California Institute of Technology and Michael B Green of the University of London proposed that the fundamental particles that make up the atom are actually oscillating strings. The different particles that scientists detect are actually different types or modes of oscillation of these strings, much like the different ways in which a guitar string vibrates. This clever idea, which was incredibly dif®cult to implement, produced a theory of enormous beauty and power which explains and solves many of the dif®culties that previous theories had encountered. The current version of the theory, called superstring theory ± which we will study in more detail in chapter 25 ± promises to unify all of physics and help us understand the ®rst moments in the life of the universe. Still far from complete, superstring theory is one of the most active areas of research in physics at the present time. In all these cases, the scientists considered a phenomenon of nature, simpli®ed its description, constructed a theory of its behavior based on the knowledge acquired by other scientists in the past, and used the new theory not only to explain the phenomenon, but also to predict new phenomena. This is the way physics is done. This book shows how we can also do physics, and share in its excitement. The scienti®c method: learning from our mistakes In contrast to that of many other professionals, the work of a scientist is not to produce a ®nished product. No scienti®c 7 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS theory will ever be a correct, ®nished result. ``There could be no fairer destiny for any . . . theory,'' wrote Albert Einstein, ``than that it should point the way to a more comprehensive theory in which it lives on, as a limiting case.'' Science is distinguished from other human endeavor by its empirical method, which proceeds from observation or experiment. The distinguished philosopher of science Karl R Popper said that the real basis of science is the possibility of empirical disproof. A scienti®c theory cannot be proved correct. It can, however, be disproved. According to the scienti®c method, a scientist formulates a theory inspired by the existing knowledge. The scientist uses this new theory to make predictions of the results of future experiments. If when these experiments are carried out the predictions disagree with the results of the experiments the theory is disproved; we know it is incorrect. If, however, the results agree with the forecasts of the theory, it is the task of the scientists to draw additional predictions from the theory, which can be tested by future experiments. No test can prove a theory, but any single test can disprove it. In the 1950s, a great variety of unpredicted subatomic particles discovered in laboratories around the world left physicists bewildered. The picture that scientists had of the structure of matter up to the 1940s ± as we will learn in more detail in chapters 7 and 8 ± was relatively simple and fairly easy to understand: matter was made of atoms, which were composed of a tiny nucleus surrounded by a cloud of electrons. The nucleus, in turn, was made up of two kinds of particles, protons and neutrons. The new particles being discovered did not ®t this simple scheme. Two theories were formulated to explain their existence. The ®rst one proposed a ``particle democracy,'' in which no particle was any more fundamental than any other. This theory was so well received by the scienti®c community in the United Sates that one of the proponents of the second theory, Murray GellMann of the California Institute of Technology decided to publish his paper in a European journal where he felt the opposition to his new ideas would not be so great. Gell-Mann and independently George Zweig, also of Caltech, proposed that many of the growing number of particles and in particular the proton and the neutron were actually made up of smaller, indivisible particles 8 Physics: The Fundamental Science which Gell-Mann called quarks. Different combinations of quarks, in groups of two or three, were responsible for many of these particles. According to their theory, the growing number of new particles being discovered was not a problem anymore. What mattered was that the objects of which these particles were made of were simple and small in number. Which theory was correct? In 1959 Stanford University built a large particle accelerator which, among other things, could determine whether or not quarks existed. Seven years later, experiments carried out at the Stanford Linear Accelerator Laboratory, SLAC, allowed physicists to determine the presence of the quarks inside protons and neutrons. Since then, many experiments have corroborated the Stanford results; the quark is accepted today as one of the fundamental constituents of matter and the ``particle democracy'' theory is no longer viable. We shall see in the ®nal chapters of this book that these new theories of matter are far from complete. Nevertheless, the knowledge obtained from these theories has given us not only a better understanding of the universe we live in but has also produced the modern technological world based largely on the computer chip. We can summarize the scienti®c method by saying that we can learn from our mistakes. Scienti®c knowledge progresses by guesses, by conjectures which are controlled by criticism, by critical tests. These conjectures or guesses may survive the tests; but they can never be established as true. ``The very refutation of a theory,'' writes Popper, ``is always a step forward that takes us nearer to the truth. And this is how we learn from our mistakes.'' Physics and other sciences Physicists often become interested in phenomena normally studied by scientists in other scienti®c disciplines, and apply their knowledge of physics to these problems with great success. The recent formulation of the impact theory of mass extinctions is a good illustration of physicists becoming involved in other scienti®c ®elds and of the way working scientists apply the scienti®c method to their work. 9 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS In 1980, the Nobel prize winning physicist Luis Alvarez and his son Walter, a professor of geology at the University of California at Berkeley, reported in a paper published in the journal Science that some 65 million years ago a giant meteorite crashed into the earth and caused the extinction of most species. The dinosaurs were the most famous casualties. Alvarez and his collaborators based their theory on their study of the geological record. Walter Alvarez had told his father that the 1-cm-thick clay layer that separates the Italian limestone deposits of the Cretaceous period ± the last period of age of reptiles ± from those of the Tertiary period ± the ®rst period of the age of mammals, Figure 1.4. An unorthodox theory of the extinction of the dinosaurs. (Cartoon by Sydney Harris.) 10 Physics: The Fundamental Science was laid down during precisely the time when the great majority of the small swimming animals in the marine waters of that region had disappeared. What made it even more exciting was the fact that this time also coincided with the disappearance of the dinosaurs. The layer of clay ± observed worldwide and known as the K-T boundary layer ± contains an unusually high concentration of the element iridium. This element is present in very small amounts in the earth's crust but is much more abundant in meteorites. The father and son team thought that by measuring the amount of iridium present in the clay they could determine how long the layer had taken to form. They assumed that iridium could have rained down on the earth from meteoritic dust at a fairly steady rate during the thousand years that it took to form. If that were the case, they could measure the amount of iridium in the clay and in the rocks above the clay (formed later) and below (formed earlier) and determine the time it had taken for the iridium to accumulate. To that effect, they enlisted the help of Frank Asaro and Helen Michel, nuclear chemists at the Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory. Asaro and Michel showed that the clay layer contains three hundred times as much iridium as the layers above and below. The source of this unusual amount of iridium had to be extraterrestrial, Luis Alvarez reasoned. Meteorites, which are Figure 1.5. K-T boundary layer with a high concentration of iridium. (Courtesy Alessandro Montanari.) 11 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS extraterrestrial, have fallen on the earth since its formation. If the iridium came from the meteorites, why this sudden increase in the meteorite rate during this particular time and why did it decrease again to normal levels? What was so special about this particular time in the history of the earth? More importantly, why did it coincide with the extinction of about 50 percent of the species in existence then? The Alvarez team ®rst proposed that the iridium could have come from the explosion of a supernova near the solar system. Astrophysicists had proposed that the mass extinctions could have been caused by such an explosion. Since these tremendous explosions produce heavy elements Luis Alvarez proposed analyzing the samples taken from the clay for their presence. Detailed measurements revealed no heavy elements, however, and the supernova idea had to be abandoned. While Walter Alvarez returned to Italy to collect more clay samples, his father worked on theory, inventing ``a new scheme every week for six weeks and [shooting] them down one by one,'' as he wrote later. Luis Alvarez then considered the possibility of an asteroid or a comet passing through the atmosphere, breaking up into dust which would eventually fall to the ground, like the comet that broke up over Tunguska, Siberia, in 1908. Calculations showed him that a larger asteroid, of 10 kilometers in diameter, for example, would not break up into pieces. The Tunguska comet was smaller. Alvarez then concluded that some 65 million years ago, a 10kilometer comet or asteroid struck the earth, disintegrated, and threw dust into the atmosphere. The dust remained in the atmosphere for several years, blocking sunlight, turning day into night, and preventing photosynthesis, the process by which, in the presence of light, plants convert water, carbon dioxide, and minerals into oxygen and other compounds. Without plants to eat, animals starved to death. We see the remnants of dust today as the global K-T boundary layer between the Cretaceous and Terciary layers. Alvarez calculated the diameter of the object from the known concentration of iridium in meteorites and his group's data on the iridium content of the Italian clay samples. Other scientists proposed the idea that intense volcanic eruptions could account for the mass extinctions. These scientists found high levels of iridium in tiny airborne particles released 12 Physics: The Fundamental Science by the Kilauea volcano in Hawaii and concluded that iridium from the inner earth can reach the surface. For a few years after they were proposed, both ideas could be used to explain the K-T extinctions. However, different predictions could be drawn from the two competing ideas and scientists scurried to ®nd new evidence in support of the different predictions. Recent ®ndings, however, appear to con®rm the predictions of the impact theory. According to the scienti®c method, however, no theory can ever be proved correct. One of the theories will eventually be shown to be incorrect, leaving the remaining theories stronger, but not proven. ``You will never convince some [scientists] that an impact killed the dinosaurs unless you ®nd a dinosaur skeleton with a crushed skull and a ring of iridium around the hole,'' joked a scientist at a conference on the subject. Sizes of things: measurement Most work in physics depends upon observation and measurement. To describe the phenomena encountered in nature and to be able to make observations, physicists must agree on a consistent set of units. Throughout history, several different systems of units were developed. It began with the Babylonians and the Egyptians, thousands of years ago. The earliest recorded unit of measurement, the cubit, based on the length of the arm, appeared in Egyptian papyrus texts. According to Genesis, Noah's Ark was 300 cubits long (about 150 m). Because the length of the arm varies from person to person, so did the cubits used among various civilizations. The Egyptians used a short cubit of 0.45 m and a royal cubit of 0.524 m. The ancient Romans used the mille passus, 1000 double steps by a Roman legionary, which was equal to 5000 Roman feet. In the 15th century, Queen Bess of England added 280 feet to the mile to make it eight ``furrow-longs'' or furlongs. In 1790, Thomas Jefferson proposed a system based on units of 10 where 10 feet would be a decad, 10 decads a road, 10 roads a furlong, and 10 furlongs a mile. Congress did not approve Jefferson's system. 13 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 1.6. The meter was originally de®ned as the 1/10 000 000 of the length of the Earth's meridian from the North Pole to the Equator In France, however, the French Revolution brought an interest in science and another base 10 system, the metric system, was born. This system, based on the meter, from the Greek metron, meaning ``measure'', was more scienti®c. Instead of using human anatomy, the meter, as approved by the French National Convention in 1795, was de®ned as 1/10 000 000 of the length of Earth's meridian between the Equator and the North Pole (®gure 1.6). Once the meter was de®ned, a unit of volume, the liter, could be de®ned by cubing a tenth of a meter. From the liter, the kilogram as a unit of mass was derived. Multiples of 10 provided larger units indicated by Greek pre®xes, and for smaller units, Latin pre®xes were used. Due to the consistency and uniformity of the system and the easiness of de®ning new units merely by adding a Greek or a Latin pre®x, the metric system was adopted in Europe in the 19th century. Today, an expanded version of the system, SI units, for Le SysteÁme International d'UniteÂs, is used by 95 percent of the world's population and is the of®cial system in science. In Table 1.1 we list the standard pre®xes used in the SI system. Notice in Table 1.1 that for large and small numbers, it is easier to use scienti®c notation. In the scienti®c notation, numbers are written as a number between 1 and 10 multiplied by a power of 10. The radius of the earth, for example, which is 6380 km, can be written in scienti®c notation as 6:380  103 km. To see why, 14 Physics: The Fundamental Science Table 1.1. Powers of ten pre®xes Value 18 10 ˆ 1 000 000 000 000 000 000 1015 ˆ 1 000 000 000 000 000 1012 ˆ 1 000 000 000 000 109 ˆ 1 000 000 000 106 ˆ 1 000 000 103 ˆ 1000 102 ˆ 100 101 ˆ 10 10ÿ1 ˆ 0:1 10ÿ2 ˆ 0:01 10ÿ3 ˆ 0:001 10ÿ6 ˆ 0.000 001 10ÿ9 ˆ 0.000 000 001 10ÿ12 ˆ 0.000 000 000 001 10ÿ15 ˆ 0.000 000 000 000 001 10ÿ18 ˆ 0.000 000 000 000 000 001 Symbol Pre®x E P T G M k h da d c m m n p f a exa peta tera giga mega kilo hecto deca deci centi milli micro nano pico femto atto note that we can write the number 1000 as follows: 1000 ˆ 10  10  10 ˆ 103 : The radius of the earth is, then, 6380 km ˆ 6:38  1000 km ˆ 6:38  103 km: Fundamental units All mechanical properties can be expressed in terms of three fundamental physical quantities: length, mass, and time. The SI fundamental units are: Quantity Fundamental Unit Symbol Length Mass Time meter kilogram second m kg s The General Conference on Weights and Measures held in Paris in 1983 de®ned the meter as the distance traveled by light through space in 1/299 792 458 seconds. Notice that the unit of length is de®ned with such high precision in terms of the unit of time. This is possible because the second is known to better than 1 part in 10 trillion. The 1967 General Conference on Weights and Measures 15 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS 16 Figure 1.7. Range of masses, lengths and time intervals found in the universe. Physics: The Fundamental Science Figure 1.8. A cesium atomic clock at the National Institute of Standards and Technology in Washington, DC. (Courtesy National Institute of Standards and Technology.) de®ned the second as the duration of 9 192 631 770 periods (durations of one oscillation) of a particular radiation emitted by the cesium atom. The device that permits this measurement is the cesium clock, an instrument of such high precision that it would lose or gain only 3 seconds in one million years (®gure 1.8). The last fundamental mechanical quantity is mass. Mass is a measure of the resistance that an object offers to a change in its condition of motion. For an object at rest with respect to us, mass is a measure of the amount of matter present in the object. The standard unit of mass is the standard kilogram, a solid platinum-iridium cylinder carefully preserved at the Bureau of Weights and Measures in SeÁvres, near Paris. The kilogram is now derived from the meter, which is derived from the second. A copy of the standard kilogram, the Prototype Kilogram No 20, is kept at the National Bureau of Standards in Washington, DC. A high precision balance, especially designed for the National Bureau of Standards, allows the comparison of the masses of other bodies within a few parts in a billion. 17 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS (Cartoon by Sydney Harris.) The mass of an atom cannot be measured by comparison with the standard kilogram with such a high degree of precision. The masses of atoms, however, can be compared with each other with high accuracy. For this reason, the masses of atoms are given in atomic mass units (amu). The mass of carbon in these units has been assigned a value of 12 atomic mass units. In kilograms, an atomic mass unit is 1 amu ˆ 1:660 540 2  10ÿ27 kg: Physics and mathematics Physics and mathematics are closely intertwined. Mathematics is an invention of the human mind inspired by our capacity to deal 18 Physics: The Fundamental Science Frontiers of physics: Very small numbers What does a mass like 1:660 540 2  10ÿ27 kg mean? Suppose that you start with one grain of salt, which has a mass of about one ten-thousandth of a gram and with a very precise cutting instrument you divide it into ten equal parts, take each one of the tenths, divide them into ten new equal parts, and so on. You will not arrive at single electrons this way because, as we shall see in chapters 7 and 8, the electron is one of the several constituents of atoms. Although atoms can be split, you cannot do it with a cutting instrument. Suppose, however, that we divide the grain of salt into the smallest amounts of salt possible, single molecules of salt. One single molecule of table salt has a mass of about 9  10ÿ23 g. Let's round this number up to 10ÿ22 g. If your instrument takes one second, say, to take each piece of salt and divide it into ten equal parts, how long would it take to end up with individual molecules of salt? The answer is 3  1010 years. Astrophysicists estimate that the age of the universe is of the order of 1010 years. It would take our hypothetical instrument roughly the age of the universe to arrive at a single molecule of salt! Grains of salt, magni®ed 100 times. (Courtesy V Cummings, NASA.) with abstract ideas; physics deals with the real material world. Yet, mathematical concepts invented by mathematicians who did not foresee their applications outside the abstract world of mathematics have been applied by physicists to describe natural 19 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Pioneers of physics: Measuring the circumference of the Earth The meter, as we saw, was de®ned in 1795 as 1/10 000 000 of the length of the earth's meridian from the Equator to the North Pole. For that de®nition to make sense, an accurate knowledge of the Earth's dimensions was needed. That is, the actual length of the meridian from the Equator to the North Pole had to be known with good precision. How did we come to know the Earth's dimensions before the advent of twentieth century technology? The dimensions of the Earth have been known since the time of the ancient Greeks. The Greek astronomer Eratosthenes, who lived in the third century BC in Alexandria (Egypt), came up with a very clever method for obtaining the circumference of the Earth. Eratosthenes had heard that in the city of Syene, an ancient city on the Nile, near today's Aswan, on the ®rst day of summer, the sun shone on the bottom of a vertical well at noon. However, in his native Alexandria, the sun's rays did not fall vertically down but at an angle of 78 to the vertical. This angle of 78 was about one-®ftieth of a circle and that meant that the 20 Physics: The Fundamental Science distance between Syene and Alexandria must be one-®ftieth of the earth's circumference. During Eratosthene's time, the distance between these two cities was estimated to be 5000 stadia. So the circumference of the earth was 50 times this distance or 250 000 stadia. Although the exact length of that Greek unit is not known, we do know that the length of a Greek stadium varied between 154 and 215 meters. If we use an average value of 185 m, the result is only about 15% larger than modern measurements, a remarkable achievement. phenomena. ``It is a mystery to me,'' wrote the Nobel Prize winning physicist Sheldon Glashow, ``that the concepts of mathematics (things like the real and complex numbers, the calculus and group theory), which are purely inventions of the human imagination, turn out to be essential for the description of the real world.'' Physicists, on the other hand, have invented powerful mathematical techniques in their search to understand the physical world. Newton developed the calculus to solve the problem of the attraction that the earth exerts on all objects on its surface. Mathematicians later continued the development of calculus into what it is today. Mathematics is then the instrument of physics; the only language in which the nature of the world can be understood. None the less, in this book we are interested in the concepts of physics. These concepts can usually be described with words and examples. In some instances, however, there is no substitute for the elegance and conciseness of a simple formula. In these cases, we shall consider such a formula to see how it explains new concepts and how they can be linked to other concepts already learned. The reader should always keep in mind that our purpose is to understand the physical phenomenon, not the mathematics that describes it. 21 2 THE DESCRIPTION OF MOTION Understanding motion The understanding of motion is fundamental in our comprehension of nature. ``To understand motion is to understand nature,'' wrote Leonardo da Vinci. If we understand how an object moves, we might be able to discover where it has been and predict where it will be some time in the future, provided that the present conditions are maintained. In physics, we are interested in the description of the motion of the different bodies that we observe, such as automobiles, airplanes, basketballs, sound waves, electrons, planets, and stars. To study how objects move, we need to begin by studying how a simple object moves. An object without moving parts, such as a ball or a block, is simpler than one with separate parts because we do not need to worry about the motions of the parts, and we can concentrate on how the object moves as a whole. A ball can roll and a block can slide on a surface. Which one is simpler? It would be easier for us if we did not have to decide beforehand either the shape of the object or its internal structure. Physicists simplify the problem by considering the motion of a point, an ideal object with no size, and therefore no internal structure and no shape. We will consider ®rst the motion of a point. However, in our illustrations and examples we might refer to the motion of real objects, like cars, baseballs, rockets or people. If we do not consider the internal structure of the object, and do not allow it to rotate, this object behaves like a point for our purposes. 25 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Uniform motion ``My purpose is to set forth a very new science dealing with a very ancient subject,'' wrote Galileo in his Two New Sciences. He continued: ``There is, in nature, perhaps nothing older than motion, concerning which the books written by philosophers are neither few nor small; nevertheless I have discovered by experiment some properties of it which are worth knowing and which have not hitherto been either observed or demonstrated.'' Galileo, one of the ®rst modern scientists and the ®rst one to understand the nature of motion, was born in Pisa the same year that Shakespeare was born in England and three days before Michelangelo died. The year was 1564. His full name was Galileo Galilei, following a Tuscan custom of using a variation of the family name as the ®rst name of the eldest son. His father, a renowned musician, wanted his son to be a physician, a far more lucrative profession in those days. Thus, he entered the University of Pisa to study medicine. Upon hearing a lecture on geometry which encouraged him to study the work of Archimedes, the young medical student decided that science and mathematics seemed far more interesting than medicine. Galileo talked to his father about letting him switch. Fortunately for the world his father consented. Galileo became well known throughout Italy for his scienti®c ability and at the age of 26 was appointed Professor of Mathematics at the University of Pisa. There he dug deeply into fundamental science. He also made some enemies, especially among the older and more respected professors, who did not like their opinions and views challenged by the young and tactless Galileo. Partly because of this, and partly because the Republic of Venice was, in 1600, the hub of the Mediterranean, which in turn was the center of the world, Galileo accepted a position as Professor of Mathematics at Padua, where he began the work in astronomy that was to bring him immortal fame. Galileo's work on mechanics was published as Discourses and Mathematical Demonstrations Concerning Two New Sciences Pertaining to Mechanics and Local Motion, which appeared in 1638. In the chapter ``De Motu Locali'' or ``Change of Position'', he writes: The discussion is divided into three parts; the ®rst part deals with motion which is steady or uniform; the second treats of motion as 26 The Description of Motion Figure 2.1. Several positions of a runner running along a straight track. we ®nd it accelerated in nature; the third deals with the so-called violent motions and with projectiles. Galileo then goes on to explain what ``motion which is steady or uniform'' is: By steady or uniform motion, I mean one in which the distances traversed by the moving particle during any equal interval of time, are themselves equal. Figure 2.1 is an example of uniform motion; it shows several positions of an athlete running along a straight 100-m track at a steady pace. The marks alongside the track show that the runner moves equal distances of 10 meters in equal intervals of 6 seconds. Average speed The runner in ®gure 2.1 travels 10 meters in six seconds or 100 meters in 60 seconds (1 minute). We can say that the runner travels at 100 meters per minute. Average speed is de®ned as the total distance traveled divided by the time taken to travel this distance. If we use the letter d to indicate distance, and the letter t to indicate time, we can write the average speed, v, as  vˆ distance traveled d ˆ time taken t 27 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 2.2. Multiple-exposure photograph of a disk of ``dry ice'' moving on a smooth surface. (Illustration from PROJECT PHYSICS, copyright # 1981 by Holt, Rinehart and Winston, Inc. Reprinted by permission of the publisher.) where the bar above the letter v is used to indicate that this is the average value. The runner of our example travels a distance of 100 meters in one minute. The average speed of the runner, then, is  vˆ d 100 m ˆ ˆ 100 m=min: t 1 min Figure 2.2 shows a multiple-exposure photograph of a disk of solid carbon dioxide (``dry ice'') in uniform motion. The disk, resting on the polished surface of a table, is given a gentle push. With the room darkened, the shutter of a camera set on a tripod is kept open while at equal intervals of time a strobe is ®red. Since the only source of light comes from the strobe ± which for this experiment was ®red at 0.10 second intervals ± the ®lm records the position of the disk as it slides on the table. The meter rule shows that the disk moves 13 cm between ¯ashes. The disk, then, traverses equal distances of 13 cm in equal intervals of 0.10 s or 130 centimeters in 1.0 second. We can say that the disk travels at an average speed v ˆ 130 centimeters per second. The units of speed are units of distance divided by units of time. Speed can thus be given in miles per hour, kilometers per hour, meters per second, feet per minute, etc. The SI unit of speed is the meter per second (m/s). In both of those cases, the speed did not change. The runner and the disk were moving at a uniform or constant speed, at least for the intervals that were considered. However, few motions are uniform. The most common situation is that of variable speed. If you drive from your dorm to the movies, you start from rest, speed up to 30 miles per hour and probably drive at that speed 28 The Description of Motion The frontiers of physics: Friction The disk of ``dry ice'' shown in the multiple-exposure photograph of ®gure 2.2 moves equal distances in equal times because friction between the puck and the smooth surface is negligible. When two surfaces rub together, the atoms that make up the two surfaces interact in ways that depend on the atomic composition of the substances, making them stick to each other. Although the general mechanism is well understood, the details of how friction appears are only now beginning to become clear. Recently, scientists at Georgia Institute of Technology used an atomic force microscope, which measures the forces between two objects separated by less than 10 nanometers, to examine the tip of a tiny nickel probe moving on a gold surface. Friction seen at the atomic level between a nickel tip and a gold surface. (Scienti®c American.) When the nickel tip was pulled back slightly after it had made contact with the surface, a connective ``neck'' of atoms developed between the two surfaces, a sort of bridge at the atomic scale. After the tip was pulled far enough, the neck snapped, leaving the tip covered with gold atoms. Why would gold atoms move over to the nickel tip instead of the other way around? Gold, it turns out, requires less energy to have one of its surface atoms removed than nickel. The researchers believe that these differences in energy account for the differences in friction between different substances. 29 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS for a few minutes until you have to slow down to make a turn or come to a stop at a traf®c light. The speed at which you drive changes many times throughout your trip. We can obtain the average speed of the motion by dividing the total distance traveled by the time it took to cover that distance. Let's consider a numerical example. A boy takes 15 minutes to ride his bicycle to his friend's house, which is 2 km away. He talks to his friend for 20 minutes and then continues towards his grandparent's home, 4 additional km. He arrives there 25 minutes after leaving his friend's house. Since the total distance traveled is 6 km (2 km to the friend's house and 4 to the grandparent's home) and it took the boy a total of 60 minutes to get there, the average speed is  vˆ d 6 km ˆ ˆ 6 km=h: t 60 min Notice that we have included the time the boy spends at his friend's house in our calculation of the total time taken for the trip. Instantaneous speed Average speed is useful information. When we are traveling, we can calculate the average speed for a section of the trip and use it to estimate how long it will take us to complete the trip, provided we continue driving under similar conditions. However, in some cases, we might be interested in obtaining more information. It would take you about 8 hours to drive from Washington, DC to Charlotte, North Carolina, a distance of 400 miles. Although the average speed in this case is 50 mph, you know that at times you would drive at a higher speed, whereas heavy traf®c or lower speed limits through certain parts would force you to drive at a lower speed. Knowing that you can average 50 mph for this trip does not provide information about how fast you actually traveled or whether you stopped at all along the way. The instantaneous speed, when we can obtain it, will give us information about the detail of the trip. Instantaneous speed is the speed given by a car's speedometer, the speed at a given instant. If your car speedometer fails before you complete a 60-mile trip that usually takes you one hour, you cannot be sure that 30 The Description of Motion you did not break the 65 mph speed limit at any time during your trip even if it still took you one hour to arrive at your destination. However, if you time yourself between successive mile posts and it takes you about one minute to travel one mile, you know that you are maintaining a speed close to 60 mph. To measure your speed more accurately you would need to reduce the time intervals to one second, perhaps ± during which you would travel only about 90 feet ± or, with precision equipment, even to 1/10 second. Yet, this very small interval of time would still not give you the instantaneous speed. You would need to reduce that interval to an instant. Modern instrumentation allows measurements of the speed of an object at intervals small enough to provide us with excellent approximations to the instantaneous speed. Mathematically, it is possible to obtain the exact value of the instantaneous speed by the use of calculus, a mathematical technique developed over 300 years ago by Isaac Newton. Velocity: Speed and direction In some cases the direction in which we are moving is also important information. A pilot needs to know how fast the wind is blowing and in what direction. The pilot needs to know the wind velocity. Velocity gives the speed and the direction of motion. The wind velocity of a 50-mph wind blowing east would push off course a small airplane heading north at 80 mph. If the pilot did not correct the airplane's heading it would end up ¯ying in a northeasterly direction. Velocity, and other quantities that require a magnitude and a direction, are called vector quantities. In the next section we shall study some properties of these new quantities. Quantities that do not require a direction are said to be scalar quantities. Speed is a scalar quantity. Vectors As we have said, vector quantities are those that possess both magnitude and a direction. We represent vectors as arrows 31 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS with length proportional to the magnitude and with a direction indicating the direction of the vector quantity. We use bold face letters, (v, V) to completely represent vectors and standard letters (v, V) to indicate their magnitudes. To illustrate some properties of vectors, let's consider the following situation. A man wants to buy a paperback he has heard about recently. He walks 3 km east to his friend's house and then both walk together to the nearest drugstore, 4 km from his friend's house and in the same direction (®gure 2.3(a)). Figure 2.3. (a) A man walks 3 km to his friend's house and then 4 km to the drugstore. The man is 7 km away from home. If instead he walks 4 km from the friend's house to the library, the man is only 5 km from home. (b) The two individual trips of 3 and 4 km are equal to a single trip of 7 km. (c) Walking east 3 km (labeled with vector a) and then north 4 km (vector b) is equivalent to walking across in the direction shown by vector c. 32 The Description of Motion Obviously, the total distance traveled by the man is 7 km. Since the two trips take place in the same direction, the man ®nds himself 7 km away from home. Graphically, we can illustrate this situation as in ®gure 2.3(b). Let's suppose now that the man wants to borrow the book from the local library instead of buying it at the drugstore (®gure 2.3(a)). If the library is also 4 km from his friend's house, but north instead of east, as illustrated in ®gure 2.3(b), the man is now only 5 km fromphome. Using Pythagoras's Theorem we get a displacement of 42 ‡ 32 †km ˆ 5 km. If he had wanted, he could have cut across the ®eld straight from his home to the library, walking only the 5 km. If vector a represents the 3-km walk east, and b the 4-km walk north, vector c represents the straight walk across the ®eld from the house to the library. Vector c is equivalent to the two vectors a and b together. In other words, walking east for 3 km to the friend's house and then north for 4 km to the library is the same as walking 5 km across the ®eld from the house to the library. We call vector c the resultant of vectors a and b and the process addition of vectors. An alternative method, the so-called parallelogram method for the addition of vectors, consists of placing the vectors to be added ``tail-to-tail'' instead of ``head-to-tail,'' keeping their orientations ®xed. The resultant is obtained by completing the diagonal of the parallelogram. In ®gure 2.4 we illustrate the addition of a Figure 2.4. Addition of two vectors using the parallelogram method. 33 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS horizontal vector a and a vertical vector b, producing a resultant vector c. (In this case the parallelogram is a rectangle.) Just as horizontal vector a and vertical vector b can be combined to form the resultant vector c, any vector can be viewed as the resultant of two vectors that are perpendicular to each other. These new vectors are called the components of the original vector. Acceleration ``The properties belonging to uniform motion have been discussed in the preceding section; but accelerated motion remains to be considered,'' wrote Galileo in the chapter ``De Motu Locali'' of his Two New Sciences, where he had discussed his discoveries on uniform motion. He continued: And ®rst of all it seems desirable to ®nd and explain a de®nition best ®tting natural phenomena. This we readily understand when we consider the intimate relationship between time and motion . . . We can illustrate this relationship between time and motion with the following situation. Laurie and her friend Matthew are discussing the responsiveness of Laurie's recent investment: a nice used car she bought with the money she earned last summer. Laurie says the dealer assured her that the car can make 0 to 50 miles per hour in less that 10 seconds. Matthew does not think that a three-year-old subcompact can do that and suspects that the speedometer might have been altered. To settle the argument Laurie asks Matthew to ride with her while she accelerates and to record the speed of the car every second. Because this is dif®cult to do, they also convince ten of their friends to line up at regular intervals along a straight and ¯at section of an infrequently traveled road, to time the car as Laurie starts accelerating from rest. The ten friends are separated by intervals of 10 meters each and start their digital timers as soon as Laurie steps on the gas pedal. Laurie and Matthew collect their friends' data and tabulate it as follows: x (m) t (s) 0 0 10 3.2 20 4.4 30 5.5 40 6.3 50 7.1 34 60 7.7 70 8.4 80 8.9 90 9.5 100 10 The Description of Motion Since the car is accelerating, the speed is not constant. This can be seen by studying the data. Laurie covers the ®rst 10 meters in 3.2 seconds, but takes only 1.2 seconds to cover the second interval of 10 meters. The last 10 meters are traveled in half a second! According to the car's speedometer, Laurie was traveling at 45 miles per hour at the end of the 10 seconds. To check this, Laurie calculates the average speed during the last interval, which is equal to the 10 meters traveled (100 m ÿ 90 m) divided by the 0.5 seconds it took, or  vˆ 10 m ˆ 20 m=s 0:5 s or 45 miles per hour, con®rming Matthew's data, and assuring Laurie that the speedometer had not been tampered with. Since 45 miles per hour is the average speed during the last 10 meters, the actual speed at the 100-m mark is slightly higher (48 mph in this case). However, since this was only one trial, Laurie is satis®ed that the 0 to 50 in about 10 seconds may be possible. When we say that the car makes ``0 to 50 in 10 seconds'' we obviously mean that the car accelerates from rest to 50 miles per hour in 10 seconds. Or in the case of Laurie's car, 45 miles per hour in ten seconds. Acceleration is the rate at which velocity changes and is given in units of distance per time squared (miles per hour per second, for example). Thus, average acceleration is given by  aˆ
v t where
v is the change in velocity that takes place during the time interval t. (The Greek capital delta is used in this fashion to indicate change in some quantity, here the change in velocity.) The SI unit for acceleration is the meter per second squared (m=s2 ). Since velocity is a vector quantity, acceleration is also a vector quantity. Uniformly accelerated motion In the previous example, the acceleration of the car is constant. In other words, the velocity increased at a constant rate. In the Two 35 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS New Sciences Galileo called motion with constant acceleration uniformly accelerated motion. He wrote: [F]or just as uniformity of motion is de®ned by and conceived through equal times and equal spaces (thus we call a motion uniform when equal distances are traversed during equal time intervals), so we may, in a similar manner, through equal time-intervals, conceive additions of speed as taking place without complication . . . Hence the de®nition of [uniformly accelerated] motion . . . may be stated as follows: A motion is said to be uniformly accelerated when, starting from rest, it acquires during equal time-intervals, equal increments of speed. Uniformly accelerated motion is a special case of accelerated motion, since acceleration does not have to be always constant. Here we shall consider only this special case. When the acceleration is constant, a ˆ a. Thus, we can write, a ˆ a ˆ
v : t Let's consider a numerical example. A driver enters a straight highway at 30 km/h and accelerates to 55 km/h in 5 seconds. What is the acceleration? Calling the initial and ®nal velocities vi and vf , respectively, we can calculate the change in velocity is
v ˆ vf ÿ vi ˆ 55 km/h ÿ 30 km/h ˆ 25 km/h. The driver accelerates at aˆ
v 25 km=h ˆ ˆ 5 km=h=s: t 5s That is, the driver speeds up at a rate of 5 km/h every second. If we know the acceleration of an object moving with uniformly accelerated motion and are interested in calculating the change in the velocity
v after certain time t, we can turn our equation around to obtain
v ˆ at: We can use this equation to compute, for example, the takeoff speed of a jet airplane. Suppose an airliner increases its speed by 10 km=h every second; that is, its takeoff acceleration is 10 km=h=s. If the plane takes off 36 seconds after it ®rst began 36 The Description of Motion accelerating, the takeoff speed can be obtained from the previous equation by realizing that the change in speed during these 36 seconds is simply the takeoff speed, v, since the initial speed is 0. The takeoff speed of a jet airliner is then,   10 km=h v ˆ at ˆ 36 s† ˆ 360 km=h: s Falling bodies One important example of uniformly accelerated motion is the vertical motion of an object falling. The acceleration, g, is caused by the gravitational attraction of the earth upon the object. The magnitude of g at the earth's surface is 9.8 m/s2 . This value varies slightly with altitude and latitude and with the different geological features near the earth's surface. In the following chapter we shall see how Galileo ®rst calculated this value. Here we merely use the fact that, neglecting air resistance, all objects near the surface of the earth fall with an acceleration g ˆ 9:8 m/s2 as an example of motion with constant acceleration. Since for this case, a ˆ g, the last equation should be written as
v ˆ gt: A common situation is the fall of an object from rest. In this case, in a certain time t, the velocity changes from zero to the value of the instantaneous velocity, v. The change in velocity after a time t is the instantaneous velocity, and we can write v ˆ gt: Thus, after one second, the stone that the boy in ®gure 2.5 drops from a bridge is moving with a velocity of v ˆ 9:8 m=s2  1 s ˆ 9.8 m/s towards the water. After 5 seconds, the velocity has increased to v ˆ 9:8 m=s2  5 s ˆ 49 m/s. In Table 2.1, we show the instantaneous speed of an object falling at intervals of one second. Table 2.1 illustrates Galileo's de®nition of uniformly accelerated motion as that which acquires equal increments of speed during equal time intervals. We see that for each time interval of 1 second, the speed increases by 9.8 m/s. This result is in agreement with our commonsense idea of acceleration. When we say 37 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 2.5. After a time t the instantaneous velocity of the stone that the boy drops from the bridge is v ˆ gt. Table 2.1. Instantaneous speed of an object falling from rest. Time of Fall (s) Velocity (m/s) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 9.8 19.6 29.4 39.2 49 58.8 68.6 78.4 88.2 98 38 The Description of Motion Pioneers of physics: Galileo's method Galileo arrived at the expression for computing the distance traveled by a falling object guided by his desire to ®nd quantities that he could measure directly. A motion is uniformly accelerated (he had written) when, starting from rest, it acquires equal increments of speed during equal time intervals. Measuring increments of speed at equal time intervals for a falling object was not practicable with the rudimentary clocks that were available to him. Galileo had discovered, however, that an object falling from rest increases its speed uniformly from an initial value of 0 to a ®nal value vfinal . He realized that for a quantity that changes uniformly, the average value is halfway between the initial and ®nal values. Since the initial value of the speed of an object falling from rest is zero, the average value of the speed is then 12 vfinal (halfway between 0 and vfinal ). Using the de®nition of average speed, vav ˆ d=t, one can obtain the distance d traveled in terms of the average speed and the time; that is d ˆ vav  t. Thus, the distance traveled by an object moving with an average speed 12 vfinal is d ˆ 12 vfinal  t: Galileo could not test this expression directly either, since he would have had to measure the speed of the falling object just before it hit the ground, a task that is dif®cult even today. The ®nal speed of an object falling from rest is, as we saw above, vfinal ˆ gt. This expression for vfinal can be substituted into the expression for the distance d: d ˆ 12 gt  t ˆ 12 gt2 : This is the expression that Galileo was seeking. It relates the total distance that the object falls from rest to the total time, quantities that were easier to measure. The timing devices that Galileo had at his disposal, however, only allowed him to test this expression in an indirect way. 39 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS that an object is accelerating, we seem to imply that the longer the elapsed time, the faster it goes. However, we could also imply that the farther the object goes, the faster it goes. In fact, Galileo wrote that at one time he thought it would be more useful to de®ne uniform acceleration in terms of the increase in speed and distance traveled. We already know how to compute the change in speed with time elapsed. How do we ®nd the distance traveled as the speed increases? Galileo, guided by a need to ®nd an expression that he could test with the limited instruments of his time, was able to show from the de®nitions of average speed and acceleration that the distance traveled by a falling object that starts from rest is d ˆ 12 gt2 : Notice that since the acceleration due to gravity, g, is constant, the distance traveled is proportional to the square of the time elapsed. The stone that the boy in ®gure 2.5 drops moves 4.9 m in the ®rst second. In two seconds, twice the time, it moves four times the distance, or 19.6 meters; and in three seconds it moves nine times as far, or 44 meters. The motion of projectiles The third and last part in which Galileo divided his study of motion is the motion of projectiles. ``I now propose to set forth those properties which belong to a body whose motion is compounded of two other motions, namely, one uniform and one naturally accelerated. This is the kind of motion seen in a moving projectile.'' Galileo further explains: Imagine any particle projected along a horizontal plane without friction; then we know, from what has been more fully explained in the preceding pages, that this particle will move along this same plane with a motion which is uniform and perpetual, provided the plane has no limits. But if the plane is limited and elevated, then the moving particle, which we imagine to be a heavy one, will on passing over the edge of the plane, acquire, in addition to its previous uniform motion, a downward propensity due to its own weight; so that the resulting motion, which I call projection, is compounded of one which is uniform and horizontal and of another which is vertical and naturally accelerated. 40 The Description of Motion Figure 2.6. Stroboscopic photograph of two balls released simultaneously from the same height. One of the balls is given an initial horizontal velocity and moves off to the side as it falls. The horizontal lines in the photograph helps us see that both balls hit the ground simultaneously. (From PSSC Physics Seventh Edition, by Haber-Schaim, Dodge, Gardner, and Shore. Published by Kendall/Hunt Publishing Company, 1991.) The strobe photograph in ®gure 2.6 illustrates Galileo's experiment. Two balls were released simultaneously from the same height. One ball was simply dropped while the other was thrown horizontally. The equally spaced horizontal lines in the photograph show us that both balls keep pace as they fall, accelerating toward the ground at the same rate. This acceleration is the acceleration due to gravity, g. The initial horizontal velocity 41 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS given to one of the balls does not affect its vertical motion. Careful examination of the photograph tells us that the horizontal distance between positions of the ball that was given an initial horizontal velocity are all equal. The horizontal component of the motion is uniform motion with a constant horizontal velocity component. Therefore, the vertical motion of the ball does not affect its horizontal motion. The independence of horizontal and vertical motions allows us to predict the position and velocity of projectiles at any time during their ¯ight merely by applying what we have learned about motion to the two independent components. The horizontal motion is uniform, at a constant speed vX , and the vertical motion is uniformly accelerated motion, with a constant acceleration g. 42 3 THE LAWS OF MECHANICS: NEWTON'S LAWS OF MOTION The concept of force Central to the laws of mechanics is the concept of force. Our idea of force is closely related to muscular activity. When we push or pull on an object, we exert a force on it (®gure 3.1). When we push a lawn mower across a yard, pull a hand truck loaded Figure 3.1. The mother pushing the stroller exerts a force on it. There are other forces in nature. 43 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS with boxes, push against the arms of a chair to get up from it or when we turn the ignition key with our index ®nger and thumb to get the car started we are applying a force. These forces associated with muscular activity are not the only ones that exist in nature. When you bring a small magnet near a nail, a magnetic force pulls the nail towards the magnet; and a gravitational force keeps the moon orbiting around the earth and the earth around the sun, and keeps us attached to the ground. The concept of force is directly involved in the formulation of the laws of motion. The discovery of these laws marks the birth of our modern understanding of the universe. The ancient idea of motion We all know today that, neglecting the very small effect of air resistance, an object falling towards the ground experiences a constant acceleration caused by the gravitational attraction of the earth upon the object, and that all falling objects experience this acceleration. This was not known before the early 1600s. Until then, it was believed that heavier objects would fall towards the ground faster than lighter ones. This idea was based on the teachings of Aristotle, the greatest scienti®c authority of antiquity. Born in the Greek province of Macedonia in the year 384 BC, Aristotle was raised by a friend of the family, having lost both parents while still a child. At the age of seventeen he went to Athens for his advanced education and later joined Plato's Academy, becoming ``the intelligence of the school,'' as Plato himself called him. It was in Athens, many years later, that Aristotle founded the Lyceum, a school so named because it was near the temple to Apollo, also known as Lykaios or Lyceius (apparently because he protected the ¯ocks from wolves (lykoi)). This was the famous ``peripatetic (walk about) school'' where Aristotle would sometimes lecture while strolling in the school's garden. Aristotle's lectures were collected in some 150 volumes, of which only about 50 have survived. Aristotle's writings remained largely forgotten until the thirteenth century AD. Throughout the Middle Ages, Aristotle became one of the most important in¯uences and perhaps the greatest philosopher. 44 The Laws of Mechanics: Newton's Laws of Motion According to Aristotle, there was a sharp distinction between heaven and earth, with different sets of natural laws for each region. The boundary between these two regions was the sphere of the moon, above which all motion was perpetual, circular, and uniform. This was the region of no-change, the home of the ñther, where things were eternal and unchanging. In contrast, in the region below the sphere of the moon, all motion was along straight lines. Things constantly changed due to the interplay between hot and cold, dry and moist. The four combinations of these opposites produced the four ``elements'': Earth, Water, Air, and Fire. These four elements had their own natural place, and motion was an attempt to reach that place. Since the earth was at the center, an object composed mostly of earth, like a rock, would fall towards the ground, its natural place. Thus, the fall of an object towards the earth is an example of natural motion. Moreover, since a heavy object contains more earth than a light one, it could have a stronger tendency to fall towards its natural place. According to Aristotle, heavier objects fall faster than lighter objects. It took nineteen centuries and the genius of Galileo for this error to be corrected. The birth of modern science In his Two New Sciences, Galileo presents his theories in the form of a dialog among three people: Simplicio, who represents the views of Aristotle, Salviati, who represents Galileo, and Sagredo, who represents the intelligent layman. At one point, after discussing whether Aristotle had ever tested by experiment if a heavier stone would fall to the ground faster than a lighter stone, Simplicio and Salviati continue: Salviati [Galileo]: If then we take two bodies whose natural speeds are different, it is clear that on uniting the two, the more rapid one will be partly retarded by the slower, and the slower will be somewhat hastened by the swifter. Do you not agree with me in this opinion? Simplicio [Aristotle]: You are unquestionably right. Salviati [Galileo]: But if this is true, and if a large stone moves with a speed of, say, eight, while a smaller moves with a speed of four, then when they are united, the system will move with a speed less than 45 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS eight; but the two stones when tied together make a stone larger than that which before moved with a speed of eight. Hence the heavier body moves with less speed than the lighter one; an effect which is contrary to your supposition. Thus you see now, from your assumption that the heavier body moves more rapidly than the lighter one, I infer that the heavier body moves more slowly. Simplicio [Aristotle]: I am all at sea. . . This is, indeed, quite beyond my comprehension. . . Galileo had actually proved theoretically in 1604 that falling bodies are accelerated towards the ground at a constant rate. An object falling to the ground experiences what came to be known as uniformly accelerated motion. In fact, Galileo actually de®ned uniform acceleration in terms of the behavior of falling bodies. However, with the clocks and instruments available to him at the time, he could not directly test whether his theoretical predictions were correct. The legend that he dropped weights from the leaning tower of Pisa is very likely false. Galileo realized that there was an indirect way of testing his theory. If an object is falling to the ground at a slower rate, as when a ball rolls down a smooth inclined plane, it can be timed Figure 3.2. Picture painted in 1841 by G Bezzuoli. Galileo (the tall man in the center, pointing with his right hand at the open book) demonstrates one of his experiments with the ball rolling down an inclined plane. Changing the angle of inclination of the plane allowed Galileo to infer that when the angle was 908 (vertical plane) the acceleration of the ball was also constant. He could not perform this last experiment because he lacked a timing device accurate enough to time the rapidly falling ball. (Alinari/Art Resource, NY.) 46 The Laws of Mechanics: Newton's Laws of Motion with good accuracy. Galileo actually constructed such a plane and left detailed notes on his experiment. In the Two New Sciences it is Salviati who describes in great detail how the hundreds of experiments were performed. By changing the angle of inclination and determining the acceleration of the ball as it rolled down, Galileo was able to infer that in the limiting case, when the angle was 908, the acceleration, having been constant for all the other angles, had to be constant too. And 908 was, of course, free fall. Thus, we see how Galileo not only was able to argue against the Aristotelian approach with his mathematical rationalism, but in the process he established the modern scienti®c method from observation to hypothesis. From the mathematical analysis of Pioneers of physics: Galileo's dialog with Aristotle Simplicio: Your discussion is really admirable; yet I do not ®nd it easy to believe that a bird-shot falls as swiftly as a cannon ball. Salviati: Why not say a grain of sand as rapidly as a grindstone? But Simplicio, I trust you will not follow the example of many others who divert the discussion from its main intent and fasten upon some statement of mine which lacks a hair's-breath of truth and, under this hair, hide the fault of another which is as big as a ship's cable. Aristotle says that ``an iron ball of one hundred pounds falling from a height of one hundred cubits reaches the ground before a one-pound ball has fallen a single cubit.'' I say that they arrive at the same time. You ®nd, on making the experiment, that the larger outstrips the smaller by two ®nger-breaths; now you would not hide behind these two ®ngers the ninety-nine cubits of Aristotle, nor would you mention my small error and at the same time pass over in silence his very large one. Galileo Galilei, Dialogs Concerning Two New Sciences, 1638, translated by Henry Crew and Alfonso de Savio (Macmillan, New York, 1914; reprinted by Dover, New York), pp. 64±65. 47 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS the hypothesis, predictions are drawn, and these can in turn be tested by experimental observation. Galileo was aware of his having founded the experimental method. In the Two New Sciences, he writes: Salviati: . . . we may say the door is now open, for the ®rst time, to a new method fraught with numerous and wonderful results which in future years will command the attention of other minds. Galileo formulates the Law of Inertia In one of Galileo's experiments, he drops two balls, ``one, say, of lead, the other of oak, both descending from a height of 150 or 200 braccia [yards].'' ``Experience shows us,'' writes Galileo in The Two New Sciences, ``that [the] two balls . . . arrive at the earth with very little difference in speed.'' Galileo shows that the opposition presented by the air when the object is moving with great speed is not much larger than when the object is moving at a lower speed. He further explains: As to speed, the greater this is, the greater will be the opposition made to it by the air, which will also impede bodies the more, the less heavy they are. Thus the falling heavy thing ought to go on accelerating in the squared ratio of the duration of its motion; yet, however heavy the movable might be, when it falls through very great heights the impediment of the air will take away the power of increasing its speed further, and will reduce it to uniform and equable motion. And this equilibration will occur more quickly and at lesser heights as the movable shall be less heavy. Galileo af®rms here that a body falling through a great distance will be slowed down by increasing air resistance until this resistance equals the weight of the falling object. At this moment, the object is prevented from any increase in its speed and will continue falling with a constant velocity due to the cancellation of the forces acting on the object. This is contrary to the Aristotelian idea that to keep an object in motion you would need to supply a force, and that if the motive force is balanced by the resistance, the speed becomes zero. Thus, according to Galileo, an object moving at constant speed along a straight line will continue to do so in spite of the fact that it has lost all contact with the 48 The Laws of Mechanics: Newton's Laws of Motion Figure 3.3. An ice skater moving on perfectly smooth ice at a constant speed along a straight line would not slow down. Air resistance and some friction (since even Olympic ice rinks are not perfectly smooth) actually slows down the ice skater. source of that motion. This can be interpreted as the tendency of a body to resist any change in its state of motion, a property that Newton would later call inertia. In its Two New Sciences, Galileo writes: I mentally conceive of some movable projected on a horizontal plane, all impediments being put aside. Now it is evident from what has been said elsewhere at greater length that equable [uniform] motion on this plane would be perpetual if the plane were of in®nite extent. Galileo arrived at this important conclusion in a very clever way. ``Let us suppose,'' he wrote, ``that the descent [of a body] has been made along the downward sloping plane AB, from, which the body is de¯ected so as to continue its motion along the upward sloping plane BC.'' In the same way that a pendulum bob reaches nearly the same height from where it was released after one swing, the rolling body in Galileo's experiment reaches the same height when rolling upwards on plane BC. ``And this is true whether the inclinations of the planes are the same or different, as in the case of the planes AB and BD.'' Thus, if the 49 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 3.4. Galileo's clever design to prove that, neglecting friction, an object moving along a horizontal plane will continue moving forever at a constant velocity. inclination of the plane on the right in ®gure 3.4 is changed from C to D to E, the body must roll farther in each case to reach the same height. When the second plane is horizontal, the rolling body never reaches its original height and must ``maintain a uniform velocity equal to that which it had acquired at B after fall from A.'' There is still some disagreement among historians of science as to whether Galileo believed that a plane of ``in®nite extent'' could actually exist and some historians interpret Galileo's phrase ``rolling on forever'' as meaning ``staying at a constant height above the earth'' and not moving along a straight line through space. It is, however, evident that he saw that a body could have a uniform, nonaccelerated, constant velocity, and that Isaac Newton would use Galileo's ideas in the formulation of his laws of motion. Physics in our world: The Leaning Tower of Pisa The leaning Tower of Pisa tilts today at an angle of 321 minutes of arc, making the top of the tower 5.227 meters offcenter. The extent of this lean places a very large stress on the southern wall of the tower and might actually cause it to collapse. The leaning tower has only been straight for a short period during its 800-year history. Right after its construction in the twelfth century it tilted north. It straightened up a few 50 The Laws of Mechanics: Newton's Laws of Motion years later and stood nearly upright for almost a century, only to start tilting at an alarming rate in a southward direction during the early part of the 14th century. During the early 1600s, when Galileo lived in Pisa, the tower had already leaned over 180 minutes of arc. Construction of the tower began in 1173 in the Piazza dei Miracoli. The tower or campanile formed part of a grandiose and spectacular cathedral and baptistery built in white marble in a blend of Romanesque and Gothic styles. The soil under the piazza is composed of several layers of clay and sand. The area under the entire square has been sinking slowly and unevenly, with a few places where the soil is sinking faster than in the rest of the area. One of these places lies exactly below the tower. Since 1911, when regular monitoring of the tower began, the top of the tower has moved about 1.2 mm per year. Although several efforts to stop the tilting have been undertaken, none has succeeded. In 1990, the Italian government formed an international commission of experts to study methods to stabilize the tower. In 1992, the ®rst level of the tower was strapped with steel bands to prevent the walls from breaking. In 1993 the commission proposed placing 750 tons of lead bricks on the northern side of the concrete ring that encircles the tower. These counterweights not only stopped the rate of the incline for nine months, but actually straightened it about 2.5 cm. In 1995, the lead bricks were replaced by a second ring anchored with steel cables to one of the deep clay layers. Attempts at consolidating the layers of clay under the tower are underway. One technique involves extracting small quantities of water from the clay under the north side of the tower so that the drier clay compresses slightly, thus sinking the northern side of the tower. Other techniques under consideration involve extracting small amounts of clay from the northern side to accomplish similar results. 51 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Newton's First Law: Law of inertia Isaac Newton was born in Woolsthorpe, in the county of Lincolnshire, on Christmas Day 1642, the same year that Galileo died. His father, Isaac, had died 3 months before he was born. Of his early education little is known, except that he attended two small schools in villages near Woolsthorpe. At the age of twelve, Newton enrolled in King's School at Grantham, a few miles north of Woolsthorpe, where his intellectual interests were awakened. He began building ingenious mechanical toys and clocks and became interested in space and time and in the motion of objects. In 1660, Newton entered Trinity College and ®ve years later he took his Bachelor of Arts degree. That year the great plague broke out in London, and Newton went to his mother's farm in Woolsthorpe when the university closed in June 1665. He did not return to Cambridge until April 22, 1667. During the two years that Newton remained at his mother's farm, his mathematical genius ¯ourished, and his studies reached a climax in October 1666. This period of creativity is usually known as the annus mirabilis, the year of wonders, telescoped for commemorative purposes into the single year of 1666. During that period he performed experiments to investigate the nature of light, completing his theory of colors in the winter of 1666. He began his observations of comets, tracking them for nights on end until he fell ill from exhaustion, as he told his biographer. During that same period, Newton developed the main ideas of what he called his theory of ¯uxions, which we know today as calculus. It was also during that glorious period of creativity that Newton laid the foundations of his celestial mechanics with his discovery of the law of gravity. ``All this was in the two plague years of 1665 &1666,'' Newton wrote, ``for in those days I was in the prime of my age for invention, & minded Mathematics & Philosophy [i.e. physics] more than at any time since.'' It is not clear why Newton, after having conceived the idea of universal gravitation, did not attempt to publish anything about  The Gregorian calendar was not in use in England at the time. On the Continent, however, where the Gregorian calendar had been in use since 1582, Newton's date of birth was ten days later: January 4, 1643. In addition, in England, which used the Old Style calendar, the new year started on March 25 rather than on January 1. 52 The Laws of Mechanics: Newton's Laws of Motion Figure 3.5. The physics of the Principia still guides our space vehicles. (Courtesy NASA.) it for almost twenty years. When he ®nally did, at the instigation of one of his closest friends, the scientist Edmond Halley, he published what many consider the greatest scienti®c treatise ever written, the Philosophiae Naturalis Principia Mathematica. The physics of the Principia still guides our communication satellites, our space shuttles, and the spacecraft that we send to study the solar system (®gure 3.5). The Principia is divided into three books or parts. In Book One, The Motion of Bodies, Newton develops the physics of moving bodies. This ®rst part is preceded by ``axioms, or laws of motion'': LAW I: EVERY BODY CONTINUES IN ITS STATE OF REST, OR OF UNIFORM MOTION IN A RIGHT LINE, UNLESS IT IS COMPELLED TO CHANGE THAT STATE BY FORCES IMPRESSED UPON IT. ''Projectiles continue in their motions,'' explained Newton after stating his ®rst law, ``so far as they are not retarded by the resistance of the air, or impelled downwards by the force of gravity.'' Therefore, as long as there are no forces pushing or pulling on an object, it will not change its state of motion. This state of motion 53 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS could be the absence of motion in relation to an observer, that is, a body at rest. Newton is stating very clearly in his ®rst law what Galileo hinted at, that an object moving along a straight line with a constant velocity (uniform motion) will continue moving along that line with the same velocity unless a force is applied to the object so as to change its velocity. Physics in our world: Car seat belt A car seat belt moves freely when it is pulled and locks when the car suddenly stops. The mechanism that makes a seat belt work is based on the concept of inertia. The belt wraps around a belt shaft. Attached to the shaft, a toothed plate rotates freely during normal operation. When the car suddenly stops, however, the heavier end of an elongated clutch moves forward because of its inertia, engaging the toothed plate with its own inner teeth. The clutch itself is prevented from rotating further by a small pawl which engages and locks a ratchet, also attached to the belt shaft. The pawl is attached ®rmly to the car body. Regardless of how fast you pull on the belt, you will not be able to lock it, since the clutch is not engaged. When the driver suddenly slams on the brakes or the car collides, there is a rapid decrease in the car's speed. You, whatever your have loose in your car, and, more importantly, the elongated clutch, continue moving with the velocity that the car had. The objects will probably fall on the ¯oor, but you will be prevented from hitting the windshield when the moving clutch engages the toothed wheel. 54 The Laws of Mechanics: Newton's Laws of Motion The tendency of objects to maintain their state of motion (rest or motion with a constant velocity) is called the principle of inertia. Inertia is the resistance that all objects present to any attempt to change their state of motion. The inertia of an object is related to its mass. A massive object has a high inertia, which means it is hard to move or to stop once you get it moving. Light objects can be moved about more easily. It is inertia that projects you out of your seat when you are in a car and it stops suddenly, and inertia is responsible for your dif®culty in getting your car moving on an icy road. It is inertia that makes you hold on to a rotating merry-go-round so that you are not thrown off, and bursts a ¯ywheel that is spinning too fast. Newton's ®rst law is also called the law of inertia. We have spoken of forces pushing and pulling on objects to change their states of motion. These forces caused the objects to move. However, we all know that we can push on a heavy piece of furniture, like a dresser for example, and fail to move it. In this case the force applied is balanced by the frictional force between the dresser and the ¯oor. We would say that the net force acting on the dresser is zero. Forces are vector quantities and this knowledge helps us understand why we can have several forces applied to an object and still have a net or resultant force equal to zero. When the two teams participating in a tug-ofwar contest are unable to drag each other across the center line (®gure 3.6), the net force on the rope is zero, even though the individual team members, each of different strengths, pull with different forces. The sum of all the individual forces pulling on the rope is zero and the rope does not move. In ®gure 3.6, we have Figure 3.6. Equilibrium: The net force on the rope is zero if neither team is able to drag the other. Although the forces acting on the rope are all different, the net force is equal to zero. 55 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS the three different forces F1 , F2 , and F3 exerted by each one of the three women acting on the left side of the rope, and the three additional forces, F01 , F02 , and F03 , exerted by the men, all different, and differing from the ®rst ones, acting on the right side of the rope. In this vector diagram, the lengths of the vector forces are proportional to their magnitudes. Since the total length of the vectors on the left is equal to the total length of the three vectors acting on the right, the vector sum of these six forces is equal to zero. Thus the net force acting on the rope is zero and we say that the rope is in equilibrium. Newton's ®rst law says that, if the net force acting on an object is zero, the object will not change its state of motion. Thus, if the object is in equilibrium, its velocity remains constant. A constant velocity means that the velocity can take up any value that does not change, including zero, the case of an object at rest. This fact means that ``motion with a constant velocity'' and ``a state of rest'' are equivalent, according to Newton's ®rst law. On close examination, a velocity is always given in reference to some point. If you are traveling on an airplane, the book you might be reading is at rest with respect to you, but is traveling, along with the other passengers and the entire contents of the plane, at the cruising speed of the plane, about 1000 km/h with respect to the ground. A ¯ight attendant walking up the aisle at 2 km/h with respect to the plane would be moving at 1002 km/h with respect to the ground. Whether an object is at rest or moving with a constant velocity depends on the frame of reference to which it is referred. These special reference frames, in which the law of inertia is valid, are called inertial frames of reference. Thus, motion is entirely relative, an idea that is central to Newton's laws and was recognized by Newton himself. Newton's Second Law: Law of force Newton's ®rst law tells us what happens to an object in the absence of a net force. What happens if the net force acting on an object is not zero? According to the ®rst law, the object will not move with a constant velocity. This means, of course, that the object will experience an acceleration in the direction of the applied net force. Newton explained it in Book One of the Principia: 56 The Laws of Mechanics: Newton's Laws of Motion LAW II: THE CHANGE OF MOTION IS PROPORTIONAL TO THE MOTIVE FORCE IMPRESSED; AND IS MADE IN THE DIRECTION OF THE RIGHT LINE IN WHICH THAT FORCE IS IMPRESSED. According to Newton's Second Law, when an instantaneous force acts on a body, as when a baseball bat strikes a ball, a change in the body's motion takes place which is proportional to the ``force impressed.'' If the force acts on the body continuously rather than instantaneously, as when we push on an object for some time, an acceleration is produced that is proportional to the applied force. As an illustration of the second law, suppose that your sports car has stalled and you decide to push it (®gure 3.7(a)). If your car has a mass m of 1000 kg, you would apply a force F for 10 seconds to accelerate it from rest to a speed of 5 km/h. When two of your friends decide to join you and help you push the car (®gure 3.7(b)), a larger force of about 3F applied to the car of mass m for the same 10 seconds would bring the car to a speed of 15 km/h, producing an acceleration three times larger and perhaps getting your car started. Thus, for a constant mass, we can write F is proportional to a or F / a: When your 2000-kg wagon stalls you know that you have to push much harder, with a larger force, to accelerate it from rest to 5 km/h in 10 seconds (®gure 3.8). In fact, you have to apply a force twice as large as you did for your sports car to produce the same acceleration, since the mass of the wagon is twice as Figure 3.7. (a) An applied force F on the car of mass m, produces an acceleration a as the car increases its speed from zero to a ®nal v during a time t. (b) A force of 3F produces an acceleration 3a, thus increasing the car's speed from zero to a ®nal 3v during the same time t. 57 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 3.8. A larger mass M requires a larger force F to produce a given acceleration. large. We should write then, for a ®xed acceleration, F / m: In the ®rst case, for a constant mass (the sports car), the applied force is proportional to the acceleration produced. In the second case, for a given acceleration (0 to 5 km/h), the applied force is proportional to the mass of the object, larger for the larger mass of the wagon and smaller for the smaller mass of the sports car. We can combine these two proportionality expressions into a single equation: F ˆ ma which is the mathematical expression for Newton's Second Law. In converting from a proportionality to an equality, a constant is usually introduced. In this case, however, if SI units are used, the constant is unity. Notice that both F and a are vector quantities. We can restate the second law as follows: THE ACCELERATION OF AN OBJECT IS DIRECTLY PROPORTIONAL TO THE NET FORCE ACTING ON IT AND INVERSELY PROPORTIONAL TO ITS MASS. The SI unit of force is the newton (N), de®ned as the force that produces an acceleration of 1 m/s2 when acting on a 1-kg mass. From this de®nition we can write: 1 N ˆ 1 kg m=s2 In Newton's second law, it is the net force, F, acting on an object of mass m that produces an acceleration a. 58 The Laws of Mechanics: Newton's Laws of Motion Newton's Third Law: Law of action and reaction Newton's second law allows us to calculate the average force required to accelerate a certain sports car from 0 to 60 mph in 9.9 seconds, for example, by determining the car's mass and multiplying it times the acceleration, which we would of course obtain from the initial and ®nal speeds, and the time taken to accelerate the car between those two speeds. However, where does this force come from? What is the source for this force? The car's engine, which would perhaps come to mind as the answer, only makes the wheels spin; it does not make the car go! Moreover, the spinning wheels act on the pavement, not on the car. Newton gave us the answer to this problem in the form of his third law: LAW III: TO EVERY ACTION THERE IS ALWAYS AN EQUAL REACTION: OR, THE MUTUAL ACTIONS OF TWO BODIES UPON EACH OTHER ARE ALWAYS EQUAL, AND DIRECTED TO CONTRARY PARTS. ''Whatever draws or presses another is as much drawn or pressed by that other,'' he explained. Thus, the car's wheels push on the pavement with a force produced by the engine. This push or action is matched by a force from the pavement on the wheels, which make the car go. These two equal forces, the force of the wheels on the pavement and the force or reaction of the pavement on the wheels act, as we can see, on different bodies, the pavement and the wheels. Newton's third law tells us that forces always come in pairs, acting on different bodies. A single isolated force acting on a body without another equal force acting somewhere else cannot exist. According to the third law, the force that keeps the moon orbiting around the earth, FEM , is equal and opposite to the force that attracts the earth towards the moon, FME , (®gure 3.9). The force of attraction between the earth and any object is Figure 3.9. The earth and the moon attract each other with equal and opposite forces. 59 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 3.10. The earth pulls on the falling ball with a force that we call the ball's weight. The ball pulls on the earth with an equal and opposite force. called the weight of the object, w. If we drop a ball near the surface of the earth and neglect air resistance, the force of attraction between the earth and the ball makes the ball fall towards the center of the earth with an acceleration of 9.8 m/s2 , which is, as we learned in chapter 2, the acceleration due to gravity, g. Newton's second law tells us that this force due to gravity or weight (w), is given by w ˆ mg where m is the object's mass. The third law tells us that the object pulls on the earth with an equal and opposite force. Thus, the ball pulls on the earth with a force equal in magnitude to its weight (®gure 3.10). Newton's second law also explains why the acceleration at which the earth ``falls'' towards the ball is negligibly small, since the force exerted by the ball on the earth is equal in magnitude to the ball's weight. Therefore, F ˆ w ˆ ME a ˆ mg: Since ME is much greater than m, a has to be much smaller than g. 60 The Laws of Mechanics: Newton's Laws of Motion Figure 3.11. The skaters pull on each other's arms with equal and opposite forces. Any two objects interacting with each other obey Newton's third law. The two skaters of ®gure 3.11 pull on each other's arms with equal and opposite forces acting on two different bodies, namely the two skaters. 61 4 ENERGY What is energy? Energy is one of the more important concepts in science. It appears in many forms, including mechanical energy, thermal energy, electromagnetic energy, chemical energy, and nuclear energy. Wherever and whenever anything happens, like the explosion of a distant sun or the falling of a golden leaf from a tree in autumn, a change in some form of energy is involved. In spite of our familiarity with the concept of energy, few of us can de®ne it properly. What is energy? Can we measure it? Can we touch it? Energy is an abstract concept introduced by physicists in order to better understand how nature operates. Because it is an abstract idea, we cannot form a concrete picture of it in our minds, and we ®nd it very dif®cult to de®ne it in simple terms. But we can perhaps understand what it can do. Energy is the ability to do work. Therefore, before we can fully understand what this de®nition of energy means we need to know what we mean in physics by work, a word that we use in our everyday language. The concept of work Work involves an effort directed toward the production of something. In physics, what we understand for work differs somewhat from our everyday meaning of the word, and we must be careful to distinguish between the two meanings. A few examples should illustrate what work means in physics. Suppose your car's battery 62 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 4.2. (Top) Pulling a moderately heavy suitcase. Pulling the strap in an almost vertical direction makes it dif®cult to move the suitcase. (Bottom) To pull effectively on an extremely heavy suitcase the traveler must lean forward and pull in a horizontal direction. We can say that work is a measure of the productivity of a force. For the simple case of a constant force acting on an object along the direction of motion of the object, as in ®gures 4.2(c) and 4.3), the work done on the object is the product of the force and the distance the object moves, or Work ˆ force  distance or W ˆ F  d: When the applied force is not along the direction of motion, the force can be resolved into two components, one parallel to the direction of motion and the other perpendicular to it. As we saw from our discussion, only the parallel component does work. 64 Energy (a) (b) Figure 4.1. (a) Work is done when the force applied by the man pushing makes the car move some distance. (b) The man pushing the bulldozer will not be able to move it. In this case, he performs no work on the bulldozer. dies and you decide to push the car to the gas station 500 feet along the road. When you push the car you exert a force on it, even if the car does not move. However, if the car begins to move as you push it, then you are doing work on it. The man pushing the stalled car (®gure 4.1(a)) performs work only if he is able to move it through some distance. If he attempts to push a bulldozer, he probably will not be able to move it. In this case the work done is zero, even if the man gets very tired (®gure 4.1(b)). Suppose now that a traveler is pulling a heavy suitcase in an airport (®gure 4.2(a)). The suitcase rolls along the horizontal ¯oor as the traveler pulls on the strap. We know from our own experience that if the direction in which the strap is pulled is too close to the vertical (®gure 4.2(b)), the traveler's effort to move the suitcase is not as effective. If the suitcase is extremely heavy, the traveler must lean forward and pull on the strap in an almost horizontal direction. In fact, the horizontal direction makes the force most effective in this case (although this position is probably uncomfortable for the traveler; as seen in ®gure 4.2(c)). If the traveler were to pull on the suitcase in a direction perpendicular to the direction of motion, her effort would be wasted; the force that she would apply in this case would do nothing for the motion of the suitcase along the ¯oor. If the traveler pulls with the same force in all cases described in the previous situation, the work done on the suitcase will be maximum when the applied force is in the direction of motion of the suitcase, zero when the force is at right angles to the direction of motion, and an intermediate value when the force is along any other direction. The closer the applied force gets to the direction of motion, the more effective it becomes in producing work. 63 Energy Figure 4.3. The force exerted by the horse is in the same direction as that of the resultant motion. In this case, the work done by the horse is equal to the product of the magnitude of the force and the distance traveled. It is interesting to notice that if a person walks on a horizontal surface at a steady pace while carrying a suitcase, the force that he exerts on the suitcase to prevent it from falling to the ground does not produce work on the suitcase. However, if the suitcase is heavy and the person has to walk a long distance, he begins to sweat. Why should he sweat if he is doing no work? Even if he is standing still while holding the suitcase, he will get tired. The fact is that in this case there actually is motion inside the man's arm and work is being done on the muscle ®bers. While the man is holding the suitcase, nerve impulses are continuously reaching the muscles in his arm. When these nerve impulses reach a muscle ®ber, the ®ber lurches for an instant and then relaxes. At any one time, large numbers of ®bers are tightening up while the rest are relaxing. Since we were analyzing the motion of the suitcase held by the man, a situation external to the activity of the muscle ®bers inside the man's arm, we concluded correctly that no work was done on the suitcase. 65 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Units of work and energy The SI unit of energy (and work, since energy is the ability to do work, and thus must have the same units) is the joule ( J). This unit is named in honor of the English physicist James Prescott Joule (1818±1889) whose work clari®ed the concepts of work and energy. A joule combines the units of force and distance: 1 J ˆ 1 Nm We can illustrate this unit with two examples. It requires about one joule of work to lift a baseball from the ground to your chest, whereas it takes about ten joules of energy to pick up an average physics textbook from the bottom shelf of a bookcase and stand up to read it. When dealing with the energies of atoms or electrons, though, the joule is too large a unit. For these purposes, another unit, the electron volt (eV), is used. The conversion factor between electron volts and joules is 1 eV ˆ 1:602  10ÿ19 J: A frequently-used multiple of the eV is the MeV which equals one million eV. The concept of energy The concept of work is very useful in understanding the concept of energy. As we stated at the beginning of the chapter, energy is the capacity to do work; that is, energy allows us to perform tasks, to do work. We can also think of energy as the result of doing work. It is the chemical energy stored in the man's body in ®gure 4.4 what enables him to do the work on the car as he pushes it, converting chemical energy into energy of motion of the car and into heat (thermal energy) as the tires rub against the pavement. This idea of energy as something stored that can do work was called ®rst vis viva (Latin for ``living force'') by the German philosopher Gottfried W. Leibniz (1646±1716), because he thought that only living things could have the capacity to do work. The English scientist Thomas Young (1773±1829) realized that inanimate 66 Energy Pioneers of Physics: James Prescott Joule (1818±1889) The second son of a wealthy brewer, James Joule had a good early education. As a young man, he was taught by the renowned chemist John Dalton and showed a talent for science. At 19, he did several experiments investigating the nature of electromagnets, which resulted in a published paper. Born in 1818 near Manchester, England, Joule developed an early interest for the machines in his father's large brewery. This interest made him pro®cient at designing experiments and building the machines required to run them. He soon developed an almost fanatical zeal for accurate measurements. Such was his dedication that he even took time during his honeymoon to design a special thermometer with which to measure the temperature difference at the top and at the bottom of a waterfall he and his bride visited. When Joule was 15, his father became ill and retired. Although the young James had to spend time running the brewery, he continued his scienti®c endeavors. At 22, he calculated the amount of energy produced by an electric current and went on to spend the next 10 years devising experiments to measure energy in every conceivable way. The initial report of his experiments was met with skepticism and even rejection. The Royal Society did not accept his original paper and Joule was forced to present his results at a public lecture. His report was ®nally published in the Manchester newspaper at the instigation of his brother, who was the paper's music critic. Eventually, his work caught the attention of other scientists and Joule gained the recognition he deserved. He was elected to the Royal Society in 1850 and years later became president of the British Association for the Advancement of Science. In 1854, his wife died after only six years of marriage and Joule, deeply distressed, retreated to his work. In 1875, he began to have ®nancial dif®culties and Queen Victoria granted him a pension. Toward the end of his life, he became concerned and disturbed about the applications of his work to warfare. He died in 1889 at the age of 71 from a long illness. 67 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 4.4. Energy is the capacity to do work. The chemical energy in the man's body enables him to do work on the car. objects, like the wind, can do work by moving a windmill or a ship, for example. He proposed the name energy, a name he fashioned from Greek words meaning ``work within,'' for this work stored in bodies. Of the various types of energy listed at the beginning of the chapter, we will only consider mechanical energy for the moment. Later in the book, most of the other kinds of energy will be studied in some detail. An object may have mechanical energy by virtue of its state of motion, its location in space or its internal structure. Energy of motion As we have seen, work involves forces and motion. An object in motion has the capacity to do work: running water can turn a millstone, a gusty wind sets a windmill in motion and drives a sailing ship, and a truck ramming into the rear of a small car at a traf®c light will surely move it some distance! Thus, an object in motion has energy. It is the motion of the object that causes it to contain energy. Still water does not turn a millstone and still air does not drive a sailing ship. We call the energy of an object in motion kinetic energy. The word ``kinetic'' was ®rst introduced by the English physicist Lord Kelvin in 1856 and comes from a Greek word that means ``motion.'' The amount of kinetic energy that an object has depends on its mass and on its speed. Thus, a large truck traveling at the same speed 68 Energy as a small sports car would have more kinetic energy due to its larger mass. Likewise, a runner would have more kinetic energy than a person of similar weight walking along the same path, due to the runner's greater speed. Kinetic energy ± the energy that an object has by virtue of its motion ± is thus proportional to the mass of the object and to its speed. It is equal to one-half the product of the mass, m, and the square of the speed, v2 : Kinetic Energy KE† ˆ 12 mv2 : Energy of position A snowball at rest at the top of a hill has no kinetic energy since it is not moving. However, it is potentially capable of doing work on a snowman at the bottom of the cliff, if it is set into motion by the boy (®gure 4.5). This type of energy, which we call (gravitational) potential energy is due to the object's separation from the earth. It is called ``potential'' because energy has been stored for later use, and it is called gravitational because the gravitational force of attraction of the earth does work on the object as it falls towards the ground. Notice that unless the boy pushes it, the snowball will not reach the ground below where it can harm the snowman. If the snowball is never pushed, it will never become separated from the earth, remaining on the ground at the top of the cliff. When it is pushed, it acquires a separation from the earth equal to the height of the cliff. What we call ground, then, is actually the lowest position the object can reach in a particular situation. This lowest position or ground is the reference level from which the position of the object is measured. We are free to choose an arbitrary reference level that better suits our particular situation. The gravitational potential energy depends also on the object's mass. Thus, a tree falling on a house after a storm does much more damage (more work!) than a walnut falling from a standing tree on the roof of the same house. If an object's height changes, so does its potential energy because the distance to the ground increases. If you lift a box full of books from the ground and place it on a chair, the box acquires potential energy because of its height with respect to the ground. This 69 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 4.5. The snowball has gravitational potential energy by virtue of its position with respect to the ground. If pushed off the cliff, its potential energy will allow it to do work on the snowman below. potential energy comes from the work done by your muscles in lifting the box. If you now decide to place the box on the table, the potential energy of the box increases by an amount proportional to the increase in height. The increase in potential energy results from the additional work that you have to do to lift the box from the chair up to the table. We can summarize the previous discussion as follows: Gravitational potential energy is the energy that an object has by virtue of its separation from the earth's surface. Potential energy is proportional to the mass of the object and to the height above an arbitrary reference level. It is not dif®cult to obtain the exact expression for the gravitational potential energy. Consider the boy lifting the baseball of mass m in ®gure 4.6. The potential energy of the ball before 70 Energy Figure 4.6. As the boy slowly lifts the ball, the ball gains gravitational potential energy. the boy picks it up is zero, if we chose the ¯oor as our reference level. As the boy slowly lifts the ball, the potential energy increases until the ball reaches the table. The work done by the boy in lifting the ball slowly, without acceleration, is equal to the force applied by the boy times the distance traveled by the ball, which is equal to the height of the table, h. The magnitude of the force applied by the boy equals the ball's weight, mg. The force is in the same direction to that of the motion. Therefore, W ˆ Fh ˆ mgh: Thus, W ˆ mgh is the work done by the boy on the ball. When the ball is resting on the table, it has no speed, and therefore no kinetic energy. It, however, has stored energy by virtue of being 71 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 4.7. Different kinds of potential energy. (a) The gravitational potential energy of the weights increases as the weights are lifted. (b) The magnetic potential energy increases as the two magnets are brought closer together with their north poles facing. (c) The elastic potential energy of the spring increases as it is compressed. at a height h above the ¯oor; in other words, by being at a distance h above the reference level. If the boy decides to push the ball off the table, it would, of course, fall down and gain kinetic energy, which would have come from the stored energy when it was resting on the table. This stored energy is what we call potential energy. We can write for potential energy, then, PEgrav ˆ mgh: There are other kinds of potential energy (®gure 4.7). When we push two magnets together with their north poles facing, there is an increase in magnetic potential energy. If you compress a spring by holding it in between the palms of your hands and pushing, the elastic potential energy of the spring increases. In all these cases, the potential energy is stored in the entire system of interacting bodies. After we bring the two magnets together, for example, we could hold either one of the two magnets in place and let the other move away. Since either magnet can be released and allowed to move away from the other magnet, making use of the available potential energy, this magnetic potential energy must reside in the system of the two interacting magnets. When we lift a baseball up to a certain height and then release it so that it falls towards the earth, it seems as if the potential energy belongs only to the baseball. 72 Energy However, if we could devise a method to secure the baseball in space with respect to the sun, the earth would ``fall'' towards the baseball. The gravitational potential energy in this case resides in the earth-baseball system . Elastic potential energy The stretched spring in ®gure 4.8 has stored energy. We call this energy elastic potential energy. If we pull on the spring with a force F, the increase in length x is proportional to the stretching force (as long as the spring is not stretched too much). We can write for the force exerted by the person pulling on the spring: F ˆ kx where k is called the force constant of the spring. This force law is known as Hooke's Law. By Newton's Third Law, the spring exerts an equal and opposite force on the person pulling, or F ˆ ÿkx: The applied force increases from 0, when the spring is not stretched, to kx, when the spring has been stretched a distance x. Thus the average force is the sum of these two values divided Figure 4.8. The spring is stretched from its equilibrium position by a force that is proportional to the displacement x. 73 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS by two, or  ˆ 0 ‡ kx ˆ 1 kx: F 2 2 The work done in stretching the spring from the equilibrium position out to a distance x is the product of this average force  and the displacement x: F  ˆ W ˆ Fx 1 2 kx†x ˆ 12 kx2 : This work is converted into elastic potential energy in the spring: PEelastic ˆ 12 kx2 : The work-energy theorem When you throw a bowling ball you do work on it as you push the ball through some distance. The bowling ball gains speed and its kinetic energy increases. After the ball leaves your hand, it travels along the lane and hits the pins, pushing them down, thereby doing work on them. The kinetic energy that the ball acquired came from the work done on it. The work that the ball does on the pins comes at the expense of some of its kinetic energy: the ball slows down after it hits the pins. In this case, work is being converted into kinetic energy (and some of that kinetic energy is being converted back into work). We had observed when discussing gravitational energy that the work done by the boy of ®gure 4.6 in lifting the ball up to a certain height h was W ˆ mgh. The potential energy acquired by the ball when lifted to this height comes from the work that the boy does on it. If the boy lifts the ball without accelerating it, all the work done on the ball is converted into potential energy. In general, work can be converted into both, kinetic and potential energy. This statement is what we call the work-energy theorem. When a basketball player shoots a basket, the work done on the ball is changed into an increase in the kinetic energy of the ball, as it accelerates in the player's hands, and into potential energy as the ball gains height. 74 Energy Conservative and nonconservative forces When we lift an object of mass m, initially at rest on the ground, slowly up to a height h, the work that we do on the object is W ˆ mgh: If the object is a book with a mass of 1 kg and we lift it to a height of 0.5 m, the work done on the book would be W ˆ 1 kg  9:8 m=s2  0:5 m ˆ 4:9 J. Now, suppose that we pick up the same book from a shelf that is 1 meter above the ¯oor and place it on another shelf 1.5 meters high (see ®gure 4.9). The change in height would be h ˆ 1:5 m ÿ 1 m ˆ 0:5 m and the work done by us in moving the book is the same 4.9 J. This tells us that the work done against the force of gravity on the book of mass m depends only on the difference in heights as we lift it from 0.5 m to 1 m above the ground; that is, the work depends Figure 4.9. Three different paths that can be followed to move a book from a shelf 1 m high to a second shelf 1.5 m high. The work done against gravity is the same in all three cases. 75 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS on the initial and ®nal heights. Motion perpendicular to the direction of the force of gravity contributes nothing to the work done on the book. The work done does not depend on the path through which the book moved between the two points. We could move it following a straight path between the two end points (path 1 in ®gure 4.9) or we could move it to the side ®rst, then up, then to the other side so that it ends at the same end point (path 2); we could, in fact, move the book following any trajectory that begins and ends at the same points (as in path 3); the work done will always be the same. A force with the property to produce work that is independent of the path, such as the gravitational force, is called a conservative force. If, on the other hand, you reach for a book that lies on your desk at the other end of where you are and slide it towards you following a straight path (®gure 4.10), the work done against the force of friction that exists between the book and the surface of Figure 4.10. The work done against the force of friction is greater when the woman slides the book along the longer path 2 than along the straight path 1. The force of friction is a nonconservative force. 76 Energy the desk is less than if you decide to slide the book between the same initial and ®nal points following some other path longer than the previous straight path. In this case, the work done against the force of friction does depend on the path taken. We call these forces, like the force of friction, nonconservative forces. 77 5 CONSERVATION OF ENERGY AND MOMENTUM Transformation of energy As we have learnt in the previous chapter, the amount of work done on an object equals the energy transformed from one form to another. The chemical energy in our bodies is transformed into potential energy as we lift a baseball, and this energy is further transformed into kinetic energy as we drop the ball and it falls with increasing speed towards the ground. Energy, then, can be transformed from one form to another. Before the boulder in ®gure 5.1 starts rolling down the cliff its energy is potential. As the boulder falls, its potential energy is continuously converted into kinetic energy. When it reaches the ground below, the boulder has no potential energy. We can better understand how energy transforms from one type to another with the example of a girl on a swing (®gure 5.2). When the swing is at H it momentarily stops to reverse direction, so its kinetic energy is zero there, but its potential energy is maximum because it has reached its maximum height. At point L the situation is reversed: the swing ¯ies pass that point at its maximum speed (maximum kinetic energy) but its potential energy is zero because it cannot fall any further. This maximum kinetic energy begins to decrease as the swing moves away from the lowest position L. At the same time, the potential energy increases as the swing approaches H0 (which is at the same height as H) where it momentarily stops. At this point, the kinetic energy is again zero. Notice that we have chosen the lowest position of the swing (point L) as the point at which the potential energy is zero. 78 Conservation of Energy and Momentum Figure 5.1. The potential energy of the boulder will be converted into kinetic energy when the boulder rolls down the cliff. However, we could have chosen the ground as the point of zero potential energy. In this case, the potential energy at point L has a minimum value which is not zero. Since the swing never reaches the ground, the potential energy decreases from its maximum value at H to its minimum at L, while the kinetic energy changes from zero at H to its maximum value at L. It is then the difference in the potential energy at the heighest point and at the lowest point that is important. As we stated in the previous chapter, the reference level at which the potential energy is zero is arbitrary. In most cases, it is more convenient to use the lowest position that the object under consideration can take as the reference point; that is the point of zero potential energy. 79 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 5.2. The girl on the swing sways from a maximum height H to a lowest point L. The potential energy at H is transformed into kinetic energy, which reaches a maximum value at L. The principle of conservation of energy The example of the girl on the swing described in the previous section is, of course, an ideal situation. We know from experience that the swing will not reach the same height unless the girl ``pumps.'' In the ideal situation, however, assuming that there is no friction, the girl on the swing will continue oscillating between points H and H 0 , forever exchanging kinetic energy and potential energy and vice versa. As one form of energy decreases, the other increases with the total amount remaining constant. This constant value is called the total mechanical energy (E) of the system. Clearly, at any point, the sum of the two energies has to be the same. We can express this relation as kinetic energy ‡ potential energy ˆ total mechanical energy ˆ constant. This, the principle of conservation of mechanical energy, states that the sum of the kinetic energy (KE) and potential energy (PE) of an isolated system remains constant. An isolated system is one that experiences no external forces and into or out of 80 Conservation of Energy and Momentum which there is no ¯ow of energy. In the case of our idealized swing ± that is, one which neither interacts with the air nor has friction in the supports ± the isolated system consists of the swing, the girl, and the earth. In the ideal situations described so far, the forces acting on the system are conservative forces. In general, however, both conservative and nonconservative forces (like friction) act on a system. In reality, as we have stated before, when the girl on the swing of the earlier example swings back and forth, she pushes the air aside, losing some of the energy. Even if we replace the girl with a mannequin, enclose the entire swing in a big container and evacuate the air, the swing will still not reach the same height at every swing. The metal hooks holding the swing rub against the bar, however well lubricated they might be, producing heat, which is a form of energy, in the same way that rubbing your hands together when you are cold makes your hands warmer. This heat or thermal energy is dissipated into the environment, producing an energy loss. As the girl swings, mechanical energy is continuously transformed into thermal energy and this results in a decrease in height with each swing. This rubbing of parts of the system against each other is what we call friction. Likewise, when the child playing in a park slides down a slide some of her kinetic energy is converted into heat or thermal energy. These situations do not violate the principle of conservation of mechanical energy as stated above, however, since thermal energy is not a form of mechanical energy. Could we include nonconservative forces and still have conservation of energy? If we consider all forms of energy in a system, we can expand the principle of conservation of mechanical energy to a more general principle of conservation of energy, which can be stated as follows: Energy is neither created nor destroyed; it only changes from one kind to another. The energy of mass In 1905, Einstein extended the principle of conservation of energy still further to include mass. In a beautiful paper written when he 81 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS was 26 years old ± the ®fth scienti®c paper that he published that year ± Einstein deduced that mass and energy were equivalent. The famous formula E ˆ mc2 gives the energy equivalent of a mass m; c is the speed of light. According to Einstein, the mass of an object is a form of energy. Conversely, energy is a form of mass. For example, the combination of one pound of hydrogen with four pounds of oxygen to form water releases enough energy to run a hair dryer for about 10 hours. If we had an extremely precise balance, we would discover that the mass of the water formed is less than the total mass of the oxygen and hydrogen used by about one part per billion. The mass loss is exactly equivalent to the energy released in the process. A more dramatic example ± as we shall see in Chapter 23 ± is the release of energy in nuclear reactions. If the same amount of hydrogen were to be used in a nuclear reaction, we could obtain about ten million times more energy. As in the chemical process, the end product would weigh less than the original material. The difference in mass is converted into energy. Einstein's extension of the principle of conservation of energy is a profound generalization. In everyday life, however, the limited principle of conservation of energy is suf®cient. A ¯ying bird has more energy than a bird standing on the branch of a tree, but the increase in the bird's mass due to its greater energy when ¯ying is so small that it cannot be measured by any experiment. Ef®ciency The principle of conservation of energy tells us that energy can change its form but it never disappears. In any process that involves friction, however, we lose control of some energy; it dissipates into the environment. The moving parts of an automobile engine, for example, require a lubricant to minimize friction. When we fail to add oil to the engine, it overheats and the heat produced by friction dissipates into the environment. Even the most ef®cient engine cannot regain energy lost through friction. According to the principle of conservation of energy, if there are any energy losses, the input energy must equal the output 82 Conservation of Energy and Momentum Pioneers of physics: The physicists' letters ``I have heard rumors that you are on the war path and wanting to upset Conservation of Energy, both microscopically and macroscopically. I will wait and see before expressing an opinion, but I always feel `there are more things in heaven and Earth than are dreamed of in our Philosophy.' '' Thus wrote the New Zealand-born physicist Ernest Rutherford in a letter to the great Danish physicist Niels Bohr in November 1929. Rutherford's letter was referring to a discovery that had been made a few years before concerning the behavior of some subatomic particles. It had been observed that the kinetic energies of the particles emitted in certain radioactive processes were not in accordance with the laws governing the motion of subatomic particles. It appeared as if some energy was not accounted for in spite of the best efforts of the experimental physicists. Bohr, a towering ®gure in twentieth century physics (whom we will meet in chapter 7), began to doubt the validity of the principle of conservation of energy in these processes and the letter from Rutherford (whom we will also meet in chapter 7) showed his great concern. In February of that same year the German theoretical physicist Wolfgang Pauli had written in a letter to his friend the physicist Oscar Klein that ``with his consideration about a violation of the energy law, Bohr is on a completely wrong track.'' By December of the following year Pauli would write a letter to the physicists attending a conference in TuÈbingen that began: ``Dear radioactive ladies and gentlemen, I have come upon a desperate way out regarding the [problem of the energy violation]. To wit, the possibility that there could exist . . . neutral particles which I shall call neutrons. The [energy violation problem] would then become understandable from the assumption that . . . a neutron is emitted along with the [other particles] in such a way that the sum of the energies . . . is constant.'' ``For the time being,'' Pauli continued in his letter, ``I dare not publish anything about this idea and address 83 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS myself con®dentially ®rst to you, dear radioactive ones, with the question how it would be with the experimental proof of such a neutron . . .'' He closes his letter with the following: ``I admit that my way out may not seem very probable a priori since one would probably have seen the neutrons a long time ago if they exist. But only he who dares wins.'' Pauli won. His ``neutron,'' rechristened the neutrino, for ``little neutral one'' by the Italian physicist Enrico Fermi, was discovered twenty-®ve years later. Physicists have great faith in the principle of conservation of energy. Whenever a new phenomenon seems to violate this principle, physicists invariably look for some hidden object or particle that could account for the missing energy rather than accept a violation of this principle. In addition to the neutrino, many other particles have been discovered this way. work plus the energy losses. Of course, the smaller the energy losses are, the greater the output work becomes. Thus, if we minimize the energy losses, the output work increases, approaching the input energy. Because a real machine always has energy losses, the output work is always less than the input energy. The ratio of the output work to the input energy can give us a way of comparing how ef®cient different machines are. We de®ne the ef®ciency of a machine by the relationship efficiency ˆ work or energy out work or energy in or, in symbols, "ˆ WOUT < 1: EIN ", the Greek letter epsilon, is the standard symbol for ef®ciency. Ef®ciency is often expressed as a percentage by multiplying it by 100. Table 5.1 shows the ef®ciency of some energy conversion devices. 84 Conservation of Energy and Momentum Table 5.1 Ef®ciencies of some energy conversion devices. Ef®ciency, " (%) Incandescent Lamp Fluorescent Lamp Automobile Engine (gasoline) Automobile Engine (diesel) Home Oil Furnace Electric Motor Electric Generator 4 20 25 35 65 95 99 Power The Great Pyramid at Giza in Egypt was constructed by thousands of Egyptian peasants, who worked for years transporting, preparing, and laying about 2 300 000 blocks of an average weight of 2 12 tons. If a similar project were to be undertaken today using the same materials but modern equipment and techniques, the task could be accomplished in a much shorter time but the total work done would be the same, since the same 2 300 000 blocks would have to be lifted to the same heights. What we call power, however, has changed by using different methods of construction that allow the project to be completed in less time. Power is the rate at which work is done. If we use P to indicate power, we can write Pˆ W t and since energy is the ability to do work, power can also be expressed in terms of the energy used per unit time, or Pˆ E : t It was James Watt (1736±1819), a Scottish engineer, who during his pioneering experiments to improve the steam engine ®rst attempted to describe the power of an engine by comparing it with the power exerted by an average horse. He determined that a horse could lift a 550-pound weight slightly less than four feet in 4 seconds. This led him to assume that an average horse could lift 550 pounds up to a height of one foot in one 85 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Physics in our world: Automobile ef®ciency Today, a ¯eet of 800 million vehicles travel the world's roads. These vehicles consume half of the world's oil and produce carbon monoxide and other gases that are harmful to the global environment. Most of the industrialized nations have implemented policies to reduce automobile emissions and conserve energy. 86 Conservation of Energy and Momentum Most energy-saving procedures involve new engine and body designs to make them more ef®cient. These designs have reduced the average consumption of gasoline in the U.S. during the last 15 years by about half. Energy losses occur in the engine itself. Friction among the different engine components converts some of the available energy into heat, which escapes into the environment. Additional energy losses take place in the transmission, where friction removes some of the energy. Finally, friction between the tires and the pavement and the air resistance that appears as the vehicle moves (aerodynamic drag) produce additional losses in ef®ciency. Manufacturers in recent years have experimented with engine designs that reduce energy losses. Some of these engines involve new lightweight materials and new computerized fuel injection designs. One company has built an experimental automobile with a computer-controlled system that shuts down the engine when the car is decelerating and restarts it when the accelerator is pressed. To improve the ef®ciency of the transmission, where the goal is to keep the engine under the highest load required without wasting power, new computerized gear-changing mechanisms that optimize engine performance are being considered. Adding more gears also improves ef®ciency. For this reason a belt drive, which is equivalent to an in®nite number of gears, increases transmission ef®ciency. Finally, reducing the vehicle's weight with plastics, aluminum, and high-grade steel reduces the rolling resistance of the tires. Aerodynamic styling also improves the appearance of the new automobile designs and at the same time reduces drag. second. He de®ned this rate of performing work as 1 horsepower (hp). Thus 1 hp ˆ 550 ft lb=s: The SI unit of power is the watt (W), named in honor of James Watt. 1 watt is 1 joule per second, that is, 1 W ˆ 1 J=s. This unit is 87 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS the same unit as we encounter in the description of electrical appliances. A 1500-watt electric heater uses 1500 watts of power, which means that it uses 1500 joules of electrical energy every second. A 1000-watt hair drier uses 1000 joules of electrical energy per second. The conversion factor from horsepower to watts is 1 hp ˆ 746 W: There is a unit of energy that is derived from the expression of energy in terms of power. From our de®nition of power, we can write for energy E ˆ Pt: If we operate a 1000-watt electric heater for 1 hour, the total energy used is 1 kilowatt-hour: E ˆ 1000 W  1 h ˆ 1 kW h: This unit may be familiar to the reader, as it is used by power companies in their monthly statements to indicate the amount of electrical energy used. We can calculate the power required to move an object at a constant speed v against a constant force F, as when pushing it up a ramp, by expressing the work done as W ˆ Fd where d is the displacement of the object caused by the applied force F. Since d=t is the speed v, power is then Pˆ W Fd ˆ ˆ Fv: t t Impulse and momentum You are freewheeling down a small hill on your bicycle and when the road starts going uphill, you decide that you are too tired to pedal, so you coast. As we all know from experience, the bicycle does not stop moving the very moment one stops pedaling. It keeps going, moving against the force of friction that exists between the tires and the pavement and the much greater friction from the resistance of the air. The force that overcame the force of 88 Conservation of Energy and Momentum friction is no longer there. However, the bicycle keeps going because it has momentum. In fact, on ¯at ground, if we were to remove all frictional forces, the bicycle would keep moving forever. Newton's ®rst law tells us that this is the case: unless there is a force, an object continues moving in the same direction and with the same speed. As we shall see, the concept of momentum helps us quantify what we already know from Newton's ®rst law. Let us return to the example with the bicycle. Suppose now that a 50-kg boy is riding his bicycle on ¯at ground. As soon as the boy reaches a speed of 20 km/h, he stops pedaling and coasts the rest of the way. After he returns, his friend, who weighs 60 kg, decides to see how far she is able to coast using her friend's bicycle. When she reaches the same speed of 20 km/h she also stops pedaling, and she coasts for a longer distance, as we would have been able to predict even without being present at this experiment. The girl, by virtue of her larger mass, has a larger momentum. In a second phase of this experiment, the boy asks his brother, who is a year older but weighs the same 50 kg, to see how far he can coast. His brother is stronger, however, and is able to reach a speed of 30 km/h before he stops pedaling. Again, we would agree that the brother will coast for a longer distance, simply because he is moving with a greater speed before starting to coast. For this second experiment, we can say that the brother has a larger momentum. Momentum depends on both of these quantities. It is proportional to the product of the mass of the object and the object's speed. If we use the letter p to indicate momentum, we can write, p ˆ mv: The units of momentum are the units of mass times the units of speed. Momentum is a vector quantity. In vector form, it is proportional to the velocity of the body and is de®ned as p ˆ mv: Since momentum is a vector quantity, an object could be moving with a constant speed and still change its momentum due to the fact that velocity, being a vector, can change direction even if its 89 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS magnitude (the speed) remains constant. An object moving in circles at a constant rate is one case where the speed is constant but there is a change in momentum. If we push a lawn mower of mass m across a yard, the lawn mower accelerates. Since momentum is the product of mass and velocity, a changing velocity implies a changing momentum. Thus, if we apply a force to an object for any length of time, the momentum of the object changes. Push a stalled car for a few Physics in our world: Air bags Air bag systems that protect automobile drivers and, in newer automobiles, the passengers too, are probably the most effective of the automatic or passive safety devices currently used in automobiles. When a sudden decrease in speed is detected by an electronic sensor an electric contact is closed which causes a small explosive to rapidly release nitrogen gas into the bag. (Nitrogen comprises 78% of the air we breathe.) Air bags are designed to pop out only in a frontal crash that is equivalent to hitting a wall at 12 miles per hour. At that speed, the force that the wall exerts on the automobile to stop it would cause severe injury or death to the driver in only 1=8 s. Since the air bag pops out in just 1=25 s, the driver hits the cushion of nitrogen gas in the air bag. Because the bag deforms, the driver continues moving into the bag until ®nally stopped. Although the change in momentum is the same since the car is stopped completely, the time during which the force acts on the driver is longer. The change in momentum equals the impulse, which in turn is the product of the net force F times the time t during which the force acts. Since this product Ft is the same with or without air bag (it equals the change in momentum), a larger value of t implies a smaller value of the force F. This smaller force should not injure the driver. After the impact, the nitrogen escapes through the fabric of the bag and the bag rapidly de¯ates to avoid suffocating the driver. 90 Conservation of Energy and Momentum seconds and the momentum of the car changes by a small amount. Push with the same force for one whole minute, and the car's momentum increases by a greater amount. The product of the applied force and the time during which the force is applied, F  t, is called impulse, I, and this impulse is equal to the change in momentum of the body. In symbols: I ˆ Ft ˆ
p: The units of impulse are units of force times units of time. The SI unit of impulse is the Newton second (N s). According to our previous equation, this is also the unit of momentum. It is because impulse is equal to the change in momentum that we can see why it is advantageous to bend our knees to absorb the shock when jumping (or falling!) from a certain height. In this particular case the change in momentum is ®xed; we arrive at the ground with a momentum that is determined by the height from where we jumped and we must stop. The momentum must change from the value just before hitting the ground to zero. How fast this change takes place determines the magnitude of the force that we must exert with our legs. The longer we take to stop by ¯exing our knees, the smaller the average force. Conservation of momentum When we look at the world around us, we notice that all objects that are moving eventually stop, that even the most modern machines cannot run forever. Skylab, the ®rst space laboratory, came down to earth in fragments after circumnavigating the Earth more than 31 000 times. Even motion in the heavens is not forever. Stars explode and disappear, together with their possible planetary systems. In a few billion years, the time will come for our own Sun to brighten until it swells and engulfs Mercury and Venus, disturbing the motions of the remaining planets. An object set in motion with respect to an observer will eventually stop owing to its interaction with other objects in the universe. When objects interact, however, there is still a quantity, related to the motion of the objects, that does not change. This 91 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 5.3. Two equal carts approach each other with the same speed v. After the collision they recede from each other at the same speed, if we neglect friction. quantity of motion is the total momentum of the interacting bodies. As an illustration of this, let's consider two identical carts with well-greased wheels moving towards each other at the same speed (®gure 5.3). If the cart bumpers were to be ®tted with perfectly elastic springs, you would notice that after the collision takes place, the two carts would be moving in opposite directions at the same speed. In fact if you were to measure the speeds of each cart before and after the collision with an instrument, you would ®nd that they are almost exactly equal, the friction in the wheels accounting for the small difference. If the friction is reduced, so is the difference in the speeds before and after. Considering the velocities to include also the direction of motion of the carts, we can easily see that the sum of the velocity v1 of one cart and the velocity v2 of the other cart does not change with the collision of the carts. We can then say that, neglecting friction, velocity is a conserved quantity for this particular case. In a second part of this experiment, we add weights to one of the carts so as to double its mass and set them in motion so that again, the two carts approach each other with the same speeds (®gure 5.4). In this case, however, the two carts do not maintain their speeds after the collision. Rather, the light cart bounces back with a larger speed than that of the cart carrying the big mass. Certainly, velocity is not a conserved quantity for this more general case. The different masses of the carts prevented the vector sum of the velocities from remaining unchanged. Could momentum be conserved, then? Multiplying the velocity 92 Conservation of Energy and Momentum Figure 5.4. Adding a weight to cart 2 to increase its mass allows us to see that the velocity is not the conserved quantity. We need to take into account the different masses. It is the total momentum of the two carts that is conserved. times its mass we obtain the momentum of each cart and adding them together, we discover that the total momentum of the carts is conserved. Representing the momenta of the two carts after the collision with primes, we have p1 ‡ p2 ˆ p01 ‡ p02 or pbefore ˆ pafter : This is a very important law in physics. It is called the principle of conservation of momentum, and can be stated as follows: If no net external force acts on a system, the total momentum of the system is conserved. This law is general and universal, which means that it applies to any system of bodies anywhere in the universe on which no external forces are acting. It holds regardless of the type of force that the bodies exert on each other. The principle of conservation of momentum was clearly stated ®rst by the Dutch physicist Christiaan Huyghens, one of the most gifted of Newton's contemporaries. Employing kinematical analyses and the methods of ancient geometers rather than the modern analytical methods of dynamics, (at the time known only to Newton), Huyghens extended the work of John Wallis and Robert Boyle who, responding to a challenge by the Royal Society to investigate the behavior of colliding bodies, suggested in 1668 that the product mv was conserved in collisions. 93 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Elastic and inelastic collisions You might have seen displayed in novelty shops a small device consisting of ®ve or six shiny steel balls attached by means of two threads to two parallel, horizontal rods (see ®gure 5.5). The device is often called Newton's cradle. When one of the two end balls is raised up to a certain height and allowed to swing down to collide with the next ball, which is at rest, the momentum of the ®rst ball is transmitted through all the other stationary balls to the last one, which swings up to nearly the same height. This motion continues for several swings. In 1666, Christiaan Huyghens saw a demonstration before the recently founded Royal Society of London of a similar experiment, Figure 5.5. After the swinging ball collides with the ®rst stationary ball, the momentum of the swinging ball is transmitted to this stationary ball which collides with the next, until ®nally the last ball swings up to nearly the same height. Conservation of momentum alone does not explain completely the motion of these balls. 94 Conservation of Energy and Momentum with two balls. For the two following years, the members of the Royal Society argued as to why the struck ball would swing up to nearly the same height while the ®rst ball would stop completely after the collision. According to the principle of conservation of momentum, the momentum of the swinging ball before the collision must equal the momentum of all the moving balls after the collision, without the need to specify how the balls must move. In 1668, Huyghens explained to the Royal Society that there was another conservation principle involved in this process. In addition to momentum, the product mv2 was also a conserved quantity. In other words, according to Huyghens, the sum of the products mv2 for all the moving objects before the collision must equal the sum of the products mv2 after the collision. This product (divided by 2) is what we call today kinetic energy. Thus, in addition to momentum, kinetic energy is also conserved in this type of collision. Collisions where kinetic energy is also a conserved quantity are called elastic collisions. Collisions involving objects that do not lose their shape or heat up in any way are elastic collisions. The perfectly elastic bumpers are restored to their original shapes immediately after the collision, and two ``perfectly hard'' spheres would collide without any distortion of their shapes. Of course ``perfectly elastic'' springs and ``perfectly hard'' balls do not exist, which is why the second ball in the Royal Society demonstration rose to nearly but not exactly the same height as that from which the ®rst ball was released. Collisions where the kinetic energy is not conserved are called inelastic collisions. The collision of two automobiles is an example of an inelastic collision. All types of collision conserve momentum, however. Cannons and rockets Let's apply the law of conservation of momentum to the ®ring of a cannon and a rocket. Consider ®rst the cannon of ®gure 5.6, where we have called M the mass of the cannon and m the mass of the cannonball. Obviously, as the cannon and cannonball are at rest before ®ring, the total momentum of our system, cannon plus cannonball, is zero. Conservation of momentum tells us that the total momentum of this system must remain 95 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 5.6. After ®ring, the cannonball moves to the right with a velocity V and the cannon recoils with a smaller velocity v, due to its larger mass. That is why you feel a kick on ®ring a gun. zero after the cannonball is ®red. After ®ring, the cannonball acquires a velocity V and a momentum pb ˆ mV and the cannon recoils with a momentum pc ˆ Mv. The total momentum after ®ring is equal to zero, i.e. pb ˆ pc ˆ 0: If we call the direction in which the cannonball moves positive, the magnitude of its momentum is mV, whereas the magnitude of the cannonball's momentum, moving in the opposite (negative) direction would be M ÿv†. We can use our expressions for momentum above to write for the magnitude of the momentum of each of the two components of this system: mV ‡ M ÿv† ˆ 0 or mV ˆ Mv: This relation tells us how the total momentum remains zero after ®ring. The large mass of the cannon moves with a small velocity in the opposite direction to the motion of the cannonball which, because of its smaller mass, moves with a large velocity. The momentum of the cannon and of the cannonball are equal in magnitude and opposite in direction. Rockets work on the same basic principle. Burning expanding gases, which are produced at high pressures in a combustion chamber, escape at large velocities through a constricted nozzle propelling the rocket in the opposite direction (®gure 5.7). As was the case with the cannon, the magnitude of the momentum of the gas exiting through the rear of the rocket must equal the 96 Conservation of Energy and Momentum (Courtesy NASA). momentum of the rocket in the opposite direction. In symbols: Mrocket vrocket ˆ mgas Vgas : This expression is actually an approximation since we have neglected the loss in mass due to the gases ejected. It would be a good approximation for a rocket out in space, away from the gravitational pull of the earth, as it undergoes a small change of course, for example. In this case, the loss of mass due to the ejection of gases is very small compared to the mass of the rocket itself. Figure 5.7. As the gases are ejected through the nozzle with a momentum mV, the rocket moves in the opposite direction with a momentum Mv. 97 6 ROTATION AND THE UNIVERSAL LAW OF GRAVITATION Rotational motion Our lives are spent moving in circles. The Earth spins on its axis once every day and revolves around the Sun once a year (®gure 6.1(a)). The Solar System revolves, together with billions of other stars, around the center of the Milky Way Galaxy which forms part of a small conglomerate of galaxies called the Local Group; this also rotates in space (®gure 6.1(b)). Up to this point, we have con®ned our study of motion to motion in one dimension in which the entire object is displaced from one point to another following a straight path, without changing the orientation in space of the object. This type of motion is called translational motion. In this chapter we will extend our study to motion in a circle, which will help us understand Newton's law of universal gravitation. In studying circular motion we should distinguish between rotation and revolution. A turntable rotates or spins around its axis and the Earth revolves around the Sun. The rotating turntable does not travel anywhere, it merely spins in place. On the other hand, as the Earth revolves around the Sun its spatial location changes while it rotates on its axis. The motion of the turntable is an example of pure rotational motion, whereas that of the Earth spinning and revolving combines rotational and translational motion. Consider the motion of a merry-go-round in an amusement park and assume that it is rotating at a constant rate. In ®gure 6.2, we have depicted the merry-go-round as seen from above and rotating counter-clockwise. A child riding a horse on the rotating platform at a distance r from the center would describe 98 Rotation and the Universal Law of Gravitation (a) (b) (c) Figure 6.1. The Earth (a) spins around its axis and revolves around the Sun (b). Our solar system resides in one of the spiral arms of the Milky Way Galaxy. The Galaxy itself is spinning around its center. (c) This is a photograph of the spiral galaxy NGC-6946, believed to have a similar structure to that of the Milky Way. (Courtesy NASA.) 99 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 6.2. A merry-go-round rotating counter-clockwise as seen from above. a circular path. As you have probably experienced, the farther away you are from the center of the merry-go-round, the faster you move. In other words, the speed increases in proportion to your distance from the center. This phenomenon can be dramatically observed in ice skating shows. As the skaters begin forming a spinning line, the ones near the center of rotation barely move, whereas the skaters at the two ends of the line have to work hard to keep up their speeds and maintain the line straight. As the merry-go-round of our example rotates in relation to the ground, the line joining the center with the place where the child is riding sweeps out an angle  (the Greek letter theta) in the time t that it takes the child to travel the length s (®gure 6.2). The rate at which this angle increases with respect to time as the merry-go-round rotates is the same regardless of where the child rides. We call this rate of change the angular velocity of the merry-go-round. It is standard practice to use Greek symbols to represent angular quantities, and we use a lowercase omega (!) for angular velocity. If it took 18 seconds for the merry-goround to complete a turn, we could say that its angular velocity was 208/s. The Earth, on the other hand, rotates around its axis at the rate of 158/h (3608/24h). As we have just seen, the speed v at each point on the platform depends on the distance to the center of rotation, whereas we can say that the entire merry-go-round rotates with 100 Rotation and the Universal Law of Gravitation the same angular velocity !. Angular velocity, then, is a more useful quantity for rotational motion. The units of angular velocity that are commonly used are radians per second. The conversion from degrees to radians is 3608 ˆ 2 radians. (In this book, however, we will use degrees per unit time for angular velocity.) We can relate the angular velocity of the rotating platform to the linear speed of a particle on the platform with the expression v ˆ r!, with ! in radians. The frontiers of physics: CD-ROM drives Computer CD-ROM drives transfer data at different rates, depending on the technology used by the manufacturer. The ®rst generation of CD-ROM drives transferred data at a constant rate as the head moved from the inner to the outer tracks of the disc. To achieve this constant transfer rate, the linear speed at which the tracks moved past the head was kept constant, regardless of the position of the head. That meant that the disc spun faster when the head was near the center and slower when farther away. Thus the angular velocity was not constant; it decreased with increasing radius. This technology is called constant linear velocity (CLV), although it is the linear speed, not the linear velocity, that remained constant. Newer CD-ROM drives, reaching transfer rates up to 52 times that of the original drives, maintain their angular velocity constant, like hard drives and magneto-optical drives. This technology, appropriately called constant angular velocity (CAV), implies a variable transfer rate, since the linear speed at which the tracks move relative to the head increases with increasing distance from the center. That means that a 52 CD-ROM drive actually has transfer rates ranging from as low as 22 for the information on the inner tracks to a maximum of 52 for the outer tracks. A third technology, called partial constant angular velocity (PCAV), is a combination of the two technologies. In this case, the angular velocity is maintained constant for a section of the inner tracks but is decreased for sections farther away from the center. 101 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS When the rotating platform completes one revolution, the angle  becomes equal to 3608. It is customary to call the time taken in completing one revolution the period, T, of the motion. For one revolution the distance traveled is the length of the circumference or 2r. The speed can thus be written as vˆ 2r : T Torque and angular momentum Suppose you need to loosen up a tight bolt and are using a medium size adjustable wrench without success. You know from your past experience that you probably will have better luck if you switch to a larger wrench (®gure 6.3). Although you might apply the same force with either wrench, the larger one will have a longer handle, allowing you to apply the force at a larger distance from the wrench. The same force is more effective in rotating the stuck bolt if you apply it at a larger distance from the bolt. To push open a heavy metal door in a building, the farther away from the hinges you push the easier it is to open it. If you push from the wrong end, you might still be able to open it but, as you know, it will be much more dif®cult. From these examples we can see that the ability to rotate an object depends on the applied force and the point of application of the force. In ®gure 6.3, the wrench rotates around the center of the bolt, O, and the force is applied at point P. The distance from the center of rotation O and the point, P, where the force is applied is Figure 6.3. A larger wrench facilitates loosening up a tight bolt because of its longer handle. 102 Rotation and the Universal Law of Gravitation Figure 6.4. A force F applied at different distances from the rotating center of a disk. Any position other than A (B and C for example) will result in rotation. called the lever arm, r. We call torque,  (the Greek letter tau), the quantity that depends on both force and lever arm. Torque is de®ned as the product of the lever arm and the applied force: torque ˆ lever arm  force:  ˆ rF: Thus, to be able to start an object rotating you need to apply a torque to it. The disk in ®gure 6.4 will start rotating only if the force is applied to a position other than A, such as B or C. At position A the force will not produce any rotation; at this point the torque is zero because the lever arm is zero. In chapter 5 we learned that if the net force on an object is zero, the momentum of the object is constant. For a rotating object, however, torque is what causes the object to change its state of rotation. In other words, if the object is not rotating, a torque is required to set it into rotation; if it is rotating at a constant rate, a torque is needed to change its rate of rotation to a faster or slower rate; and, ®nally, a torque is needed to stop a rotating object. In this sense, torque is the rotational analogue of force, since in linear motion force is what causes an object to change its state of motion. If the net torque acting on an object is zero, we say that the angular momentum of the object is constant. Angular momentum is a measure of the rotation of an object; it is 103 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS the rotational analogue of linear momentum, which, as we remember, is a measure of the linear motion of an object. Since angular momentum is the rotational analogue of momentum, we can express it in terms of analogous quantities. We expressed momentum as the product of mass times velocity or p ˆ mv. Mass is the measure of the inertia of a body, the resistance to a change in the state of motion of the body. Angular momentum can be expressed as the product of the rotational inertia of the body and the angular velocity. Rotational inertia or, more commonly, moment of inertia, I, measures the resistance of a body to a change in its state of rotation; that is, the dif®culty in starting or stopping a rotating object or changing its present rate of rotation. The moment of inertia of a body will in general change if its axis of rotation is changed. It is easier to spin a baton around its long axis than around an axis perpendicular to its center, because in the latter situation, most of the mass of the baton is not as close to the axis of rotation. The moment of inertia of a body changes if the mass distribution with respect of the axis 104 Rotation and the Universal Law of Gravitation Figure 6.5. When the spinning skater draws in her arms, the moment of inertia of her body decreases and the angular velocity increases, keeping the angular momentum constant. of rotation changes, as when an ice skater spinning with her arms extended, draws them closer to her body (®gure 6.5). With her arms extended, the moment of inertia of the skater is larger because more of her mass is located farther away from the axis of rotation. Using the letter L for angular momentum we can express it as: L ˆ I!: We can think of angular momentum as the tendency of a rotating object to keep rotating because of its inertia. The angular momentum of an object, as we have mentioned, is conserved or remains constant if the net external torque on the object is zero. This is a very important statement. It is called the 105 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Physics in our world: Twisting cats One of the most spectacular maneuvers that a domestic animal is capable of is done by a cat. As many children know, when the cat is dropped upside down from a height of about 1 m, it is able to twist itself into the right position and land on its paws, unharmed. Not only is this feat dazzling, it also seems to violate the law of conservation of angular momentum. A more careful look at what the cat does in about one-third of a second helps us realize it is actually the conservation of angular momentum that allows the cat to turn. Since the cat is dropped with no rotation to its body, the law of conservation of angular momentum tells us that, unless an external torque were to act on the cat, it should fall without any rotation. Only two forces act on the cat as it falls; gravity and friction with the air. The gravitational force acts on the entire body at once and provides no torque. As Newton discovered, the gravitational force of attraction of the Earth upon any body can be considered as if it were acting on the center of mass of the body, and thus provides no torque. Although the frictional force due to the air does provide 106 (# Gerard Lacz/Natural History Photographic Agency.) Rotation and the Universal Law of Gravitation a torque, it is too small to cause the twist. How can the cat spin once released, then? A careful look at the strobe photographs provides the clue. The second photograph shows the cat with its front paws brought in, closer to its body and its rear paws extended. This position has the effect of reducing the moment of inertia of the front of its body and increasing the moment of inertia of the lower part of the body. Because the body is bent in the middle, the front and rear parts of the body rotate about different axes. This second photograph also shows that the cat has twisted its upper body towards us, a 908 rotation, while twisting its lower body away from us. Because the lower body has a greater moment of inertia, a smaller rotation (in this case of about 108) is equivalent to the larger rotation of the upper body. Since the two rotations are in opposite directions, the angular momentum of the front and rear cancel giving a zero net angular momentum. In the third photograph, the situation is reversed. The front legs are extended, increasing the moment of inertia of the front, while the hind legs are pulled in, decreasing the moment of inertia of the rear. The rear end is now twisted by a large angle, which causes a small twist in the opposite direction in the front. The last three photographs show the cat, with zero angular momentum, on its way to a safe landing. law of conservation of angular momentum, and joins the other conservation laws that we have learned so far; the law of conservation of energy and the law of conservation of momentum. We can see the results of angular momentum conservation in an ice skater spinning on her toes (®gure 6.5). If she starts spinning with her arms extended and then draws them closer to her torso, the moment of inertia of her body decreases. Because friction is very small in this situation, the external torque on the skater is zero and angular momentum is conserved. Since angular momentum is the product of the moment of inertia and the angular velocity, a decrease in the moment of inertia of the skater must be compensated for by an increase in her angular velocity, which we observe in her faster spinning rate. 107 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Centripetal acceleration Isaac Newton was one of the ®rst scientists to recognize the importance of circular motion. Newton was able to show that an object moving in circles needs an unbalanced force to maintain this circular motion. This unbalanced force produces an acceleration on the object which we call centripetal acceleration. If we twirl a ball on a string, the ball will keep moving in a circle for as long as we keep the tension on the string. If we let the string loose or the string snaps, the ball will go off in a straight line and will continue to move in the direction the velocity vector had at the moment the string was cut (neglecting gravity). The string then exerts a force on the ball which acts towards the center of the circle and prevents the ball from moving along a straight line. This force is called centripetal force, literally ``the force that seeks the center,'' from the Latin centripetus. The centripetal force causes the ball to accelerate towards the center of the circle. If we increase the speed of the twirling ball, we feel a greater pull on our hand. On the other hand, if we keep the ball moving at the same speed but increase the length of the string, the pull on our hand decreases. We conclude that the centripetal acceleration increases with increasing speed (it actually increases with the square of the speed) and decreases with increasing radius. Therefore, an object moving with a constant speed v in a circular path of radius r (®gure 6.6) has an acceleration directed toward the center of the circle called centripetal acceleration, ac , which is directly proportional to the square of the speed and inversely proportional to the radius: v2 : r The centripetal force causing the ball to accelerate towards the center of the circle is given by Newton's second law. If the mass of the ball is m, the centripetal force is Fc ˆ mac , or ac ˆ mv2 : r This equation gives the force required to maintain an object moving about a ®xed center with a constant speed. For example, when a car takes a curve, the friction between the pavement and the tires provides this force. If the pavement is wet or is covered Fc ˆ 108 Rotation and the Universal Law of Gravitation Figure 6.6. The centripetal acceleration of an object moving in a circular path of radius r with a constant speed v is ac ˆ v2 =r. with snow or ice, the friction force might not be large enough and the car is unable to negotiate the curve. On the other hand, even on dry pavement, if the speed of the car is too large, the centripetal force required to keep the car moving in a circular path, being proportional to the square of the speed, could become too large and the car might skid. In older race tracks, where race cars take curves at high speeds, the tracks are sometimes banked steeply so that the horizontal component of the force that the track exerts on the car (FR ), perpendicular to the banked track, is equal to the centripetal force (®gure 6.7). Figure 6.7. In a banked race track, the horizontal component of the reaction force FR between track and car, which is perpendicular to the track, is equal to the centripetal force Fc . 109 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Satellites On July 26, 1963, the United States launched Syncom 2, the ®rst communications satellite in geosynchronous orbit (i.e., it stays above the same spot on Earth) at an average height of 35 725 km. Syncom 2 completes an orbit in the same time that the Earth completes a revolution, and because it revolves around the Earth at the same rate as the Earth rotates, the satellite moves with uniform circular motion. With this information we can calculate the orbital speed of this satellite by dividing the distance traveled by the time taken. The distance traveled in the 24-hour time interval or period is the length of the circumference, 2r, with r being the radius of the orbit, which is the distance between the center of the Earth and the satellite; that is, r ˆ radius of the Earth ‡ height of satellite† ˆ 6367 km ‡ 35 725 km ˆ 42 092 km, since the radius of the Earth is known to be equal to 6367 km. We can calculate the linear speed of Syncom 2 as follows: vˆ 2r 2  3:14  42 092  103 † ˆ m=s T 24  60  60 which gives us a linear speed of 3061 m/s or 11 020 km/h. As we have learned, a centripetal force must exist that causes the satellite to orbit around the Earth in an almost circular orbit. The centripetal acceleration produced by this force is ac ˆ v2 =r ˆ 3061 m=s†2 = 42 092  103 m† ˆ 0:22 m=s†2 . What is the source of this centripetal force? It is again due to the genius of Isaac Newton that we are able to understand that the force that keeps a satellite orbiting around the Earth is also the force that keeps the Moon around the Earth, the Earth around the Sun and all the planets of the Solar System moving around the Sun; the force that we call gravity. The discovery of the universality of this force, one of the four forces known to us today, ranks as one of the major achievements of the human mind. We shall occupy ourselves with the discovery of this force in the following sections. Origins of our view of the universe To place Newton's discovery of the law of gravitation into historical perspective, we must brie¯y go back to the beginning, namely 110 Rotation and the Universal Law of Gravitation with the ancient Babylonians; in particular, the people of the Second Babylonian Empire, who lived in Mesopotamia, the region occupied today by Iraq. By 3000 BC the Babylonians had begun a systematic study of the sky out of their need to know the best harvesting times, since theirs was an agrarian culture. Modern astronomy can trace its roots back to their early discoveries. The Babylonians made deities out of the Sun, Moon, and the ®ve visible planets, Mercury, Venus, Mars, Jupiter, and Saturn; and this drove them to follow closely their motions across the sky. Their knowledge of the paths of the Sun and Moon was used in setting up a calendar. They also observed that the planets, unlike the Sun and Moon, did not follow simple paths across the sky, but would stop their eastward motion now and again, retracing part of their path, then stopping once more, before resuming their eastward motions. Some of the knowledge acquired by the Babylonians reached the Greeks. From 600 BC to 400 AD, ancient science reached its highest peak with the Greek culture. The Greeks, unlike their predecessors, attempted to ®nd rational explanations to the observed phenomena rather than accepting them as works of the gods. Thales of Miletus, born in 640 BC, one of the ®rst known Greek thinkers, is unanimously acclaimed as the founder of Greek philosophy. Thales attempted to interpret the changing world in terms of physical processes. Pythagoras, born in Samos in 560 BC, introduced the idea that the Earth was spherical and held that the Earth was at the center of the Universe. This view was cast into a more complete theory by Aristotle, who thought that the Earth was immovable and ®xed at the center of the whirling heavens. Although this geocentric or Earth-centered model, as it came to be known, was later expanded into an extremely complicated system by Ptolemy and accepted by nearly everybody for 18 centuries, certain thinkers, notably Aristarchus of Samos, held opposing views. Aristarchus, who lived between 310 and 230 BC, held that the Sun was ®xed at the center of the universe, and that the Earth revolved around the Sun in a circular orbit. He also held that the Earth rotated on its axis as it revolved and that this axis was inclined with respect to the plane of the orbit. There was one major obstacle that prevented the acceptance of Aristarchus' model: the Earth seemed motionless. How could it 111 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 6.8. Apparent shift in the position of a star as the Earth rotates around the Sun. rotate around the Sun if no motion was detected? Moreover, if the Earth rotated around the Sun, there should have been an apparent shift in the position of the stars as the Earth moves (®gure 6.8). This apparent shift in the position of the stars or parallax was never observed and the Sun-centered or heliocentric model of Aristarchus was abandoned. We know today that, because the stars are so remote, none has a parallax that can be observed with the unaided eye. The ®rst observation of the parallax of a star was made in 1838 by the German astronomer Friedrich Bessel, with the aid of a telescope. The geocentric model developed by Claudius Ptolemy in the second century AD placed the Earth in the middle of the rotating heavens. To explain the seemingly complicated motion of the planets in the sky that results, as we know today, from the combination of their own motions and Earth's motion around the Sun (®gure 6.9(a)), Ptolemy had the planets moving in small circles call epicycles which in turn would rotate around the Earth, following circular orbits called deferents. The combination of the motion of both these circles produced a cycloid pattern of the planet's motions. However, the center of the great circle, the deferent, 112 Rotation and the Universal Law of Gravitation Figure 6.9. (a) Actual positions of the Earth and another planet as both rotate around the Sun. On the right of the diagram we see the apparent path of the planet in the sky as seen from the moving Earth. (b) Ptolemy's system of the world. was not at the Earth's center. Instead, it was situated a short distance from it, at a different point for each planet. Moreover, the epicycle moved with a uniform rate not around the center of the large circle or deferent but around another point in space called the equant (®gure 6.9(b)). As more and more data on the planetary orbits were obtained, it became necessary to add more epicycles, giving epicycles moving on epicycles, with the planet moving on the last and smallest one. Eventually Ptolemy had a system of 40 epicyles that reproduced with fairly good accuracy the observations of his day. His system of the world 113 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS was published in The Mathematical Collection, a treatise of 13 volumes that was passed on to the Arabs after the destruction of the famous library of Alexandria, and became known as al Magiste (The Greatest). The book was introduced in Europe by the Arabs where, known as the Almagest, it was famous for over a thousand years. Kepler's laws of planetary motion From Aristotle and Ptolemy until Copernicus, thirteen centuries later, no advance was made in man's understanding of motion in the heavens. Mikolaj Kopernigk (or Nicolaus Copernicus, his Latin name), born on February 19, 1473 in the little town of Torun in Poland, was the revolutionary who brought change to ideas that were ®rmly rooted in people's minds for more than a thousand years. He attended ®rst the University of Cracow and later the University of Bologna in Italy where he became interested in astronomy. The intellectual atmosphere that existed then in Italy facilitated the criticism of established ideas. Not only was the Ptolemaic system of the world cumbersome and inelegant, but recent astronomical data no longer supported the model regardless of the number of epicycles used. Copernicus especially disliked the idea of the equant, which had been introduced by Ptolemy in an effort to keep uniform circular motion in the description of the heavens. Copernicus realized that the motion was uniform about the equant and circular about the center of the deferent, two completely different points. It occurred to Copernicus that everything could be much simpler if the Sun were at the center of the universe rather than the Earth. In his model the Earth and the ®ve known planets, Mercury, Venus, Mars, Jupiter and Saturn, would move around the Sun with uniform circular motion. The heliocentric model of Copernicus was considered heretical because it removed the Earth from the center of Creation and for this reason Copernicus delayed publication of his theory until very late in his life. At the urging of some of his friends, Copernicus ®nally authorized the publication of his theory in a book. De Revolutionibus (On Revolutions) was published in 1543, a few weeks before Copernicus died at age 70. 114 Rotation and the Universal Law of Gravitation The revolution that Copernicus started was not completely accepted until the early 1600s when Johannes Kepler, who had joined the superb observatory of the Danish astronomer Tycho Brahe as an assistant at the age of 30, made use of very precise data on the planet Mars to prove that the orbit of this planet was not a circle but an ellipse. Circular orbits, which were the basis for all the epicycles and deferents in the pre-Copernican theories, were not after all the actual paths of the planets. Kepler was born at Weil der Stadt, in the wine country of WuÈrttemberg in southern Germany, on December 25, 1571, and attended the University of TuÈbingen where he graduated in 1588, having been converted to the Copernican theory by one of his professors. When he joined Tycho's observatory, Kepler had already published a book, Mysterium Cosmographicum (Cosmic Mystery), where he proposed, unsuccessfully, that there were six planets because there are only ®ve perfect solids. It was in search of better data to perfect his theory that he went to work in Tycho's observatory. It took Kepler six years and thousands of pages of calculations to wrest the secret of the orbit of Mars. During his ``battle with Mars,'' as he called his work, Kepler realized that the velocity of the planet should be related to its distance from the Sun because it is the Sun that provides the driving force. Because the orbit was not circular but elliptical, the distance from the Sun varied. An ellipse, we might recall, is a very speci®c curve that can be obtained by placing two tacks some distance apart and loosely threading a loop of string through them. By moving a pencil in such a way as to keep the string taut we can draw an ellipse (®gure 6.10). The position of each tack is called a focus. Since the string is not elastic, the sum of the distances from any point on the ellipse to the two foci is always the same. Kepler placed the Sun at a focus of the ellipse. His calculations showed him that a planet moved faster when it was nearer the Sun and more slowly when it was farther away from the Sun.  There are only ®ve regular solids: the triangular pyramid (tetrahedron), whose faces are four equilateral triangles; the cube, which has six squares as faces; the octahedron, with eight equilateral triangles; the dodecahedron, with 12 regular pentagons; and the icosahedron, with twenty equilateral triangles as faces. Any regular solid may be inscribed in (have its vertices on) or circumscribed about (have its faces tangent to) a sphere. 115 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 6.10 An ellipse. Kepler set out to calculate just how the speed of the planet changes as it orbits the Sun. After many tedious and long calculations he found that the areas swept out in equal times by the line joining the Sun and the planet were equal. In uniform circular motion, equal angles are covered in equal times, so that it takes twice as long to go around one half of the circumference as it does to go any one quarter. For elliptical orbits, when the planet is close to the Sun the area swept out by the line from the Sun to the planet as it moves from A to B (®gure 6.11) is smaller than the corresponding area formed when the planet moves the same length, from C to D, at a farther distance from the Sun. Figure 6.11. Kepler's Second Law, Law of Areas. The planet moves from A to B in the same time interval
t that it takes for it to move from C to E. The area swept by the line between the Sun and the planet in moving from A to B is the same as the area swept out in moving from C to E. 116 Rotation and the Universal Law of Gravitation Kepler found that since the planet moves at a slower speed when it is farther from the Sun, the length of the orbit covered in a given time was smaller when the planet was farther from the Sun. If it took a certain time
t to move from A to B, the planet would move from C to E in the same time
t. However, the area swept out in moving from A to B was the same as the area swept out in moving from C to E. Kepler published his two discoveries in a second book that he entitled Astronomia Nova (New Astronomy) in 1609. These two discoveries, known today as Kepler's First and Second Laws, lie at the foundation of modern astronomy. Kepler did not rest on his discoveries of these laws. Convinced that God the Creator was also a musician, he set out to discover a relationship between the distance of a planet to the Sun and its velocity that was similar to the musical ratios. After many efforts, he was forced to admit that ``God the Creator did not wish to introduce harmonic proportions into the durations of the planetary years.'' His effort was not in vain, however, for Kepler was able to ®nd a mathematical relationship between the planets' distances from the Sun and their periods of revolution. He found that ``the periodic times of any two planets are in the sesquilateral ratio to their mean distances,'' that is, the squares of the periods of any two planets (the time taken for a complete revolution around the Sun) are proportional to the cubes of their mean distances from the Sun. The mean distance is also the semi-major axis of the ellipse. If T is the period and r the mean distance or semi-major axis, Kepler's Third Law is T12 r13 ˆ : T22 r23 The indices 1 and 2 indicate the period and average distance for each one of the two planets. This remarkable discovery, known today as Kepler's Third Law or the harmonic law, was contained in his monumental work Harmonici Mundi (Harmonies of the World), published in 1619. We can state Kepler's three laws as follows: 1 Law of orbits: Each planet moves around the Sun in an elliptical orbit, with the Sun at one focus. 117 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS 2 Law of areas: A planet moves around the Sun at a rate such that the line from the Sun to the planet sweeps out equal areas in equal intervals of time. 3 Harmonic law or law of periods: The squares of the periods of any two planets are proportional to the cubes of their average distances from the Sun. Newton's law of universal gravitation Kepler had deduced that a force or anima motrix was needed to keep the planets orbiting around the Sun and that this force came from the Sun. Galileo, who was a contemporary of Kepler, was trying to understand motion and had arrived at the conclusion that an object moving at a constant speed along a straight line will maintain that state of motion when there is no net force acting on the object. This idea was further developed by Newton into what became his ®rst law of motion, the law of inertia, as we saw in chapter 3. In his second law, Newton af®rms that the only way to change the motion of an object is to apply a net force. As we learned earlier, to keep an object moving in circles we need to apply an unbalanced force to the object. This force, which we called the centripetal force, acts toward the center of the circle. It was clear to Newton that to keep a planet orbiting around the Sun, a force, directed exactly toward the Sun, was required. What was the origin of this force? Newton hypothesized that there is a universal force of attraction between all bodies everywhere in the universe. By analyzing Kepler's third law, Newton was able to show that this force was inversely proportional to the square of the distance between the bodies. This was one of the problems that Newton considered while he was at his mother's farm in Woolsthorpe during the great plague years. It is not known whether or not Newton solved the entire problem then. Newton's biographer and contemporary, William Stuckey, who drew upon conversations with Newton and interviews with Newton's friends, writes that on April 15, 1726, ``after dinner, the weather being warm, we went into the garden and drank thea, under the shade of some appletrees, only he and myself. Amidst other discourse, he told me, he was just in the same situation, as when formerly, the notion of gravitation 118 Rotation and the Universal Law of Gravitation came into his mind. It was occasion'd by the fall of an apple, as he sat in a contemplative mood.'' What is clear is that Newton did not publish anything on what ranks as one of the greatest discoveries in the history of science for almost twenty years. And then only because two scientists of great renown, Edmond Halley and Robert Hooke, had also arrived at the mathematical form for the force of gravity but had not been able to prove it. By January 1684, Halley had concluded that the force keeping the planets on their orbits ``decreased in the proportion of the squares of the distances reciprocally.'' When Halley told Hooke at the Royal Society of his conclusion, Hooke boasted that he had arrived at exactly the same conclusion and had a mathematical proof of it but did not ± and most probably could not ± produce it. Halley then decided to consult with his dear friend Newton. Abraham DeMoivre, a member of the Royal Society and friend of Newton and Halley, wrote of that visit: After they had been some time together, the Dr. [Halley] asked him what he thought the curve would be that would be described by the planets supposing the force of attraction towards the Sun to be reciprocal to the square of their distance from it. Sir Isaac replied immediately that it would be an ellipis. The Doctor, struck with joy and amazement, asked him how he knew it. Why, saith he, I have calculated it. What was Newton's method to calculate the force of gravity? It is not known in detail the technique that Newton used in developing his theory. However, in a book entitled A View of Sir Isaac Newton's Philosophy published in London in 1728, Henry Pemberton relates this account: As he sat alone in a garden, he fell into a speculation on the power of gravity: that as this power is not found sensibly diminished at the remotest distance from the center of the Earth, to which we can rise, neither at the tops of the loftiest buildings, nor even on the summits of the highest mountains; it appeared to him reasonable to conclude, that this power must extend much farther than was usually thought; why not as high as the Moon, said he to himself ? and if so, her motion must be in¯uenced by it; perhaps she is retained in her orbit thereby. However, though the power of gravity is not sensibly weakened in the little change of distance, at which we can place our selves from the center of the Earth; yet it is very possible, that so 119 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS high as the Moon this power may differ much in strength from what it is here. To make an estimate, what might be the degree of this diminution, he considered with himself, that if the Moon be retained in her orbit by the force of gravity, no doubt the primary planets are carried round the Sun by the like power. And by comparing the periods of the several planets with their distances from the Sun, he found, that if any power like gravity held them in their courses, its strength must decrease in the duplicate proportion of the increase of distance. Newton himself mentions in a memorandum of about 1714 that he ``began to think of gravity extending to the orb of the Moon, and having found out how to estimate the force which [a] globe revolving within a sphere presses the surface of the sphere, from Kepler's rule of the periodical times of the planets . . . I deduced that the forces which keep the planets in their orbs must [be] reciprocally as the squares of their distances from the centers . . .'' We can use these accounts to reconstruct Newton's technique. Consider a planet of mass m revolving around the Sun (®gure 6.12). If the planet moves with a speed v and orbits the Sun in a near circular orbit of radius r, the centripetal force keeping the planet in its orbit is Fc ˆ mv2 : r If the period of the planet is T, then the speed can be written as the distance traveled in one period, which is the length of the circumference or 2r, divided by the period, or v ˆ 2r=T. Since we need the square of the speed in our expression for the Figure 6.12. A planet revolving around the Sun in an orbit of radius r. 120 Rotation and the Universal Law of Gravitation centripetal force, that is, v2 ˆ 42 r2 =T 2 , we obtain after replacing for v2 in our expression for Fc : Fc ˆ mv2 m 42 r2 † ˆ : r r T2† Multiplying numerator and denominator by r and rearranging, we write  3 42 m r Fc ˆ 2  : T2 r We notice that the expression in parenthesis, r3 =T 2 , is a relationship between the square of the period and the cube of the distance between the planet and the Sun. Kepler's third law tells us that this ratio is constant. If we call this ratio K, the centripetal force is 42 m K† r2 and if we multiply both numerator and denominator by the mass of the Sun, it becomes  2  4 K Ms m Fc ˆ : Ms r2 Fc ˆ It is here where the genius of Newton made the incredible leap. Although this derivation was done for the case of a planet of mass m orbiting around the Sun, Newton said that this same expression would apply to the force between the Earth and the Moon, between the Earth and an apple falling from a tree, and between any two objects in the universe, by considering the expression in parenthesis to be a universal constant. This is Newton's law of Universal Gravitation. Any two objects of mass M and m, separated by a distance r, anywhere in the universe, will attract each other with a force given by Mn FˆG 2 : r The value for the universal constant G was obtained in 1798 by Henry Cavendish by measuring the gravitational attraction between two pairs of lead spheres. The currently accepted value in SI units is G ˆ 6:67  10ÿ11 N m2 =kg2 : 121 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Newton's law of universal gravitation means not only that the Earth pulls on the Moon with a gravitational force that keeps it in orbit or that the Sun exerts a force of attraction on the Earth and all the other planets in the Solar System, but that this force is the same force that is responsible for making an apple fall from a tree. This universal law, which explains how the universe works, says that you pull the Sun towards you with a force that can be calculated. And when we think about this, we begin to understand the scope of the mind of Newton. Because, as the distinguished historian of science I. Bernard Cohen writes, ``[t]here is no mathematics ± whether algebra, geometry, or the calculus ± to justify this bold step. One can say of it only that it is one of those triumphs that humble ordinary men in the presence of genius.'' Newton actually tested his great discovery. He realized that the Moon is continuously falling toward the Earth. We can understand this ``falling'' of the Moon if we recognize that if we were to turn off the gravitational force, by Newton's ®rst law, the Moon would immediately go off in a straight line along the tangent. It is the gravitational force of attraction that makes it fall from the straight line into its circular orbit (®gure 6.13). Newton knew that the distance from the center of the Earth to the center of Figure 6.13. Acceleration of the Moon toward the Earth. By Newton's ®rst law, if the gravitational force of attraction between the Earth and the Moon were to be eliminated, the Moon would go off along a straight line with a speed v. The gravitational force pulls the Moon toward the Earth, making it ``fall'' a distance h into the circular orbit. 122 Rotation and the Universal Law of Gravitation the Moon was about 60 times the radius of the Earth. Since his gravitational law says that the force varies with the distance as 1=r2 , the acceleration due to the gravitational attraction should be 1/602 the acceleration due to gravity on the surface of the Earth which in Newton's days was already known to be 9.80 m/s2 . According to this, the Moon accelerates toward the 2 Earth at the rate of 1=3600†  9:80 m=s2 ˆ 2:72 mm=s . To check his result, Newton calculated the centripetal acceleration of the Moon knowing that its period was 27.32 days. As we have seen, the centripetal acceleration can be written as ac ˆ v2 42 r ˆ 2 : r T Newton obtained for this acceleration the value of 2.74 mm/s2 , in excellent agreement with the value predicted by his theory. Some historians believe that Newton actually carried out a calculation like this during his annus mirabilis (year of wonders), as a young man of 23, although, due to incorrect data on the distance to the Moon, his ®rst attempt was off by a large amount. Only when, six years later, new measurements of the size of the Earth yielded a more accurate value for the distance to the Moon, could Newton make the calculation again with the agreement that we have just seen. Newton's universal law of gravitation allows us to de®ne the weight of an object more precisely than before as the net gravitational force exerted on the object by all bodies in the universe. Near the surface of the Earth, the gravitational force of attraction of the Earth is much larger than that of all other bodies in the universe and we can neglect their effect on the object; the weight of an object near the surface of the Earth is then equal to the gravitational force of attraction of the Earth. The weight of an object of mass m near the surface of the Earth is then w ˆ Fg ˆ G ME m : rE2 As we learned in chapter 3, Galileo discovered that the weight of an object is proportional to its mass: w ˆ mg 123 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS The frontiers of physics: Measuring the distance to the Moon To check his universal law, Newton estimated that the distance to the Moon was about 60 times the radius of the Earth. The method to calculate this distance was actually developed by the ancient Greeks. Around 280 BC, the Greek astronomer Aristarchus developed a procedure to measure the relative distances to the Sun and the Moon. He realized that during the Moon's ®rst and last quarter phases, the Sun, the Moon, and the Earth formed a right triangle. He then carefully measured the angle between the Moon and the Sun, obtaining a value of 878. With this information he estimated that the Sun was about 20 times farther away than the Moon. Aristarchus also obtained estimates for the relative sizes of the Earth, the Moon, and the Sun. He measured the time it takes the Moon to move through the Earth's shadow during a lunar eclipse and from that value he calculated that the Earth's diameter was three times greater than the Moon's diameter. To calculate the Sun's diameter, he used the fact that the apparent sizes of the Moon and the Sun, as seen from the Earth, are nearly the same. Since he had calculated that the Sun was 20 times farther away than the Moon, he reasoned that the Sun's actual diameter was 20 times that of the Moon. All that was needed to determine the actual distances and diameters was measuring the radius of the Earth. Some eighty years later, the astronomer Eratosthenes devised a clever method to do just that. Aristarchus' measurements of the Sun's size and of its distance were off due to the dif®culty in determining the exact moment when the Moon was at ®rst 124 Rotation and the Universal Law of Gravitation or last quarter phase which introduced a large uncertainty in his measurement of the angles. However, his calculations of the size of the Moon and its distance to the Earth were incredibly close to modern measurements. Today, we can measure the distance to the Moon with a precision of 1 centimeter using lasers. From 1969 until 1971, the astronauts of the Apollo missions placed laser re¯ectors on the surface of the Moon. Lunar laser ranging stations on Earth send laser pulses to these re¯ectors and detect the re¯ected light 2.6 seconds later. Since the speed of light is known with a high degree of precision, an extremely accurate determination of the distance to the Moon and its variation as the Moon orbits the Earth is possible. where g is the acceleration due to gravity. Therefore, from the last two expressions, we obtain gˆG ME rE2 where we can see that the acceleration due to gravity is the same for all bodies at the surface of the Earth. Spacecraft and orbital motion Newton, as we have said before, realized that the Moon is falling toward the Earth. Any satellite in orbit around the Earth is a free falling object. We can illustrate this in another way by using a diagram that appeared in Newton's Principia (®gure 6.14). If we throw a stone horizontally from the tall mountain, it would fall to the ground following a path like the one that ends at point D. If we throw the stone harder (perhaps with the aid of some mechanical device), it would still fall to the ground hitting at point E, farther away, due to the fact that the stone was thrown with a higher speed and also because the Earth curves out from under it. At successively higher speeds the stone would hit the ground at points F and G, until ®nally, if thrown fast enough, its curvature would match that of the Earth, and the stone 125 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 6.14. A projectile shot from a high mountain follows different curved paths. ``[T]he greater the velocity . . . with which it is projected, the farther it goes before it falls to the Earth. We may therefor suppose the velocity to be so increased . . . til at last, exceeding the limits of the Earth, it should pass into space without touching it.'' (Newton, System of the World.) would fall to the ground without ever reaching it. We would have placed the stone in orbit around the Earth. A satellite in orbit around the Earth is, then, in free fall; it is continuously being accelerated toward the center of the Earth. What is the value of this acceleration? We know that the force acting on the satellite is the gravitational force. Therefore, the satellite falls with the acceleration due to gravity. However, this acceleration due to gravity does not have the value of 9.80 m/s2 , but the value of the acceleration due to gravity at that particular distance from the center of the Earth. Remember that 9.80 m/s2 is the acceleration due to gravity at the surface of the Earth, which is at a distance from the center of the Earth equal to the Earth's radius. 126 Rotation and the Universal Law of Gravitation Figure 6.15. The gravitational force acts on astronaut Wendy Lawrence (at work on the ¯ight deck of the Space Shuttle Discovery) in such a way that she is kept moving in circles around the Earth. (Courtesy NASA.) When the space shuttle is in orbit around the Earth, the shuttle, the astronauts and all the objects inside it appear weightless, since the shuttle in orbit is in free fall. As we all have seen many times on the television images broadcast from space, when an astronaut lets go of a pen, it continues going around the Earth at the same speed as the rest of the shuttle and appears to be ¯oating inside the spacecraft. Since the gravitational force is proportional to the mass, the magnitude of the gravitational force keeping the astronaut in orbit is larger than the gravitational force keeping the pen, with a smaller mass, in orbit. The gravitational force acts on the astronaut and the pen in the exact right proportion to keep them moving in circles together. In chapter 3 we said that mass was the measure of the inertia of a body. By Newton's second law, a net force acting on an object is proportional to the acceleration of the body and to the body's resistance to acceleration or its inertial mass. In this chapter, however, mass has been used as a quantity that is proportional to the gravitational force. We might call this mass gravitational mass. In 1922, an experiment performed in Budapest by Roland von EoÈtvoÈs showed that the gravitational force acts in exactly the right proportions on objects of different masses. In other words, within the accuracy of his experiment, the gravitational and inertial masses were the same. A recent reanalysis of the data taken by EoÈtvoÈs seemed to indicate a slight discrepancy implying that gravity does not act in the exact required proportions. If this were to be the case, an object with a larger gravitational mass would fall to the ground with a greater acceleration. Some 127 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS The frontiers of physics: The Global Positioning Satellite System In orbit at an altitude of about 20 000 km, an armada of 21 satellites broadcasting a continuous signal would potentially allow people to determine their location with millimeter precision. Although the satellites that form the US Department of Defense's Global Positioning Satellite System (GPS) were placed in orbit in the mid 1970s for military purposes, provisions were also made for civilian use. The satellites broadcast high-frequency radio waves continuously. The signal propagates in all directions with the same speed (the speed of light). Since the speed of light is known to a high degree of accuracy, one would only need to know how long it took the signal to arrive at one's location to determine the distance to a particular satellite. The designers of the GPS system borrowed a technique used by astronomers to determine distances to other planets. This technique involves sending coded signals at predetermined known times. Since the code is known, comparing the signal from the satellite with the known coded signal shifted in time to various intervals allows the receiver to determine how long the signal has been traveling. Knowing the distance to one satellite is not enough to determine one's location in space. If you were to determine that one of the satellites is 25 000 km away, you could be anywhere on a large sphere 25 000 km in radius centered on the satellite. Determining the distance to a second satellite would narrow your possible position to a circle (the intersection between the two spheres around each satellite). A third satellite will reduce the possible positions to 2 points (the intersection of this third sphere with the previous circle) and a fourth satellite will narrow this down to one unique point. Since the GPS was intended for military purposes, the signals were originally encrypted to prevent potential adversaries from using the system to determine the position of their troops. The designers wanted to allow for limited civilian use and released slightly incorrect information about the timing 128 Rotation and the Universal Law of Gravitation of the signals. The designers estimated that this error would allow other parties to determine their position at best within 100 m. Soon, however, scientists were able to devise methods to circumvent the clock errors and managed to increase the accuracy to within a few millimeters. The intentional degrading of the signal has been discontinued, increasing the resolution of satellite navigation devices to about 20 m. Millimeter accuracy is available with the corrections still being provided by the US Coast Guard and by commercial providers. scientists proposed the existence of a new force, the ®fth force, that would explain the new ®ndings. This ®fth force is related to the total number of protons and neutrons in the nuclei of different substances. Recent experiments at Los Alamos National Laboratory and at the Joint Institute for Laboratory Astrophysics in Colorado have cast some doubts about the existence of such a ®fth force. More sophisticated experiments are currently underway in an attempt to clarify the situation. We should point out, however, that these discrepancies are extremely small. 129 7 ATOMS: BUILDING BLOCKS OF THE UNIVERSE The underlying structure of matter The question of the nature of matter is perhaps as old as humanity. Twenty-®ve centuries ago, Thales of Miletus ± the idealized Greek thinker credited by Aristotle as the founder of European philosophy ± is believed to have posed that question. Clearly, discovering the hidden structure of nature constitutes one of the most basic reasons for our exploration of the world. Up to this point, we have occupied ourselves with the behavior of matter. We now turn our attention to the underlying structure of matter. The Atomic Hypothesis If some global catastrophe were to destroy civilization and you were one of the few survivors, what would be the best single statement that you could communicate to the next generations? The late Nobel Prizewinning physicist Richard P Feynman had a good candidate for this statement: the atomic hypothesis. Feynman states this hypothesis as follows: ``All things are made up of atoms ± little particles that move around in perpetual motion, attracting each other when they are a little distance apart, but repelling upon being squeezed into one another.'' Why is this statement so important? Because it is the basis for modern physics, the physics that has made possible the computer chip, television, modern communications and electronics. Modern physics began with the con®rmation of the atomic hypothesis at the end of the nineteenth century. 133 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Early concept of the atom The Greek philosopher Leucippus (believed to have been born in Miletus about 490 BC) is sometimes credited as the originator of the atomic principle. However, it is his student Democritus, a Greek natural philosopher, who was responsible for its introduction into Greek thought. Democritus said that matter was made up of small, indivisible particles, which he called ``atoms'', from the Greek word for ``indivisible.'' As the scienti®c method (as we understand it today) did not exist in the time of Democritus, it did not occur to anyone to check ideas against experiment. People simply chose among these different ideas on the basis of taste and personal preference. And the views of Democritus were not widely accepted by most philosophers of his time. The atomic concept lay dormant until the nineteenth century, when it was revived by the work of the English scientist John Dalton. Dalton proposed an atomic theory in which he stated that matter is composed of atoms, which he considered to be indivisible particles; that the atoms of a given element are identical; and that atoms are arranged, in chemical reactions, to form molecules. By this time physicists had some understanding of electricity and had identi®ed what the American physicist and statesman Benjamin Franklin called positive charge and negative charge. Experiments had shown that two positive charges repel each other, two negative charges also repel each other, but that a positive charge and a negative charge attract each other (®gure 7.1). By studying how electrical currents decompose water and other chemical compounds, the English physicist Michael Faraday Figure 7.1. Like charges (all positive or all negative) repel each other, whereas unlike charges (a positive and a negative) attract each other. 134 Atoms: Building Blocks of the Universe Figure 7.2. When a battery is connected across the two electrodes inside an evacuated glass tube or cathode ray tube, a green glow appears in the glass. realized that electricity exists in discrete units or particles. In 1891 these particles of electricity were named electrons. These two discoveries would eventually help explain a seemingly unrelated phenomenon that had baf¯ed scientists for years. During the last decade of the nineteenth century physicists tried to understand the nature of the strange and fascinating glow that appeared when an electric current passed through a wire inside a glass tube from which air had been evacuated. Two metal discs, or electrodes, sealed into the ends of a long glass tube, were connected to a high-voltage battery (®gure 7.2). When the battery was connected, a green glow became visible in the glass. Sometimes, investigators would place ¯uorescent materials inside the tube which would also glow when the electrical current was present. Since the rays seemed to emanate from the electrode connected to the negative end of the battery which was called the cathode, these rays were known as cathode rays, and the evacuated glass tube as a cathode ray tube. These tubes were the forerunners of today's TV picture tubes. The modern computer monitor is still called a CRT, an abbreviation for cathode ray tube. Sir Joseph John Thomson was the director of the Cavendish Laboratory in Cambridge, England. With a staff of twenty, ``J J'' had designed experiments with cathode ray tubes for more than a decade, attempting to decipher the nature of the glow. 135 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Obviously, something, was passing out of the cathode, through the vacuum, and colliding with the positive electrode. On Friday, April 29, 1897, Thomson announced that the glowing beam was not made up of light waves, as most physicists held. Rather, cathode rays were particles (corpuscles, as they were called then) carrying negative electric charge. These corpuscles were ¯ying off the negatively charged cathode into the positive anode. Thomson was able to show that these corpuscles were electrons and was also able to determine the ratio of their mass to the electric charge. From this ratio he concluded that the mass of the electron was about two thousand times smaller than the mass of the lightest atom (hydrogen). Thomson's discovery had tremendous implications. From Democritus to Dalton, atoms were thought to be the most basic constituents of matter. Yet Thomson had discovered something two thousand times smaller than an atom. From his experiments he was forced to conclude that atoms were not indivisible; they were made up of electrons. Electrons, he said, were the basic components of the atom. First models of the atom The idea that matter is made up of atoms was beginning to be accepted by the turn of the twentieth century. After Thomson discovered the electron in 1897 he and other physicists began to realize that the atom must be a complex structure. Thomson himself put forward a model for this complex atom. It has been called the ``plum pudding'' model because it represented the atom as a homogeneous sphere of positive electric charge in which the negatively charged electrons were embedded (®gure 7.3). Things moved rapidly during the last decade of the nineteenth century. In 1895 Wilhelm Conrad RoÈntgen in Germany discovered a highly penetrating and invisible radiation that he called X-rays. A few weeks after RoÈntgen announced his discovery before the Physical Medical Society in WuÈrzburg, Antoine Henri Becquerel in Paris discovered radioactivity by experimenting with uranium crystals. Working in Becquerel's laboratory, Pierre and Marie Curie discovered two other radioactive elements, which they named polonium and radium. 136 Atoms: Building Blocks of the Universe Figure 7.3. Thomson's model of the atom: a homogeneous sphere of positive charge with negative electrons embedded in it. However, it was Ernest Rutherford, a New Zealander who studied under J J Thomson at England's Cavendish Laboratory, who showed that the rays given off by radium were of at least two different kinds. By placing thin sheets of aluminum in the path of the rays he stopped one kind of radiation, which he called alpha rays. The other kind, which penetrated thicker sheets, was named beta rays. A third type of radiation, gamma rays, was discovered a year later. The Curies and Henri Becquerel showed in 1900 that beta rays have negative electric charge. In 1907 Rutherford proved that the alpha particles were helium atoms with the electrons removed. Thus they had to be positively charged. In 1908 Rutherford was awarded the Nobel Prize for his investigations on radioactivity. Most scientists do their most important work before they are honored with the Nobel Prize. This was not the case with Rutherford. In that very same year of 1908, Rutherford and his assistant Hans Geiger were looking for a way to detect alpha rays and discovered that a screen coated with zinc sul®de would ¯ash where an alpha particle struck the screen. Thus, such a screen could serve as a detector of alpha particles. Rutherford decided to use his newly discovered detectors to investigate the structure of atoms. This presented a problem, though. Rutherford knew that the atoms were too small to be seen. How could he investigate 137 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 7.4. Although the water surface in a deep well might not be visible, we can ®nd out how deep the well is by listening to the sound of a stone as it hits the water. Similarly, Rutherford's experiment allowed him to probe the atom, too small to be seen directly. something that he could not even see? By ®ring a projectile at an unseen object and analyzing the projectile's behavior as it emerges, information about the nature of the interaction with the unseen object can be obtained, much in the same way as the sound of a stone hitting the surface of the water in a deep well can yield information about its depth (®gure 7.4). This is more or less what Rutherford decided to do. He set up an experiment to shoot alpha particles at a sheet of gold foil with a zinc sul®de screen placed at some distance from the gold foil (®gure 7.5). His collaborator Hans Geiger, who did most of the counting, observed that most of the alpha particles underwent very small de¯ections of only one degree or less. This was of course in accordance with Thomson's plum pudding model of the atom. A fast alpha particle ± with positive electric charge ± would pass through the electrons almost unde¯ected. The positive charge in Thomson's model was spread uniformly over the entire volume of the atom and thus was not concentrated, like that of the alpha particle. As soon as the alpha particle penetrated the atom, the positive charge of the atom would perhaps slow down the particle's motion but, since this charge was not localized at one point, it would not de¯ect the particle's trajectory. Rutherford, however, decided to ask a young undergraduate 138 Atoms: Building Blocks of the Universe Figure 7.5. Schematic representation of Rutherford's experimental set up. The large angle de¯ections of the scattered particles forced Rutherford to conclude that the atom must have a positively charged nucleus. student named Ernest Marsden to look for alpha particles at angles up to 458. Marsden did ®nd a few ¯ashes at 458. Encouraged by this, he decided to swing the telescope to larger angles, even past 908 and found ¯ashes from the front side of the experiment. Rutherford was astonished. The de¯ections at such large angles forced Rutherford to conclude that the atom must have a positively charged nucleus. Some 20 years later he would comment, ``It was quite the most incredible event that has ever happened to me in my life. It was almost as incredible as if you ®red a 15-inch shell at a piece of tissue paper and it came back and hit you. On consideration, I realized that this scattering backward must be the result of a single collision, and when I made the calculations I saw that it was impossible to get anything of that order of magnitude unless you took a system in which the greater part of the atom was concentrated in a minute nucleus.'' In 1911 Rutherford published his new model of the atom in which the positive electric charge is concentrated in a core that carries almost the entire mass of the atom, and the negatively charged electrons are uniformly distributed around the nucleus (®gure 7.6). Rutherford concluded that more than 99.9% of the mass of the atom was concentrated in the nucleus, which occupies about one part in 1014 of the volume of the atom. 139 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 7.6. Rutherford's nuclear model of the atom. The positively charged nucleus is surrounded by a uniform spherical distribution of negative electrons. The Japanese physicist Hantaro Nagaoka, one of Japan's ®rst physicists, had proposed a model of the atom with a ring of electrons in orbit about a small nucleus. His conclusion did not come from experimental evidence, like Rutherford's. There is no evidence that Rutherford knew of Nagaoka's model. Rutherford's nuclear model explained the observational evidence very well. There was a major problem, however. Physicists knew that if an electrically charged particle orbits around a center, it must radiate energy. The electron then must lose some of its energy with this radiation and should spiral down into the nucleus with the resulting collapse taking less than a microsecond. If this were really the case, atoms would not be stable and we would not be here to ponder these questions. In 1913, the 28-year-old Danish physicist Niels Bohr, who had worked with Rutherford in England, proposed a solution to this problem, which involved a remarkable property of light that had been discovered only a few years before. Until then, light had been considered to be a wave phenomenon. This discovery would result in the awarding of the Nobel prize to two of the most famous scientists that ever lived: Albert Einstein and Max Planck. To understand the importance of this discovery, we need to become more familiar with the language of waves. (A more detailed treatment of waves is undertaken in chapter 15.) 140 Atoms: Building Blocks of the Universe Waves and quanta We are all familiar with water waves and waves on a string (®gure 7.7). The ripples that form on the surface of the water after a child throws a pebble in the water are one of the most common and familiar examples of what we call wave motion. The rapid up and down motion of a guitar string after a skilled player plucks it, displaces the air molecules around it, forcing them to collide with other nearby air molecules. The ®rst molecules bounce back after the collisions only to collide with the returning string again, which sends them back toward the second set of molecules, themselves returning from other collisions. Very quickly, these molecular collisions spread out in all directions from the vibrating guitar string. Eventually, they reach our ears where, after traveling through the ear canal, they set the eardrum into similar oscillations. Hair cells a few thousandths of a millimeter thick begin then to move in response to these oscillations. Their motion is transformed into electrical impulses that travel to our brain at about 100 miles per hour. There, in a process that physics cannot yet explain, we feel a sensation that we describe as pleasure. Figure 7.7. Ripples formed on the surface of the water are one of the most familiar examples of wave motion. 141 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS These are examples of mechanical waves, and we know from experience that these waves propagate through some medium (water, the string, the air, the ear membrane or the hair cells in our examples). Although we cannot see sound waves, we know that they need some medium to travel through. The elasticity of the medium allows a disturbance created at some point in space to propagate through the medium. As a disturbance propagates, energy is transmitted through the medium without transferring matter. A wave, then, is a mechanism for the transmission of energy which does not require the actual translocation of matter. We can convince ourselves that this is the case by observing a piece of driftwood ¯oating in the water. As the waves pass by, we will see the wood rise and fall. The driftwood does not travel with the wave. The water moves up and down with the wood, while the wave travels from one point to another. Light, on the other hand, is a wave that does not require a medium to propagate. The main evidence for the wave nature of light lies with the phenomenon of interference. If you drop two pebbles into a pond you will notice that at certain places the crests from the two waves meet and reinforce each other, while at other places, where a crest meets a trough, the two waves cancel each other out (®gure 7.8). When two crests or two troughs meet, the waves interfere constructively, and when a crest meets a trough, the waves interfere destructively. Combining two wave motions, then, can result in nothing. Two particles cannot annihilate each other like that. We can draw an important conclusion from our brief look at wave phenomena. Waves behave very differently from particles. Particles travel in straight lines when free of external forces and they do not show interference. Waves do. Although some Greek philosophers believed that light was composed of particles that travel in straight lines (even Isaac Newton in the seventeenth century favored this idea), by the end of the nineteenth century there was overwhelming evidence that light was a wave phenomenon. As has been known since around 1803 when the English scientist Thomas Young demonstrated it in a series of landmark experiments, light shows the phenomenon of interference, characteristic of waves. Young also showed experimentally that different wavelengths of light correspond to the different colors that we perceive. 142 Atoms: Building Blocks of the Universe Figure 7.8. Interference of two wave motions. The waves are produced by two vibrating rods in a water tank. The circular waves combine to produce a pattern of alternating regions of moving and still water. (From PSSC Physics Seventh Edition, by Haber-Schaim, Dodge, Gardner, and Shore. Published by Kendall/Hunt Publishing Company, 1991.) The colors observed in soap bubbles are an example of interference with light, produced when the light waves are re¯ected from the front and back of the thin ®lm of the bubble and meet. When white light, which consists of light waves of all the colors or frequencies, shines on the bubble, certain frequencies interfere destructively. The colors corresponding to these frequencies disappear from the re¯ected light. Since the re¯ected light lacks several frequencies, it appears colored. Although by the turn of the present century it seemed very clear that light was a wave, this idea was going to be seriously challenged, as we are about to learn. In 1900, the German physicist Max Planck was attempting to explain the relationship between the temperature of a hot object and the color of the radiation emitted. This problem had been in the minds of physicists for some time because the theory did not ®t the experimental data for radiation emitted in the ultraviolet. The assumption had always been that the light 143 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS was emitted from the hot body in a continuous manner. After many failed attempts, Planck reluctantly incorporated into his theory the assumption that this radiation was being emitted not continuously but in discrete amounts. His equation now matched the experimental data perfectly. According to Planck's new (and, as it turned out, revolutionary) assumption, the energy emitted by a hot object could only have certain discrete values, as if it were carried out in little bundles or packets. Planck called these bundles of energy quanta. The discreteness of the energy emitted was expressed through a constant h, now called Planck's constant, which has a value of 6:63  10ÿ34 J s. Planck's discovery was an ``act of desperation,'' as he would call it later, without physical basis and done for the purpose of explaining that particular experimental fact. He would attempt in vain to ®nd an explanation for his radical assumption within classical physics for the rest of his life. In 1905, the young Albert Einstein, unable to obtain a post as professor of physics because of his rebellious character, was working as a clerk at a patent of®ce in Berne. The job, he said later, was not very demanding and left him plenty of time to work on physics. One of the problems that he considered was the way in which electrons were ejected from certain metals when light was shining on them. Although the phenomenon had been known since 1887, physicists were puzzled by the fact that the kinetic energies of the released electrons did not seem to be at all related to the brightness of the light shining on the metal. Energetic electrons were released from metals even under extremely weak light. Einstein realized that the puzzle arose from the assumption that light was a wave and that a gentle wave (a weak light beam) could not propel an electron at great speeds. Building on Planck's discovery, Einstein proposed that light does not only behave as a wave, as the interference phenomena showed, but also as a bundle of energy packets that he called light quanta or photons. A weak beam of light of a certain color is composed not of weaker bundles of energy but of fewer bundles of the same strength as those of an intense beam of light of the same color. Each one of the (few) quanta that make up the weak light beam is as capable of releasing a fast electron as the quanta that make up the stronger beam. 144 Atoms: Building Blocks of the Universe Einstein generalized Planck's theory. He assumed that the quanta of energy that Planck had introduced were also characteristic of light rather than a special property related only to a single phenomenon. Light is not simply emitted in bundles of energy; light is made up of these bundles. The Bohr model of the atom We are now ready to understand the basic ideas behind Niels Bohr's model of the atom. Bohr's model was similar to Rutherford's planetary model, but with some important differences. Bohr postulated that the electrons moved around the nucleus in certain speci®c orbits, which he called stationary orbits. Since electrons are negatively charged, they are attracted to the positive nucleus. This attractive electric force provides the centripetal acceleration of the electron as it orbits the nucleus. In these orbits the energy of the electrons (the sum of kinetic and electric potential energy) remained constant; thus the electrons did not radiate energy. Only when the electrons moved from one stationary orbit to another orbit closer to the nucleus, decreasing their potential energy, did they radiate energy. For an electron to jump to a higher orbit it had to absorb energy. Therefore, when the electrons moved from one stationary orbit, or state, to another, they absorbed or emitted energy. Bohr used Planck's formula to compute the allowed stationary orbits of electrons in orbit; he called this procedure his ``quantization condition.'' He postulated that only certain values of the angular momentum, L, of the orbiting electron were allowed. The lowest value of the angular momentum was simply Planck's constant h divided by 2. Higher values of L were multiples of this minimum value, namely Lˆ nh 2 where n was a positive integer. Thus, the angular momentum of the electron was ``quantized''; that is, it took only certain discrete values. For each allowed value of L, a corresponding value of the energy of the electron was calculated. In Bohr's theory, each allowed orbit corresponds to an energy level: the higher the 145 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 7.9. A marble on a staircase has quantized values of its potential energy since it can only reside on a particular step and cannot ¯oat in between steps. In contrast, a marble on a ramp can acquire any intermediate value of the potential energy as it rolls from top to bottom of the ramp. orbit, the higher the energy level. Since each one of the electrons in an atom resides in one of the allowed orbits where it has a de®nite energy, the total energy of the atom must have a speci®c value. Thus, the atom's total energy is quantized. An analogy using a system from mechanics could help us visualize this concept. A marble on a staircase also has quantized values of its potential energy (®gure 7.9). It can only increase or decrease its energy in ®xed amounts which are determined by the height of each step. A marble on a ramp, on the other hand, can have any intermediate value of the potential energy as it rolls up or down the ramp. The quantization or discreteness of the energy levels in an atom guarantees that the light absorbed or emitted by an atom when one of its electrons undergoes a transition between orbits must be discrete also. Bohr postulated that when an electron jumped from one energy level to another, a photon was emitted or absorbed. The energy of the emitted or absorbed photon must equal the energy difference between the two energy levels. Figure 7.10 shows an energy level diagram with several possible transitions. Since each energy level corresponds to an allowed orbit with a speci®c value of the angular momentum, we use the positive integer n to indicate the different energy levels. The energy level with the lowest level, the ground state, has the value n ˆ 1; higher energy levels have values of n equal to 2, 3, and so on. The number n is called the principal quantum number. 146 Atoms: Building Blocks of the Universe Figure 7.10. Simpli®ed energy level diagram for an atom where several possible transitions are shown. Bohr calculated the allowed transitions between energy levels for the hydrogen atom and found that they agreed exactly with the experimental measurements. Soon, however, it became clear that his theory did not work well for other, more complicated atoms. There were other problems, too. No explanation was given for the mechanism of absorption and emission of energy when an electron jumped orbits nor for the assumption that the electron did not radiate when in an stationary orbit. Nevertheless, Bohr's theory was the ®rst attempt at explaining the structure of the atom and as such, it opened the road for a more complete and successful theory, quantum mechanics. We shall study the fundamental concepts of this theory in Part 7 of the text. Molecules Although Bohr's atomic theory does not work for atoms other than hydrogen (and therefore is not completely satisfactory), it is still used to calculate the atomic properties of hydrogen and as the starting point for approximate calculations for other atoms. The Bohr model has also been used to obtain an estimate of the way in which atoms interact with each other. More sophisticated calculations based on quantum mechanics have then been undertaken to obtain a more accurate result. Atoms of one particular element bond to other atoms in very speci®c ways, which are governed by the properties of the 147 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS electrons of those atoms and their arrangement around their nuclei. Two or more atoms can combine to form a molecule. The combination of two hydrogen atoms (H) and one of oxygen (O) form the water molecule (H2 O). Two atoms of carbon (C), three of hydrogen, and one of chlorine (Cl) form the vinyl chloride molecule, a carcinogenic gas which is manufactured in great quantities because it can be used to form polyvinyl chloride (PVC), a very useful plastics material. Twenty carbon atoms, twenty-eight hydrogen atoms and one oxygen form the retinal molecule, the forerunner of the rhodopsin and iodopsin molecules which absorb the light that reaches the rods and cones, the photoreceptor cells in the retina of your eye. We can think of a molecule as a stable con®guration of several nuclei and electrons. As such, this view is an extension of the concept of the atom. The atoms that form the molecule lose their identities and the molecule becomes the new building block of matter. The bonding of the atoms that form a molecule is due to the sharing of electrons by the atoms. A shared electron pair forms a molecular bond. This type of bonding is called a covalent bond. Not all combinations of atoms end up as molecules. Some atoms combine to form a compound. A compound can be considered as formed by the association of several atoms in such a way as to maintain the identities of the individual atoms without forming a separate unit. An ionic bond is such a case. In an ionic bond, the bonding is due to the electrical attraction between oppositely charged ions. Recall that atoms are electrically neutral and are composed of a positive nucleus at the center and negative electrons around this nucleus. Since electrons occupy the outermost parts of the atom, they can be removed from or added to atoms to form ions. A positive ion is an atom lacking one or more electrons, whereas a negative ion is formed when one or more electrons are added to a neutral atom. The two ions do not exist as an isolated unit but as a cell of many such pairs. The ionic bonding between a sodium ion (Na‡ ) and a chloride ion (Clÿ ) in table salt is an example of an ionic compound. In this case, if we remove an electron from Na to form the positive ion of sodium (Na‡ ) and attach that electron to the neutral chlorine atom to form a Clÿ ion, the two ions, one positive and the other one negative, attract each other. Moving this electron from one atom to the other requires a 148 Atoms: Building Blocks of the Universe certain amount of energy. In this particular case, the total energy required is 1.3 eV. However, the energy of attraction between the two ions is greater than 1.3 eV. It is more energetically favorable for the ions to attract each other than to bring the electron back and form neutral atoms again. Physics in our world: Winemaking You may have noticed that wine labels say ``Contains Sul®tes.'' Wines actually contain sulfur dioxide, a molecule formed by the combination of one atom of sulfur and two of oxygen. Although the amount of sulfur dioxide present naturally in wines is no more than about 10 to 20 parts per million, a 1988 law requires winemakers to include the statement on their labels if their wines contain more than 10 parts per million. This law is intended to protect some people who suffer from asthma and who might be sensitive to it (about ®ve percent of asthmatics are sensitive to sul®tes). The sulfur dioxide molecule plays an important role in the winemaking process. Wine is made from fermented grapes. After the ripe grapes are crushed to release their juice, yeasts (one-celled organisms that exist on the grape skins) convert the sugar in the juice into alcohol, a process known as fermentation. When all the sugar has been converted into alcohol, the grape juice has become wine. The enormous variety of wines that are produced in the world comes not only from the different types of grape but also from the kind of container used to ferment the wine (oak or stainless steel), the temperature inside this container and even its size, and how long the wine is stored afterwards. During the fermentation process, sulfur dioxide is produced naturally in the grape juice. Because it is produced only in very small quantities, winemakers also add it to their wines. Sulfur dioxide prevents the growth of bacteria that would sour the wine into vinegar. Sulfur dioxide also prevents the growth of wild yeasts that would continue the fermentation of sweet wines after they are bottled. Finally, sulfur dioxide is an antioxidant; that is, it prevents oxygen from combining with the wine. 149 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 7.11. Graphic representation of the NaCl ionic compound. Each Na‡ ion is surrounded by 6 Clÿ ions and each Clÿ ion is surrounded by 6 Na‡ ions. Since no particular Na‡ ion is attached exclusively to a particular Clÿ ion, there is no unique NaCl molecule. Although sodium atoms bind to chlorine atoms in the way just described, molecules are not formed. Each sodium ion is surrounded by six chloride ions and each chloride ion is surrounded by six sodium ions. Since there is no exclusive union between any two given ions, there is no unique NaCl molecule (®gure 7.11). 150 8 THE HEART OF THE ATOM: THE NUCLEUS Raw material: Protons and neutrons Werner Heisenberg, a 29-year-old professor of physics at the University of Leipzig, told Bohr in 1931 that he had given up concerning himself with fundamental questions, ``which are too dif®cult for me.'' Heisenberg had in mind his failure to explain the physics of the atomic nucleus with the quantum mechanics that he had invented only ®ve years earlier. In the Christmas issue of the Berliner Tageblatt, he wrote that progress on fundamental questions such as the quantum mechanics of the nucleus would have to wait for new discoveries about that small piece of matter at the heart of the atom. ``Whether indeed the year 1932 will lead us to such knowledge is quite doubtful.'' Heisenberg was mistaken. Six months later he came up with the ®rst quantum mechanics of the nucleus, a theory that became the basis for the nuclear physics of today. Rutherford's scattering experiment had given physicists the ®rst clues about the size, charge, and mass of the nucleus of the atom: The nucleus is about 10ÿ15 meters across, is positively charged, and contains most of the mass of the atom. The atom itself, on the other hand, is about 10 000 times larger and is electrically neutral. If the atom were expanded to the size of an auditorium, the nucleus would be represented by a pea at the center. As soon as the existence of the nucleus was demonstrated, physicists started thinking about its composition. Rutherford had identi®ed the basic positive charge, which had been observed as early as 1886 by Eugen Goldstein in Germany, as nuclei of hydrogen. He proposed the name proton for this particle. It was found that the proton was 1836 times more massive than the 151 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS electron, but contained a positive electric charge of the same magnitude as the negative electric charge of the electron. For the lightest element, hydrogen, things were relatively simple: its nucleus was a single proton with an electron orbiting around it, making the atom neutral. Furthermore, the ratio of the mass of the hydrogen nucleus to that of the orbiting electron was consistent with the ratio of the mass of the proton to the mass of the electron. Things were not working well for the other atoms. Although it was known that the helium atom had two electrons and thus two protons in its nucleus, its mass was not simply twice the Pioneers of physics: Heisenberg's failing grade Perhaps the most important early twentieth century physicist after Einstein and Bohr, Werner Heisenberg rose meteorically to the top of his profession. He published his ®rst scienti®c paper at the age of 20, invented quantum mechanics at the age of 24, attained a full professorship in physics at the age of 25, and the Nobel Prize at the age of 32. Yet, this brilliant scientist almost failed to pass his ®nal oral doctoral examination. Because of his talent and his successes in theoretical physics, Heisenberg completed his dissertation research in a very short time. In Germany at the time, students entering the university could pursue studies leading toward a diploma ± equivalent to an American masters degree ± or toward a doctorate. The latter required being admitted by a professor into a research program with no speci®c course requirements. Heisenberg decided on the doctorate and took courses in mathematics and theoretical physics but neglected laboratory courses. Professor Wilhelm Wien was in charge of the physics laboratory and was also on Heisenberg's ®nal exam committee. When Heisenberg could not explain in detail the operation of an electric battery during the ®nal oral nor answer several questions about microscopes and telescopes, Wien decided to give him a failing grade for the dissertation. Fortunately for Heisenberg, the other professors on the committee gave him better grades and he squeezed through with a pass grade. 152 The Heart of the Atom: The Nucleus mass of the hydrogen atom. Thus, the nucleus of the helium atom, which Rutherford had identi®ed as being an alpha particle, and which was known to have a positive electric charge equivalent to the negative charge of two electrons, had to contain something more than just two protons. In 1920 Rutherford predicted the existence of a particle with no electric charge but possessing the same mass as that of the proton. William D Harkings in the United States, and Orme Masson in Australia also predicted its existence at about the same time. Harkings proposed the name neutron for this new subatomic particle. Twelve years later, James Chadwick, a former collaborator of Rutherford's, announced the discovery of neutrons. Chadwick received the 1935 Nobel prize in physics for this discovery. After the discovery of the neutron was announced, Heisenberg realized that this neutral particle provided the key to the physics of the nucleus. In a now classic three-part paper entitled ``On the composition of atomic nuclei,'' Heisenberg proposed that atomic nuclei were composed of two types of particles, protons and neutrons. Subsequent experiments veri®ed that this scheme was indeed correct. These two nuclear particles are collectively known as nucleons. The composition of the nucleus The present view of the nucleus is essentially the one proposed by Heisenberg; that is, the nucleus is composed of protons and neutrons. Protons have an electric charge of 1:6  10ÿ19 C, where the C stands for coulomb, the SI unit of electric charge. The mass of one proton is 1:673  10ÿ27 kg, slightly smaller than the mass of a neutron, which is 1:675  10ÿ27 kg. Neutrons, as we said earlier, have no electric charge. Since protons and electrons have equal and opposite charges and the atom is electrically neutral, the number of protons in the nucleus must be equal to the number of orbiting electrons in the atom. Oxygen, for example, has eight protons in its nucleus and eight orbiting electrons. The number of protons in the atom determines the atomic number, Z. The atomic number of oxygen is thus 8. The total 153 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS number of nucleons ± that is, the total number of neutrons and protons ± is called the atomic mass number, A, since it gives the approximate total mass of the nucleus. The atom of oxygen, with 8 protons and 8 neutrons, has an atomic mass number of 16. The number of neutrons is given by the neutron number, N. Thus A ˆ Z ‡ N: The different nuclei are designated by the same symbols used to name the corresponding chemical elements. So we would use H for the nucleus of hydrogen, O for oxygen, and so on. The different types of nuclei are referred to as nuclides. A complete description of a nuclide is given by specifying its symbol together with the atomic and mass numbers, in the form A ZE where E is the chemical symbol for the element. The neutron number need not be speci®ed since N ˆ A ÿ Z. For example, the nucleus of oxygen with eight protons and eight neutrons is written as 168 O because its atomic number is 8 and its mass number is 16. The nucleus of helium, with two protons and two neutrons, is written as 42 He. The number of protons in the nucleus or the atomic number determines the element. The nucleus of carbon, for example, contains 6 protons. The number of neutrons can vary, however, and we might ®nd carbon nuclei containing different number of nucleons, like 126 C, 136 C, and 146 C, with 6, 7, and 8 neutrons respectively. Nuclei with the same number of protons but a different number of neutrons are called isotopes. The nucleus of the most common isotope of hydrogen, as we have seen, consists of a single proton. Another less common isotope of hydrogen, deuterium or heavy hydrogen, has a nucleus with one proton and one neutron (®gure 8.1). Water made from deuterium is called heavy water. While chemically indistinguishable from regular water, heavy water has different physical properties. For example, it boils at a slightly higher temperature than regular water. The isotope 126 C of carbon is used to de®ne a new unit of mass for atomic and nuclear calculations. Because the mass of the proton and the mass of the neutron are slightly different and much larger than the mass of the electron, this new unit of 154 The Heart of the Atom: The Nucleus Figure 8.1. The nucleus of the most common isotope of hydrogen consists of one proton, represented by a small sphere with a ‡ (for its positive electric charge). Deuterium, another hydrogen isotope, contains one proton and one neutron. mass was de®ned to take this into account. The atomic mass unit (amu) is de®ned as one-twelfth of the mass of the isotope 126 C. Because the mass of the atom is used, this de®nition includes the mass of the 6 electrons in this isotope. As we saw in chapter 1, the conversion factor between atomic mass units and kilograms is 1 amu ˆ 1:660 566  10ÿ27 kg: The following table lists the masses of the proton, neutron and electron in amu and kg. Particle Mass (amu) Mass (kg) proton neutron electron 1.007 276 1.008 665 5:486  10ÿ4 1:6726  10ÿ27 1:6750  10ÿ27 9:1094  10ÿ31 The glue that keeps the nucleus together There is an apparent problem with what we have just said about the composition of the nucleus. As we saw in Chapter 3, positive charges repel each other (®gure 8.2). Since the nucleus contains only positively charged protons and uncharged neutrons, then the protons should repel each other and the nucleus should ¯y apart. In fact, the electrical repulsion between two protons in the nucleus is about 100 billion times greater than the electrical Figure 8.2. Electrostatic repulsion between two protons. 155 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 8.3. The attractive nuclear force between two protons separated by a distance of 2  10ÿ15 m is about 100 times greater than the repulsive electric force. attraction between the negative electrons and the positive nucleus. Furthermore, the neutrons do not help. They have no charge and there is no reason why they should remain together. Yet the nucleus does not ¯y apart. What keeps it together? There has to be an attractive force, stronger than the electrical repulsion between two protons when they are close together, that acts not only on the charged protons but also on the uncharged neutrons and keeps them together. This new force is called the strong nuclear force (®gure 8.3). At a distance of 2  10ÿ15 m the attractive strong nuclear force between two protons is about 100 times greater than their electrical repulsion. The nuclear force is charge independent; that is, it acts with the same strength on neutrons as it does on protons (®gure 8.4). It is also a short range force; that is, it becomes active at very short distances, over a range of 10ÿ14 to 10ÿ15 meter. If the nucleons are separated farther, the force approaches zero. Because of the short range nature of the nuclear force, a nucleon in the nucleus interacts only with its nearest neighbors. In a nucleus with more than about 30 nucleons, the interaction of a nucleon with its immediate neighbors is not affected by the total number of nucleons present in the nucleus. The nuclear force thus becomes saturated. The electrical force, on the other hand, has an in®nite range, so a proton feels the electrical repulsion of all the other protons in the nucleus. If a particular nucleus has too many protons, the electrical repulsion on any one proton from all the other protons present may exceed the nuclear attraction thereby making the nucleus unstable. This type of nucleus is called radioactive and 156 The Heart of the Atom: The Nucleus Figure 8.4. The nuclear force acts with the same strength on protons or neutrons. We say that the nuclear force is charge independent. is the same kind of nucleus as was used by Rutherford in his experiments. Because the nuclear force binds the nucleons together in the nucleus, work must be done to separate them. This is analogous to the case of two magnets sticking together with their opposite poles facing; work must be done to separate them (®gure 8.5). Conversely, when you bring the magnets together with the opposite poles facing, they pull your hands closer; the magnetic force does work on you. The energy required to move your hands comes from the magnetic potential energy stored in the two magnets. Similarly, when nucleons are assembled together to form a nucleus, energy is released. Thus, the total energy of the nucleus (bound system) is less than the total energy of its separated nucleons. This energy difference is called the binding energy and is equal to the work needed to separate the nucleus into its component nucleons. From Einstein's special theory of relativity, it is known that if the energy of the free nucleons is more than the total energy of the nucleus, then the mass of the nucleons must be greater than the 157 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 8.5. You must do work to separate two magnets with their opposite poles facing. If you stop pulling them apart, the magnets will move closer together, pulling your hands along and doing work on you. The energy required to move your hands is stored in the two separated magnets. mass of the nucleus formed from the same nucleons. As we shall see in Chapter 19, the difference in mass is converted into energy when the nucleons are brought together, according to Einstein's formula E ˆ mc2 , where c is the speed of light, equal to 2:997 925  108 m/s. Einstein's formula allows us to ®nd the energy equivalent in MeV of any given mass. The energy equivalent of 1 amu can be calculated as follows (recall that 1 amu is equal to 1:660 566  10ÿ27 kg): E ˆ mc2 ˆ 1:660 566  10ÿ27 kg†  2:997 925  108 m=s†2 ˆ 14:9244  10ÿ11 kg m2 =s2 : Since we are using SI units throughout, the units of energy should come out in joules (as we saw in Chapter 4, 1 kg m2 =s2 ˆ 1 J). Remembering that 1 eV ˆ 1:602  10ÿ19 J, or 1 MeV ˆ 106 eV ˆ 1:602  10ÿ13 J, we have E ˆ mc2 ˆ 14:9244  10ÿ11 J†  1 MeV ˆ 931:5 MeV: 1:602  10ÿ13 J Figure 8.6 illustrates the fact that the mass of the nucleus and consequently the mass of the atom (42 He in the ®gure) must be smaller than the total mass of the component particles (two protons, two neutrons and two electrons). The ``missing mass'' or mass defect is the source of the energy that keeps the atom together. 158 The Heart of the Atom: The Nucleus Figure 8.6. The 42 He atom has less mass than its component particles. To get an idea of how strongly the nucleons are bound in the nucleus it is useful to calculate the binding energy per nucleon, obtained by dividing the total binding energy by the mass number A. For 42 He, the total binding energy is 28.3 MeV. Since the mass number (the total number of nucleons) is 4, the binding energy per nucleon is 7.1 MeV. If we calculate the binding energy per nucleon for different nuclei and make a graph of the values obtained against mass number, we ®nd that it increases with mass number, from 1.1 MeV for deuterium (an isotope of hydrogen) to about 8.0 MeV for oxygen-16. For nuclei with mass number greater than about 16, the binding energy per nucleon remains nearly the same, increasing slightly from A ˆ 18 to A ˆ 50 where it peaks at 8.7 MeV. Beyond A ˆ 50 it begins to decline to about 7.5 MeV for A ˆ 250 (®gure 8.7). The peak at around A ˆ 50 (the elements near iron in the middle of the periodic table), means that more energy is required to remove a nucleon from these elements; they are, consequently, more stable. Size and shape of the nucleus Most nuclei have a nearly spherical shape with a diameter of about 10ÿ15 m. Nuclear sizes were originally determined by means of scattering experiments similar to Rutherford's; fast alpha particles were shot at a nucleus and detected at the other 159 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 8.7. Binding energy per nucleon versus atomic mass number. Nuclei near the middle of the periodic table (mass number between 50 and 60) are more stable than elements at either end of the table, since the binding energies per nucleon for these middle elements are maximum. They are, therefore, more tightly bound. side. As in Rutherford's experiments, observing the distribution of the alpha particles after they interacted with the nucleus yielded information about the size of the target nucleus. Additional information about the nucleus was obtained when fast electrons replaced the alpha particles as projectiles. Electrons offer the advantage that they do not feel the nuclear force and therefore are only affected by the electrical force of attraction to the protons in the nucleus. Neutrons have also been used to measure nuclear dimensions. Since neutrons have no electric charge, they feel only the nuclear force. All these experiments have yielded information about the dimensions of the nucleus by measuring different parameters. From the experimental evidence obtained we know that the volume of the nucleus is proportional to the mass number A. Since the mass number is the total number of protons and neutrons in the nucleus, this result means that the nucleons are packed in more or less the same way in all nuclei. We can understand this concept better with an example. Suppose two children are given several ping-pong balls and some plasticine and told to build a large sphere using the plasticine as glue (®gure 8.8). If one 160 The Heart of the Atom: The Nucleus Figure 8.8. The two children build spheres with ping-pong balls stuck together with plasticine. The girl uses up 30 balls to build up her sphere while the boy uses 60. If they use the same amount of plasticine to stick each ball to the others, the balls will be equally packed. In this case, the 60-ball sphere will have twice the volume as the 30-ball one. Nucleons in nuclei are also equally packed and their volumes are proportional to the number of nucleons in the nucleus (its mass number). child uses up 30 balls to make her sphere and the second child uses 60 balls to make a sphere that occupies twice the volume, we can de®nitely say that the two children packed the balls the same distance apart; that is, they used more or less the same amount of plasticine to stick each ball to the others. If, however, the second child ended up with a sphere occupying a volume of only one and a half times, we conclude that he packed his ping-pong balls closer together. Nucleons in nuclei are equally packed. Nuclear energy levels Neutrons and protons in the nucleus, like electrons in the atom, must obey the rules of quantum mechanics. These rules specify that nucleons (protons and neutrons) can move only in certain 161 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 8.9. Nuclear energy level diagram. The nucleon energies are distributed in groups or shells, separated by gaps. N.B. Nucleons with higher energies are not necessarily orbiting farther away: the diagram refers only to the energy values. 162 The Heart of the Atom: The Nucleus allowed orbits. These orbits are speci®ed by four labels or quantum numbers. Similarly to the case of the electrons orbiting in the atom, the quantum number n determines the energy of the orbiting nucleon. This number can only take whole-number values; that is, 1, 2, 3, 4, etc. The higher the number, the higher is the value of the energy. For most purposes, we can say that a higher value of the energy means that the nucleon travels at a higher speed in its orbit within the nucleus. The second quantum number, the angular momentum quantum number, determines the shape of the orbit. Higher values of the angular momentum represent more circular orbits whereas lower values represent more elliptical ones. The third and fourth quantum numbers determine the direction in which the nucleon orbits and the orientation of this orbit in space. Using these quantum numbers, the possible energies of the allowed orbits can be determined. As shown in ®gure 8.9, these energies are distributed in groups or shells. As is the case in most cases governed by the laws of quantum mechanics, we must be careful not to assign too literal a meaning to these shells. All nucleon orbits have nearly the same average radius. The shells refer only to the energy values, not to the orbital sizes. 163 9 FLUIDS States of matter The atoms that make up all matter in the universe arrange themselves in different ways to form rocks, water, galaxies, trees or people. Different atoms interact in different ways to form a substance. When the interacting atoms of a substance are not moving about too much, they occupy more or less ®xed positions and arrange themselves in a geometric pattern which minimizes the interaction energy. This pattern is repeated throughout the substance. When this happens the substance is called a crystal (®gure 9.1). The atoms of a substance can also arrange themselves in other energy con®gurations which are not ordered and do not show a repetitive pattern, even when the atoms are not moving very much. In this case, the substance is noncrystalline or amorphous. Crystals and amorphous materials are solids. The Figure 9.1. A representation of a crystal of sodium chloride. 164 Fluids forces that bind the atoms together in a solid are strong enough for the solid to maintain its shape. When the binding forces are weaker, the atoms or molecules do not occupy ®xed positions and move at random. These substances are called ¯uids. Liquids and gases are ¯uids. In a liquid the binding forces between the molecules are strong enough to make the liquid stay together but weak enough to allow it to ¯ow. The molecules of a gas, on the other hand, are in chaotic random motion and interact only during very short times. Since the molecules of a gas are not bound together, the gas expands to ®ll any container. Density If you have ever held a small bottle ®lled with mercury, you probably remember the strange impression of holding such a heavy liquid. Actually, mercury is not, strictly, ``heavier'' than water nor any other liquid. You can certainly have a container ®lled with water that weighs as much as your small bottle with mercury (®gure 9.2). The only difference is that the bottle with water has to be much larger and contain much more water. Mercury is denser than water. If you take the same volumes of water and mercury, the mercury weighs much more; 13.6 times more, to be exact. This means that the mass of mercury is 13.6 times greater than the corresponding mass of water that occupies the same volume. If you want to have the same mass of both mercury and water, the amount of water required will occupy a volume 13.6 times as large as the volume of mercury. Thus if two substances have the same volume, the substance with the greater mass will have a greater density. That is, density is directly proportional to mass. Conversely, if you have two different substances with the same mass, the denser substance occupies a smaller volume. That is, density is inversely proportional to volume. The density of a substance is the mass per unit volume of the substance, or mass density ˆ : volume The Greek letter  (rho) is generally used to represent density. If we call the mass m and the volume V, we can write this 165 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 9.2. The bottle of water in the man's left hand has a volume 13.6 times as large as the small bottle with mercury of the same weight in his right hand. expression in symbols as ˆ m : V Since the gram was originally de®ned as the mass of 1 cubic centimeter of water, the density of water is equal to 1 gram/ cm3 or 1000 kg/m3 . 1000 kg is a metric tonne. The densities of other common substances are shown in Table 9.1. Pressure Fluids can exert forces on other bodies. Since a ¯uid is in contact with the surface of the container, the force that the ¯uid exerts on the container is not localized at any one particular point and instead distributes itself over the entire surface. Consider, for 166 Fluids Table 9.1. Densities of some common substances Substance Density (kg/m3 ) Substance Density (kg/m3 ) Hydrogen helium air oxygen wood (oak) steam (1008C) Oil Ice Water (48C) 0.090 0.1758 1.29 1.4 600±900 600 900 920 1000 human blood sea water bone iron copper silver lead mercury gold 1060 1300 1700±2000 7800 8930 10 500 11 300 13 600 19 300  At sea level atmospheric pressure and at 08C. example, a glass of water. Each molecule of water moves, on average, at speeds of over a thousand kilometers per hour and collides several billion times a second with other molecules and with the sides of the glass. Each collision with the surface of the glass exerts a tiny force. The sum of the billions of collisions that take place each second, each exerting a small force on a very small area of the glass, results in the total force that the water exerts on the surface of the glass. We can see that it is more convenient to consider the force per unit area of the surface, which we call the pressure, P: pressure ˆ force area or P ˆ F : A If we stop for a moment and consider a couple of examples, we might be able to visualize the concept of pressure better. If you hold a nail between your thumb and index ®nger, the sharp tip of the nail will push into your skin much more readily than the blunt head (®gure 9.3(a)). You feel that the pressure of the tip is greater, because the force is applied to a much smaller area. The smaller the area to which the force is applied, the greater the pressure. Conversely, the pressure is smaller if the area increases. This is the principle behind snowshoes (®gure 9.3(b)). By increasing the surface area in contact with the snow, the pressure that the person's body exerts is decreased. When somebody falls through thin ice in a frozen lake, rescue personnel approach the scene crawling, to minimize the pressure that their bodies exert on the ice. 167 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 9.3. (a) Since the same force is applied to a smaller area, the sharp end of the nail will push into your skin much more readily than the head. (b) By increasing the area in contact with the snow, the pressure is reduced and the boy does not sink in the snow. The SI unit of pressure is newtons per square meter (N/m2 ), which is called the pascal (Pa), in honor of the French scientist Blaise Pascal (1623±1662) who did pioneering work with ¯uids. Atmospheric pressure Galileo in his Two New Sciences (1638) wrote that a lift-type pump cannot pump water from a well deeper than about 10 meters. These pumps were used widely at the time to obtain drinking water but nobody knew exactly why they worked or why there was a limit to the depth of the well. It was a student of Galileo, Evangelista Torricelli, who solved the problem. By studying the results of his own experiments and those of his contemporaries Guericke, Pascal, and Boyle, Torricelli was able to explain that a lift pump works because of the pressure of the air. By pumping, the pressure at the top of the pipe is reduced. The pressure of the air on the water surface below pushes the water up the pipe. The air exerts pressure because the blanket of air surrounding the earth has weight. The force exerted on a 1 square meter area on the surface of the earth at sea level by the column of air above is 101 300 N. The pressure of the atmosphere at sea level is thus 101:3  103 N/m2 or 101.3 kPa. This is normal atmospheric 168 Fluids Figure 9.4. A column of water about 10 meters high exerts the same pressure as a column of air above the surface of the earth. pressure, called 1 atmosphere (atm). Thus, 1 atm ˆ 101:3 kPa: A column of water of about 10 meters high with a cross section of 1 m2 also weighs 101.3 kN. Consequently, this column of water exerts the same pressure as the air above the surface of the earth (®gure 9.4). Therefore, if a good lift-pump can reduce the pressure inside the pipe to almost zero, the atmospheric pressure can force water up to some 10 meters. It will not be able to raise water up to 11 meters, for example, since this requires a pressure that is larger than the atmospheric pressure at sea level. 169 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 9.5. The atmospheric pressure on the water in the bowl is larger than the pressure of the water in the glass. For the same reason, if you invert a glass of water into a bowl with water, the water does not ¯ow out of the glass into the bowl. The atmosphere pushes down on the water in the bowl with a force larger than the force exerted by the water in the glass (®gure 9.5). Torricelli performed his experiments on air pressure not with water but with mercury. Mercury, having a density of 13 600 kg/ m3 or 13.6 times the density of water, requires a column that is 13.6 times smaller than water to match the atmospheric pressure. A glass tube ®lled with mercury inverted into a pool of mercury is supported by the atmospheric pressure on the pool (®gure 9.6). At sea level, the air pressure supports a column of mercury 760 mm high. At higher altitudes, the air pressure is less, since there is less air above, and the mercury column that can be supported at these higher altitudes is less than 760 mm. Because it can be used to measure atmospheric pressure, Torricelli's invention is called a barometer, from the Greek baros, meaning weight. The pressure of air that supports a column of mercury 1 mm high is called a torr, in honor of Torricelli. At sea level the atmospheric pressure has an average value of 101.3 kPa or 760 mm of mercury or 760 torr. This pressure is also called 1 standard atmosphere (1 atm). Knowing the pressure of the air, we can calculate the mass of air above us. Assume that our bodies, when standing up, have a cross-sectional area of about 0.70 m2 . The weight of the air above is w ˆ F ˆ PA ˆ 101:3  103 N/m2 †  0.70 m2 ) or 71  103 N. Now, this weight is mg, and the value of the acceleration due to gravity, g, is still 9.8 m/s2 at altitudes of a few tens of kilometers. 170 Fluids Figure 9.6. Torricelli's barometer consists of a glass tube on a pool of mercury. The air above the mercury level in the tube has been evacuated (although mercury vapor is present). The air pressure at sea level is the same as the pressure of a column of mercury 760 mm high. Therefore, mˆ w 71  103 N ˆ ˆ 7200 kg: g 9:8 m=s2 Certainly, we cannot support a mass of 7200 kg over our shoulders. Why are we not crushed by this enormous weight? The reason is that the pressure of the air acts in all directions, not just downward. Every square centimeter of our bodies is subject to this pressure. The air pushes down and up and sideways 171 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS on us. And since there is air in our lungs, it pushes from the inside, too. All these forces balance out and we are not crushed by the atmospheric pressure. The air inside airliner cabins is kept at a pressure no less than the pressure of the air at an altitude of 2500 m above sea level. In the United States, aircraft that have accumulated more than 55 000 landings are barred from ¯ying above 7500 m until they pass a stringent inspection. At an altitude of 8000 m, if the fuselage structure has been weakened by cracks, the difference between the inside and outside pressure can cause a rupture. In April 1988 an older airplane with more than 90 000 landings tore open while ¯ying over Hawaii at an altitude of 8000 m. Much of the upper part of the fuselage behind the cockpit was ripped away, causing the death of a ¯ight attendant who was swept out of the cabin. Pressure in a liquid When you dive into the deep part of a swimming pool, you feel the pressure in your ears. This pressure increases as you descend to greater depths in a lake or the ocean. The pressure buildup is due to the weight of the water above you. In ®gure 9.7 the woman is swimming at a depth h (1 meter, for example). Consider the column of water pushing against a Figure 9.7. A swimmer at a depth h feels a pressure due to the water equal to gh. 172 Fluids patch of skin on her back, 10 cm on its side. The column of water has a volume V ˆ Ah so that its mass is m ˆ V ˆ  Ah†. The pressure of the column of water on the patch A is Pˆ F mg Ah†g ˆ ˆ A A A or P ˆ gh: Notice that the size of the patch is not important since the value of the area A does not appear in our expression for pressure. The pressure on the swimmer is proportional to the depth at which she swims. This is because the density of the liquid is constant no matter what the depth. Liquids are incompressible, since the electrons of the atoms and molecules, already very close to each other, resist getting any closer. Because the water molecules move at random in all possible directions, they collide with the swimmer's body from all sides, exerting pressure equally in all directions. The pressure (due to the liquid) on the woman, swimming 1 meter below the surface, would be P ˆ (1000 kg)(9.8 m/s2 ) (1 m) ˆ 9:8 kPa. The pressure on a ®sh, swimming in fresh water 1 meter below the surface would also be 9.8 kPa. Since there usually is atmospheric pressure acting on the surface of a liquid, the total pressure is the sum of the atmospheric pressure, Pa , and the pressure of the liquid: PT ˆ Pa ‡ gh: The fact that the pressure in a liquid depends only on the distance below the surface means that the pressure does not depend on the shape of the container. If we apply some external pressure to a liquid, by means of a piston, for example, as shown in ®gure 9.8, the pressure is transmitted undiminished to all points of the liquid. This was discovered by the French scientist and philosopher Blaise Pascal in 1651 and is known as Pascal's principle. In ®gure 9.8, the pressure exerted by the force F on the lid at the left side of the container is transmitted to all the points in the liquid and to the walls of the container. The pressure is transmitted also to the piston on the right, and if we assume that 173 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 9.8. An external pressure applied to a liquid is transmitted undiminished to all points in the liquid. This is called Pascal's principle. this piston can move without friction, it will rise as the piston on the left is pushed down. Pascal's principle is valid for any ¯uid in equilibrium. (For gases, it must be modi®ed to take into account the change in volume when the pressure changes.) For liquids, Pascal's principle is a consequence of the incompressibility of the liquids. The molecules of a liquid are nearly as close to each other as they are in a solid, so there is not much space left between them. Any pressure applied at some point in a liquid is transmitted to every point of the liquid as each molecule feels the pressure of the molecule behind. Because, as was mentioned earlier, the molecules move at random in all directions, the collisions take place in all possible directions, which results in the pressure being transmitted equally in all directions. The swimmer feels the pressure in her eardrums no matter what the orientation of her head is in the water. The hydraulic lift illustrated in ®gure 9.9 is an application of Pascal's principle. A force f applied to the piston of area a results in an external pressure P ˆ f =a. This pressure is transmitted to all the points in the liquid in all directions; in particular to the platform holding the car. If the section of the platform in contact with the liquid has an area A, this pressure will be also equal to the force lifting the car, F, divided by the area A. Because this area is much larger, the force lifting the car has to be larger to keep the same ratio. The hydraulic lift acts as a force magni®er, 174 Fluids Figure 9.9. Hydraulic lift. The pressure P ˆ f =a exerted by the piston of area a is transmitted to all points in the liquid. The pressure P ˆ F=A on the larger area A, must be the same as the pressure on the smaller area on the left. To maintain the same ratio, the force F acting on the larger platform must be larger. This larger force can balance a large weight (like that of a car) resting on the platform. so that a small force f on one side produces a large force F on the other that is able to lift the car. To compensate, the piston moves much farther than the platform, a distance A=a as great. The brake system of a car, illustrated schematically in ®gure 9.10, is another application of Pascal's principle. As you step on Figure 9.10. Brake system of a car. 175 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS the brake pedal, the increase in pressure is transmitted through the brake ¯uid, which causes movable pistons to push the brake shoes or pads against the drums or discs. Friction between these surfaces slows the car. Buoyancy In the third century BC, the Syracusan king Hieron II asked his relative Archimedes, who happened to be the greatest scientist of the time, to determine whether a gold crown the king had commissioned had more than the allowed mixture of silver in it, and to do this without destroying the crown. Archimedes was famous for the invention of ingenious mechanical devices. He is supposed to have constructed war machines that for three years held the invading Romans at bay in their siege of the city. Cranes mounted on the cliffs above the sea would hold heavy stones that pounded on the soldiers that ventured toward the walls. Similar cranes would be used to lift and overturn the landing ships. There is a story that he constructed a large mirror to re¯ect the sun's heat on the Roman ships and set them on ®re. Much of this was undoubtedly exaggerated, especially since we know about it only indirectly, from the writings of the later Greeks. Archimedes himself set no value on these devices, regarded them as beneath the dignity of pure science and published only his scienti®c work. The importance of his scienti®c work is probably best exempli®ed by his method for the calculation of the number . He calculated the perimeters of polygons inscribed inside and outside a circle and obtained bounds for  that ranged from 3 10 71 to 3 17. His method was unsurpassed until Newton invented integral calculus, eighteen hundred years later. It has been asserted that Archimedes's method truly anticipated the integral calculus. After the king's request, Archimedes was perplexed as to how to go about determining the gold content of the crown without destroying it. As he stepped into his bath one day he noticed that the water over¯owed and it occurred to him, or so the story goes, that the amount of water that over¯owed must have the 176 Fluids same volume as the part of his body under the water. By placing an amount of gold of the same weight as the crown under water, the correct volume of a gold crown could be determined. If the crown had any silver, it would displace more water than the same weight of gold, because silver is less dense than gold. He was allegedly so excited by this discovery that he ran through the streets of Syracuse to the palace without any clothes on shouting ``eureka, eureka'' (``I've got it! I've got it!''). Archimedes had proved that the crown had more than the required amount of silver in it and king Hieron had the cheating goldsmith executed. From this incident, Archimedes worked out his principle of buoyancy, known today as Archimedes' Principle, which can be stated as follows: Archimedes' principle: An object partially or completely submerged in a ¯uid is buoyed up by a force equal to the weight of the ¯uid displaced by the object. We all have experienced buoyancy. It is relatively easy to lift a rock underwater. It requires a much greater effort to lift the same rock on dry land. If you have ever attempted to teach someone to swim, you probably noticed how easy it was to hold that person up while in the water. In all these cases, the water exerts an upward force on the object. The source of this upward force is the difference in pressure between the top and and the bottom of the submerged object. Since pressure increases with depth, the pressure at the top of the object is smaller that the pressure at the bottom. This pressure difference results in an upward force on the submerged object. To illustrate Archimedes' Principle, let's consider a small aluminum cube immersed in water, as shown in ®gure 9.11. Imagine now that, somehow, the solid cube is removed and the cavity left behind is ®lled with more ¯uid. Clearly, this added ¯uid, undistinguishable from the ¯uid surrounding it, is in equilibrium and experiences pressures and forces that depend on the distance below the surface. Since the entire ¯uid remains in equilibrium, the extra ¯uid must be subject to the same upward net force as the solid cube it replaced. Moreover, this buoyant force must be just suf®cient to balance the weight of the extra ¯uid. We can see that if we now replace the added ¯uid with a lead cube of the same dimensions as the original aluminum cube, 177 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 9.11. The buoyant force acting on the submerged cube results from the difference in pressure at the top and at the bottom. This buoyant force is equal to the weight of the ¯uid displaced by the cube and does not depend on the density of the cube. This is Archimedes' Principle. this new heavier cube will be subject to the same buoyant force as the ®rst cube and as the ¯uid itself. The force that buoys up the cubes is equal to the force that buoys up the ¯uid that each cube displaces, and this force is equal to the weight of the displaced ¯uid. Clearly, for a given weight, the larger the amount of water it displaces when submerged in water the greater the buoyant force would be. This is the reason why ships, made of steel, which is much denser than water, can ¯oat. If we were to take the amount of steel used in building a ship and reshape it into a big solid cube, it would sink when immersed in water (see ®gure 9.12). The amount of water displaced by the solid cube of steel is not large enough to provide a buoyant force that could balance the weight of the cube. When this steel is in the shape of a ship, that is, a large hollow bowl, the same weight of steel now displaces a larger volume of water which has a larger weight. By Archimedes' principle, this larger weight of the 178 Fluids Figure 9.12. A big mass of steel in the shape of a cube sinks because the volume of water it displaces is not large enough. The same mass, in the shape of a ship, displaces more water, and the ship ¯oats. water displaced produces a larger buoyant force on the ship, enough to keep it a¯oat. Surface tension and capillarity Why is a liquid drop spherical? How can a spider walk on the surface of a pond? Why is it possible to carefully place a razor blade on the surface of the water in a glass and have it ¯oat? These phenomena result from a property of liquids called surface tension. To understand how this works, let's consider a water molecule in the interior of a glass of water (®gure 9.13). This water molecule is surrounded in all directions by other water molecules, so that all the attractive forces from these molecules cancel out. A molecule on the surface of the water, however, has other water molecules only to the sides and below it exerting attractive forces. Therefore, this molecule is pulled in toward the interior of the liquid by these unbalanced forces. The result is that the surface of the liquid becomes compressed, and this acts to make the surface area of the liquid as small as possible. We can now answer the questions posed above. A liquid drop is spherical because a sphere has the smallest surface area for a given volume. When you place a razor blade or a needle carefully on the surface of the water, the molecules of water on the surface are depressed slightly and the neighboring molecules exert upward restoring forces on them, supporting the razor blade. The surface of the liquid acts like a stretched elastic membrane. This is why it is possible for spiders and small insects to walk on water. 179 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 9.13. A molecule in the interior of the water feels attractive forces from all directions, whereas a molecule on the surface feels forces that point to the interior of the liquid, since there are no molecules above it. These molecules on the surface resist being pulled apart so that the surface of the liquid acts as an elastic membrane, able to support small objects. Surface tension can also help us understand the action of a detergent in cleaning. The surface tension of water is about 0.07 N/m. As shown in Table 9.2, water has a large surface tension. When you add detergent to water, the surface tension is reduced. The water then penetrates more easily into the fabric, dissolving dirt. We can think of surface tension as the energy per unit area of the surface. In equilibrium the surface of a liquid would have the lowest possible energy, which is why liquids minimize their Table 9.2 Surface tension of some substances in contact with air at room temperature. Substance (N/m) Surface tension (N/m) Benzene Mercury Water Soapy water 0.0289 0.465 0.0728 0.025 180 Fluids surface area. The units of surface tension are thus units of energy divided by units of area, or J/m2 . Since 1 J ˆ 1 Nm, we can see that these units can be written as Nm=m2 ˆ N=m; that is, force divided by length. These are the units for surface tension used in Table 9.2. Thus, surface tension can also be de®ned in terms of force per unit length rather than energy per unit area. Experimentally, surface tension is determined by measuring the force required to pull a thin wire in the form of a ring out of the surface of the liquid until the surface stretches to the point of breaking (®gure 9.14). Figure 9.14. Measuring the force required to stretch the surface of the liquid to the point of breaking allows experimenters to determine the surface tension of the liquid. 181 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 9.15. The curved surface observed on the surface of a liquid in a container is what we call a meniscus. The cohesive forces in water are smaller than the adhesive forces between water and glass. This produces a positive meniscus. The cohesive forces for mercury, on the other hand, are larger than the adhesive forces between mercury and glass, and this produces a negative meniscus. If you look closely at the surface of the water in a glass, you would notice that near the glass, the surface curves up and the water seems to travel up the surface of the glass a small amount (®gure 9.15). This is what we call a meniscus. The forces of attraction acting between the molecules of a liquid are called cohesive forces. In addition to these forces, the molecules also experience adhesive forces that tend to bind the molecules to the walls of the container. In the case of water and glass, the adhesive forces are greater than the cohesive forces between the water molecules so that the molecules of water close to the glass experience a larger force toward the molecules of glass than toward the other water molecules and they are pulled up a small distance away from the surface of the water. The cohesive forces in mercury, on the other hand, are greater than the adhesive forces between mercury and glass, and a mercury atom near the surface of the glass experiences a larger force toward the other mercury atoms, with the result that its surface curves downward, away from the glass. A meniscus that curves upward is called positive and one that curves downward, like the surface of mercury in a glass container, is called negative. If we insert a narrow tube in a bowl with water (®gure 9.16), the water will rise in the tube to a higher level than the water in 182 Fluids Figure 9.16. A liquid rises in a narrow tube because of a phenomenon known as capillarity. the bowl. This phenomenon is known as capillarity, a word that means ``hair-like.'' The water in the capillary tube will rise until the adhesive forces pulling the liquid up are balanced by the weight of the liquid in the tube. Therefore, the narrower the tube, the higher the water will rise. If we dip the edge of a cotton towel in water, the water will rise through the fabric ®bers because the adhesive forces between cotton and water are larger than the cohesive forces in water. On the other hand, water will not spread through the fabric of a wool sweater with the edge dipped in water, because the adhesive forces between water and wool are smaller than the cohesive forces in water. Unlike cotton, wool ®bers are covered with tiny scales. When wool is in contact with water, the ®ber's scales rub against each other, pulling the ®bers together. The scaly surface of the ®bers tends to repel liquids. For this reason, wool fabrics are better for wet weather and cotton is a better material for towels. Cotton is also more comfortable to wear in hot humid weather because it absorbs excess perspiration through capillary action. Capillarity is also responsible for dampness in basements, as water travels through the narrow cavities in the cinder blocks used to build the basement walls. To prevent this, the exterior walls must be coated with some waterproo®ng compound. Because of capillarity, soil can hold rain water in the narrow spaces between tightly packed soil particles, and plants growing in this soil can make use of this water in photosynthesis, the 183 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS process by which green plants convert water and carbon dioxide into oxygen and various organic compounds in the presence of light. Fluids in motion When you put a nozzle on your garden hose, the water comes out at a higher speed and reaches farther. The explanation for this phenomenon is due to an eighteenth century Swiss mathematician named Daniel Bernoulli, although he did not set out to explain the behavior of water in a garden hose. Bernoulli's principle explains also why an airplane ¯ies and why you can throw a curve with a baseball. Suppose that you connect two different hoses and turn the water on. Let's assume that the two hoses have different diameters and that the connection between them allows for a smooth transition from one diameter to the other, as shown in ®gure 9.17. We have indicated the direction of the ¯ow of water with lines called streamlines. Since liquids are incompressible, the amount of ¯uid passing through area A on the left during a certain interval of time t is exactly the same as the amount of ¯uid passing through area a on the right during the same time t, and this means that the two volumes, VL and VR are the same. Since the areas are different, the volume of water passing through A moves through a length l of hose which is smaller than the length L along which the volume of water through area a must move. Therefore, the velocity of the water on the right, moving along the longer path L, must be greater that that Figure 9.17. Two hoses of different diameters connected in such a way as to have a smooth transition from one diameter to the other. 184 Fluids on the left, which moves along the shorter path l, in order for the same amount of water to pass through both the narrow and the wide hoses in the same time. We can now understand why a nozzle on a garden hose shoots the water farther. The nozzle has a cross sectional area that is smaller than the cross sectional area of the hose, and the speed of the water through the nozzle is greater. If the velocity of the water is greater on the right, through the narrow section, than on the left, through the wide section of hose, work has to be done on the ¯uid to account for the increase in kinetic energy from left to right. This work is due to the forces exerted by the ¯uid on the cross sectional areas in both sections. From the work-energy theorem, the net work is equal to the change in kinetic energy. Since the kinetic energy increases as the water ¯ows from left to right, the work on the left, narrow section must be greater than that on the right, wide section. This implies that the pressure on the ¯uid at the left, wide section is greater than the pressure on the ¯uid on the right, narrow section. Bernoulli's Principle tells us that the pressure is greater when the velocity of the ¯uid is less, and, conversely, that the pressure is less when the velocity of the ¯uid is greater. Armed with this beautiful discovery, we can understand what keeps an airplane in the air. Figure 9.18 shows a cross section of an airplane wing. The top surface of the wing is curved and the lower surface is ¯at so that the air rushing by the upper surface has a longer distance to cover than the air Figure 9.18. Cross section of an airplane wing. The air passing by the upper surface has a longer distance to cover, so it must move at a higher speed than the air passing by the lower surface. The pressure on the underside is greater, where the velocity is smaller, thus providing a net upward force on the wing. 185 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 9.19. The pressure from the bottom, where the air is still is larger than the pressure from above, where the air is moving as you blow. This net pressure upwards lifts the paper. passing by the lower surface. Therefore the velocity of the air above the wing is greater than the velocity of the air below the wing. Bernoulli's principle tells us that the pressure is greatest where the velocity is least, so that the pressure on the wing from below is greater than the pressure on the wing from above. The pressure difference provides a net upward force on the wing. It is not very dif®cult for you to experience Bernoulli's principle ®rst hand. If you pick up a sheet of paper and blow across the upper surface, as shown in ®gure 9.19, the velocity of the air above will be greater than the velocity of the air below, which will be near zero. The larger pressure from below pushes the paper up. The human cardiovascular system The human cardiovascular system is a closed tubular system in which a ¯uid, the blood, ¯ows through arteries, veins and 186 Fluids Physics in our world: Curve balls To throw a curve ball, a baseball pitcher gives a spin to the ball. The spinning ball drags some of the air around in the direction of the spin. The speed of air on one side of the ball becomes greater than on the other side. According to Bernoulli's principle, the side of the ball where the air moves faster has a lower pressure than the other side. The difference in pressure causes the ball to curve. We can also understand the behavior of the curve ball by studying the way the air ¯ows relative to the ball. When a ball is thrown through the air at high speed, the air behind the ball moves in an irregular, turbulent way. The streamlines curve symmetrically around the ball. When the ball is spinning, the air is dragged around, causing the region of turbulence to move slightly in the direction of the spin. The asymmetry of the region of turbulence produces a crowding of the streamlines on one side. The pressure is then lower where the streamlines are crowded. This pressure difference produces a net force that de¯ects the ball. 187 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS (a) As seen from above, the air moves faster on one side (where the streamlines are closer together) and the pressure is lower there. The ball moves in the direction of the net force. (b) The ball spinning counterclockwise as seen from above curves to the left of the pitcher. (c) A nonspinning ball has symmetric streamlines and the area of turbulence is behind it. (d) In a spinning ball, the area of turbulence is dragged to one side. The ball curves in the direction of the net force exerted by the air. Bastard wing An airplane ¯ying at very low speeds generates little lift and can stall, since the difference in pressures above and below the wing comes from the difference in wind velocity above and below. Birds, on the other hand, usually manage to ¯y at such low speeds. Their secret lies in a special structure called a bastard wing or alula. This structure consists of a few feathers attached to the ®rst digit or thumb of the wing. When birds slow down at takeoff or when landing, they tilt the wing and use the alula to separate its feathers from the 188 Fluids rest of the wing, creating a slot that prevents the air from breaking away from the upper surface and distributes more air ¯ow to the top of the wing. The improved difference between the air velocities above and below the wing increases the pressure difference enough to balance the bird's weight. capillaries to and from all parts of the body. The total length of the vessels in the human body through which blood is transported reaches many miles. The heart is the muscular pump that propels the blood into and out of the vessels. An average adult human heart is about 13 by 9 by 6 cm and weighs about 300 g. During a lifetime of 70 years, by beating some 3 billion times, the heart pumps nearly 250 million liters of blood, which would ®ll a football stadium almost knee deep. The heart consists of four chambers ± two atria, left and right; and two ventricles, left and right (®gure 9.20). The atria are the receiving chambers for blood from the body which is pumped into the ventricles; and the ventricles pump blood into the lungs and to the rest of the body. Four valves control the ¯ow of blood in the heart: the tricuspid valve, the mitral valve, the pulmonic valve, and the aortic valve. Blood coming from the head through a large vein or superior vena cava and from the arms, liver, body muscles, kidney and legs through a second large vein, the inferior vena cava, enters the right atrium, located in the right upper part of the heart. A third vein, the coronary sinus, drains blood from the heart itself into the right atrium. All this blood, which has been depleted of oxygen, is pumped into the right ventricle through the tricuspid valve. As the right ventricle contracts, blood is carried into the pulmonary 189 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 9.20. The human heart consists of four chambers ± left and right atria and left and right ventricles. artery to the lungs where the blood is oxygenated. The pulmonary valve prevents this blood from reentering the heart. The slightly smaller left atrium receives oxygenated blood from the lungs through four pulmonary veins and pumps it into the thick-walled left ventricle through the mitral valve. At the same time that the right ventricle pumps blood into the pulmonary artery, the left ventricle contracts and forces blood out through the aorta into the arteries of the body. The system that assures the pumping of the blood in and out of the heart at the right times is controled by a special structure called the sino-auricular node, which acts as the pacemaker of the heart. The heart beats some 70 to 80 times per minute, contracting and expanding. During the period of relaxation of the heart or diastole, the pressure is typically 80 mmHg (mercury), while at the peak of its cycle, during the contraction period or systole, the pressure is about 120 mmHg. This blood pressure can be measured with a sphygmomanometer, a device that uses a U-tube of mercury to read the pressure 190 Fluids Figure 9.21. A sphygmomanometer used to measure blood pressure. during the relaxation and contraction periods of the heart (®gure 9.21). As we saw earlier, pressure in a liquid increases with depth. When a person is lying down, the pressure throughout the major arteries of the body does not change more than 2 mmHg, this small change being due to some resistance to the ¯ow of blood in the arteries. Standing up, however, the difference in pressure between the heart and the foot is about 100 mmHg. Because the upper arm is at about the same level as the heart, the pressure there is close to the pressure at the heart. For this reason, the sphygmomanometer measures the pressure with an in¯atable cuff wrapped around the upper arm. A column of mercury or a spring scale is connected by rubber tubing to the cuff and a stethoscope is used to listen for noises in the artery. The cuff is in¯ated until the ¯ow of blood through the brachial artery is stopped by the pressure in the cuff. Air is gradually allowed to escape from the cuff until the pressure in the cuff matches the peak pressure in the heart (systolic). At this point, blood begins to ¯ow through the artery only during the systolic pressure part of the cycle. Since the brachial artery is partially opened, the area is small and the equation of continuity tells us that the 191 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS velocity should be high. This makes the ¯ow of blood noisy and easy to pick up with the stethoscope. As the cuff continues de¯ating, the pressure in the sack becomes lower than the systolic pressure but still higher than the diastolic pressure. Blood still does not ¯ow during the diastolic pressure part of the cycle. When the pressure in the cuff matches the diastolic pressure, the artery remains open during the entire cycle. By reading the values of the cuff pressure at the two points, when the pulse is ®rst heard and when the sound of blood through the artery is continuous, the systolic and diastolic pressures can be measured. The normal systolic pressure of a healthy adult varies from about 110 to about 140 mmHg and the diastolic from 60 to 90 mmHg. 192 10 HEAT AND TEMPERATURE Heat as a form of energy When you push a book that is lying on a polished table, part of the work that you do on the book is converted into kinetic energy and the book begins to move with a certain velocity (®gure 10.1). After you release it, however, the book does not continue moving with the same velocity; it slows down and eventually stops. What happens to the initial kinetic energy of the book? Since there is no change in the potential energy, as the book remains on the table, the mechanical energy is not conserved. As we pointed out in chapter 5, friction has taken away some of the energy. Although it might be dif®cult to verify without sophisticated equipment, the book and the table are warmer than before. From our experience, however, we know that friction causes objects to become warmer. When the weather is cold, for example, we rub our hands together to warm them up; the wheels of a motorcycle become hot during braking due to rubbing with the brake pads; and the tires get warmer due to friction (®gure 10.2). Heat, then, seems to be a form of energy. This was not known until the middle of the nineteenth century. Before then, heat was thought to be a ¯uid that was transmitted from hot bodies to cold bodies. This caloric ¯uid (as the French chemist Lavoisier called it) was believed to be a conserved quantity, since it had been observed that when equal parts of hot water and cold water were mixed, the result was warm water at a temperature that was exactly the mean of the initial temperatures. The caloric ¯uid was thought to have been transmitted from the hot water to the cold water without any losses. 195 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 10.1. If we push a book lying on a table, the book slows down and stops. What happens to the kinetic energy of the book? Figure 10.2. Friction between the wheels and the brake pads makes the wheels hot. The tires also get warm after the motorcycle has been driven due to friction with the pavement. 196 Heat and Temperature The problem with the idea of the caloric was that it could not explain how heat was produced by friction. The correct interpretation of heat began with the experiments of an American-born scientist who took up British citizenship, held a German title of nobility, and led a strange and colorful life. Benjamin Thompson, Count Rumford, was born in Woburn, Massachusetts, in 1753, a couple of miles from the birthplace ± some 50 years before ± of his namesake Benjamin Franklin. While Count Rumford was supervising the boring of a cannon in Munich in 1798 he noticed that the iron became hot enough to glow and had to be cooled with water. Rumford decided to study this phenomenon and performed many experiments in which he immersed the hot metal in water to measure the rate at which the temperature rose. He was able to determine that the amount of heat generated by friction while the boring tool drilled the iron was large enough to melt the metal had it not been cooled. He realized that the amount of heat that could be generated was not only not constant, as the caloric theory Pioneers of physics: Count Rumford The son of a farmer, Benjamin Thompson started as an apprentice to a storekeeper. At the age of nineteen he married a wealthy and older widow from the town of Rumford (the present Concord), New Hampshire. When the Revolutionary War broke out, Thompson's sympathies were with the English Crown and he served the King by spying on his countrymen. When the British left Boston, Thompson was forced to ¯ee to London, leaving his wife and daughter behind. After the war ended, he remained in England and was knighted by King George III, but was later accused of being a spy for the French and of accepting bribes. In 1783 the king allowed him to enter the Bavarian civil service and Thompson left for Germany where he worked in the court of Elector Karl Theodor of Bavaria as an administrator. He served the Elector well and was rewarded with the title of Count of the Holy Roman Empire in 1790. Thompson chose the name of his wife's hometown for his title and became Count von Rumford. 197 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS proposed, but unlimited as long as work was done. In his report to the Royal Society entitled ``An Inquiry Concerning the Source of Heat Which is Excited By Friction,'' Rumford wrote: And, in reasoning on this subject, we must not forget to consider that most remarkable circumstance, that the source of the Heat generated by friction, in these experiments, appeared evidently to be inexhaustible . . . [I]t appears to me to be extremely dif®cult, if not quite impossible, to form any distinct idea of anything capable of being excited and communicated in the manner the Heat was excited and communicated in these experiments, except it be MOTION. Rumford's brilliant ± and correct ± conclusion was that the motion of the drill was being converted into heat and that heat was a form of motion. His calculation of the ratio of heat to work was very close to the accepted values today. In spite of Rumford's insights, the caloric theory continued as the leading theory for some forty years. Starting in the late 1830s, James Prescott Joule repeated some of Rumford's experiments many times, enhancing and re®ning them. In one of his experiments, he measured the heat generated by an electric current and compared it with the mechanical energy required to run the simple electric generator that produced the current. In another experiment he measured the heat generated when water was forced through pipes and compared it with the work required to maintain the ¯ow of water through the pipes. He also designed experiments that compared the work required to compress a gas contained in a bottle, which was in turn immersed in water, with the amount of heat gained by the water. Joule's most famous experiment, however, involved the design of an apparatus in which a brass paddle wheel immersed in water was turned by the descension of weights suspended by string from pulleys (®gure 10.3). The potential energy lost by the weights as they fell was compared with the heat gained by the water. In his 1890 report to the Royal Society entitled ``On the Mechanical Equivalent of Heat,'' Joule concluded from this experiment ``[t]hat the quantity of heat produced by the friction of bodies, whether solid or liquid, is always proportional to the quantity of [energy] expended.'' Heat, then, as Joule was able to establish, is a form of energy, contrary to the caloric theory. 198 Heat and Temperature Figure 10.3. heat. Joule's apparatus to measure the mechanical equivalent of Measuring temperature Temperature is a familiar concept to us as a measure of the hotness or coldness of an object and for this reason we have used the concept in the previous section. The device with which we measure temperature, the thermometer, is also familiar to us. A thermometer measures variations of some physical property that changes with temperature, such as the volume of a liquid or a gas. The idea of representing hot and cold with numbers dates from antiquity. In the second century AD the Greek physician Galen proposed a temperature scale based on ice and boiling water. Arab and Latin physicians actually developed a numeric scale from 0 to 4 to represent coldness and hotness but lacked instruments to measure and relied only on their senses. In the seventeenth century, Galileo invented a thermometer that consisted of a glass tube ®lled with air connected to a thinner tube marked with divisions and immersed in a vessel of colored water. When it was cold, the air in the tube contracted and the 199 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS colored water rose in the glass tube. When it was warm, the air expanded and the water moved down in the thin tube. Galileo's thermometer was not very accurate, however, because it did not take into account changes in atmospheric pressure. In 1657, some of Galileo's disciples improved upon this design and developed thermometers in sealed tubes to avoid changes due to the atmospheric pressure. These thermometers were based on the expansion and contraction of alcohol with changes in temperature and became popular throughout Europe. Alcohol, however, boiled at a low temperature, so high temperatures could not be measured. In 1714 the German±Dutch physicist Gabriel Fahrenheit, who had emigrated to Amsterdam after his parents died in Germany, decided to substitute mercury for alcohol and for the ®rst time extreme temperatures, well above the boiling point of water and below the freezing point of water, could be measured. Thirteen years before, Newton had suggested that the temperature scale should be zero for the freezing point of water and that of the human body, 12. Fahrenheit, however, did not want to use negative numbers for the temperatures of the cold winter days and added salt to the water to obtain the lowest freezing point that he was capable of in his laboratory and called it the zero temperature of his scale. Instead of dividing the difference between this freezing point and the temperature of the human body in twelve equal parts as Newton had suggested, he decided to divide this interval into eight times twelve, or ninety-six, to obtain a larger number of divisions in his scale. In 1724, Fahrenheit adjusted this scale so that the boiling point of water would come out to be exactly 180 degrees above the freezing point of water alone, which was 32 in his scale. With this correction, the human body temperature was found to be 98.48 and the boiling point of water, 2128. The Swedish astronomer Anders Celsius proposed in 1742 a new scale in which the freezing point of water was 1008 and the boiling point of water at sea level, 08. The following year, he reversed his scale, making the freezing point 08 and the boiling point 1008. Since there were 100 degrees between the freezing and boiling temperatures for water, the scale was known for many years as the centigrade or ``hundred step'' scale. Today, we call it the Celsius scale. 200 Heat and Temperature On the Fahrenheit scale there are 180 degrees between the freezing and boiling points of water whereas in the Celsius scale there are 100. Thus, each Celsius degree is larger than each Fahrenheit degree by a factor of 180=100 or 9=5. Since the freezing point of water is 328 in the Fahrenheit scale and 08 in the Celsius scale, we can convert any Celsius temperature to its corresponding value in Fahrenheit by multiplying the Celsius temperature by the factor 9=5 and adding 32: TF ˆ 95 TC ‡ 32: The Fahrenheit to Celsius conversion can be obtained from this expression by simply solving for TC : TC ˆ 59 TF ÿ 32†: In 1848 the English physicist William Thomson, later Lord Kelvin, devised what is now known as the Kelvin scale, Kelvin was able to show that if a gas was cooled down to 2738 below 08C, the random motion of its molecules would be minimum. Therefore, there could be no temperature below this value. He then proposed a scale that would start at this absolute zero and would increase in intervals that were the same as the Celsius intervals. The Kelvin scale differs from the Celsius scale only in the choice of zero temperature. To convert from Celsius degrees to kelvins, as the intervals in the absolute scale are known, we add 273.15 (a more precise value). Using T for the temperature in kelvins we have T ˆ TC ‡ 273:15: In ®gure 10.4 we compare the three different scales of temperature that we have considered here. Notice that the intervals between any two temperatures are the same only in the Kelvin and Celsius scales. Temperature and heat What exactly does temperature measure? When we measure the temperature of a body, we are actually obtaining information about the average kinetic energy of the atoms and molecules 201 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 10.4. A comparison of the Kelvin, Celsius and Fahrenheit temperature scales. that make up the body. When the body is warm, there is more molecular motion, and temperature is the measure of the kinetic energy of this motion. Temperature is directly related to the average kinetic energy of the atoms and molecules of a body. At higher temperatures, the kinetic energy is greater and this infers that the average molecular speed is greater. As Joule and Rumford established, heat is a form of energy. What is then the difference between heat and temperature? To answer this question, we need to consider the behavior of the atoms and molecules of a substance. These, as we have seen, are in constant motion. In gases and liquids, they move about at random. In a gas composed of single atoms such as helium, in addition to this kinetic energy due to random motion, the atoms possess kinetic energy due to the spinning of the atoms themselves. However, this rotational kinetic energy is very small compared with the translational kinetic energy. In gases like nitrogen and oxygen, composed of diatomic molecules, that is, molecules formed by two atoms bound together (®gure 10.5), the molecules can also rotate. The moment of inertia of these diatomic molecules is much larger, however, since the masses of the individual atoms in each molecule are farther 202 Heat and Temperature Figure 10.5. An oxygen molecule consists of two oxygen atoms bound together by spring-like forces. The molecule can rotate around an axis perpendicular to the line joining the atoms. The atoms can also vibrate back and forth. apart from the axis of rotation, and the kinetic energy due to this rotation is greater. The two nitrogen atoms in the nitrogen molecule can also vibrate back and forth, and this vibrational motion also contributes to the total kinetic energy of the molecule. In solids, the situation is more complicated since the molecules, ions or atoms that make the solid are not free to drift around. These particles have no random translational kinetic energy. There are, however, vibrational kinetic and potential energies, as these particles vibrate back and forth around more or less ®xed positions. The sum of all the random energies of the atoms and molecules in a substance constitutes the thermal energy of that substance. The thermal energy transferred from a warm object to a cooler object as a result of the temperature difference between the two is what we call heat energy. Heat, then, is the ¯ow of thermal energy, and for this reason, it would not make sense to speak of the amount of heat that a substance has. We can, however, speak of the amount of thermal energy in a substance and the amount of heat transferred from one substance to another. On the other hand, the temperature of a gas or a liquid depends only on the random translational kinetic energy per 203 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Physics in our world: Thermography As we shall see in chapter 23, all objects emit radiation. This radiation can be used to determine temperature. At low to intermediate temperatures most of the radiation is in the infrared region. When the temperature increases, the intensity of the radiation emitted increases considerably. An infrared camera can detect this radiation, producing electronic signals that can be displayed on a television monitor or photographed on special ®lm. The image produced is called a thermogram, and the technique thermography (see color plate). The intensity of the infrared radiation emitted by the human body depends on several factors, including state of health. Certain regions of the body have a larger blood supply than others and therefore emit more radiation. However bone tumors, bone infections such as osteomyelitis, arthritic conditions, and muscle and tendon diseases resulting from in¯ammation emit more radiation than normal. On the other hand, areas where blood ¯ow is reduced emit less radiation than normal, permitting the detection of blockages of the arteries and disorders where blood circulation is below normal, such as atherosclerosis. Thermography has shown itself to be a very important technique for the detection and diagnosis of these and other disorders. A typical thermogram is shown in the color plate. Thermography, however, is no longer recommended by the American College of Radiology for detecting breast cancer, because benign cysts also produce increased radiation. The x-ray process called mammography remains the recommended procedure for early detection of breast cancer, although other techniques for screening are currently being explored. molecule. (In solids, since there is no translational kinetic energy, the temperature depends on the vibrational energy). The temperature of a substance, then, does not depend on the number of atoms and molecules in the substance nor on the kinds of atoms that form the substance. If you ®ll a bowl with water from a swimming pool, the number of water molecules in the pool is, 204 Heat and Temperature of course, much greater than in the bowl, and the total sum of the translational, vibrational, and rotational kinetic energies of the water molecules in the pool is much greater than the corresponding energies of the water in the bowl. Therefore, the thermal energy of the water in the swimming pool is much greater than the thermal energy of the water in the bowl. However, the temperatures of the water in the swimming pool and in the bowl are the same, since we ®lled the bowl with water from the pool and temperature is the measure of the average kinetic energy per molecule. Since heat is a form of energy, the SI unit is the joule. During the times of the caloric theory, a unit of heat called the calorie (cal), was introduced. The calorie, still in use today, was de®ned as the amount of heat required to raise the temperature of 1 gram of water by 18C. We de®ne the calorie today in terms of joules: 1 cal ˆ 4:186 J: (The nutritionists' calorie is actually 1000 calories or a kilocalorie, as the unit is de®ned in physics. Because of its widespread use regarding the energy value of foods, to avoid confusion it is sometimes distinguished by writing it with a capital letter C as Calorie, Cal.) Heat capacity What happens when we heat a substance? When we heat up some water to prepare ourselves a cup of instant coffee, where does the thermal energy transferred to the water ± the heat ± go? When we place a TV dinner in the oven and heat it, why is the skin of the potato warm but the inside usually very hot? Some foods seem to store more thermal energy than others when placed together in the oven. The capacities for storage of thermal energy for different substances are different. When heat ¯ows into a substance, this thermal energy goes into the different forms of kinetic energy; translational, rotational or vibrational. If the substance is a monatomic gas like helium, most of the energy goes into translational kinetic energy. For diatomic gases like nitrogen and oxygen, the energy is shared among the different forms of kinetic 205 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS energy. If the substance is a liquid or a solid, the interactions between the molecules give rise to other ways for this thermal energy to go. Only the increase in the translational kinetic energy, however, gives rise to an increase in temperature. Adding the same amount of heat to two different substances, such as water for your coffee and soup for your dinner, produces different increases in the temperatures of the two substances, as the amount of heat that goes into translational kinetic energy is different for the two substances. It takes longer to warm up water for two cups of coffee than for just one cup. The reason is, of course, that heating two cups of water requires more heat than heating just one. A cup of water has a volume of 250 ml and a mass of 250 g. Since one calorie of heat is required to raise the temperature of water 18C, it takes 250 calories for every degree Celsius that we want to raise the temperature of one cup of water, and 500 calories for two cups. The greater the mass, the greater the amount of heat required to raise the temperature of a substance. Thus the heat required to warm up a substance is proportional both to the mass of the substance and to the change in temperature. The heat required to increase the temperature of a mass m of a substance an amount
T is called the heat capacity, C, of the substance. A more useful quantity, since it has the same value regardless of the mass of the substance, is the speci®c heat capacity, c, which is the heat capacity per unit mass of a substance. The speci®c heat capacity, then, is the heat required to raise the temperature of a unit mass of a substance by one degree. If Q is the amount of heat required, m the mass of the substance, and
T the change in temperature, the speci®c heat capacity is cˆ Q : m
T The SI unit of speci®c heat capacity is the joule per kilogram per Kelvin (J/kgK), but kcal/kg 8C are also commonly used. The speci®c heat capacities of several substances are listed in Table 10.1. Notice that the speci®c heat capacity of water is exactly 1.000 kcal/kg8C. This is because the calorie was de®ned as the heat required to raise the temperature of 1 g of water by 18C. To raise the temperature of one kilogram of water by 18C requires one kilocalorie. 206 Heat and Temperature Table 10.1 Speci®c heat capacities of some substances Substance Water Human body Ice Steam (1008C) Wood Aluminum Speci®c heat Substance (kcal/kg 8C) J/kg K 1.000 0.83 0.50 0.46 0.42 0.21 4184 3470 2090 1925 1750 880 Glass Steel Copper Mercury Gold Lead Speci®c heat (kcal/kg 8C) J/kg K 0.15 0.107 0.093 0.033 0.032 0.031 630 490 390 138 134 130 Heat of fusion and heat of vaporization When heat is added to a substance, its temperature usually increases. There are, however, some special situations where the temperature stays constant as heat is added. If you add heat to an ice cube in a closed container at 08C and monitor its temperature, you would notice that the mixture of ice and water resulting from the melting of the ice remains at 08C until all the ice has melted. It seems as if the water-ice mixture is able to absorb the heat without any change in temperature. The ice, however, is melting; that is, it is changing its phase from solid to liquid and this requires energy. A similar phenomenon takes place when water changes into steam at 1008C. If you start with tap water at 208C and add heat by placing the container with water on a stove, for example, the temperature of the water will steadily increase until it reaches 1008C. The temperature will then remain at 1008C until all the water has turned into steam. The temperature increase will resume after that. The change of a liquid into solid is called fusion, and the change of a liquid into its gas phase is called vaporization. The amount of heat required for a substance to change phase depends on the type of substance, its mass, and whether the phase change is from solid to liquid or from liquid to gas. For water, 80 kcal of heat are needed to melt one kilogram of ice. Ice, like most solids, is a crystal and, as we saw at the beginning of chapter 9, the molecules in a crystal occupy ®xed positions and are held in those positions by strong intermolecular forces. When the ice melts, work must be 207 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS done against these forces which means that energy must be supplied to the solid. As more heat energy is supplied, the water molecules are able to break loose from their neighbors and the crystal structure is broken. The molecules that formed the crystal and occupied ®xed positions while in the solid phase are now free to move about; the water is now in the liquid phase (®gure 10.6). Since any other substance would have a different molecular structure and different binding forces between its molecules, the energy required for the molecules of this substance to break loose from their neighbors is different. Figure 10.6. The heat that is added to the ice goes into increasing the potential energy of the water molecules in the crystal structure. When these molecules gain enough energy, they break loose from their neighbors and are free to move. This is the liquid phase of water. 208 Heat and Temperature The heat energy that is supplied to the solid goes into increasing the potential energy of the molecules of the solid. Since temperature is a measure of the random kinetic energies of the molecules, the temperature remains ®xed while the solid melts. Although the molecules of a liquid are free of the strong binding forces that keep them in more or less ®xed positions while in the solid phase, they are still bound by weaker intermolecular forces that allow them to move around. These weaker bonds must also be broken when the liquid vaporizes. In the gaseous phase, however, the molecules are separated from each other by considerable distances and this separation requires energy. In the transition from solid to liquid, the molecules remain more or less at the same distances and it is only the breaking of the crystal structure that requires energy. The heat required to vaporize a substance in the liquid phase is therefore larger than that required to melt it. In the case of water, for example, the heat needed to vaporize one kilogram of water is 540 kcal, almost seven times the heat required to melt one kilogram of ice. When a gas condenses into its liquid phase, energy is released. This amount of energy is the same amount that was required to vaporize the liquid. Water, then, releases 540 kcal for every kilogram of steam that condenses. Similarly, when 1 kilogram of liquid water solidi®es, 80 kcal of energy are released. The heat absorbed or released by one kilogram of a substance during a phase transition is called the latent heat, L. If the transition is from solid to liquid or vice versa, this latent heat is called latent heat of fusion, Lf . If the transition involves the liquid and gas phases of a substance, it is called the latent heat of vaporization, Lv . Thus, for water, Lf ˆ 80 kcal=kg ˆ 335 kJ=kg Lv ˆ 540 kcal=kg ˆ 2259 kJ=kg: Since 80 kcal of heat are needed to melt 1 kg of ice, 160 kcal would be needed to melt 2 kg, and 800 kcal to melt 10 kg. If we have m kg of ice, we would need 80 m kcal of heat to melt them: Heat to melt a mass m: Q ˆ mLf : Similarly, to vaporize a mass m of a liquid requires an amount of heat Q ˆ mLv . Heat to vaporize a mass m: 209 Q ˆ mLv : SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Evaporation and boiling When a glass of water is left overnight on the kitchen counter, for example, we notice that the level of the water in the glass drops a certain amount. Some of the water has evaporated. This happens because some of the molecules of water have escaped and became gaseous molecules. As we have seen, the molecules of a liquid are in continuous random motion and possess random kinetic energies. Some molecules, then, would move with greater velocities than the average and if they happen to be near the surface of the liquid, moving in an upward direction, they might have enough energy to escape. This escape is what we call evaporation. Since the molecules that escape are, on average, the ones with greater kinetic energies, the average value of the kinetic energy of the molecules that remain in the liquid is reduced. Because temperature is the measure of the average kinetic energy per molecule of the liquid, the temperature of the liquid drops as the liquid evaporates (®gure 10.7). Evaporation, then, is a cooling process. This explains why you feel cool as soon as you come out of a swimming pool; as Figure 10.7. As the fastest molecules leave the surface of the water, the temperature of the remaining liquid drops. 210 Heat and Temperature the water on your skin evaporates, the remaining water, which is in contact with your skin, is left at a lower temperature. You may also have noticed that when a nurse rubs alcohol on your skin, it feels cool. This is because alcohol evaporates very rapidly. Another liquid that evaporates fast is gasoline, and if you ever accidentally spilled some of it on your hand while pumping gas at a self-service gas station, you might have noticed that it also leaves your skin cooler. And the reason why a fan offers some relief on a hot summer day is because it blows air around your body, speeding the evaporation of perspiration. When the temperature of the liquid is high enough, close to the boiling point, evaporation is increased substantially, since a greater number of molecules possess enough energy to escape from the liquid. At these high temperatures, evaporation can also take place inside the liquid, away from the surface, where bubbles of gas form. When these bubbles of gas begin to appear in the interior of the liquid, boiling starts. For the bubbles of gas to form, the molecules inside the bubble must have kinetic energies large enough for the pressure from inside the bubble to match the pressure from the liquid on the bubble. The pressure that the liquid exerts on the bubble is the atmospheric pressure plus the pressure due to the liquid at that depth. In most cases the pressure due to the liquid is very small compared to the atmospheric pressure and we can say that boiling begins when the pressure of the gas is equal to the atmospheric pressure (®gure 10.8). Because the gas in the bubbles is less dense than the liquid surrounding them, they are buoyed to the surface of the liquid. As we have seen, water boils at 1008C. This, however, is only true when the atmospheric pressure is 1 atm. At different atmospheric pressures, the boiling point of water ± or of any other liquid ± changes. Since boiling begins when the pressure of the gas in the bubbles that form in the interior of the liquid is equal to the atmospheric pressure, the molecules of the liquid require a greater kinetic energy to be able to form bubbles that can sustain an increased atmospheric pressure. Water, then, boils at a higher temperature when the atmospheric pressure increases, and conversely, its boiling point decreases when the atmospheric pressure decreases. If you go camping in the mountains, water boils at a temperature lower than 1008C; since the rate at which 211 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 10.8. When the temperature of the liquid is high enough (1008C for water), evaporation takes place even inside the liquid and bubbles begin to appear. When the pressure of the gas in the bubbles equals the atmospheric pressure, boiling begins. Figure 10.9. A pressure cooker con®nes the steam until the pressure under the sealed lid reaches 2 atm. Foods cook faster because of the higher temperatures. 212 Heat and Temperature Physics in our world: Instant ice cream The traditional method for making ice cream involves churning a mixture of milk, eggs, sugar, and ¯avorings while it is chilled slowly. The churning process prevents the formation of large crystals, thus producing a smooth texture, and also traps air inside the mixture, which accounts for the ¯uf®ness and lightness of good ice cream. Physicist Peter Barham of the University of Bristol in the United Kingdom has developed a technique to make ice cream in two minutes. Instead of chilling the mixture slowly, as in the traditional method, Barham chills it instantaneously. He pours liquid nitrogen on the mixture. Since nitrogen lique®es at temperatures below ÿ1968 C. the mixture cools so fast that very few crystals develop. When the liquid nitrogen comes into contact with the much warmer mixture, it begins to boil, creating bubbles in the mixture. foods cook in boiling water depends on the temperature of the water, it takes longer to boil an egg. In Cocoa Beach, Florida, water boils at 1008C and it takes about 10 minutes after the water reaches the boiling point to hard-boil an egg. On the highest mountain in the Eastern United States, Mt. Mitchell, North Carolina, elevation 6600 feet, water boils at 938C; it takes almost twice as long to hard-boil an egg there. A pressure cooker con®nes the steam under the sealed lid until the pressure is nearly 2 atmospheres (®gure 10.9). At this pressure, water boils at 1208C and foods cook faster at this higher temperature. Humidity Due to the evaporation of water from lakes, ponds, rivers, and the sea, the air contains some water vapor. If we place a lid on a pan with water so that the evaporated gaseous water molecules cannot escape (®gure 10.10), an equilibrium state will eventually be reached where the number of molecules leaving the surface 213 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 10.10. The number of molecules leaving the surface of the water is equal to the number of molecules reentering the liquid. The air under the lid is said to be saturated. of the water equals the number of water molecules that return to it after bouncing off the lid and walls of the pan. When this happens, the air above the water becomes saturated with vapor, in other words, the air holds the maximum amount of water vapor that it can at that temperature. The amount of water vapor that the air can hold depends on the temperature of both the water and the air. As we discussed in the previous section, an increase in the water temperature results in greater evaporation, and this results in more water vapor in the air. If the air temperature increases, the average kinetic energy of the air molecules increases, and this means that more collisions among the different molecules present in air take place. The water molecules in air collide with greater speeds and have less likelihood of sticking to each other, forming small water droplets that can ``rain'' down on the water surface. Thus, the amount of water vapor required for saturation increases with temperature. Humidity is a measure of the amount of water vapor present in the air at any given time. Absolute humidity, AH, is the actual amount of water vapor that the air contains; that is, the total mass of water vapor in the air per unit volume, generally given 214 Heat and Temperature Table 10.2 Humidity at saturation for different air temperatures Temperature (8C) Water vapor/m3 air (g/m3 ) Temperature (8C) Water vapor/m3 air (g/m3 ) ÿ8 ÿ4 0 4 8 12 2.74 3.66 4.84 6.33 8.21 10.57 16 20 24 28 32 36 13.50 17.12 21.54 26.93 33.45 41.82 in g/m3 . Weather forecasters, however, give humidity in percentages; this is actually a relative humidity, RH, which is the ratio of the mass of water vapor per unit volume of air (the absolute humidity) to the mass per unit volume of water vapor required to saturate the air. In Table 10.2, we list the values of this humidity at saturation, HS, for different temperatures. Therefore, if we know the absolute humidity at any given time, the relative humidity can be calculated as follows: RH ˆ AH : HS On a nice spring day, the temperature might reach 208C during the day. If the relative humidity is 50% (or 0.50), and the absolute humidity remains more or less the same throughout the evening, the air will become saturated just before the temperature drops to 88C. At this temperature, drops begin to condense from the vapor. If the temperature is above the freezing point of water, 08C, dew forms; if it is below 08C, frost forms. We call the temperature at which the air starts to saturate the dew point. Thermal expansion Most objects expand when the temperature is increased and contract when the temperature is decreased. As we saw in an earlier section, some thermometers are based on this phenomenon. Concrete highways and bridges must be built with gaps to take into account the expansion when temperatures rise. Large bridges may have expansion joints as wide as 40 to 60 cm to allow for expansion. 215 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Temperature, as we have seen, is a measure of the average kinetic energy of the molecules of a body. As the temperature of a body increases, the average kinetic energy of its molecules also increases. This increase in kinetic energy means that the molecules move through larger distances, requiring more room to do so. For this reason, a substance expands when its temperature increases. A 10-m steel beam used in the construction of a bridge reduces in length to 9.996 m when the temperature drops to ÿ108C. When the temperature rises to 358C during a hot summer day its length increases to 10.001 m. Although the increase in length amounts to only 5 mm for the 10 m beam, a large bridge with a total length of 1000 m would need 100 of these beams and the total increase in length between winter and summer would be 50 cm. We can see in the above example that the increase in length of the steel beam due to the increase in temperature is proportional to the length of the beam. A 10 m beam increases only 5 mm when the temperature changes from ÿ108C to 358C, whereas a 1000 m beam (or 100 10 m beams placed one after the other) would increase its length by 50 cm. This thermal expansion is also proportional to the temperature change. Finally, if the beams were made of aluminum (not practical for bridges) the thermal expansion would be twice as large. Thus, the increase in length depends on the original length of the beam, the temperature change, and the kind of material used in its construction. We call L0 the initial length of the beam when the temperature is ÿ108C and
L its increase in length as the temperature rises to 358C in the summer. This increase in length
L is proportional to the initial length L0 (10 m in our example), the change in temperature
T, and a property that depends on the material used (steel in our example) called the coef®cient of linear expansion, (the Greek letter alpha). We can express this as
L ˆ Lo
T: In Table 10.3 we list the coef®cients of linear expansion for some common substances. This coef®cient, which has units of inverse degrees Celsius (1/8C), measures the fractional change in length with a given change in temperature for a substance. The fact that different substances expand differently with a given temperature change, as illustrated by the different values 216 Heat and Temperature Table 10.3 Coef®cients of thermal expansion of some substances Substance Rubber Ice Lead Aluminum Silver Brass Coef®cient (1/8C) ÿ6 80  10 51  10ÿ6 30  10ÿ6 24  10ÿ6 20  10ÿ6 19  10ÿ6 Substance Coef®cient (1/8C) Copper Iron (Steel) Concrete Glass (ordinary) Glass (Pyrex) Carbon (Graphite) Carbon (Diamond) 17  10ÿ6 12  10ÿ6 10  10ÿ6 9  10ÿ6 3:2  10ÿ6 8  10ÿ6 1:2  10ÿ6 of the expansion coef®cients, has been used in the construction of thermostats. A thermostat is an electrical switch that is activated by changes in temperature, and is used to control electrical appliances that depend on temperature changes, like air conditioners, heaters, and toasters. A simple thermostat can be constructed with two strips of two different metals bonded together as illustrated in ®gure 10.11(a). If one of the strips of metal is brass and the other aluminum, when the temperature increases, the aluminum strip expands more than the brass strip, since aluminum has a larger thermal coef®cient. Because the two strips are joined together, the result is a bending of the two strips so that the aluminum side is on the outside and the brass side on the inside. As shown in ®gure 10.11(b), this simple thermostat can be used to control the operation of any appliance that works when the temperature falls below a certain value, like a heater, or an oven. If we reverse the strip so that the aluminum is toward the Figure 10.11. (a) A bimetallic strip made with brass (shown as shaded) and aluminum would bend upward so that the aluminum is on the outside since it expands more. (b) If this bimetallic strip is used as a simple thermostat, it can control a heater, an oven, or any other device that needs to operate when the temperature falls below a certain value. 217 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 10.12. A bimetallic strip shaped like a coil is a common type of thermostat. When the temperature changes, the coil opens or closes the circuit. top part of the ®gure, the strip would bend downward when the temperature increases above a certain value. In this case, it can be used to control an air conditioner, for example. A common type of thermostat uses a bimetallic strip shaped like a coil (®gure 10.12). With changes in temperature, the different rate of expansion of the two metals in the strip subjects the coil to stresses that open or close the contact. The unusual expansion of water Water is the important exception to the rule that substances expand when the temperature increases. Although this also applies to water in its three phases at most temperatures, between 08C and 48C water actually contracts when the temperature increases. This is due to the structure of the water molecule. Each oxygen atom in a water molecule can bind itself to two additional hydrogen atoms from other water molecules and each one of its two hydrogen atoms can in turn bind themselves to one oxygen in an adjacent water molecule. This means that each water molecule can participate in 4 bonds with other water molecules, as shown in ®gure 10.13(a). In liquid water, about 80% of these bonds are completed, whereas in ice all 218 Heat and Temperature Figure 10.13. (a) The four bonds of liquid water: each oxygen atom can bind itself to two hydrogen atoms in neighboring molecules and each one of the two hydrogen atoms in a water molecule can bind to oxygen atoms from two nearby molecules. (b) The open structure of ice. water molecules are bonded to other water molecules to form the crystal structure of the solid (®gure 10.13(b)). The crystals in ice have what is described as an open structure because of the large open, unoccupied spaces between the molecules. Most other solids may have up to 12 molecules joined together as nearest neighbors and their structures are not open like that of ice. The structure of liquid water is less open than that of ice because the number of bonds in the liquid decreases with increasing temperature, and this makes the water molecules at temperatures near 08C more tightly packed than they are in ice. As more bonds are broken when the temperature of the water increases from 08C to 48C, the molecules are able to occupy more of these open spaces, so that the density of water increases reaching its maximum value of 1000 kg/m3 at 48C. At temperatures higher than 48C, the larger kinetic energies of the water molecules require that more room be available for the increased motion of the molecules, and water begins to expand with increases in temperatures, as all other substances do. Life as we know it on the earth exists in part because of these two unusual phenomena; the lower density of ice as compared with water, and the contraction of water as the temperature increases from 08C to 48C. When the temperature drops in the winter, the surface water of lakes and ponds cools down to 48C, becoming denser. The warmer, less dense water beneath is 219 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 10.14. The lower density ice ¯oats, insulating the water beneath and slowing further freezing. Aquatic life then survives in many lakes and ponds. buoyed up to the surface, where it gets chilled to 48C, becoming in turn denser. The cool descending water brings oxygen down with it. This process continues, keeping the water deep below the surface at 48C, until the atmospheric temperature drops further and ice forms on the surface of the water. Since this lower density ice ¯oats, lakes and ponds freeze from the top down, and this layer of ice insulates the water below, slowing further freezing. Fish and other forms of aquatic life survive the winter in the slightly warmer and oxygenated water below the ice (®gure 10.14). 220 11 THE LAWS OF THERMODYNAMICS The four laws of thermodynamics Why does time seem to ¯ow in only one direction? Can the ¯ow of time be reversed? The directionality of time is still a puzzle because all the laws of physics except one are applicable if time were to be reversed. As we shall see in this chapter, the second law of thermodynamics is the exception. The ¯ow of time seems to arise from the second law. There are four laws of thermodynamics: the Second Law was discovered ®rst; the First was the second; the Third was the third, but it probably is not a law of thermodynamics after all; and the Zeroth law was an afterthought. We shall occupy ourselves in this chapter with the study of these laws. The ideal gas law The study of thermodynamics is intimately connected with the study of the behavior of gases. The reason is that gases, being much simpler, are better understood than liquids and solids. An ideal gas is any gas in which the cohesive forces between molecules are negligible and the collisions between molecules are perfectly elastic; that is, both momentum and kinetic energy are conserved. Many real gases behave as ideal gases at temperatures well above their boiling points and at low pressures. The English scientist Robert Boyle, the fourteenth child of the Earl of Cork, was an infant prodigy. At the age of eight he spoke Greek and Latin and at fourteen traveled to Italy to study the works of Galileo. He returned to England in 1645 to ®nd his 221 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 11.1. (a) A container ®lled with a gas kept at the same temperature by placing it on a temperature-controlled hot plate. The pressure is changed by adding sand on the movable piston. When the pressure is increased, the volume decreases. (b) A ®xed amount of sand on top of the frictionless lid maintains the gas in the container at a constant pressure. Increasing the temperature of the gas increases its volume in a linear way. father dead and himself wealthy. In 1654, he became a member of the ``Invisible College,'' which later became the Royal Society, where he met Newton, Halley, and Hooke. In 1662, while experimenting with gases, he was able to show that if a ®xed amount of a gas was kept at a constant temperature, the pressure and the volume of the gas follow a simple mathematical relationship. Boyle discovered that gases were compressible, so that when the pressure was increased (as when the piston in ®gure 11.1(a) is pushed down by the extra sand) the volume of the gas decreased. Boyle further found that if the container was placed on a hotplate kept at a constant temperature, the increase in pressure was matched by the decrease in volume. This meant that if the pressure was doubled, the volume halved; if the pressure was tripled, the volume decreased to exactly one third. Boyle 222 The Laws of Thermodynamics expressed this relationship between pressure and volume as PV ˆ constant ‰at constant temperatureŠ: This expression is known today as Boyle's law. Several years after Boyle's experiments, it was found that the constant in Boyle's law was the same for all gases. Throughout the eighteenth century, many scientists investigated the expansion of gases when heat was added, but their results lacked consistency and no conclusion regarding the dependence among volume, pressure and temperature was reached. In 1804, the French chemist Joseph Louis Gay-Lussac was able to show that if the pressure of the gas was kept constant (as illustrated in ®gure 11.1(b) with the constant weight of the sand on the frictionless lid), the change in volume was proportional to the change in temperature. He investigated this relationship between temperature and volume with air, hydrogen, oxygen, nitrogen, nitrous oxide, ammonia, carbon dioxide, hydrogen chloride, and sulfur dioxide, and found that it held consistently. Since the volume and the temperature of a gas at constant pressure are directly proportional, a plot of volume versus temperature for different gases should give us straight lines for each gas. Gay-Lussac found that if these lines were extrapolated, they all cross the temperature axis at exactly the same point (®gure 11.2(a)). This point is the absolute zero of temperature, 0 K or ÿ273.168C. This was the basis for the introduction of the absolute or Kelvin scale of temperature. Figure 11.2. (a) A plot of volume versus temperature for different gases yields straight lines. When extrapolated, these lines intersect the temperature axis at ÿ2738C. (b) A plot of volume versus absolute temperature for an ideal gas is a straight line through the origin. 223 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS The absolute zero is the minimum temperature attainable because at this temperature the volume of the gas would be zero, as we can see in the graph of ®gure 11.2(b). A plot of volume versus absolute temperature for an ideal gas yields a straight line that passes through the origin, as shown in ®gure Physics in our world: Automobile engines The gasoline engine used in automobiles is a heat engine which generates the input heat from the combustion of gasoline inside the engine. For this reason, gasoline engines are called internal combustion engines. An automobile's gasoline engine consists of the cylinder head, the cylinder block, and the crankcase. The cylinder head has two sets of valves, intake and exhaust. When the intake valves are opened, a mixture of air and gasoline enters the cylinders. When the exhaust valves are open, the burned gases are expelled from the cylinders. The valves are opened and closed by the camshaft, a system of cams on a rotating shaft, while the moving pistons turn a shaft, the crankshaft, to which they are connected. The camshaft and the crankshaft are interconnected by a drive belt or chain so that as the pistons move, turning the crankshaft, the camshaft is also turned, opening and closing the valves. Most automobiles have a four stroke cycle engine. In the intake stroke the downward motion of the piston draws fuel into the cylinder. The volume of the cylinder increases from a minimum volume Vmin to a maximum volume Vmax ˆ rVmin , where r is the compression ratio. For modern automobiles, the compression ratio is about 8. In the compression stroke the intake valve closes as the piston reaches the end of the downstroke, and the piston compresses the air±fuel mixture to Vmin . In the power stroke, an electric spark from the spark plug ignites the gases, increasing their temperature and pressure. The heated gases expand back to Vmax , pushing the piston and doing work on the crankshaft. Finally, in the exhaust stroke, the exhaust valve opens, and the piston moves upward, pushing the burned gases out of the cylinder. The cylinder is now ready for the next cycle. 224 The Laws of Thermodynamics 11.2(b), since T in Kelvin is zero for V ˆ 0. Therefore, V ˆ constant  T ‰at constant PŠ: This is Gay-Lussac's law, also known as Charles' law, because the French physicist Jacques Alexandre Charles had independently made the same discovery a few years earlier but had failed to publish it. We can combine Boyle's law and Gay-Lussac's law into one single expression, PV ˆ constant  T which is known as the ideal gas law. We can extract a third relationship from the ideal gas law. When the volume of the gas remains constant, the pressure is proportional to the temperature, P ˆ constant  T ‰at constant VŠ: We should keep in mind that the temperature, T, in all the gas laws is in kelvins. The zeroth law of thermodynamics Although we have not labeled them as such, we have already studied the zeroth and ®rst laws of thermodynamics in the previous chapters. The zeroth law deals with bodies in thermal equilibrium. If we place two objects that are at different temperatures in contact with each other and wait a suf®cient length of time, the two objects will reach the same temperature; they are in thermal equilibrium with each other. How do we check that the two objects have reached thermal equilibrium? We need to use a third object, a thermometer for example, to verify that the two objects are in thermal equilibrium. When we use a thermometer to measure the temperature of an object, we bring it into contact with the object and wait some time before reading the temperature. What we have done is to wait until the object and the thermometer reach thermal equilibrium; that is, until the thermometer is at the same temperature as the object. If we now use the same thermometer to measure the temperature of a second object, and after waiting a long 225 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS enough time to make sure that the thermometer has reached thermal equilibrium with this second body, the reading of the thermometer is the same as when it was in thermal equilibrium with the ®rst object, we can say that the two objects are in thermal equilibrium with each other. In other words, if two objects are each in thermal equilibrium with a third object [the thermometer], they are in thermal equilibrium with each other This seemingly obvious statement is the zeroth law of thermodynamics. The ®rst law of thermodynamics The ®rst law of thermodynamics is a generalization of the principle of conservation of energy to include thermal energy. In chapter 10, we used the term thermal energy to describe the sum of all the random kinetic energies of the atoms and molecules in a substance. As we learned earlier in the book, atoms in a system have binding energies, the nuclei of these atoms also have binding energies, and the molecules have energy in the chemical bonds. These energies stored in the molecules, atoms, and nuclei are different forms of potential energy. The total energy of a system ± a gas, for example ± includes all forms of energy, thermal and potential, and is called the internal energy, U, of the system. If a system is isolated, that is, if it does not exchange energy with its surroundings, the total energy must remain constant. This is the principle of conservation of energy, familiar to us from chapters 4 and 5. It is also the ®rst law of thermodynamics; we can state it very precisely as follows: In an isolated system, the total internal energy remains constant, although it can change from one kind to another. A system can interact with its surroundings in two ways: First, when it does work or work is done on it and second, when heat is exchanged with the surroundings. To understand how this comes about, consider the gas in the well-insulated container of ®gure 11.3. The air-tight frictionless lid can slide up or down and we have added enough sand on top of it to balance the pressure exerted by the gas. 226 The Laws of Thermodynamics Figure 11.3. A gas in a well-insulated container. The pressure of the lid, sand and the atmospheric pressure balance the pressure of the gas. We now remove the insulation from the bottom of the container and place it on a stove so that an amount of heat Q is added to the gas while at the same time we add enough sand so that the lid remains in place (®gure 11.4(a)). This means that the gas does not do any work on the surroundings and all the heat added goes to increase the internal energy of the gas. That is, Q ˆ
U: Figure 11.4. (a) Adding enough sand to the lid keeps the volume of the gas constant. In this case, since no work is done by or to the gas, the heat added goes into increasing the internal energy of the system. (b) Removing sand from the lid lets the gas expand. The head added goes into doing work. (c) If the amount of sand is not altered in any way, the heat added increases the internal energy of the gas and the gas does work on the surroundings. This is the ®rst law of thermodynamics. 227 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS In this process, the volume of the gas remains constant, and we call it an isochoric (equal volume) process. When the mixture of air and gasoline ignites in a car's engine, the volume of the mixture remains unchanged and the heat from the ignition increases the internal energy. This process is close to an isochoric process. Suppose that instead of adding sand to the lid to keep the gas at a constant volume, we slowly remove enough sand so that the gas is allowed to expand (®gure 11.4(b)). In this case all the heat added goes into doing work on the surroundings, and the internal energy of the gas remains the same; that is, Q ˆ W: Recall that the temperature of a gas depends only on the random kinetic energy per molecule. In an ideal gas there are no intermolecular interactions, so the potential energy of the molecules is zero. Therefore, the internal energy of an ideal gas depends only on the temperature of the gas. Since the internal energy of the gas in the situation depicted in ®gure 11.4(b) does not change, there is no change in the temperature of the gas. We call this process an isothermal process. We can see that if we do not alter the amount of sand on the lid and simply add heat to the gas, the gas will increase its internal energy and do work on the surroundings (®gure 11.4(c)). In other words, if an amount Q of heat ¯ows into the gas resulting in an increase in its internal energy
U, and the gas does an amount of work on the surroundings, then Q ˆ
U ‡ W : What this expression tells us is that       work done increase in internal heat added : ‡ ˆ by system energy of system to system This is the principle of conservation of energy, which we call here the ®rst law of thermodynamics. In this case, the external pressure that the atmosphere, the sand and the lid exert on the gas is constant. This pressure must be matched by the expanding gas; thus, the gas exerts a constant pressure on the surroundings. This is an isobaric (equal pressure) process. The ®rst law of thermodynamics shows that if a system undergoes a volume and pressure change, the internal energy 228 The Laws of Thermodynamics of the system changes by an amount that is given by Q ÿ W . In chapter 5 we learned that the work done in moving an object in a gravitational ®eld does not depend on the path through which the object is taken between the initial and ®nal points. The gravitational force is a conservative force. In thermodynamics, when the system changes from some initial state to some ®nal state, the quantity Q ÿ W is found experimentally to depend only on the initial and ®nal coordinates and not on the path taken. This quantity Q ÿ W is the change in the internal energy of the system,
U ˆ Q ÿ W : The second law of thermodynamics The second law of thermodynamics was made famous several years ago by the English novelist and physicist C P Snow in his well known essay ``The Two Cultures,'' where he suggested that some understanding of it should be expected of every educated person. His choice was a fortunate one because the second law is one of the most important laws in all of science. This, however, does not make it dif®cult to understand. The German physicist Rudolf Gottlieb, known today by the name of Clausius, stated it more than a hundred years ago as follows: ``Heat does not pass spontaneously from cold to hot.'' This statement of the second law is known as the Clausius statement. It would not violate the principle of conservation of energy if heat were to pass spontaneously from cold to hot. During a warm summer day a puddle could spontaneously release heat to the surroundings, cooling down and solidifying into ice, without violating the conservation of energy principle. It would not violate the principle of conservation of energy either if water waves were to converge on a stone at the bottom of a pond and propel it out of the water into the hands of a child standing nearby. These events are never observed. Many times we have seen blocks of ice melting into puddles and children throwing stones into ponds, causing ripples that spread away from the stone but never the reverse processes (®gure 11.5). The fact that these events are always observed taking place in one direction and not in the other is related to the direction of time. 229 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 11.5. A child throwing a stone into a pond is a common sight during warm days. The reverse situation, in which water waves converge onto a stone lying at the bottom of a pond and propel it out of the water into the child's hands, is never seen. People grow older, not younger; stars are formed from rotating clouds of hydrogen gas, begin their thermonuclear processes out of which heavier elements are produced and energy is released, expand and contract after millions of years, and ®nally explode as supernovas or become black holes; the reverse sequence of events is never observed (®gure 11.6). There is a trend in nature towards a greater degree of disorder. It is not just your room that is hard to keep organized; the entire universe keeps getting more disorganized. In 1865, Clausius introduced the term entropy, from a Greek word that means transformation, as a measure of the disorder of a system. (The conventional symbol for entropy is S.) In terms of entropy, the second law can be stated as follows: The entropy of the universe never decreases; all natural changes take place in the direction of increasing entropy. There is only one way that all the pieces of a jigsaw puzzle can be organized to make a picture but many incorrect ways in which they can be put together. It is, therefore, extremely unlikely that by throwing the pieces together they will fall in the correct 230 The Laws of Thermodynamics Figure 11.6. An exploding supernova discovered and photographed in January 1987 in the Magellanic Cloud, a satellite galaxy of the Milky Way. These gigantic explosions represent the end of the life cycle for certain stars. They also represent the beginning, as carbon, oxygen, silicon, iron, and other heavy elements that were produced in the old star are spewed out in the explosion. New stars are born out of the matter of the explosion mixed with the surrounding gas in the galaxies. Our Sun and Planet Earth contain the ashes of early supernova explosions. (Courtesy NASA, Space Telescope Science Institute, Hubble Heritage Team.) 231 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS order. When you accidentally drop a stack of papers and hurriedly pick them up, they become out of order. There is one correct order for the papers and many incorrect ones. There are only a few ways of placing the things in your room that are esthetically pleasing to you and very many ways that are not. Your room is therefore more likely to be in an esthetically displeasing order. When you open a soft drink bottle, some of the carbon dioxide that had been dissolved under pressure in the liquid and is mixed with air above the liquid leaves the bottle and diffuses into the atmosphere. The reverse of this process, where the diffused gas collects itself and enters the bottle so that you can replace the cap and restore the previous order, is never observed. The propane gas in a tank of a recreational vehicle diffuses into the air after you open the valve. The original situation, with the propane gas in the tank separated from the air outside, is more ordered than the latter, where the propane is mixed with the air. Entropy increases in each one of these normal processes. We should note that nothing drives the molecules of a gas into a state of greater disorder; there is no special force behind this phenomenon. The diffusion of a gas is purposeless and is only the result of the random motion of its molecules. When we let a gas expand, as when we let the air out of a tire, its temperature decreases. As the gas expands, it does work on the surroundings and this means a reduction in the kinetic energy of the gas. The air leaking out of a tire does work by pushing the outside air in the vicinity of the valve through molecular collisions. The energy of the gas jostles out into the environment. This diffusion of energy out into the environment explains Clausius's statement of the second law. The tungsten atoms in the ®lament of a light bulb are vibrating rapidly when the light is on. The vibrating atoms near the surface of the ®lament collide with nearby air molecules, which in turn collide with other air molecules farther out. The energy of the ®lament is thus diffused into the cooler environment. Heat passes from the hot ®lament to the colder air and never the other way around. When we add heat to a substance, its molecular motion increases and this results in more disorder. Adding heat to a substance, then, increases its entropy and the more heat we add, the greater the increase. A given amount of heat that is added to a 232 The Laws of Thermodynamics Figure 11.7. (Cartoon by Sydney Harris.) substance is more effective in producing disorder if the substance is cold than if it is already hot. A misplaced item stands out more in a well organized room; you would hardly notice the same misplaced item in a messy room (®gure 11.7). We can see that the change in entropy of a substance is directly proportional to the amount of heat added and inversely proportional to the temperature. If a system absorbs an amount of heat Q at an absolute temperature T, the change in entropy is Q : T The units of entropy are joules per kelvin, J/K.
S ˆ The third law of thermodynamics Absolute zero is the lowest temperature possible. The German physical chemist Harmann Walther Nernst (1864±1941) proposed 233 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS The frontiers of physics: Entropy that organizes? By mixing tiny polystyrene spheres of two different sizes, physicists have been able to turn the tables on entropy and use it to line up the spheres in an organized pattern. Arjun G Yodh of the University of Pennsylvania and his research group placed a drop of salt water containing a mixture of these spheres between two microscope slides. They used many 0.08 micrometer polystyrene spheres and mixed in a few 0.46 micrometer ones and etched a small groove in the slide. Because of their random motion, the small spheres in the salt water collided with themselves and with the fewer larger spheres. The collisions produced a state of maximum entropy, in which the small spheres spread out in disordered state. The random motion of the larger spheres also tended toward an increase in entropy. However, the much larger number of smaller spheres obstructed the motion of the larger spheres. Larger spheres reaching the edge of the groove, for example, would not be allowed to enter it; the jostling motion of the smaller spheres pushed them back. Even when the experimenters placed the large spheres in the groove, they were driven out by the smaller particles. Many of the larger spheres get trapped at the edge of the straight groove, forming a row. The scientists measured the cumulative force keeping the larger particles from entering the channel to be 40 femtonewtons (10ÿ15 N). This was the ®rst measurement of the ``entropic interaction.'' in 1907 that the absolute zero temperature cannot be reached. In an experiment, the temperature of a system can in principle be reduced from the previous temperature obtained, even if by a very small amount, as has been done recently, achieving temperatures of the order of 10ÿ7 K (one ten-millionth of a kelvin). What Nernst proposed was that although it is possible to get closer and closer to absolute zero, to actually get there requires an in®nite number of steps. This, of course, makes the absolute zero temperature unattainable. This statement is known as the third law of thermodynamics. 234 The Laws of Thermodynamics Third Law of Thermodynamics: It is impossible to reach the absolute zero temperature in a ®nite number of steps of a process. Nernst was awarded the 1920 Nobel Prize in Chemistry for this discovery. Some scientists think that this statement is actually an extension of the second law and not a separate law. Whether a separate law or only an extension of the second law, the statement that absolute zero cannot be reached is universally accepted. Entropy and the origin of the Universe The fact that all natural processes take place in the direction of increasing entropy means, as we have seen, that the entropy of the entire Universe is constantly increasing. Nature's tendency towards greater disorder diminishes the amount of energy available to do work. Think, for example, of a bouncing ball. With each bounce, the mechanical energy of the ball decreases and the ball reaches a lower height every time, until, ®nally, it lies still on the ground. While the ball is falling, although there is still random molecular motion, all its molecules also possess the same translational motion towards the ground, producing an ordered state. When the ball hits the ground, there is a slight increase in the random motion of the molecules of both ground and ball as a result of the collision and this increases the thermal energy of the ball (and the ground). There is, therefore, less mechanical energy for the second bounce. When the ball loses all of its mechanical energy to thermal energy through the repeated collisions and bounces no more, the ordered translational motion of its molecules has been lost to a random disordered motion that has produced an increase in thermal energy. As the ordered state disappears, the entropy of the system increases. If we think of the bouncing ball as a very simple machine to do work (using it to catapult a small stone, for example, as illustrated in ®gure 11.8), the energy that is available to perform this work decreases after every bounce and disappears altogether when the ball lies still on the ground. The total energy of the system (ball and ground) remains constant; the mechanical energy has been transformed into thermal energy, no longer available to do work. 235 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 11.8. A bouncing ball can be used to catapult a small stone. The energy available to do this work decreases with every bounce as it dissipates into heat. In all processes that involve exchange of heat, there is an increase in entropy and a decrease in the energy available to do work. The entropy of the universe must eventually reach a maximum value when everything is in a state of perfect disorder and the total energy of the universe is distributed uniformly. This led scientists to predict the ``heat death'' of the universe when processes are no longer possible. We now know that the ``heat death'' of the universe has already happened. Even though, as we have said, the entropy of the universe is continuously increasing, the total entropy of the universe is essentially constant. The reason is that almost all of the entropy of the universe is in the radiation of photons and not in matter ± by a factor of 400 million to one ± and the entropy of the radiation has already reached its peak. The universe consists of matter in the form of galaxies and radiation in the form of photons. The galaxies are conglomerates of billions of stars: our own galaxy, the Milky Way, is estimated to contain 100 billion stars. From observational evidence, astronomers calculate that the universe contains some 100 billion galaxies each separated from the others by a few million lightyears. (One light-year is the distance light travels in a year, nearly ten trillion kilometers.) In all these galaxies, stars are constantly forming, evolving, exploding and collapsing. All these processes increase the total entropy of the universe. However, the total increase in entropy due to all the changes that have taken place since the beginning of the universe amounts to only one ten-thousandth of the entropy of the radiation. 236 The Laws of Thermodynamics When the universe was formed some 13 billion years ago, it was all radiation. It is a triumph of modern physics that we are today able to trace the history of the universe beginning at a hundredth of a decillionth (10ÿ35 ) of a second after the very moment of creation, an interval of time so small that we are incapable of imagining it. We will be studying some of the details of this wonderful theory in chapter 25. We can, however, outline the main ideas here, so that we can understand how the total entropy of the universe can be considered to be almost constant. The Big Bang theory of the origin of the universe was proposed by the Russian±American physicist George Gamow towards the end of the 1940s to explain a strange phenomenon that had been discovered some twenty years earlier by the American astronomer Edwin Hubble. Hubble had undertaken a study of 100 galaxies with the 100-inch telescope at Mount Wilson and had made a startling discovery. He noticed that all these galaxies were invariably moving away from us. For a while it looked as if Ptolemy was right after all; the earth seemed to be at the center of the universe. Soon Hubble realized that this was not the case. By comparing the velocity of recession with the known distances to the galaxies, he discovered that the more distant the galaxy, the faster it receded. The velocities that he measured were not minor. Galaxies in the constellation Ursa Major, for example, were found to be receding at a rate of 42 000 km/s or one-seventh the speed of light. Hubble showed that the velocities of recession of galaxies were related to their distances by a simple expression, now known as Hubble's law. This law states that v ˆ Hd where v is the velocity of recession of a galaxy, d is the distance to the galaxy, and H is Hubble's constant. This constant has a value 22 km/s per million light-years. In other words, a galaxy one million light years from us moves away at a speed of 22 km/s. Wendy L Freedman of the Carnegie Observatories in Pasadena, CA, has recently calculated this value from an analysis of data collected during the past eight years by the Hubble Space Telescope. A second group led by Alan Sandage at Carnegie has calculated a slightly lower number for the Hubble constant, at 18.5 km/s per light-year. This discovery led Hubble to realize that although 237 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 11.9. The raisin bread analogy of the expansion of the universe. As the loaf of bread is baked, the expanding dough carries the raisins away from each other. Raisins A, B, and C move away from raisin MW as the dough rises. MW can be any raisin in the loaf. every one of the distant galaxies that he studied was receding from us, the earth was not at a special place in the universe, but rather that every galaxy was moving away from every other galaxy. Hubble's discovery means that the universe is expanding. Imagine baking a loaf of raisin bread; as the dough rises the raisins move apart from each other (®gure 11.9). If we select one particular raisin, we would see that all the other raisins move away from it and the farther a raisin is from the one we selected, the faster it moves away. We did not pick a special raisin; it works the same with any one raisin as they all move away from each other. The expanding dough carries the raisins along so that the distance between them increases. The expanding space carries the galaxies along so that from our own galaxy we see the other galaxies moving away from us. Intelligent beings on a planet in a distant galaxy would see our galaxy and all the other galaxies moving away from theirs. An expanding universe means that at earlier times the galaxies were closer together and this suggests a beginning for everything. This is what motivated George Gamow to propose the Big Bang theory of the origin of the universe. As we said earlier, the universe consists of matter and radiation. The average density of matter in the universe has been estimated to be about one nuclear particle per cubic meter. The average density of radiation in the universe today is about 400 238 The Laws of Thermodynamics million photons per cubic meter. Since the entropy of a system is proportional to the number of particles, we can see that the entropy of the universe is mostly in the photons, by a factor of 400 million. Since almost all the entropy of the universe is in the photons, the increase in entropy that takes place when processes occur in the planetary systems and galaxies of the universe, although numbered in the billions, can add very little to the entropy that already exists in the photons. The ``heat death'' of the universe, then, effectively happened shortly after the big bang, with the creation of all the photons. Entropy and the arrow of time The concept of time is intimately linked to the concept of entropy. Our perception of time arises from the accumulation of information in our brains; we remember the past. Events, changes, and processes need to occur so that experiences can be sensed and stored in our memories. As we have seen, changes in the universe take place only when the entropy of the entire universe increases. The accumulation of information in our brains takes place only when these changes take place; that is, when the entropy of the universe increases. Nature has used this increase in entropy to give direction to the arrow of time. Except for the second law of thermodynamics, all the laws of physics remain unchanged if the direction of the arrow of time is reversed; they are time-reversible. The laws of mechanics, for example, are time-reversible. If we make a movie of an oscillating pendulum, a perfectly elastic bouncing ball or any other purely mechanical process (where no exchange of heat takes place) and then run the movie backwards, it is impossible for us to tell the difference. The pendulum oscillates back and forth and the ball bounces the same as when the movie is run forward. Since the laws of mechanics and electromagnetism do not depend on the direction of time, the elastic collision of two molecules in a gas appears equally possible if the ¯ow of time were to be reversed, as illustrated in ®gure 11.10. However, when we consider all the molecules in the gas, the situation is no longer time-reversible. If the gas is originally con®ned to the left half 239 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 11.10. The collision of two molecules is time-reversible. We could not tell the difference if a video of this collision were to be shown in reverse. of a container by means of a partition, as seen in ®gure 11.11, and a small hole is made on the partition, the gas will diffuse until it is uniformly distributed throughout both sides of the container. If a video of this process were to be shown in reverse, we would immediately recognize that this is the wrong direction. Although the motion of any individual molecule of the gas is time-reversible, the behavior of the whole gas is not. Lord Kelvin recognized this reversibility paradox in the 1870s. Kelvin himself and later the German physicist Ludwig Boltzmann (1844±1906) realized that it was the statistical nature of the second law that explained the paradox. There are many Figure 11.11. The diffusion of a gas through an opening in the partition is not a time-reversible process. We could immediately tell if a video of this process were shown in reverse. 240 The Laws of Thermodynamics Figure 11.12. After a long enough time, the interacting molecules will ®nd themselves occupying the original positions. This is known as Poincare recurrence. In a real system, it will actually take many times the age of the universe for this to happen. more disordered arrangements of a system than ordered ones, and for this reason the disordered arrangements are much more likely to occur. Given enough time, even the very few ordered arrangements can occur, although for real situations, enough time means a time longer than the age of the universe. This last statement, on the recurrence of a mechanical system, was proposed in 1889 by the French scientist Henri PoincareÂ, and is known as Poincare recurrence. Consider, for example, a gas enclosed in a sealed container (®gure 11.12). If we concentrate our attention on a single molecule, we would ®nd it undergoing collisions with other molecules and with the walls of the container. Suppose, for simplicity, that there are only three molecules in this ``gas.'' If we wait a long enough time, we will eventually see the three molecules occupying the same positions that they occupied at the beginning, when we ®rst started observing them. The time it takes for this to happen is known as Poincare cycle time. For an actual macroscopic system, the Poincare cycle time turns out to be many millions of times the age of the universe. No wonder we never see it happening! The Russian±Belgian physical chemist Ilya Prigogine, who won the Nobel prize in 1977 for his work in irreversible thermodynamics, postulates that the Poincare recurrence does not happen because very small changes made to a system can drastically change its future behavior, preventing it from ever reaching the same initial state. The following example will help us clarify his hypothesis. Suppose somebody traces a large circle on the ground and asks you to follow it as closely as possible on a bicycle, so that, after you complete the circle, you end up at the 241 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS same position from where you started. If you are an average bicycle rider, you can easily correct small deviations from the circular path, and it would not be very dif®cult for you to accomplish the task. Suppose, however, that, as you are about to complete your circle, you momentarily lose your balance and deviate from the path, not ending at the same spot. You could continue riding, completing a second loop, and perhaps a third, until you make it to the right spot. If you wait a long enough time and complete enough loops, your ®nal position is indistinguishable from the initial position. Now, suppose that the game becomes more challenging, and the circle is traced on the edge of a very tall and narrow circular wall (®gure 11.13). Here you would have to be extremely cautious because even a tiny deviation from the circle would cause you to fall off the edge, preventing you from ever completing the circle. In this case, a small deviation would completely change the system so that the same initial state could not be reached. Figure 11.13. A cyclist riding on the edge of a very tall and narrow circular wall. 242 The Laws of Thermodynamics Which one of these opposing views is the correct one? This is a question that has not yet been resolved. We can see that thermodynamics is a part of physics that is still being developed and that it has implications that reach into the heart of our understanding of the world. 243 12 ELECTRICITY Electromagnetism Amber is a beautiful stone that has been used since prehistoric times to make jewelry and ornamental carved objects. A fossil tree resin from pine and other softwood trees, amber was also of interest to the ancient Greeks who called it "o (elektron). In the seventh century BC, Thales of Miletus observed that when amber was rubbed vigorously with cloth, it attracted small bits of straw, feathers or seeds. Other materials that show this property were discovered in the centuries that followed. Lodestone is another mineral with unusual properties. Known also as magnetite or magnetic iron ore, lodestone is an iron oxide mineral that attracts iron. Known for this property as far back as 500 BC, lodestone turns to a north±south direction when ¯oating in a liquid or suspended from a string. The Roman poet Lucretius advanced a theory about the cause of magnetism in his poem On the Nature of the Universe. A detailed study of these properties only began with the work of William Gilbert (1544±1603) in England. Gilbert received a medical degree from Cambridge and established himself as a physician of renown, becoming president of the College of Physicians and later court physician to Queen Elizabeth I. He became interested in the work on magnets of the French scholar and engineer Petrus Peregrinus de Maricourt and started performing very careful experiments to determine the nature of magnetism. His experiments eventually led him to investigate also the properties of amber and to realizing that its attraction was different from magnetism which involved only iron. In his book De Magnete, published in 1600, he not only presented a systematic discussion 247 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS on magnetism but also gave a discussion on the force of attraction caused by friction in amber. He coined the word electric for ``bodies that attract in the same way as amber.'' Electricity and magnetism developed as two different sciences until the early nineteenth century when the Danish physicist Hans Christian Oersted observed that there was a connection between them. This connection was developed further by, among others, the English scientist Michael Faraday. It was, however, the Scottish physicist James Clerk Maxwell who brought together electricity and magnetism in a complete form by the formulation of his theory of electromagnetism in the form of the four equations that bear his name. We shall return to the fascinating story of the development of electromagnetism in chapter 14. Electric charge For twenty-four centuries, from Thales to Gilbert, the attractive properties of amber and of ``bodies that attract in the same way as amber'' were known. In 1733, the French chemist Charles FrancËois de Cisterney du Fay performed a series of experiments in which he touched a gold foil with a glass rod that had been electri®ed by rubbing it with silk (®gure 12.1). Before it was touched by the glass, the foil was attracted towards the rod but after it was touched, the gold foil was repelled away from it. Moreover, contrary to his expectation, the foil was attracted towards an amber rod that had been rubbed with wool. A gold foil that was touched ®rst by the electri®ed amber rod and was repelled by it, was then attracted towards the glass rod. Du Fay supposed that there were two kinds of electri®cation and he called the type produced by the glass vitreous (from the Latin word for ``glass'') and the type obtained with the amber rod, resinous. Du Fay generalized his ®ndings by stating that bodies with the same type of electri®cation repel each other, whereas bodies with different type of electri®cation attract each other. In 1747, Benjamin Franklin, the great statesman, inventor, writer, and the ®rst American physicist, conducted experiments that showed that one type of electri®cation could be neutralized by the other type. This indicated to him that the two types of electricity were not just different; they were opposites. He further 248 Electricity Figure 12.1. (a) A glass rod that has been rubbed attracts a gold leaf. (b) When the gold leaf is touched with the glass rod, the rod and the leaf repel each other. (c) A gold leaf charged with the glass rod is attracted by a charged amber rod. proposed that all objects possessed a normal amount of electricity some of which was transferred to another body by rubbing. When this transfer of electricity took effect, the ®rst body had a de®ciency on its normal amount of electricity, and this could be indicated by a negative sign, while the body that received the electricity ended up with an excess, which could be indicated by a positive sign. Since there was no difference in the behavior of the two ``types'' of electricity, Franklin had no way of knowing which one was positive and which one was negative. He arbitrarily decided that rubbing glass with a silk cloth transferred electricity to the rod and, therefore, was positive, while rubbing amber with wool made it lose electricity, and was negative (®gure 12.2). We now use the term electric charge and speak of ``positive electric charge'' and ``negative electric charge.'' Franklin had a 50% chance of being right with his convention of signs. He lost. We now know that electrons are the carriers of electric charge when the rods are rubbed and, in Franklin's sign 249 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 12.2. A glass rod that has been rubbed with silk acquires a positive charge. An amber rod that has been rubbed with wool becomes negatively charged. convention, they have negative charge. In the case of the glass rod, when it is rubbed with silk, electrons actually leave the rod and join the silk molecules. Some of the glass molecules near the surface of the rod are left lacking a negatively charged electron and become positive ions; that is, the silicon and oxygen atoms that make up the glass molecules have one electron fewer than the corresponding number of protons in their nuclei and the molecule is left with a net positive charge. The silk, on the other hand, acquires extra electrons in the rubbing process and becomes negatively charged. In a typical experiment, about one billion electrons get transferred in the rubbing process. Franklin had assumed that positive charges were transferred. Although we still use Franklin's convention of signs, we need to be aware of the correct interpretation. Coulomb's law What is the nature of the attractive force between a positive and a negative electric charge or the repulsive force between two positive or two negative charges? The English chemist Joseph Priestley, in a brilliant insight, provided the answer. Priestley had been asked by his friend Franklin to investigate a phenomenon that Franklin had encountered. About 1775, Franklin noticed that small charged cork balls were not affected when hung from a thread close to the inner surface of a charged metal can, although 250 Electricity Figure 12.3. The net gravitational force acting on the object of mass m inside a shell is the sum of the gravitational forces exerted on the object by all the parts of the shell. All these forces balance out and the net force is zero. they were attracted by the can when placed near the outside surface. Priestley correctly realized that a similar situation occurs in mechanics. If an object of mass m were to be placed inside a hollow planet, the net gravitational force acting on the object would be zero (®gure 12.3). Since the gravitational force is an inverse square law, that is, it is proportional to the inverse of the square of the distance, Priestley proposed that the force between two electric charges also varies as the inverse of the square of the distance between the charges. Charles Augustin Coulomb was born to wealthy parents in 1736 in AngouleÃme, France. He studied mathematics and science and became a military engineer, serving in the West Indies until 1776, when he returned to Paris. Because of his precarious health and his desire for a quiet life, he retired to the town of Blois where, while the French Revolution started, he dedicated himself to scienti®c experimentation. In 1777, Coulomb invented a torsion balance to measure the force between electrically charged objects. (Shortly thereafter, Cavendish used a similar torsion balance to ``weigh the earth;'' that is, to determine the value of G.) A small charged sphere was attached to a horizontal, insulating rod which was suspended by a thin silver wire (®gure 12.4). Close to this sphere, he placed a second charged sphere. As the spheres were attracted to or repelled from each other (depending on whether the charges were opposite or the same), the wire twisted. 251 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 12.4. Coulomb's torsion balance. The electrical force between the suspended sphere and the ®xed sphere can be determined from the twisting of the wire. The twisting angle allowed Coulomb to determine that the force between the spheres for different separations was proportional to the inverse of the square of the separation, as Priestley had proposed. If r is the distance between the centers of the spheres, the electrical force F between them is given by 1 F / 2: r Coulomb also showed that the electric force also depends on the magnitude of the charges. Although at the time there was no method for measuring the amount of electric charge on an object, Coulomb ingeniously ®gured out a way of comparing charges. Bringing together two identical spheres, one charged and the other uncharged, he found that the original charge was distributed in equal parts between the two spheres, so that each sphere held one half of the original charge. Bringing other uncharged spheres into contact with one of the charged ones, he could produce fractions of one fourth, one eighth, and so on, of the original charge. This allowed Coulomb to establish that the electric force between two charged objects is also proportional to the product of the magnitudes of the charges. The results of Coulomb's experiments on the forces exerted by one charged object on another can be summarized in what we now call Coulomb's Law: The force exerted by one charged object on another varies inversely as the square of the distance separating the objects and is proportional to 252 Electricity Figure 12.5. The electric force exerted by one charge on another is along the line joining the charges. (a) Charges of opposite signs attract each other. (b), (c) charges of the same sign repel each other. the product of the magnitude of the charges. The force is along the line joining the charges and is attractive if the charges have opposite signs and repulsive if they have the same sign [see ®gure 12.5]. If we call q1 and q2 the magnitudes of the two charges, and r the distance between their centers, we can state Coulomb's law in a single equation: q q F ˆ k 12 2 r where k is known as Coulomb's constant. The SI unit of charge is the coulomb (C) and the value of Coulomb's constant is k ˆ 9  109 N m2 =C2 : In practical situations charges as large as one coulomb are very seldom encountered. The force that two objects each holding a charge of 1 C would exert on each other when they are separated by a distance of 1 m is 9  109 N, which is about equivalent to the weight of one million tons. Typical charges produced by rubbing small objects are of the order of nanocoulombs (nC) to microcoulombs (mC). The most fundamental unit of charge is the charge of one electron or one proton. The fundamental charge, e, has a value e ˆ 1:602  10ÿ19 C: The electric ®eld How does the electric force between two charged objects separated by a distance r propagate from one object to the other? In 253 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS the nineteenth century the English physicist Michael Faraday introduced the concept of ®eld as an intuitive way of looking at the electrical interaction between charges. Although, as we shall see in the ®nal chapters of the book, there are other ways of looking at this interaction, the concept of ®eld is still a very powerful and useful one. There are situations in everyday life that we can use to illustrate the concept of ®eld. A line of people waiting for tickets for a rock concert is an example. When the tickets run out, the word spreads out very quickly. Some people hear it directly from the person at the ticket window, others are told by the people who heard it ®rst, these people tell others, and still others guess it from the movement of the crowd or from people's disappointed expressions. Knowledge about the lack of tickets spreads out through the crowd without a need for everyone in line to speak directly to the person at the window. The region around the ticket of®ce where the people interested in obtaining tickets are located constitutes a ``®eld.'' In physics, ®eld is used to specify a quantity for all points in a particular region of space. The temperature distribution of the water in a pond is an example. The property of the space around the earth where any object experiences its gravitational attraction constitutes the gravitational ®eld of the earth. Similarly, the electric ®eld describes the property of the space around an electrically charged object. The presence of a charged body at a particular point distorts the space around it in such a way that any other charged body placed in this space feels a force that is given by Coulomb's law. Figure 12.6 shows a positive charge q at some point in space. If we place a small positive test charge q0 at some other nearby point, the charge q will exert a force on this test charge which points away from the location of q and along the line joining them. The electric ®eld strength E is the Coulomb force divided by the magnitude of the test charge q0 , Eˆ F : q0 The electric ®eld strength is a vector quantity since it has magnitude and direction and is proportional to the Coulomb force, which is a vector quantity. The direction of the electric ®eld 254 Electricity Figure 12.6. The electric ®eld strength E at some point P near a positive charge q is determined by placing a small positive charge q0 at point P. The value of E is the magnitude of the coulomb force felt by the test charge divided by the magnitude of the test charge. vector is the direction of the force on a positive test charge. The units of E are newtons per coulomb, N/C. By placing the test charge at several points in the vicinity of the charge q, we can map the electric ®eld around this charge. Figure 12.7 shows the electric ®elds due to a positive and a negative charge. Since the test charge is always positive, the electric ®eld around the negative charge points inward. The electric ®eld line con®guration for a pair of charges is a superposition of the ®eld lines for two single charges, as shown in ®gure 12.8(a). Figure 12.8(b) shows the electric ®elds for two unlike charges and for two like charges. Notice, also, the ®eld lines in between the two parallel metal plates holding opposite charges (®gure 12.9). In this case, the ®eld is constant throughout the region enclosed by the plates, as evidenced by the parallel, equally spaced ®eld lines. Figure 12.10 is a photograph of two Figure 12.7. Electric ®elds around a positive and around a negative charge. 255 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 12.8. The electric ®eld due to a pair of charges is a superposition of the ®elds for two single charges. (a) The ®eld at points 1 and 2 is the resultant of the ®eld due to the positive charge, a vector pointing away from the positive charge, and the ®eld due to the negative charge, a vector pointing toward the negative charge. (b) Electric ®elds due to two unlike charges (left) and two like charges (right). Figure 12.9. Electric ®eld due to two oppositely charged metal plates. rods carrying equal and opposite charges. The electric ®elds are made visible by seeds ¯oating in an insulated liquid. The fundamental charge In 1891, a young American student who had just completed his undergraduate education with a major in Greek at Oberlin College, was approached by the school with an interesting proposition. Due to a shortage of scientists in the United States, 256 Electricity Figure 12.10. Electric ®elds produced by two rods carrying equal and opposite charges. The patterns are made visible by grass seed ¯oating in an insulating liquid. (From PSSC Physics Seventh Edition, by HaberSchaim, Dodge, Gardner, and Shore. Published by Kendall/Hunt Publishing Company, 1991.) the school had been unable to hire a quali®ed physics instructor and asked the recent graduate if he would accept the challenge. Robert A Millikan not only accepted the offer but fell in love with the subject and took his master's degree while he taught introductory physics at the school. He went on to obtain the ®rst PhD degree in physics that Columbia University ever awarded. After working as a postdoctoral fellow under Max Planck in Germany he returned to the United States and accepted a position at the University of Chicago in 1910. In 1897, J J Thomson had succeeded in determining the charge-to-mass ratio of the electron, in what is now considered to be one of the landmark experiments in the history of science. After his determination of this ratio, Thomson and his collaborators J S Townsend and H A Wilson attempted to determine the charge e of the electron in a series of experiments in which an ionized gas was bubbled through water to form a cloud. By determining the mass and total electric charge of the cloud and estimating the number of ions in the cloud, they obtained a value for the magnitude of the charge of the electron of about 1:0  10ÿ16 C. However, the method used in the estimation of the number of ions in the cloud could not be veri®ed. 257 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS The frontiers of physics: Electrostatics on Mars Mars, our neighbor in the Solar System, has been the subject of human interest since early times. Today, the possibility that there is water under its surface that could harbor living organisms has made the exploration of Mars a matter of enormous relevance to us. NASA and the European Space Agency have aggressive plans to explore the planet. Scientists at NASA are attempting to solve the many problems that current and future missions to the planet may face. The Viking Lander missions of the 1970s together with the more recent Path®nder mission have shown that large areas of the surface of Mars are covered by ®ne particles in a fairly homogeneous, thin layer. These dusty conditions combined with the frequent dust devils and occasional large dust storms, as well as with the extremely low absolute humidity near the surface, create an environment conducive to electrostatic charge buildup. The surfaces of landers, rovers or equipment may acquire an electric charge when placed in contact with the dust particles in the soil or suspended in the atmosphere. These dust particles, which can themselves acquire an electric charge as they collide with each other when blown by the wind, get attached to some of these surfaces by electrostatic forces. The result could be clogged ®lters, inef®cient dust covered solar cells or thermal radiators, and obscure viewports. In addition, the voltages generated as the surfaces charge up could produce electrostatic discharges that could be hazardous to equipment and astronauts in future missions. To assess these problems, NASA developed the Mars Environmental Compatibility Assessment (MECA) Electrometer, an instrument that can measure the electrostatic charge generated when different materials are rubbed. Designed by scientists at NASA's Jet Propulsion Laboratory (JPL) and NASA Kennedy Space Center (KSC) for a future lander mission to Mars, this instrument is currently being calibrated by teams led by Dr Martin Buehler at JPL and by the author at KSC. The MECA Electrometer contains eight sensors. Six of the sensors measure the charge developed by 258 Electricity contact or friction on six insulating materials: Fiberglass/ Epoxy, Lexan, Te¯on, Rulon J, and Lucite. These materials were chosen for their wide range at which they acquire charge. There is also an ion gauge that will measure the ion concentration in the martian atmosphere, a bare electrometer to measure atmospheric electric ®elds, and a thermometer. The instrument will be placed on the heel of the lander robot arm. During operation, the electrometer will be rubbed against the Martian soil. Although some of the materials selected for the instrument are commonly used in space, the principal idea was to generate data that can be replicated in the laboratory. Future, more advanced instruments are being developed that could characterize not only the soil and dust on Mars but also new materials that can be used in exploration missions. The MECA Electrometer with the row of 5 electrostatic sensors, the bare electrometer (top left), and the ion gauge (top right). There is also a temperature sensor inside the housing. 259 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 12.11. Millikan's oil drop experiment. The weight of the oil drop, mg, is balanced by the electric force acting on the charged drop, qE. In 1909, Millikan began a series of experiments in which charged oil drops were balanced in midair for several hours by a constant electric ®eld obtained with two parallel plates charged with opposite charges (®gure 12.11). An oil drop of mass m would be attracted towards the ground with a force F ˆ mg, which is the drop's weight. When the drop holding a charge q is placed in a region of a constant electric ®eld, an electric force Fel ˆ qE in the upward direction is exerted on the drop, which could be made to balance the weight of the drop by applying the appropriate ®eld. That is, qE ˆ mg: By varying the electric ®eld between the plates, the oil drops could be moved up or down. If the charge on a drop changed during the observation, its velocity was observed to change. This allowed Millikan to conclude that the electric charge occurred always in multiples of an elementary unit which was the magnitude of the charge of the electron, e. He obtained a value for the charge of the electron with an accuracy of one part in a 1000. In 1923, Millikan was awarded the Nobel Prize in physics for these experiments. Electric potential In our study of energy, we found that the concept of potential energy was very useful, in particular when we used it to describe the behavior of objects in the vicinity of the gravitational pull of the earth. As we learned in chapter 4, the gravitational force is 260 Electricity Figure 12.12. The work done in moving the charge q0 from point 1 to point 2 is independent of the path taken. We say that the electric force is a conservative force. a conservative force, which means that the work done in moving an object from one point to another in a gravitational ®eld depends only on the initial and ®nal points and not on the path through which the object moves. An electric charge q0 placed in the electric ®eld of another charge q feels a force F that is proportional to the product of the magnitudes of the two charges and inversely proportional to the square of their separation r1 . When the charge q0 is brought in closer to the charge q, at a distance r2 , the only thing that changes in the expression for the force between the two charges is the distance between them. The path taken in moving the charge q0 from the ®rst position to the second does not matter (®gure 12.12). Like the gravitational force, the electric force is also a conservative force. If the charges q and q0 are both of the same kind, we would need to do work to bring q0 closer to q. When we do that, the total energy of the particle carrying the charge q0 increases by an amount equal to the work done. This increase in total energy appears as an increase in electric potential energy,
PE. When the positive charge q0 is moved away from the charge q, there is a decrease in electric potential energy, since the two positive charges repel each other. On the other hand, if the two charges are oppositely charged, as when a positive charge q0 is placed in the electric ®eld of a negative charge q or a negative charge q0 is placed in the electric ®eld of a positive charge q, moving q0 closer to q would result in a decrease in electric potential and 261 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS moving them apart would result in an increase in electric potential, since the two charges attract each other. The magnitude of the change in electric potential energy depends on the magnitude of the charge q0 . It is convenient, then, to have a quantity that does not depend on this charge and for this reason we de®ne the electric potential difference, V, as the change in electric potential energy of a charge q0 divided by the magnitude of that charge; that is, Vˆ
PE : q0 The SI unit of potential difference is the volt (V). From the de®nition, 1 volt equals 1 joule divided by 1 coulomb, or 1V ˆ 1J : 1C The volt was named in honor of Count Alessandro Volta, a professor of physics at the University of Pavia, Italy, who invented the electric battery. We sometimes refer to potential difference as voltage, a term derived from the name of the unit. From the de®nition of potential difference we can see that the electron volt is a unit of energy. A particle with a charge equal to that of the electron which is moved between two points in an electric ®eld so that their potential difference is 1 volt will change its potential energy by 1 electron volt:
PE ˆ qV ˆ 1 eV ˆ 1:6  10ÿ19 CV ˆ 1:6  10ÿ19 J: Storing electrical energy As we have seen, we must do work to move an electric charge in an electric ®eld and this changes the potential energy of the charge. Could we store this potential energy for later use? In 1746, the Dutch physicist Pieter van Musschenbroeck who was professor of physics at the University of Leyden attempted for the ®rst time to do just that. He suspended a metal jar ®lled with water from insulating silk threads and led a brass wire from a charged cylinder into the water. A student who was assisting Musschenbroeck with the experiment happened to touch the brass wire and became the ®rst person to receive an arti®cially 262 Electricity Figure 12.13. When a small amount of charge is transferred between two uncharged metal plates, a small potential difference in created. This device is a parallel plate capacitor. produced electric shock. Musschenbroeck realized that he had accidentally discovered a way of storing charge. News of the experiment spread rapidly and soon ``Leyden jars'' were being built and improved upon in many other laboratories. Today, a device that has the capacity of storing electrical energy, like the Leyden jar, is called a capacitor. We can store electrical energy by creating an electric ®eld. One way of creating an electric ®eld is with two uncharged metal plates separated by a distance d. When some small amount of charge is transferred from one plate to the other, a small potential difference appears (®gure 12.13). If we continue the process of transferring charge, we end up with a potential difference V between the plates and an electric ®eld E in this region. It takes work to separate the charges and create the ®eld and this work becomes the potential energy that is stored. This particular device is called a parallel plate capacitor. Capacitors can have different shapes. The amount of charge that can be stored in a capacitor at a given potential depends on its physical characteristics. Volta introduced the expression ``electrical capacity,'' in analogy with heat capacity, to indicate the storage capacity of these devices. Today we call this concept capacitance. The smaller the voltage needed to store a given charge, the greater is the capacitance. Many capacitors have a nonconducting material between the charged plates. This increases the capacitance. If the insulating material is air, the increase is very small; about 6 parts per 10 000. For other materials the increase can be much greater. Glass, for example, increases the capacitance by a factor of between 5 and 10. The increase in the capacitance is due to a reduction in the potential difference between the plates (since 263 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS capacitance is inversely proportional to the potential difference). When the plates are charged, the charges in the nonconducting material between the plates reorient themselves, so that the positive charges point toward the negatively charged plate and the negative charges toward the positive plate. This orientation sets up an electric ®eld in the nonconductor that is in the opposite direction to the electric ®eld between the plates. When the ®eld is reduced, the potential difference is also reduced, thus increasing the capacitance. An animal cell is a living example of a capacitor. The membranes of cells are generally composed of lipid or fat molecules and protein molecules oriented so that the inner part of the membrane containing lipid and cholesterol molecules is sandwiched between layers containing protein molecules. The membrane The frontiers of physics: Storing single electrons A new device, developed by Mark W Keller and his collaborators at the National Institute of Standards in Boulder, Colorado, allows these researchers to individually count and store millions of electrons, one by one, into a specially developed capacitor. With their electron pump, as the device is called, individual electrons are transferred into a capacitor for storage. The pump consists of an array of six microscopic bullet-shaped regions of aluminum, separated by small walls of aluminum oxide. Electrons are allowed to pass through the aluminum islands only when an electric current is applied to the islands. Timed electrical pulses push the electrons from island to island until they reach the capacitor. The researchers have used their pump to count millions of electrons, missing only one in 70 million. The main application for the pump, however, is not to count electrons, but to increase the accuracy in the determination of capacitance. By knowing exactly how many electrons are stored in a capacitor (which gives the total charge stored) and measuring the voltage, Keller and his collaborators can calculate the capacitance with an accuracy not possible previously. 264 Electricity Physics in our world: Inkjet printers An inkjet printer uses a print head that shoots ink at the paper. A resistor inside the print head heats a thin layer of ink which expands into a vapor bubble. The expansion forces the ink through a small nozzle which causes it to break up in droplets a tenth of a millimeter in diameter. The print head shoots about 6000 droplets every second at speeds of about 15 m/s ®rst through a charging device and then through the charged plates of a capacitor. In places where the paper is to be left blank, an electric change is deposited on the droplets. As the charged droplets pass through the electric ®eld that exists inside the capacitor, they are de¯ected away from the paper, back to the ink reservoir. When the ink is to hit the paper, the charging device is turned off and the ink droplets are left uncharged. The neutral droplets ¯y unde¯ected through the capacitor and hit the paper. Color inkjet printers have four ink reservoirs containing black, cyan, magenta, and yellow ink, the standard colors used in commercial printing. By mixing these four colors, all other colors can be obtained. 265 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS wall of a cell separates two regions that contain potassium ions (positive) and chloride ions (negative). Thus, a cell is like a very small capacitor where the positive and negative charges are separated by the nonconducting membrane wall. The potential difference across a typical cell is of the order of 100 mV. 266 13 APPLIED ELECTRICITY Conductors and insulators As we have seen, rubbing a glass or an amber rod with a piece of cloth produces an electric charge on the rod (®gure 13.1(a)). If the rod is made of metal, no charge develops (®gure 13.1(b)). However, touching a metal rod with a charged object will cause the metal to become charged (®gure 13.1(c)). The reason for this behavior is that the atoms in a metal have some electrons that are not tightly bound to their nuclei and are free to move about. Any excess charge readily moves in conductors. In metals, then, electric charges move or ¯ow through the material. We say that metals are good conductors of electricity. In glass, amber or other materials like them, on the other hand, electrons are not free to move; they are bound to individual molecules or atoms. Any excess charge placed on them remains (unless they are touched by some other object). These materials are called insulators. Plastics, wood, and rubber are examples of good insulators. Pure water is also an insulator. Tap water, however, contains salts that form ions which can move through the liquid, making it a good conductor. There are some materials, called semiconductors, that are intermediate between conductors and insulators. Modern electronics has developed due to the discovery of the properties of these materials. The electrical conductivity of semiconductors can be enhanced by the addition of traces of other elements with a slightly different electronic structure. As we shall see, these impurities provide an additional electron or the lack of one, which results in a negative or positive charge that can move around. 267 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 13.1. (a) Rubbing an amber rod with silk produces an electric charge on the rod. (b) No charge is produced on the metal rod. (c) Touching a metal rod with a charged amber rod causes the metal to become charged. Electric current and batteries During the second half of the eighteenth century, a ¯ow of electric charge could be produced only by discharging a Leyden jar. In 1800, Alessandro Volta, a professor of physics at the University of Pavia, Italy, discovered that a stack of discs of silver and zinc, interspersed with wet pasteboard and held with an insulating handle, produced a separation of charge and a potential difference between the two metals. When the ®rst and last discs were connected by a conductor, Volta obtained a ¯ow of electric charge or current through the conductor with the same properties as the current obtained by discharging a Leyden jar, but with the important difference that the ¯ow was more or less continuous. Volta called his device a battery (®gure 13.2). 268 Applied Electricity Figure 13.2. Alessandro Volta reported his battery to the Royal Society as, ``an assemblage of a number of good conductors of different sorts . . . 30, 40, 60 pieces or more of copper, or better of silver, each in contact with a piece of tin, or what is much better, of zinc, and an equal number of layers of water . . . or pieces of cardboard or leather . . . well soaked.'' (# Bettman/CORBIS.) An electric current exists whenever there is a net ¯ow of charge. A potential difference is needed for a ¯ow of charge to exist, in much the same way that a stone would not fall to the ground unless it is at some height above the ground; that is, unless there is a gravitational potential difference with respect to the ground. In a television tube, for example, electrons are accelerated due to a potential difference. The electron beam that strikes the phosphor-coated screen and produces the image constitutes an electric current. An electric current can exist in a conductor provided a potential difference exists between two points in the conductor. When the ends of a metal wire, for example, are connected to a battery, an electric ®eld is created inside the wire which acts on the electrons that are free to move in the metal, moving them, thus producing an electric current. If during a time t an amount of charge q ¯ows past a particular 269 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 13.3. The conventional direction of the ¯ow of current in a conductor is opposite to the direction of motion of the electrons, the carriers of the current. point in a conductor, the electric current i is given as electric current ˆ charge that flows time or q iˆ : t Electric current is the rate at which charge ¯ows in a conductor. The unit of current is the ampere (A), named in honor of the French physicist Andre Marie AmpeÁre, and is equal to one coulomb per second. It is a fundamental SI unit. Maintaining an electric current requires the maintenance of a potential difference between two points. Volta's battery did just that; it provided electrical energy so that a potential difference could be maintained between the two metals (called electrodes). Before a good understanding of the atomic nature of matter was achieved, it was believed that the charge carriers that moved in a conductor were the positive charges and the direction of electric current was chosen to be that of the positive charges. Today, we know that it is electrons that move but the convention of the direction of current has not been changed (®gure 13.3). We can still apply this convention if we understand that the view of the negatively charged electrons moving in one direction with respect to the stationary positive ions is equivalent to the positive ions moving in the opposite direction with respect to the negative electrons. Ohm's Law In a metal, the atoms are arranged in a crystal lattice with a large number of electrons that are free to move around in the metal. 270 Applied Electricity Physics in our world: Electric cars The concept of automobiles powered by an electric motor that is run by batteries is not new; the essential battery technology was developed towards the end of the nineteenth century and by 1900 many electric cars were being manufactured. Due to the weight of the large batteries required and the need to recharge them at fairly short intervals, electric cars were heavy and slow to operate. The development of lighter materials and recent advances in battery technology have made possible feasible electric cars. General Motors' EV1, the ®rst commercial electric car, uses twenty-six 12-volt lead±acid batteries that take 3 hours to charge and give the car a range of 70 to 90 miles. Gasoline-powered automobiles use a lead±acid battery with cells which have lead peroxide and metallic lead as electrodes in a sulfuric acid solution. Since the total surface area of the plates is large, the battery can generate large currents for short periods of time, as required when starting the engine. In an electric car, however, the source of power comes not from the combustion of gasoline but directly from the battery. Standard lead-acid batteries are not suitable for the continued supply of energy needed to run the automobile. The gasrecombinant lead±acid batteries in the EV1 hold the liquid acid in special ®brous bags located between the lead plates, and have an all-up weight of 1175 pounds. 50 µm Teflon support with 2 mm carbon current collector 20 µm TFPT anode 1 mm gel electrolyte 20 µm polymer cathode 50 µm Teflon support with 2 mm carbon current collector 271 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Several kinds of advanced batteries are being developed. The most innovative ones involve the use of polymer electrodes and electrolytes (the conductive medium that electrically connects the electrodes). These all-plastic batteries can be rolled up and molded into small cavities in the car's body. Although very safe, researchers still need to increase the electrical conductivity of the polymer before these batteries can be made commercially viable. In addition to batteries, other technologies are being considered for electric vehicles. Among the replacements are devices to store large amounts of electric charge and which can discharge quickly; ¯ywheels, which store energy in a spinning rotor; and fuel cells, which convert chemical energy into electricity. These electrons, called conduction or valence electrons, are in continuous motion like gas molecules, bouncing off the lattice ions in such a way that, in the absence of an electric ®eld, their average velocity is zero. Bumper cars at an amusement park move fairly fast between collisions; they, however, do not go anywhere very much (®gure 13.4). Unlike the bumper cars, electrons do not collide with each other but with the atoms in the lattice. In metals, about one electron per atom is used in the conduction process and the atoms in the lattice are actually positive ions, since they have contributed one of their electrons to this process. When a potential difference is applied across the metal, an electric ®eld E appears in the metal and a force of magnitude eE acts on the electrons. A conduction electron is then accelerated to large speeds in the direction of this force. Before long, however, the electron collides with an ion in the lattice, bounces off, and is accelerated again in the same direction only to collide again with another ion. The net result is that conduction electrons move along the wire at very small drift velocities, of the order of 1 mm/s, in spite of the large velocities acquired in between collisions (®gure 13.5(a)). We could illustrate the effect of this applied potential with the bumper cars example if we imagine a surface where the cars move to become tilted (®gure 13.5(b)). 272 Applied Electricity Figure 13.4. Bumper cars at an amusement park collide continuously with each other and do not go anywhere. Although the cars still collide with each other and move in all directions, the sloped surface makes them move in that direction somewhat more often than in the others. There is a drift velocity towards the lower end of the surface. We should be careful with this analogy, however. A single electron does not necessarily move from one end of the conductor to the other. It is energy and momentum that is transmitted through the conductor. A metal, then, offers some resistance to the ¯ow of current through it. When we apply a potential difference V to the two ends of a metal wire, a current i appears in the wire. This current increases as the applied potential difference increases. In our analogy with the bumper cars, raising the slope increases the ¯ow of cars towards the lower part, thus increasing the ``current.'' The magnitude of the current in the wire depends on several factors. One is the type of metal used; different lattice con®gurations interact in different ways with the conduction electrons. The size of the wire also affects the amount of current. A thin wire presents a greater resistance to the ¯ow of current than a thicker wire, and a longer wire also presents a greater resistance. 273 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 13.5. (a) The drift velocity of the conduction electrons in a metal is very small compared with the velocities of the electrons between collisions with the lattice ions. (b) A gravitational potential provided by the inclined surface makes the cars drift towards the lower part. We can see that, although we speak of the conduction electrons as free to move, they do not really move freely inside the conductor. For this reason, the presence of the external force eE does not accelerate the electrons in a way that makes the current increase continuously. Rather, the electrons promptly reach a steady-state situation so that current and voltage are related by a very simple relationship, as the German physicist Georg Wilhelm Ohm (1787±1854) discovered. The current i ¯owing through a conductor is directly proportional to the voltage V that exists between the two ends of the conductor, that is i/V or i ˆ constant  V: 274 Applied Electricity The frontiers of physics: Electric dentists According to recent statistics, almost 85% of all 17-year-olds have already had several cavities. The reason for its prevalence is the dif®culty in detecting cavities early on. Tooth decay starts in the enamel coating of the tooth where foods are fermented by bacteria, producing acids that erode the mineral in the tooth enamel. By the time this demineralization becomes detectable, it may be too late for ¯uoride treatments to have any healing effect. A method recently discovered by researchers at the universities of Dundee and St Andrews in Scotland, and the University of Nijmegen in the Netherlands makes use of the change in electrical resistance of the eroded regions in the tooth enamel. These regions are ®lled with ¯uids that have smaller resistances than enamel. Measuring the resistance at different places in the tooth reveals the presence of cavities. The researchers used the technique on extracted teeth with perfect accuracy. The next step in the researchers' schedule is to obtain funds to make this promising method available clinically. This simple expression, known as Ohm's law, is usually written as V or V ˆ iR R where R is the resistance of the conductor and has the units of ohms ( ) (Greek capital omega). From this expression, we can see that 1 equals 1 V/1 A. Although it bears the name of a law, Ohm's law is not a fundamental law of nature like Newton's law of universal gravitation. Rather, it is a result of experimental observations and is valid only for certain materials within a limited temperature range. iˆ Simple electric circuits The electric circuit in a ¯ashlight is one of the simplest we can study. It consists of one or more batteries, a metal conductor, a 275 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 13.6. (a) A simple circuit in a ¯ashlight. (b) Representation of this circuit with a single battery, a conducting wire, a switch and a light bulb. (c) Hydraulic analogue with a pump, pipe, a valve, and a paddle wheel. Water is pumped to a high potential (tank) from where it falls, transforming potential energy into kinetic energy. Some of this energy is used to drive the paddle wheel. This low potential water is returned to the pump where the circuit is completed. switch, and a light bulb (®gure 13.6(a)). A diagram of this circuit is shown in ®gure 13.6(b). A hydraulic analog of this circuit appears in ®gure 13.6(c). Water ¯owing from the tank (high potential) falls through the pipe where it moves a paddle wheel, thus performing work. Low pressure water is then pumped up to the tank. Water ¯ows in this circuit only when the valve is open. Similarly, in our electric circuit, the battery ``pumps'' up the bulb terminals to a high potential. Work is performed as the current ¯ows through the narrow ®lament of the bulb, producing light and heat. Low potential current returns 276 Applied Electricity to the battery where it is ``pumped'' up again. Current ¯ows in the circuit only when the switch is closed. Again, we must be careful with our analogy. In the hydraulic case, the water molecules actually move around in the pipes. In the electric circuit, the electric ®eld that exists in the conductor acts on the conduction electrons which then move. The ions remain ®xed in the lattice. The light bulb in our simple circuit dissipates energy (as light and heat) by means of its resistance. Electric heaters, toasters, electric stoves and ovens are other examples of devices that dissipate energy by means of their resistance. As electrical energy dissipates, electric potential drops. There are situations where it is desirable to lower this electric potential or voltage in a circuit. For these cases, a resistor is used. A resistor is merely a device that dissipates electrical energy; it can be a strong narrow wire offering a greater resistance to the ¯ow of current than the wires used in the circuit. Usually, however, it is made of ceramic materials with a low conductance. To simplify the graphic representation of electric circuits, certain standard symbols are used. The internationally accepted symbols are: Table 13.1. Some standard electrical symbols. 277 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 13.7. A schematic diagram of an electric circuit. A schematic diagram of an electric circuit consisting of a 1.5 V battery, a 10 resistor and a switch is shown in ®gure 13.7. It is customary to include the values of the different components. Resistor combinations There are two ways of connecting items such as light bulbs into an electrical circuit: series and parallel. In a parallel connected circuit such as household lighting, every lamp is connected separately to the input line, and any one of them can be turned on or off without affecting the others. Series connection have the lamps ``strung out,'' so that if one of the lamps fails they all go out. Christmas tree lights are connected this way. We shall study these two types of circuits brie¯y. In a series circuit, like the Christmas tree light bulbs, current passes through each one of the light bulbs one after the other. In ®gure 13.8 we have a series combination of two light bulbs of resistances R1 and R2 . The total resistance in the circuit is the sum of the resistances of the two bulbs; that is, Rs ˆ R1 ‡ R2 . This last expression means that if we have two light bulbs with resistances of 5 and 8 connected to a 1.5-V battery, we could replace them with a single light bulb having a resistance of 13 , without changing the amount of current ¯owing through the circuit. From the law of conservation of energy, the potential or voltage delivered by the battery in ®gure 13.8 must equal the potential drop through the ®rst light bulb plus the potential drop through the second. This is analogous to the situation shown in ®gure 13.9. The potential energy gained by the girl as 278 Applied Electricity Figure 13.8. (a) Two light bulbs connected in series to a battery. (b) Schematic diagram of this circuit. The resistances of the two bulbs are shown as R1 and R2 , and the potential drops as V1 and V2 , respectively. The voltage supplied by the battery is shown as V. she climbed to the top of the double slide equals the sum of the potential energies lost in the ®rst and the second slopes. Similarly, the potential increase delivered by the battery should equal the sum of the potential drops through the two light bulbs. In a parallel connection, the current splits into one or more branches. In ®gure 13.10, two light bulbs of resistances R1 and Figure 13.9. The child sliding down the double slide loses potential energy in the two sections of the slide which is equal to the potential energy gained when she climbed to the top. This is analogous to the potential differences in the circuit of ®gure 13.8. 279 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 13.10. (a) Two light bulbs connected in parallel. (b) Schematic diagram of this circuit. R2 are connected in parallel, forming two branches. The current i coming from the battery splits into i1 , which ¯ows through R1 , and i2 , ¯owing through R2 . Since these are the only two possible paths for the current, the current from the battery must equal the sum of the individual currents ¯owing through each one of the branches. That is, i ˆ i1 ‡ i2 . We can see that both light bulbs are connected directly to the battery by means of conducting wires. This means that each light bulb draws current from the battery independently of the presence of the other light bulb. We could, in principle, connect as many light bulbs as we wanted without affecting the ®rst light bulb. The only limitation is the ability of the battery to provide electrical energy to many light bulbs. In a parallel connection, the total resistance of the circuit decreases as more branches are added, since there are more paths for the current to ¯ow. Electrical energy and power An electric current can exist in a region of space that has been evacuated, for example the electron beam in a television tube. In particle accelerators, like SLAC, the two mile electron accelerator at Stanford University, electrons are accelerated along the two mile tube and emerge at one end traveling at speeds close to the speed of light to strike various targets. Scientists study these collisions to gain a better understanding of the sub-microscopic world. When current exists in a conductor, however, the collisions of the electrons with the ions in the crystal lattice transfer energy to 280 Applied Electricity these ions and this results in an increase in the internal energy of the material. As we know, an increase in internal energy means an increase in thermal energy and, therefore, an increase in temperature. The ¯ow of current in a conductor produces heat. The amount of heat produced by an electric current ¯owing in a conductor depends on the magnitude of the current and on the resistance of the conductor. The ®lament of a light bulb, for example, is made of tungsten, a metal that melts at 33878C. When enough current ¯ows through it, the metal heats up to around 26008C, radiating energy as heat and visible light. Current ¯owing through the heating element of a toaster, a metal coil, produces heat at a lower temperature, which is used to toast the slices of bread. When this same amount of current ¯ows through the toaster cord, a copper wire of much greater cross sectional area and therefore much lower resistance, no appreciable heat is produced. When an electric current i ¯ows through a light bulb, an amount of charge q ¯ows through it in a certain time interval. The rate at which the battery performs work in moving this charge is called electric power. Electric power is equal to voltage times current, or P ˆ Vi: By Ohm's law, V ˆ iR; therefore, electric power can be expressed in terms of current and resistance as P ˆ Vi ˆ i2 R: The SI unit of power, remember, is the watt, W, which is joules per second. Since P ˆ Vi, then 1 W ˆ 1 V  1 A: James Joule, who developed an experiment to measure the mechanical equivalent of heat, also developed a way of measuring the heat dissipated by an electric current and determined that it was proportional to the square of the current in the conductor. For this reason, the expression P ˆ i2 R is known as Joule's law. Semiconductors Electric current can ¯ow in a vacuum, through a conductor such as a metal wire, and through semiconductors. As we said early in 281 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 13.11. Energy band structure of a solid. In insulators, the energy gap is large. In semiconductors, it is small. the chapter, semiconductors are materials with electrical conductivities that are intermediate between those of conductors and insulators. The properties of a solid depend not only on its constituent atoms but also on the way these atoms are stacked together. When two identical atoms are brought together, for example, each one of their energy levels split in two, with the separation between the pairs of levels depending on the distance between the atoms. If four atoms are brought closer together, their energy levels split into four. In a solid, there are billions of atoms very close together, and each one of their energy levels splits into billions of very closely packed levels. In one gram of sodium there are about 1022 atoms of sodium and each one of the energy levels in sodium splits into 1022 levels so close together that they can be considered to be a single energy band. The bands from all the different energy levels are separated by a forbidden energy gap, in which no electron can exist (®gure 13.11). In good conductors, the outermost occupied energy band, called the valence band, is not completely ®lled. In sodium, a good conductor, this valence band is only half-®lled so that an electron in one gram of sodium has about 5  1021 different possible, allowed energy states. In nonconductors, on the other hand, the valence band is completely ®lled and there are no available levels for an electron to move into. The energy gap between the valence band and the next band, called conduction band, is large. When the energy gap is small, the solid is a semiconductor. The conduction band is where the electrons that conduct electricity reside. 282 Applied Electricity Silicon and germanium are the most common semiconductor materials used in electronics. Pure semiconductors, however, are of no great practical importance. In contrast to a metal, where almost every atom contributes one or two electrons that conduct electricity, in a pure semiconductor, only one atom in a billion contributes an electron. When small amounts of impurities, at the level of one in a million, are added to a semiconductor in a process called doping, the conduction properties of semiconductors can be enhanced. Silicon and germanium have four valence electrons which almost ®ll the valence band. An ``impurity'' atom with ®ve valence electrons (such as arsenic or phosphorus) contributes an extra electron which does not bond with the surrounding silicon atoms (®gure 13.12(a)). This additional electron, being loosely bound, can easily jump up to the conduction band Figure 13.12. (a) In an n-type semiconductor, the loosely bound extra electron from the impurity atom contributes to the conductivity. (b) In a p-type semiconductor, the missing electron leaves a hole in the electron structure. When a nearby electron moves in to ®ll the hole, it leaves a hole where it was, in essence moving the hole in the opposite direction. 283 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS when it gains a small amount of energy, thus contributing to the conductivity. Semiconductors doped with these donor atoms are called n-type semiconductors because the charge carriers are the negatively charged electrons. When a piece of silicon is doped with impurity atoms with only three valence electrons, like boron or aluminum, there is an electron de®ciency which leaves the lattice lacking one bond (®gure 13.12(b)). This electron de®ciency constitutes what has been called a hole. In this case, there is a tendency to capture electrons from the valence band, in effect moving a nearby electron to that site and transferring the hole to the location previously occupied by the electron. Since the hole represents an absence of a negative electron and moves in the opposite direction to the electrons, these holes can be considered positively charged. Semiconductors doped in this way are called p-type semiconductors because the charge carriers are the positively charged holes. Transistors, diodes, and other solid state electronic devices can be manufactured by joining different types of semiconductors. The simplest solid state device is a p±n junction diode, which allows current to pass in only one direction. When an ntype semiconductor and a p-type semiconductor are brought together, some electrons from the n region drift into the p region and some holes from the p region drift into the n region. This migration of electrons and holes is due to the unequal concentration of charges in the two regions. The electrons that drift into the p region move into the holes near the boundary, neutralizing the free charge carriers. However, because each region is electrically neutral (since the electrons and holes come from neutral impurity atoms), this diffusion of charges near the boundary creates a layer of positive charges in the n region and a layer of negative charges in the p region. A barrier region is then formed where an electric ®eld appears (®gure 13.13). This electric ®eld prevents any further diffusion of charges between the two regions since an electron from the n region that makes it into the barrier will be repelled by the layer of electrons in the p region; likewise, a hole that moves into the barrier region will be repelled by the layer of holes in the n region. Suppose we connect a battery to a p±n junction with the positive terminal connected to the p side and the negative to the n side as in ®gure 13.14(a). Electrons coming from the battery recombine 284 Applied Electricity Figure 13.13. The migration of electrons in the p±n junction creates a barrier region that prevents further diffusion. with the holes of the barrier layer in the n region, neutralizing them. This recombination has the effect of lowering the potential difference that was set up by the electric ®eld in the barrier region. Electrons can now move from the n side into the p side to complete the circuit thus allowing the ¯ow of current. The junction is said to be forward biased. When the polarity of the battery is reversed so that the positive terminal is connected to the n side and the negative to the p side, electrons are pulled from the n region and holes from the p region. When electrons or holes are drawn from near the barrier region, the charge of opposite sign is enhanced thus increasing the potential difference across the barrier. An increase in this potential further prevents the ¯ow of charge across the junction and no current ¯ows through it. The junction is now connected in reverse bias (®gure 13.14(b)). A p±n junction acts like a discriminating switch, preventing the ¯ow of current in one direction and allowing it in the other Figure 13.14. (a) Current ¯ows through the junction when it is forward biased. (b) When the junction is reverse biased, no current ¯ows through it. 285 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 13.15. A p±n±p transistor. A small change in the voltage to the base produces a large change in the collector. direction. Such a device, called a diode, is able to rectify an alternating current; that is, to change it into direct current since it allows current to pass in only one direction when the voltage is applied. In 1947 three American physicists working at the Bell Telephone Research Laboratories, John Bardeen, Walter Brattain and William Shockley, invented the transistor. Their ®rst transistor, a point-contact design, consisted of a wedge of semiconductor of about 3 cm on each side. This device was followed in 1951 by the more reliable p±n±p transistor with a thin layer of n-type semiconductor sandwiched between two thicker layers of p-type semiconductor. The three regions in a p±n±p transistor are called the emitter, base, and collector. Suppose that we connect a p±n±p transistor to two batteries, as shown in ®gure 13.15, so that the emitter±base p±n junction on the left is forward biased while the base±collector junction on the right is reverse biased. The positive terminal connected to the emitter side on the left pushes holes in the p region toward the emitter±base junction. Since this junction is forward biased, it acts as a diode, allowing the ¯ow of holes from emitter to base. Once in the n region, these holes would come under the in¯uence of the second battery, moving into the collector due to the attraction of the negative terminal of this battery. Not all the holes that enter the base region travel through to the collector. About 2% of them combine with the free electrons in this region, thus producing a small base current. Because the base is only about one micrometer in thickness, most of the holes (the remaining 98%) pass through, forming the collector current. The result of an increase in the base potential is a large increase in collector current and a small increase in base current. 286 Applied Electricity If we were to connect the voltage coming out of a compact disc player in series with the battery on the emitter side and a loudspeaker in series with the battery on the collector side, any small change in the input voltage of the CD player would produce a large change in the current ¯owing through the loudspeaker, thus amplifying the input voltage. A transistor is useful because it can amplify a small signal into a larger one. Superconductors As we have learned, the resistance to the ¯ow of current is caused by electrons being scattered by interactions with the vibrating atoms in the metal lattice. When the temperature decreases, the vibrations decrease and therefore the resistance decreases. However, we would not expect the resistance to drop to zero but rather to reach a minimum constant value at a certain low temperature. Below this temperature, an additional decrease in the vibrations of the atoms in the lattice would not be expected to appreciably affect the ¯ow of current. The presence of defects in the lattice and the fact that the vibrations never stop completely regardless of how close we get to the absolute zero would seem to indicate that the resistance should never reach zero. In 1911, the Dutch physicist Kamerlingh Onnes discovered that, below a certain critical temperature, the electrical resistance of certain metals vanished completely, the metals becoming superconductors. He had recently accomplished the liquefaction of helium and was measuring the electrical resistance of metals at the newly achieved low temperatures (helium boils at 4.2 K at a pressure of one atmosphere) when he discovered that below 4 K the resistance of mercury dropped to zero. Soon he found that other metals showed the same property at these very low temperatures. Superconductivity seems to contradict what we have learned of the behavior of matter. How can superconductivity be understood? In 1935, the brothers Heinz and Fritz London were carrying out experiments in superconductivity in Oxford when they realized that the observed effects could be explained, at least partially, if the conduction electrons moved as a unit, as if they were linked together like the cars of a train. Although this idea 287 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 13.16. When the ions of the lattice are drawn towards the path of the electrons, a positive region is created that attracts other electrons. explained why the electrons could move throughout the crystal lattice without being stopped, it also presented problems; electrons are negatively charged and repel each other. It was dif®cult to understand how they could remain together. During the early 1950s, the English physicists David Bohm and Herbert FroÈhlich advanced a theory that could explain the problem of the electron repulsion. The key is in the ions of the lattice. A metal contributes an average of one electron per atom to the conduction process. These conduction electrons move about freely, leaving behind the positive ions that form the lattice. According to Bohm and FroÈhlich, when the electrons in a superconductor pass through the lattice ions, the negative charge of the electron attracts the positive ions, drawing them closer together. Since the ions are much more massive than the electrons, they take a little longer to separate back to their original positions, thus creating a slightly greater concentration of positive charge that attracts other electrons which might be following a similar path (®gure 13.16). Eventually, the ions push away from each other, due to their mutual electrical repulsion, moving past the initial position. This gives rise to a vibration, called a phonon, in the crystal lattice. In 1956, Leon N Cooper, at the University of Illinois, proposed that the interaction between the vibrating lattice and the electrons does not just unify the electric charge but creates pairs of electrons that behave as a single particle. In the physics department at the University of Illinois there was at the time a shortage of space and Cooper had to share an of®ce with John Bardeen. John R Schrieffer was Bardeen's graduate student and the three decided to extend Cooper's work on Cooper pairs, as the electron pairs came to be known, to the entire lattice. After spending a great deal of time on the problem, Schrieffer felt he was getting 288 Applied Electricity nowhere with it and was thinking of changing his thesis research. At about this time, Bardeen had to travel to Stockholm to receive the Nobel prize for his work on the invention of the transistor and asked Schrieffer to work on the problem for one more month. In this month Schrieffer realized that the two electrons in a Cooper pair had opposite velocities that added up to a net momentum of zero. This allowed him to express the problem in a more manageable form. His result became the basis for a more complete theory of superconductivity, later known as BCS theory. The three received the Nobel prize in physics in 1972 for this theory, making Bardeen the only person ever to win two Nobel prizes in the same subject. According to BCS theory, when the temperature falls below the critical temperature, the electrons act collectively as they interact with the lattice ions, forming Cooper pairs. The energy of these superconducting electrons is lower than when they act individually, at higher temperatures. There is an energy gap between the superconducting state and the normal, nonsuperconducting state. At very low temperatures, below the critical temperature, there is not enough energy available to excite the electrons from the lower superconducting state to the higher nonsuperconducting state. The conduction electrons therefore remain in this superconducting state. Scientists have been able to maintain steady currents in superconducting rings for several years with no measurable reduction. Until early 1986, superconductivity required extremely low temperatures obtainable only by cooling the materials with expensive liquid helium. By 1973, however, scientists discovered by accident that certain oxides of some rare earth elements, which are normally insulators, could become superconductors. In January 1986, J Georg Bednorz and K Alex MuÈller, of the IBM Zurich Research Laboratory in Switzerland, found that a compound of barium, lanthanum (a rare earth), copper and oxygen became superconductor at 35 K. Shortly after the results were published, the American physicist Paul C W Chu, of the University of Houston and his collaborator, professor Mau-Kuen Wu of the University of Alabama, began a series of experiments with similar compounds using different rare earth elements, achieving superconductivity at the incredible temperature of 98 K. This means that the new superconductors can be cooled to these 289 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 13.17. Superconducting wire developed at Argonne's National Laboratory. (Courtesy Argonne National Laboratory.) levels with liquid nitrogen, which lique®es at 77 K and is inexpensive. MuÈller and Bednorz won the 1987 Nobel Prize in physics for their discovery. Currently, researchers have achieved superconductivity at temperatures as high as 135 K and are developing new materials, such as superconducting wires and ®lms (®gure 13.17). These new materials would eventually lead to extremely ef®cient electric motors, generators, and transmission lines, which could lead to new ways of storing energy. The original BCS theory not only did not predict superconductivity at these higher temperatures but it actually fails to explain it at temperatures above 40 K. Theoreticians are hard at work trying to modify the theory, or to come up with a new one, so that high temperature superconductivity can be understood. 290 14 ELECTROMAGNETISM The discovery of magnets ''At this point, I will set out to explain what law of nature causes iron to be attracted by that stone which the Greeks call from its place of origin magnet, because it occurs in the territory of the Magnesians.'' Thus wrote the Roman poet Lucretius in his book De Natura Rerum (''On the Nature of the Universe'') published in 55 BC. Written in the form of a long poem, his book barely survived, having been lost throughout the Middle Ages. In 1497, a surviving manuscript was discovered and a treasure of world literature was saved for posterity. His poem continues: Men look upon this stone as miraculous. They are amazed to see it form a chain of little rings hanging from it. Sometimes you may see as many as ®ve or more in pendent succession swaying in the light puffs of air; one hangs from another, clinging to it underneath, and one derives from another the cohesive force of the stone. Such is the permeative power of this force. In matters of this sort it is necessary to establish a number of facts before you can offer an explanation of them. This may mean approaching the problem by a very roundabout route. For this reason I beg you to lend me your ears and your mind with particular attentiveness. Lucretius then proceeds to explain that magnets attract iron because they emanate a stream of atoms that pushes away the air between the magnet and the iron, producing a vacuum that the atoms of iron promptly move to ®ll. This process is aided by the air behind the iron which pushes it from behind towards the void. In the thirteenth century the French scholar Petrus de Maricourt, known as Peregrinus (''the Pilgrim''), made what 291 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS were probably the ®rst experiments that have any bearing on modern ideas of magnetism. Peregrinus, an engineer in the army of Louis IX, started trying to design a motor that would keep a planetarium rotating for some time and thought of using magnets to accomplish the task. In 1269, while in Italy during the siege of Lucera, Peregrinus described in a letter, Epistola de Magnete, the results of his investigations with magnets. He explained how he was able to determine the north and south poles of a magnet and his discovery that like poles repel each other while unlike poles attract. In an ingenious experiment, Peregrinus took a natural magnet which he shaped like a sphere and marked the directions taken up by a magnetic needle placed near the surface. All these directions ``will run together in two points just as the meridian circles of the world run together in two opposite poles of the world.'' He interpreted the behavior of the magnetic needle as pointing to the pole of the celestial sphere, Peregrinus further wrote that magnetic poles could not be isolated, because every time a magnet was split in half, two complete magnets, with north and south poles, were formed. In a second part of this work, Peregrinus presented a detailed work on the magnetic compass and described an improved ¯oating compass encircled by a graduated scale. The modern treatment of magnetism started in 1600 when William Gilbert published his monumental treatise De Magnete. Gilbert explained why the compass needle lines up in a north± south direction: the earth itself is a magnet. He demonstrated his theory with a globular lodestone similar to the one that Peregrinus had used and which he called terrela. He laid a magnetic needle at different places on the surface of his spherical magnet and found that the needle acted just like a compass needle, pointing toward the north±south direction of the spherical lodestone. The magnetic ®eld We learned in chapter 12 that the electric ®eld describes the property of the space around an electrically charged object. Similarly, we can say that the magnetic ®eld describes the property of the 292 Electromagnetism Figure 14.1. The magnetic ®eld around a magnet, shown here with iron ®lings spread on a ¯at surface around a magnet. (From PSSC Physics Seventh Edition, by Haber-Schaim, Dodge, Gardner, and Shore. Published by Kendall/Hunt Publishing Company, 1991.) space around a magnet. In ®gure 14.1, we can see the magnetic ®eld lines around a permanent magnet, which resemble the electric ®eld lines around two unlike charges, as seen in ®gure 12.10. Since magnetic poles may exist only in pairs, we do not see straight magnetic ®eld lines as was the case with the electric ®eld lines around a single charge shown in ®gure 12.7. In 1931, the English physicist P A M Dirac postulated the existence of magnetic monopoles to round off the symmetry between electricity and magnetism. A magnetic monopole, if it exists, would be a single north or south pole ¯ying free. Recent theories of particle physics and cosmology suggest that magnetic monopoles existed during the early universe. On February 14, 1982 Blas Cabrera of Stanford University recorded the passage of what appeared to be a magnetic monopole. Although the searches continue in many laboratories, due to the failure to detect a second monopole 293 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 14.2. Forces between two magnets. (a) If the magnets are brought together with like poles facing each other, they repel. (b) If they are brought closer with unlike poles facing, the magnets attract each other. in the years since, Cabrera later said that the event he reported might not have been a real one. The presence of a magnet in a particular place distorts the space around it in such a way that any other magnetized body in this region feels a magnetic force. As Peregrinus discovered, when two magnets with their north poles facing each other are brought close together, they repel each other. If they are brought closer with their south poles facing, the magnets also repel each other. However, when the north pole of one magnet faces the south pole of the other magnet, the two magnets attract each other (®gure 14.2). The magnetic poles of magnets exert forces on each other. About two hundred years ago, the English scientist John Michell found that the force between magnetic poles obeys the inverse-square law. The magnetic force F between them is inversely proportional to the square of the distance r between the two poles: F/ 1 : r2 In 1785, Charles Coulomb experimentally measured the magnetic force between two poles using a torsion balance similar to the one he used to determine the nature of the electrical force between two charges, and con®rmed Michell's inverse-square law for magnetic poles. In addition to being proportional to the square of their distances, the magnetic force between two poles is directly proportional to their product, or F/ qm q0m r2 where qm and q0m are the strengths of the two interacting magnetic poles. 294 Electromagnetism Physics in our world: Magneto-optical drives A fairly common computer storage device, the magnetooptical drive uses light from a laser to heat a tiny spot on a magnetic disk to change its magnetic polarity. These disks, encased in small portable cartridges, come in two sizes, 13 cm and 9 cm in diameter, and are inserted into the drive mechanism through a slot. The process of writing information to the magneto-optical disk is similar to that of writing to any digital magnetic storage device, such as hard disks, ¯oppy disks, or digital audio cassettes. This process requires setting the polarity of different spots on the disk. A negative polarity is interpreted by the computer as a 0 and a positive polarity as a 1. Before the polarity is set, a laser beam ®rst heats a small spot on the rapidly spinning disk to a temperature of about 1508C. At this temperature, called the Curie temperature, the atoms in the material of the disk have magnetic dipoles which are oriented at random. When an external magnetic ®eld is present, such as that supplied by a small electromagnet located under the disk, the magnetic dipoles align along the direction of the external ®eld. The total magnetic ®eld of all the atomic dipoles in the spot produces its magnetization. The electromagnet switches polarity to write 0s or 1s (negative and positive polarity). Electric currents and magnetism If, as Peregrinus said, magnetic poles cannot be isolated, what is then the meaning of the magnetic pole strength qm ? Although, as we said above, magnetic monopoles could exist, they cannot be obtained by splitting a magnet as splitting a magnet in two produces two complete magnets (®gure 14.3). Therefore, if a magnet cannot be considered to be made up of two separate magnetic monopoles, what is then the source of magnetism? The answer has to do with an accidental discovery that the Danish physicist Hans Christian Oersted (1771±1851) made in 1819. Because many properties of magnetic behavior resemble electrical behavior, scientists had long suspected that there might be a 295 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 14.3. Cutting a magnet in two produces two smaller but complete magnets. This process can continue down to atomic dimensions without ever isolating a single magnetic pole. connection between electricity and magnetism and had attempted to measure the effects of electric currents on magnetic compasses. During a physics lecture, Oersted was trying to show that an electric current ¯owing through a wire lying on a table did not de¯ect a compass needle. After he placed the compass on the table at various locations near the wire with the needle always pointing north, Oersted picked up the compass and held it above the wire. The compass needle twitched and pointed in a direction perpendicular to the wire, and when he reversed the current, the needle swung and pointed in the opposite direction, always perpendicular to the wire. Clearly, a force was acting on the compass needle. Oersted's results were the ®rst ever found in which the force was not in the same direction as the line connecting the sources of the force. It had apparently not occurred to anybody to look for a force that was not parallel to the direction of the ¯ow of current. However, a similar discovery had been reported in the August 3, 1802 issue of the Gazetta di Trentino by the Italian jurist Gian Domenico Romagnosi, but had been ignored. Oersted wrote a pamphlet in Latin, as was customary in those days for scienti®c papers, where he described his discovery, and sent the paper off to many scienti®c societies. A translation of his paper appeared in 1820 in the Annals of Philosophy and before the end of the year, the French scientist Andre Marie AmpeÁre had 296 Electromagnetism Figure 14.4. A wire carrying a current surrounded by small magnets. The magnets form a circle around the wire. extended Oersted's work and had concluded that all magnetism was due to small electric currents. AmpeÁre gave mathematical form to Oersted's discovery. His formulation is known as AmpeÁre's law. These discoveries were the ®rst steps towards a complete understanding of the close relationship between electricity and magnetism. To examine Oersted's discovery more closely, consider a straight segment of wire carrying a current i where several small magnets or compasses allow us to observe the direction of the magnetic ®eld in the vicinity of the wire. If we place the magnets around the wire and turn off the current, all the compasses point north; as soon as the current ¯ows through the wire, the magnetic needles of the compasses point in such a way as to form a circle whose center is at the wire and whose plane is perpendicular to the wire (®gure 14.4). When the compasses surrounding the wire are placed farther away from the wire, the magnetic needles again form a circle centered at the wire. According to AmpeÁre's law, the electric current ¯owing in the wire produces a circular magnetic ®eld around the wire. The magnetic ®eld lines due to a current follow concentric circles that surround the wire. The direction of the ®eld can be found with the right-hand rule: if we grasp the wire with the right hand so that the thumb points in the direction of the current, the curled ®ngers indicate the direction of the magnetic ®eld (®gure 14.5). We can see that the direction of the magnetic ®eld is perpendicular to that of the current. The simplest application of AmpeÁre's law involves the calculation of the magnetic ®eld due to a current i ¯owing through a long straight wire. The magnetic ®eld B at a distance r from the 297 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 14.5. The right-hand rule to determine the direction of the magnetic ®eld around a current-carrying wire. If the right thumb points in the direction of the current, the curled ®ngers indicate the direction of the magnetic ®eld. wire is given by Bˆk i r where k is a constant. The SI unit of magnetic ®eld is the tesla (T) which is a relatively large unit. For this reason, the gauss, equal to one ten thousandth of a tesla, is also de®ned. 1 gauss ˆ 10ÿ4 T. In the expression for the magnetic ®eld B, the constant k is equal to 2  10ÿ7 T m=A. A moving charge in a magnetic ®eld An electric current, as we know, is the rate at which charge ¯ows. A moving electric charge creates a magnetic ®eld, even if it is a single charge instead of a current. This magnetic ®eld exerts a force on a magnet. Therefore, a magnetic ®eld must in turn exert a force on a moving charge. Two electrically charged objects at rest with respect to each other exert a force on each other that is given by Coulomb's law. However, if the charges are moving in relation to each other, the situation gets more complicated, since a moving charge creates a magnetic ®eld which in turn exerts a force on the other charge. What is the nature of the force exerted by a magnetic ®eld on a moving charge? The answer to this question can be found through experiment. If we place an electric charge at rest in a region near a large magnet, where the magnetic ®eld is fairly uniform, we ®nd that if this region is free of electric ®elds the charge experiences no net force. If, however, the charge is moving with respect to the magnetic ®eld, a net force acts on the charge. This 298 Electromagnetism Figure 14.6. A charge q moving with a velocity v in a magnetic ®eld of strength B is subject to a force F. This force varies from zero, when the velocity is parallel to the ®eld, to a maximum value, when the velocity is perpendicular to the direction of the magnetic ®eld. depends on the magnitude of the charge, its velocity, and the strength of the magnetic ®eld. If we call the strength of the magnetic ®eld B, the force experienced by the charge q moving with a velocity v is proportional to the product qvB; that is, F / qvB: However, when the particle is moving in a direction parallel to the magnetic ®eld, this force is zero. If the particle moves in a direction that is perpendicular to the ®eld, the force is maximum. Motion along a direction other than parallel or perpendicular produces a force that falls in between this maximum value and zero (®gure 14.6). The force, then, is proportional to the component of the velocity along a direction perpendicular to the magnetic ®eld, or F / qvperp B: As shown in ®gure 14.6, the force is always at right angles to both the velocity and the direction of the magnetic ®eld. If the strength of the magnetic ®eld is given in teslas, the expression for the magnetic force on the moving charge can be written as F ˆ qvperp B: For our discussions, we will consider only the simpler case where the velocity is at right angles to the direction of the magnetic ®eld. 299 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 14.7. A proton moving with a velocity v perpendicular to the magnetic ®eld experiences a force F which makes it move in a circle with a constant speed. In this case, the force can be written as F ˆ qvB: If a charged particle, such as a proton, enters a region where there is a uniform magnetic ®eld, and the particle moves with a velocity v perpendicular to the direction of the magnetic ®eld, a magnetic force F, perpendicular to both the velocity and the direction of the magnetic ®eld, acts on the particle (®gure 14.7). Since the force is perpendicular to the velocity, it does no work on the particle and its kinetic energy remains constant. Therefore, the particle's speed remains constant. This magnetic force, however, accelerates the particle in a direction that is perpendicular to the velocity, producing a centripetal acceleration that makes the particle move in a circle with a constant speed. In ®gure 14.8 an electron leaves a curved track in a liquid hydrogen bubble chamber as it moves through a uniform magnetic 300 Electromagnetism Figure 14.8. An electron track in a bubble chamber. The track is curved as the electron moves through a uniform magnetic ®eld pointing into the page. The electron is slowed down by the liquid hydrogen, making the path a spiral rather that a circle. (Courtesy Brookhaven National Laboratory.) ®eld pointing into the page. Although electrons cannot be seen, their tracks are made visible brie¯y in a bubble chamber as thin lines of boiling liquid. In a hydrogen bubble chamber, liquid hydrogen is heated under pressure to a temperature slightly below its boiling point. When a charged particle moves through the liquid, it ionizes some of the hydrogen molecules. If the pressure is suddenly decreased, the liquid starts boiling preferentially around the ion paths. In ®gure 14.8 the radius of curvature decreases because the electron is slowed down by the liquid hydrogen. Particle accelerators The circular motion of a charged particle moving in a direction that is perpendicular to a magnetic ®eld was used in the early 301 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS 1930s by physicist Ernest Orlando Lawrence of the University of California at Berkeley to accelerate protons to very high energies. The desire to accelerate particles originated with Rutherford, who had shown in 1919 that the nitrogen nucleus could be disintegrated by alpha particles emitted during the radioactive decays of radium and thorium. In this nuclear process the nitrogen nucleus is transformed into oxygen by the collision with the alpha particle. This was the ®rst arti®cially produced nuclear reaction; for the ®rst time humans had modi®ed the structure of an atomic nucleus. However, the particles obtained as products of radioactive decays had energies of only a few MeV. The need for higher energies led scientists to invent machines that could accelerate these particles. These machines, known as particle accelerators, started in 1932 with J D Cockcroft and E T S Walton at the Cavendish Laboratory of Cambridge University and their voltage multiplier, which was developed after a suggestion by Rutherford. Accelerating protons to energies of about 400 keV, they were able to split lithium atoms into two alpha particles. In 1928, Rolf WinderoÈe in Germany had used an alternating high voltage to accelerate ions of sodium and potassium to twice the applied voltage. Ernest Lawrence was a twenty-seven-year old professor of physics at Berkeley when WinderoÈe published his results. The son of an educator, Lawrence had wanted to be a physician. A physics professor at the University of Minnesota sparked his interest in physics and Lawrence decided instead to attend Yale University, obtaining his PhD in physics in 1925. He joined the physics faculty at Yale and in 1928 moved to Berkeley where he founded the world-famous Radiation Laboratory. He remained in charge of the laboratory until his death in 1958 at the age of ®fty-seven. Shortly after moving to Berkeley, while browsing through several journals in the physics library, Lawrence found WinderoÈe's paper in the Archiv fuÈr Elektrotechnik. It occurred to Lawrence that a magnetic ®eld could steer the electrons into a circular path so that the acceleration stage could be repeated. In the summer of 1930 his graduate student M Stanley Livingston started the design and construction of the ®rst magnetic resonance accelerator or cyclotron, as part of his experimental research for a doctorate in physics. On January 2, 302 Electromagnetism Figure 14.9. In a cyclotron, two metal dees lie in between the poles of a big magnet. A source of ions in the middle of the assembly injects charged particles into the dees, which are connected to an electrical oscillator. As the particles are accelerated in the space between the dees, they spiral outward and gain energy. 1931, their ®rst cyclotron produced ions of 80 keV energy using a borrowed magnet with a ®eld of 13 000 gauss. The operation of the cyclotron is based on the fact that the number of revolutions per second made by the particle (which gives us the angular velocity) does not depend on the particle's speed nor on its radius of rotation. In a cyclotron, this angular velocity depends only on the charge and mass of the particle being accelerated, and on the magnetic ®eld of the cyclotron. Figure 14.9 shows a schematic drawing of a cyclotron. A source of particles lies in between two hollow metal dees which are connected to an electrical oscillator producing an alternating potential. If a proton, for example, is injected into the cyclotron, it will be accelerated towards the dee that happens to be negative at that time. Inside the dee, the proton is shielded from the electric ®eld but not from the magnetic ®eld of the external magnet which forces the proton to move in a semicircle. As the proton completes a semicircle, it returns to the other dee, which turns negative as soon as the particle enters. The potential difference between the two dees causes the proton to increase its speed each time it crosses the space between the dees. Since the number of revolutions that the proton makes per second is independent of the velocity or the radius of curvature, the proton will change dees at equal intervals of time and the polarity of the dees is set to change accordingly. In a modern cyclotron, the particle may 303 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS make 100 revolutions before leaving the dees with an energy of several MeVs. Owing to engineering limitations in the construction of very large magnets, cyclotrons have reached their limit, although they remain extremely useful for the range of energies under 40 MeV for protons. An accelerator that does not require a single large magnet to bend the path of the charged particles is the synchrotron. This type of machine uses a magnet in the form of a ring and the particles follow a single circular path instead of a spiral, as in the cyclotron. The Fermi National Accelerator Laboratory or Fermilab, in Batavia, Illinois, houses the largest synchrotron in the world. Recently, the laboratory has produced energies of the order of the TeV, or one trillion electron-volts, and for this reason, the accelerator is called the Tevatron. Magnetism of the earth As Gilbert wrote in De Magnete, the earth is a magnet. The earth has a large, dense core about 2400 kilometers in diameter, composed of heavy atoms believed to be mostly iron. Study of the seismic waves generated by earthquakes has revealed that the inner part of the earth's core is probably solid while the outer core is liquid. Very slow motions of the core, of the order of 1 millimeter per year, are believed to generate the magnetic ®eld of the earth. At the earth's surface, the earth's magnetic ®eld strength is about 5  10ÿ5 T or about 0.5 gauss. Magnetism is due to the motion of electric charges. In the earth, the slow motions in the metallic core produce electric currents in the hot, electrically conductive material. These currents ¯ow upward and are in turn carried around by the earth's fast rotation, producing the magnetic ®eld. This process, however, is not totally understood, and scientists were surprised to ®nd a magnetic ®eld in Mercury, which rotates too slowly to produce even a weak magnetic ®eld. The source of Mercury's magnetic ®eld is still a problem to be resolved. The earth's magnetic ®eld extends out into the surrounding space where it interacts with the solar wind, the ¯ow of ionized atoms and electrons that constantly streams away from the atmosphere of the sun at speeds of several hundred kilometers 304 Electromagnetism Figure 14.10. The earth's magnetic ®eld acts as a shield against the supersonic particles that stream away from the sun. per second. The magnetic ®eld acts as a shield against the solar wind, slowing the supersonic particles to subsonic speeds, forming a shock wave similar to the bow wave formed by a ship moving through water (®gure 14.10). This magnetic ®eld also protects the earth from most of the highly energetic cosmic ray particles originating in the interstellar medium. The magnetic ®eld of the earth traps some matter from the solar wind, creating the earth's magnetosphere, which is the region around the earth where the magnetic ®eld plays a dominant part in controlling the physical processes taking place there. The magnetosphere was discovered in 1958 with the ®rst American arti®cial satellite, the Explorer 1 which carried instruments built by James van Allen, a professor of physics at the University of Iowa. Subsequently, other planets were found to possess magnetospheres. The strongest planetary magnetosphere is that of Jupiter, which completely envelops the innermost Jovian satellites. If a charged particle ± proton or electron ± from the solar wind enters the earth's magnetosphere with a velocity at right angles to the magnetic ®eld, the resulting motion of the particle will be a circle. If the particle enters the magnetosphere with a velocity component parallel to the magnetic ®eld, it will move along the ®eld (because of its parallel component) and also along a circle (due to its perpendicular component), so that the resulting motion is a spiral path (®gure 14.11). Because the magnetic ®eld of the earth is stronger near the poles and weaker at the 305 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 14.11. A charged particle entering earth's magnetosphere with a velocity component parallel to the magnetic ®eld lines moves in a spiral path. center, a particle trapped in this ®eld will spiral around the ®eld lines, oscillating back and forth, as in a magnetic bottle. The regions of space where electrons and protons from the solar wind become trapped, oscillating back and forth, are called Van Allen belts. The inner Van Allen belt, which extends between altitudes of 2000 and about 5000 km, contains mostly protons. The outer Van Allen belt, extending from about 13 000 to about 19 000 km, contains mostly electrons. Solar ¯ares are sudden gigantic explosions that take place in the atmosphere of the sun. In addition to emitting enormous amounts of energy at all wavelengths, ¯ares also eject highly ionized matter. When this ionized matter reaches the earth, it interacts with the magnetic ®eld producing magnetic storms and dumping into the atmosphere some of the particles that had been trapped in the Van Allen belts. When these high speed electrons and protons collide with gases in the upper atmosphere, atoms of nitrogen and oxygen absorb the ultraviolet radiation emitted. This results in the emission of visible light (a phenomenon called ¯uorescence), producing the beautiful Northern Lights, also known as the aurora borealis, or the Southern Lights (aurora australis). 306 Electromagnetism Physics in our world: Avian magnetic navigation Migratory birds have a built-in compass: they possess magnetite crystals near their nostrils, which allow them to detect the orientation of the magnetic ®eld of the earth and to use it to navigate. Scientists have discovered that these birds also navigate using the positions of the stars and that in some cases they must use the magnetic and the celestial cues together to orient themselves correctly. Peter Weindler and his research group at the J W Goethe University in Frankfurt studied garden warblers which breed in central Europe and migrate to Africa in the winter. In their ¯ight to Africa, the birds take a detour west to avoid climbing over the Alps, ¯ying instead southwest to the Iberian peninsula and then turning southeast to Africa. Weindler's team raised a group of warbler chicks in captivity. During the summer before their ®rst migration, they placed the birds inside cages with arti®cial light and a rotating dome with holes that simulated the night sky. They also isolated a group of these birds from the earth's magnetic ®eld. When the time came for the birds' normal migration, all the warblers were placed in large cages with only celestial cues. The birds that were raised isolated from the earth's magnetic ®eld headed south. The others oriented themselves correctly, in a southwest direction. Later in the season, when the birds should have turned southeast, both groups failed to do so. They had not been exposed to a simulation of the fall sky. The scientists concluded that migratory birds need both magnetic and celestial information to orient themselves. The night sky provides only the general direction; south in the fall and north in the spring. The birds use the direction of the earth's magnetic ®eld to deviate from this general orientation. The source of magnetism Oersted's discovery that an electric current produces a magnetic ®eld led AmpeÁre to conclude in 1820 that all magnetism is due to small electric currents. Just what kind of small electric current is the cause of magnetism in a permanent magnet, for example? 307 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 14.12. (a) A charged particle moving in circles produces an electric current. This loop of current generates a magnetic ®eld. (b) A spinning charged sphere also produces a magnetic ®eld. In the Bohr model of the atom, an electron moves around its nucleus following a circular orbit. This motion is equivalent to a very small loop of electric current which, as we know, generates a small magnetic ®eld (®gure 14.12(a)). In addition to this motion, each electron also rotates about its own axis and this rotation is again equivalent to a circular electric current that produces its own magnetic ®eld (®gure 14.12(b)). The magnetic ®eld of the electron is that of a dipole; that is, it looks like the magnetic ®eld of a magnet, with north and south poles, rather than the magnetic ®eld of a monopole. Although, the model of the atom with electrons as small spinning spheres that rotate around the nucleus is no longer considered adequate, the magnetic ®elds produced are what we would expect if the electron were spinning on its axis and revolving around the nucleus. Although everything contains electrons, not everything is magnetic because in most substances the magnetic ®elds of the electrons combine with each other and cancel out. In iron and a few other substances, these magnetic ®elds do not completely cancel out, and large collections of atoms align themselves, forming magnetic domains throughout the material. A piece of iron contains many of these magnetic domains, each formed by the alignment of perhaps millions of atoms. In a normal piece of 308 Electromagnetism iron, the domains are randomly oriented; unless many of these domains are aligned, the material will not be magnetic. However, the presence of a strong magnetic ®eld in the vicinity may be enough to align many domains in the direction of this external ®eld. You can magnetize the blade of your knife by rubbing it several times in the same direction with a large magnet. If the magnet is very strong, placing the knife on the magnet may be suf®cient to align enough of its domains for it to remain magnetized for a long time. Faraday's law of induction We have seen how an electric current generates a magnetic ®eld. This suggests that perhaps a magnetic ®eld could generate an electric current. Is this true? The ®rst person to answer this question was the English scientist Michael Faraday. One of ten sons of a blacksmith, Michael Faraday lacked a formal education. ``My education was of the most ordinary description,'' he wrote, ``consisting of little more than the rudiments of reading, writing and arithmetic at a common-day school.'' He was born in 1791 in Newington, England, and at the age of 14 became a bookbinder's apprentice in the shop of Mr G Riebau. This seems to have been a fortunate turn of events, because that job put him in contact with books, which the young boy decided to read. ``There was plenty of books there and I read them,'' he later said. His master not only allowed him to read the books that were commissioned for binding, but also encouraged him to read the books in his personal library and to attend cultural events and lectures. One day, while binding a volume of the Encyclopaedia Britannica, Faraday encountered a 127-page article on electricity and became fascinated by it. The reading of this article stimulated his interest for science and prompted him to save enough money to buy the necessary parts with which to construct his ®rst scienti®c apparatus. In 1810, Faraday was introduced to the City Philosophical Society which had been formed two years earlier and which met every Wednesday to discuss a paper on some topic of science presented by one of the members. At these lectures, Faraday 309 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS would usually get himself a front seat to take notes which he would later rewrite and expand at home. Later, when a series of four lectures was delivered by Sir Humphrey Davy, the English chemist and Superintendent of the Royal Institution, Faraday was given a ticket to attend them. He took copious notes which he bound and later sent to Davy along with a petition for a job at the Institution. Although Davy was ¯attered, he could not offer Faraday a position at that time, but later, when one of Davy's employees at the Institution was involved in a ®ght and was dismissed, Faraday was hired as an assistant in the laboratory. Faraday was now on the road to become one of the greatest experimental scientists who ever lived. In 1825, twelve years after his appointment as assistant, Faraday became director of the laboratory and in 1833, professor of chemistry at the Royal Institution. It was at the Royal Institution that Faraday became intrigued by Oersted's experiments showing that an electric current created a magnetic ®eld and wanted to see it if was possible for a magnetic ®eld to produce an electric current. With this in mind, he ``had an iron ring made . . . [w]ound many coils of copper wire round one half, the coils being separated by twine and calico. . . By trial with a trough each was insulated from the other. Will call this side of the ring [which was connected to a battery] A.'' On the other side, side B, a second copper wire was wound (®gure 14.13). Faraday expected Figure 14.13. (a) Faraday's induction experiment. At the instant the battery was connected or disconnected so that a current would ¯ow through coil A, a current was detected for a brief time in coil B. (b) Faraday's induction ring. 310 Electromagnetism that the magnetic ®eld produced by coil A, which would magnetize the iron ring, would in turn produce a current in the coil of copper wire wrapped around the other side of the ring, independent of the other coil. It did not happen that way. Instead, only at the instant the battery was either connected or disconnected, a current appeared in coil B. It was not the presence of the magnetic ®eld that produced a current in coil B, but the change in this magnetic ®eld that occurred at the moment the battery was connected or disconnected. As soon as the battery was connected, the current rapidly increased from zero to a steady value and while that increase in current took place, the magnetic ®eld produced by this current also increased. Similarly, when the battery was disconnected, the current immediately decreased to zero, producing a sudden decrease in the magnetic ®eld. It was this increase or decrease in the magnetic ®eld that induced a current in coil B. For this current to appear in the second coil, a voltage must exist there. Thus, we can say that a changing magnetic ®eld induces a voltage in the second coil which in turn produces a current. This phenomenon is called electromagnetic induction. Faraday performed further experiments and showed that the iron ring was not needed. Adding a switch to coil A, a current was induced in coil B whenever the switch was opened or closed. Since it was the change in the magnetic ®eld generated by the increase or decrease in the current that induced the current in the second coil, Faraday experimented with moving magnets and was able to induce electric currents in coils just by quickly moving a magnet into or out of the coil (®gure 14.14). A coil is not necessary for electromagnetic induction to take place. A single loop of a wire or an electric circuit would work. A voltage is induced in a single loop of wire by moving a magnet in the vicinity of the loop. The faster we move the magnet, that is, the faster the magnetic ®eld in the region of the loop changes, the greater the induced voltage. We can say that when the rate at which the magnetic ®eld changes through the circuit is large, the induced voltage is large. In more general terms, the induced voltage in the circuit is proportional to the rate of change of the magnetic ®eld. This statement is known as Faraday's law of induction. In 1822, Faraday wrote in his notebook: ``Convert magnetism into electricity.'' By 1831, he had accomplished his goal. 311 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 14.14. Moving a magnet into or out of a coil induces a current in the coil. Motors and generators Faraday showed that a change in a magnetic ®eld produces a current in a coil. The magnetic ®eld threading through a spinning coil is variable, even if the ®eld itself is constant (®gure 14.15). Therefore, a current would be induced in a coil rotating in a region where there is a magnetic ®eld. If you attach a handle to this coil and turn it, a current is generated in the coil for as long as you keep turning the coil. This current can be used to light a bulb, for example (®gure 14.16). This is a simple one-loop generator, a device to convert mechanical energy into electrical energy. A paddle wheel turned by a waterfall or by a river can provide Figure 14.15. The magnetic ®eld through a rotating coil changes from zero, when the plane of the coil lies parallel to the magnetic ®eld, to a maximum value, when the plane of the coil is perpendicular to the ®eld. 312 Electromagnetism Figure 14.16. A loop of conducting wire with a handle generates electricity when the loop is turned in a region where there is a magnetic ®eld. Metal brushes maintain contact with the circuit as the loop rotates. This is a simple electric generator which can provide the current for a light bulb. the mechanical energy for the generator. Steam moving through a turbine can also supply the mechanical energy to turn the generator and produce electrical energy. Suppose now that we remove the handle and place the coil inside a magnetic ®eld. If instead of a light bulb we connect a battery so that a current ¯ows in the coil, a torque is exerted on the loop. The reason for this is that since currents are charges in motion, and a charge in motion in a magnetic ®eld experiences a magnetic force, an electric current placed in a magnetic ®eld also experiences a magnetic force. This force is perpendicular to the direction of the magnetic ®eld and to the direction of the ¯ow of current through the conductor. Consider the conducting loop of ®gure 14.17, where the magnetic ®eld lines in the region between the two external magnets ¯ow from left to right. A battery is connected to the loop through a pair of metal brushes that allow two conductors in the arms of the loop to keep contact while they slide past each other. These conductors form what is called the commutator because, as we shall see, they change the ¯ow of current through the loop as the loop rotates. We can now see how the loop rotates. When the brushes are aligned with the commutator segments, current ¯ows into the left 313 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 14.17. A simple motor. (a) The wire loop in a magnetic ®eld is connected at one end to two semicircular conductors called the commutator. Current from the battery ¯ows into the left (gray) side of the loop through the metal brush and out the other (black) side. The torque produced spins the loop counterclockwise. (b) Each brush is in contact with both commutators. Current bypasses the loop. Inertia keeps the loop rotating. (c) The black side of the loop is now on the left. Current ¯ows into this side now and out of the gray side. The current through the loop changes direction but the loop keeps rotating clockwise. 314 Electromagnetism side of the loop (shown in gray in ®gure 14.17(a)) and out of the right side. The force acting on the left side is perpendicular to the direction of the magnetic ®eld, in this case to the right, and to the direction of the ¯ow of current. The force on the right side of the loop is in the opposite direction, because the direction of the magnetic ®eld is the same as before, that is, to the right, and the current is moving in the opposite direction through the loop. These two forces, which depend on the value of the current and the magnitude of the electric ®eld, have the same magnitude, since the current ¯owing though the loop has the same magnitude in either direction. The two equal and opposite forces, acting at the two opposite sides of the loop, exert a torque on it which results in rotation. As the loop rotates to a position where each brush is in contact with both brushes, the current bypasses the loop, which continues to rotate due to its inertia (®gure 14.17(b)). As the loop rotates beyond this middle position, current again ¯ows through the loop but in the opposite direction (it ¯ows into what was the right side, now located on the left, and out of the other) assuring that the force exerted on whichever side of the loop happens to be on the left does not change (®gure 14.17(c)). The loop keeps rotating in the same direction. If a shaft and gears are attached to the loop, its rotational motion can be transmitted to a wheel which could in turn be attached to a cart. This device is a simple electric motor, which transforms electrical energy into mechanical energy, the reverse of a generator. Instead of just one loop, an actual electric motor has many loops wrapped around an iron core or armature. In addition to increasing the torque, having many loops improves the operation, since the torque on a single loop changes continuously from zero to a maximum value, while in many consecutive loops it would stay about constant. Maxwell's equations James Clerk Maxwell was the nineteenth century scientist who probably made the greatest contribution to modern physics. Maxwell was born of a wealthy family in Edinburgh on June 13, 1831. Early on he showed great mathematical ability and at the age of fourteen wrote a paper on geometry, ``The Theory of 315 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Rolling Curves,'' which was accepted for reading before the Royal Society of Edinburgh. Not counting this and other short papers written while at school, Maxwell wrote over a hundred scienti®c papers in his 48 short years of life. Faraday had introduced the concept of lines of force as a pictorial representation of electrical and magnetic forces. While still an undergraduate at Cambridge, Maxwell tried to give mathematical form to the physical notions of Faraday. Shortly after graduating from Cambridge, he wrote a paper entitled ``On Faraday's Lines of Force,'' the ®rst in a series of papers on this subject, which was read before the Cambridge Philosophical Society. Seven years later, in a second paper entitled ``Physical Lines of Force,'' Maxwell devised a model that illustrated Faraday's law of induction. When Maxwell applied his model, he realized that, in addition to Faraday's discovery that a changing magnetic ®eld would produce an electric force, the model suggested that a changing electric ®eld would produce a magnetic force. To take this into account Maxwell decided to modify AmpeÁre's law. Maxwell eventually developed a theory of electromagnetism which embraced everything that was previously known about electricity and magnetism. His four equations, known today as Maxwell's Equations, not only summarize all the work of Coulomb, Oersted, AmpeÁre, Faraday and others but also extended the relationships and symmetries between electricity and magnetism. Whereas the ®rst three equations could be considered as restatements of previous work, his fourth equation, the extension of AmpeÁre's law, was the key to the puzzle, the stroke of genius which uni®ed electricity and magnetism into one single theory of electromagnetism. Maxwell's ®rst equation is a consequence of Coulomb's law and gives a relationship between an electric charge and the electric ®eld it produces. The second equation describes how magnetic ®eld lines always form closed loops; that is, they do not start or stop anywhere. In this respect, they are essentially different from electric ®eld lines which start on positive charges and end on negative charges. For this reason, we do not observe magnetic monopoles, the magnetic equivalent of electric charges. The third equation is Faraday's law which says that a changing magnetic ®eld creates an electric ®eld. Maxwell's fourth equation is, as we have said, an extension of AmpeÁre's law, and states that 316 Electromagnetism Physics in our world: Microwave ovens Microwave ovens are commonplace in our homes today. However, few of us know how they work. The physics we have learned so far should allow us to understand the basic principles of their operation. A microwave oven is actually a small broadcasting station. A magnetron tube emits high frequency electromagnetic waves (microwaves). These waves are ``piped'' along a waveguide in the oven. A metal stirrer then directs the waves throughout all areas of the oven. Microwave ovens designed for homes have a frequency of 2450 MHz, which corresponds to a wavelength of 122 mm. These electromagnetic waves are re¯ected by metals but transmitted by paper, glass, and some plastics. They are absorbed by water and sugar. As the microwaves penetrate the foods, they cause water molecules to vibrate at depths of about 5 cm, producing heat mainly as a result of the disruption of the intermolecular bonds of the water molecules. Water molecules consist of an atom of oxygen and two atoms of hydrogen arranged so that, although the entire molecule is electrically neutral, the oxygen side of the molecule is negative, while the side with the hydrogen atoms is positive. The electric ®eld transmitted by the microwave produces a torque on the water molecule. Since the ®eld is oscillating, the applied torque sets the molecule into vibration. Because a water molecule in a substance such as food is bound to other molecules, retarding ``frictional'' forces are produced, which appear as heat in the substance. Since the walls inside the oven are made of metal, microwaves are re¯ected by them. Standing waves (like the ones produced on a taut string) may be set up inside the oven. The places of maximum vibration correspond to hot spots, while the places where no vibrations of the electromagnetic ®eld take place correspond to cold spots. To avoid the uneven cooking that these hot and cold spots would produce, foods are placed on a turntable. 317 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 14.18. An electromagnetic wave consists of changing magnetic and electric ®elds at right angles. a changing electric ®eld creates a magnetic ®eld. A magnetic ®eld then can be created by an electric current or by a changing electric ®eld. According to Maxwell's third equation, a changing magnetic ®eld creates an electric ®eld which is also changing. The fourth equation tells us that this changing electric ®eld would in turn create a magnetic ®eld, which changes with time. This changing magnetic ®eld in turn creates a changing electric ®eld which creates a changing magnetic ®eld, and so on. By combining his four equations into a single expression, Maxwell was able to show that even in regions where there were no electric charges or magnets, once the process started, the changing magnetic and electric ®elds would continue to propagate. This propagation of electric and magnetic ®elds through space is what we call electromagnetic waves (Figure 14.18). From his equations, Maxwell was able to determine that the speed of propagation of the waves was 2:88  108 meters per second, almost exactly equal to the speed of light, which had been measured in his time to be 3:11  108 meters per second. He suggested that electromagnetic waves did exist and were observed as light. ``The agreement of the results seems to shew that light . . . is an electromagnetic disturbance,'' he wrote in a paper published in 1868. Nine years after Maxwell's death, Heinrich Hertz (1857±1894) generated electromagnetic waves in his laboratory. 318 15 WAVE MOTION The nature of waves Wave motion exists everywhere. When a bird sings in the forest, sound waves propagate away from the bird's throat in all directions, striking the ear membranes of the other animals nearby. A leaf falling from a tree on the surface of a pond produces ripples that spread outward through the surface of the serene water. Light reaching the surface of the earth from the sun propagates through empty space as an electromagnetic wave. And as we learned in chapter 7, even ordinary matter exhibits wave behavior. In the examples above, sound and water waves require a medium to propagate. The bird's song could not be heard without the air through which the sound waves could travel, and the ripples spreading on the still pond are certainly impossible if the pond does not exist. An astronaut on the moon cannot attract his companion's attention by clapping his gloved hands or banging on his metal backpack since there is no atmosphere that can serve as a medium. The astronaut, however, can speak into the microphone in his helmet and the astronauts around him, the astronauts in Moonbase, and Mission Control on earth can all hear him. The electromagnetic waves generated by his radio transmitter can propagate through the vacuum of space; they do not need a medium although they can travel through certain media. Waves that require a medium to propagate are called mechanical waves. In this chapter we will study mechanical waves only, as they can be visualized. What exactly is a mechanical wave? In chapter 7 we learned that the elasticity of a medium allows a disturbance created at some point in space to propagate through the medium without 321 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 15.1 (a) Transverse wave. A pulse traveling to the right displaces the string in a direction at right angles to the direction in which the pulse travels. (b) A longitudinal wave produced by pushing and pulling on one end of a Slinky. (c) A torsional wave produced by repeatedly twisting one end of a coil back and forth. transmitting matter. Thus, when a taut string is plucked, the hump or pulse produced travels down the string; but the material of the string does not travel along with the pulse, it only vibrates up and down (or sideways or at an angle, depending on the direction in which we pluck it). If matter does not travel, what is it that gets transmitted with the wave? It is energy and momentum. When the ripple produced by a pebble dropped in the water reaches a ¯oating leaf, it lifts it; the energy required to lift the leaf is transmitted by the wave and comes from the interaction between the falling pebble and the water. When a pulse travels along a taut string, the string vibrates in a direction that is perpendicular to the direction in which the pulse moves (®gure 15.1(a)). We call this wave a transverse wave. Pushing the end of a spring coil or ``Slinky'' back and forth produces a wave that travels through the coil. When the end is pushed, the ®rst turn of the coil gets closer to the second turn, deforming the 322 Wave Motion coil and forcing the second turn to move away from the approaching ®rst turn. This results in the second turn approaching the third and the third moving towards the fourth, and so on. If the end is pulled back after it is pushed, the second turn moves back towards the ®rst, the third towards the second, the fourth towards the third, and so on. If the end is pushed and pulled several times, the overall effect is seen as moving variations of the spacing between the turns; regions where the turns are closer together followed by regions where the turns are farther away from each other (®gure 15.1(b)). This wave is called a longitudinal wave, as the medium oscillates in the same direction as the wave. If we now hold the Slinky from one end so that it hangs loose in a vertical position and twist the end back and forth, a torsional wave will start to propagate down through the coil (®gure 15.1(c)). Properties of waves When the source of a particular wave motion acts continuously rather than momentarily, a train of waves is formed instead of a single pulse. If, in addition, the source of waves acts in a cyclic way, repeating the same stages over and over like a vibration, the wave so produced is called a periodic wave. If we were to take a snapshot of a periodic wave as it moved through a medium, it would look like ®gure 15.2. Although the plot looks like the snapshot of a transverse wave traveling along a string or cord, it can also represent a longitudinal wave. In the example with the Slinky, the regions where the turns are closer together would be represented by the crests and the places where the turns are separated, by the troughs. Figure 15.2. Graphical representation of a wave. 323 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS The distance between two adjacent peaks, between two adjacent troughs or between any two identical points of a periodic wave is called the wavelength,  (the Greek letter lambda), of the wave. If we observe one particular point in space and count the number of wavelengths that pass that point during some time interval, say one second, we would know how frequently the wave moves through that point. The number so obtained is called the frequency f † of the wave motion. Frequency, then, is the number of wavelengths that pass a particular point per second and is given in cycles per second or hertz (Hz): 1 Hz ˆ 1 cycle=s: The frequency of a light wave determines perceived hue and, as we shall see in the next chapter, the frequency of a sound wave determines its perceived pitch. Clearly, if two waves are traveling at the same speed, the wave with the shorter wavelength will have the higher frequency (®gure 15.3). Frequency and wavelength are inversely proportional for waves traveling at the same speed. A wave of twice Figure 15.3. The observer counts more wavelengths for the lower wave than for the higher one. The frequency (the number of wavelengths that pass a point every second) is higher for the lower wave. 324 Wave Motion the wavelength, for instance, would have half the frequency of another wave traveling at the same speed. In chapter 6 we learned that for a rotating object, the time taken to complete one revolution was called the period, T. In wave motion, period is the time (in seconds) for one complete cycle; it is therefore the inverse of the frequency, which is the number of cycles per second: 1 Tˆ : f Another important parameter in describing a wave motion is the amplitude (A) which is the maximum displacement of the medium from its equilibrium position. The velocity (v) of a wave moving through a medium is determined by the medium. Velocity is equal to the displacement divided by the time interval during which the displacement occurred. Figure 15.4 shows successive snapshots of a wave traveling to the right. As one complete wavelength passes through a certain point the wave executes one cycle and this takes a time exactly equal to one period; thus,    1 v ˆ ˆ f since T ˆ : T f Diffraction One interesting property of waves is that they spread out when passing through a hole of dimensions similar to those of the wavelength. Figure 15.5 is a photograph of water waves advancing toward an obstacle with a small opening. The waves pass through the hole, propagate beyond the obstacle, and spread out around the edge of the hole. This phenomenon is called diffraction. A group of swimmers in the sea creates no breaks in the waves rippling onto the beach, as the waves ¯ow around small obstacles. This is also a form of diffraction. The principle of superposition When two particles encounter each other, they collide. When two waves encounter each other, however, they pass through each 325 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 15.4. As a transverse wave travels along a string, a small section of the string oscillates up and down, moving in a direction that is perpendicular to the direction in which the wave propagates. It takes a time equal to one period for one wavelength to move past that section. Figure 15.5. Plane waves passing through a barrier with a small hole. The waves spread out beyond the barrier. This is known as diffraction. (From PSSC Physics Seventh Edition, by Haber-Schaim, Dodge, Gardner, and Shore. Published by Kendall/Hunt Publishing Company, 1991.) 326 Wave Motion other unmodi®ed. You can hear the sound of a trumpet even while a violin is being played in the same room. The two sound waves reach your ears independently, as if they were the only ones present in the room. If you are listening to the radio while the telephone rings, you will hear the ring with the same pitch and the same loudness as if the radio was off. The same is true for water waves, waves on a string, or any other kind of wave motion. Where the two waves overlap, their amplitudes add up algebraically; at some places the waves add up to produce larger amplitudes and at other places they combine to produce smaller amplitudes. If, for example, two waves traveling on a string meet at one point where the amplitude of one wave is 5.0 cm and the amplitude of the other is ÿ3.0 cm or 3.0 cm below the equilibrium position, the actual displacement of the string from the equilibrium position at that point would be 2.0 cm (®gure 15.6). Each wave contributes to the rope's displacement regardless of the presence of the other. This property is known as the principle of superposition or the phenomenon of Figure 15.6. Superposition of two wave pulses (A and B) at a point. The waves interact destructively but then pass through each other unchanged. 327 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS interference. When the displacement is enhanced, the waves are said to undergo constructive interference, and when the displacement is diminished, the waves undergo destructive interference. However, this effect is signi®cant only when the waves have the same frequency. Constructive and destructive interference Two waves of equal amplitudes and frequencies moving in the same direction through the same region of space interfere constructively if the crests of one wave match the crests of the other. This results in a wave with an amplitude equal to twice the amplitude of either wave alone (®gure 15.7(a)). If the crest of one wave meets the trough of the other, there is destructive interference and the waves cancel each other out at that point (®gure 15.7(b)). Figure 15.8(a) illustrates what happens when ripples from two nearby sources overlap. If two similar pebbles are dropped Figure 15.7. (a) When the crests from the two overlapping waves coincide, there is constructive interference; (b) when the crest and the trough coincide, there is destructive interference and the waves cancel each other out. 328 Wave Motion Figure 15.8. (Left) Interference pattern produced by two sources vibrating simultaneously. (Right) Interference patterns for a different wavelength. (From PSSC Physics Seventh Edition, by Haber-Schaim, Dodge, Gardner, and Shore. Published by Kendall/Hunt Publishing Company, 1991.) close to each other on a serene pond, circular ripples start to spread out from the place where each pebble hit the water and quickly reach the same area on the surface of the water. There will be some regions where the ripples will interfere destructively, canceling each other out, and some other regions where the interference is constructive, and the amplitude is increased. Figure 15.8(a) is actually a photograph of two trains of waves produced by the vibration of two rods in contact with the water and connected to the same motor. The rods vibrate synchronously and produce ripples that have the same amplitude and wavelength and that oscillate in step. They are said to be in phase. Waves with the same form and wavelength oscillating in phase are called coherent waves. The regions of constructive interference form lines that radiate from the middle of the two sources of waves and which are interspaced by lines formed by the regions of destructive interference. Here the waves are out of step and are said to be in antiphase. This interference pattern of regularly spaced regions of maxima and minima depends on the separation of the sources and the wavelength of the two disturbances and is characteristic of all wave motions. Although it is a simple matter to measure the wavelength of waves traveling through a rope or string or of water waves, sound waves and electromagnetic waves are not visible and the wavelength cannot be measured by observation. 329 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 15.9. Two coherent sources of waves interfere constructively at P and destructively at Q. However, if the locations of maxima and minima can be determined, then simple geometry allows us to ®nd the wavelength. In the photograph of ®gure 15.8(b), we see the different interference patterns produced by ripples of different wavelength from that of 15.8(a). The separation between the sources and the positioning of the screen is the same for both cases. We can see that the spreading is more pronounced for longer wavelengths (®gure 15.8(a)). Consider two coherent sources of waves separated by a distance d arranged as in ®gure 15.9. If a maximum is found at some point P at a distance y above the x axis (assuming that the distance L is much greater than the separation d between the sources), the wavelength  is given by a simple geometrical expression involving the distances y, L, and d: yd ˆ : L Standing waves Two identical wave motions of equal amplitude and wavelength traveling in opposite directions, towards each other, interfere in a 330 Wave Motion Figure 15.10. Two waves moving in opposite directions, shown at different times. way that depends on the location of the crests and troughs of each wave at different times (®gure 15.10). Regardless of where the individual waves are, though, there are certain points called nodes that do not move at all. The points in between the nodes vibrate but the wave does not move in either direction; the nodes remain at the same locations and the overall pattern is stationary. These ®xed waves are called stationary or standing waves. It can be shown that the spacing between nodes is equal to half the wavelength of the traveling waves. Standing waves also occur on a stretched string ®xed at both ends, such as in a guitar or a piano. Consider the waves generated when a guitar string is plucked. Many waves are produced which interfere with each other but only the ones with the end points ®xed are sustained. These waves combine to produce an overall pattern which does not travel in any direction; the string vibrates up and down only. One way to observe stationary waves is to tie one end of a string to a post, for example, and, holding the other end so as to keep the string taut, produce a train of waves by repeatedly shaking the free end of the string with our hand. When the waves reach the ®xed end, they are re¯ected, and interfere with the outgoing waves that we are producing from the free end to form a standing wave pattern. When a taut string is plucked or struck, standing waves are produced and the string vibrates in different ways, called modes of vibration. In the fundamental mode 331 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 15.11. Standing waves on a string ®xed at both ends. The fundamental mode of vibration has only two nodes at the ®xed ends; the second and third harmonics have one and two additional nodes respectively. or ®rst harmonic, the center of the string vibrates and the only nodes are the two ®xed ends. Another mode of vibration has, in addition to the ®xed ends, a third node in the middle of the string; this is called the second harmonic or ®rst overtone. Third, fourth and other harmonics (second, third and higher overtones) can be obtained with two, three, and more nodes in between the ®xed ends of the string (®gure 15.11). There are certain wavelengths for which standing waves appear in a stretched string such as a piano string or the string of any stringed instrument. Since the string is ®xed at both ends, these two points, as we have seen, are always nodes. Examining the different modes of oscillation illustrated in ®gure 15.11, we can see that if the string has a length L, the fundamental mode of oscillation takes place when one-half of a wavelength forms in between the two ®xed ends; that is, in the fundamental mode, one-half of a wavelength equals the length of the string. The wavelength of the second harmonic is equal to the length of the string. For the third harmonic, we see that one and a half wavelengths equal the length of the string, and for the third, two complete wavelengths are formed in the string. Thus, the wavelengths of the ®rst four modes of oscillation are:  ˆL 2 fundamental 2 ˆL 2 second harmonic 332 Wave Motion 3 ˆL 2 third harmonic 4 ˆL : 2 fourth harmonic Here we have written the wavelength of the second harmonic as 2=2 which is just ; and that of the fourth harmonic as 4=2, which is equal to 2, so as to express all wavelengths as multiples of =2. We ®nd other standing wave modes where L is equal to an integral number of wavelengths or L ˆ n=2 where n ˆ 1, 2, 3 . . . etc. The wavelength n of the nth mode of oscillation is then n ˆ 2L : n The frequency of any mode of oscillation can be found from the formula v ˆ f . For the nth mode, the frequency is nv : fn ˆ 2L Thus, when n ˆ 1, the fundamental frequency is v=2L; when n ˆ 2, we obtain the frequency for the second harmonic, which is v=L; and similarly for any other mode of oscillation. The frequencies obtained from this expression are called the natural frequencies of the string. Resonance and chaos When we ®x one end of a string and, keeping it stretched, repeatedly move the free end up and down slowly with one hand, standing waves are usually not seen right away. However, if we start increasing the frequency with which we move the free end of the string, pretty soon we reach the fundamental frequency of vibration of the string and we observe the fundamental mode. Further increasing the frequency destroys the standing wave pattern for a while until the second mode of oscillation of the string or ®rst overtone is reached. As we slowly increase the frequency with which we move the free end of the string, we reach other modes of oscillation. What we are doing with our rapid up and down motions is to pump energy to the string; the motion of our hand is the source of energy. We notice that it is easier to pump energy when the 333 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS string is oscillating in any one of its natural frequencies. A similar situation occurs when we push a child on a swing. If the pushes are in step with the back and forth motion of the swing, it is easier to maintain the oscillations. But if the pushes are not in step with the swing, the child's motion becomes disorganized, the oscillations of the swing lose amplitude, and it is more dif®cult to push it. The string responds better to this in¯ux of energy when the frequency of the driving force (our hand) matches one of the natural frequencies of oscillation of the string. This phenomenon is known as resonance. On November 7, 1940, some four months after it had been inaugurated, the Tacoma Narrows Bridge collapsed after standing waves were produced by gusting winds. If the standing waves had remained stable, the bridge might not have collapsed. However, as scientists have recently discovered, a stable system may become unstable if a very small variation is introduced into its initial conditions. Even in the absence of any external random forcing, some physical systems can show regular periodic motions or apparently random motion, and the difference between the two resides in the initial conditions. A long, ¯exible metal beam clamped to a vibrating support would usually show a standing wave pattern; however, if started from a slightly different position, the standing wave pattern rapidly develops a chaotic motion which increases the amplitude of the oscillation (®gure 15.12). Depending on the elasticity of the beam, this chaotic condition may lead to a breaking of the beam. Instead of producing stable standing waves on the Tacoma Narrows Bridge that day, the gusting winds could have produced this chaotic motion on the bridge, causing its collapse. The chaotic motion we are referring to here is not completely uncontrolled, helter-skelter, random motion. It is, rather, a somewhat controlled, seemingly random motion that has been discovered in the past few years. The fundamental cause of chaos is sensitivity to initial conditions. Take, for example, a dripping faucet. A slow ¯ow rate produces a rhythmic, periodic drip; the time interval between drops is always the same. A small increase in the ¯ow rate may still produce a periodic drip. Further increase of the ¯ow rate eventually produces what appears to be random, turbulent motion; the time interval between drops seems to vary randomly, without any periodicity or structure. To investigate 334 Wave Motion Figure 15.12. (a) Standing waves develop in a long metal beam attached to a vibrating clamp. (b) Depending on the initial conditions, chaotic motion can develop which may cause the beam to break. this phenomenon, the American physicist Robert S Shaw decided to plot the interval between drops 1 and 2 versus the interval between drops 2 and 3. When the dripping was periodic, all points fell in the same place, one on top of the other. When the ¯ow was turbulent, the ®rst points plotted seemed to fall all over the graph, without any pattern. As enough points accumulated, a pattern emerged; the points formed a constrained shape. Out of disorganized, turbulent behavior, an eerie order lurked; an orderly disorder, the order behind chaos (®gure 15.13 (color plate)). This chaos appears not only in physical systems but also in living organisms. Chaotic activity is apparently responsible for certain mechanisms in the brain involved in learning. There is experimental evidence that chaotic activity switches on and off in the olfactory system of mammals with different chaotic responses for familiar and unfamiliar smells. Ventricular ®brillation, an irregular and uncontrolled contraction of the muscle ®bers of the ventricles in the heart's lower chambers, is a condition that brings death within minutes. The heart is a mechanical pump and, like the dripping faucet, the condition of ventricular 335 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS The frontiers of physics: Chaos in the brain When we see the face of a friend, hear the voice of a famous TV personality or recognize the smell of cherry pie, we know almost instantly that what we see, hear or smell is familiar to us. How do our brains process the complex and varied information perceived by our senses in such a short time with such accuracy? The answer seems to be with the existence of chaos in the brain. When a person smells an odorant, for example, molecules carrying the odor are picked up by a few neuron cell receptors in the nasal cavities. The receptor cells that capture the molecules send out pulses which propagate to the olfactory center in the forebrain where the signals are analyzed and transmitted to the olfactory cortex. From there the signals are sent to other parts of the brain where they are combined with the signals from other senses and a perception is produced. How does the brain separate one scent from all the others? How does it learn to recognize familiar scents? It seems that chaos is the property that makes perception possible. Researchers at the University of California at Berkeley attached an array of 60 electrodes 0.5 mm apart to the olfactory bulbar surface of trained rabbits and recorded electroencephalogram (EEG) tracings as the animals sniffed. At ®rst sight, these EEG tracings look irregular and unpredictable. The EEGs oscillate, rising and falling continuously, but when a familiar smell is detected all the waves from the array acquire some regularity, oscillating at about 40 Hz. When the differences between consecutive waves were plotted during perception of a familiar scent and during rest, the underlying order of a chaotic system was observed in the graphs. The graphs suggested to the researchers that an act of perception consists of an explosive jump from one chaotic set of oscillations to another. They think that the olfactory bulb and cortex maintain many chaotic sets, one for each familiar scent. When a new odorant becomes familiar, another set is added to the collection. 336 Wave Motion How does the brain shift from the irregular EEGs to the more regular oscillating one of a familiar scent, sound or sight? More recent experiments, in which the brain neurons of the visual system of anesthetized cats were tagged with a dye that ¯uoresces when the neuron ®res, show that rather than averaging the input received by all the neurons, as had been believed, the brain actually processes all the signals. Moreover, the experiments suggest that neurons respond simultaneously to the same source rather than to many different ones. How can the brain sort out what is important amidst all this noise? Physicist William L Ditto of Georgia Institute of Technology thinks that this noise actually helps the brain detect weak signals. This is the idea behind the phenomenon known as stochastic resonance, in which the addition of noise enhances the detection of normally undetected signals. Chaos in the brain, the researchers think, may be the main property that makes the brain different from a computer, even at the current stages of arti®cial intelligence. Future programmers will probably have to put chaos into their programs if they want their machines to achieve even a minimal level of recognition. ®brillation may have an underlying pattern of regularity. If heart ®brillation is indeed chaotic, it might be possible to predict when it is going to appear and perhaps prevent it. Water waves Water waves are an example of a fairly complicated wave phenomenon that can be understood with what we have learned about wave motion this far. As we have seen, it is energy that is transmitted in a wave, not matter. The particles of matter that make up the medium in which the wave travels vibrate around ®xed positions but do not travel along with the wave. In the case of water, the particles of water move in circles, upward on the front edge and downward on the back edge (®gure 15.14). 337 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 15.14. The particles of water move in circles when the wave passes. After a disturbance is produced in water, several forces begin to act on the water. Suppose we throw a big rock or brick in the water of a lake. This makes the water next to the point of impact rise above the normal level (®gure 15.15). As when an object is thrown up into the air, the weight of the rising molecules of water slows them down until they ®nally stop and begin to fall. Accelerating downwards, they reach the equilibrium level with a maximum speed and continue moving past this level pushing the other molecules away and creating a depression in the water. The pressure of the water itself produces a buoyant force that slows the falling water and, after stopping it, pushes it back up. Figure 15.15. Two forces act on the water when a disturbance is produced; the weight of the water acting downward, and the pressure of the water itself acting upward, which produces a buoyant force FB . 338 Wave Motion Figure 15.16. Ripples are propagated by forces that arise from surface tension. Again the water overshoots and rises above the undisturbed level, and another cycle of this oscillation starts. Since water is incompressible, when the ®rst depression is formed, the water particles next to the depression are pushed up, and a second oscillating pulse is formed. In this way the disturbance propagates away from the place where the rock was thrown. In the case of very small waves or ripples, the role of the force of gravity is not as important as that of surface tension. When the water rises above the equilibrium level, the curved surface becomes slightly larger than the ¯at undisturbed surface so that the average distance between molecules increases. The forces acting between the water molecules on the surface of the disturbance pull the surface to the ¯at undisturbed level and the same overshooting effect takes place, producing oscillations (®gure 15.16). Seismic waves Earthquakes are sudden disturbances within the Earth that produce waves (called seismic waves) that travel around the world. When an earthquake occurs, several kinds of waves propagate away from the epicenter at different speeds. The fastest waves, which arrive at a detection site ®rst and consequently are called P (or primary) waves, are longitudinal and travel through the Earth. Deep in the earth, the P waves travel at a speed of about 15 km/s, whereas near the surface their speed is about 5.5 km/s. The slower S (or secondary) waves, which also travel through the earth, are transverse waves; their speeds are usually 7 12 the speed of the P waves. The slowest waves are the L waves, which are surface waves with amplitudes that die out fairly rapidly with depth. 339 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 15.17. Waves from earthquakes on the other side of the earth, which are changed when passing through the core, are different from the waves from earthquakes that take place nearby. Solid regions in the earth transmit both P and S waves, while ¯uid regions transmit only P waves. Observation and detection of these different kinds of wave have been used to obtain information about the structure of the interior of the earth. In 1906, from analyses of P wave data, the British scientist R D Oldham demonstrated that the earth has a core. By observing the difference in the waves from earthquakes on the other side of the earth and those from earthquakes that had taken place at closer locations, he concluded that the waves from the other side of the earth had been altered by passing through the core (®gure 15.17). Further studies showed that the interior of the earth has two other layers besides the core: the mantle and the crust (®gure 15.18). The core appears to be composed mainly of iron, with small amounts of sulfur and oxygen; it extends 1218 km from the center of the earth. The mantle, which has a thickness of about 2900 km, consists of rocks made of iron and magnesium combined with a silicate material. It becomes ¯uid under high 340 Wave Motion Figure 15.18. Structure of the interior of the Earth. Detection of seismic waves has yielded information about the composition of the Earth. constant pressure; however, sudden changes in pressure turn it brittle. Surrounding the mantle is the crust, a relatively thin layer of lower density rock; its thickness varies from a few kilometers under the ocean, to about 50 kilometers in the continents. The lower part of the crust, together with the upper mantle, constitutes the lithosphere, a rigid layer formed by large thin plates. These plates, consisting of lower density granitic rocks, ¯oat on the slightly denser plastic mantle, carrying the continents along with them. The surface of the earth is continuously changing and the continental plates move with velocities of a few centimeters per year. 341 16 SOUND The nature of sound Sound in¯uences all of our activities. The human ear is capable of detecting waves carrying energies as low as 10ÿ18 J. For comparison, the energy required to lift a paper clip up to a height of only one millimeter is one trillion times as great. This remarkably sensitive organ allows us to detect the immense variety of sounds in which we are constantly immersed; the snarling and barking of dogs, the mewing of cats, the chirping and singing of birds, the screaming of sea gulls, the crowing of roosters, the whispers of trees, the patter of rain, the thunder of storms, the ticking of clocks, the whir of machines, the crying of babies, the voices of singers or the melody and harmony of music. What is this phenomenon that we call sound? Galileo said that sound is a wave motion ``produced by the vibration of a sonorous body.'' Some 2200 years earlier, the Greek philosopher Pythagoras had recognized that the pitch of a musical sound depends on the frequency of vibration of the object that produces the sound. Aristotle, in the fourth century BC, realized that the transmission of sound through the air is related to the motion of the air. The Roman architect and engineer Vitruvius, in the ®rst century BC, was probably the ®rst person to understand the concept of waves. He wrote that the propagation of sound in air was analogous to the motion of ripples on the surface of the water. In the eighteenth century, Robert Boyle showed that sound waves need a medium to travel through by pumping air out of a jar containing a bell, which could not be heard without the air. 342 Sound Figure 16.1. After a drumhead is struck, higher and lower density regions of air propagate away from the drum. We know today that sound is a mechanical longitudinal wave that propagates through a medium with frequencies that range from a fraction of a hertz to several megahertz. These mechanical waves are pressure waves produced by the vibrations of the molecules that make up the medium. After we strike a drumhead, it starts its return toward the position of equilibrium but, like an oscillating pendulum it overshoots, and continues moving past this position, pushing the air molecules in its path. This creates a region of higher density in the air. As the drumhead moves in the opposite direction, again toward the equilibrium position, a region of lower density air is produced. With each vibration of the drumhead, regions of higher density air followed by regions of lower density air are created. In the regions of higher density, compressed air pushes on additional air, transferring momentum, and a wave propagates through space (®gure 16.1). Since the human ear can detect sounds between 20 and 20,000 Hz, sound of frequencies within this range are called audio frequencies. Sound waves with frequencies below 20 Hz are called infrasonic, and those with frequencies above 20,000 Hz are called ultrasonic. The speed of sound The speed of propagation of sound through a medium is a consequence of the properties of that particular medium. In a gas, the molecules are separated from each other by comparatively large 343 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Physics in our world: Telephone tones When you press a button to dial a number with a touch-tone telephone, you activate electric circuits that produce tones. In the USA, pressing the number 1 button, for example, generates a tone of frequency 697 Hz together with a tone of frequency 1209 Hz. The number 6 button generates a 770 Hz tone and a 1477 Hz tone. The sound produced by these tones is transmitted as an electromagnetic signal to the central telephone switching of®ce where it is interpreted by electronic circuits in the switching network. Each signal arriving at the central switching of®ce has been combined or multiplexed together with many other signals. In the past, this multiplexing was achieved by assigning each telephone signal to a different frequency band. Today, multiplexing is performed by converting telephone signals to digital form, received by a large dedicated computer at the switching of®ce. If the number called is located at the same central of®ce (the same exchange, meaning that the telephone numbers share the same initial digits), the connection is completed there. If the number called has a different exchange, the signal is sent to a second central of®ce. For long distance calls, the call is sent to a series of interchange of®ces until the desired exchange is reached. Several methods have been developed over the years to transmit telephone signals. The oldest digital system still in use today is a system in which multiplexed signals travel through copper wires that carry 24 telephone signals 344 Sound simultaneously. The very high frequency radio system, which carries signals across the United States in the microwave region, bounces signals across microwave towers located every 26 miles. More recently, with optical ®ber (see next chapter), the telephone signals are encoded in the near-visible region of the electromagnetic spectrum. A single optical ®ber can carry 30 000 simultaneous telephone signals. distances, and the time between collisions is longer than in liquids or solids, where the molecules, being much closer together, interact through intermolecular forces rather than through collisions. Since a sound wave propagates through molecular interactions, we would expect sound to travel at a lower speed in gases. Table 16.1, lists the speed of sound in various substances. Since molecular motion increases with temperature, we also expect the speed of sound to be directly proportional to the temperature of the medium through which it propagates. For sound waves moving in air, if we know the speed v0 at 08C, the speed is approximately v ˆ v0 ‡ 0:61† m=s ˆ 331 ‡ 0:61† m=s where  is the temperature in degrees Celsius. This means that the speed of sound increases about 0.61 m/s for every one-degree rise in temperature. Table 16.1. The speed of sound in some gases, liquids and solids. Substance Speed in m/s Gases Air at 08C Air at 208C Air at 1008C Hydrogen at 08C Helium at 08C Oxygen at 08C Nitrogen at 08C 331 343 366 1286 965 317 334 345 Substance Speed in m/s Liquids at 258C Fresh water Seawater 1493 1533 Solids Aluminum Iron Lead Rubber Granite 5100 5130 2700 1800 6000 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Table 16.1 tells us that the speed of sound in a lighter gas, like hydrogen, is higher than the speed of sound in a heavier gas, like oxygen. Recall from chapter 10 that the temperature of a substance depends only on the random kinetic energy per molecule, not on the number of atoms and molecules in the substance nor on the kinds of atoms that form the substance. At the same temperature, then, molecules of hydrogen and oxygen have the same average kinetic energy. Since the kinetic energy of a molecule is 2 1 2 mv , at the same temperature, a hydrogen molecule, with a mass m of 2 amu, has a greater speed v than a heavier oxygen molecule of mass m equal to 32 amu. Intensity of sound waves The sensation of loudness, although subjective, is related to an objective property, namely the intensity of the sound wave being perceived. Intensity is the rate at which the wave transports energy per unit of area; that is, the power delivered by the wave through a unit of area, or P Iˆ : A Since the units of power are watts, the units of intensity are watts per meter squared (W/m2 ). The human ear can detect sounds with intensities as low as 10ÿ12 W/m2 and as high as 1 W/m2 . This is an enormous range of intensity, a factor of 1012 or one trillion from the lowest to the highest. Although the sound intensity of normal conversation is about 10 000 times greater than that of a whisper, we would perhaps say that normal conversation is only about 3 or 4 times as loud as a whisper. To better represent the response of the human ear to changes in sound intensity, we use the term sound level, expressed in units called bels (in honor of Alexander Graham Bell) or more commonly decibels, dB (1 dB is 0.1 bel). On this new scale, 0 dB corresponds to the lowest intensity that we can detect, and 120 to the maximum we can endure. Thus, when the sound intensity changes by a factor of 10, we add 10 to the sound level in dB. We can see the relation between sound intensity and sound level in Table 16.2. Sound levels for several sounds are listed in Table 16.3. 346 Sound Table 16.2. Comparison between sound intensity and sound level. Sound level (dB) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 Sound intensity (W/m2 ) ÿ12 Relative intensity 100 ˆ 1 101 ˆ 10 102 ˆ 100 103 ˆ 1 000 104 ˆ 10 000 105 ˆ 100 000 106 ˆ 1 000 000 107 ˆ 10 000 000 108 ˆ 100 000 000 109 ˆ 1 000 000 000 1010 ˆ 10 000 000 000 1011 ˆ 100 000 000 000 1012 ˆ 1 000 000 000 000 10 10ÿ11 10ÿ10 10ÿ9 10ÿ8 10ÿ7 10ÿ6 10ÿ5 10ÿ4 10ÿ3 10ÿ2 10ÿ1 1 The ear We learned in the previous section that the human ear can detect sounds with an intensity of 10ÿ12 W/m2 . This corresponds to a pressure of 3  10ÿ5 Pa above the atmospheric pressure, which is only 6 times greater than the pressure ¯uctuations produced by the random motion of the air molecules. If the human ear were a little more sensitive, we could hear individual molecules colliding with the eardrum! The human ear, like the ear of other mammals, is divided into three regions: the outer ear, the middle ear, and the inner ear (®gure 16.2) The outer ear consists of the auricle or pinna and the Table 16.3. Some sound levels. Sound Sound level Sound (dB) Sound level (dB) Barely audible Rustle of leaves Whisper at 1 m Quiet room Library Average classroom Normal conversation (1 m) Busy street 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 120 140 150 Average factory Niagara Falls Power mower Rock concert (outdoors) Rock concert (indoors) Threshold of pain Jet plane at 30 m Jet takeoff 347 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 16.2. (a) The human ear. (b) Schematic diagram of the ear. 2.5-cm long auditory canal, which connects the auricle with the eardrum or tympanum. This has the form of a ¯attened cone some 9 mm in diameter, stretched across the tympanic annulus, a small bone in the shape of a ring. Sound waves enter the ear canal through the auricle and set the eardrum into vibration. Behind the eardrum is the middle ear which consists of a narrow, air-®lled cavity where three small bones, the hammer, the anvil, and the stirrup, transmit the vibrations of the eardrum to the oval window of the inner ear. Leading downward from this cavity is the Eustachian tube, which connects the ear to the 348 Sound Figure 16.3. The inner ear. nasopharynx, the region behind the nasal passages. The purpose of this tube, about 45 mm in length, is to equalize the pressure on both sides of the eardrum. The inner ear is contained in a bony structure known as the labyrinth with two openings to the middle ear; the oval window, connected to the stirrup, and the round window, covered by a thin membrane. This labyrinth contains three semicircular canals and a spiral tube about 30 mm in length called the cochlea, a word derived from the Greek world for snail (®gure 16.3). It is in the cochlea where the vibrations of the sound waves are transformed into the electrical impulses the nerves transmit to the brain. The cochlea is divided internally by three longitudinal sections: the vestibular canal, which ends at the oval window; the tympanic canal, which ends at the round window; and the cochlear duct, which lies in the middle of the other two and also ends at the round window. A sound wave coming into the inner ear through the oval window travels down the vestibular canal and back along the tympanic canal. The membrane that separates these two canals contains the organ of Corti, a complex arrangement of some 30 000 nerve endings (®gure 16.4). The organ of Corti is covered by some ®ve thousand sensory cells ± called hair cells due to their hairlike appearance ± which are stimulated when the membrane is set into vibration by a sound wave. The nerve ®bers 349 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 16.4. Cross-section of the cochlea showing the location of the organ of Corti and the vestibular and tympanic membranes. connected to these hair cells transmit this information to the brain in the form of electrical impulses which the brain interprets as sound. Hair cells are about ®ve thousandths of a millimeter thick and as fragile as a cobweb. Sound waves that carry too much energy can damage them. A few minutes exposed to a sound level above 110 dB can cause permanent damage; above this ``threshold of pain'', exposure for any length of time is dangerous. Each hair cell can respond to motions as small as 100 picometers (10 billionths of a centimeter), a distance similar to the diameter of one of the larger atoms. The oscillatory pressure of the sound wave moves the hair cells and this motion is transformed into an electrical impulse at the cell which changes the electrical potential that exists between the interior and exterior of the cell, caused by different concentrations of sodium and potassium ions inside and outside the cell. When the hair cell is at rest, there is an exchange of ions through open channels in the membrane, and an equilibrium situation is reached. When the cell is moved, the number of open channels changes and the equilibrium is disturbed; this changes the electric potential of the cell from about 60 mV to about 40 mV. This change in the potential difference triggers an electrical signal that travels to the brain. 350 Sound Hair cells are also the sensory receptors for the sense of balance which allows humans to walk upright. In addition to the cochlea, ®ve other sensory organs contain hair cells; the three semicircular canals, the utricle and the saccule. The hair cells of the utricle and the saccule are located on two thin, ¯at sheets, one of which is positioned vertically and the other horizontally. Close to these organs is the otolithic membrane which contains hundreds of thousands of small crystals, the otoconia, which make this membrane denser than the ¯at sheets that contain the utricle and the saccule. When the head is accelerated, the otocondria lags behind due to its greater inertia, and this causes the hair cells of the utricle or the saccule to be displaced in the opposite direction. Displacement of the hair cells produces potential difference changes, which are communicated to the brain as electrical signals. A similar mechanism works in the semicircular canals. In this case, the hair cells are moved when an angular acceleration takes place. The canals are ®lled with a ¯uid, the endolymph, which lags behind the sides of the canal when the head is rotated. This ¯uid exerts a pressure on the membrane where the hair cells are located, producing the displacement that causes the potential changes in the cells. As the three canals, the superior canal, the horizontal canal, and the inferior canal, lie along perpendicular directions, they can detect angular acceleration along three perpendicular axes in space (®gure 16.5). Figure 16.5. The labyrinth showing the three semicircular canals, the saccule and the utricle. 351 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS The frontiers of physics: Electronic ear implants People with hearing loss caused by damage to the hair cells which cover the organ of Corti can now receive cochlear implants that replace the function of the hair cells with electrodes. These electrodes, in the form of a very thin wire less than a millimeter in diameter, are inserted through the ear canal into the cochlea to stimulate the auditory nerves electronically, allowing the deaf person to perceive sound. Although the ®rst implants contained a single electrode, more recent devices use multichannel electrodes with several receptors for different frequencies. A sound processor worn in a shirt pocket encodes the sound and transmits it as radio waves to the electrodes. Researchers are currently attempting to determine the proper position in the cochlea to place the electrodes and the range of frequencies to which each electrode should respond. High frequencies stimulate the outer spiral of the cochlea whereas low frequencies must penetrate deep inside. The original single channel electrodes (which were approved by the Food and Drug Administration but are no longer available) gave most patients only the awareness of sound. The multichannel devices based on the selective frequency bands now in development promise to give speech recognition to the patient The sound of music What is the difference between music and noise? We might say that music sounds pleasant and noise generally unpleasant. But what makes a sound pleasant to our ears? Pythagoras, in the 352 Sound sixth century BC, discovered that when two similar stretched strings of different lengths are sounded together, the sound thus produced is pleasant if the lengths of the strings are in the ratio of two small integers. Pythagoras was probably born in the year 560 BC in Samos, one of the Aegean islands. Little is known of his early years in Samos. In 529 BC, after traveling through Egypt and the East on advice from his mentor Thales, Pythagoras settled in the Greek colony of Crotona, in southern Italy, where he began lecturing in mathematics and philosophy. People from the upper classes attended his lectures. One of the most attentive was Theano, the beautiful daughter of his host, whom Pythagoras later married, and who, in order to attend the lectures, had to defy an ordinance which forbade women to be present at public functions. Theano later wrote a biography of her husband, now unfortunately lost. Pythagoras discovered that if a stretched string vibrates as a whole ± we would say that it vibrates in the fundamental mode ± the sound produced by a second string that has half the length of the ®rst one would be harmonious with the sound of the ®rst string (®gure 16.6(a)). Strings with lengths equal to one third, one fourth, and so on, would also be harmonious with the ®rst string. Pythagoras also realized that two stretched strings of Figure 16.6. (a) The sound produced by a string of a certain length vibrating in the fundamental mode is harmonious with the sound of a second string that has half the length, also vibrating in the fundamental mode. (b) Two equal strings also produce harmonious sounds if one vibrates in the fundamental and the other in two, three or more equal parts (overtones). 353 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS equal length would produce pleasant sounds if one is vibrating as a whole and the other is made to vibrate in two, three, four or more equal parts (®gure 16.6(b)). These modes of vibration are what we called in chapter 15 the overtones of the fundamental, and together with the fundamental form a harmonic series. Thus, Pythagoras found that the chords that sound pleasant to the ear correspond to the normal modes of vibration of a string; that is, those frequencies which form a harmonic series. Although we have seen that the sounds with frequencies from a harmonic series are pleasant to the ear, we have not said why this is so. One characteristic of the sound of music is that the sound waves show some periodicity; we say that music has sustained notes. The sound waves of noise, on the contrary, are disorganized and do not show periodicity. Musicians refer to a musical tone in terms of loudness, pitch and quality or timbre. We studied loudness earlier in the chapter; here we will consider pitch and quality. The sensation of pitch is related to the frequency of sound waves; high-pitched sounds have high frequencies and lowpitched sounds have low frequencies. The human ear, as we know, can detect sounds with frequencies between 20 and 20 000 Hz; thus, sound waves outside this range have no pitch, since pitch is a subjective sensation. The different modes of vibration of a stretched string of length L are related through their frequencies fn by the expression fn ˆ nv 2L where, as we saw in chapter 15, n refers to the mode of oscillation and v is the velocity of propagation of the waves in the string. The fundamental mode or ®rst harmonic has n ˆ 1, the second harmonic has n ˆ 2, and so on. Since the frequency of vibration of the string is related to its length, we can restate Pythagoras's discovery by saying that a sound of two strings vibrating simultaneously is pleasant if the ratio of their frequencies is the ratio of two small integers. If the ratio is 2 to 1, the sounds are one octave apart. In musical terms, octaves are equal intervals of pitch. Descriptions of the pitch relationships that exist in music are called musical scales. Since many relationships can be established, the number of possible musical scales is very large, and many 354 Sound Table 16.4. Diatonic C-major scale Note Letter Frequency (Hz) Frequency ratio Interval do re mi fa sol la ti do C D E F G A B C 264 297 330 352 396 440 495 528 9/8 10/9 16/15 9/8 10/9 9/8 16/15 Whole Whole Half Whole Whole Whole Half have been used throughout history. Generally, the more advanced civilizations have developed complex scales. The most common scales are the pentatonic scales, which are based on ®ve notes, and the heptatonic scales, based on seven notes. Western music is based on one heptatonic scale, the diatonic scale, with the familiar notes ``do-re-mi-fa-sol-la-ti-do.'' The notes in this scale are named by using a LETTER (C, D, E, F, G, A, B), and each has a particular frequency. The scale itself has ®ve whole steps (W ) and two half steps (H) with two permutations or modes, major and minor. The major scale uses the interval sequence W-W-H-W-W-W-H, while the minor scale has the sequence W-H-W-W-H-W-W. A half step has a frequency ratio of 16/15 and a whole step has frequency ratios of 9/8 or 10/9. Table 16.4 shows the diatonic C-major scale. In Table 16.4, the C with a frequency of 264 Hz is known as the middle C because in written music this note occurs midway between the treble and bass clefs. (Clef is the sign placed at the beginning of the musical staff to determine the position of the notes. The musical staff is the horizontal set of lines on which music is written.) The ratio between the next C, the C above middle C, and middle C is 528 Hz/264 Hz ˆ 2/1. These two notes are therefore an octave apart. We notice that if we label middle C the ®rst note, the C above middle C would be the eighth note and octave means ``eight'' in Latin. The ratio between the frequency of each A and the preceding A or between F and the preceding F is always 2; and this is valid for any other note. We can then say that the A above the A with 440 Hz has a frequency of 880 Hz and the C below middle C has a frequency of 132 Hz. In addition to loudness and pitch, a musical tone has quality. The same note when played on a violin sounds different from 355 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 16.7. A stretched string vibrating in several overtones. The top diagram shows the ®rst two harmonics and the bottom diagram the ®rst three harmonics. On the right is the resultant waveform for each case. when it is played on a piano or sung by a soprano. The difference is in what is called the harmonic content of the wave; that is, the number of harmonics present in the wave. We know from the superposition principle that standing waves of different frequencies can exist in the same medium at the same time (®gure 16.7). For example, a guitar string usually oscillates in many overtones when it is plucked. A piano string when struck also oscillates in many overtones, but the relative amplitudes of these overtones are different from the ones in the guitar string. The relative oscillation energies of the different instruments determine the quality of sound they produce. Since each instrument has its own balance of overtones, a clarinet sounds different from a ¯ute or from a soprano voice when sounding the same note (®gure 16.8). The quality of the sound that we produce with our voice is also what allows us to discriminate between the different vowel sounds. When we speak, the vocal chords vibrate in the fundamental and several overtones and these resonate in the mouth. These resonant frequencies are called formants. When we change the shape of the mouth as we pronounce the different vowels, some harmonics are stressed more than others and a different set of formants appears, producing the different sounds. 356 Sound Figure 16.8. Sound waves for different instruments sounding the same note. Musical instruments Musical instruments consist of a source of sound and a resonator which ampli®es the sound and enhances certain harmonics. Guitars and violins use strings to generate sounds and a sounding box as resonator (®gure 16.9). The vibrations of the strings are passed to the sounding box by means of the bridge. The sounding box has its own modes of vibration which resonate with the vibrations of the strings, amplifying only certain frequencies. We saw in chapter 15 how standing waves develop on a stretched string which make the string vibrate in several different ways or modes with frequencies given by nv fn ˆ : 2L The frequency of the fundamental determines the pitch of the note. Since all the strings in a guitar or a violin have the same length, the only way to change the fundamental is by changing the speed of propagation of the waves on the string. How can this speed be changed? It turns out that the speed of propagation of waves on a stretched string depends on two factors: the tension 357 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 16.9. Guitars and violins have a sounding box or chamber that resonates with the vibrations of the strings. in the string and the string's density. If the tensions of the different strings in a guitar are all the same, the equation above tells us that strings of different densities vibrate with different fundamental frequencies. Pianos have strings of different lengths and the different fundamental frequencies are achieved by varying, in addition to the length, the tension and the density of the strings. To withstand the tremendous tension of the strings, pianos have a cast-iron frame. The resonator in a piano is the sounding board, a ¯at piece of wood as big as the piano itself (®gure 16.10). When a key is depressed, a hammer, which is linked to the far end of the key, strikes the string and sets it into vibration. The vibrations of the strings are transmitted to the sounding board via the bridge over which the strings are stretched. A felt damper, controlled by 358 Sound Figure 16.10. Schematic diagram of the hammer, damper, string, bridge and sounding board in a piano. one of the two or three pedals present on pianos, can be lifted to allow the strings to vibrate freely or lowered to stop the vibration. In a wind instrument such as the oboe, the musician blows into the mouthpiece producing eddies which set the reeds into vibration. This causes standing waves of the air within the tube. In other instruments such as brasses, the musician's lip vibrates as he or she blows air into the mouthpiece; these vibrations also produce standing waves in the column of air in the instrument. In each case, the frequency of the note produced depends on the length of the column of air, whether the tube is open or closed, and whether it is tapered (conical) or cylindrical. The standing waves established on the strings of stringed instruments have nodes at both ends (since they are clamped at the ends). The fundamental frequency, with nodes only at the ends, determines the pitch. The quality or characteristic sound depends on the harmonics present. The situation is similar with an air column; the closed end of the tube or pipe, such as an organ pipe, where the air is not free to move, is a displacement node. However, at the open end of the tube the air is free to move and a displacement antinode or point of maximum displacement appears there as shown in ®gure 16.11. Since the distance between a node and the next antinode is one quarter of the wavelength when the air column is vibrating in the fundamental mode, then the wavelength of the fundamental must be 4 times the length L of the tube, or 1 ˆ 4L. We can obtain the frequency of the fundamental by making use of the expression relating frequency, wave speed and wavelength obtained earlier in the chapter; that is, v ˆ f or f ˆ v=. Thus, the frequency of the fundamental is f1 ˆ v=1 ˆ v=4L where v is the speed of sound. The next harmonic 359 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 16.11. Standing waves in an organ pipe closed at one end. We use the graph of a wave to indicate variations in the density of the air in the pipe caused by the vibrations. The nodes are points of higher density and minimum displacement and the antinodes or points of maxima are regions of lower density and maximum displacement. contains one additional node between the open and closed ends, as shown in ®gure 16.11. Since the open end must be an antinode and the distance to the previous node is one quarter , the length L of the tube must be equal to three quarters the wavelength of this harmonic so that the wavelength is 3 ˆ 43 L; f3 ˆ v v 3v : ˆ ˆ 3 43 L 4L This frequency is three times the frequency of the fundamental; thus this harmonic is the third harmonic, which is the reason for the subindex 3 in the expressions above. Examining ®gure 360 Sound 16.11, we can see that the next harmonic has two nodes in addition to the node at the end. One and one-quarter wavelengths equal the length of the tube; thus, the wavelength of this harmonic is 5 ˆ 4L=5 and the frequency is f5 ˆ 5v=4L or ®ve times the frequency of the fundamental. Hence, this is the ®fth harmonic. There are no second or fourth harmonics. Actually, there are no even harmonics in a tube that is closed at one end; only odd harmonics are present. In an open organ pipe both ends are antinodes, and the fundamental occurs when there is a node in the middle of the pipe (®gure 16.12). In this case, the wavelength is equal to twice the length of the pipe; that is,  ˆ 2L. The frequency of the fundamental is then f ˆ v=2L. The second harmonic has two nodes between the ends so that the wavelength is equal to the length of the pipe; the frequency is then f2 ˆ v=L ˆ 2f1 . Examining ®gure 16.12, we can see that the third harmonic has a wavelength Figure 16.12. Fundamental and second and third harmonics in an open organ pipe. 361 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS 3 ˆ 2L=3 and a frequency f3 ˆ 3f1 . As opposed to the closed pipe, in an open organ pipe all harmonics are present. This also applies to open wind instruments such as ¯utes, and to reed instruments with a conical bore, such as saxophones. When an organ is played, several harmonics are present at once. The harmonic content of a pipe depends on the ratio of length to diameter, whether the pipe is closed or open, cylindrical or conical, and to some extent on the material from which the pipe is made, as well as the sound-generating edge (®pple or reed). The harmonic content determines the quality or timbre of the pipe. The Doppler effect You have no doubt noticed the sudden drop in pitch from an automobile horn as the car speeds past you. We know that the pitch does not change for the driver and that it is only because the car is moving that we hear a change in pitch. The same phenomenon can be heard if you drive past a car blowing its horn; the pitch is higher when you approach the car and lower when you are leaving it behind. When a source of sound and a listener are in motion relative to one another the pitch of the sound is not the same as when the source and listener are stationary with respect to each other. This phenomenon is known as the Doppler effect after the Austrian physicist Christian Doppler (1803±1853), who ®rst explained its properties. Suppose the horn of an automobile emits a sound of a particular frequency f and wavelength  (ˆ v=f ) in all directions (where v is the speed of sound in air). If this automobile is standing by the side of the road and we approach it with a speed v0 , the speed of the sound waves emitted by the car appears to be increased to v0 ˆ v ‡ v0 . As we move toward the car emitting the sound, we encounter more wavelengths per second. In this case, the frequency that we perceive is f0 ˆ v0 v ‡ v0 : ˆ   Although we are approaching the car, we still measure the same distance between two consecutive crests as if we were standing 362 Sound by the car because the car emitting the sound is at rest with respect to the air through which the sound propagates and our motion does not affect it. Since the distance between two consecutive crests is the wavelength, this means that the wavelength remains the same  ˆ v=f , and our expression for the frequency of the sound we hear as we approach the stationary car with a speed v0 becomes f0 ˆ v ‡ v0 v ‡ v0 ˆf : v=f v Let us examine this expression a little more closely. Since v0 is positive, the numerator is greater than the denominator which makes the frequency that we detect greater than the frequency perceived by a listener standing by the side of the car. A higher frequency means a higher pitch. Notice that if we decide to stop by the car with the stuck horn, then v0 ˆ 0 and f 0 ˆ f ; that is, the frequency we hear is the frequency heard by a listener at rest with the source of sound, which is what we have become by stopping. If we resume our trip and drive away from the car, then we must consider v0 to be negative. In this case, the numerator becomes smaller than the denominator and f 0 is smaller than f , which implies a lower pitch. Thus, the perceived frequency is higher than the frequency of the source when the listener approaches the source and lower when the listener moves away from the source. Summarizing, the frequency perceived by a listener moving with a velocity v0 with respect to a stationary source of sound is v ‡ v0 Listener approaching the source f0 ˆ f v v ÿ v0 Listener moving away from the source. f0 ˆ f v A different situation occurs when the source of sound approaches or moves away from the listener. In these two cases the wavelength changes because the source of sound is in motion with respect to the medium through which the sound propagates. The pitch we hear from the siren of an approaching ®re truck is higher than the pitch heard by the driver of the ®re truck (®gure 16.13). As the ®re truck moves in our direction, it gets closer to the waves that were emitted earlier and the sound 363 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 16.13. (a) The listeners hear the same frequency when the ®re truck sounding the siren is at rest. (b) When the ®re truck is moving, the listener behind it hears a lower pitch than the listener in front of the ®re truck. waves that reach us get closer together. The siren oscillates at a constant frequency even when it is moving. At the beginning of each oscillation the ®re truck has moved a little closer to us than where it was when the previous oscillation began. This makes the distance between oscillations or wavelength decrease. Since the velocity of sound remains unchanged, then the frequency has to increase. On the other hand, when the ®re truck is moving away from us, the siren is a little farther away at each oscillation and the wavelength is stretched out (®gure 16.13(b)). Suppose the siren emits a pure tone of frequency f and wavelength  ˆ v=f , where again v is the speed of sound in air. If the ®re truck is moving with a speed vs in the direction of the listener, the wavelength detected by the listener is shortened by
 ˆ vs =f during one period of oscillation of the wave. The wavelength detected by a listener in front of the ®re truck is then 364 Sound 0 ˆ v ÿ vs †=f and the frequency is f0 ˆ v v ˆf : 0 v ÿ vs When the ®re truck is moving away from the listener, vs has opposite sign. Summarizing, when a source of sound moves with a speed vs toward or away from a stationary listener, the frequency perceived is v f0 ˆ f Source approaching listener v ÿ vs v f0 ˆ f Source moving away from listener. v ‡ vs The Doppler effect also applies to other kind of waves. It even applies to electromagnetic waves, although the mathematical expressions are somewhat different. Police radar works by measuring the Doppler shift in frequency of electromagnetic waves emitted by the radar transmitter, as they are re¯ected from moving cars. Certain motion-sensitive sound detectors activate some large department store or supermarket doors. Astronomers determine the motion and velocity of distant galaxies by measuring the Doppler shifts of the light they emit. The discovery of Doppler shifts in the spectra of galaxies in the 1920s enabled Hubble to discover the expansion of the universe. Shockwaves When the source of sound moves with a speed greater than the speed of sound in the medium in which it is moving, a shockwave is produced. As we have seen, when the source of sound moves at a speed lower than the speed of sound, the crests of the waves get closer together in front of the moving source and farther apart behind it. If the source of sound moves exactly at the speed of sound, the waves pile up in front. The speed of sound in a particular medium depends on the elasticity of the medium; that is, on how fast and how much the molecules that make up the medium vibrate as the wave propagates. When the source of sound moves through the medium, the elastic properties of the molecules allow 365 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 16.14. Shock wave formed by a source of sound moving at supersonic speeds. (Courtesy R J Gomez, NASA Johnson Space Center.) them to move away from the source. When an airplane moves at the speed of sound, the air molecules cannot move away fast enough and pile up in front of the plane in one large crest. If the airplane moves faster than the speed of sound, it outruns the sound waves and these pile up along the sides, producing a large crest which extends in a cone behind the plane. This large crest, formed by the constructive interference of a large number of individual crests, is the shockwave (®gure 16.14). When an airplane ¯ies overhead at supersonic speeds, the shockwave is heard as a very loud crack, or sonic boom. This carries an enormous amount of energy which can shatter windows and produce sound levels that might reach harmful levels. For this reason, supersonic speeds like that achieved by the Anglo-French Concorde have been banned over the continental United States. An airplane traveling at the speed of sound is said to be ¯ying at Mach 1, after Ernst Mach (1838±1916), an Austrian physicist and philosopher of science who was the ®rst to investigate the change in air¯ow around an object as it reached the speed of sound. Mach 2 is used when the airplane is ¯ying at 366 Sound Figure 16.15. Bow wave formed by a duck swimming at a speed greater than the speed of propagation of water waves. twice the speed of sound, and so on. A sonic boom is not produced only as the airplane crosses the ``sound barrier.'' The shockwave follows the airplane and the sonic boom is heard after the plane has passed overhead. A duck moving in the water at a speed greater than the speed of propagation of surface waves on the water also produces a kind of shockwave, called a bow wave (®gure 16.15). Ultrasound When sound waves strike the surface of a solid object that is large compared with the wavelength of the sound waves, they are re¯ected. If the object is smaller than the wavelength of the waves impinging on it, the waves simply travel around the object almost undisturbed. A small piece of wood ¯oating on the water does not disturb the waves produced by a speedboat; another boat does. With sound waves, when the size of the object is at least several times greater than the wavelength of the waves, the sound waves are re¯ected by the object; this is the familiar echo. The sound of an automobile horn with a frequency of 300 Hz has a wavelength in air equal to  ˆ v=f ˆ 342 m=s†= 300 Hz† ˆ 1:14 m; thus, objects several meters across are large enough to re¯ect sound waves of this frequency. Objects only a few centimeters across re¯ect only sound waves of very 367 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS high frequencies, beyond the audible range of a human ear. These sound waves are known as ultrasonic. Our knowledge of the speed of sound in a particular medium, say air, allows us to determine the distance to a source of sound if we know the precise time when the sound was produced. Because light travels at 3:0  108 m/s, we see the lightning almost instantaneously but hear the thunder a few seconds later. It takes light 10 millionths of a second to travel a distance of 3 km whereas sound waves take 9 seconds to travel the same distance. If we clap our hands and 1 second later hear the echo from a cliff in front of us, we know that the cliff is some 170 m away, since x ˆ vt ˆ 342 m=s  1 s ˆ 342 m and the sound waves traverse this distance twice. Ships and submarines use this technique in underwater range®nding or sonar (sound navigation and ranging). A transmitter sends out a short-wavelength pulse of ultrasonic frequency through the water and a receiver detects the re¯ected pulse. From knowledge of the time it takes for the pulse to travel to the obstacle, the distance to the obstacle can be determined. Bats also emit ultrasonic pulses of a few milliseconds duration which, after re¯ecting from obstacles and prey up to about 4 m away, are detected by their large ears. Bats, then, can ¯y and hunt in complete darkness and can apparently locate their prey by distinguishing the times of arrival of the echo at the two ears. The repetition rate of the ultrasonic pulses varies from about 10 pulses per second when the obstacle or prey is farther away to some 200 pulses per second when the prey is closer. The range of frequencies of the sound emitted by bats goes from 30 kHz to nearly 120 kHz. Moths, a favorite prey of bats, seem to be able to hear those frequencies and drop quickly to the ground when they detect them. They also have another protection against their predators; their furry bodies are good sound absorbers and consequently poor sound re¯ectors. Taking a cue from nature, physicists have developed a medical diagnostic and treatment tool using ultrasonic waves. An ultrasonic pulse is produced by applying a high-frequency alternating voltage to both sides of a quartz crystal which then vibrates, emitting ultrasonic waves. (Old phonographic needles use the same principle: the vibrations of the needle as it rests on the groove are transmitted to a crystal which translates them 368 Sound into an alternating voltage; this voltage, after it is ampli®ed, drives the speakers.) These crystals are called piezoelectric and this technique of transforming electrical energy into mechanical energy is called the piezoelectric effect. After the ultrasonic pulse is re¯ected from the boundaries between different organs of the body, it is detected and analyzed. A two-dimensional image can be formed when multiple echoes are combined according to the time delay and intensity of the signal received. The image obtained, called a B-scan, is displayed on a monitor. 369 17 OPTICS Waves of light Light, as we learned in chapter 14, propagates through space as an electromagnetic wave. Maxwell's third equation tells us that a changing magnetic ®eld produces a changing electric ®eld which, according to Maxwell's fourth equation, creates in turn a changing magnetic ®eld. As Maxwell was able to show, once the process starts, the changing magnetic and electric ®elds continue to propagate as a wave. Although we also learned in chapter 7 that light also behaves as a particle, the wave theory of light is adequate for many purposes. We shall occupy ourselves with the study of the wave nature of light in the next chapter. Here, we turn to two phenomena that do not depend on whether we think of light as particles or as waves and are the basis for many optical effects; the laws of re¯ection and refraction. Re¯ection of light Since very early, people have known that light travels in a straight line. Observations of solar and lunar eclipses led the Greek thinkers to realize that light travels in straight lines at very high speed. The shadow cast by the moon on the earth during a solar eclipse or by the earth on the moon during a lunar eclipse shows that light travels in straight lines over long distances (®gure 17.1). It is often convenient to use straight lines or rays to represent pictorially this rectilinear motion of light. This representation will be useful in understanding some of the basic properties 370 Optics Figure 17.1. (a) The shadow cast by the moon during a solar eclipse or (b) by the earth on the moon during a lunar eclipse, shows that light travels in straight lines over long distances. of light, in particular the laws of re¯ection and refraction and the operation of many optical devices. When light falls upon an object, the oscillating electric ®eld of the incoming light sets the electrons of the atoms in the object into vibration. According to Maxwell's equations, a vibrating electric charge sets up an electric ®eld of varying strength which simultaneously creates a time-varying magnetic ®eld. Such ®elds, as we know, take on a life of their own; they form the electromagnetic waves that travel to space. Thus, the electrons of the atoms or molecules of the object, in particular, the outer electrons which are less tightly bound, absorb the light's energy and start vibrating, becoming emitters of electromagnetic radiation in the process. This electromagnetic radiation, re-emitted after it is absorbed by the electrons, is the light we see when we look at the object. 371 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS The law of re¯ection describes the way in which light is re¯ected from the surface of an object and says that the angle at which a light ray returns from a surface, or angle of re¯ection, is equal to the angle at which the ray strikes the same surface, or 372 Optics Figure 17.2. The angle that a re¯ected ray makes with the normal to a surface or angle of re¯ection is equal to the angle that the incident ray makes with the normal or angle of incidence. The incident and re¯ected rays lie in the plane that contains the normal to the surface. This is the law of re¯ection. angle of incidence. As illustrated in ®gure 17.2, these angles are measured from the normal or perpendicular to the surface. The incident ray, the re¯ected ray and the normal are all in the same plane. When light from a distant source falls upon an object, the incident rays of light are all nearly parallel. If the surface of the object is smooth, like a mirror or polished metal, the re¯ected rays are also parallel. This is called specular re¯ection, from the Latin word for mirror (®gure 17.3(a)). If the surface is rough, like a wall or the pages of this book, the re¯ected rays are not parallel to each other; they are re¯ected in all directions from the surface. This is called diffuse re¯ection. Diffuse re¯ection is what allows us to see the objects around us; light from the sun or a lamp strikes the surface of the object re¯ecting in all directions. The re¯ected rays, being re¯ected from the object in our direction, strike our eyes and we see the object. When we move to another location, other re¯ected rays strike our eyes. The same object can be seen by many people or by ourselves when we shift our position because there are re¯ected rays in all directions coming from the object's irregular surface (®gure 17.3(b)). When we look at a mirror, on the other hand, all the incident rays from a distant 373 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 17.3. (a) The re¯ection from a smooth surface is called specular. (b) Re¯ection from rough surfaces is called diffuse. source are re¯ected in the same direction and we see the source of light not the mirror. If the rays incident on a mirror are coming from the diffuse re¯ection off a rough surface, like our face, we see that surface. Re¯ection from mirrors When you look at yourself in a mirror, what you see is the image or likeness of your face. It looks just like you except that your right eye is still on the right of the image but the image is looking back at you and so it is the image's left eye. We are so used to looking at things in mirrors that we no longer pay any attention to this apparent right±left reversal. The driver we see through 374 Optics Figure 17.4. The image you see of your face appears reversed. Studying the ray diagrams you can see how this reversal takes place. It is in fact not reversed right to left, but front to rear. the rear-view mirror of our car looks ®ne apparently driving at the other side of the car. Imagine that you are looking at your raised right hand in the bathroom mirror (®gure 17.4). When you think about it, it looks as if the image is saluting with the left hand. Consider one of the many rays of light that are re¯ected by your right thumb, one that is going to enter your eye after re¯ecting from the mirror. This ray appears to come from a point behind the mirror at a distance from the mirror equal to the distance from your thumb to the mirror. Now, consider another similar ray coming from your right pinky. Although this ray also enters your eye after bouncing off the mirror, it strikes the mirror at a point to the right of the ray coming from the thumb. This ray appears to come from a point behind the mirror to the right of the thumb and so it looks like a left hand instead of a right hand. Suppose now that you are looking at the re¯ection of a liquid soap dispenser in the mirror (®gure 17.5). Again, the light rays appear to come from a point far behind the mirror as the dispenser is in front of the mirror. We call the point behind the mirror from where a particular ray appears to come from, the image, I, and the point on the soap dispenser where the ray actually originates, the object, O. Labeling the distance from the object to the mirror o for object distance and the distance from the image to 375 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 17.5. The distance from the object to the o† mirror is the same as the distance from the image i† to the mirror. the mirror, i for image distance, we can write that for plane mirrors (to distinguish them from curved mirrors, to be considered later), object distance o† ˆ image distance i†: Curved mirrors Mirrors, as we know, do not have to be ¯at. Make-up mirrors or shaving mirrors, which are used to magnify the image of one's face, are spherical mirrors. Exterior rear-view mirrors used on the right side of some automobiles, mirrors used in some shops for security, and corner mirrors used at intersections in some small towns with narrow streets are also curved mirrors, here used to increase the viewing angle. How do these mirrors magnify the image or increase the viewing angle? Let's look at a few light rays coming toward a curved mirror from certain speci®c directions. In ®gure 17.6(a) we show a spherical mirror in which the interior surface is the re¯ecting surface. This type of curved mirror is called concave. The line joining the center of curvature C with the center of the spherical segment is called the optical axis. Consider ®rst a ray that is parallel to the optical axis. This ray strikes the mirror at point P1 and is re¯ected back so that the angle of re¯ection equals the angle of incidence. Our parallel ray is re¯ected back 376 Optics Figure 17.6. (a) Parallel rays are re¯ected by a concave mirror through the focal point. (b) A ray that passes through the focal point is re¯ected parallel to the optical axis. and crosses the optical axis at point F. This point, which lies midway between the center of curvature and the mirror, is called the focal point of the mirror. Any other ray parallel to the optical axis, like the one striking the mirror at P2 , is re¯ected back through the focal point. We can then say that any ray that strikes a concave mirror parallel to the optical axis and fairly close to it is re¯ected through the focal point. If we now reverse the direction of the re¯ected and incident rays in the previous discussion, we can see that an incident ray that passes through the focal point of a concave mirror is re¯ected parallel to the optical axis (®gure 17.6(b)). We can summarize our discussion on concave mirrors in two simple rules: . A ray that strikes a concave mirror parallel to the optical axis is re¯ected through the focal point. . A ray that passes through the focal point of a concave mirror is re¯ected parallel to the optical axis. With these two rules we can see how a curved mirror magni®es or increases the viewing angle. We can determine the location of the image of a simple object, such as an arrow, in front of a concave mirror (®gure 17.7(a)). Since the tail of the arrow coincides with the optical axis, we only need to ®nd the location of one point on the object, the tip of the arrow, for instance, as we shall see shortly. We can draw several rays from this point so that they re¯ect from the mirror. Our task is simpli®ed a great deal if we use simple rays that obey our two rules above. Ray 1 is parallel 377 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 17.7. (a) Ray diagram to determine the image of an arrow. (b) An object placed inside the focal point of a concave mirror forms a virtual image behind the mirror. to the optical axis. By the ®rst rule, ray 1 is re¯ected through the focal point F while ray 2 passes through the focal point and is re¯ected parallel to the optical axis. As we can see in ®gure 17.7(a), these two rays cross at one point. If we were to draw other rays from the tip of the arrow, they would also cross at this same point. When we look into the mirror, the rays of light appear to come from this last point and so this point is the image of the tip of the arrow. Notice that this point lies below the optical axis. We could select other points and repeat the procedure until we reconstruct most of the arrow. If we do this, we would notice that the images of these points lie above I 0 , closer to the optical axis. Finally, the image of the tail of the arrow would lie right on the axis. The image of the arrow lies below the optical axis and is inverted. Notice also that in this case the image is also smaller than the object. Since our object has a simple symmetry, there is 378 Optics no need to select other points; knowing the location of the image of the tip of the arrow allows us to reconstruct the entire image. We might ask why the image of the arrow in ®gure 17.8(a) ended up upside down and smaller while the image of our face in a make-up or shaving mirror is right side up and larger. Next time you pick up one of these mirrors, place it at arms Figure 17.8. (a) Convex mirror positioned by a roadside at a blind corner. (b) Ray diagram for a convex mirror. 379 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS length rather than up close. Now, your image and the images of all the other objects in the room and the walls of the room itself are upside down and in front of the mirror, not behind it. It is only up close that your face appears larger and right side up. Why? What is so special about your face? Aside from the fact that your face is really special, it is the location of the object in relation to the mirror that determines the size and appearance of the image. If the object lies between the mirror and the focal point, the image will be right side up, behind the mirror, and larger. This is why your face looks larger in a shaving mirror. They are designed so that the focal point lies slightly beyond where you would normally place the mirror to look at yourself in it. The rest of the objects in the room lie beyond the focal point and thus have smaller, inverted images. The ray diagram in ®gure 17.7(b) shows the image of an object placed inside the focal length of a concave mirror. Notice that this image is not only larger and right side up, as we have just discussed, but also forms behind the mirror. Images such as this, in which light rays do not actually pass through the image, are called virtual images. The name suggests that there might be other kinds of images, perhaps not as ``ghostly.'' Indeed there are; the images formed by objects placed beyond the focal point of a concave mirror, as described above, are real images because light rays actually pass through them. Real images can be detected by a photographic ®lm, for example, or formed on a projection screen placed at the location of the image. Virtual images cannot. Images formed by plane (¯at) mirrors are also virtual. A curved mirror with the re¯ecting surface on the outside is called a convex mirror (®gure 17.8). The two rules outlined above for concave mirrors also work for convex mirrors. Notice that the focal point is behind the mirror. Convex mirrors are common in tight, narrow intersections because they produce a larger ®eld of view. For this reason, they are use widely as automobile rear-view mirrors, particularly on the near side of the vehicle. Refraction of light As we all have noticed at one time or another, a pool of water appears to be shallower than it really is and a spoon seems to 380 Optics Figure 17.9. (a) A spoon in a glass of water seems to bend when viewed from above. When viewed from the side it appears broken. (b) The rays of light bend as light crosses the boundary between two transparent media. bend or even break when we use it to stir a glass of lemonade (®gure 17.9(a)). The reason for these seemingly strange phenomena is the fact that light travels at different speeds through different transparent media because the electromagnetic waves interact with the matter of the medium in which they travel. The speed of light in vacuum is about 300 000 km/s but decreases to about 225 000 km/s in water and 200 000 km/s in glass. The speed of light in air is about 299 900 km/s, nearly the same as in vacuum. The oscillating electric ®eld of the electromagnetic wave sets the electrons of the atoms and molecules that make up the medium through which light is propagating into vibration. The vibrating electrons emit electromagnetic radiation of the same frequency. It is this constant absorption and re-emission of electromagnetic energy that gives the appearance that light has slowed down, although it is still traveling between interactions with the electrons at 300 000 km/s as it does in vacuum, where there are no electrons to interact with. A ray of light from a point on a spoon under the water travels along the water in a straight line at 225 000 km/s until it encounters the boundary between water and air (®gure 17.9(b)). In air, it also travels in a straight line but at a greater speed, and this 381 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS results in the bending of the light ray at the boundary which our brains interpret as a bent spoon rather than a bent ray of light. We can analyze the phenomenon, as we are doing here, and understand it, but our eyes still see a bent spoon. This bending of light rays due to the different speeds of light in different media is called refraction. As is the case with re¯ection, the ray incident upon the boundary between the two media is called incident ray and the ray entering the new medium is called the refracted ray. The angle made by the incident ray and the normal to the boundary is called the angle of incidence and the angle formed by the refracted ray and the normal, the angle of refraction. How do these changes in the speed of light result in the bending of light rays? An analogy could help us understand this phenomenon. Imagine soldiers marching in formation on a grassy ®eld. When the soldiers come to an adjacent muddy ®eld, they are slowed down by the mud even if they keep in step, as they have to take shorter steps. If they enter the muddy ®eld at an angle, as shown in ®gure 17.10(a), the columns closer to the edge of the grassy ®eld enter the mud ®rst so that as each row comes to the boundary some soldiers in that row will be in the mud and the rest in the grass. The soldiers marching in the mud get slightly behind so that the next row, still on the grass, gets closer to them and the formation swivels. When the soldiers are all in the muddy ®eld, they will ®nd themselves marching in a new direction, one closer to the normal to the boundary and the rows of soldiers will be closer to each other. For light passing from air into water, we can replace the columns of soldiers by lines drawn one wavelength apart, called wavefronts (®gure 17.10(b)). As with the soldiers, the part of each wavefront that has entered the water is slowed down in relation to the part that is still in the air so that, as light enters the water, the wavefronts are closer together and move in a direction closer to the normal. Since the distance between two consecutive wavefronts is one wavelength, we can see that the wavelength in water is shorter. The frequency, however, remains the same (in our analogy, the soldiers keep the same step). Remembering that the speed of a wave is related to its wavelength and its frequency through the expression v ˆ f 382 Optics Figure 17.10. (a) Soldiers marching in formation slow down and change direction when they enter a muddy ®eld. (b) Light rays slow down as they pass from air to water and this causes the rays to bend or refract. we can see that if the speed decreases, the wavelength also decreases in the same proportion, since the frequency remains constant. (The atoms absorb and re-emit the light at the same frequency.) The path of a light ray through a refracting surface is reversible; that is, if the direction of a light ray is reversed, it will retrace the original path. If we reverse the direction of the rays in ®gure 17.10(b), the incident ray becomes the ray in the water 383 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Table 17.1. Indices of Refraction Substance n Substance n Vacuum Air Ice Water Acrylic plastic 1.000 00 1.000 29 1.31 1.333 1.51 Quartz Crown glass Flint glass Zirconium Diamond 1.54 1.59 1.75 1.96 2.42 and the refracted ray is the ray in air. In this case, the angle of refraction is greater than the angle of incidence. This is the case of the spoon in the glass of water (®gure 17.9). The refraction of light was known to Ptolemy, who wrote a book on optics in which he discussed the relationship between the incident and refracted rays. It was, however, the Dutch scientist Willebrord van Roijen Snell (1580±1626) who ®rst discovered the correct relationship between the angle of incidence and the angle of refraction and for this reason this relationship is known as Snell's law. Snell's law says that the angle of refraction is in a constant relationship to the angle of incidence. The constant in Snell's law depends on the nature of the two media. If the incident ray is in vacuum or in air (where the speed of light is almost the same as in vacuum), the constant gives the index of refraction, n, of the substance: that is, the ratio of the speed of light in vacuum to that in the substance, or c nˆ v where c is the speed of light in vacuum, equal to 300 000 km/s, and v is the speed of light in the particular medium. The speed of light in water, for example, is 225 000 km/s. The index of refraction of water is then n ˆ 300 000 km=s†= 225 000 km=s† ˆ 1.333. Table 17.1 gives some values of indexes of refraction for different substances. Lenses We are all familiar with the use of lenses as magni®ers in telescopes, microscopes, binoculars and cameras. In a lens, light is focused by refraction. A lens is a piece of transparent material in which the two refracting surfaces are curved. In most cases, 384 Optics Figure 17.11. (a) Parallel rays incident on a convex glass surface converge at one point. (b) Parallel rays incident on a concave glass surface diverge as if they had originated at a single point. the surfaces are segments of spheres. When a light ray enters a transparent medium through a curved surface, the direction of the refracted ray depends on the orientation of the surface. Parallel rays incident on a spherical surface are refracted so that they converge to one point, as seen in ®gure 17.11(a). This type of surface is called convex. Parallel rays refracted by a concave surface are refracted so that they diverge and appear as if they had originated from a single point (®gure 17.11(b)). An incident ray falling on a lens with two convex surfaces so that it crosses the ®rst surface at some point other than the center or the edge of the lens, is refracted toward the normal to the surface at that point. The ray falls on the second spherical surface, passing from glass to air. Since glass has an index of refraction greater than that of air, the ray is refracted at this second surface away from the normal (®gure 17.12). Two rays emanating from the same point on an object placed near a lens fall on the lens at different points and are refracted at slightly different angles. These rays will converge to one point on the other side of the lens. Lenses with spherical surfaces will not, in general, bring other rays emanating from the same point on the object to exactly the same point and the images formed by these lenses are not sharp, a phenomenon known as spherical aberration that designers of optical instruments must avoid. However, if the rays passing through the lens do not make angles greater than 108 with the lens axis, which is the central line perpendicular to the lens, 385 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 17.12. A ray falling on a convex surface of a lens is refracted toward the normal. At the second surface, the ray is refracted away from the normal. sharp images can be obtained with spherical surfaces. Our discussion will be limited to these kinds of rays. Our discussion will also be limited to thin lenses, in which the thickness of the lens is very small compared with the distances to the objects and images from the lens. All rays parallel to the lens axis are refracted so that they converge to one point on the axis (®gure 17.13). This point is called the focal point of the lens and the distance from the center of the lens to the focal point is known as the focal length. Camera lenses are identi®ed by their focal lengths. A 50 mm lens is one with a focal length of 50 mm and is usually the normal lens for a 35 mm camera (one that uses ®lm 35 mm wide). A 28 mm lens or a 35 mm lens is considered a ``wide angle'' lens, and a 135 mm a medium long focus. The focal length of a particular lens depends on the index of refraction of the lens material and Figure 17.13. of the lens. All rays parallel to the lens axis converge to the focal point 386 Optics on the curvatures of the two surfaces. As most of us have realized at one time or another, it does not matter which side of a simple magni®er we use to look at an object; the image we see is magni®ed the same. We conclude that there must be a focal point on both sides of a lens and, since the image formed is the same regardless of which side faces the object, the two focal points must be equidistant from the lens, even if the curvatures of the two sides are different. From our previous discussion, we can deduce simple rules that will aid us in determining the location of the image formed by a lens. . A ray that strikes a lens parallel to the lens axis is refracted to pass through the focal point. . A ray that passes through the focal point is refracted to emerge parallel to the lens axis. . A ray that strikes the lens at the center is undeviated. A lens that converges rays to a single point is called a converging lens. A lens that diverges rays so that they appear to come from a single point on the side of the incident rays is called a diverging lens (®gure 17.14). Our three rules apply to both types of Figure 17.14. (a) A converging lens bends rays to a single point, while a diverging lens (b) bends rays such that they appear to diverge from a single point on the side of the incident rays. 387 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 17.15. Ray diagram used in the location of the image formed by a converging lens. lenses. Optometrists refer to converging lenses as positive lenses and to diverging lenses as negative lenses. Figure 17.15 shows the formation of the image of an arrow placed on the axis of a converging lens. Again, as with the mirror, we select several of the rays coming from the tip of the arrow. We are interested in particular in the three rays outlined above: ray 1, parallel to the axis; ray 2, through the front focus; and ray 3, passing through the lens at the center (called the principal ray). These three rays converge to a point after being refracted by the lens and then diverge, so that they appear to a viewer to have originated at that point. Lenses are used in telescopes, binoculars and other optical instruments to magnify images. The size of the image formed by a particular lens may be larger or smaller than and even equal to the size of the object, depending on the location of the object in relation to the lens. The magni®cation, M, is the ratio of the size of the image to the size of the object. The magni®cation can be found by comparing the triangle formed by the object, the lens axis, and the unde¯ected ray passing through the center of the lens, with the triangle formed by this ray, the image, and the lens axis (®gure 17.16). These two Figure 17.16. The triangles O0 OV and I0 IV are similar triangles. The ratio I 0 I=O0 O must equal the ratio OV=IV. Thus, image size/object size ˆ image distance/object distance. 388 Optics The frontiers of physics: Gradient-index lenses A lens with a spherical surface does not bring other rays from the same point on the object into exactly the same point, as we saw earlier in the chapter. This ``spherical aberration'' produces fuzzy images. Lens designers usually correct for this and other optical aberrations by grinding the lens into an aspherical shape or by adding more lenses to their design. Both solutions have their own problems. Adding more lenses increases the cost, weight, and size of the design. It also makes glare more dif®cult to control. Aspherical lenses are small and light but they are much more expensive to produce. The light rays passing through a spherical lens can be brought into focus at exactly the same point regardless of where they cross the lens if the index of refraction is variable. This design would more closely resemble the way light crosses the lens in human and insect eyes. Although lens designers have attempted for many years to produce such a lens, they found themselves faced with calculations that required sophisticated computer programs. Today's fast supercomputers have made the task possible. Several companies are now producing gradient-index lenses (GRINs) in which the index of refraction changes radially, from center to edge, or axially, from front to back. A GRIN can focus light with an optically ¯at surface or a simple spherical shape. Computers can make the calculations feasible, but the process to produce the actual lenses is still complicated. A common technique is the ion-exchange process in which an ion of a heavy element in the glass is replaced by an ion of a lighter element. The areas where the lighter element is located have a lower index of refraction. With this process, it can take more than a month to have enough ions replaced in the glass. Other companies are working on similar but faster processes. GRIN lenses with a diameter of one millimeter are currently being used in photocopiers, facsimiles, and laser printers. These lenses, shaped like tiny rods and with focal lengths of 15 to 30 millimeters, are arrayed in bundles of 389 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS several hundred and are used as part of the scanning element in these devices. Scientists in France are developing GRIN lenses by creating links between the components of hydrophilic polymers. These links are produced by shining light on the components. The longer the light shines, the greater the number of links and the higher the density of the polymer. Since the index of refraction of the polymer is determined by its density, the researchers can create a gradient index lens made of this polymer, which is used to make contact lenses. Although the technique is not available commercially yet, the scientists hope that this will be feasible soon. triangles are similar triangles and we can write a relationship between the sides forming the right angles that gives us the ratio of image size to object size: Mˆ image size image distance ˆ : object size object distance An image that is ®ve times the distance from the lens as the object will be ®ve times as large as the object. Total internal re¯ection When light passes from a medium with a high index of refraction, such as water, to one with a low index of refraction, like air, the angle of refraction is larger than the angle of incidence. Consider the rays coming from a point on a submerged object (®gure 17.17). A person outside the water would be able to see the rays from the four ®rst locations shown. However, as the angle of incidence is increased, the rays are refracted more and more until, at a certain critical angle, the refracted ray merely skims along the surface. For larger angles of incidence, the ray cannot escape and the light is completely re¯ected, remaining in the water. This phenomenon is called total internal re¯ection. A prism can re¯ect light through a right angle or even back parallel to its initial direction (®gure 17.18). An ordinary mirror 390 Optics Figure 17.17. As the angle of incidence increases, the angle of refraction also increases until, at the critical angle, the refracted ray just skims the surface. At greater angles, the light remains inside the water. This is called total internal re¯ection. can also re¯ect light back to its original direction or at right angles to the initial ray. A mirror, however, even a highly polished one, does not re¯ect all the light incident upon it. A newly-silvered mirror might re¯ect up to 99% of incident light but, unless it is Figure 17.18. A prism re¯ects light at right angles to the original ray and can even return it parallel to the original direction. 391 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS given a special protective coating, after a few days its re¯ectivity drops to about 93% due to oxidation. Total internal re¯ection such as with a prism is, as it says, total; no loss of light occurs. For this reason, designers of optical equipment such as binoculars use prisms where possible, rather than mirrors. Fiber optics The phenomenon of total internal re¯ection, with no loss of light, is the basis for the important area called ®ber optics. In a thin transparent ®ber, light is ``piped'' through a series of total internal re¯ections. If the ®ber is thin enough, the angle of incidence is always greater than the critical angle and the light is transmitted even if the ®ber is bent in any direction as long as sharp corners or kinks are avoided (®gure 17.19). To prevent damage and light losses from abrasion, the ®ber is clad with transparent material having a low refractive index. Optical ®bers can be used to transmit images of objects that are otherwise inaccessible, like the interior of the human body. However, the light rays from different parts of an object would get scrambled by the multiple re¯ections taking place in a large-diameter ®ber. For this reason, individual ®ne ®bers, each transmitting information from a very small part of an object, are collected into a bundle with a lens at the end to form an image on the ®ber bundle. The ®ber bundle is surrounded by a jacket of ®bers that transmit light from a light source to provide Figure 17.19. A light beam can be transmitted through a transparent ®ber by total internal re¯ection, even if the ®ber is bent. 392 Optics illumination of the object. At the receiving end, the image can be viewed directly by means of a lens system or displayed on a television monitor. A colon ®berscope is an example of an instrument that uses ®ber optics to examine the colon without the need for surgery. Medical instruments that use ®ber optics allow physicians to examine knee joints, the bladder, the vocal folds, the stomach, a fetus in the uterus, and even heart valves and major blood vessels. Fibers that work by internal re¯ection are called multimode ®bers. If the diameter of the ®ber is reduced to a few micrometers the mode of propagation changes. The light is no longer re¯ected internally, but travels down the ®ber in what is in effect a single ray. This type of ®ber is called a single-mode ®ber. By using infrared laser light (which has a single frequency) and special glass, the light can travel 100 km or more before a repeater ampli®er is needed, and because of its very high frequency, a single ®ber can carry thousands of telephone conversations, several television signals, and computer data, simultaneously. Optical instruments Optical instruments, from a simple magni®er to the space telescope, enhance our sense of vision and allow us to study nature from a different perspective. Since the sixteenth century when the telescope and the microscope were invented (reportedly in the Netherlands), we have been able to look farther into the universe in both directions: into the very small world of the particles that are the stuff of matter, and out toward the far reaches of the universe, in the realm of the galaxies. In this last section of this chapter we will look at some examples of optical instruments. The camera Although modern cameras can be fairly complicated instruments, the basic optical principles behind their construction are fairly simple. A pinhole camera consists of a closed box with a single pinhole through which light can enter, and uses no lenses or mirrors. Light rays from an object in front of the pinhole enter the box, 393 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 17.20. A pinhole camera produces an image on the wall opposite the hole by restricting the rays from each point on the object into the light-tight box. producing an inverted image on the wall opposite the hole (®gure 17.20). Although it is possible to produce good photographs with this simple device, there is no provision to control the amount of light that strikes the ®lm other than by enlarging the hole, and this produces a blurred image because every point on the object forms an image that is a disk the size of the pinhole. To let enough light through the hole so that the ®lm is fully exposed, long exposure times are required. A pinhole camera is unsuitable for moving objects. The simplest modern camera uses a single converging lens in front of a larger hole; this allows a great deal more light into the box (®gure 17.21). Light rays from a distant object enter the camera parallel to the lens axis and are focused at the focal point of the lens. Rays from a nearby object are focused farther back. Moving the lens toward or away from the ®lm plane allows for focusing of objects at different distances from the camera. The amount of light energy that the ®lm receives can be controlled by opening or closing the aperture of the hole with an Figure 17.21. A simple camera consists of a converging lens that can be moved closer to or away from the ®lm plane, a variable aperture and a shutter. 394 Optics iris diaphragm, a ring of metal leaves, and by changing the length of time light is allowed to enter the camera with a shutter, a mechanical device which may be a curtain in front of the ®lm (a focalplane shutter) or a set of hinged leaves in between the lens element (an intra-lens shutter). Exposure durations range from around 1=8000 s to several minutes. Camera manufacturers calibrate the diaphragm in units called f-stops, de®ned as the ratio of the focal length of the lens f †, to the diameter of the aperture (D) allowed by the diaphragm, or f -stop ˆ f : D Since the amount of light reaching the lens is proportional to the area of the aperture and thus to the square of the diameter D, changing the exposure by a factor of 2 corresponds to an increase by a p factor of 2 in the diameter. Camera diaphragms have scales p marked with f-stops related by a factor of 2, i.e. f =1:4; f =2; f =2:8; f =4; f =5:6; f =8; f =11; f =16; f =22: The diameter of an f/1.4 aperture, for example, is twice the diameter of an f/2.8 aperture and therefore lets in four times as much light. If a given lens has a maximum aperture of f/2.8, you could achieve the same results as with an f/1.4 aperture by increasing the exposure time by a factor of 4, so that if the camera meter calls for 1/500 second at f/1.4 the exposure time for f/2.8 should be four times 1/500 s or 1/125 s.This relationship is called the law of reciprocity. Stated formally, it says that exposure ˆ intensity  duration: The telescope The telescope was invented at the turn of the seventeenth century, probably by a lens maker in Holland. In 1609, the Dutch patent of®ce turned down a patent application for a telescope from Hans Lipperschey, a Dutch lens maker, because such an instrument was already common knowledge. Word of that invention had reached Galileo that same year. Within six months, Galileo had constructed a telescope of his own with a magnifying power of 32, which he immediately turned to the heavens 395 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 17.22. Galileo demonstrates his telescope before the Venetian Senate in 1609. (Alinari/Art Resource, NY.) (®gure 17.22). He discovered that the moon had mountains, and that the sun had spots. Studying the evolution of the sunspots, Galileo was able to show that the sun rotated on its axis, completing one rotation in twenty-seven days. Galileo also discovered that the planet Jupiter had four large moons and worked out their periods of revolution around the planet. These moons, Io, Europa, Ganymede and Callisto, are known today as the Galilean satellites of Jupiter. With his telescopes, Galileo also discovered that Venus had phases like the moon, evidence that Venus revolved around the sun, shining by re¯ected sunlight. Galileo published his discoveries in Sidereus Nuncius (``The Starry Messenger''). A simple telescope such as Galileo's original telescope has two lenses, the eyepiece and the objective. In this type of telescope, known as a Galilean telescope, the eyepiece is a diverging lens and the objective is a converging lens (®gure 17.23(a)). A modi®cation of this design, introduced by Johannes Kepler shortly after he obtained one of Galileo's own designs, uses a converging lens as eyepiece (®gure 17.23(b)). These telescopes, in which lenses are used to form an image, are known as refractors. Light rays from a distant object reach the objective essentially parallel to each other. 396 Optics Figure 17.23. (a) Galilean telescope. Parallel rays from the object are focused at the focal point of the objective. These rays are intercepted by the eyepiece where they are refracted parallel. (b) In a Keplerian telescope, the eyepiece is a converging lens and the image is inverted. These rays are focused at the focal point of the objective and then diverge, appearing to a viewer to originate there. These diverging rays are intercepted by the eyepiece. The eyepiece is placed so that its focal point coincides with the focal point of the objective; the rays diverging from this point are refracted by the eyepiece parallel to each other. Since eyepieces are small lenses with diameters of about 1 cm or less, the viewer looking into the eyepiece sees parallel rays coming from the image. In the Galilean telescope, the diverging lens used as eyepiece is placed between the objective and its focal point (®gure 17.23(a)), whereas in Kepler's design, the converging lens is placed at the other side (®gure 17.23(b)). Kepler's design produces an inverted image. In 1663, James Gregory, a Scottish mathematician and astronomer, published the design of a telescope with a concave mirror as objective. His attempt to have it built ended in failure mainly because of the dif®culty in making the mirror. In 1668, Isaac Newton designed and built a similar telescope with a concave mirror 2.5-cm in diameter as objective (®gure 17.24). Although the refracting telescope is what most people have in mind when they hear the word, all of the large research telescopes in the world are re¯ectors, as these telescopes are called. Light rays from the distant object arrive at the mirror parallel to each other, where they are re¯ected back and focused at the focal point of the mirror. As with refractors, the eyepiece is placed so 397 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 17.24. Newton's ®rst telescope. (By permission of the President and Council of the Royal Society.) Figure 17.25. Re¯ector telescope arrangements: (a) prime focus, (b) Newtonian focus, (c) Cassegrain focus. 398 Optics that its focal point coincides with the focal point of the objective (®gure 17.25(a)). Notice that the eyepiece blocks some of the incoming light. For very large telescopes, like the 200-inch Hale telescope at Mount Palomar (®gure 17.26), this blocking does not present much of a problem. This arrangement of eyepiece and objective is called the prime focus. For smaller re¯ectors, several other arrangements have been introduced since its invention. Newton himself used the arrangement shown in ®gure 17.25(b), which is properly called Newtonian. Light rays re¯ected from the mirror are intercepted by a small plane mirror placed diagonally in front of the objective. The light rays are diverted to the eyepiece on the side. This arrangement is called the Newtonian focus. A popular design both for research telescopes and amateur use is the Cassegrain system, where the light rays are intercepted by a small convex mirror that sends the rays back to the eyepiece through a small circular hole made in the objective (®gure 17.25(c)). This increases the effective focal length of the system. The human eye The human eye is a marvelous optical instrument, the result of a remarkable evolutionary process. The eye is sensitive to wavelengths from 350 nm to 750 nm, which correspond to the most intense wavelengths in sunlight. This is clearly not a coincidence but the response of evolution to the existing conditions. Had the range of intensities of sunlight been different, the eye would no doubt have evolved to be sensitive to a different range of wavelengths. The eye is a nearly spherical gelatinous mass about 3 centimeters in diameter, slightly ¯attened from front to back, and surrounded by a tough membrane, the sclera, where the muscles that control the movements of the eye are attached. Figure 17.27 is a simpli®ed diagram of the human eye. Light enters the eye through the cornea, a transparent membrane that acts as a converging lens with a focal length of about 2.4 cm. Light rays pass through the aqueous humor, a transparent liquid that ®lls the space between the cornea and the lens, another converging lens with a variable focal length that changes from about 4 cm to 399 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 17.26. (a) Detail of the 200-inch Hale telescope at Mount Palomar. (b) Prime focus of the Hale. (Courtesy Palomar Observatory.) 400 Optics Figure 17.27. The human eye. about 5 cm. The lens, a jellylike substance hard at the center and softer toward the edges, contracts and bulges under the action of the ciliary muscles that surround it and keep it under tension. When the ciliary muscles relax, the lens assumes a thicker shape, decreasing its radius of curvature which in turn decreases the focal length. Nearby objects are then brought into focus on the retina. When the eye looks at a distant object, the ciliary muscles tension and the lens takes on a ¯atter shape, increasing the radius of curvature and consequently the focal length, and bringing the distant object to a focus on the retina. This process is called accommodation. On their way to the lens, light rays pass through the pupil. The size of the pupil is controlled by the iris, a muscular ring behind the cornea that acts like the iris diaphragm in a camera lens, adjusting the amount of light that enters the eye. The iris is the colored part of the eye. The inner chamber behind the lens is ®lled with a thin gelatinous substance called the vitreous body. This inner surface of the eyeball is covered with the millions of photoreceptor or light-sensitive cells that form the retina. There are two kinds of photoreceptor cells, rods and cones. The cones are the colorsensing cells of the retina and the rods, although not sensitive to color, are about 1000 times more sensitive to light and are therefore important for low-light vision. There are three kinds of cone cells, each responding differently to light from a colored object due to the presence of light-absorbing proteins 401 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS sensitive to wavelengths in the red, green or blue part of the spectrum. Although the eye is capable of detecting light rays with incident angles up to 2108, vision is sharpest in a small central region about 0.25 mm in diameter called the fovea, which contains only cones, with an average separation of about 1 mm. As we read a book or follow a moving object, the eye muscles move the eyeball so that light rays from the object fall on the fovea. We can see the rest of the object and our surroundings in front of us, but only with somewhat reduced resolution. A normal eye can bring into focus objects at distances ranging from a few centimeters to in®nity. The closest the eye can focus is called the near point, and this distance depends on the elasticity of the lens. This elasticity diminishes with age. Normally, at age 10 the near point is about 7 cm and this increases to about 10 cm at age 20, 15 cm at age 30, 25 cm at age 40, 50 cm at age 50 and over 2 m at age 60. By the late forties or early ®fties, a person's arms are usually shorter than his near point and a visit to the optician is recommended. People who are nearsighted are unable to see distant objects clearly. This condition, called myopia, is due either to an eye that is longer than normal or to a cornea that is curved too much. Rays from a distant object are focused in front of the retina. Nearby objects are focused on the retina. Nearsightedness is corrected by a diverging lens (®gure 17.28(a)). Figure 17.28. (a) Nearsightedness can be corrected with a diverging lens. (b) Farsightedness is corrected with a converging lens. 402 Optics The frontiers of physics: Arti®cial vision Researchers from North Carolina State University, the University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill, and Johns Hopkins University have been working on the development of an implantable arti®cial retina component chip that might restore sight to people suffering from retinal disorders. The chip, which is only 2 millimeters square and less than 0.02 millimeter thick, is to be implanted on the retinal surface inside the eye cavity. The rods and cones in the eyes of people suffering from retinosis pigmentosa or macular degeneration are defective, but the ganglion cells that line the retina are relatively intact. The new retinal chip generates electric currents that stimulate these cells which then transmit the signal to the brain, in theory enabling the patient to see. The chip is powered by an external laser, which is in turn powered by a tiny battery pack. The laser transmits the images captured by a miniature video camera to the photosensors in the chip. The laser-battery pack-video camera assembly can be mounted on regular eyeglasses. 403 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS In the farsighted person, the eye is too short or the cornea insuf®ciently curved. People with this condition, called hyperopia, can see distant objects clearly but nearby objects appear blurred because the rays are focused behind the retina. This defect can be corrected with a converging lens (®gure 17.28(b)). 404 18 THE NATURE OF LIGHT The wave nature of light As we learned in chapter 7, light shows both particle and wave behavior. We have arrived at this conclusion through the attempts of twentieth century physicists to understand the nature of matter. Some of the Greek philosophers believed that light consisted of particles that traveled in straight lines at high speeds and stimulated the sense of vision as they entered the eye. At the end of the ®fteenth century, Leonardo da Vinci speculated that light was a wave because of the similarity between the re¯ection of light and the echo of a sound. In the seventeenth century, the Dutch physicist Christiaan Huyghens also felt that light was a wave. However, his contemporary Isaac Newton thought that light was composed of particles. Newton's ``corpuscular theory'' prevailed for about two hundred years, although by the eighteenth century many optical effects had been explained in terms of the properties of waves. In the early nineteenth century, Thomas Young in England and Augustin Jean Fresnel in France demonstrated in a series of landmark experiments that light showed interference and diffraction, phenomena characteristic of waves. In Scotland, Maxwell theorized that light was the propagation of oscillating electric and magnetic ®elds through space: an electromagnetic wave. Twentieth century physicists have shown that both views are valid; that light has characteristics of particles and of waves. In this chapter, we will study the fundamentals of the wave theory of light. 405 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS The speed of light An electric charge that is changing gives rise to a changing magnetic ®eld, as we learned in chapter 14. This is Maxwell's fourth equation. Faraday's Law, which became Maxwell's third equation, tells us that this changing magnetic ®eld in turn creates a changing electric ®eld. These changing magnetic and electric ®elds are inseparable: the changing magnetic ®eld sustains the electric ®eld, and the changing electric ®eld sustains the magnetic ®eld. Maxwell realized that these changing ®elds would sustain one another even in regions where there are no electric charges to accelerate, as in free space. These mutually sustaining ®elds, he predicted, propagate through space as an electromagnetic wave. Maxwell proceeded to calculate the speed at which these electromagnetic waves travel through space. He showed that this speed was equal to the ratio of the electric and magnetic ®eld strengths at any point in space: cˆ E : B From AmpeÁre's law, he was able to show that this speed is equal to the square root of the ratio of the electric and magnetic force constants: s kE cˆ : kM When Maxwell substituted the then known values of these two constants he found that the speed of propagation of electromagnetic waves was the same as the experimentally determined values of the speed of light. He wrote, The velocity of transverse undulations in our hypothetical medium, calculated from the electromagnetic experiments of M M Kohlrauch and Weber, agrees so exactly with the velocity of light calculated from the optical experiments of M Fizeau, that we can scarcely avoid the inference that light consists in the transverse undulations of the same medium . . . 406 The Nature of Light Inserting up-to-date values of kE and kM into Maxwell's expression for the speed of electromagnetic waves, we ®nd s 9  109 Nm2 =C2 ˆ 3  108 m=s: cˆ 1  10ÿ7 Tm=A This is the speed of light in empty space, one of the fundamental constants in nature. With the values known at the time for the two constants, Maxwell obtained 2:88  108 m/s. In his Two New Sciences, Galileo describes an experiment by which two persons on distant hills ¯ashing lanterns can measure the speed of light. Although he concluded that the speed of light, contrary to what we might think from everyday experiences, is not in®nite, he was unable to obtain a value for it. His contemporary Descartes asserted that the speed of light must be in®nite. The Danish astronomer Olaus RoÈmer experimentally showed that the speed of light is ®nite in 1676 by carefully measuring the times at which the Galilean satellites of Jupiter emerged from the shadow of the planet. The French astronomer Cassini had accurately measured the times of revolution of Jupiter's four known satellites so that the precise moment when a satellite was to be eclipsed by Jupiter could be calculated. Before the Academy of Sciences in Paris, RoÈmer announced that one of Jupiter's satellites, which he had calculated should be eclipsed by Jupiter on November 9, 1676 at 5:25:45, was going to be exactly ten minutes late. Careful measurements by the skeptical astronomers of the Royal Observatory con®rmed that the eclipse of the satellite had occurred at 5:35:45, in accordance with RoÈmer's prediction. A few weeks later RoÈmer explained to the Academy that when the earth was closer to Jupiter in its orbit, the satellites went behind Jupiter earlier than when the earth was farther away from Jupiter. He correctly deduced that the reason for this discrepancy was that the speed of light was ®nite. When the earth was farthest away from Jupiter, the eclipses were delayed because it took light 22 minutes to cross the earth's orbit (®gure 18.1). RoÈmer's friend, Christiaan Huyghens, used his data and his estimate of the diameter of the earth's orbit to obtain the ®rst calculation of the speed of light. He obtained a value (in modern units) of 227,000 km/s, about 24% lower than modern values. The main reason for the error was that RoÈmer's measurement of 22 minutes 407 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 18.1. RoÈmer's method to determine the speed of light. The Galilean satellites of Jupiter take longer to move behind the planet when the earth is moving away from Jupiter because the light re¯ected by the satellite takes longer to reach the earth. for light to cross the earth's orbit is too large; it is actually 16 minutes approximately. In 1729, the English astronomer James Bradley, during an attempt to detect stellar parallax, discovered the phenomenon of stellar aberration, which allowed him to obtain a second method of estimating the speed of light. At the time of publication of Newton's Principia, the motion of the Earth was generally accepted but had not been experimentally measured. For about 150 years after the Principia, a number of scientists tried to detect stellar parallaxes with the aid of telescopes. Stellar parallax, as we might recall from chapter 6, is the apparent shift in the position of a star due to the revolution of the Earth around the Sun. With this purpose in mind, Bradley mounted a vertical telescope in his chimney and measured the positions of the stars at different times of the year. Bradley did detect a tiny displacement through the year of 20.5 seconds of arc in either direction for every star. Since stars are at different distances from the Earth, their parallaxes should all be different. Therefore, this displacement could not be due to stellar parallax. What was it, then? For about a year Bradley struggled with the problem. One day in 1728, while riding a boat on the Thames River, he noticed that the wind vane on the mast shifted direction whenever the boat put 408 The Nature of Light about. He realized immediately that the apparent shift in the position of every star by 20.5 seconds of arc was due to the velocity of the Earth in its orbital motion about the Sun. This is the same phenomenon that makes us tilt our umbrellas at an angle when we walk in the rain, even if the rain falls vertically. To observe starlight from the moving Earth, we must angle the telescope very slightly in the direction in which the Earth is moving which makes the star appear in a slightly different position at different times of the year (®gure 18.2(a)). This phenomenon is known as stellar aberration. Bradley realized that he could determine the speed of light from the angle of de¯ection and the velocity of the Earth in its orbit (®gure 18.2(b)). He obtained a value of 304 000 km/s. Figure 18.2. (a) The apparent shift in the position of a star as a result of the earth's orbital motion is known a stellar aberration. (b) By measuring the angle at which a telescope must be tilted the speed of light can be computed. 409 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 18.3. Fizeau's experiment to measure the speed of light. One hundred and twenty years later, in 1849, the French physicist Armand Hippolyte Louis Fizeau re®ned Galileo's method of ¯ashing lights to measure the speed of light. Galileo's method of ¯ashing lights from two adjacent hills was unsuccessful because, as we know today, the time it takes light to travel between the hills is very much shorter than the human re¯ex time to open and close the shutters on the lanterns. Fizeau decided to use a rapidly turning toothed wheel on one hilltop in Paris and a mirror on a hill 5.2 miles away. A source of light behind the wheel sent a beam of light between two adjacent teeth of the wheel that was re¯ected back along the same path by the mirror (®gure 18.3). If the wheel spun fast enough, the re¯ected light would pass through the next gap between the teeth. Knowing the angular frequency of rotation of the wheel in this case provided the time required for the light beam to travel the distance of 10.4 miles. Fizeau obtained a value for the speed of light of 313 300 km/s. Shortly after this, another French scientist, Jean Bernard LeÂon Foucault, improved upon his friend Fizeau's method by replacing the toothed wheel by a rotating mirror. He used his new method to measure the speed of light in water and showed that it was less than in air. Foucault presented these results as his doctoral thesis. The American physicist A A Michelson, between 1878 and 1930, used a similar technique to measure the speed of light with great accuracy. In 1882, he reported a value of 299 853 km/s which remained the best available until his 1926 value of 299 796  4 km/s, which in turn remained unchallenged until 1950. 410 The Nature of Light The electromagnetic spectrum Maxwell made two predictions from his theory. The ®rst prediction was that there should be electromagnetic waves of many different frequencies all propagating through space at the speed of light. The second prediction was that electromagnetic waves exert a pressure on any surface that re¯ects or absorbs them. Unfortunately, Maxwell did not live to see his predictions veri®ed, for he died of cancer at the early age of 48. Eight years after Maxwell's death, the German physicist Heinrich Hertz used a spark-gap apparatus in which electric charge was made to oscillate back and forth, generating electromagnetic waves for the ®rst time, thus con®rming the ®rst of Maxwell's predictions. Hertz studied physics at the University of Berlin, where he obtained his PhD in 1880 at the age of 23. In 1883 Hertz devoted himself to the study of Maxwell's theory of electromagnetism and two years later started his landmark experiments. He ®rst made an induction coil that terminated at both ends in small metal balls separated by a small gap (®gure 18.4). The current in the primary coil A, which was connected to a battery, could be started and stopped by means of a switch. Opening and closing the switch produced a rapidly changing magnetic ®eld in the iron core which, according to Faraday's law, induces a changing current in coil B. If the voltage was high enough, a spark would jump between the two balls. When an adjacent wire was bent so that its ends were also separated by a small gap, a spark would also jump between its two ends. Figure 18.4. Hertz's experiment to produce and detect electromagnetic waves. 411 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Hertz realized that each spark was actually a series of many sparks jumping back and forth between the two ends of the wire, setting changing electric and magnetic ®elds in the gap which, according to Maxwell's theory, propagated through space as an electromagnetic wave. When this wave reached the gap in the other wire, the electric ®eld oscillating there produced sparks jumping back and forth as in the induction coil and this was seen as a single large spark. This second gap was a detector of electromagnetic waves. By 1888 Hertz had measured the speed of the electromagnetic waves that he had generated with his spark-gap apparatus, obtaining a value equal to the speed of light, just as Maxwell had predicted. Maxwell's second prediction, that electromagnetic waves exert pressure on any surface, was con®rmed in 1899 by the Russian physicist P N Lebedev using very light mirrors in a vacuum. The electromagnetic waves generated by Hertz had a wavelength of about 1 m and were what we now call radio waves. The wavelengths of visible light had been measured during the ®rst years of the nineteenth century, before the development of Maxwell's theory. Electromagnetic waves cover a wide range of wavelengths. The full range of the electromagnetic spectrum is shown in ®gure 18.5. Figure 18.5. The electromagnetic spectrum. 412 The Nature of Light Color Electromagnetic waves with wavelengths from about 4  10ÿ7 m to about 7  10ÿ7 m constitute the visible part of the electromagnetic spectrum. We classify the different regions of the visible part of the spectrum by the names of colors. Our perception of color, however, is different from physical color; that is, from the in®nite possible number of different electromagnetic waves with frequencies between 400 nm and 700 nm. These limits, by the way, are somewhat vague. The limits of the visible part of the spectrum are not well-de®ned, since the sensitivity of the eye at the two ends does not stop abruptly. At 430 nm and at 690 nm, for example, the eye sensitivity has fallen to about 1% of its maximum value. If the light intensity is high enough we can see at wavelengths beyond these limits. The present understanding of physical color stems from the beautiful experiments of Isaac Newton. It was already known in Newton's time that a beam of light passed through a prism produced a splash of the colors of the rainbow; violet, blue, green, yellow, orange and red. This phenomenon was commonplace even at the time of Aristotle. It was Newton, however, who provided the correct explanation for the phenomenon. In his now famous letter to Henry Oldenburg, the ®rst secretary of the Royal Society, of February 6, 1672, Newton wrote: . . . in the beginning of the Year 1666 (at which time I applied myself to the grinding of optic glasses of other ®gures than spherical) I procured me a Triangular glass-Prisme, to try therewith the celebrated Phaenomena of Colours. And in order theroto having darkened my chamber, and made a small hole in my window-shuts, to let in a convenient quantity of the Suns light, I placed my Prisme at its entrance, that it might be thereby refracted to the opposite wall. It was at ®rst very pleasing divertisement, to view the vivid and intense colours produced thereby; but after a while applying my self to consider them more circumspectly, I became surprised to see them in an oblong form; which according to the received laws of Refraction, I expected should have been circular. And I saw . . . that the light, tending to [one] end of the Image, did suffer a Refraction considerably greater than the light tending to the other. And so the true cause of the length of that Image was detected to be no other, then that Light consists of Rays differently 413 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS refrangible, which, according to their degrees of refrangibility, transmitted towards divers[e] parts of the wall. This letter was printed in the Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society for February 19, 1671±72, and became Newton's ®rst published scienti®c paper. Before Newton provided the ``true cause of the length of the image'' and of the splash of colors produced by the prism, the accepted idea was that white light is darkened more at the thick end of the prism, so it becomes blue; is darkened less where the glass is not as thick, so it becomes green; and ®nally is darkened the least where it is closest to the thin end of the prism, so it becomes red. But this ``explanation'' did not explain what Newton immediately noticed, that the beam coming from a circular hole and thus having a circular cross section, would produce an oblong beam. Although this phenomenon had most certainly been noticed before Newton, it took the mind of the genius to stop and ask why this was so; the mind of a young man of twenty-three. Seeking the answer, Newton changed the size of the hole, the location of the prism, and the place where the beam hit the prism. The spectrum ± a name he introduced for such a pattern of colors ± did not change. To test his idea that light was not modi®ed by passing it through a prism, that it is physically separated into the different colors, Newton placed a prism near the hole in a shutter of his darkened room. Placing a second prism a few yards from the ®rst, he noticed that blue light, on passing through the second prism, was refracted more than red light, as was the case in the ®rst prism. But, more important, these colors were not affected by the second prism: ``the purely Red rays refracted by the second Prisme made no other colours but Red & the purely blew ones no other colours but blew ones.'' The crucial experiment that would leave no doubt in Newton's mind that his ideas were correct, came a few years later. In his letter to Oldenburg he wrote: The gradual removal of these suspicions at length led me to the Experimentum Crucis, which was this: I took two boards [BC, DE in ®gure 18.6], and placed one of them close behind the Prism at the window, so that the light might pass through a small hole, made in it for that purpose, and fall on the other board, which I placed at about 12 foot distance, having ®rst made a small hole in it also, for some of 414 The Nature of Light Figure 18.6. The experimentum crucis. From Newton's diagram in the Lectiones opticae. that Incident light to pass through. Then I placed another Prisme behind this second board, so that the light, trajected through both the boards, might pass through that also, and be again refracted before it arrived at the wall. This done, I took much as to make the several parts or the Image, cast on the second board, successively pass through the hole in it, that I might observe to what places on the wall the second Prisme would refract them. And I saw by the variation of those places, that the light, tending to that end of the Image, towards which the refraction of the ®rst Prisme was made, did in the second Prisme suffer a Refraction considerably greater than the light tending to the other end. And so the true cause of the length of that Image was detected to be no other, than that Light consists of Rays differently refrangible, which, without any respect to a difference in their incidence, were, according to their degrees of refrangibility, transmitted toward divers[e] parts of the wall. Newton demonstrated with his experimentum crucis that light consists of rays differently refracted which are transmitted to different parts of the wall. ``When any one sort of Rays hath been well parted from those of other kinds,'' he further wrote, ``it hath afterwards obstinately retained its colour, notwithstanding my utmost endeavours to change it.'' Thus, if light were modi®ed by the prism, the second prism would also modify light, producing additional colors. Newton proved that once the colors were separated in the ®rst prism by refraction, no further separation was possible. This was the crucial experiment. Newton did not stop there, however. He reversed the process to prove that the colors of the spectrum could be recombined into white light. This he did ®rst by adding a third prism in such a way 415 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS as to have their spectra overlapping. They combined to form white. In 1669, the year Newton assumed the Lucasian Professorship, he repeated the experiment with a single prism and a converging lens. The spreading beam of colors struck the lens which he had placed a meter and a half from the prism, converging into a small patch of white light on the other side of the lens. The spectrum reappeared beyond this point, as the light rays diverged. In a letter to the Royal Society, shortly after he was elected a Fellow in 1672, Newton wrote I have refracted it with Prismes, and re¯ected with it Bodies which in Day-light were of other colours; I have intercepted it with the coloured ®lm of Air interceding two compressed plates of glass; transmitted it through coloured Mediums, and through Mediums irradiated with other sorts of Rays, and diversly terminated it; and yet could never produce any new colour out of it. But the most surprising, and wonderful composition was that of Whiteness. There is no one sort of Rays which alone can exhibit this. Tis ever compounded, and to its composition are requisite all the aforesaid primary Colours, mixed in due proportion. I have often with Admiration beheld, that all the Colours of the Prisme being made to converge, and thereby to be again mixed, reproduced light, intirily and perfectly white. Hence therefore it comes to pass, that Whiteness is the usual colour of Light; for, Light is a confused aggregate of Rays indued with all sorts of Colours, as they are promiscuously darted from the various parts of luminous bodies. We have learned with Newton that a beam of natural white light is composed of pure colors, which cannot be broken down any further. The color of these pure beams is a fundamental property. Pure colors are then the simple components from which light is made. How many pure colors are there? Since a beam of white natural light can be refracted through an in®nite number of angles, and each one of these refractions corresponds to a pure color, the number of possible pure colors is in®nite. As we saw in chapter 17, the human eye contains three kinds of cone cells which are sensitive to colored light due to the presence of three types of light-absorbing molecules that change shape when they interact with light of wavelengths in the red, green or blue region of the spectrum. Thus, all the sensory colors can be reproduced by the appropriate combination of 416 The Nature of Light these three pure colors. Of the in®nite possible physical colors that may enter the eye, we sense only three different things. Many different combinations of physical colors may give rise to the same sensation, and we interpret this to be the same color. We can begin to see the limitations of the human eye. If the eye had more types of light-absorbing molecules, we would be able to extract more visual information from nature. We have overcome this limitation, in part, by designing and building instruments that enhance our vision. Spectra: The signature of atoms Light passed through a prism, Newton taught us, is separated into its component colors. In analogy with the seven notes in music, Newton claimed the spectrum of white natural light contained seven colors ± red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, violet. He saw the spectrum as a continuous band of colors. In 1752, the Scottish physicist Thomas Melvill observed that the spectrum of a colorless alcohol ¯ame to which a volatile substance was added was not a continuous band of colors but rather a discrete set of colored lines. In 1802, the English scientist William Wollaston observed the solar spectrum with the aid of a small telescope and discovered that dark lines crossed the otherwise continuous band of colors. He thought that these lines were the boundaries between the different colors and did not pursue the matter. In 1814, the German physicist and optician Joseph von FraunhoÈfer, while testing prisms made with a special glass he was studying, observed Wollaston's dark lines. He found 576 dark lines in the solar spectrum and measured the positions of the 324 most prominent ones, assigning letters of the alphabet from A to K to the more conspicuous lines. We still refer to some of the lines of the solar spectrum by the letters used by FraunhoÈfer. Later, FraunhoÈfer passed the light from a star through a prism by placing it at the focal point of a telescope. He observed that the star's spectrum also showed dark lines, but these were at different locations from those in the solar spectrum. He noticed that the position of many of these lines corresponded to the colored lines 417 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 18.7. Kirchhoff's experiment. (a) A dark-line spectrum is observed by analyzing a beam of white light after it has passed through a gas. (b) A bright-line spectrum is seen when the prism is placed to the side of the container with the glowing gas. of the discrete ¯ame spectrum discovered by Melvill. He suspected that there might be a connection but his early death at the age of 39 prevented him from ®nding it. It was left for the German physicist Gustav Kirchhoff, some 50 years later, to ®nd the connection. Kirchhoff was able to actually produce dark lines in his laboratory by passing a beam of white light through a glass container with gas and analyzing this light with a prism (®gure 18.7(a)). Kirchhoff then placed the prism to the side of the glass container to observe the glowing gas from a direction perpendicular to the beam of incident white light (®gure 18.7(b)). He saw a set of colored lines, like the one seen by Melvill. More interesting was his discovery that the positions of the dark lines corresponded to the positions of the bright colored lines in the spectrum seen on the side. Different gases produced different sets of dark and bright lines. Kirchhoff correctly interpreted this phenomenon by saying that the gas absorbed certain wavelengths 418 The Nature of Light from the incoming white light. These absorbed wavelengths appeared as dark lines in the front spectrum. The spectrum crisscrossed with dark lines, like the solar spectrum, came to be known as a dark-line or absorption spectrum, whereas the spectrum of bright colored lines is called a bright-line or emission spectrum. Kirchhoff found that each particular compound when in gaseous form produces its own characteristic spectrum. The emission spectrum of sodium shows two bright yellow lines very close to each other and this spectrum is different from the beautiful set of red, orange and yellow lines of neon or from the red and blue lines of atomic hydrogen. Each element has its own unique spectrum, the signature of its atoms. The presence of a particular set of dark or bright lines characteristic of a certain element ± its emission or absorption spectrum ± is evidence of the existence of that element. Thus the spectrum of the Sun tells us of the existence of certain elements in the atmosphere of the Sun and the spectra of stars give us information about their composition. The most profound conclusion that has been drawn from this study is that the Sun and stars are made of the same stuff as the Earth. In 1859 Kirchhoff provided a simple explanation of these phenomena. This explanation has been formulated as Kirchhoff's three laws of spectral analysis: . A heated solid or liquid emits light of all wavelengths producing a continuous spectrum. . A thin luminous gas emits an emission spectrum. . White natural light passing through a thin gas produces an absorption spectrum. It was, however, Bohr's theory of the atom that provided a more complete explanation for these phenomena. In 1913 Niels Bohr explained that the electrons in an atom occupy certain allowed orbits about the nucleus. As we learned in chapter 7, Bohr's theory says that when an electron drops from a higher allowed orbit to a lower one, thereby losing energy, the atom containing the electron emits light which carries off the lost energy. Since there are only certain allowed orbits, only certain electronic transitions between those orbits take place. Thus the discrete spectrum of hydrogen, for example, with its vivid red, bluegreen and blue lines, can be explained. When a beam of white 419 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS light shines on a container with thin or rare®ed hydrogen gas, a number of the photons that make up the beam of light will have energies that exactly match the energy difference between the lowest orbit or ground state and a particular higher orbit or excited state of the hydrogen atom. Some of these photons are absorbed by hydrogen atoms in the gas leaving them in excited states. These absorbed photons are therefore removed from the beam of white light and when we analyze this beam with a prism, the frequencies corresponding to those photons will not be there; these are the dark lines in the absorption spectrum. The billions of hydrogen atoms left in excited states are unstable and eventually their electrons make a transition to a lower energy state, emitting photons with exactly the same frequencies as the photons absorbed. These emissions are what we see as one of the characteristic hydrogen lines. A red line appears when the electron makes a transition from the third orbit to the second; a blue-green line when there is a transition from the fourth to the second orbit. Notice that we have so far considered a thin or rare®ed gas. This is because in a thin gas, the atoms making transitions to lower energy states do not interact with each other. When the gas is denser, however, some atoms begin to interact with each other while in the process of emitting light. This interaction slightly changes the energy levels of the colliding atoms. Whereas in the thin gas, where the atoms do not interact while making a transition, the energy levels of all the atoms are exactly the same and all the transitions between any two particular levels have the same energy and consequently the same frequency (recall that E ˆ hf ), in the denser gas some of these transitions are slightly different in energy and therefore in frequency. Because this difference is small, the lines end up very close to each other and the overall effect is the thickening of the line. In a denser gas, the collisions increase and the lines become thicker. If the denser gas is also at a high temperature, as in the interior of the Sun, its atoms are moving with higher speeds. In this case, in addition to the increase in the number of collisions due to the higher kinetic energies of the atoms, there is a widening of the spectral lines due to the Doppler effect. The frequency of an emitting atom that happens to be moving away from us will be decreased slightly, whereas that of an atom moving in our direction will be increased. 420 The Nature of Light In the interior of the Sun, both effects widen the lines so much that they actually run into each other, thus producing a continuous spectrum. It is only when these photons reach the outer cooler layers of the sun that they interact with the atoms there producing the dark lines characteristic of the Sun's spectrum (®gure 18.8 (color plate)). In a solid, the energy levels of the atoms that make up the solid are modi®ed into energy bands due to the proximity of billions of other atoms (chapter 13). For this reason a solid has a continuous spectrum. In the case of a crystal, where there are some constant energy levels, the spectrum will have some features. The Bohr model of the atom works very well for the hydrogen-like atoms; that is, for the hydrogen atom and for other ionized atoms with one electron in their orbits. It does not work well for multi-electron atoms. It also raises many new questions for which it does not provide an answer. What causes an electron to jump down to a lower energy state, emitting light in the process? Why are there allowed orbits? In what direction is light emitted when an electron makes a transition to a lower energy state? These questions worried Einstein and other physicists. Bohr himself, in an attempt to explain the behavior of the atom with the classical theory of electromagnetism, wrote a paper in which he proposed to abandon the conservation of energy and momentum ± the sacrosanct laws of physics ± for atomic processes. Although at the time of the publication of this paper (1924) there was no evidence that these laws were valid at the atomic level, it soon came. In 1925, Arthur H Compton and A W Simon proved that energy and momentum were conserved at the level of atoms. In July 1925 Bohr wrote: ``One must be prepared for the fact that the required generalization of the classical electrodynamical theory demands a profound revolution in the concepts on which the description of nature has until now been founded.'' As we shall see in Chapter 21, Bohr did not have to wait long for this ``profound revolution'' to take place. Young's experiment The phenomena of absorption and emission of light by the electrons of atoms in a thin gas, which produce the spectra, are an 421 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS example of the particle behavior of light; the photons being absorbed and emitted behave as particles of light. As we know, light also exhibits wave behavior. Although Newton thought that light was composed of particles, he did not reject the wave theory of light and even suggested that the different colors had different wavelengths. What Newton could not accept was the idea advanced by Huyghens and Hooke that light was a spherical pressure wave propagating through a medium. Newton had two objections to this idea. The ®rst was that a wave did not always travel in straight lines; waves spread out in all directions and even bend around corners. Light, on the other hand, travels in straight lines as evidenced by the sharp shadows cast by a sunlit object. The second objection was related to the phenomenon of polarization. The answer to Newton's ®rst objection had to wait for Thomas Young in the early nineteenth century. The son of a Quaker banker, Young was a child prodigy who could read ¯uently by age 2 and by age 4 had twice read the Bible. At 14 he knew eight languages. Young studied medicine, graduating from the University of GoÈttingen in 1796 at the age of 23. Although he practiced medicine throughout his life, he was not a very good physician because of his poor bedside manner and probably because he was more interested in being a scientist rather than a physician. Between 1801 and 1803 he was a lecturer on science at the Royal Institution in London. He made important contributions in mechanics, acoustics and optics. A constant that characterizes the elongation of a solid substance under tension is still called Young's modulus. He made considerable discoveries regarding surface tension, capillarity and the tides. While still in medical school, he discovered the accommodation of the lens of the eye. Soon after obtaining his degree he discovered that ocular astigmatism was due to irregularities in the curvature of the cornea. Young moved from his research on the eye to the nature of light. A century and a half before Young, the Italian physicist Francesco Maria Grimaldi had passed a beam of light through two small apertures, one behind the other. He found that the band of light on a surface behind the second aperture was slightly wider than the width of the ®rst aperture. He realized that the beam of light had bent slightly and called the phenomenon diffraction. However, he could not explain why the band of light showed 422 The Nature of Light colored streaks at the edges. His discoveries appeared in a book published posthumously, which, for the most part, did not receive much attention. Newton was aware of Grimaldi's experiments and attributed the bending of the beam of light to interactions between the particles of light in the beam and the edge of the slit. In 1802, Young designed a similar experiment. He passed a beam of sunlight through a pinhole punched in a screen. Light spreading out from this hole passed through two other pinholes punched side by side in a second screen. Light from these two holes fell on a third screen where an interference pattern of alternating bright and dark regions or fringes appeared. This situation is identical to the experiment described in Chapter 15 for two coherent sources of waves. As we might recall, two waves are coherent if they have the same wavelength and a constant phase relationship. As a rule, light is incoherent because the crests and troughs of the individual waves are in random relationship to one another. In Young's experiment, coherence is assured because the light reaching the two pinholes originates from a single source. In subsequent experiments, Young replaced the two pinholes in the second screen by two narrow parallel slits a few millimeters apart (®gure 18.9). In this case, the interference fringes are alternating dark and bright parallel bands. By measuring the distance between consecutive bright lines, Young calculated the wavelength of the light. He wrote: Figure 18.9. Young's double-slit experiment. 423 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS From a comparison of various experiments, it appears that the breath of the undulations [or wavelength] constituting the extreme red light must be supposed to be, in air, about one 36 thousandth of an inch, and those of the extreme violet about one 60 thousandth; the means of the whole spectrum, with respect to the intensity of light, being one 45 thousandth. Young found that the wavelength of light was much smaller than Newton had thought. The longest wavelength in the visible spectrum, that of red light, is less than one-thousandth of a millimeter. When light falls on regular-sized objects, it will appear to travel in a straight line. Thus, the shadows of regular-sized objects bathed in sunlight are sharp. The shadows of pinholesize objects, as Grimaldi and Young saw, are not sharp. Young's work on the wave theory of light was not well received in England mainly because it went against the particle model proposed by Newton, even after Young pointed out that Newton himself had made several statements in support of the wave theory. Young's theory had to wait until 1818, when two French scientists, Augustin Fresnel and Dominique Arago, proposed a wave theory of their own with a thorough mathematical basis. By 1850, the wave theory of light was widely accepted throughout the scienti®c community. In Young's experiment, the two slits through which light from a single source passes are separated by a distance d (®gure 18.9). The screen where the interference phenomenon is observed is at a distance L, which, in real situations is much greater than the distance between the slits. A bright region appears on the screen at a distance y from the center C. In Chapter 15, we obtained a simple expression to calculate the wavelength of two coherent sources of waves interfering with each other, in terms of the distance between the sources (in this case, the distance between the slits), the distance L to the screen, and the distance y to a particular bright region. The expression is ˆ yd nL where n refers to the order in which the bright regions appear to the side of the central region; the ®rst maximum at either side of this central region is the n ˆ 1, the next one at either side is the n ˆ 2 maximum, and so on. 424 The Nature of Light Polarization The second of Newton's objections to the wave theory of light concerned the phenomenon of polarization. In 1669, the Danish scientist Erasmus Bartholin noticed that objects seen through a special crystal he had recently received from Iceland (now called Iceland feldspar or calcite) were doubled and that when the crystal was rotated, one image remained stationary while the other rotated along with the crystal. Assuming that the light traveling through the crystal was split into two beams he called the beam that formed the stationary image the ordinary beam and that for the moving image, the extraordinary beam. Huyghens investigated this phenomenon and discovered that the two beams were further split into four beams by a second crystal unless this crystal was oriented exactly the same way or at 1808 with the ®rst, in which case no splitting occurred. In 1717, Newton also considered this phenomenon and concluded that the beam of light is made up of particles that have two different ``sides'' and therefore look different when viewed from different directions. These particles are sorted out in the calcite according to the orientation they had when they entered the glass, thus producing the double images. ``By those Experiments it appears,'' he wrote in his Opticks, ``that the Rays of Light have different Properties in their different sides.'' To Newton, the particle theory explained the phenomenon of double refraction in Iceland spar crystal and that led him to reject the wave theory. ``To me, at least, this seems inexplicable, if Light be nothing else than Pression or Motion propagated [as a wave]'' he wrote. The dif®culty that Newton had with the wave theory of light failing to explain double refraction arose from his assumption that a wave of light had to be longitudinal, like a sound wave, rather than transverse. At the beginning of the 19th century, Young in England and Fresnel in France showed that light waves were transverse. We know today that light is an electromagnetic wave; that is, oscillations in space and time of electric and magnetic ®elds that are perpendicular to each other and to the direction of propagation of the wave. It is the transverse nature of electromagnetic waves what explains polarization. If we shake a taut rope up 425 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 18.10. Vertically and horizontally polarized waves on a rope. and down, producing a train of waves, the rope vibrates in a vertical plane. In this case, the waves on the rope are polarized in a vertical plane. Shaking the rope horizontally produces horizontally-polarized waves (®gure 18.10). The convention for direction of polarization of a wave of light is the direction in which the electric ®eld oscillates. Normally, light is unpolarized because it is emitted in extremely short, randomly polarized bursts with a duration of the order of nanoseconds. Since a beam of light consists of an immense number of waves, each randomly polarized, the net result is no polarization (®gure 18.11). In 1928 Edwin P Land, while a physics student at Harvard, invented a transparent plastic material he called Polaroid. In addition to calcite, scientists had produced a synthetic crystalline material, sulfate of iodoquinine or herapathite, which absorbed light vibrating in the direction of orientation of the needleshaped crystals. Since the herapathite crystals were so fragile, Land decided to embed them in a sheet of plastic. When the plastic was stretched, the crystals lined up like venetian blinds (®gure 18.12). Later, polymeric molecules composed mainly of Figure 18.11. Several randomly-polarized waves in an unpolarized beam. 426 The Nature of Light Figure 18.12. (a) A sheet of Polaroid in which herapathite crystals are embedded. Light polarized at right angles to these chains of crystals is transmitted. (b) Direction in which light is transmitted. long chains of iodine atoms replaced the herapathite crystals. Light polarized in a direction parallel to the orientation of the molecules in the Polaroid is completely absorbed because this incident light sets up vibrations in the molecules, losing most of its energy. Light polarized in a direction at right angles to the Polaroid emerges unchanged. If light is polarized at any other angle, it is partially absorbed by the molecules and therefore partially transmitted (®gure 18.13). In a beam of unpolarized light, the electric ®elds of the many incoming rays are vibrating in all directions. Each electric ®eld vector can be decomposed into a component that is parallel to, say, the orientation of the molecules in a Polaroid placed in front of the beam, and a component perpendicular to these molecules (®gure 18.14). The parallel components are all absorbed, as we know, and the perpendicular components all pass through. Thus, when a beam of unpolarized light passes through a polarizer, half the light is absorbed and the other half is transmitted with the electric ®elds vibrating in one direction; that is, the light emerges polarized. 427 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 18.13. (a) Light polarized parallel to the orientation of the Polaroid is completely transmitted. (b) Light polarized in a direction at right angles to the Polaroid is completely absorbed. (c) Light polarized at any other angle is partially absorbed. When a polarized beam of light strikes a Polaroid with its transmission direction parallel to the polarization of the beam, the beam, as we have just discussed, will completely pass through. If the transmission direction of the Polaroid is perpendicular to the polarization of the beam, no light is transmitted. What Figure 18.14. An unpolarized beam incident upon a Polaroid. Each electric ®eld vector can be decomposed into a component perpendicular to the direction of the molecules in the Polaroid and another that is parallel to this direction. Only the perpendicular components are transmitted. 428 The Nature of Light happens when the Polaroid is at an oblique angle to the polarization of the beam? Since each electric ®eld vector, vibrating in the polarization direction, can be decomposed into a component parallel to the transmission direction of the Polaroid and a component that is perpendicular, part of the beam is transmitted. When light falls upon an object, we learned in chapter 17, the oscillating electric ®eld of the incoming light sets the electrons of the atoms in the object into vibration. As these electrons absorb the light's energy, they start vibrating in a direction perpendicular to the incident light, becoming emitters of electromagnetic radiation in the process. This electromagnetic radiation, reemitted after it is absorbed by the electrons, is the light we see when we look at the object. The electromagnetic radiation is reemitted most strongly in a direction perpendicular to the direction of vibration of the electrons. Thus, light re¯ected by a smooth nonmetallic surface is partially polarized, with the direction of polarization parallel to the surface. The light from the morning sun re¯ected from the surface of a lake is partially polarized horizontally. Polarizing sunglasses, with their polarizing axis vertical, greatly reduce the glare of this re¯ected light. Photographers sometimes use a polarizing ®lter on the camera lens to reduce glare. When light enters a calcite crystal, it becomes polarized in a very special way. Calcite and other similar crystals like tourmaline (called noncubic because of their particular lattice con®guration), as well as certain stressed plastics such as cellophane, are birefringent, that is, they split a narrow beam of light into two beams which are polarized in mutually perpendicular directions. These two beams are the ordinary and extraordinary beams that Bartholin discovered. This interesting phenomenon is due to the particular atomic structure of these crystals. The ordinary and extraordinary light rays travel at different speeds through the calcite crystal because of the different ways light interacts with the atoms of the crystal. There is one particular orientation along which both rays travel at the same speed and, consequently, there is no separation of the incident ray into two rays. This direction is known as the optic axis of the crystal. A light ray that enters the calcite crystal along a direction other than the optical axis splits into two rays, the ordinary and extraordinary rays. The ordinary ray is polarized perpendicularly to the 429 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS optic axis and the extraordinary ray is polarized in the same direction as the optic axis. Rotating the crystals makes the extraordinary ray rotate around the ordinary ray. Lasers The light our senses perceive consists of a great number of photons with many different frequencies, oscillating in random phases. This re¯ects the chaotic nature of the natural processes that give rise to them. As we know, light is emitted by atoms that have been excited to higher energy states by collisions with other atoms or by absorption of photons. Atoms in these high energy states emit radiation when they decay to their ground states. This can occur in two ways: a random, spontaneous emission, or a stimulated emission induced by the radiation emitted by other atoms of the same kind. In natural processes, spontaneous emission is dominant and the emitted light is incoherent. Spontaneous emission occurs, for example, in ¯uorescent lamps. The atoms of the gas in the tube ± mercury vapor mixed with an inert gas ± are continuously excited to high energy states through collisions with electrons which are accelerated back and forth between two electrodes at the two ends of the tube to which an alternating voltage is applied (®gure 18.15). These excited atoms decay down to their ground states, emitting Figure 18.15. Electrons accelerated between two electrodes in a ¯uorescent tube collide with the atoms of the gas in the tube, raising them to higher energy states. As these atoms return to their ground states, they emit photons in the UV region which in turn excite atoms and molecules of the phosphor in the walls of the tube to higher states. When these atoms return to their ground states, they emit light in the visible part of the spectrum. This is the light we see. 430 The Nature of Light light in the ultraviolet. If some of the emitted photons have energy h equal to the energy difference between the ground state and an excited state in the atoms and molecules of the phosphor which coats the walls of the tube, then these atoms and molecules may absorb the photons. This absorption leaves these atoms in excited states. They decay spontaneously in several small steps, emitting light in the visible part of the spectrum. Because the atoms decay at random, the emitted photons are not in phase with each other; the emitted light is not coherent. In a laser (light ampli®cation by stimulated emission of radiation), the individual atoms are induced to radiate in phase. Albert Einstein predicted that if a photon of energy h ˆ E2 ÿ E1 interacts with an atom which is in the excited state E2 , the incident photon may stimulate the atom to emit a second photon which not only has the same energy but also is in phase with the incident photon. Thus, stimulated emission produces light that is coherent. Einstein also showed that the probability of stimulated emission from state E2 to state E1 is the same as the probability for absorption of a photon of energy E2 ÿ E1 resulting in a transition from state E1 to state E2 . In an ordinary gas, most atoms are in the ground state. It is then much more likely that a photon of the right energy will be absorbed by an atom in the ground state than it is to cause stimulated emission in an atom in the excited state. Although it is impossible to predict when a particular atom in an excited state will decay to a lower state, the average time of decay for a group of many atoms is of the order of 10ÿ8 seconds. There are, however, certain excited states called metastable, in which atoms on average will stay for 10ÿ3 seconds, 100 000 times longer than in an ordinary state. If there are more atoms in a metastable state than in the ground state, a situation called population inversion, stimulated emission will be the dominant process. A common method of achieving population inversion is by optical pumping, in which intense light of the right energy is used to excite many atoms to the higher state. Since the probability of absorption is the same as that for emission, the light that pumps the atoms to higher states can also pump them down to the ground state. To sidestep this problem, substances in which electrons can jump down to a third and even a fourth level are used. 431 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 18.16. In a three-level laser, electrons are pumped to the excited state of energy Ee from where they spontaneously decay to a metastable state Em or to the ground state. When enough electrons have accumulated in the metastable state, producing a population inversion, a source of ordinary light stimulates the electrons to decay to the ground state, starting the lasing process. A three-level laser, such as the ruby laser, has three levels that participate in laser processes; the ground state Eo , an ordinary excited state Ee , and a metastable state Em (®gure 18.16). When a system with a large number of these atoms in the ground state is irradiated with photons of energy exactly equal to the energy difference between the ordinary excited state and the ground state; that is, Ee ÿ Eo , many atoms will be excited to state Ee by absorption of one of these photons. Once excited to this level, the atoms spontaneously decay to the metastable state Em or to the ground state in an average time of 10ÿ8 s. Electrons stay in the metastable state for a much longer time. When a suf®ciently large number of electrons populate the metastable state, producing a population inversion, a second source of ordinary light of energy equal to the energy difference between the metastable state and the ground state stimulates the decay of many electrons in the metastable state to the ground state, starting the lasing process. The fundamental principles of the laser were worked out by the American physicist Charles H Townes. In 1917, Einstein had recognized the existence of stimulated emission and, as we have 432 The Nature of Light seen, showed that the probability of an electron in a state E1 of absorbing a photon of energy E2 ÿ E1 was equal to the probability of emission of a photon of the same energy by an electron in state E2 . In 1951, Townes, then a professor of physics at Columbia University, was undertaking the problem of how to generate electromagnetic waves of great intensity in the microwave region. While sitting on a park bench one morning waiting for a restaurant to open, Townes realized that certain molecules had energy states of the right frequency for microwave emission. The problem was how to excite enough of them, keep them from decaying until a suf®ciently large number of them were excited, and ®nally how to stimulate them to decay at once to produce a powerful enough beam. That morning, while waiting to have breakfast, Townes had all these problems solved after doing some calculations on the proverbial back of an envelope. By 1953 he and his graduate students had constructed a working prototype. Townes called his device a maser, for microwave ampli®cation by stimulated emission of radiation. Shortly after, in 1958, Townes and A L Schawlow showed that it was possible to construct a maser producing coherent radiation in the visible spectrum. Around the same time the Soviet physicists A M Prokhorov and N G Basov independently worked out the principles. Figure 18.17. Close-up of the ®rst laser. (Associated Press.) 433 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Physics in our world: Compact disc player A compact disc player is a digital device; that is, the music has been stored on the disc as binary codes in the form of a sequence of pits. When the music is recorded, the changes in sound intensity are transformed by a microphone into variations in voltage. This electrical signal is sampled 44 100 times a second from each stereo channel. These values of the voltage are converted into a binary code of on-off pulses which are encoded as a sequence of pits on the surface of a plastic disc 12.5 cm in diameter covered with a re¯ecting layer of aluminum. In the CD player, a weak laser beam shines on the minute pits and ¯at re¯ective spaces in the spiral groove engraved on 434 The Nature of Light the underside of the spinning disc. When the laser beam shines on the re¯ective aluminum surface, it is re¯ected back and detected by a photocell where electrons are released. When the laser beam enters a pit in the track, the light is not re¯ected. Thus, the digital code of on-off signals which was encoded when the disc was produced is decoded in the CD player. As the number of samples per second is so large, the music reproduced in the player has extremely high ®delity, free of the hiss of magnetic tape and the surface noise of the old records. In 1960, the American physicist T H Maiman at Hughes Research Laboratories in Miami, Florida, constructed the ®rst laser, using a synthetic ruby cylinder. Townes, Prokhorov and Basov shared the Nobel prize in 1964 for the discovery of the maser. Schawlow won the 1981 Nobel prize for his work on lasers. Holography Holography, although associated with lasers, was invented by the Hungarian engineer and physicist Dennis Gabor in 1947 before Maiman constructed the ®rst laser in 1960. Gabor said that the idea for holography came to him as he waited for his turn at a tennis court in England where he was a research engineer. He wanted to improve the resolution of the electron microscope; his ®rst paper on the subject, published in Nature in 1948, was entitled ``A new microscopic principle.'' He was awarded the 1971 Nobel prize in physics for his discovery. Gabor coined the word holography, from the Greek word ``holos,'' meaning ``the whole,'' because it records the entire message of light, not just the intensity, as cameras or even our eyes do. A hologram is produced by the interference of two light beams, a reference beam coming directly from the light source, and the beam re¯ected by the object. The re¯ected beam varies in phase compared with the reference beam because of the interaction with the object. A stationary interference pattern is produced where the two beams overlap. A photographic ®lm 435 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 18.18. Looking at a hologram that is being illuminated with the same light source that produced the hologram produces an image that appears three-dimensional. placed in this space can record this pattern: this forms the hologram. When the reference beam is passed through the developed hologram, the interference pattern diffracts the beam in such a way that the emerging beam is identical with the original object beam. If we look at the hologram from the side opposite the light source (®gure 18.18), we see an image of the object. Because the wave fronts are identical with those generated by the object, our eyes cannot distinguish between the perceived image and the real object and we see what appears to be the object itself, in three dimensions. Gabor's original experiments permitted holograms of only very tiny thin objects (he used transparencies as objects). Anything thicker could not work because the coherence length of his mercury light source was only a fraction of a millimeter. The advent of the laser in 1960 provided a beam with a coherence length of several centimeters, and made possible holograms of three-dimensional objects. Although these holograms had to be viewed in laser light, in 1964 the Russian physicist Yu N Denisyuk developed a technique to make holograms that were viewable in white light. Instead of positioning the reference beam and the object on the same side of the hologram, Denisyuk moved the reference beam to the opposite side (®gure 18.19). The interference pattern then formed inside the photographic ®lm as sheets like the pages of a book. When developed, the ®lm acted as an interference ®lter, which, when illuminated with white light, 436 The Nature of Light Figure 18.19. Denisyuk's con®guration for a white-light-viewable hologram. rejected all inappropriate wavelengths and gave single-color three-dimensional images. Denisyuk's work, published originally in the Soviet Union, was translated into English but was unnoticed by American scientists. In 1965, Nile Hartman at Batelle Memorial Institute in Columbus, Ohio, independently discovered a similar technique to make a hologram that could be viewed in white light. In 1969, Stephen Benton of the Polaroid Corporation developed the rainbow hologram, which produces an image in colors of the spectrum. These holograms look three-dimensional only side to side, not up and down. The security holograms now embossed on some credit cards are of this type. When turned on its side, this type of hologram loses its three-dimensional appearance. 437 19 THE SPECIAL THEORY OF RELATIVITY Galilean relativity The theory of relativity is usually associated with the name Einstein. It might therefore come as a surprise that the concept of relativity did not originate with Einstein. The honor belongs to Galileo. In his Two New Sciences, Galileo discussed the problem of the behavior of falling bodies on a moving Earth, arriving at the conclusion that they fall exactly as they would appear to do if the Earth were not moving. Galileo argued that you cannot tell whether the Earth is moving or at rest by watching an object fall. In the Two New Sciences, Galileo discussed the simpler problem of uniform linear motion. According to Galileo, if we are in a ship moving along a straight line with constant speed and drop a ball from the crow's nest, the ball will fall straight down, hitting the deck at the foot of the mast, not the water. But an observer on shore will thus see the ball falling down following a curved path and not a straight line (®gure 19.1). If we drop a ball inside a closed room, the ball will fall straight down whether the room is in our house, a cabin in a cruise ship or the closed bathroom of an airplane. In fact, no experiment can be performed inside a closed room that will reveal to us whether or not the room is at rest or moving along a straight line at constant speed. If we are in the cabin of a ship that is moving steadily and drop a ball from the middle of the ceiling, it will drop on the middle of the ¯oor, just as if we were doing the experiment in our room at home. Motion in a straight line at constant speed, according to Galileo, has no discoverable effects. The only way we can tell whether or not 441 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 19.1. (a) An observer in a moving ship will see a ball falling straight down, as if the ship were not moving. (b) A person on shore will see the ball move along a curved path. we are moving is by looking out of the window to determine whether there is relative motion between us and the Earth. Sitting in an airplane we have just boarded we are sometimes fooled into thinking it is moving when the engines are running and another airplane is taxying nearby. Unless we catch a glimpse of a building or are able to see the ground from where we sit, the vibrations from the engine and the motion of the other airplane make it impossible to decide who is moving. A similar experience occurs when, tired during a long car trip, we may ®nd ourselves sitting low in the back seat when our driver gets stuck in a traf®c jam. Seeing only the tops of the other automobiles on the other lanes, we might think we are ®nally moving, only to discover that the cars traveling in the opposite direction were the only ones moving. In a sense, then, all motion is relative. In everyday situations we refer motion to the Earth. Although we would say that when we are sitting in our room reading we are not moving, a 442 The Special Theory of Relativity Figure 19.2. The plane and all its contents are traveling at 800 km/h relative to the ground. The book that the passenger is reading and the passenger herself are at rest relative to the plane. hypothetical observer traveling through the solar system would af®rm that our room is actually rotating along with the Earth and revolving around the Sun. The description of motion depends on the particular reference frame to which we refer it. If we are on an airplane that is traveling at a steady 800 km/h, we would consider the book we are reading to be at rest with respect to us, the other passengers, and the plane (®gure 19.2). Of course, the book is moving along with us, the other passengers, and the plane at 800 km/h relative to the ground. Which view is the correct one? Both are. The book is at rest in the reference frame of the plane and moving at 800 km/h in the reference frame of the ground. While the plane is moving steadily, your coffee will not spill and your pen will not roll off the fold-out table. The law of inertia holds and, as we have said, nothing, other than looking out the window, will tell you that you are moving. A reference frame in which the law of inertia holds is called an inertial reference frame. Suppose now that, while a plane is ¯ying with constant velocity at 800 km/h, a ¯ight attendant walks from the back of the plane to the front at a steady pace. Assume that she walks at a speed of 2 km/h (®gure 19.3). This, of course, is her speed in the reference frame of the plane. If the velocity of the ¯ight attendant were to be measured from the ground, we would ®nd it to be 443 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 19.3. While the plane ¯ies at a constant speed of 800 km/h relative to the ground, a ¯ight attendant walks down the aisle at a speed of 2 km/h relative to the plane. 802 km/h. This is hardly surprising to us. It is not uncommon to see people in a hurry walking on escalators. Their velocities with respect to the building where the escalator is located are greater than the velocity of someone who merely rides the escalator. We all have seen children walking down an ``up'' escalator so that they remain stationary in relation to the building. In this case, their velocities are the negative of the escalator velocity. If a reference frame S0 is moving with a velocity vF relative to a second reference frame S, then the velocity v of an object relative to S is equal to its velocity v0 in frame S0 plus vF ; that is, v ˆ v0 ‡ vF : Returning to our example of the ¯ight attendant, the velocity of the reference frame S0 of the airplane relative to the frame of the ground is vF ˆ 800 km/h, the ¯ight attendant's velocity relative to the plane is v0 ˆ 2 km/h, and her velocity relative to the reference frame S of the ground is v ˆ 2 km=h ‡ 800 km=h ˆ 802 km/h. 444 The Special Theory of Relativity Since inertial frames of reference move at constant velocities, the acceleration of an inertial frame is zero. Therefore, the acceleration of an object in one reference frame is the same as in any other inertial frame. The object we drop from the ceiling of a cabin in a steadily moving ship not only falls straight down to the ground relative to the people on the ship, it also accelerates at 9.8 m/s2 . This is the same acceleration that an observer on shore would measure for the falling object if this observer could see it. Thus, not only the law of inertia ± Newton's ®rst law ± holds for inertial frames of reference but the second law and the universal law of gravitation as well. In fact all the laws of mechanics are the same for all observers moving at a constant velocity relative to each other, as Newton himself recognized. This statement is implicit in Galileo's own statement that uniform motion has no discoverable effects and is known today as the Galilean principle of relativity. We can state this as follows: The laws of mechanics are the same in all inertial frames of reference. This principle means that there is no special or absolute reference frame; all reference frames are equivalent. Thus, there is no absolute standard of rest; uniform motion has to be referred to an inertial frame. A word of caution before we leave this section is in order. We have implicitly said that the Earth is an inertial reference frame. This is not exactly true, because the Earth is rotating, so any point on its surface is always accelerating. However, this acceleration is very small, and the rotational effects of the Earth can be neglected. The Earth can thus be considered an inertial frame of reference for our purposes. The Michelson±Morley experiment The Galilean principle of relativity was ®ne for mechanics. However, when Maxwell deduced the existence of electromagnetic waves that travel at the speed of light, scientists began thinking about the medium through which these waves propagate. Although Maxwell concluded that electromagnetic waves would propagate in empty space, the physicists of this period, being familiar with mechanical waves which require a medium 445 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS to propagate, naturally assumed that electromagnetic waves also required a medium, and could not accept the idea of a wave propagating though empty space. On the Earth, light propagated through air, water, and other transparent media. But light also came from the Sun and the stars, and the space between the stars did not appear to be ®lled with any known substance. Clearly, they reasoned, a transmitting substance existed that ®lled all space; the luminiferous ñther ± or simply the ``ether.'' The ether was a transparent medium thin enough to allow the motion of the planets but rigid enough to allow for the propagation of light with tremendous speed. Even Maxwell was convinced: ``We have, therefore, some reason to believe,'' he wrote in 1865, ``from the phenomena of light and heat, that there is an ñthereal medium ®lling space and permeating bodies, capable of being set in motion from one part to another, and of communicating that motion to gross matter so as to heat it and affect it in various ways.'' Albert A Michelson was one of several physicists who tried to detect the motion of the Earth through the ether. Like all the others, he failed. Michelson was born in Strelno, Prussia (now Strzelno, Poland), on December 19, 1852. When he was four, his parents emigrated to America and settled in San Francisco, where they went into business. There, the young boy grew up. As a teenager, Michelson entered the United States Naval Academy at Annapolis where he excelled in science, becoming a physics and chemistry instructor after graduation. In 1878, he began thinking about better ways to measure the speed of light. Realizing that he required more formal studies in optics, he traveled to France and Germany for advanced study, as was the custom in those days. Upon his return to the United States, Michelson became a professor of physics at the Case School of Applied Sciences (now known as Case Western Reserve University), and later, the ®rst head of the physics department at the University of Chicago. In 1907, Michelson became the ®rst American to win the Nobel prize in the sciences. While in Germany working in the laboratory of Hermann von Helmholtz, Michelson invented an ingenious instrument with the idea of measuring the Earth's velocity with respect to the ether. Michelson's interferometer, as the instrument came to be known, was based on an idea ®rst proposed by Maxwell in 446 The Special Theory of Relativity 1875. As the Earth moves through space, Maxwell reasoned, the ether that permeates space would create a wind. If we measure the velocity of light in the direction of motion of the Earth around the Sun (that is, in the opposite direction to that of the ether wind) we would obtain a value equal to the speed of light with respect to the ether minus the speed of the ether. If we measure the speed of light in the opposite direction we would obtain a value equal to the speed of light with respect to the ether plus the speed of the ether. If we measure the speed of light in a direction at right angles to the ether wind we would obtain the actual velocity of light relative to the ether. This situation is similar to the situation of a swimmer swimming 50 meters, as measured on shore, ®rst upstream and then the same 50 meters downstream and later swimming 50 meters back and forth at right angles to the current. The times for each round trip are going to be different. If we know at what speed the swimmer swims in still waters, we can deduce the velocity of the current. Figure 19.4 shows a schematic representation of Michelson's interferometer. A half-silvered mirror splits a beam of light into two beams ± one re¯ected and one transmitted ± that travel in perpendicular directions. The re¯ected beam strikes mirror M2 and is re¯ected back to the half-silvered mirror. The transmitted beam strikes mirror M1 and is also re¯ected back to the halfsilvered mirror. There the two beams are again partly re¯ected and partly transmitted and interfere. This interference pattern can be observed with a telescope. Michelson's ®rst attempt to detect a difference in the speed of light in any direction was ``unsuccessful;'' no difference was detected. He decided that he needed more sensitive equipment. In 1887, Michelson, now at Case Western Reserve, and his friend and collaborator, Edward W Morley, a professor of chemistry at the University, decided to try again. They placed the interferometer on a square slab of stone one and a half meters wide, ¯oating on mercury to minimize vibrations as the apparatus was rotated to measure the light from the stars in different directions. When the apparatus was oriented in the direction of the Earth's motion, a certain interference pattern was observed due to the difference in the optical paths of the two perpendicular beams; one parallel to the Earth's velocity and the other perpendicular to it. As the interferometer was rotated 908, the beam that was parallel to the 447 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 19.4. Schematic diagram of Michelson's interferometer. A narrow beam of light is split into two beams by a half-silvered mirror. These two beams travel in perpendicular directions to two mirrors which re¯ect the beams back to the partially-re¯ected mirror where they are again partly transmitted and partly re¯ected. The two beams interfere with each other. This interference pattern can be observed with a telescope. Earth's velocity was now perpendicular and the one that was perpendicular became parallel. Thus, a shift in the interference pattern was expected. Michelson and Morley calculated that this shift should have been 0.4 fringe; that is, slightly less than half the width of a fringe. The results were again negative. ``The actual displacement,'' they reported, ``was certainly less than a twentieth part of this, and probably less than a fortieth part.'' Michelson was known as a meticulous experimenter and the negative results of his experiment puzzled other physicists. The Irish physicist George FitzGerald advanced an explanation in 1882. He proposed that the linear dimensions of all objects are shortened along the direction of motion of the Earth. Thus, the arm of the interferometer holding the mirrors placed in the direction of motion of the Earth is shortened. This contraction is exactly what is needed to compensate for the difference in the velocities of light in the direction of the ether and perpendicular to it. We do measure a smaller velocity of light in the direction opposite the ether wind as compared to the direction perpendicular to it, he proposed, but the times are the same because the length along 448 The Special Theory of Relativity the former direction is shorter by the right amount. Because everything on the Earth, including meter sticks, are contracted in the direction of the ether wind, we cannot directly measure this contraction. In 1895, the Dutch physicist Hendrik A Lorentz independently proposed this contraction and provided an explanation for it in terms of changes in the electromagnetic forces between the atoms. This contraction, proposed without other empirical support and only to provide an explanation for the null results of the Michelson±Morley experiment, is known today as the Lorentz±FitzGerald contraction. Einstein's postulates Albert Einstein was eight years old when Michelson and Morley were attempting to measure the velocity of the ether wind. He had been late to begin to talk but was not a poor student in his early youth, as popular mythology has it. A year before this famous experiment took place, in 1886, when Einstein was seven, his mother Pauline wrote to her mother, ``Yesterday Albert got his marks. Again he is at the top of his class and got a brilliant record.'' A year later his grandfather wrote, ``Dear Albert has been back in school a week. I just love that boy, because you cannot imagine how good and intelligent he has become.'' At ten, Einstein entered the Luitpold Gymnasium or secondary school in Munich, a city not far from his native Ulm in Germany, where he excelled in mathematics and physics, subjects in which he was, ``through self study, far beyond the school curriculum,'' as he wrote years later. At the age of twelve, he was given a book on Euclidian geometry which he studied with enthusiasm. ``The clarity and certainty of its contents made an indescribable impression on me,'' he later wrote in a small autobiographical essay. Einstein, however, disliked the Gymnasium and its astringent learning atmosphere, and once remarked that its teachers were like lieutenants. When he was ®fteen, his father's business failed and the family moved to Pavia, Italy. Einstein was left behind to ®nish his secondary education at the Gymnasium. After six months, depressed and nervous, he persuaded his family physician to provide him with a certi®cate stating that owing to nervous 449 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS disorders he needed the company of his family. Einstein left the Gymnasium without informing his parents and joined them in Pavia. He promised his disappointed parents that he would study on his own to prepare for the entrance examination at the prestigious Swiss Federal Polytechnic Institute, the ETH, in Zurich, where his father wanted him to study electrical engineering. Einstein was examined in political and literary history, German and French, drawing, mathematics, descriptive geometry, biology, chemistry and physics, and was required to write an essay. He failed. However, because he had done well in mathematics and the sciences, the director of the Polytechnic suggested that he obtain a diploma at a Swiss secondary school and reapply. A year later Einstein graduated with near-perfect grades from the cantonal school in Aarau, in the German-speaking region of Switzerland. Now armed with his high school diploma, Einstein was admitted at the ETH without further examination. Einstein entered ETH on October 26, 1896, at the age of 17, to study physics. Under six professors ± one of them Hermann Minkowski, who was to participate in giving the theory of relativity its mathematical formalism ± Einstein studied mathematics. Three professors taught physics and astronomy. He also added electives such as gnomic projection, anthropology, geology, banking and stock exchange, politics, and Goethe's philosophy. He did not attend lectures regularly, however, preferring to spend his time in the physics laboratory and in the library reading the original works of Maxwell, Kirchhoff, and Hertz. He relied on good class notes taken by his friend Marcel Grossmann to cram for examinations. Einstein particularly disliked the physics courses taught by Heinrich Weber because he did not present anything about Maxwell's theory, and Maxwell's theory was ``the most fascinating subject at the time that I was a student,'' as Einstein wrote later. The dislike was mutual, as Weber did not like Einstein's forthrightness and distrust for authority. In Europe at the time, a professor was an exalted person, respected and revered by lesser people. Einstein graduated from the ETH in August 1900. Three other students graduated with him and the three immediately obtained assistantships at the ETH. Einstein was not offered a position. He then looked for other university positions and was rejected. In 1901, he wrote, ``From what people tell me, I am not 450 The Special Theory of Relativity in the good graces of any of my former teachers . . . I would long ago have found a [position] had not Weber intrigued against me.'' In 1901, still without a job, Einstein returned to physics and wrote his ®rst scienti®c paper, on intermolecular forces, which appeared in volume 4 of the prestigious scienti®c journal Annalen der Physik. He then wrote a research paper on thermodynamics which he submitted to the University of Zurich to obtain his doctoral degree. The paper was rejected by Professor Kleiner as a PhD thesis. In June 1902, with the help of a recommendation from Marcel Grossmann's father, Einstein ®nally obtained a job as a clerk in the Swiss Patent Of®ce in Bern. This was not an academic job but it might have been the best job that Einstein could have had at that time, because it was undemanding and left him enough time to think about physics. It was there, at the patent of®ce, that Einstein developed and published his Special Theory of Relativity. 1905 was Einstein's annus mirabilis, ranking in the annals of physics with the other annus mirabilis of 1666 when Newton went home in Woolsthorpe and explained how the universe works. That year of 1905 Einstein published a paper which was ``very revolutionary,'' as he wrote to a friend. This paper was indeed revolutionary; it was the paper that laid the foundation for quantum theory, with the introduction of the concept of quanta of energy or photons, and that was eventually to earn him a Nobel Prize in physics. Less than a month after submitting this paper for publication, he sent off a second paper which was to gain him the PhD degree from the University of Zurich, accepted by the same Professor Kleiner who had rejected his ®rst submission; it was the sugar paper mentioned in chapter 1. ``A New Determination of the Sizes of Molecules,'' he titled it. Within a month he submitted a third paper explaining the erratic, zigzag motion of a speck and helped to establish the existence of atoms. This was called Brownian motion, although Einstein did not know this. On June 30, 1905, Annalen der Physik, the journal where Einstein had published all his papers, received the fourth manuscript from Einstein during that year, titled ``On the Electrodynamics of Moving Bodies.'' This was the special relativity paper submitted only ®fteen weeks after his ®rst paper of that incredible year. But Einstein was not ®nished; he still had time that year for a ®fth paper which he titled ``Does 451 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS the Inertia of a Body Depend upon Its Energy Content?'' This was the paper containing the famous formula E ˆ mc2 , which was to become synonymous with his name. Einstein was twenty-six that year. Einstein's 1905 paper on special relativity starts by recognizing that Maxwell's theory of electromagnetism makes a distinction between rest and motion. He gave the example of a magnet and a wire moving relative to each other. If the magnet moves and the wire is at rest, the moving magnet generates an electric ®eld that produces a current in the wire. However, if the wire is moving and the magnet is at rest, there is no electric ®eld, but the moving conductor experiences a force which sets up an electric current equal to the current in the former case. This means that the states of rest and motion can be identi®ed. Absolute motion does not exist; only relative motion matters. Galileo had discovered that. Either Galileo was wrong or Maxwell was wrong. Einstein decided that electromagnetism had to be reformulated so that the description depends only on the relative motion. He proceeded to do just that in the second part of his paper. Einstein chose not merely to believe that only relative motion matters; he elevated this idea to the status of a postulate and called it the Principle of Relativity. Einstein introduced a second postulate ``. . . that light is always propagated in empty space with a de®nite velocity c which is independent of the state of motion of the emitting body.'' The special theory of relativity is based on these two fundamental postulates. Let us state them here in Einstein's own words: Postulate 1 ± The Principle of Relativity: The same laws of electrodynamics and optics will be valid for all frames of reference for which the equations of mechanics hold good. Postulate 2: Light is always propagated in empty space with a de®nite velocity c, which is independent of the state of motion of the emitting body. The ®rst postulate is an extension of the Galilean Principle of Relativity to cover not only mechanics but also electromagnetism and optics. Actually, in extending the principle of relativity to include optics and electromagnetism, Einstein meant to include all of physics, since mechanics, optics and electromagnetism 452 The Special Theory of Relativity were all of physics at that time. The Principle of Relativity can then be stated as follows: Postulate 1 [alternate version]: The laws of physics are the same for all observers moving in inertial (non-accelerated) frames of reference. The second postulate seems to contradict common sense. It was Einstein's solution to a puzzle he had struggled with since he was a young boy of sixteen. What would happen if we could travel at the speed of light? Newtonian physics does not forbid us from doing so. Accelerating a spaceship continuously, for example, would eventually allow it to reach the speed of light and even any speed beyond it. Traveling at the speed of light, in the same direction as that of a light beam, we would notice that the wave pattern of the light beam disappears. Einstein realized that Maxwell's equations do not allow such a possibility. Either Maxwell's equations are wrong or traveling at the speed of light is an impossibility. Einstein decided that Maxwell equations were correct. The speed of light must be a limiting velocity; no material body can ever reach it. As such, it must be the same for all observers in inertial frames of reference. Time dilation The constancy of the speed of light for all inertial observers has important consequences for the way we measure time. Imagine two identical trains, one moving at a constant velocity v and the other standing by the railroad station. These two trains are in inertial frames of reference. Suppose further that the velocity of the moving train is extremely large, close to the speed of light. Of course, no train is capable of reaching these velocities (the spacecraft Galileo achieves velocities of about 0.0001c), but this is a thought experiment. In one of the cars in the moving train, an observer has placed a mirror on the ceiling of the car and a light source on the ¯oor of the car. A second observer in one of the cars of the stationary train has an identical set up in her car. Imagine further that the two cars where this equipment has been installed have large windows that allow each observer to completely view the other set up but they are unable to see 453 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 19.5. (a) Two identical trains with light sources and mirrors in motion relative to each other. (b) Path seen by observer on the ground. the ground or any other structure around the trains. For clarity, we are assuming that we are in the same reference frame as the parked train; that is, the stationary train is at rest relative to the ground, where we also are. Both observers agree that the distance from the mirror to the light source is the same and they label it d (®gure 19.5(a)). When the two cars are facing each other, the observers ®re the light sources. The observer in the moving train measures the time t0 it takes for the light in his set up to make the round trip to the mirror and back. Since the distance for the round trip is 2d, the time is t0 ˆ 2d : c The observer in the stationary train, however, measures a different time t for the light beam in the experiment in the moving train. Because the train is moving with a velocity v, by the time the light reaches the mirror, the mirror would have moved a certain distance (®gure 19.5(b)). According to the stationary observer, 454 The Special Theory of Relativity if the beam is to hit the mirror, it would have to move at an angle and therefore travel a longer distance. Since light travels at the same speed in both reference frames, the beam of light must travel a longer time in the reference frame of the stationary observer. The expression for the time measured by the stationary observer for the round trip of the light beam in the moving train is t0 t ˆ p ˆ t0 1 ÿ v2 =c2 p where the factor ˆ 1= 1 ÿ v2 =c2 ( is the Greek letter gamma). This expression is not dif®cult to derive using simple algebra (see Box). Notice that v < c, otherwise the quantity under the square root sign will be negative, giving us an imaginary number. This means that the factor is always greater than 1 (it is equal to 1 when v ˆ 0), making t > t0 ; that is, the time measured by the stationary observer is always greater than the time measured by the moving observer by the factor . Because we can use the ¯ash-mirror device as a clock by keeping track of the number of return trips, we can see that time ¯ows more slowly in the moving frame of reference. ``Not so!,'' the observer in the moving train would say. ``I have been watching the experiment in her train,'' the moving observer says, ``and she is the one moving. I measure a time that is longer than what she measures for her own experiment.'' Who is right? Both are right. That is the whole point of special relativity. The choice of reference frame does not matter, since there is no preferred frame. Our own reference frame is at rest for us but, as we have seen before, might not be for an observer able to see us from space. In fact the socalled moving train might be traveling west at the same speed as the linear speed due to the Earth's rotation, and for an observer in space that train might be the stationary one. The only thing we can af®rm is that the time interval between two events (the emission of the ¯ash of light and its arrival at the mirror in our example) as measured by an observer who sees the events occur in his own reference frame is always smaller than the time interval between the same events as measured by another inertial observer. The time interval measured by an observer in his own reference frame is called the proper time. We can summarize our 455 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS The stationary observer sees the light beam move along the sides of an isosceles triangle of base vt, since the train is moving with speed v. If we divide this triangle into two right triangles, as shown in the ®gure below, we can apply the Pythagorean theorem to one of the two right triangles. According to the second postulate, the speed of the light beam traveling in the moving train as measured by the stationary observer is still c. Therefore, if the time measured by the stationary observer is t, the total distance traveled by the light beam as it moves up to the mirror and returns is ct, and the distance for the one-way trip to the mirror is then ct=2. This is the hypotenuse of our right triangle. Thus, Right triangles used in the calculation of t.  ct 2 2 ˆ  vt 2 2 ‡ d2 which becomes after multiplying through by 4, c2 t2 ÿ v2 t2 ˆ 4d2 : Solving for t, we obtain 2d 2d 2d=c t ˆ p ˆ p ˆ p : 2 2 2 2 1 ÿ v2 =c2 c 1 ÿ v =c c ÿv But 2d=c ˆ t0 . Thus, the time measured by the stationary observer for the round trip of the light beam is t0 t ˆ p ˆ t0 : 1 ÿ v2 =c2 456 The Special Theory of Relativity discussion by saying that time in the moving reference frame always ¯ows more slowly. This phenomenon is called time dilation. It is not an illusion but a real phenomenon that has been experimentally observed. The ®rst observation involved the muon, an elementary particle with a mass 207 times that of the electron, which is found in cosmic rays, a natural source of high-energy particles. The halflife of the muon is 1:52  10ÿ6 s when measured in the laboratory. Moving at nearly the speed of light, about half of the muons that reach the upper atmosphere would travel a distance of some 450 m. Yet observations have indicated that half of these muons actually travel distances of about 3200 m. This phenomenon is due to time dilation. In the rest frame of the muon, the life-time is 1:52  10ÿ6 s, which is what we measure for the muons in the laboratory, when we are also in the same frame of reference. However, for an observer on the Earth, the muon is traveling at nearly the speed of light, and the half-life as measured by this observer is increased by a factor of to 10:8  10ÿ6 s. As seen by the observer on Earth, the muons travel a greater distance due to the increased half-life (®gure 19.6). Figure 19.6. In the muon's reference frame, the half-life is 1.6 ms. At nearly the speed of light, a muon would travel a distance of about 450 m. For an observer on the ground, this half-life is increased by a factor of to 10.8 ms, increasing the distance traveled to about 3200 m. Half of the muons detected at the top of a 3200-m mountain are detected at the foot of the mountain. 457 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS The frontiers of physics: Intergalactic travel Relativistic time dilation might make human intergalactic travel possible, although not with our present technology. The distance to the nearest spiral galaxy, M31, the great galaxy in Andromeda, is about one million light-years. A spaceship capable of maintaining a constant acceleration of 1 g (9.8 m/s2 ) during the entire trip, will reach M31 in only 28 years, ship time. However, the crew's families and friends back on Earth ± and perhaps even Earth's civilization as they knew it before leaving ± will be long gone way before they reach their destination, since Earth time for their trip will be several million years. M31, the great galaxy in Andromeda, at a distance of one million light years from us. (Courtesy NASA.) A constant acceleration of 1 g produces an incredible increase in speed in a relatively short time. The ®gure below illustrates this rapid increase in speed. We see that it takes over three years ship time to reach the nearest star, located at a distance of nearly four light-years, and some 5 years to reach Epsilon Eridani, a star 10 light-years away from us. It only takes 21 years, however, to reach the center of our 458 The Special Theory of Relativity galaxy which is 30 000 light-years away. Seven additional years, ship time, will bring this accelerating spacecraft to the vicinity of M31. The ships and propulsion systems that we have developed for our nascent space exploration are but a shadow of the mighty ships needed to even consider interstellar travel. An acceleration of 1 g is achievable now but cannot be maintained over a long period of time. Maintaining it for an entire trip to another star requires the engineering of a much more advanced technology. It is not only muons that experience time dilation, but everything. Biological processes, such as the rate at which cells divide or the heart beats, are also slowed down. Time dilation implies the possibility of interstellar travel and even intergalactic travel, when the technologies of the future are able to provide us with the vehicles and engines required for acceleration to speeds close to the speed of light. Our galaxy, the Milky Way, is about one hundred thousand light-years in diameter. At close to the 459 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS speed of light, it would take slightly over one hundred thousand years to travel from one end of the Galaxy to the other. This time, however, is measured by a stationary observer back on Earth. A spacecraft of the future would be able to circumnavigate the entire Galaxy in less than a human lifetime, as measured on the ship. Simultaneity In his 1905 special relativity paper, Einstein writes in one of clearest pieces of scienti®c prose ever written: If we wish to describe the motion of a material point, we give the values of its coordinates as functions of time. Now we must bear carefully in mind that a mathematical description of this kind has no physical meaning unless we are quite clear as to what we understand by ``time.'' We have to take into account that all our judgements in which time plays a part are always judgements of simultaneous events. But what are simultaneous events? Einstein gives an example which Leopold Infeld, one of Einstein's collaborators, called ``the simplest sentence I have ever encountered in a scienti®c paper'': If I say, for example, ``the train arrives here at 7,'' this means: the coincidence of the small hand of my watch with the number 7 and the arrival of the train are simultaneous events. Einstein, however, explained that although it could be possible to de®ne ``time'' by substituting ``the position of the small hand of my watch'' for ``time,'' such a de®nition is no longer satisfactory ``when we have to connect in time series of events occurring at different places . . .'' In other words, how can we say that two events, one in Paris and the other one in Los Angeles, are simultaneous? We could have a friend in Paris and another in Los Angeles call us over the telephone, we could ``synchronize'' our watches and be able to determine if the two events are indeed simultaneous. The problem with this approach is that the telephone conversations are transmitted using electromagnetic waves which travel at the speed of light and although, according to the second postulate, this speed is the fastest speed achievable, it is still ®nite. The signals then are going to 460 The Special Theory of Relativity Figure 19.7. For the passenger in the moving train (left), the two beams that originate at the same time in the middle of the train reach the two walls simultaneously. A person standing outside the train will detect the beam striking the back wall ®rst. take slightly different times to arrive at our location but since we know the speed of light, we can compensate for the delay in the arrival of the signal from the more distant location. Of course, if we are located midway between New York and Paris, somewhere in the Atlantic Ocean, the signals take the same time to arrive and there is no need for compensation. The problem arises when we consider events in two different inertial systems. Consider again a train traveling with a constant velocity (®gure 19.7). On the train, a passenger is standing in the middle of a car holding two ¯ashlights pointed toward the front and back walls which he turns on at the same time. In the inertial reference frame of the train, the two beams move at the speed of light c and reach the two walls simultaneously. For an observer standing on the station platform the two beams also move at the speed c. However, she sees the back wall of the train moving to meet the traveling light beam and the front wall moving away from the beam that is heading in the direction in which the train is moving. According to the observer standing on the platform, the beam heading toward the back wall strikes ®rst, and the two events are not simultaneous for her. Therefore, we must conclude that events that are simultaneous in one inertial frame are not simultaneous for observers in another inertial frame. This is a consequence of Einstein's second postulate, the constancy of the speed of light in any inertial reference frame. 461 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Length contraction The Lorentz±FitzGerald contraction, introduced in 1882 to explain the null results of the Michelson±Morley experiment, turned out to be a consequence of the special theory of relativity. To see how this length contraction appears, let us return to our example of the two trains (Figure 19.8). One train is moving with a constant velocity v and the other is standing by the station. In the stationary train, a passenger measures the length of her car to be L0 . This length, measured by the observer in her own reference frame, is called proper length. The proper length is what we call the characteristic length of the object. A passenger in the moving train also measures the length of the car in the stationary train. This observer uses his precise watch to measure the time t0 it takes the stationary car to pass through a reference mark he has made on the window of his own car. He calculates the length of the stationary car to be L ˆ vt0 . The passenger in the stationary Figure 19.8. The passenger in the stationary train measures the length of her car to be L0 . The passenger in the moving train measures the length of the stationary train by timing its motion across a mark on his window. 462 The Special Theory of Relativity train, which is also observing the experiment, measures the time t it takes the mark on the moving train to move at a speed v from the back to the front of her stationary car, and she is able to corroborate that the length of her car is vt ˆ L0 . She knows that, because moving clocks run slow, the time t0 measured by the moving observer for the passage of her car past the mark on the moving train is less that the time t she measures for that mark to move across her stationary car. The time t she measures, we already know, is equal to times the time t0 measured by the moving observer: t0 t ˆ t0 ˆ p 1 ÿ v2 =c2 p  so that t0 ˆ t 1 ÿ v2 =c2 . The length L of the stationary car measured by the observer in the moving train is q L ˆ vt0 ˆ vt 1 ÿ v2 =c2 and since vt ˆ L0 , the proper length measured by the observer in the stationary train for her own car, the length measured by the observer in the moving car is q L ˆ L0 1 ÿ v2 =c2 : p Because the factor 1 ÿ v2 =c2 is always less than 1, L is always smaller than L0 ; that is, the length of any object in motion relative to an observer is always less than the length of the object measured by an observer at rest relative to the object. Length contraction is a real effect, not an optical illusion. It is a direct consequence of the constancy of the speed of light for all inertial frames of reference and has been experimentally observed. As with time dilation, reversing the situation produces exactly the same effect. That is, if the passenger in the moving train claims that he is not moving and that the stationary train, together with the station are moving with a speed v, he would measure a proper length L0 for his own car and, for him, the length measured by the passenger in the stationary train, p moving relative to him, is shorter by a factor 1 ÿ v2 =c2 . Again, both points of view are correct since there is no preferred reference frame. 463 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Addition of velocities In his 1905 paper on special relativity Einstein concluded that the speed of light must be a limiting velocity for any material body. If we imagine a spaceship moving at 299 000 km/s relative to us on the Earth, could it not be possible for the crew on the ship to launch a reconnaissance ship at a speed of 10 000 km/s in the same direction? According to Galilean relativity, we should measure a speed of 299 000 km=s ‡ 10 000 km=h ˆ 309 000 km=s, greater than the speed of light of 299 792 km/s. According to special relativity, it is not possible for the reconnaissance ship to surpass the speed of light. If this is the case, how do we calculate the ship's velocity? In his relativity paper Einstein shows that if an object moves with a velocity u0 relative to an inertial frame which in turn is moving with a velocity v with respect to a second inertial frame (®gure 19.9), the velocity of the object in the second frame is uˆ v ‡ u0 : 1 ‡ vu0 =c2 For our particular example, the ship's velocity is v ˆ 299 000 km/s relative to the Earth and the reconnaissance ship travels at Figure 19.9. A reconnaissance ship traveling at a speed u0 relative to a mother ship, which moves at a speed v relative to the inertial frame xy of the Earth. 464 The Special Theory of Relativity u0 ˆ 10 000 km/s relative to the ship. We would measure a velocity u for the reconnaissance ship of uˆ 299 000 km=s ‡ 10 000 km=s 1 ‡ 299 000 km=s†  10 000 km=s†= 299 792 km=s†2 ˆ 299 051 km=s: Notice that the numerator in Einstein's expression for the transformation of velocities is the Galilean transformation of velocities. In special relativity, this simple addition must be divided by the quantity 1 ‡ vu0 =c2 . If the object is moving in the same direction as the moving reference frame, the quantity in the denominator is greater than 1 and the velocity u in the stationary frame is smaller than what it would be in Galilean relativity. We should also notice that when the velocities are small compared with the velocity of light, the denominator becomes almost 1, and Einstein's transformation of velocities reduces to the transformation of Galilean relativity. E ˆ mc2 Einstein's ®fth and last paper of the year 1905, ``Does the Inertia of a Body Depend upon Its Energy Content?,'' is only three pages long. ``The results of the previous investigation,'' writes Einstein in this short and beautiful paper, referring to his special theory, ``lead to a very interesting conclusion, which is here to be deduced.'' What Einstein deduced was that inertial mass and energy are equivalent. In his paper Einstein considers an atom undergoing radioactive decay and emitting light. Applying the principles of conservation of energy and momentum to the decay he showed that the atom resulting from the decay had to be less massive than the original atom. Remember that in 1905, Rutherford had not yet introduced his nuclear model of the atom and radioactivity had been discovered only some ®ve years before. As we saw in chapter 8, this difference in mass accounts for the binding energy of nuclei, but this problem did not exist until 1911 when Rutherford published his nuclear model. In his paper, Einstein concluded: 465 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 19.10. Bubble chamber photograph of a collision between two protons in a high-energy particle accelerator. (Courtesy Brookhaven National Laboratory.) If a body gives off the energy E in the form of radiation, its mass diminishes by E=c2 . The fact that the energy withdrawn from the body becomes energy of radiation evidently makes no difference, so that we are led to the more general conclusion that The mass of a body is a measure of its energy-content . . . ''If a body gives off the energy E in the form of radiation, its mass diminishes by E=c2 .'' As Einstein himself later pointed out, this conclusion has general validity. An object's mass is a form of energy. Two protons colliding in a high-energy particle accelerator create a spray of new particles, as can be seen in a bubble chamber photograph (®gure 19.10), as kinetic energy is converted to mass energy. If a particle of rest mass m0 disintegrates spontaneously, all its inertial mass is converted into energy. Since 466 The Special Theory of Relativity Figure 19.11. Pair production. A gamma ray photon of suf®cient energy passes near a nucleus and disappears creating an electron and a positron whose tracks can be seen in a cloud chamber curving away from each other due to an external magnetic ®eld. The gamma ray leaves no track. (Courtesy Brookhaven National Laboratory.) this inertial mass is m0 ˆ E=c2 , the energy released is E ˆ m0 c2 : This is Einstein's most famous equation. This mass±energy equivalence also means that an object of mass m0 can be created out of energy. The phenomenon of pair production is an example of this process. When a gamma ray photon passes near an atom, it sometimes disappears, creating an electron and its anti-particle, the positron, leaving the nearby atom unchanged (®gure 19.11). The photon's energy has been converted into mass. The total energy of a particle of mass m0 moving with a speed v and having a kinetic energy KE is E ˆ m0 c2 ‡ KE: This total energy is equal to mc2 ; thus, mc2 ˆ m0 c2 ‡ KE: The relativistic mass, m, of an object equals its rest mass m0 when the object is at rest with respect to an observer; that is, when the kinetic energy is zero. When the object is in motion relative 467 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS to the observer, the relativistic mass increases. Einstein expressed this relativistic mass as m0 m ˆ p : 1 ÿ v2 =c2 This expression tells us that when the speed of the object approaches that of light its mass becomes in®nite. This result is, of course, a consequence of the postulates of special relativity; it places a limit on the speed of any object. Regardless of the force applied on the object or the time this force is applied to the object, it can never reach the speed of light. Mass, as we learned early on in the book, is a measure of the inertia of a body; that is, a measure of the resistance that the body presents to a change in its state of motion by the action of an applied force. As the speed of the object increases, its resistance to the applied force or inertia increases, approaching in®nity as the object's speed approaches that of light. Mass is not the same as ``quantity of matter.'' The relativistic increase in mass does not imply an increase in the object's size or quantity of matter. As the object increases its speed, it does not become larger or denser; it merely becomes more dif®cult to move. This increase in the object's inertia is what we understand by an increase in mass. 468 20 THE GENERAL THEORY OF RELATIVITY The principle of equivalence Postulate 1 of the special theory, the Principle of Relativity, states that the laws of physics are the same for all inertial (nonaccelerated) observers. This postulate, as we saw in chapter 19, is an extension of the Galilean Principle of Relativity that includes not only mechanics but also electromagnetism and optics; that is, all of physics at the time. This postulate means that there is no absolute inertial reference frame and uniform motion has to be referred to an inertial frame. No experiment performed inside a closed chamber in an inertial reference frame can reveal to us whether the chamber is at rest or in motion. In 1907, while preparing a comprehensive paper on the special theory of relativity, Einstein asked himself whether the postulate of relativity could be extended to non-inertial reference frames. This would mean that accelerated motion is also relative and therefore impossible to detect from inside. But we all know that accelerated motion can be detected from inside. If we are in a smoothly-moving vehicle, we feel no motion; but if the vehicle lunges, we feel it immediately. We feel ourselves being pressed against the back of our seat when the vehicle accelerates and feel the pressure on our shoulders from the sides of the vehicle when it turns suddenly. Acceleration, Newton taught us, can be detected and therefore cannot be relative. Only uniform motion is relative. Einstein would not accept a partial relativity and kept looking for the way out. ``I was sitting in a chair in the patent of®ce in Berne, . . . [t]hen there occurred to me . . . the happiest thought of my life, in the following form,'' he wrote later in a paper intended for the journal Nature, which owing to 469 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS its length was never published. He continued: The gravitational ®eld has only a relative existence in a way similar to the electric ®eld generated by a magnetoelectric induction. Because for an observer falling freely from the roof of a house there exists ± at least in his immediate surroundings ± no gravitational ®eld. Indeed, if the observer drops some bodies then these remain relative to him in a state of rest or of uniform motion, independent of their peculiar chemical or physical nature (in this consideration the air resistance is, of course, ignored). The observer therefore has the right to interpret his state as 'at rest.' [. . .] The experimentally known matter independence of the acceleration of fall is therefore a powerful argument for the fact that the relativity postulate has to be extended to coordinate systems which, relative to each other, are in non-uniform motion. Accelerated motion cannot be distinguished from inside from the effects of gravity. In another paper published that same year in which he completed the formulation of the equivalence between mass and energy, Einstein also presented a Gedanken or thought experiment to illustrate the relativity of accelerated frames of reference. Imagine, he proposed, a laboratory in space. We could imagine that this laboratory is inside a spaceship, far from any gravitational body (®gure 20.1(a)). The spaceship begins to accelerate and the scientists inside the laboratory obviously feel this acceleration. The scientists perform simple experiments inside their laboratory to determine the value of this acceleration. Let's suppose that the scientists ®nd that the spaceship is accelerating at a rate of 9.8 m/s2 . The scientists in this laboratory feel the sensation of weight. One of the scientists holding a ball in her hands decides to release it. The ball is now a free body, not in contact with the accelerating spaceship and we may think it is the ¯oor of the spaceship that rushes up to meet the ball. With respect to the spaceship the ball moves in the direction the scientists would call ``down,'' accelerating at 9.8 m/s2 . The scientists perform other simple experiments, dropping objects of different masses which fall to the ¯oor at the same rate and conclude that the spaceship continues accelerating at the constant rate of 9.8 m/s2 so that everything behaves as if the laboratory were back on the ground. The following day, the scientists resume their experiments and conclude that the spaceship 470 The General Theory of Relativity Figure 20.1. (a) No experiment performed inside a laboratory in space accelerating at 9.8 m/s2 can allow us to distinguish it from an experiment carried out at a laboratory on the ground on earth, as shown in (b). continues accelerating at a rate of 9.8 m/s2 . However, when they look outside, they are surprised to ®nd that, while they slept, the spaceship had landed on Earth and that they are actually on the ground (®gure 20.1(b)). This thought experiment illustrates what Einstein called the Principle of Equivalence: that it is impossible to distinguish accelerated motion from the effects of gravity. In this sense, the effects of a uniform constant acceleration are equivalent to the effects of gravity. Inside the accelerating spaceship the scientists feel real gravity; it is not merely a simulation of gravity. As Einstein said, the ``gravitational ®eld has only a relative existence;'' it exists while the acceleration exists. When the ball is dropped inside the laboratory 471 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS in space, it ceases to be in contact with the accelerating spaceship and stops accelerating. When we drop a ball while standing on the ground on Earth, it falls. But while the ball is falling, there is no gravity; the ball merely ¯oats in space. It is not dif®cult to imagine the spaceship accelerating up to meet the ¯oating ball, but to imagine the Earth moving up to make contact with the ball seems ludicrous. After all, the Earth does not move relative to the solar system every time an object falls to the ground. However, relative to the ball, the Earth, the solar system and the entire universe are accelerating toward it. Gravity is precisely equivalent to accelerated motion. Einstein's principle of equivalence extends the relativity principle to accelerated frames of reference. Because it generalizes the relativity of inertial frames of reference to include non-inertial frames, Einstein called the new theory the General Theory of Relativity. Implicit in the principle of equivalence is the assumption that all objects fall to the ground with the same acceleration, regardless of their masses. If this were not the case, the effects of gravity would be distinguishable from those of acceleration. The ¯oor of the accelerating spaceship in our thought experiment would make contact simultaneously with two objects of different masses released at the same distance from the ¯oor. These two objects would not fall to the ¯oor simultaneously when the spaceship is back on the ground if the acceleration due to gravity were not the same for all objects. As we saw in chapter 3, Galileo showed experimentally that all objects fall to the ground with the same acceleration. Newton used the concept of mass in two different contexts: as the measure of inertia, the response of an object to a given force according to Newton's second law, F ˆ ma, and as a measure of the gravitational effect on the object. One is the inertial mass and the other, the gravitational mass. The gravitational force acts in exactly the right proportions on objects of different masses. If the mass is doubled, the gravitational force doubles. Because the inertial mass doubles, the resistance to this double gravitational force also doubles, producing the same acceleration as before. Newton tacitly made inertial mass equal to gravitational mass by assuming Galileo's law that all objects fall with the same acceleration regardless of their composition or structure. 472 The General Theory of Relativity Einstein, with his principle of equivalence, made Galileo's law the foundation of his general theory of relativity. The principle of equivalence can be then stated in the alternative form: gravitational mass and inertial mass are equivalent and no experiment can ever distinguish one from the other. Between 1889 and 1922, the Hungarian physicist Roland von EoÈtvoÈs performed the series of experiments that we mentioned at the end of chapter 6 which showed that inertial mass and gravitational mass were the same to a few parts in a billion. In the 1960s and 1970s R H Dicke at Princeton University and Vladimir Bragisnky at Moscow State University performed experiments that showed that inertial and gravitational masses were equal to 1 part in 100 billion and 1 part in a trillion, respectively. However, in 1988, a reanalysis of EoÈtvoÈs's experiments seemed to indicate a slight discrepancy between inertial and gravitational mass and the existence of a ®fth force, with a strength of about one-®ftieth that of the gravitational force, was postulated. More recent experiments performed by scientists from the Joint Institute for Laboratory Astrophysics in Colorado and from the Los Alamos National Laboratory in New Mexico, cast some doubts about the existence of a new force or about any discrepancy in the inertial and gravitational mass. Sophisticated experiments are currently underway that will someday clear the situation. Warped spacetime continuum Sometime after introducing the principle of equivalence, Einstein realized that the usual understanding of the geometry of space should be re-examined. We may illustrate this with an example used by Einstein. Take a disc or wheel spinning around its center. From elementary geometry, we know that if we measure the circumference of the disk and divide it by its diameter, we obtain the value . However, according to special relativity, if we measure the circumference of the disk while it is rotating, we obtain a smaller value than if we measure it when the disc is at rest relative to us. The reason for this discrepancy is that a line segment along the circumference of the rotating disc, in motion relative to us, will undergo a length contraction. The diameter is not changed because it is at right angles to the velocity 473 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS of any point on the perimeter of the circle. Therefore, the ratio of the circumference to the diameter of a rotating circle will be less than . This means that the geometry of space for accelerating reference frames is no longer the Euclidean geometry we learned at school, where Newton's laws hold, but a different, curved, geometry; Riemannian geometry. In the formulation of the general theory of relativity, Einstein found it necessary to consider a curved four-dimensional spacetime to describe the gravitational ®eld. The curvature of a threedimensional space is hard for us to imagine. Much harder is, of course, to visualize a curved four-dimensional spacetime. However, we can start slowly and build up a good understanding of it. The idea of a four dimensional spacetime in itself is not hard to understand. In fact, we already use this idea in our daily lives. Suppose that on 12th October we agree to meet a friend for lunch at a restaurant downtown in exactly one week. We ®rst need to specify three numbers for the location in space of this restaurant. We would need to transport ourselves to 5th Street and 3rd Avenue and take the elevator to the 7th ¯oor where the restaurant is located. This knowledge, however, is not enough for us to meet our friend. We need a fourth number. It will not do us any good to appear at the restaurant on 15th October at lunch time because our friend will not be there on that day. In addition to specifying the location in space, the where, we need to specify the time, the when. We need to appear at the restaurant at the corner of 5th Street and 3rd Avenue on the 7th ¯oor on 19th October at noon (®gure 20.2). These four numbers constitute a four-dimensional description of the event in spacetime. The mechanics of Newton can very well be expressed using a four-dimensional spacetime formalism, but we would not gain much from doing so. The reason is that in Newtonian mechanics, time is absolute and all we would gain from this description is that the time measured by one observer is the same as the time measured by any other observer. In relativity, the time measured by two observers in motion relative to one another is different, so that treating time on a more equal footing with the space coordinates is advantageous. If our friend meeting us for lunch is actually traveling on a spacecraft at a great speed, the time interval of one week between our agreement to have lunch and the lunch date will be different for our friend. It was Hermann Minkowski, 474 The General Theory of Relativity Figure 20.2. The description in spacetime of our meeting with a friend for lunch requires four numbers; three for the spatial location and one for the time of the event. one of Einstein's professors at the ETH, who in 1907 developed the mathematical formalism of a spacetime continuum as the underlying geometry behind the space and time relationships in the theory of relativity. Einstein proposed that the spacetime continuum is curved. To understand this curvature of spacetime, let's consider ®rst the curvature of two-dimensional space. In 1880, a noted Shakespearean scholar, Edwin A Abbott, wrote what later became a classic science-®ction story, Flatland, a fantasy of strange places inhabited by two-dimensional geometrical ®gures. Flatland tells the dif®culties of A Square, an inhabitant of this two-dimensional world, in imagining a third dimension; a direction perpendicular to the other two that are familiar to him (®gure 20.3). A Dutch mathematician, Dionys Bruger, wrote in 1960 a sequel to Flatland, Sphereland, a story of the dif®culties of Hexagon, grandson of A Square, who also lives in a two-dimensional world. This time, however, the world is not ¯at but curved. Like Hexagon, 475 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 20.3. ``Look yonder, and behold your own Pentagonal house, and all its inmates,'' Sphere, a visitor from the three-dimensional world tells A Square on his ®rst trip outside Flatland. we also ®nd it very dif®cult to imagine a curved four-dimensional spacetime continuum. For our analogy, the two-dimensional space shall be curved, like Sphereland where Hexagon lived. The Spherelanders originally learned Euclidean geometry, which applied very well to their immediate surroundings. They never noticed that their world was not ¯at because Sphereland was very large and the curvature was not noticeable at small scales. Therefore the interior angles of a triangular parcel of land added to 1808, and squares had their opposite sides parallel to each other. One day, however, a group of their scientists decided to line up a large set of very precise, straight rulers to form a very large triangle. After the scientists measured the interior angles, they were surprised to ®nd that their sum added to 1908, not 1808 as they expected. Adding more rulers to form a larger triangle yields still a greater 476 The General Theory of Relativity Figure 20.4. The people of Sphereland cannot understand why the interior angles of small triangles always add up to 1808 whereas for very big triangles, the sum of the angles is larger than 1808. Eventually they invent Riemannian geometry to describe their own curved world. value for the sum of the interior angles; they obtain 1978 this time. A third triangle, smaller than the ®rst gives the value of 1858. ``What is going on?'' they asked themselves. After much thought and discussion it is discovered that they live in a world that is curved. This curvature, however, is very dif®cult for them to comprehend, because it does not take place in any one of the two dimensions known to them and therefore it is completely invisible to them. It occurs in a direction perpendicular to their world, a third spatial dimension (®gure 20.4). Our own story is very much like that of the Spherelanders, except that it occurs in three rather that in two dimensions. On a small scale, we cannot detect any deviations in our universe from Euclidean geometry. Einstein, however, reasoned that our universe is curved and that we should detect the effects of its curvature on a large scale. From his principle of equivalence, he knew that bodies of different masses and compositions must fall with the same acceleration in a gravitational ®eld. This phenomenon has nothing to do with the falling bodies themselves and should be an intrinsic property of space, in the same way 477 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS that the curved triangles observed by the Spherelanders have nothing to do with the rulers they use and are a property of their space. In general relativity, space is distorted or curved by the presence of a gravitational ®eld; that is, by the presence of a body. A second body that enters the space in the vicinity of the ®rst body experiences the distortions in spacetime produced by the ®rst body. Although Einstein arrived at this conclusion in 1907 by an analysis of his principle of equivalence, the full development of a gravitational theory required complicated mathematics and several more years. However, a simple analogy will help us visualize this. Imagine a rubber sheet stretched out ¯at; this is the analog of our three-dimensional space without any masses in its vicinity (®gure 20.5(a)). A billiard ball placed on this sheet will make a dip so that a marble placed on the sheet near the billiard ball will roll toward it (®gure 20.5(b)). If you roll the marble on the sheet, it will follow a curved path around the dip. The billiard ball is not pulling the marble; rather it has distorted the rubber sheet in such a way as to de¯ect the marble. Similarly, Figure 20.5. (a) A stretched rubber sheet is the analog of the threedimensional space far away from any mass. (b) A billiard ball placed on it creates a dip that distorts or warps the sheet. A marble placed on this warped sheet rolls toward the billiard ball. 478 The General Theory of Relativity the Sun distorts or warps the space around it. In such a warped space an object merely travels along a geodesic, which is the path of minimum distance between two points. This path, the ``straightest'' possible path for a planet happens to be an ellipse. The planet orbits the Sun in an elliptical orbit not because of a gravitational force of attraction exerted on the planet by the Sun, as Newton af®rmed, but because the mass of the Sun warps the space around it, altering its geometry. For Einstein, there is no ``gravitational force;'' gravity is geometry. The bending of light Light always moves in straight lines. Since space is curved, a straight line is the shortest path between two points, or a geodesic. Thus, in our curved space a straight line is curved. Since the mass of an object like the Sun curves the space around it, the curvature of a light ray increases as it passes near the Sun (®gure 20.6). Let's now return to our example of the accelerating spaceship. Imagine that in an optics laboratory inside the spaceship a very small round window has been installed in one of the walls. When a beam of light from a star enters the small window, it Figure 20.6. The path of the light from a star follows a geodesic. As it passes near the sun where the space is distorted, its curvature increases and the position of the star appears shifted when compared with its position when the light passes away from the sun. 479 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 20.7. A beam of light follows a straight line far away from the presence of a large mass. When the beam enters the accelerating spaceship, it hits the opposite wall at a point slightly below. crosses the laboratory and hits the opposite wall at a particular location. The scientists inside the laboratory reasoned that since they are far away from any large mass, the space should be nearly Euclidean and the path of the light beam should be nearly straight. However, because the spaceship is accelerating, the beam does not hit the opposite wall at a point in line with the small window and the star but slightly below (®gure 20.7). The scientists undertake very precise measurements of this slight de¯ection of the light beam and conclude that their spaceship is accelerating at 9.8 m/s2 . Since in the general theory of relativity, gravitational ®elds are locally equivalent to accelerations, the scientists expect the light beam to be bent by the same amount in the presence of the gravitational ®eld of the Earth, which produces the same acceleration. When the scientists perform the same experiment 480 The General Theory of Relativity Figure 20.8. The gravitational ®eld of the earth de¯ects the beam of light by the same amount as the spaceship accelerating at 9.8 m/s2 . after the spaceship has landed on Earth, they con®rm that the de¯ection of the beam is exactly the same as when the spaceship was accelerating in space (®gure 20.8). Einstein pointed out that this is to be expected from the mass-energy equivalence given by his E ˆ mc2 of the special theory. Einstein predicted this effect in 1907 but saw no way of designing an experiment to test it. In 1911, Einstein calculated that a light beam from a star grazing the Sun would be de¯ected a very small angle. ``A ray of light going past the Sun would accordingly undergo de¯ection to the amount of . . . 0.83 seconds of arc,'' he wrote towards the end of his 1911 paper ``On the In¯uence of Gravitation on the Propagation of Light,'' an intermediate paper on his general theory. The dif®culty was that it is not normally possible to see starlight and Sunlight at the same time. But Einstein found a way. ``As the ®xed stars in the parts of the sky near the Sun are visible during total eclipses of the 481 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Sun,'' he wrote at the end of his paper, ``this consequence of the theory may be compared with experience. With the planet Jupiter the displacement to be expected reaches to about 1/100 of the amount given. It would be a most desirable thing if astronomers would take up the question here raised. For apart from any theory there is the question whether it is possible with the equipment at present available to detect an in¯uence of gravitational ®elds on the propagation of light.'' In fact, it was possible with the equipment of the day. In 1914 an expedition led by the German astronomer Erwin FinlayFreundlich went to Russia to observe a total eclipse of the Sun and test Einstein's prediction. The outbreak of war found the expedition already in Russia; the astronomers became prisoners of war before they could make any measurements. They were released after a few weeks, but without their equipment. Although this outcome may seem unfortunate (it certainly was unfortunate for the German astronomers), it was probably better not to have been carried through. Had they been able to make their measurements, they would probably have found a value twice as large as what Einstein had predicted in his paper. The reason is that Einstein was partially wrong in 1911. It took Einstein four more years to develop the correct general theory of relativity. Along the way, he had to master complicated mathematics and struggle with wrong leads and dead ends. At the end, however, he obtained a physical theory of incredible power and ``majestic simplicity,'' as Banesh Hoffmann, one of his collaborators, described it. The new theory predicts a de¯ection in the position of the stars whose light grazed the Sun by 1.74 seconds of arc, twice his previous prediction. In 1919, Arthur Eddington, a British astronomer and member of the Royal Society, organized an expedition to the Isle of Principe in the Gulf of Guinea, off West Africa. In his Space, Time, and Gravitation, Eddington wrote: On the day of the eclipse the weather was unfavourable. When totality began the dark disc of the Moon surrounded by the corona was visible through cloud, much as the Moon often appears through cloud on a night when no stars can be seen. . . . There is a marvellous spectacle above, and, as the photographs afterwards revealed, a wonderful prominence-¯ame is posed a hundred thousand miles above the surface of the Sun. We have no time 482 The General Theory of Relativity to snatch a glance at it. We are conscious only of the weird half-light of the landscape and hush of nature, broken by the calls of the observers, and beat of the metronome ticking out the 302 seconds of totality. . . . [Of the sixteen photographs obtained, only] one was found showing fairly good images of ®ve stars, which were suitable for determination. . . . The results from this plate gave a de®nite displacement, in good accordance with Einstein's theory and disagreeing with the Newtonian prediction. This con®rmation electri®ed the world and made Einstein into a celebrity. The telegram with the news of the con®rmation was sent to Einstein by way of Lorentz in Holland who sent it to Einstein in Berlin. When the telegram arrived, Einstein read it and passed it on to a student who was in his of®ce at the time. The student was visibly excited, but Einstein exclaimed, ``I knew that the theory was correct. Did you doubt it?'' The student protested and said that she thought this was a very important con®rmation of his theory. What would Einstein have said, she asked him, if the results had been negative? ``Then I would have been sorry for dear God. The theory is correct.'' The perihelion of Mercury Newtonian mechanics tells us that the planets move in elliptical orbits around the Sun. This is Kepler's ®rst law. In Newtonian mechanics, space is ¯at. In general relativity, space is curved and when an elliptical orbit is made to ®t into this curved space, it becomes deformed in such a way that the planet does not move along exactly the same path every time. Figure 20.9 illustrates what happens. Imagine that Newtonian space is represented by a ¯at sheet where the elliptical orbit has been drawn. To represent the warped space of general relativity, we fold or cut a wedge out of the paper and rejoin the edges. The elliptical orbit is now deformed and the planet moves along a slightly shifted ellipse. One way that astronomers use to express this is to state that the perihelion ± the point in the orbit closest to the Sun ± precesses; that is, shifts with every revolution around the Sun. For this reason, this phenomenon is called perihelion precession. In 1845, the French astronomer Joseph Le Verrier analyzed the orbit of Mercury and found that it did not close. Its perihelion 483 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 20.9. (a) Elliptical orbit in ¯at Newtonian space. (b) Cutting a wedge out of the paper removes part of the ellipse. (c) Rejoining the edges to make a curved sheet introduces a deformation in the orbit which results in precession. precessed by 574 seconds of arc every century. Although Le Verrier had taken into account the perturbations to the orbit of Mercury due to the other planets, especially the closest ones, Venus, Earth and Mars, and also that of Jupiter, the most massive of the planets, the total contribution to the precession amounted to 531 seconds of arc. There were 43 seconds of arc that could not be explained with Newtonian physics. In November 1915, while ®nishing his masterpiece, Einstein decided that a good test for his new theory would be to calculate the orbit of Mercury. From his computation, Einstein obtained a value for the perihelion precession of 573.98 seconds of arc, almost exactly what observations had yielded. General relativity accounted for the anomalous 43 seconds of arc that Newtonian mechanics could not explain. ``For a few days, I was beside myself with joyous excitement,'' he would write later. More accurate experiments performed during the 1970s gave a value for the anomalous part of Mercury's perihelion precession of 43:12  0:21 seconds of arc per century, in complete agreement 484 The General Theory of Relativity with the prediction of general relativity of 42.98 seconds of arc. Because physics is never taken as gospel and even the masterpiece of such giants as Einstein is questioned, in recent years a controversy has appeared regarding the in¯uence on Mercury due to the slightly oblate shape of the Sun. Although the deviation from the spherical shape is only of 12 parts in a million, it may be enough to change the anomalous precession to 40 seconds of arc per century. The controversy has not yet been resolved. The gravitational time dilation According to special relativity, time in the moving reference frame always ¯ows more slowly. The moving reference frame, however, depends on the observer. Time runs more slowly ± however small the change may be ± for the airplane pilot according to us on the ground. According to the pilot, it is we and the ground who are moving and it is our clocks that run slow. Einstein showed that, according to general relativity, time runs more slowly in a gravitational ®eld. Consider again the laboratory inside the accelerating spaceship. Imagine that there are two very precise clocks inside the laboratory, one near the ¯oor and the other near the ceiling (®gure 20.10). These clocks are interfaced to precision instruments that control the rate at which the clocks oscillate. To compare the clocks, an electromagnetic signal oscillating in step with the clock near the ¯oor is sent toward the clock near the ceiling. This signal, we know from special relativity, travels at the speed of light c. Since the spaceship is accelerating, the clock at the ceiling will move away from the incoming signal, which is moving at a constant speed c and the receiving equipment connected to this clock will detect a lower frequency because of the Doppler effect. The scientists in charge of this equipment conclude that the clock on the ¯oor runs more slowly than theirs. To corroborate, they send a signal in step with their clock in the direction of the clock at the bottom. Again, due to the ship's acceleration, the receiving equipment interfaced to the clock on the ¯oor moves towards the incoming signal, which is then Doppler-shifted toward a higher frequency. The scientists on the ¯oor agree 485 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 20.10. Comparing clocks in an accelerating laboratory in space and in a laboratory on the ground on Earth. with the scientists running the experiment near the top; the clock at the top runs faster. By the principle of equivalence, when the spaceship is back on the ground on Earth, the clocks must behave in the same way; the clock at the top runs faster than the clock at the bottom of the laboratory. In a gravitational ®eld, then, clocks run more slowly and, since Einstein taught us that time is what clocks measure, time runs more slowly. This was the ®rst of Einstein's great predictions. Einstein also showed us how this prediction could be tested. Instead of comparing the rates of clocks in different positions in a gravitational ®eld, we could compare the rates or frequencies of oscillation of the light emitted by atoms also in different locations. There is no distinction between a clock and the oscillations of an electromagnetic signal; modern atomic clocks are based on the emission of light with a constant frequency. In 1907, Einstein proposed to test his prediction by comparing the frequencies of the light from atoms on the Sun with the frequencies of light from the same atoms on the Earth. Because the gravitational ®eld of the Sun is stronger, a clock 486 The General Theory of Relativity near the Sun will run more slowly than on Earth and the frequency of light from the Sun will be lower. Since this effect is observed as a shift of the spectral lines of the Sun's light toward lower frequencies ± the red end of the visible spectrum ± it is called the gravitational red shift. The test of the gravitational red shift using Einstein's method had to wait until the 1960s and 1970s, when better instruments allowed scientists to separate this effect from other complicated effects such as convection currents of gas in the Sun and the effects of pressure, all of which cause the spectral lines to shift in different ways. Modern results agreed with Einstein's prediction of about 5 percent shift of the spectral lines. An accurate test of the gravitational red shift had been done at Harvard in 1960 in an experiment similar to our thought experiment when the spaceship is back on the ground. The laboratory was the 24meter tall Jefferson Tower of the physics building with a detector placed at the top of the tower and a source of gamma rays, radioactive cobalt, at the bottom of the building. When the detector was placed near the source, the gamma rays were absorbed. With the detector at the top of the building, the gamma rays were Doppler shifted toward the red due to the small change in Earth's gravity and the detector did not absorb them. When the detector was moved downward to produce a blue shift that compensated for the Earth's gravitational red shift, the gamma rays were absorbed. The Doppler shift measured in this experiment was extremely small; only three parts in a quadrillion (1015 ). The gravitational red shift, although very dif®cult to measure, is fairly easy to calculate. If the laboratory in the spaceship of our thought experiment accelerating at g has a height h then the electromagnetic signal takes a time t ˆ h=c to travel from the laboratory's ¯oor to the ceiling. During this time, the elevator has increased its speed by v ˆ gt ˆ gh : c Although we will not do it here, the algebraic steps necessary to extend the expression for the Doppler effect obtained in chapter 16 to include light are not very dif®cult. In Doppler observations of light, it is the wavelength rather than the frequency that is more often measured and thus we replace f by c=. If v < c, the 487 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS magnitude of the Doppler wavelength shift is
 v gh ˆ ˆ 2:  c c More direct experiments to detect the gravitational time delay have also been done using two cesium-beam atomic clocks, one on the ground and the second one on a jet plane ¯ying overhead. The frontiers of physics: Orbiting clocks According to special relativity, the time interval between two events is different for different inertial observers. Time in the moving reference frame always ¯ows more slowly. This phenomenon is known as time dilation. General relativity predicts that time runs more slowly in a gravitational ®eld. Special relativity predicts that a clock on an orbiting satellite would run more slowly than one in its ground tracking station due to the signi®cant velocity of the satellite relative to the ground. However, because the satellite is farther away from the center of the Earth, the gravitational ®eld is weaker there and general relativity predicts that the satellite-based clock would run faster. For a satellite with an orbital radius of at about 1.5 times the Earth radius, the two effects cancel. The satellite NAVSTAR 2, a ¯eet of military satellites which are part of the US Global Positioning System, have an atomic clock on board and orbit the Earth at an altitude of about 20 000 km. This orbit is about 4.2 times the Earth's radius, and the time delays due to its speed relative to the ground and its position in the weaker gravitational ®eld of the Earth do not cancel out. The clocks on the NAVSTAR 2 satellites run faster than ground clocks. In a single day, the NAVSTAR 2 clocks will be 38.5 microseconds faster and the satellites clocks must be adjusted accordingly. If they were left alone, navigational errors would average about 11 km per day. The correction, calculated with both the special and general relativity predictions, allow the satellites to provide navigational positioning with an accuracy of a few meters. 488 The General Theory of Relativity In an experiment conducted in 1971 by scientists of the US Naval Observatory and Washington University in St. Louis, the results agreed with the predictions of general relativity. In 1976, a Scout D rocket carrying a hydrogen maser clock was launched by NASA for a two-hour suborbital ¯ight to an altitude of 10 000 km. This clock is based on the transitions between two energy levels in hydrogen that emit light with frequency of 1420 MHz. After two years of analysis of the data gathered during this two-hour experiment, Robert Vessot and Martin Levine of the Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory at Harvard and their collaborators at NASA, who had designed the experiment, reported that the frequency shifts observed agreed with the theoretical predictions of general relativity to a precision of 70 parts per million. Black holes In the constellation of Orion there is a large cloud of gas, the Orion Nebula, located in the ``sword'' of Orion (®gure 20.11). The Orion Nebula is located within our galaxy, the Milky Way, at a distance of about 1500 light years. In this large cloud, about 15 light years across, stars are forming right now. The total mass of the Orion Nebula is suf®cient to form as many as 100 000 stars. The density of this nebula is about 1000 atoms per cubic centimeter. Within this cloud, regions of particularly high density fragment themselves into large balls of gas called protostars. Gradually, the protostar shrinks, due to gravitational forces, becoming denser. As we know, whenever a gas becomes more dense, its temperature rises. Eventually, the temperature in the core of the protostar is high enough for nuclear fusion to begin; the star is born. A star the size of the Sun will shine for about 10 billion years before exhausting its fuel. A larger star, one with a mass ®fty times the mass of the Sun, will spend its fuel much more rapidly; it will live for only a few million years. After about 10 billion years, a star like the Sun, or one with a mass smaller than 4 solar masses, lacking hydrogen to fuse into helium and produce heat in its core, begins to contract because the core no longer has enough pressure to hold the overlying layers against the 489 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 20.11. The Orion Nebula, a birthplace of stars. (Courtesy C R O'Dell and S K Wong, NASA, Space Telescope Science Institute.) force of gravity. This contraction heats up the core again which starts to radiate this energy out toward the outer layers of the star. This increase in energy goes into expanding these outer layers and the star swells up. The total energy of the star is now distributed over a much greater surface area with the result that the surface temperature decreases. The star becomes a red giant. When the temperature of the core is hot enough, nuclear fusion of helium nuclei into carbon begins. Eventually, all the helium is used up and the core cools down once more. The red giant collapses into a white dwarf which will radiate energy for a 490 The General Theory of Relativity few billion years. Finally, when all its energy is exhausted, the star ends up its life as a burned-out mass called a black dwarf. It is believed that the universe is not yet old enough for the ®rst black dwarfs to have formed. More massive stars have a more dramatic end. The outer layers of a star with about 8 solar masses will explode into a supernova. In 1987, the University of Toronto astronomer Ian Shelton, working at Las Campanas Observatory in Chile, discovered a supernova in one of the satellite galaxies of the Milky Way; the Large Magellanic Cloud (®gure 11.6). Although the outer layers of the star ¯y apart at great speeds, the core of the star, however, collapses. Due to the enormous pressures, the electrons are pushed into the nucleus where they combine with protons to produce neutrons and neutrinos. The neutrinos escape and the core is now an incredibly dense sphere of neutrons. This is called a neutron star. The density of this star is so great that a neutron star with the mass of the Sun will be only about 20 km across. If a neutron star has a mass of about three solar masses, there is no force that can stop its collapse and the material of the star is compressed to a state of in®nite density. At this stage, nothing is left of the star except an intense gravitational ®eld; the star has become a black hole. As the star collapses, the curvature of spacetime becomes increasingly pronounced so that the light rays from the star are de¯ected more and more. At some point during the collapse, the curvature of spacetime is so severe that no light can escape and the body appears black (®gure 20.12). Since nothing can travel faster than light, nothing else can escape from the collapsed star. Figure 20.12. Graphic representation of the curvature of spacetime around a black hole. 491 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS At what point in the collapse of a star is the curvature of spacetime severe enough to impede light from escaping? A few years after Einstein published his general theory of relativity the German astrophysicist Karl Schwarzschild calculated this critical size, now called the Schwarzschild radius. We can see how this radius can be calculated in terms of the concept of escape velocity. Recall from chapter 4 that if an object of mass m is raised through a height h, the gravitational potential energy is increased by PE ˆ mgh. This expression is only valid if the acceleration due to gravity g is assumed constant. This, in fact, is not so, as we can see from Newton's law of universal gravitation; g diminishes as 1=r2 , where r is the distance from the center of the Earth (see chapter 6). When h is small compared to r, the expression mgh for the change in potential energy is a good approximation. If a force F is used to slowly displace an object of mass m upwards a distance h without changing its kinetic energy, this force must be equal and opposite to the weight Fgrav of the object. Then the increase in potential energy is equal to the work done on the object, Fh; that is, PE ˆ Fh ˆ ÿFgrav h where Fgrav , the weight of the object, is the gravitational force that the Earth, mass M, exerts on the object of mass m, or Mm Fgrav ˆ G 2 : r Using the methods of calculus, it can be shown that the gravitational potential energy of an object of mass m at a distance r from a mass M is PE ˆ ÿG Mm : r The escape velocity ve of an object of mass m on the surface of the Earth (at a distance R from the center of the Earth) is the minimum velocity that we must impart to the object so that it escapes the gravitational grasp of the Earth. It the object barely moves after it leaves the gravitational ®eld of the Earth, then both its kinetic energy and potential energy must be zero. Then   Mm 2 1 ‡ ÿG mv ˆ 0: e 2 R 492 The General Theory of Relativity The escape velocity is then r 2GM : ve ˆ R Substituting the mass and radius of the Earth, one ®nds that the escape velocity is 11.2 km/s. For the Moon, the escape velocity is 2.3 km/s and for Jupiter, the largest planet in the solar system, 60 km/s. That is, if we throw a ball upwards with an initial velocity of 11.2 km/s (or about 40 000 km/h), the ball will leave Earth and coast out toward in®nity (neglecting air resistance). On the Moon, we would need to impart an initial velocity of only 2.3 km/s to accomplish the same feat. Since light always travels at speed c, we could turn our expression for the escape velocity around to ®nd the critical radius within which the mass M of the star must be contained so that light does not escape from it; that is, the Schwarzschild radius. If we take v ˆ c in the escape velocity expression, Schwarzschild radius RS is given by RS ˆ 2GM : c2 We can see that the size of the Schwarzschild radius is proportional to the mass of the star. For a star with a mass similar to that of the Sun, the Schwarzschild radius is about 3 km. Although we derived this expression from Newton's mechanics rather than from the general theory of relativity, as Schwarzschild did, the expression is still correct. The behavior of objects inside a black hole, however, cannot be explained in terms of Newton's equations. As illustrated in ®gure 20.12, the spacetime near a black hole becomes severely distorted. In 1965 the British physicists Stephen Hawking and Roger Penrose showed that, according to general relativity, within a black hole the curvature of spacetime becomes in®nite and this means that the gravitational force becomes in®nite. This in®nite distortion in spacetime is called a singularity. The distance from the point of no return or event horizon ± at the Schwarzschild radius ± to the singularity is not a distance in space but rather an interval of time. In a sense, then, space and time are interchanged inside a black hole. The gravitational ®eld inside a black hole changes with time, as detected by a 493 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS hypothetical observer inside the black hole. From the outside, however, it takes an in®nite time for the ®eld to change, which is another way of saying that it does not change at all; the black hole remains static for an outside observer. This strange phenomenon is due to the gravitational time delay. At the singularity, time stops. If an astronaut were to travel into a black hole and report to the space station in orbit around the black hole his location at ten-second intervals, the messages would at ®rst arrive at The frontiers of physics: Spacetime drag According to Einstein's general theory of relativity, a spinning object drags spacetime along with it. Until recently, this prediction of general relativity had not been observed since this effect is incredibly small near the Earth. Near a very massive object, like a neutron star or a black hole, the effect should be detectable. Since we can't travel to the stars, the problem in this case is how to detect the spacetime drag from afar. In November of 1997, two teams of astronomers measured the periodic vibrations of the X-rays emitted by the gas falling into several rapidly spinning neutron stars and black holes and found evidence of spacetime dragging. General relativity predicts that if the gas surrounding a spinning star forms a disk that lies at an angle to the plane of rotation, the disk will wobble like a spinning top. This wobble is the cause of the oscillations observed by the astronomers. Wei Cui, of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology, studied the X-rays from several candidate black holes using NASA's Rossi X-ray Timing Explorer satellite and found greater dragging around the black holes spinning more rapidly (see color plate). Luigi Stella of the Astronomical Observatory of Rome and his colleague, Mario Vietri of the University of Rome, studying data from the same NASA satellite, found similar oscillations in the X-rays from several rotating neutron stars. Both results were reported at the same meeting of the American Astronomical Society in Colorado. 494 The General Theory of Relativity ten-second intervals. Just before the astronaut crosses the event horizon, the astronauts in the space station would notice the intervals getting slightly longer. Once the astronaut has crossed the event horizon, the messages take an in®nite time to arrive at the space station; that is, they never arrive. The astronaut dutifully keeps sending his messages according to his watch, but the signals cannot cross the event horizon and never reach the space station. According to the people in the space station, the astronaut's time has been gravitationally delayed. The signals have been progressively red-shifted until they appear to have an in®nite wavelength; the astronaut seems to have been frozen at the event horizon, taking an in®nite time to fall through. To the astronaut, time continues at its normal rate and nothing changes, except the enormous tidal forces that tear his body apart: this thought experiment would not be possible to carry through with a live astronaut. 495 21 THE EARLY ATOMIC THEORY The physics of the atom Physics underwent two great revolutions at the turn of the twentieth century, and Albert Einstein was in the middle of both. One, the theory of relativity, developed almost single-handedly by Einstein, changed our conception of space and time, as we saw in the previous two chapters. The other, quantum physics, the physics of the atom, which started with the work of Max Planck and Albert Einstein, changed our understanding of the nature of matter. We studied the development of the early models of the atom in chapter 7. In this and the remaining chapters, we see how this development led to our current understanding of the nature of matter, starting with the work of the two pioneers, Planck and Einstein. Black body radiation We know from experience that a hot object radiates energy. An electric stove has an orange glow when it is hot. But even cold objects radiate energy. In fact, all objects glow, but unless the temperatures are high enough, the glow is invisible. Throughout the nineteenth century, physicists knew that this type of radiation was a wave phenomenon, more properly called electromagnetic radiation. They also knew that the reason why we sometimes see the glow is because some of the frequencies of this electromagnetic radiation happen to be the same as the frequencies of light to which our eyes respond. 496 The Early Atomic Theory Just before the beginning of the twentieth century, physicists considered the problem of the radiation emitted and absorbed by objects at different temperatures. When radiation falls on an object, part is absorbed and the rest is re¯ected. If we place a brick on a table in the middle of a room and wait a few minutes, the brick will absorb energy from the surroundings at the same rate that it re-emits it back to the surroundings. The brick is in thermal equilibrium with the surroundings. If the brick, in thermal equilibrium with the surroundings, were to absorb more energy than it emits, it would become spontaneously warmer than its surroundings. A light-colored object re¯ects more of the radiation falling upon it than a dark-colored object. Since an object in thermal equilibrium with its surroundings absorbs and emits energy at the same rate, a dark-colored object, being a good absorber of energy, is also a good emitter. An imaginary body that absorbs all radiation incident upon it is called an ideal black body. Ideal black bodies, then, are perfect absorbers and perfect emitters. A good approximation to a black body is a hollow block with a small hole, as shown in ®gure 21.1. When scientists measured the radiation emitted by this black body at different wavelengths, they found that the experimental results could not be explained with what was known at the time about the nature of radiation. Scientists had proposed that the light emitted by an object was formed by the continuous changes in energy of charged particles oscillating within the matter. When they calculated the energy emitted in a continuous Figure 21.1. A cavity as an approximation to a black body. Radiation entering through the hole has a very small chance of leaving the cavity before it is completely absorbed by the walls of the cavity. 497 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 21.2. Black body radiation curve representing the measured values of the energy radiated at different wavelengths. The broken line shows the calculations based on what was known at the time. The calculations do not agree with the measurements at ultraviolet wavelengths. way by these oscillating particles, their results agreed with the experimental measurements only for very long wavelengths (®gure 21.2). At short wavelengths their theoretical calculations predicted that the energy radiated should become larger and larger (broken line in ®gure 21.2), whereas the experiments showed that at those wavelengths the energy should approach a value of zero, an anomaly that became known as the ``ultraviolet catastrophe''. In 1900, the German physicist Max Planck was able to solve the problem. He did so by making an assumption which seemed very strange, and which Planck himself could not understand initially. He assumed that the energy emitted by the charged particles in this black body could only have certain discrete values. The oscillating charged particles lose or gain energy, not in a continuous way, but in discrete jumps. In other words, the energy was radiated in little bundles or packets. Furthermore, the energy of radiation was directly proportional to the frequency of radiation. Planck called these bundles of energy quanta. His formula is E ˆ hf 498 The Early Atomic Theory where h is a constant, called Planck's constant, and f is the frequency. The value of Planck's constant is h ˆ 6:626  10ÿ34 Js ˆ 4:136  10ÿ15 eVs: According to Planck's equation, the energy of each quantum depends on its frequency of oscillation. Since the value of Planck's constant h is very small, the quantum idea becomes important only in systems where the energies are very small, as is the case with atoms. Planck's equation not only ®ts the observed black body radiation curves but also settles the ``ultraviolet catastrophe'' argument. At high frequencies, corresponding to short wavelengths, radiation consists of high-energy quanta, and only a few oscillators will have that much energy, so only a few high-energy quanta are emitted. This is the left part of the radiation curve (®gure 21.2), where the values of the energy radiated are very small, approaching zero. At low frequencies, corresponding to long wavelengths, the quanta have low energies and many oscillators will have these energies, resulting in the emission of many low-energy quanta, but they each have so little energy that even added together, the emitted radiation does not amount to much. This corresponds to the right side of the radiation curve in ®gure 21.2, where the energies have small values. It is only in the middle frequencies where there are plenty of oscillators with middle wavelengths that have enough energy to emit quanta of moderate size which, when added together, produce the peak in the radiation curve. Planck's insight was to realize that different energies were associated with different wavelengths, instead of assuming that the energy was equally distributed between different wavelengths, as the previous radiation theories had proposed. The photoelectric effect About the same time that Planck was struggling with the problem of black body radiation, other physicists were trying to understand a seemingly unrelated problem, known as the photoelectric effect. It had been observed by Heinrich Hertz in 1887 that when ultraviolet light shone on certain metallic surfaces, electrons were ejected from those surfaces (®gure 21.3), provided that the frequency 499 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 21.3. The photoelectric effect: (a) Dim UV light of high frequency produces few fast electrons. (b) Intense high frequency UV light produces many fast electrons. (c) Dim UV light of lower frequency produces few slow electrons. (d) Intense UV light of lower frequency produces many slow electrons. (e) Red light (much lower frequency) produces no electrons. of the radiation exceeded a critical threshold. The number of electrons emitted was proportional to the intensity of the light, as was expected. However, the kinetic energies of the emitted electrons were not in any way related to the incident light intensity. This was quite puzzling. In 1905, Albert Einstein, considered the problem of the photoelectric effect. Einstein assumed that the quanta of energy that Planck had introduced to explain the black body radiation were also characteristic of light rather than a special property 500 The Early Atomic Theory related only to a single phenomenon. Thus, he assumed that light also consisted of discrete quanta of energy. When one of these quanta, or photons as he called them, struck the surface of the metal, all its energy was transmitted to an electron in the metal. Thus, an electron could only absorb energy in packets or bundles of energy, so that a light of greater intensity did not provide more energy for the electron to absorb, just more photons per second, and the chances of a single electron getting hit twice was extremely unlikely. However, a more intense beam, having more photons, would strike more electrons in the metal. An electron would require a minimum amount of energy to break away from the surface of the metal. This minimal energy was called the work function  (the Greek letter phi). Because Einstein assumed that Planck's radiation formula was universal, the energy of the photons was also given by E ˆ hf , so that a minimum value of the energy implied a minimum value of the frequency. This explained the threshold frequency below which no electrons could be emitted. Einstein's theory of the photoelectric effect accounted for all the puzzling experimental observations. According to Einstein, when a photon of energy E ˆ hf strikes an electron in a metal, the electron absorbs all the energy of the photon. The energetic electron then starts to make its way toward the surface of the metal. From the principle of conservation of energy, we know that if the energy E gained by the electron is larger than the work function  of the metal, the electron reaches the surface and escapes. The energy that remains is the kinetic energy of the ejected electron. That is, energy gained from the photon ˆ energy to leave the metal ‡ kinetic energy, or hf ˆ energy to free the electron ‡ KE: Since the work function  is the minimal energy required to free the electron, some of the electrons leave the metal with kinetic energy as great as KEmax ˆ hf ÿ : 501 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Table 21.1. Work functions of some elements. Element  (eV) Aluminum Calcium Cesium Germanium Iron Platinum Potassium Sodium Tungsten 4.20 2.71 1.96 4.61 3.91 5.22 2.24 2.28 4.54 This expression is Einstein's equation for the photoelectric effect. In Table 21.1 we list the work functions of some elements. The photoelectric effect has practical applications in the detection of very weak light. Some sensitive television cameras make use of photomultiplier tubes in which an incident photon ejects an electron from a photosensitive area at the front of the tube. The ejected electron is accelerated by an electric ®eld, then strikes a metal surface, producing the emission of several more electrons, which in turn strike additional electrons from further metal surfaces. The result is a cascade of electrons down the tube (®gure 21.4). A high-gain photomultiplier tube can transform the arrival of a single photon at its face into the emission of a billion electrons, which can easily be detected. If light consists of discrete quanta of energy or photons, then light has particle properties. But light also exhibits wave properties, as we have seen. Can light be both a particle and a wave? These two concepts are mutually contradictory. Either light is a particle or it is a wave. It cannot be both, in much the same way that a person cannot be big and small at the same time. Einstein's theory introduced a con¯ict in physics. It took about twenty years for this con¯ict to be resolved. In this crucial year of 1905, Einstein published in three major papers his Special Theory of Relativity, his explanation of a phenomenon known as Brownian motion, and his explanation of the photoelectric effect. In light of these discoveries, the year 1905 is known in the scienti®c world as Einstein's annus mirabilis. Although by the time Einstein received the Nobel Prize he had 502 The Early Atomic Theory Figure 21.4. In a photomultiplier tube, an incident photon strikes an electron from a photosensitive area near its face. This electron in turn strikes other electrons from subsequent positively-charged metal surfaces, ejecting them. A cascade of electrons is produced. also published his General Theory of Relativity, perhaps the greatest intellectual achievement of all time, he received the Prize for his explanation of the photoelectric effect. It is believed that the Nobel committee thought at the time that the theory of relativity was too controversial. The Bohr model of the atom revisited As we learned back in chapter 7, the Danish physicist Niels Bohr used Einstein's idea of the quantum of energy to construct a model of the atom which explained the observed spectrum of the hydrogen atom very well. We saw in chapter 18 that the emission and absorption lines of the hydrogen spectrum are produced by photons emitted or absorbed in the electronic transitions between Bohr's allowed orbits. The energy of these photons is given precisely by Planck's formula E ˆ hf . If we call Ei the energy of the electron in the initial state, and Ef its energy in the ®nal state, then Ei ÿ Ef ˆ hf is the change in 503 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Physics in our world: Using photons to detect tumors Shining a strong light on an object produces a sharp shadow. This simple fact is the basis for transillumination, a technique used in breast examinations. A tumor inside a woman's breast casts a shadow when a strong beam of light is sent through the soft tissue of the breast. The tissue itself, however, scatters some of the light, making it dif®cult to detect tumors smaller than about a centimeter across. Scientists have recently succeeded in developing a technique that might make it possible to detect very small tumors. When light enters the soft tissue of the breast, some of the photons travel in a nearly straight line, while the rest bounce off the molecules of the tissue and follow a more tortuous path. Since only the straight-line photons produce a sharp image of the tumor, scientists need to separate the straight-line photons from the rest. (Courtesy Image Diagnostic Systems, Inc.) The straight-line photons reach the other side earlier than the rest. In other words, the direct photons will arrive at the detector slightly ahead of the other photons. The time difference between the two sets of photons is incredibly small, of the order of a few picoseconds (trillionths of a 504 The Early Atomic Theory second). Physicists at the University of Michigan have developed a fast gate that opens and closes at the rate required to separate the two sets of photons when placed in front of the detector. Using this new technique, the scientists are able to detect spots 200 micrometers (thousandths of a millimeter) across inside samples of human breast tissue 3.5 millimeters thick. The scientists' goal now is to increase the depth of tissue and to reduce the size of the spots that they are able to detect. energy of an electron jumping from level i to level f. We can illustrate the absorption and emission processes with the aid of an energy-level diagram. Figure 21.5 shows the energy-level diagram for the hydrogen atom where various series of transitions are indicated by vertical arrows between the levels, named for the scientists who discovered them. As we saw in chapter 18, in an energy-level diagram, the letter n designates the energy level, beginning with n ˆ 1, the ground state, the lowest stationary state for the electron. Since only changes in potential energy have any meaning, any convenient zero-level for the energy can be chosen. When n ˆ 1 Figure 21.5. Energy level diagram for the hydrogen atom. Only the Balmer series is in the visible range of wavelengths. 505 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS the electron is so far from the nucleus that it does not feel its attraction, and we take its interaction energy to be zero. The energy of any other state, En , is the difference from this n ˆ 1 state. As the electrons jump to energy states that are closer to the nucleus, their energies decrease and, as we have just seen, they radiate this energy. Thus, the energies of these states are less than the energy of the n ˆ 1 state, which has been assigned the value of zero. To be less than zero, the energies of these states must be negative. Bohr showed that the energy, En , of a particular level n is En ˆ ÿ EGS n2 where EGS ˆ 2:2  10ÿ18 J ˆ 13:6 eV is the lowest energy possible for an electron in a hydrogen atom, its ground state energy. This expression allows us to calculate the energy absorbed or emitted when an electron jumps from one energy level to another, in terms of the ground state energy. Bohr's theory agrees with experiment only for the hydrogen atom, and it does not work well for more complicated atoms. Nevertheless, it was the ®rst theory that attempted to explain the structure of the atom. It should be noted, however, that Bohr constructed his theory to agree with experiment and could not explain why the electrons did not radiate when they were in the stationary orbits allowed by his theory, nor how the electrons absorbed or emitted energy when they underwent a transition between orbits. These were ad hoc assumptions. Ten years later a bright graduate student in Paris was to introduce a new idea that would become the basis for a completely different kind of physics that would explain these assumptions. De Broglie's waves Louis Victor de Broglie was a graduate student at the University of Paris looking for a dissertation topic. He was fascinated with the wave-particle duality that Einstein had introduced and reasoned that perhaps electrons could also exhibit particle and wave characteristics. This problem became his dissertation research. By 1924 de Broglie's dissertation was complete, but his advisor 506 The Early Atomic Theory Figure 21.6. De Broglie's standing waves for the allowed orbits. was apprehensive about granting him his doctorate based on a highly speculative idea. He decided to show the work to Einstein. It was only when Einstein accepted the idea as ``sound'' that de Broglie's degree was granted. In 1929 de Broglie received the Nobel Prize for his theory. De Broglie's theory explained the stationary orbits in Bohr's model of the hydrogen atom by assuming that each electron orbit was a standing wave. Since the orbits in Bohr's model are circles, the electron wave must be a circular standing wave that closes in on itself, as shown in ®gure 21.6. The frequency and wavelength of electron waves in de Broglie's theory are f ˆ E h and ˆ h mv where m is the mass of the electron and v its velocity. In 1927, the American physicists C J Davisson and L H Germer observed interference patterns with electron beams, as if the electron beam had wave properties (see ®gure 21.7). De Broglie's prediction was thus con®rmed. The wave nature of electrons is the basis for the electron microscope, invented in 1932 by Ernst Ruska in Germany. The resolution of a microscope (that is, its ability to reproduce details in a magni®ed image) is inversely proportional to the wavelength of the light used to illuminate the object. Electron wavelengths are much shorter than those of visible light. Since the energy of the electrons is proportional to their frequency and inversely proportional to their wavelength, fast electrons have shorter wavelengths. ``Illuminating'' an object with electron waves in an electron microscope, therefore, produces higher magni®cations than ordinary light. Some of the most powerful electron 507 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 21.7. Diffraction pattern obtained by passing an electron beam through a crystal. (From PSSC Physics Seventh Edition, by HaberSchaim, Dodge, Gardner, and Shore. Published by Kendall/Hunt Publishing Company, 1991.) Figure 21.8. Scorpion at 180 magni®cation. (Courtesy S McDanels, NASA Kennedy Space Center.) 508 The Early Atomic Theory microscopes achieve magni®cations of over 1 000 000 allowing the observation of objects as small as 0.05 nm. Figure 21.8 shows a scorpion at 180 magni®cation. Quantum mechanics After de Broglie introduced his matter-wave hypothesis, things began to move fast. The major problem that physicists were trying to solve was that of the wave nature of the electron. In 1926 the Austrian physicist Erwin SchroÈdinger presented an equation that described the wave behavior of the electron in the hydrogen atom. Independently of SchroÈdinger, a twenty-fouryear old professor of physics at GoÈttingen by the name of Werner Heisenberg undertook a purely mathematical treatment of atomic particles. Heisenberg's approach was later proven equivalent to SchroÈdinger's wave equation theory. This new theory became known as quantum mechanics. In the years that followed, many discussions took place between Einstein, Bohr, Heisenberg, SchroÈdinger, and most of the great physicists of the time, about the interpretation of quantum mechanics, and especially about the meaning of the wave equation. Soon they agreed that the waves associated with the atomic particles like the electron did not represent the actual motion of the electron. They quickly realized that the electron neither acts like a wave nor was smeared out throughout the wave. The physicist Max Born suggested instead that these waves were waves of probability; that is, they represented the probability of ®nding the electron in some region of space. What is then the actual motion of the electrons around the nucleus? Quantum mechanics tells us that this question cannot be answered because, as Bohr pointed out, the electron is not simply a particle, in the macroscopic sense. Thus, it is meaningless to ask how it moves from one point to another. The only thing we can ask now is what is the probability of ®nding the electron at a certain location around the nucleus. After an observation, it is possible to determine that the electron occupied some position in space. Another observation may locate the electron at some other point. The path that the electron takes in moving between those two points cannot be known. In fact, an electron 509 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS has a well de®ned position only when it is being observed. Position is not an intrinsic property of an electron. As we can see, quantum mechanics has weird consequences. In fact, weird is an adjective that is very often found associated with quantum mechanics. That doesn't make it wrong, however. Many real devices, like computer chips for example, are based on our knowledge of quantum mechanics. Quantum mechanics gives us a very accurate picture of the atomic world. The only problem is that this picture is highly mathematical and impossible to translate into concrete images that we can visualize. Furthermore, although most physicists agree that quantum mechanics is correct (in the sense that the scienti®c method allows a theory to be correct), its interpretation is still subject to animated discussions not only among physicists and other members of the scienti®c community, but also among philosophers. The best we can say is that quantum mechanics works, but nobody really understands it. 510 22 QUANTUM MECHANICS The beginnings of quantum mechanics Einstein's 1905 paper on the photoelectric effect, in which he considered Planck's idea of quanta of energy to be a universal characteristic of light, marks the beginning of quantum theory. For over ten years Einstein stood alone on the issue of energy quantization of light; and although in 1915 experimental con®rmation of his photoelectric effect came from painstaking experiments performed by Millikan, acceptance of the idea that light was composed of particles was far from universal. Millikan himself wrote in 1915: ``Despite . . . the apparent complete success of the Einstein equation, the physical theory of which it was designed to be the symbolic expression is found so untenable that Einstein himself, I believe, no longer holds to it.'' Einstein did hold to it. It was only in the mid 1920s when Heisenberg, SchroÈdinger, Dirac and others developed the ®rst forms of the quantum theory, that serious discussions concerning the particle nature of light and the meaning of the new theory began. Discussions about the meaning of quantum theory continue today. The new mechanics of the atom In the summer of 1922, Niels Bohr delivered a series of invited lectures at the University of GoÈttingen in Germany. Attending these lectures was a 22 year-old graduate student from the University of Munich, Werner Heisenberg. Bohr's lecture left a profound impression upon the young student. ``I shall never forget the ®rst lecture,'' Heisenberg wrote later. ``The hall was 511 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS ®lled to capacity. The great Danish physicist . . . stood on the platform, his head slightly inclined, and a friendly but somewhat embarrassed smile on his lips. Summer light ¯ooded in through the wide-open windows. Bohr spoke fairly softly, with a slight Danish accent . . . each of his carefully formulated sentences revealed a long chain of underlying thoughts, of philosophical re¯ections, hinted at but never fully expressed. I found this approach highly exciting; what he said seemed both new and not quite new at the same time.'' The young student ``dared to make a critical remark'' during one of the lectures. Bohr immediately recognized the brilliant mind of the student and invited him after the lecture for a walk over the Hain Mountain to further discuss his objections. At the end of their long walk that afternoon Bohr suggested that Heisenberg join his Institute in Copenhagen after graduation. ``You must pay us a visit in Copenhagen,'' Bohr told him, ``perhaps you could stay with us for a term, and we might do some physics together.'' ``My real scienti®c career only began that afternoon,'' wrote Heisenberg later, ``suddenly the future looked full of hope and new possibilities, which, after seeing Bohr home, I painted to myself in the most glorious colors all the way back to my lodgings.'' The Niels Bohr Institute in Copenhagen was a place where the young brilliant physicists from Europe, America, and the Soviet Union would gather to study the problems of the atom. There Heisenberg found the atmosphere he needed to unleash his profound intellect. He had obtained his PhD in 1924, at the age of 23, and had immediately joined Bohr at his Institute. After almost a year with Bohr, Heisenberg returned to GoÈttingen as an assistant to Max Born, then director of the Physics Institute. At GoÈttingen, Heisenberg worked on the problem of atomic spectral lines, trying to ®nd a mathematical expression for the line intensities of the hydrogen spectrum. This attempt proved unsuccessful, leading to ``an impenetrable morass of complicated mathematical equations, with no way out.'' Nevertheless, something useful came out of this. Heisenberg decided that the problem of the actual orbits of the electrons inside the atom should be ignored; they have no meaning. Only the frequencies and amplitudes associated with the spectral lines have any meaning, since they can be observed directly. Rather than the ``morass 512 Quantum Mechanics of complicated mathematical equations,'' Heisenberg turned to a much simpler system: a simple pendulum. The oscillations of a pendulum could be used as a model for the atomic vibrations. Toward the end of May 1925 a bout of spring hay fever made Heisenberg so ill that he asked Born for a two weeks' leave of absence. He went straight for Heligoland, a small rocky island in the North Sea, near Hamburg, with fresh sea breezes, far from the pollen of the meadows of the mainland. There Heisenberg had enough time to re¯ect upon his problem. ``A few days were enough to jettison all the mathematical ballast that invariably encumbers the beginning of such attempts, and to arrive at a simpler formulation of my problem.'' Lightning had struck. In a few more days, he had some preliminary calculations which looked quite promising. What he needed was the proof that his new formalism presented no contradictions and, in particular, that it obeyed the principle of conservation of energy. One evening, he reached a point where the proof could be obtained. Heisenberg, too excited to stop, worked well into the night. By three o'clock in the morning, he had invented a new mechanics. Returning to GoÈttingen, Heisenberg wrote up his paper, ®nishing it in July 1925. In his paper, he described the energy transitions of the atom as an array of numbers and found rules that these arrays must obey in order to calculate atomic processes. Unsure that his paper was ready for publication, he showed it to Born, who immediately recognized these arrays as matrices, and the rules that they obeyed as the rules for matrix algebra. Born sent the paper to Zeitschrift fuÈr Physik. Max Born enlisted the assistance of his student Pascual Jordan and together they further developed Heisenberg's theory. Matrices, it turned out, were the correct tools to describe atomic processes. The fundamental property of Heisenberg's new mechanics is that measurable quantities like position and momentum are no longer represented by numbers but by matrices. And matrices do not obey the commutative law of multiplication. That is, if we multiply matrix p by matrix q, the answer we get is different from what we get when we multiply matrix q by matrix p. In Newtonian mechanics, if q ˆ 3 is the position of a particle and p ˆ 2 its momentum, the product of these two numbers does not depend on the order in which we multiply them; that is, p  q ˆ 2  3 ˆ 6 and q  p ˆ 3  2 ˆ 6. In a paper Born and 513 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Jordan published together, they show that the difference between the two matrix products pq and qp is proportional to Planck's constant h. In Newtonian physics, this difference is equal to zero since p  q ÿ q  p ˆ 6 ÿ 6 ˆ 0. Because our universe is discrete, not continuous, Planck's constant is not zero and the difference between the two matrix products is not zero. Because h is very small, we do not notice this discreteness in the macroscopic world. The discrete nature of our world forces us to forgo the use of simple numbers to represent quantities like position and momentum; they must be represented by matrices. That Heisenberg was able to realize this in the few days at Heligoland can only be explained as the insight of a genius. In July 1925, Heisenberg gave a lecture at the Cavendish Laboratory in Cambridge. In the audience was another brilliant physicist, Paul Dirac, eight months younger than Heisenberg. Although Heisenberg did not mention his new theory during the lecture, he did discuss it with a few scientists afterwards and even left a prepublication copy of his paper with Dirac's supervisor, who passed it on to the young scientist. Dirac immediately understood the importance of Heisenberg's work and began working on it himself. A few weeks later, Dirac wrote a lucid paper where he showed that Heisenberg's new mechanics was a complete theory that replaced Newtonian mechanics. Meanwhile, Heisenberg, Born, and Jordan arrived at the same conclusion using a different path. After only a few months of concentrated work by these four scientists, the ®rst coherent theory of the atom emerged. It was called matrix mechanics and is one of the several forms of quantum mechanics, the mechanics of the atom. Wave mechanics Einstein in his 1905 paper on the photoelectric effect had theorized that light was a particle ± the photon ± and in 1909 suggested that a theory of light should incorporate both the particle and wave theories of light. In 1923, as we saw in chapter 21, Louis de Broglie suggested that all matter ± an electron, for example ± should also display wavelike behavior. De Broglie proceeded to calculate the wavelength of the electron and to suggest that his prediction could be con®rmed experimentally if a diffraction pattern of electrons 514 Quantum Mechanics Figure 22.1. de Broglie's standing waves for circular stationary orbits. were observed. This work was de Broglie's doctoral thesis. In 1927, Davisson and Germer observed interference patterns in electron beams. Erwin SchroÈdinger, a professor of physics at the University of Zurich, read in one of Einstein's papers of 1925 a positive reference to de Broglie's work. Einstein, we recall, had commented favorably on de Broglie's ideas when Paul Langevin, de Broglie's thesis director, sent Einstein a copy of the thesis. According to de Broglie's ideas, a wave of some sort must be associated with an electron. When the electron orbits the nucleus in Bohr's model of the atom, a resonance condition that gives rise to Bohr's stationary states must exist, in a similar fashion to the appearance of stationary con®gurations produced by standing waves on a string. For a circular orbit, de Broglie reasoned, an integral number of wavelengths must coincide exactly with the circumference of a stationary-state orbit (®gure 22.1). After studying de Broglie's papers, SchroÈdinger used the mathematics of waves to calculate the allowed energy levels, obtaining values that did not agree with the observed patterns of atomic spectra. Not being successful with his initial calculation, SchroÈdinger put the work aside for several months. Peter Debye, head of the research group at Zurich, having heard of de Broglie's work, asked SchroÈdinger to give a seminar on the subject. The discussion at the seminar stimulated SchroÈdinger to return to his work. In a few weeks during the Christmas holidays, SchroÈdinger developed a wave equation which governed the propagation of electron waves. With his wave equation, SchroÈdinger correctly obtained the light spectrum of hydrogen. Before direct experimental veri®cation of electron interference, de Broglie's strange idea that the electron was a wave was quantitatively vindicated by SchroÈdinger. His paper was published in January 1926. Wave mechanics, 515 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Pioneers of physics: SchroÈdinger's inspired guess SchroÈdinger reasoned that if an electron has a wavelike behavior, then it should be possible to describe this behavior in space and time by a wave equation. He devised an equation ± a wave equation ± that controls the behavior of the wave and that speci®es the connection between this behavior and the behavior of the particle. His starting point was the principle of conservation of energy. Applying de Broglie's relation between momentum and wavelength and Planck's E ˆ hf relation, SchroÈdinger was able to guess the mathematical form of the wave equation. We must stress that SchroÈdinger's equation cannot be derived; it was obtained by a postulate. Its justi®cation is not that it has been deduced from previous known facts, but that its predictions can be experimentally veri®ed. ``Where did we get that [equation] from?'' asked Richard Feynman, ``Nowhere. It is not possible to derive it from anything you know. It came from the mind of SchroÈdinger.'' as SchroÈdinger's theory was initially called, was a second completely general way of formulating the mechanics of the atom. As Dirac was later on to prove, the two approaches, matrix mechanics and wave mechanics, are equivalent and both are generalizations that include Newton's theory as a special case. What are these waves in SchroÈdinger's theory? The ®rst answer came from SchroÈdinger himself. Perhaps electrons and all other subatomic particles are not really particles but waves. The entire universe is nothing but a great wave phenomenon. This interpretation was quickly rejected by Max Born because it would not explain the fact that you could count individual particles with a Geiger counter and see their tracks in a cloud chamber. Max Born offered a better solution to this puzzle. In 1924, before SchroÈdinger developed his theory, Bohr had written a paper in which he had attempted to solve the contradiction between the particle picture and the wave picture introduced by de Broglie. In that paper Bohr had considered the concept of probability waves. He interpreted the electromagnetic waves not as real waves but as waves of probability the intensity of which 516 Quantum Mechanics determines the probability that the atom is going to undergo a transition from one energy level to another. Born extended Bohr's concept and developed a clear mathematical de®nition of the wave functions in SchroÈdinger's theory which he interpreted as probability waves. These waves were not three-dimensional waves like electromagnetic waves, but waves of many dimensions; they were, then, abstract mathematical entities. According to Bohr's interpretation, the SchroÈdinger wave function of an electron gives the probability of locating an electron in a particular region of space. More precisely, the square of the wave amplitude at some point in space is the probability of ®nding the electron there. Heisenberg's uncertainty principle In Heligoland, we recall, Heisenberg had discovered that observable or measurable quantities were to be represented by matrices. In 1927, Heisenberg showed that if two matrices q and p represented two physical properties of a particle, like position and momentum or time and energy, which obeyed the noncommutative rule, that is, that the difference between the product pq and qp was proportional to Planck's constant, then one could not measure both properties simultaneously with in®nite precision. This statement is known as Heisenberg's Uncertainty Principle. To illustrate this principle, let's consider a possible experiment with electrons. In chapter 18, we discussed the diffraction of light in Young's double-slit experiment in which a beam of light passed initially through a single narrow slit and then through a pair of slits that formed two coherent beams. These beams interfered with each other, producing an interference pattern on a screen. We can understand this interference pattern if we think of light as a wave. In fact, this was the experimental proof given by Young that light was a wave phenomenon. Light, Einstein told us, also behaves as a particle. Can we think of light as made up of particles and still understand Young's double-slit experiment? What if we use electrons instead of photons? Consider a source of electrons, like the electron gun in a regular television tube, a thin metal plate with two very narrow slits in it, and a phosphor-coated screen that produces a ¯ash 517 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 22.2. (a) Double-slit experiment with electrons. (b) Probability that an electron hits the screen at a particular point when only one slit is open. (c) Probability when both slits are open. when an electron collides with it, like a television screen (®gure 22.2(a)). What we observe is that the ¯ashes on the screen indicate that each electron hits the screen in just one point. If we cover either one of the slits and let the experiment run for some time, counting the number of ¯ashes at any given position on the screen, what we obtain for the probability of arrival of the electron at various locations on the screen is the pattern shown in ®gure 22.2(b). Uncovering both slits gives us the pattern shown in ®gure 22.2(c) for the probability of arrival. This pattern looks like the interference fringes obtained in the original Young's double-slit experiment with waves shown in ®gure 18.9! Figure 22.3 is a photograph of the interference pattern for electrons in a double-slit experiment. Observing the regions where the probability is minimum with both slits open we notice that the number of counts with both slits open is smaller than the counts with only one slit open. This is due to destructive interference in those regions, a phenomenon characteristic of waves. The electrons are behaving like waves even though they arrive at the screen and make a ¯ash, like particles. A wave does not hit the screen at a single point. Could it be that the many electrons in the beam are somehow interacting with each other and ``cooperating'' so that when they 518 Quantum Mechanics Figure 22.3. Photograph of a double-slit interference experiment with electrons. (Courtesy Claus Jonsson.) arrive at the screen, an interference pattern is formed? To investigate this, we could reduce the intensity of the beam until we have just a single electron traveling at a time. We begin to notice the ¯ashes on the screen and, as before, we record their position. At ®rst, no pattern is noticeable. When enough ¯ashes accumulate, we begin to see the interference pattern again, as if each electron interferes with itself ! How can an electron interfere with itself? Are the electrons, somehow, passing through both slits at once and then recombining to form the interference pattern? We could install small detectors near the slits to determine which slit the electron passes through. The detectors might shine some light on it so that we can observe the scattered light. The ®rst thing we notice is that the electrons go through either one of the slits; no funny business of one electron going through both slits at once is observed. Everything seems normal, as we would expect particles to behave. As before, we record the ¯ashes and when enough of them accumulate, we see that the interference pattern has disappeared. The probability that an electron hits the screen at a given location is what we would obtain for regular particles. Observing the electrons destroys the interference pattern. Determining the position of the electron destroys their ability to interfere. It might be that the light we are using to observe the electrons disturbs them and changes their behavior. To get around this dif®culty, we reduce the intensity of the light shining on the electrons and repeat the experiment. Reducing the intensity of the light means that we reduce the energy of the photons. As we 519 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS might recall, the energy of each photon, from Planck's formula, is given by hf, where f is the frequency of the light. If we have n photons in each ¯ash, the total energy is E ˆ nhf . We can reduce the intensity of the light shining on the electrons by sending very few photons so that n is small. When we use one photon for every electron that passes, no interference pattern is observed and we account for the position of each electron. Reducing the number of photons even more results in some electrons not being seen. Not only do we lose information about the location of each electron, but we begin to observe a faint interference pattern on the screen, produced by the electrons that we failed to see. We need at least one photon for every electron if we want to know through which slit they pass. Reducing the intensity of the light shining on the electrons by reducing the frequency increases the wavelength of the light which reduces the resolution of our detector; that is, its ability to determine the location of the electron. When the frequency is not too small and the wavelength small enough to let us see each electron, no interference pattern is produced. It might be that we are still disturbing the electrons. If we reduce the intensity of the light so as not to disturb the passing electrons, the wavelength becomes larger than the distance between the slits and we cannot tell which one the electron went through. And on top of that, the interference pattern returns! Our attempt to observe the electrons without disturbing them has not worked. What Heisenberg's uncertainty principle tells us is that it cannot work. Our failure is not due to our lack of imagination, or to lack of better instrumentation; it will never work. It is an intrinsic limitation of nature. This is the way the universe works. It is not possible for us to determine through which slit the electron passes on its way to the screen. The only solution is that the electron goes through both slits at once and carries their imprint when it arrives at the screen. This concept is impossible for us to imagine and it is only through mathematics that physicists have been able to encapsulate this phenomenon. Heisenberg derived a mathematical expression to explain this intrinsic limitation of nature. If the uncertainty in the measurement of the position of the electron along the vertical direction is
q and the uncertainty in this component of the momentum is
p, Heisenberg's uncertainty principle says that the product of 520 Quantum Mechanics these two uncertainties must never be smaller than a certain constant, which is equal to Planck's constant h divided by 2; that is,
q
p  h : 2 This constant h=2 is equal to 1:055  10ÿ34 J s and places a lower limit to the value of the product of the uncertainties. If our instruments allow us to measure the electron's position with an uncertainty of only one-millionth of a meter (10ÿ6 m), for example, the uncertainty in the momentum must be no smaller than 1:055  10ÿ28 kg m/s so that the product is at least h=2. This makes the uncertainty in the electron's velocity equal to about 100 m/s. If with better instruments we reduce the uncertainty of the position to one nanometer, 10ÿ9 m, the uncertainty in the electron's velocity becomes one thousand times larger. The momentum has become so uncertain that we will not know whether, one second later, the electron will still be near the instruments or 100 km away! We must emphasize here that the concept of uncertainty applies not to a single measurement but to the measurement of many electrons. Heisenberg's uncertainty principle is a statement about a statistical average over many measurements. As can be seen from the above discussion, the name particle for electrons is an unfortunate one because it gives the idea that electrons are like dust particles or any other macroscopic particle. Electrons and other quantum ``particles'' are really quantum entities with properties given by the laws of quantum mechanics. The new physics What are we to make of all this? As the double-slit experiment with electrons showed, the act of observation changes the system being observed. Electrons and other quantum particles behave like particles and like waves, depending on the particular observation. If we set up an experiment to detect the wave nature  Since momentum is the product of mass times velocity, and the mass of the electron is 9:11  10ÿ31 kg. The uncertainty in the velocity is then the uncertainty in the momentum, 1:055  10ÿ28 kg m/s, divided by is 9:11  10ÿ31 kg, or 116 m/s. 521 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS The frontiers of physics: Knowledge and certainty For all its power and its implications for our knowledge of nature, the mathematical expression that Heisenberg developed for his uncertainty principle looks surprisingly simple. We can illustrate the method that Heisenberg used to obtain it as follows: We can call the uncertainty in the position of the electron along the vertical direction
q. The position of the electron when it hits the screen depends on the component of the electron's momentum along the vertical axis (q-axis); the uncertainty in this component of the momentum is
p. If we use light of wavelength  to observe each electron, then the uncertainty in the position is equal to , or
q ˆ . The momentum imparted to the particle is at the most equal the momentum of the photon, which is given by de Broglie's relation. De Broglie's relation, from chapter 21, is  ˆ h=mv ˆ h=
p, so that the uncertainty in the momentum is approximately
p  h=. The product of the two uncertainties
q and
p is
q
p  h: What Heisenberg's uncertainty principle says is that the product of these two uncertainties must always be greater than Planck's constant h. Heisenberg's more detailed derivation gives the form of the uncertainty principle as
q
p  h : 2 of the electron, we ®nd wave phenomena such as interference and diffraction. If we set up an experiment to detect the electron's particle nature, we detect particles. Which one is the correct interpretation? What is the true nature of the electron? According to Bohr, it is meaningless to ask what an electron really is. Physics does not tell us about what is but about what we can describe regarding the world. Both theoretical pictures, the wave picture and the particle picture, are equally valid in describing the electron and provide complementary descriptions of reality. 522 Quantum Mechanics Physics in our world: Electron microscopes Soon after it was discovered that high speed electrons had wavelengths that were much shorter than the wavelengths of light, physicists showed that magnetic ®elds could act as lenses by causing electron waves to converge to a focus. In 1931, Max Knoll and Ernst Ruska built the ®rst microscope that focused electron waves instead of light waves. The electrons were focused with electric or magnetic ®elds. Diagram of a transmission electron microscope, TEM. 523 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS In the design of Knoll and Ruska which is based on an optical microscope and known as the transmission electron microscope (TEM), a hot tungsten wire emits electrons which are focused on the specimen by a magnet acting as a condenser ``electron lens.'' An objective lens produces a magni®ed image which becomes the object for the projector lens. The image is further magni®ed and projected onto a ¯uorescent screen or a photographic plate. A few years after the invention of the TEM, Knoll modi®ed their earlier design so that the focused electron beam scanned the surface of the specimen. In the scanning electron microscope (SEM), as his invention is known, electrons from the surface of the specimen are knocked out by the incident electrons. Some of these electrons can be detected by an electrode. As the beam scans the surface, more electrons are knocked out from sharp edges than from a ¯at surface and a map of the object can be generated on a CRT. SEM image of a brass ®tting from a liquid oxygen tanker at launch pad 39A at the Kennedy Space Center showing dendritic structure. (Courtesy V Cummings, NASA Kennedy Space Center.) 524 Quantum Mechanics A modern TEM can produce magni®cations up to 1 000 000 and resolve objects as small as 0.2 nm. A modern SEM, on the other hand, can produce magni®cations that range from 15 to about 100 000. The SEM, however, produces an image with a large depth of ®eld, giving the impression of a three-dimensional surface relief. Both instruments are based on the extremely short effective de Broglie wavelengths of high-speed electrons. The scanning tunneling microscope The scanning tunneling microscope (STM), an instrument capable of producing images with atomic resolution, was invented in 1981 by Gerd Binnig, Heinrich Rohrer, and collaborators at the IBM Research Laboratory in Zurich, Switzerland. Their discovery won Binning and Rohrer the 1986 Nobel Prize in Physics. The operation of the STM is based on the phenomenon of tunneling. Quantum mechanics tells us that a particle such as an electron has a ®nite probability of ``tunneling'' through a potential barrier that classically separates two regions. Electromagnetic theory tells us that when a voltage is applied between the tip of the instrument and the surface to be examined, there is a potential barrier between the tip and the surface. An electron with insuf®cient energy to surmount the barrier would not be able to move from the tip to the surface. However, quantum mechanics tells us that since the electron can be described by a wave function, it has a ®nite probability of crossing or tunneling through the barrier. This tunneling probability decreases very rapidly (exponentially) with the width of the potential barrier. As a consequence, observation of tunneling events is feasible only for relatively small potential barriers. In the STM, a sharp metal tip is brought to within a nanometer of the surface, producing an overlap of the electronic wave functions. When a small voltage is applied, a tunneling current in the nanoampere range ¯ows between the tip and the surface. The tip is scanned across the surface using 525 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS piezoelectric crystals, which expand or contract in response to an applied voltage. A third crystal maintains the tip at a constant distance of a few tens of nanometers above the surface. The potential applied to this crystal determines the vertical position of the tip and thus gives the topography of the surface. An image of graphite with the atoms arranged in an ordered Ê ) is array, taken with the Sweet Briar College STM. An aÊngstroÈm (A 0.1 nm. Heisenberg's uncertainty principle tells us that we cannot know both the position and the momentum of a particle simultaneously with in®nite precision. The more precision we demand of our knowledge of position, for example, the less precision we are allowed in our knowledge of momentum. If we make
q very small,
p becomes large in such a way as to keep the product of the two uncertainties proportional to Planck's constant. We can choose to measure the position with in®nite precision, but this means that we completely give up knowing anything about the particle's momentum; the uncertainty becomes in®nite. Or we can determine precisely the particle's momentum but in this case, our knowledge of its position is undetermined; the particle can be anywhere. Both situations are complementary. 526 Quantum Mechanics Each quality ± position and momentum ± are complementary properties of the quantum particle. An electron occupies a position in space only when an observation is made. Therefore, if, through observation, we determine that an electron is at a given location at one particular instant, and at another location at another particular instant, those two locations are the only ones that we can attribute to the electron. We cannot say what the electron did to move from the ®rst location to the second, and we cannot speak of the path that the electron followed between the two locations, because the path does not exist. Is this the way the world really is? Is the world this crazy place where the observer changes reality by the mere act of observation? Bohr was convinced that this was the case. His Copenhagen interpretation of quantum mechanics, as the ideas of Bohr, Heisenberg and Born ± uncertainty, complementarity and the disturbance of the system by the observer ± have been collectively called, is the interpretation accepted by the great majority of physicists today. The major dissenter was Albert Einstein. He never accepted that there could be chance and limitations imposed on the measurement of observed phenomena in nature. The uncertainty in the quantum world is not an intrinsic property of the universe but the result of our incomplete knowledge of it, he reasoned. The weather, for example, is unpredictable not because of any inherent uncertainty but because climate conditions involve too many parameters and too many particles which make it impossible with the tools available to us at the present to compute their behavior with the necessary detail for accurate prediction. If a large enough computer were available to take into consideration all these variables, accurate weather prediction would be possible. The unpredictability and uncertainty, then, are a result of these hidden variables that we have not included. In the case of quantum mechanics, the hidden variables have not been included because we do not know them yet. According to Einstein, quantum mechanics is not incorrect; it is simply incomplete. When this deeper level of hidden variables is discovered, a new correct and deterministic theory will be developed. In 1935 Einstein wrote a paper with his colleagues Boris Podolsky and Nathan Rosen (``EPR'') in which he proposed a 527 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 22.4. In the EPR experiment a particle at rest explodes into two fragments that move away from each other. We can measure the momentum of particle 1 and the position of particle 2. Because of conservation of momentum, it is possible to deduce the momentum of particle 2. thought experiment to show that it was possible for a particle to have both position and momentum at the same time and consequently, to show that quantum mechanics is incomplete. In the EPR experiment, a particle at rest splits into two fragments, 1 and 2 (®gure 22.4). The momentum of the original particle before splitting is zero since the particle is at rest. Because momentum is conserved, the total momentum of particles 1 plus 2 has to be zero also. When the particles are at a great distance from each other, the momentum of particle 1 is measured. This should not affect particle 2 in any way, since it is very far away. Heisenberg's uncertainty principle prohibits us from accurately measuring the position of particle 1 but, since the momentum of particle 2 has not been measured, we are free to determine its position with perfect accuracy. We now know particle 1's momentum, particle 2's position and the total momentum of both particles. The momentum of particle 2 is equal to the total momentum of both particles minus the momentum of particle 1, which we know. Although we did not measure particle 2's momentum, we are able to compute it with accuracy. Contrary to what quantum mechanics says, we have accurately determined the position and the momentum of particle 2. ``I am therefore inclined to believe,'' Einstein wrote later, ``that the description of [the] quantum mechanism . . . has to be regarded as an incomplete and indirect description of reality, to be replaced at some later date by a more complete and direct one.'' Bohr's response to the EPR argument was that the two particles, once in contact with each other, continue to be part of the system upon which one makes measurements. Therefore, Heisenberg's uncertainty principle prohibits us from knowing both the momentum and the position of particle 2 regardless of 528 Quantum Mechanics the technique used to measure these quantities. Einstein could not accept the idea that a measurement made at one location could affect a second particle at a distant location. There is no limitation as to how far apart the two particles have to be in this thought experiment. The measurement of the momentum of particle 1 could be made in a laboratory on Earth and the measurement of particle 2's position could be done by a laboratory on the Moon, when the particle gets there. Why not resolve the controversy by direct experiment? It turns out that this kind of experiment is extremely dif®cult to perform. In 1965, the Irish physicist John Stewart Bell, working at CERN, the European accelerator center in Geneva, decided to study the EPR experiment and was able to state and prove a powerful theorem, known today as Bell's theorem, which deals with the correlations that could exist between the results of simultaneous measurements done on two separated particles. Bell's theorem gives the theoretical limits on the correlations between these simultaneous measurements. The limits on these correlations were given by Bell in the form of an inequality, known appropriately enough as Bell's inequality. To give a simple illustration of the reasoning behind Bell's inequality, the amount of money in change that you have in your pocket at a particular moment cannot be greater than the amount in change plus the amount that you have in bills of different denominations at that same moment. Bell's theorem opened the path for an experiment that would decide whether or not there are hidden variables in quantum mechanics. A real EPR experiment. In 1982 Alain Aspect in Paris performed such an experiment. The results were unequivocal. There are no hidden variables in quantum mechanics. Bohr was right and Einstein was wrong. The world is as strange as quantum mechanics has shown us it is. An electron is neither a particle nor a wave. It is not an entity out there, separated from the rest of the universe. An electron, a proton, a quantum particle, an atom, all of these ``particles'' are simply convenient ways that we have of thinking about what is only a set of mathematical relations that connect our observations. The universe is not a collection of objects; it is rather an inseparable net of relations in which no component, including the observer, has an independent reality. 529 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS The frontiers of physics: Quantum teleportation In Star Trek, when the members of the away team down on the surface of an alien world need to get out of a sticky situation in a hurry, they contact their ship and ask to be ``beamed up.'' Until recently, teleportation, the idea of transporting matter instantaneously from one place to another, remained in the realm of science ®ction. Physicists had not paid much attention to teleportation because it seemed to violate the uncertainty principle of quantum mechanics, which forbids the simultaneous knowledge of all the information in an object. However, in 1993 a research team led by Charles H Bennett of the IBM Thomas J Watson Research Center in Yorktown Heights, NY, proposed a way to use the EPR experiment to transmit a quantum state instantaneously. It has been known for several decades that there are situations in which an atom emits two simultaneous photons which travel in opposite directions and remain forever correlated or ``entangled.'' Quantum mechanics tells us that neither photon has a particular polarization until a measurement is performed on them. When such a measurement is done on one of the two photons and its polarization is determined, the second ``entangled'' photon immediately acquires the opposite polarization, regardless of how far away it is (at the other side of the laboratory or at the opposite end of the galaxy). The EPR experiment does not allow the instantaneous transmission of information, however. The IBM team proposed a theoretical method to record or scan and ``transmit'' part of the information from a particle's quantum state to its entangled partner. Later, the second particle's state is modi®ed using the scanned information to bring it to the original state of the ®rst particle. Having been disturbed by the scanning process, the ®rst particle is no longer in its original quantum state. The method provided a clever way to instantaneously teleport the quantum state of a particle to a second particle. The work of the IBM team was theoretical. In December 1997, researchers at the University of Innsbruck in Austria 530 Quantum Mechanics reported the results of the ®rst experiment in which a photon was teleported. A second group led by Francesco De Martini at the University of Rome ``La Sapienza'' also reported having teleported photon characteristics. (Reprinted by permission from International Business Machines Corporation, copyright 2000.) Scientists are considering transporting electrons and even whole atoms and ions. One idea is to transport a fragile quantum state from a particle with a short life to a stable one. In this way, information could be stored on trapped ions, shielded from the environment, a quantum memory for computers. Other ideas involve the use of quantum teleportation for transmission of information under noisy conditions, where messages would be degraded or for providing links between quantum computers. Physicists see that it would be dif®cult to go beyond those applications to the point where macroscopic objects could be instantly teleported. The problem is that once the transfer is made, the receiver's observation changes the transferred object's state. To interpret the result correctly, information about the process still needs to be sent to the receiver by conventional means (at speeds lower than the speed of light). 531 23 NUCLEAR PHYSICS Beyond the atom Quantum mechanics provided the mathematical foundation for our understanding of the properties of atoms. With this foundation in place, progress came quickly. Some physicists used the new theory to develop a more complete picture of the electronic properties of atoms, while others went on to apply the theory to the study of the atomic nucleus. We studied some of the basic properties of the nucleus in chapter 8. Here we will examine nuclear transformations, nuclear energy, and the applications of nuclear physics to modern technology. Radioactivity As we saw in chapter 8, atomic nuclei are composed of protons and neutrons bound by the strong force. Because the electric force has in®nite range, diminishing gradually with distance, the positively charged protons feel the electrical repulsion of each and every one of the remaining protons in the nucleus. Since the nuclear force is a short range force, its in¯uence dies out to almost nothing when the protons are separated by more than 10ÿ14 m. If a nucleus contains too many protons, the total electric repulsion can overwhelm the nuclear attraction and a fragment of the nucleus (an alpha particle) will ¯y out. This is known as alpha decay. (Alpha is the Greek letter .) However, if the nucleus contains a large number of neutrons, they contribute to the 532 Nuclear Physics nuclear force without being affected by the electric force, as they are neutral. This is why light nuclei usually have a similar number of protons and neutrons, like 42 He, 73 Li, 126 C, and 168 O whereas heavy nuclei require a great deal more neutrons to counterbalance the effect of the electrical repulsion. For example 197 208 82 Pb contains 126 neutrons and 82 protons, and 79 Au has 118 neutrons and only 79 protons. There is a limit to the number of neutrons that a nucleus can have and still be stable. The reason for this has to do with another type of force, the weak nuclear force, which is also a short-range force and is responsible for the instability of the neutron. On the average, a free neutron, outside the nucleus, can only last for about ®fteen minutes before it disintegrates into a proton, an electron, and another particle called a neutrino. Inside the nucleus, however, this disintegration usually does not take place because of a principle of quantum mechanics, known as the Pauli exclusion principle, which states that no two protons can occupy the same quantum state. These quantum states are similar to the quantum states occupied by the electrons in the atom. Pauli's principle prevents a nuclear neutron from decaying into a proton because this new proton would have nowhere to go, all the available states being already occupied by other protons. Neutrons also obey the Pauli exclusion principle. Thus, a nucleus with too many neutrons has to place those neutrons in higher energy states. In these states the neutrons have enough energy to place the protons into which they decay in unoccupied high energy levels. But where this happens the nucleus loses its identity. In other words, when a neutron inside a nucleus is able to decay through the weak nuclear force into a proton, an electron and a neutrino, the nucleus is transmuted into a different nucleus. Because the nucleus cannot contain free electrons, these are ejected. (According to Heisenberg's Uncertainty Principle, a particle with a mass as small as that of the electron and having the energies observed in beta decay cannot be con®ned to a volume as small as that occupied by the nucleus.) This phenomenon is called beta decay. (Beta is the Greek letter .) This is the same phenomenon as that identi®ed by Rutherford at the beginning of this century. We now discuss these two types of radioactive decay, together with a third, known as gamma decay, in some detail. 533 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS (Gamma is the Greek letter . Alpha, beta and gamma are the ®rst three letters of the Greek alphabet.) Alpha decay As we said earlier, if a nucleus contains too many protons it is electrically unstable and undergoes alpha decay. An example of a nucleus that alpha-decays is 238 92 U. This decay is illustrated in ®gure 23.1. We can write this decay as follows: 238 92 U 4 ! 234 90 Th ‡ 2 He: We call the nucleus before the decay the parent nucleus (238 92 U in our example) and the nucleus produced after the decay, the daughter nucleus (234 90 Th). Notice that the mass number of the parent nucleus is 238 and this is equal to the sum of the mass numbers of the daughter nucleus and the alpha particle (42 He), namely 234 ‡ 4. Since the mass number represents the number of nucleons in the nucleus, this is the same as saying that the number of nucleons in the parent nucleus must be equal to the total number of nucleons in the daughter plus those in the alpha particle. The atomic numbers obey a similar rule. Because the atomic number represents the number of charges in the nucleus (number of protons), this second rule says that the number of charges in the parent nucleus must equal the total number of Figure 23.1. Alpha decay of 534 238 92 U. Nuclear Physics charges in the daughter and the alpha particle. These two rules hold for every radioactive decay and are based on conservation laws. These conservation laws are called conservation of nucleon number and conservation of electric charge. Beta decay A neutron-rich nucleus is also unstable and will convert spontaneously into another nucleus with an extra proton through the weak nuclear force. As we mentioned earlier, this ``beta decay'' happens because of the transformation of the neutron into a proton, an electron and a neutrino particle. The neutrino was proposed by the physicist Wolfgang Pauli as a solution to a problem that was observed when the energies of the nuclei involved in beta decay were measured. It seemed that in beta decay the principle of conservation of energy no longer held. Because physicists have always been reluctant to accept anything that violates this well-established principle, Pauli proposed in 1930 the existence of a small neutral particle that would take care of the observed discrepancy. The Italian physicist Enrico Fermi named it the neutrino, Italian for ``little neutral one.'' Twenty years later Frederick Reines and Clyde L Cowan detected the neutrino at the US Atomic Energy Commission Savanna River Laboratory in Georgia. A typical beta decay event is illustrated in ®gure 23.2. In symbols, we write this decay as 14 6C ! 147 N ‡ ÿ10 e ‡ : Here the  symbol represents the neutrino particle ( is the Greek letter nu). In this case it is an ``antineutrino,'' which is the antiparticle of the neutrino, identi®ed by a bar over the symbol . An antiparticle is a particle of antimatter: antimatter consists of atoms with negatively charged nuclei and positive electrons, called positrons. (Antimatter will be studied in more detail in chapter 22). Because the electron is not a nucleon, its mass number is indicated as zero, and as it has the same electric charge as the proton but opposite sign, its atomic number appears as ÿ1. Emission of a positron (a positive electron or antielectron) together with a neutrino also takes place. An example of this 535 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 23.2. Beta decay of 146 C. One of the 8 neutrons in 146 C is transformed into a proton, an electron, and an antineutrino. The electron and the antineutrino ¯y away. The daughter nucleus, 147 N, has one more neutron and one fewer proton than the parent nucleus. type of beta decay is 12 7N ! 126 C ‡ 01 e ‡ : Note the ‡1 charge on this antielectron. Gamma decay In many cases the product of an alpha or beta decay process is a nucleus that is left in an excited state. When a nucleus is in an excited state, the nucleons can jump to a lower energy state and, in a process similar to the way atoms emit electromagnetic radiation, one or several photons are emitted from the nucleus. The energy of these photons is much higher than that of visible light. Photons so produced are called gamma rays. In gamma decay there is no emission or absorption of nucleons. The only change is in the energy of the nucleus. Therefore, neither Z nor A change and the nucleus remains the same. We indicate a nucleus in an excited state by placing an asterisk next to its chemical symbol. One example of gamma decay is 12  6C ! 126 C ‡ : The products of radioactive decays (the alpha and beta particles and the gamma ray photons) can interact with the atoms and molecules in living cells or in electronic circuits. These interactions can lead to certain changes. A few of the 536 Nuclear Physics changes that may occur in living cells may be bene®cial and, if they are passed to offspring, these changes help to produce the process that we call evolution. Most of the changes in the cells of biological systems, however, are detrimental, causing damage to the organism. Again, just about every change in an electronic circuit produces some damage and can lead to serious disruption of the electronic systems in which they are installed. Half-life In a radioactive sample there are vast numbers of nuclei. Every time a nucleus decays by alpha or beta emission, the number of radioactive nuclei in the sample decreases by one. The time required for half the nuclei in a given radioactive sample to decay is called the half-life, T, of the particular nuclide. In each subsequent half life, half the remaining nuclei decay; thus after two half-lives, the remaining radioactive nuclei is one-fourth the original number. After three half-lives, the original number is reduced to one-eighth. For a given radioactive nuclear species, the half-life is the same regardless of the number of nuclei in the sample. The half-lives of several nuclei are listed in Table 23.1. Although the half-life of 146 C, say, is known to be 5730 years, we cannot predict exactly when a particular 146 C nucleus will decay. The decay of a given nucleus is a random event. Because a macroscopic sample contains an enormous number of nuclei, we can use the laws of probability to determine how many nuclei (without specifying which ones) will decay in a given length of time. The probability that an unstable nucleus will decay spontaneously is the same at any instant, regardless of its past history, and it is the same for all nuclei of the same type. Table 23.1 Half-lives of selected nuclei Element Uranium-238 Uranium-234 Carbon-14 Radium-226 Strontium-90 Half-life 9 4:55  10 years 2:48  105 years 5730 years 1620 years 28.9 years 537 Element Half-life Cobalt-60 Thorium-234 Iodine-131 Radon-222 Lead-214 5.3 years 24.1 days 8.1 days 3.8 days 26.8 minutes SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Nuclear reactions All three radioactive decay processes are examples of nuclear transformations. These are not the only way a nucleus can be changed into one or more nuclei, however. If a fast moving nucleon collides with a nucleus, a nuclear transformation can occur. These nuclear reactions can take place in nature or they can be arti®cially produced. The ®rst nuclear reaction produced arti®cially was observed by Rutherford in 1919. He discovered that when an alpha particle passed through nitrogen gas, protons were emitted. He concluded correctly that nitrogen nuclei had been transformed into oxygen nuclei (®gure 23.3). We can write this nuclear reaction in symbols, as 4 2 He ‡ 147 N ! 178 O ‡ 11 H; which is commonly written in the abbreviated form, with p representing the proton, as 14 7N ; p†178 O: Thousands of nuclear reactions have been studied since Rutherford's time, most of them arti®cially produced with the aid of the particle accelerators invented during the 1930s. The products of these reactions are in many cases radioactive isotopes that have value in medicine and related ®elds where they are used as radioactive ``labels'' that show the path taken by a substance through the body (®gure 23.4). Nuclear reactions also obey the two conservation rules introduced in our study of radioactive decay. Applying these conservation rules, that is, conservation of nucleon number and conservation of electric charge, to Rutherford's reaction, we can Figure 23.3. An alpha particle strikes a nitrogen nucleus and is absorbed. The new nucleus ejects a proton, becoming an oxygen nucleus. This was the ®rst nuclear reaction to be arti®cially produced. 538 Nuclear Physics Figure 23.4. Image of the brain of a patient with a migraine is formed by detecting gamma rays from radioactive ¯ourine-18 that has been injected into the patient. (Courtesy Department of Nuclear Medicine, Charing Cross Hospital/Science Photo Library.) see that the number of nucleons is the same before and after the reaction takes place. To check this, notice that the sum of the mass numbers of the nuclei before the collision takes place, He and N, is 4 ‡ 14 ˆ 18, which is equal to the sum of the mass numbers of the ®nal nuclei, 17 for oxygen plus 1 for the ejected proton. Similarly, the conservation of charge gives 2 for helium plus 7 for nitrogen which equals the 8 for oxygen plus 1 for the proton. Using these rules we could, for example, determine the product of the collision of a neutron (10 n) with 27 13 Al, which ejects an alpha particle. Writing X for the unknown nucleus we have 1 0n 4 ‡ 27 13 Al ! 2 He ‡ X: 539 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Conservation of nucleon number gives 1 ‡ 27 ˆ 4 ‡ Ax and conservation of charge, 0 ‡ 13 ˆ 2 ‡ Zx where Ax and Zx are the mass number and atomic number of our unknown nucleus, respectively. This tells us that the atomic number of X is 11, identifying the nucleus as sodium, Na, with a mass number equal to 24. This particular isotope of sodium, 24 11 Na, is radioactive, and decays with a half-life of 15 hours through beta emission into 24 12 Mg. This process is used in medicine to study the way sodium is transported across membranes. Nuclear energy: Fission and fusion Nuclear ®ssion During the summer of 1939, just before the start of World War II, the German scientists Otto Hahn and Fritz Strassmann published a paper where they stated that when uranium was bombarded with neutrons, it produced smaller nuclei which were about half the size of the original uranium nucleus. One of Hahn's previous collaborators, the physicist Lise Meitner and her nephew Otto Frisch, both of whom had ¯ed Nazi Germany and were working at the Nobel Institute in Sweden, immediately realized that the uranium nucleus actually had split into two fragments. This new phenomenon was called nuclear ®ssion. In ®gure 23.5 we have illustrated how nuclear ®ssion works. An incoming neutron strikes a uranium-235 nucleus and is Figure 23.5. The steps in the nuclear ®ssion of a uranium nucleus, as explained in the liquid drop model. 540 Nuclear Physics momentarily absorbed, turning the target nucleus into uranium236. The absorbed neutron gives the uranium nucleus extra internal energy which causes it to split. Once the fragments are separated, the electrical repulsion between the ®ssion fragments is stronger than the nuclear attraction and the two nuclei ¯y apart. Since a liquid drop splits into two parts in a similar fashion, physicists constructed a model based on this phenomenon, the liquid-drop model of ®ssion, to explain how it works. If enough energy is provided to the drop, it will begin to take on increasingly larger elongated shapes, vibrating back and forth until it ®nally splits. In the uranium-235 nucleus, the neutron provides the energy needed to start the vibrations until the newly formed uranium-236 splits into ®ssion fragments. A typical ®ssion reaction is 1 0n 1 94 139 236  ‡ 235 92 U ! 92 U ! 54 Xe ‡ 38 Sr ‡ 30 n: If the neutrons released in this reaction could be used to initiate further reactions, a self-sustaining chain reaction could take place (®gure 23.6). Enrico Fermi and other physicists at the University of Chicago showed that this chain reaction was possible by constructing the ®rst nuclear reactor in 1942. Figure 23.6. Chain reaction. After the ®rst reaction is initiated by one neutron, the neutrons released by this reaction can strike uranium nuclei causing additional ®ssions which in turn produce more neutrons. The process multiplies very rapidly. 541 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 23.7. Binding energy per nucleon plotted versus atomic mass number. This curve shows that medium nuclei are more tightly bound than light or heavy nuclei. In a uranium ®ssion reaction like the one above, the mass of U-235 plus a neutron is much greater than that of the ®ssion fragments. As we saw in chapter 8, the curve of binding energy per nucleon versus mass number (®gure 23.7) shows that the values of the binding energy for light and for heavy nuclei are smaller that those for medium nuclei. Therefore, these nuclei are not as tightly bound as medium-weight nuclei (iron is the most stable nucleus). Splitting a heavy nucleus, like U-235, to produce medium-weight nuclei, which are more stable, releases energy. We can calculate this energy by determining the mass de®ciency. Before the reaction takes place, the total mass is the mass of the approaching neutron plus the mass of the U-235 nucleus, or m 10 n† ‡ m 235 92 U† ˆ 1:008 665 amu ‡ 235:043 925 amu  236:052 6 amu and the mass of the ®ssion fragments is m 139 54 Xe† ‡m 94 38 Sr† ‡ 3m 10 n† ˆ ‰138:918 43 ‡ 93:915 47 ‡ 3 1:008 665†Š amu ˆ 235:859 9 amu: The mass de®ciency is thus 236:052 6 ÿ 235:859 9† amu ˆ 0.192 7 amu. That is, the ®ssion fragments have less mass than 542 Nuclear Physics the U-235 nucleus and the incoming neutron. The energy equivalent of this mass difference is E ˆ 0:192 7 amu  931 MeV 1 amu ˆ 179 MeV: This is the energy released in each ®ssion event. At the nuclear level, this is an enormous amount of energy. At the macroscopic level, 179 MeV correspond to about 3  10ÿ11 J, which is a very tiny amount of energy. In a macroscopic sample of uranium, however, there are billions of nuclei, so that if a chain reaction is triggered, a huge amount of energy can be released. This is the principle behind the nuclear bomb, a nuclear chain reaction without control. For a nuclear explosion to occur, there must be enough ®ssionable uranium to sustain the chain reaction. Natural uranium consists of several isotopes of uranium, the most abundant of which is U-238 (99.3%). Unlike uranium-235, U-238 is not a good prospect for a chain reaction because when neutrons collide with it they are either scattered or captured. Since the natural concentration of U-235 is only 0.7%, it is necessary to increase it to over 90% in order to obtain a chain reaction. The minimum mass required to produce a chain reaction is called the critical mass and it depends not only on the amount of uranium-235 but on the design of the bomb. An amount of U-235 as small as 1 kilogram is a signi®cant quantity for a good design. A critical mass of U-235 will explode on its own, as any stray neutron can initiate a chain reaction. For this reason nuclear bombs are designed so that the uranium cannot form a critical mass until the precise moment when the bomb is to explode. Little Boy, the bomb that exploded on Hiroshima on August 6, 1945, was designed so that the uranium was kept in two subcritical masses at the two ends of a cigar-shaped container (®gure 23.8). An explosive propelled the two pieces together at a speed of several kilometers per second to form a critical mass. After the critical mass is formed the entire explosion takes place in about one microsecond. 99.9% of the energy is released during the last tenth of a microsecond of the explosion. 543 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 23.8. One design for a nuclear bomb. An explosive propels the two pieces together to form the critical mass. The bomb explodes in about one microsecond. This design was used in Little Boy, the bomb dropped on Hiroshima in 1945. Core of a nuclear reactor. (Courtesy NASA.) In a nuclear reactor, a low concentration of U-235, usually about 3% ensures that most of the neutrons released by one ®ssion reaction are not absorbed by other U-235 nuclei. But even at this low concentration, the ®ssion rate would eventually increase. To prevent this increase and to control the rate of reactions, cadmium rods that absorb neutrons are inserted inside the uranium core (®gure 23.9). In the reactor, the splitting of U-235 544 Nuclear Physics Figure 23.9. Schematic diagram of a nuclear reactor. nuclei in a controlled environment produces energy that is used to heat water and obtain steam that powers a turbine to produce electricity. In the 1970s scientists found evidence of a natural nuclear reactor that existed almost two billion years ago during the Precambrian era in Gabon, West Africa. Examining samples of uranium from a mine, they discovered that a chain reaction had taken place there for almost a million years with water trapped in the sandstone absorbing some of the neutrons, like the cadmium rods in modern reactors. Nuclear fusion Another source of nuclear energy comes from nuclear fusion, the process that fuels the sun and the stars (®gure 23.10 (color plate)). Nuclear fusion occurs when two light nuclei are fused together to form a heavier nucleus (®gure 23.11). As we know, the mass of every stable nucleus is less than the mass of its protons and neutrons taken together. This is seen better by reexamining the binding energy per nucleon curve of ®gure 23.7. Since light nuclei are less tightly bound than medium-weight nuclei, joining light nuclei produces a more massive nucleus which is more stable. Thus if two light nuclei were to come together to form a new nucleus, energy would be released. 545 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 23.11. Nuclear fusion: a nucleus of deuterium and a tritium nucleus come together and form He-4 with the release of one neutron and energy. Uncontrolled fusion reactions are responsible for the fury of hydrogen bombs. Physicists, however, have been attempting to achieve controlled fusion reactions for many years and, although great advances have been achieved, complete success is not yet at hand. The fusion of hydrogen could be an almost unlimited source of energy as hydrogen is so plentiful. The main dif®culty lies in bringing the hydrogen nuclei close enough for the attractive nuclear force to overcome the electrical repulsion. Two techniques have been proposed for a practical fusion reactor: magnetic con®nement and laser fusion. The magnetic con®nement scheme uses magnets to keep the protons con®ned to a small doughnut-shaped region. The tokamak reactor is one example of this technique. The Princeton Tokamak Fusion Test Reactor has been able to con®ne protons for 16 of a second. The second technique, the inertial con®nement method, uses lasers to bring together protons so that fusion can take place. At the Lawrence Livermore laboratory in California, lasers bombard a deuterium-tritium pellet with enormous amounts of energy so that the outer layers of the pellet burn away, causing the rest of the pellet to implode and compress the fuel to densities high enough to trigger nuclear fusion. Applications of nuclear physics Nuclear reactions have practical applications in archeology, medicine, and industry. We shall review here some of the most important applications. 546 Nuclear Physics Pioneers of physics: Enrico Fermi (1901±1954) After Lise Meitner and Otto Frisch proved experimentally that the uranium nucleus did split into two fragments, Niels Bohr and the American physicist John Wheeler developed the liquid drop model to explain the newly discovered phenomenon. One important feature of this model was the release of neutrons as the uranium nucleus split, which made a chain reaction possible. After War World II started in 1939, the possibility that the Nazis could use this discovery to build a powerful bomb prompted the United States to start an urgent research program in nuclear physics. In December 1941, Enrico Fermi was called to Chicago to direct the ``uranium project.'' On December 2, 1942, Fermi's team achieved the ®rst controlled chain reaction on an ``atomic pile,'' the ®rst nuclear ®ssion reactor. Fermi had just been awarded the Nobel Prize in physics for his work with neutrons as projectiles to produce nuclear reactions. It had occurred to Fermi to bombard uranium with neutrons to produce a new arti®cial element of higher mass number. Although these transuranium elements were later discovered in nature, they were not known at the time. To Fermi's consternation, his discoveries were publicized by the Italian press as a Fascist triumph. Fermi had received his doctoral degree magna cum laude from the University of Pisa in 1922, a few months before Mussolini seized power. He did postdoctoral work in Germany and returned to Italy a few years later to become professor of physics at the University of Rome. By the time of his trip to Stockholm to accept the Nobel prize, life had become very dif®cult for the anti-Fascist Fermi. His wife was Jewish and Italy had just passed several anti-Jewish laws. The controlled Italian press was also increasingly critical of Fermi's refusal to wear the Fascist uniform at the Nobel ceremonies or to give the Fascist salute. The Fermis decided to sail for the United States from Stockholm. After the war, Fermi became professor of physics at the University of Chicago where he taught until his early death at the age 53 of stomach cancer. The element with atomic mass 100, discovered a year later, was named fermium in his honor. 547 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Radioactive dating The known half-lives of certain radioactive elements can be used as a clock for determining the age of some objects. This process is known as radioactive dating. Carbon-14, a radioactive isotope of carbon with a half-life of 5730 years, is used to date archeological ®ndings. The upper atmosphere of the earth is continuously being bombarded by cosmic rays. These are charged particles, electrons and nuclei of hydrogen and helium together with some heavier nuclei, moving at speeds close to the speed of light in the interstellar medium. When cosmic rays collide with the atoms in the upper atmosphere, neutrons are liberated; these in turn collide with nitrogen atoms to produce carbon-14. The reaction is 1 0n ‡ 147 N ! 146 C ‡ 11 H: Even though carbon-14 is constantly being produced in the earth's atmosphere, only about 1 in 109 carbon atoms are of this radioactive isotope. All living plants absorb carbon dioxide from the air, and chemically do not distinguish between radioactive and nonradioactive carbon. Since animals and humans eat plants, all living things take in carbon-14 in the same proportion. When a plant or animal dies, no new C-14 is ingested, and the carbon-14 present at death decays, with a half-life of 5730 years. Carbon-14 decays through beta emission according to the reaction 14 6C ! 147 N ‡ ÿ10 e ‡ : Therefore, when the plant or animal dies, the ratio of C-14 to ordinary C-12 begins to decrease as the C-14 decays, and from this decrease the elapsed time since the death took place can be determined. If, for example, the ratio of C-14 to C-12 in a wooden artifact unearthed in an archeological site is one-fourth of the ratio for living trees, we can infer that the tree from which the artifact was made died two half-lives (11 460 years) ago. Carbon-14 dating is used to determine the age of fossils and archeological artifacts made from organic materials up to 40 000 years (about seven half-lives). Beyond that there is not enough 548 Nuclear Physics C-14 remaining in the objects for an accurate age determination. Other isotopes with longer half-lives, such as U-238, with a half-life of 4:5  109 years, can be used for the determination of the age of rocks, for example. Using these radioactive clocks, scientists have been able to determine that hominids have been around for 3.5 million years, that life on earth appeared some 3 to 4 billion years ago, and that the earth itself was formed some four and a half billion years ago. Biological effects of radioactivity Radioactive isotopes are used as ``labels'' that reveal the passage of a substance through the body (®gure 23.12 (color plate)). They are also used in radiation treatment, to destroy cancerous growths from the body where surgery is either inadvisable or impossible. However, radiation not only destroys malignant tissue; it also destroys normal living cells by altering or damaging the structure of key molecules. The radioactive decay of nuclei produces different kinds of ionizing radiation with different energies, reaching up to several million electron-volts per photon. The term ``ionizing radiation'' means that this radiation interacts with matter, stripping electrons off of atoms, thus forming ions. In addition to the alpha and beta particles and the gamma rays already discussed (all produced in nuclear processes), ionizing radiation also includes photons of lower energies which are produced in atomic processes. In recent years, radioactive isotopes have been used to trace chemicals in several reactions as they move through an organism. If an atom is replaced in a chemical reaction by its radioactive counterpart, the compound is ``tagged'' and can be traced with the aid of a detector. Radioactive isotopes can be effectively detected by means of a scanning device. One such device is the Positron Emission Tomography (PET) scanner, a machine that produces cross-sectional views of the body, and requires only low levels of radiation. Radioactive nuclides that decay through emission of positrons (antielectrons) are introduced into the body. One such decay is 12 7N ! 126 C ‡ 01 e ‡ : 549 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS As we shall study in more detail in chapter 24, when these positrons encounter regular electrons, they annihilate each other, emitting gamma rays. These gamma rays are emitted in pairs, emerging in opposite directions. Gamma ray detectors that recognize photons emitted simultaneously but in opposite directions are used to triangulate several such events so that the exact position where they were produced can be determined. As we have said, ionizing radiation, which can be used to diagnose, treat, and sometimes cure malignant growths in humans, can also be harmful. Radiation damage in organisms is due to ionization effects in cells that result in structural changes. When such damage affects the DNA molecules of the reproductive organs, it is called genetic damage. This may lead to genetic mutations which, in their great majority, are harmful. Radiation damage which affects other cells in the body is called somatic damage. It is, of course, desirable to protect ourselves from ionizing radiation. However, it is sometimes necessary to risk some radiation exposure when bene®ts can be derived from it, as in certain medical applications when other methods are not feasible. It is, nevertheless, impossible to avoid all radiation exposure because cosmic rays and radioactive rocks are natural sources of radiation that deliver a dose every year to each person equivalent to the dose received from medical X-rays by the average person in one year. Uranium is ubiquitous in the earth's crust. The radioactive isotope uranium-238 alpha-decays into thorium-234, itself a radioactive isotope which beta-decays into another radioactive isotope. After several decays, the stable isotope lead-206 is produced and the sequence of nuclides that results is called a decay series. One of the products of this decay series is radium-226 which alpha decays into radon-222. The radioactive isotope radon-222 is an inert gas, invisible and odorless, which may seep into a house to build up a hazardous concentration. When radon decays, with a half-life of 3.82 days, it emits an alpha particle of 5.5 MeV energy in the reaction 222 Rn ! 218 Po ‡ 4 He and this is followed by a series of other alpha and beta particles produced in the subsequent decays of the remaining nuclides 550 Nuclear Physics Figure 23.13. (a) Commercially-available alpha-track detector to measure radon concentration in homes. (b) Activated-charcoal detector. in the decay series. The total energy released in these processes is 21.5 MeV. When a person breathes in radon, and other nuclides in the decay series ± some of which are solid and might lodge in the lung ± these emit radioactive alpha and beta particles that can cause biological damage. Although the average house contains radon at a concentration of about one-fourth what the EPA considers as the threshold of concern, recent tests have determined that nearly one third of the residences tested by the EPA exceeded that threshold. Fairly simple devices can be used to record the concentration of radon in homes. They fall into two categories: alpha-track devices and activated-charcoal detectors. Alpha-track devices, developed by General Electric's Research and Development Center as part of the lunar exploration program during the 1970s, consist of a small sheet of polycarbonate plastic kept in a plastic bottle (®gure 23.13(a)). When an alpha particle strikes the plastic sheet, it causes a microscopic pockmark which can be identi®ed by a laboratory with the appropriate equipment. In a typical test, fewer than 100 pocks are produced in a span of three months; for this reason, the alpha-track detectors are best for long-term measurements. For short-term measurements, the activated-charcoal detectors are better. These are ¯at canisters of activated-charcoal granules which trap radon gas (®gure 23.13(b)). After a short period of exposure to the air in the house, they are sent back to a laboratory for analysis. 551 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Physics in our world: Proton beams for cancer therapy A sophisticated machine built by the Fermi National Accelerator Laboratory to accelerate protons has been installed at the Loma Linda University Medical Center where it is being used to treat rare, super®cial skin cancers. The 50-ton machine strips electrons from hydrogen atoms and accelerates the remaining protons to great speeds. The patient is partly enclosed in a tube at the center of a three-story-high, 90-ton rotating gantry, which directs the proton beam to its target for about a minute. Like the electron beam in a television set or computer monitor, the proton beam at Loma Linda scans a thin slice of tumor line by line. By varying the number of protons in the beam and their energy, the beam can be distributed directly in successive layers inside the tumor. Unlike X-rays, which transmit some of their ionizing radiation over a few centimeters and are not completely stopped by the tissue, proton beams are stopped completely by the tumor, where they deposit most of their energy, leaving surrounding tissue untouched. The malignant tissue is destroyed as the beam splits apart DNA molecules. Scientists at Loma Linda University hope to be able to extend the use of the machine to treat localized tumors in the lung and pancreas. 552 24 ELEMENTARY PARTICLES Antimatter Paul Adrien Maurice Dirac was born in Bristol, England, on August 8, 1902, one of the three children of Charles Dirac, a Swiss eÂmigreÂ, and Florence Holten. Dirac was brought up to be bilingual in French and English. ``My father made the rule that I should only talk to him in French. He thought it would be good for me to learn French in that way. Since I found that I couldn't express myself in French, it was better for me to stay silent than to talk in English. So I became very silent at that time ± that started very early.'' Dirac remained very reserved throughout his life. ``My father always encouraged me towards mathematics . . . He did not appreciate the need for social contacts. The result was that I didn't speak to anybody unless spoken to,'' he was to confess later. ``I was very much an introvert, and I spent my time thinking about problems in nature.'' At the age of 16, Dirac entered the University of Bristol where, afraid that there would be no jobs in mathematics, he studied engineering, graduating in 1921. Ironically, he could not ®nd a job with his engineering degree and decided to stay on to study pure and applied mathematics. In 1923, he enrolled at Cambridge where he received his PhD in May of 1926, with a thesis entitled Quantum Mechanics. In 1932, at the age of 30, he became Lucasian Professor of Mathematics at Cambridge, the chair once held by Newton. In 1927 Dirac attended the Solvay Conference, a periodic meeting of prominent physicists paid for by the wealthy Belgian industrial chemist Ernest Solvay, where he met Einstein for the ®rst time. During a conversation with Bohr at the conference, 553 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Bohr asked Dirac what he was working on. ``I am trying to get a relativistic theory of the electron,'' answered Dirac. Bohr claimed that the problem had already been solved. Dirac did not agree. Dirac knew that quantum mechanics and relativity theory were both correct. Quantum mechanics, however, could not be applied to quantum particles moving at relativistic speeds. Since the wave properties of the electron had already been con®rmed, Dirac decided to develop a relativistic quantum theory of the electron using the concept of quantum ®eld. According to this approach, every particle type has its own ®eld. The ®eld of the photon is the electromagnetic ®eld. The electron also belongs to a ®eld, now called the Dirac ®eld. These ®elds interact with each other according to laws expressed in certain quantum ®eld equations. Dirac's theory ± the ®rst quantum ®eld theory ± is known today as relativistic quantum ®eld theory. It is Maxwell's electromagnetism applied to relativistic quantum particles. In his theory, Dirac generalized the SchroÈdinger equation to include electrons moving at relativistic speeds with a new equation now called the Dirac equation. This equation had remarkable and profound consequences. ``The relativistic wave equation of the electron [the Dirac equation] ranks among the highest achievements of twentieth-century science,'' says Abraham Pais of Rockefeller University. The Dirac equation predicted the observed properties of the electron. For example, it predicted that an electron had an intrinsic spin angular momentum. The effects of this spin of the electron had been observed experimentally, although SchroÈdinger's equation did not account for it. The most remarkable prediction of the Dirac equation had to do with its two solutions for the energy of an electron, one positive and the other negative. What to do with the negative energy solutions? Nobody knew what electrons with negative energy could be. ``I was reconciled to the fact that the negative energy states could not be excluded from the mathematical theory,'' wrote Dirac, ``and so I thought, let us try and ®nd a physical explanation for them.'' The physical explanation that Dirac eventually gave was that the negative energy solution described a new kind of particle with the same mass as the electron but with positive electric charge ± opposite to that of the electron. He initially called it the antielectron. That was a bold prediction. ``I didn't see any chance 554 Elementary Particles of making further progress,'' he wrote later. ``I thought it was rather sick.'' To his great triumph, antielectrons or positrons, as they were later called, were discovered four years later in cosmic rays by Carl D Anderson of the California Institute of Technology. Physicists soon realized that Dirac's theory predicted the existence of other antiparticles, in addition to the positron. For every quantum particle there was an antiparticle. These antiparticles constitute a new kind of matter, antimatter, identical to ordinary matter except that if the particle has electric charge, its antiparticle has the opposite charge. When a particle encounters its antiparticle, they annihilate each other, disappearing in a burst of photons in a process called pair annihilation (®gure 24.1(a)). The inverse process, in which high energy photons create a positron-electron pair is also possible (®gure 24.1(b)). This process is called pair production. Recall that, according to the special theory of relativity, an electron has a rest energy m0 c2 . Thus, photons of energy hf equal to at least 2m0 c2 can produce an electron and a positron. The fundamental forces Before we continue delving more deeply in to the structure of matter, let us summarize what we have learned so far about the known interactions in nature. All the variety of phenomena in the universe, from the explosion of a supernova in another galaxy to the falling of a leaf during an autumn afternoon on Earth, from the appearance of a dark spot on the atmosphere of a distant star, the explosion of a volcano on Io or the collapse of a distant red giant to the whirr of the wings of a hummingbird, all of these events can be ultimately explained by only four fundamental forces. Everything that happens anywhere in the universe is ultimately controlled by the operation of these four forces. Understanding the properties of these forces ± gravity, electromagnetism, and the strong and weak nuclear forces ± is, perhaps, the most important task in physics today. . Gravity, the ®rst one of the four forces to be discovered, was formulated by Newton in his universal law of gravitation. Gravity controls a wide range of phenomena, from the falling of an apple or the motions of ocean tides to the expansion of 555 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 24.1. (Top) Pair annihilation and (Bottom) pair production. (Courtesy Brookhaven National Laboratory and Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory.) the universe. Newton's universal law of gravitation is a simple inverse-square law; that is, the gravitational force is a longrange force that decreases in strength in proportion to the square of the distance between the two interacting bodies. Newton's theory, however, fails to explain why gravity exists. 556 Elementary Particles Table 24.1. Properties of the fundamental forces Force Strong Electromagnetic Weak Gravitational Range ÿ15 10 m in®nite 10ÿ17 m in®nite Relative strength 1 7:3  10ÿ3 10ÿ5 6  10ÿ39 Einstein's general theory of relativity presented gravity not as a force but as a product of geometry, the geometry of spacetime. In doing so, Einstein placed gravity farther away from the rest of physics. . The electromagnetic interaction is described by Maxwell's equations. These equations concisely summarize all known electric and magnetic phenomena. The electromagnetic force is responsible for the binding of atoms and molecules; it binds electrons to nuclei and atoms and binds atoms together into molecules, holding them together in solids. Like Newton's universal law of gravity, the electromagnetic force is an inverse-square force. . The strong force, one of the two nuclear forces, holds the nucleons together in a nucleus. It is a short-range force, becoming negligible at distances greater that 10ÿ15 m. The strong force acts on protons and neutrons but not on electrons, neutrinos or photons. The strong force is 137 times stronger than the electromagnetic force. . The weak force is also a short-range nuclear force. It is responsible for radioactive beta-decay processes, such as the transformation within the nucleus of a neutron into a proton or a proton into a neutron. The weak force controls many of the reactions that produce energy in the Sun and the stars. The weak force is of the order of a hundred thousand times weaker than the strong force. Table 24.1 summarizes the properties of the fundamental forces. As we can see, gravity is the weakest of the forces. The gravitational force of attraction between two electrons, for example, is 1036 times weaker than their electrostatic repulsion. The gravitational force between large bodies becomes important because it involves a tremendous number of atoms and because these atoms are neutral, so that their electrostatic interaction 557 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS cancels out. The two nuclear forces are short-range and play no role in the interaction between large bodies at normal distances. Exchange forces What is a force? How does a force work? How does an electron know that there is another electron nearby or the Earth that the Sun is 150 million km away? How is a force transmitted? Newton never attempted to explain how his universal law of gravitation worked. Gravity was accepted as an action at a distance phenomenon. Faraday introduced the concept of ®eld to explain how electric and magnetic forces were transmitted. Einstein, in his general theory of relativity, said that gravity was geometry. According to Einstein, the presence of an object disturbs the space-time around it, altering its geometry, so that when a second object enters this space, it experiences the distortions. In 1928 Dirac developed his relativistic quantum theory of the electron by combining Maxwell's electrodynamics, relativity and quantum mechanics. Dirac's theory, a quantum ®eld theory, was further developed by Richard Feynman, Sin-Itiro Tomonaga and Julian Schwinger into a complete theory, known today as quantum electrodynamics or QED. According to electrodynamics, when an electron accelerates, it radiates energy in the form of an electromagnetic wave. From quantum mechanics, we know that this electromagnetic wave consists of photons. Thus the acceleration of an electron results in the emission of one or more photons. When an electron approaches another electron, the mutual electrostatic repulsion that results is interpreted in QED as due to an interaction with the photons emitted by the accelerating electrons. According to QED, the approaching electron emits a photon which is then absorbed by the second electron. We can illustrate this process with the diagram shown in ®gure 24.2. An electron is represented by a straight line and the photon they exchange by a wiggly line. These diagrams were ®rst used by Richard Feynman as symbolic representations of equations and are known today as Feynman diagrams. Where do the photons exchanged between two interacting electrons come from? From nowhere. They are allowed by the uncertainty principle. The electron creates a photon which is 558 Elementary Particles Figure 24.2. Feynman diagram of the interaction between two electrons. The two electrons exchange virtual photons which carry energy and momentum. This exchange causes the electromagnetic repulsion between the two electrons. absorbed by the interacting electron before the change in energy associated with its creation can be detected. If the uncertainty in our knowledge of the energy of the electron is
E and
t the uncertainty in our knowledge of the time during which the electron has that energy, Heisenberg's uncertainty principle states that h :
E 
t  2 This expression means that during the interval
t a photon of energy as large as
E is created. If the second electron absorbs this photon before the time
t is up, no experiment can detect any missing energy. Particles that exist for only the time allowed by the uncertainty principle are called virtual particles. A virtual photon exists only for the brief, ¯eeting moment permitted by the uncertainty principle. Real photons exist forever, provided they do not interact with other particles. Quantum ®eld theory provides an answer to the questions that opened this section. All the forces of nature can be explained as being the result of the exchange of some virtual particle. Pions Is it possible to understand the strong interaction between nucleons in terms of the exchange of virtual particles? The Japanese physicist Hideki Yukawa made such a suggestion in 1933. 559 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS ``By confronting this dif®cult problem I committed myself to long days of suffering,'' writes Yukawa in his autobiography. ``Is the new nuclear force a primary one? . . . It seemed likely that [it] was a third fundamental force unrelated to gravitation and electromagnetism . . . Perhaps the nuclear force could ®nd expression as a ®eld . . . If one visualizes the force ®eld as a game of `catch' between protons and neutrons, the crux of the problem would be the nature of the `ball' or particle.'' Heisenberg had had a similar idea before and had proposed that the ``ball'' was the electron. At ®rst, Yukawa thought also that the electron was the intermediary particle. Soon, he realized that this was not possible. ``Let me not look for the particle that belongs to the nuclear force among the known particles . . . If I focus on the characteristics of the nuclear force ®eld, then the characteristics of the particle I seek will become apparent,'' he wrote. Then came the stroke of genius. ``The crucial point came to me in October [1934]. The nuclear force is effective at extremely small distances. My new insight was that this distance and the mass of the new particle are inversely related to each other.'' If a virtual particle of mass m can only exist for a time
t allowed by the uncertainty principle and we assume that this particle can travel at the speed close to c, the maximum range R of the particle (that is, the maximum distance that the particle can travel during its existence) is R ˆ c
t: The uncertainty in energy equals the mass energy of the virtual particle
E ˆ mc2 : The uncertainty principle
E
t  h=2 gives us h h ˆ
t ˆ : 2
E 2mc2 The maximum range of the virtual particle is h Rˆ : 2mc The maximum range is then inversely proportional to the mass. If the mass is zero, the range becomes in®nite. A massive virtual particle has a ®nite range; the more massive the particle is, the shorter the range. The electromagnetic interaction had an in®nite 560 Elementary Particles Figure 24.3. Feynman diagram for the strong interaction between two protons via the exchange of a virtual pion. range and was mediated by a massless particle, the photon. The nuclear force, a very short-range force, had to be mediated by a massive particle. Knowing that nuclear forces occur over less than 10ÿ14 m Yukawa calculated the mass of the new particle to be 140 MeV/c2 . Because its mass fell between the mass of the electron and the mass of the proton, the new particle was called meson (from the Greek meso, ``middle''). Three years later, in 1937, a team of American scientists found a particle with a mass of about 100 MeV/c2 and it was immediately assumed that it was the meson predicted by Yukawa. Experiments carried out in 1945, however, showed that this new particle interacted weakly with protons and neutrons and consequently could not be the mediator of the nuclear force. The following year, the real Yukawa particle, the particle exchanged in the nuclear interaction, was found in cosmic rays and was named the  meson or pion. (The earlier particle, later called the muon, turned out to be a completely different beast that participates only in weak and electromagnetic interactions and has nothing to do with Yukawa's particle.) There are three kinds of pions: ‡ ; ÿ , which is the antiparticle of the ‡ ; and 0 , which is its own antiparticle. Figure 24.3 illustrates the strong interaction between two protons via the exchange of a virtual pion. Particle classi®cation: Hadrons and leptons In the subsequent years, experiments with cosmic rays and with particle accelerators yielded a plethora of new particles. In 561 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS addition to the protons, neutrons, pions, muons, neutrinos and photons, particles with names like sigma, delta, lambda, tau meson, and kaon, were added to the arsenal of high-energy physicists. What to make of all these particles? To make sense of the hundreds of particles that have been discovered, a classi®cation scheme based on the interaction in which they participate has been devised. Particles that participate in the strong interaction, the interaction that holds the nucleus together, are called hadrons (from the Greek hadros, meaning strong). Hadrons with half-integer spin in units of h=2 (such as the proton or the neutron) are called baryons, whereas hadrons with integer spin (such as the pion) are called mesons. Since all baryons, except the proton itself, ultimately decay into protons and other particles, they are all more massive than the proton (baryon means heavy in Greek). Particles that do not interact via the strong force are called leptons, from the Greek leptos, meaning light. The electron, the neutrino, the muon and the tau particle are all leptons. To the best of anyone's knowledge, the muon is exactly the same as the electron except that it is 200 times more massive. The same can be said for the tau; in this case, it is 3500 times heavier than the electron. All leptons have spin 12 and all are truly elementary particles, without any internal structure. As far as we know, leptons are point particles with no dimensions. The most precise experiments have determined that the electron is no larger than 10ÿ17 cm in diameter. This is one thousandmillionth the size of an atom and one ten-thousandth the size of a proton. In a weak interaction involving the electron, like the decay of the neutron, one kind of neutrino is involved, the electron neutrino. In the decay of the pion, however, another kind of neutrino, the muon neutrino, is involved. When this neutrino strikes a target, it produces muons and not electrons. There is a third type of neutrino emitted in conjunction with the tau particle, the tau neutrino. There is then a grouping of leptons into pairs or generations, the electron with the electron neutrino, the muon with the muon neutrino, and the tau particle with the tau neutrino. Each one of these leptons has its corresponding antiparticle. This classi®cation is summarized in Table 24.2. 562 Elementary Particles Table 24.2. Lepton classi®cation Generation First Second Third Charged lepton ÿ Electron, e Muon, ÿ Tau,  ÿ Neutrino Charged antilepton ‡ e   Positron, e Antimuon, ‡ Antitau, ‡ Antineutrino e   Conservation laws Interactions between elementary particles take place according to a set of conservation laws. One such law is the principle of conservation of energy. In any process between particles, the mass energy of the decay products must equal the mass energy of the original particles. It was the principle of conservation of energy that led Wolfgang Pauli in 1932 to predict the existence of the neutrino from the observation of an apparent violation of this law in beta-decay processes. The neutrino was found in 1950. Conservation of electric charge is another very important law. It says that the sum of all the charges of the original particles must equal the sum of the charges of the particles produced in the interaction. For example, in the reaction between two nucleons that produces pions: p ‡ n ! p ‡ p ‡ ÿ electric charge: 1‡0!1‡1ÿ1 the sum of the charges of the original nucleons is 1 and the sum of the charges of the products is 1 ‡ 1 ÿ 1 ˆ 1: Conservation of energy and conservation of charge ± two laws we had encountered before ± are, as far as we know, universal laws. We mentioned before that all baryons ®nally decay into protons. This is a consequence of another important conservation law, the law of conservation of baryons. In any interaction, the creation of a baryon must be accompanied by the creation of an antibaryon. If we assign a baryon number B ˆ ‡1 to all baryons, B ˆ ÿ1 to all antibaryons, and B ˆ 0 to all other particles, this law can also be stated as follows: Law of Conservation of Baryons: In any interaction, the total baryon number must remain constant. 563 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Since the proton is the lightest baryon, all other baryons must ultimately decay to a proton, which can decay no further without changing baryon number. Leptons also obey similar conservation laws. Leptons, as we recall, participate in weak interactions. A weak decay process is the decay of the neutron into a proton, an electron and an electron-neutrino. Another weak decay is that of the pion, which decays into a muon and a muon-neutrino. In all of these processes, the creation of a lepton always takes place with the creation of an antilepton. If the leptons (electron, muon and tau) are assigned a lepton number ‡1 and the antileptons a lepton number ÿ1, this principle can be stated as follows: Principle of Conservation of Leptons: In all interactions between particles, the total lepton number for each variety (electron, muon, and tau) must remain constant. As we indicated before, each charged lepton has its own associated neutrino, so that a pion cannot decay into a muon and an electron-neutrino. The electron and the electron-neutrino are then assigned an electronic lepton number Le ˆ ‡1. The positron and the positron-neutrino are assigned an electronic lepton number Le ˆ ÿ1. All other leptons and in fact all other particles are assigned an electronic lepton number Le ˆ 0. The muon and the muon-neutrino, on the other hand, are assigned a muonic lepton number L ˆ ‡1; the antimuon and its associated neutrino have L ˆ ÿ1. Similarly for the tau and the tau-neutrino. Table 24.3 Table 24.3. Lepton quantum numbers Lepton Le L L eÿ e ÿ  ÿ  e‡ e ‡  ‡  ‡1 ‡1 0 0 0 0 ÿ1 ÿ1 0 0 0 0 0 0 ‡1 ‡1 0 0 0 0 ÿ1 ÿ1 0 0 0 0 0 0 ‡1 ‡1 0 0 0 0 ÿ1 ÿ1 564 Elementary Particles summarizes the lepton quantum numbers of the six leptons and their antiparticles. Strange particles There are some important differences between hadrons and leptons. Hadrons have a de®nite extension in space whereas leptons behave like point particles. In addition, there are only six leptons (and their corresponding six antiparticles), while the hadrons, it is believed today, are in®nite in number. Moreover, all leptons obey the same law of conservation of lepton number. For hadrons, only the baryons have a conservation law; there is no meson number conservation law. To complicate matters, new particles were discovered in the early 1950s. These were produced via the strong interaction, making them hadrons; but they decayed in strange ways, as if they were leptons decaying through the weak interaction. These particles, the K mesons or kaons, and the  (Greek capital lambda) and  (Greek capital xi) baryons, were called strange particles owing to their strange behavior. In 1952, Abraham Pais of the Institute for Advanced Studies in Princeton introduced the idea of associated production, according to which, the strange particles were always produced in pairs. In 1956 Murray Gell-Mann in the United States and Kazuhiko Nishijima in Japan independently suggested that Pais's associated production phenomenon was the result of the conservation of a new property, which they called strangeness. It turned out that strangeness, with a new quantum number S, must be conserved in strong interactions. The strange particles can only be produced in pairs of overall zero strangeness. Quarks In 1961, Gell-Mann, and independently Yuval Neeman in Israel, noticed a pattern in the hadrons which was based on a mathematical symmetry which they called SU(3). The mathematical tool that Gell-Mann and Neeman used to discover this symmetry is called group theory, a technique that had been formulated by a twenty-year-old French mathematician, Evariste Galois, the 565 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS night before his death in 1832. Galois had become involved in a duel challenge over a woman and, anticipating his death, spent his last night writing out his ideas on group theory. Galois was killed but his ideas survived, and Gell-Mann and Neeman used them in their theory. According to the symmetric group SU(3), each hadron is a member of a speci®c family of hadrons with 1, 8, 10, and 27 members each. Gell-Mann called this scheme the eightfold way. The proton and the neutron belong to the same family of eight hadrons, called the baryon octet. The pion also belongs to a family with eight members called the meson octet. The eightfold way was very successful in the prediction of unknown particles. The most spectacular prediction was that of the ÿ (Greek capital omega minus) particle, the tenth member of a family of hadrons called a decuplet. The mass and the quantum properties of the ÿ had been predicted by Gell-Mann in 1962. In December 1963 the ÿ was found by a team of physicists at Brookhaven National Laboratory with exactly the properties predicted by the eightfold way. The questions that scientists were asking then were: Why did the eightfold way work? Why were the hadrons grouped into families of 1, 8, 10, and 27 members each? It was again GellMann with yet another physicist working independently, George Zweig, who provided the answers. Zweig who, like Gell-Mann, was a professor of physics at Caltech, developed his ideas while on sabbatical leave at CERN, the European research center in Geneva. They suggested that the families in the eightfold way could all be generated from a basic triplet which corresponded to three new fundamental particles that made up all the hadrons. Hadrons, according to the new theory, were not elementary particles but were composed of members of a fundamental triplet that Gell-Mann called quarks. A proton, for example, was supposed to be composed of three quarks. Gell-Mann borrowed the name quark from a passage in James Joyce's novel Finnegans Wake that reads: Three quarks for Muster Mark! Sure he hasn't got much bark And sure any he has it's all beside the mark. The ``three quarks'' may refer to the three children of Mr Mark (or Mr Finn) who occasionally represent him. 566 Elementary Particles Table 24.4. Quantum numbers of the original three quarks and their antiparticles Quark Charge (e) Baryon number Strangeness Spin u d s  u  d s ‡ 13 ÿ 13 ÿ 13 ÿ 23 ‡ 13 ‡ 13 1 3 1 3 1 3 ÿ 13 ÿ 13 ÿ 13 0 0 ÿ1 0 0 ‡1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 The three quarks in the original theory are point particles like the electron and with the same spin 12. According to this theory, all hadrons are made of combinations of two or three quarks, called the up or u quark, down or d quark and strange or s quark. The three varieties of quark are known as ¯avors. The term comes from the initial whimsical use of the names ``chocolate,'' ``vanilla'' and ``strawberry'' for the three quarks. Although these names did not stick, the term ``¯avor'' for the different types of quark did. Quarks have unusual quantum numbers (table 24.4). The most unusual is the fractional electric charge. The baryon number is also fractional. All baryons, like the proton and neutron, are combinations of three quarks, and their antiparticles are combinations of three antiquarks. With three quarks to a baryon, the baryon number of a quark has to be 13. Mesons, on the other hand, are combinations of a quark and an antiquark, giving a baryon number of zero, as it should be, since they are not baryons. The rules of SU(3) govern the combination of quarks into baryons and mesons to produce the correct baryon, charge and other quantum numbers. According to these rules, the proton is composed of two u quarks and one d quark, as shown in ®gure 24.4(a). As shown in table 24.4, the u quarks Figure 24.4. (a) Quark structure of the proton and (b) the pion. 567 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Pioneers of physics: Gell-Mann's quark James Joyce's last novel, Finnegans Wake, is a massive, dauntingly obscure work in which technique is more important than content. The story centers on a Dublin pub owner named H C Earwicker who dreams throughout the entire novel. Through his dreams Earwicker reenacts myths and great historical events in a haphazard progression of re¯ection, complete with paradoxes, repetitions and sudden changes of focus. The novel is also full of puns, deliberate misspellings and curious linguistic turns, beginning with the missing apostrophe in the book's title. When Gell-Mann was struggling with his eightfold way, he was trying to explain to a colleague why some of the conclusions of his calculations seemed crazy because they implied the existence of fractional electric charge. Thinking more about it the following day, Gell-Mann began to accept the strange conclusions. Because these fractional charges were so peculiar, he used an odd term for them: quork. Several months later, when he was ready to publish his idea, he found himself reading some passages in Finnegans Wake (``you know how you read Finnegans Wake,'' he said in an interview), when he came across ``Three quarks for Muster Mark.'' That was it! Three quarks make a proton or a neutron! Although Joyce's word rhymes with bark, it was close enough to his quork. Quark it was from then on. have a charge of ‡ 23 and the d quark has a charge of ÿ 13; the total charge of the proton is then ‡ 23 ‡ 23 ÿ 13 ˆ 1, in units of the fundamental charge e, which is the charge of the proton. The pion is composed of a u quark and an anti-d quark. Its total charge is ‡ 23 ‡ 13 ˆ 1. Particles with charm In 1973, the theoretical physicist Sheldon Glashow of Harvard University and his collaborators developed a more complete theory of quarks based on mathematical symmetries which led 568 Elementary Particles them to propose the existence of a fourth quark ¯avor which Glashow named the charm or c quark. The introduction of this fourth quark was done on a theoretical basis alone, for no hadrons had been found that required its existence. In November of 1974 two experimental teams, one led by Samuel Ting at Brookhaven National Laboratory and the other led by Burton Richter at Stanford Linear Accelerator simultaneously announced their independent discovery of a new particle that behaved like a meson but was heavier than the proton. Ting, who is of Chinese descent, named the particle the J because his name in Chinese is written with a character similar to this letter. The Stanford group, however, had named the particle the (Greek capital psi). Since the discovery was made simultaneously by the two groups, the particle is known today as the J= . The behavior of this particle could only be explained in terms of the c quark predicted by Glashow. Some time later, other charged mesons were discovered that con®rmed the existence of the c quark. Ting and Richter won the Nobel prize in physics in 1976 for their work. In the early 1970s, there were four quark ¯avors and four leptons. In 1975, experiments conducted at Stanford University led to the discovery of the ®fth lepton, the tau, and this discovery persuaded physicists to consider the possibility of a ®fth and even sixth quark. These quarks were named bottom or b quark and top or t quark. In 1977, Leon Lederman and his group at the Fermi National Laboratory reported the discovery of a very massive meson, the , which consists of a b±b pair, thus con®rming the existence of the b quark. Evidence for the t quark was found at Fermilab in 1995. Table 24.5 lists the quantum numbers of the six quarks. Table 24.5. Quark quantum numbers Quark Charge (e) Baryon number Strangeness Charm Bottom Top u d s c b t ‡ 23 ÿ 13 ÿ 13 ‡ 23 ÿ 13 ‡ 23 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 0 0 ÿ1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 ÿ1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 569 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Table 24.6. Quark classi®cation Generation Quark First Second Third u s b d c t Just as the six leptons were classi®ed into three generations, the six quarks are also classi®ed in three generations each containing two associated quarks or ¯avor doublets (Table 24.6). The three generations of quarks and leptons are shown in table 24.7. Table 24.7. Quarks and leptons Charge Symbol Name ‡ 23 ÿ 13 0 ÿ1 u d e e Up Down Electron Electron neutrino ‡ 23 ÿ 13 0 ÿ1 c s   Charm Strange Muon Muon neutrino ‡ 23 ÿ 13 0 ÿ1 t b   Top Bottom Tau Tau neutrino 570 25 SUPERFORCE: EINSTEIN'S DREAM Symmetry Gottfried Wilhelm Leibniz, the seventeenth century German philosopher and mathematician, formulated the principle of the identity of the indiscernibles, which states that if it is not possible to establish a difference between two objects, they are identical. Since it is not possible to distinguish between two identical objects, an interchange in their positions has no effect in the physical state of the two objects or of the system they belong to. This interchange is an example of what a mathematician calls symmetry. When a system remains unchanged after some operation is performed on it (such as the exchange of two identical particles) we say that the system is invariant under that particular operation. Another example of a symmetric operation is the rotation of crystals and other objects that have symmetry. If we rotate a snow¯ake through an angle of 608, the new orientation is indistinguishable from the original orientation. Rotating a cube through an angle of 908 around any one of its three axes gives us back the original orientation. A sphere can be rotated through any angle around any axis and the new position is indistinguishable from the original. We say that the sphere is invariant under any rotation. Figure 25.1 illustrates these symmetries. After a symmetric operation, such as the exchange of two identical electrons in an atom, the mathematical equation that describes the system must remain invariant. To deal with these symmetries, physicists use a mathematical technique called group theory, which we mentioned in connection with GellMann's Eightfold Way. Group theory was developed by Galois 571 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 25.1. A snow¯ake is unchanged when rotated 608. A rotation of 908 around an axis keeps the cube unchanged. A sphere can be rotated through any angle and remain unchanged. in France in 1831. Towards the end of the nineteenth century, the Norwegian mathematician Sophus Lie classi®ed all possible groups of a particular type into seven classes. The Lie group O(3), for example, describes the symmetry of a billiard ball; the ball looks exactly the same after it is rotated through any angle. The connection between symmetry and the laws of physics stems from the work of the brilliant German mathematician Amalie Emmy NoÈther. Born in the university town of Erlangen in 1882, NoÈther attended the all-male University of Erlangen where her father was a professor of mathematics, after obtaining special permission to enroll. In 1907 she received her PhD degree summa cum laude with a dissertation on invariants. After graduation, she taught without salary at a mathematical school and occasionally substituted for her father at the university. In 1915, she joined a research team working on Einstein's general relativity at GoÈttingen but was not accepted at the university even with an unpaid contract. The eminent mathematician David Hilbert, who supported her appointment and even had her lecture in his classes, angrily said, ``I do not see that the sex of the candidate is an argument against her admission as [an instructor]. After all, we are a university and not a bathing establishment.'' She ®nally won admission as a university instructor in 1919. By 1930 NoÈther had become the center of mathematical research at GoÈttingen. In 1933, she ¯ed Nazi Germany for the United States and became a visiting professor of mathematics at Bryn Mawr College and a member of the research faculty at the Institute for Advanced Study in Princeton. After her death in 1935, Einstein wrote of her work in The New York Times: 572 Superforce: Einstein's Dream Pure mathematics is, in its way, the poetry of logical ideas. One seeks the most general ideas of operation which will bring together in simple, logical and uni®ed form the largest possible circle of formal relationships. In this effort toward logical beauty spiritual formulas are discovered necessary for the deeper penetration into the laws of nature. The theorem that made NoÈther famous among physicists was developed for the paper that she presented before the faculty at GoÈttingen as part of her application for the position, as was customary in German universities. NoÈther's theorem can be stated as follows: For every continuous symmetry in the laws of physics there exists a corresponding conservation law. A continuous symmetry is one in which the corresponding transformation can be varied continuously, as is the case with rotation. The angle of rotation can be continuously changed. This symmetry leads to the conservation of angular momentum. Global and local symmetries NoÈther's elegant theorem prompted physicists to re-examine the conservation laws from the perspective of symmetry. In 1918, the year that NoÈther introduced her theorem, the physicist Hermann Weyl was attempting to formulate a theory that would combine electromagnetism and the general theory of relativity by showing that both theories were linked to a symmetry of space. He proposed a theory that remained invariant under arbitrary space dilations or contractions in which the standards of length and time changed at every point in space-time. This reminded him of the gauge steel blocks used by railroad engineers as standards of length in their determination of the distance between tracks and so he referred to the invariance in his theory as gauge invariance. The gauge invariance in Weyl's theory was a local one because the standards of length and time changed at every point. In a global gauge invariance, on the other hand, the symmetric transformation must not change at every point but must be the same everywhere at once. An example of global symmetry is the charge symmetry of electromagnetism. Suppose that after we carefully 573 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 25.2. Changing the sign of all the individual charges produces no effect on the forces between them. measure the interactions between all pairs of charges in some region of space the sign of each individual charge is changed. Measuring the forces between all pairs again produces exactly the same result. The forces are unchanged by a change in the sign of all particles in the region of interest (®gure 25.2). As another example of global symmetry, suppose that one evening some phenomenon causes the dimensions of everything on the earth to be reduced by one half, including the earth itself. When you wake up the next morning, everything will appear to be normal. There is no way to determine that a change took place because everything changed in the same proportion; all the measuring devices were reduced in the same proportion and the phenomenon is undetected. Precision measurements of the diameter of the moon, the orbits of the planets and the frequency of the light reaching us from the sun and other stars would of course make possible the detection of this hypothetical phenomenon. Therefore, to be precise, we would have to say that the change has to take place in the entire universe at once. Clearly, if only some objects change size, the phenomenon is easy to detect. How can we then have local symmetries? That is, how can we produce different changes at different points or to different objects and still keep the system unchanged? By ®nding another part of the system that produces a compensating change. If you are photographing an approaching water skier and want the size of the image to remain constant in your view®nder, you can zoom out to compensate. If you are skillful enough, you may succeed in maintaining the size unchanged. The zooming effect of your lens compensates for the apparent change in size of the approaching skier. Suppose that we measure the electric ®eld at a particular point due to a stationary electric charge located a certain distance away. If the entire laboratory is then raised to a potential of, say, 2000 volts, a determination of the electric ®eld should yield the same value. The reason is that the electric ®eld is determined only by differences in the electric potential, not by the absolute 574 Superforce: Einstein's Dream value of the potential. An analogous situation occurs when we measure the energy required to lift a 10-kg box from the ¯oor up to a height of one meter. If we ®rst perform this experiment in a laboratory at sea level and later in a laboratory in the mountains, at an altitude of 2000 meters, the amount of energy will be the same. The energy required to lift the box depends only on the difference in height. The symmetries involved here are global symmetries. In the case of the electric ®eld experiment, the entire laboratory was raised to the same potential. Neither electricity nor Newtonian gravitation contains local symmetries. What happens if the electric charge in our experiment is not static? Maxwell's theory of electromagnetism, we recall, also deals with moving charges. A charge in motion relative to the laboratory generates a magnetic ®eld. Just as there is an electric potential associated with the electric ®eld, a magnetic potential, associated with the magnetic ®eld, can be de®ned. The interplay between the two potentials allows us to establish the local symmetry. Any arbitrary local change in the electric potential can be compensated by a local change in the magnetic potential. This means that we are free to set our own reference potential at every point in space in any way we want. Regardless of how we vary the one potential throughout space, the other potential can be adjusted to cancel out the differences. A charged particle moving through this region of space will experience no change in the electromagnetic force acting on it as a consequence of the changes in each individual potential. Seen this way, the electromagnetic ®eld is not merely a force ®eld which happens to exist in nature; it is actually a manifestation of a simple local gauge symmetry. Although Newtonian gravity exhibits only global symmetry, Einstein's general relativity is a theory based on a local gauge symmetry, as well. We can say that the force of gravity is also a manifestation of a simple local gauge symmetry. As we shall see soon, all four forces of nature can be generated from local gauge symmetries. The electroweak uni®cation Maxwell uni®ed electricity and magnetism without any knowledge of group theory, local gauge symmetries or NoÈther's 575 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS theorem. His only guide was the symmetry observed in electric and magnetic phenomena and in the equations that described them. From a modern perspective, we can see that although neither electricity nor magnetism alone exhibits local symmetry, the uni®ed theory of electromagnetism does exhibit this more powerful local gauge symmetry. Nearly a hundred years later, two physicists at Brookhaven National Laboratory, C N Yang and Robert L Mills, took the ®rst steps toward the next uni®cation. Yang, the son of a mathematics professor, emigrated to the United States from his native China in 1945 at the age of 23 and entered the University of Chicago as a graduate student in physics. At Chicago, Yang began thinking about a way to generalize Maxwell's theory of electromagnetism to see if there was some sort of connection between it and the theory of the weak interaction. Electromagnetism, Yang knew, possessed a kind of symmetry known as U(1). That is, electromagnetism was invariant under U(1) gauge transformations. Werner Heisenberg had shown in 1932 that if a proton is changed into a neutron everywhere in the universe, the strong force between nucleons remains unchanged. The reason for this invariance is that, as we saw in the previous chapter, the strong force can be thought of as due to the exchange of a meson, and this exchange takes place regardless of whether the particles are protons or neutrons. The symmetry in Heisenberg's theory is known as global SU(2) gauge symmetry. Could it be possible to construct a theory with local SU(2) symmetry? In 1954, Yang and Mills succeeded in constructing such a theory. To convert the global symmetry into a local one, they introduced a set of new ®elds that described a family of spin-1 particles. Two of these ®elds were identi®ed with the electric and magnetic ®elds, and they described the photon. The remaining ®elds described charged photons, one positive and the other negative. Charged photons had never been observed in nature. However, physicists knew that the weak interaction, like the electromagnetic interaction, was mediated by spin-1 particles. Could the new charged photons be the mediators of the weak interaction? The fact that they were charged made the particles possible candidates for the positions of mediators. The only problem was that the weak interaction was known to be short-range, 576 Superforce: Einstein's Dream requiring a particle with mass, and the new charged photons of Yang and Mills were massless. The way out of this dif®culty came from three physicists who were to succeed where others had failed; in the uni®cation of electromagnetism with one of the nuclear forces. Abdus Salam from Imperial College, London, and Sheldon Glashow from Harvard University were working independently on gauge theories and became aware of each other's work when Glashow, just after completing his PhD, gave a lecture on his work in London. Although the two were later to share the Nobel prize for their work in the uni®cation of the weak and electromagnetic interactions, the encounter in London did not result in a collaboration. Salam, who was in the audience when Glashow presented some of his results in his early attempt at a gauge theory linking the weak and electromagnetic forces, did not believe that ``this slip of a boy'' was correct. ``Naturally,'' said Salam later, ``I wanted to show he was wrong, which he was. As a consequence, I never read anything else by Glashow, which of course turned out to be a mistake.'' Salam was born and raised in what is now Pakistan and entered Punjab University with the highest marks ever recorded in the entrance examination. In 1946 he traveled to England where he obtained two separate undergraduate degrees in mathematics and in physics at Cambridge University. After obtaining his PhD in theoretical physics, Salam returned to Pakistan to teach at the university. The work that he had done for his doctoral thesis, however, had made him well known among physicists and when a position opened at the University of Edinburgh in 1954, it was immediately offered to him. In a paper on gauge theories, Salam advanced the idea that systems that are not symmetrical can be described by symmetrical equations. This idea, now called spontaneous symmetry breaking, had actually been proposed in another context by Heisenberg in 1928. Heisenberg used the temperature dependence of ferromagnetic materials to illustrate symmetry breaking. A magnet has a north and a south pole formed by the alignment of millions of atoms, as we saw in chapter 14. A magnet, then, has a very speci®c orientation in space; the force that it exerts on an object made of iron located near its north pole is different from the force on the same object when the magnet is rotated 908, for 577 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 25.3. (a) Iron atoms in a magnet at normal temperatures. Rotating this magnet produces a different magnetic ®eld con®guration. (b) Heating up the magnet above a certain critical temperature destroys the alignment of the iron atoms. Rotation of the magnet now produces no change in the space around it. example (®gure 25.3(a)). The interaction with the magnet is not invariant under rotations in three dimensions. If, however, we heat up the magnet above a certain temperature, the alignment of the atoms is lost due to the increased random motion caused by the added energy. Now the magnet can be rotated in any direction without any change in the interaction with the object (®gure 25.3(b)). In the language of groups, we say that the interaction is invariant under the symmetry group O(3); that is, under rotations in three dimensions. When the temperature falls below the critical temperature, this symmetry is broken. Below this temperature, 578 Superforce: Einstein's Dream the symmetry is hidden. Adding energy to the magnet allows us to observe this symmetry. In 1967, Steven Weinberg from Harvard University published a paper in which he showed that the massless charged photons predicted by Yang and Mills could be considered to be the mediators of the weak interaction when spontaneous symmetry breaking was taken into account. Abdus Salam in London was to make the same discovery a few months later. To achieve the spontaneous symmetry breaking, Weinberg and Salam made use of an idea developed by F Englert and Robert H Brout of the University of Brussels and by Peter Higgs of the University of Edinburgh. According to this mechanism, known today as the Higgs mechanism, a new ®eld ± the Higgs ®eld ± is introduced to the theory which has its lowest energy state with broken symmetry. We can illustrate the Higgs ®eld with the situation presented in ®gure 25.4. A top balanced on a smooth surface with its axis oriented in the vertical direction has an obvious symmetry; that is, the top remains unchanged when it is rotated around its vertical axis. However, this position is unstable; any small perturbation will cause the top to topple, losing energy. A rotation around the vertical axis now does not keep the top unchanged; the symmetry is broken. The position with broken symmetry has lower energy than the unstable equilibrium with rotational symmetry. Likewise, the behavior of the Higgs mechanism is such that the state in which the Higgs ®eld has its lowest energy is one of broken symmetry. According to this idea, the Higgs ®eld couples with the Yang± Mills ®elds and in the process it gives mass to the Yang±Mills Figure 25.4. (a) Balancing a top on its tip so that its long axis is vertical produces an unstable equilibrium; the top easily falls. This position has rotational symmetry. (b) When the top falls, losing energy, the symmetry is broken. 579 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS photons. Salam refers to this mechanism in a picturesque way: the massless Yang±Mills particles ``eat'' the Higgs particles in order to gain weight, and the eaten particles become ``ghosts.'' Weinberg and Salam were able to construct a theory of the weak and electromagnetic interactions based on the Yang±Mills theory and the Higgs mechanism. According to their model, at very high energies the mediators of the interaction are massless. At low energies, due to the spontaneous symmetry-breaking Higgs mechanism, these particles acquire masses. At the outset, the four ®elds in the Weinberg±Salam model have in®nite range and are therefore mediated by massless particles. The Higgs mechanism that causes the system to fall to the lower, stable energy state selects the broken symmetry solution and gives masses to three of the four particles. These particles are known today as the W ‡ , the W ÿ and the Z0 . The fourth particle remains massless; this particle is the photon, mediator of the electromagnetic interaction. The photon is the mediator of the electric and magnetic forces. We can thus consider electricity and magnetism to be two different manifestations of the same force because the mediator of both interactions is the photon. The electromagnetic interaction and the weak interaction are both gauge theories whose forces are mediated by the exchange of the same family of particles. These interactions appear very different to us because our observations are done at low energies, and at these energies, due to the spontaneous symmetry breaking mechanism, the mediators of the interactions are different. The mediator of the electromagnetic interaction, the photon, is massless and the interaction has in®nite range. The mediators of the weak interaction, the W ‡ and W ÿ and the Z particles, are very massive and the interaction is short-range. At extremely high energies, the theory predicted, the symmetry is restored, all the mediators become massless photons, and the two forces become one: the electroweak force. The electroweak theory of Weinberg and Salam was very beautiful. Originally formulated in the late 1960s, it was cleaned up of certain mathematical dif®culties by a very bright graduate student at the University of Utrecht, Gerald 'T Hooft, in 1971. The only dif®culty remaining with the theory was that no W or Z particles had ever been observed. In 1983, an extremely elaborate experimental set-up conducted by two teams of several hundred 580 Superforce: Einstein's Dream physicists led by Carlo Rubbia at CERN, the European center for nuclear research, discovered the W and Z particles and triumphantly con®rmed the predictions of the electroweak theory. In 1979, Weinberg, Salam and Glashow shared the Nobel prize in physics for the formulation of their theory. In 1984, Carlo Rubbia and Simon van der Meer, the Dutch physicist who discovered the brilliant experimental technique, shared the Nobel prize in physics for the detection of the W and Z particles. 'T Hooft won the prize in 1999. The color force The enormous success of the electroweak theory encouraged physicists to seek further uni®cation of the fundamental forces of nature. The next obvious step was to try to integrate the theory of the strong interaction with the electroweak theory. The strong interaction arises from the interactions between quarks. Quarks, as we have seen, have fractional electric charge, and the different combinations of quarks to form hadrons obey the law of conservation of charge so that, for example, the two u quarks with charge ‡ 23 and the d quark with charge ÿ 13 that form a proton add up to a total charge of ‡1, the charge of the proton in units of the fundamental charge e (the charge of the electron). The way that these charges add up, however, does not explain why quarks combine to form the different hadrons observed. One way to explain this interaction is to imagine that quarks possess a new kind of charge, in addition to their electric charge. For mesons, which consist of a quark and an antiquark, this charge acts in a fashion analogous to the electric charge that binds the electrons to the nucleus to form an atom; that is, opposite charges attract. For protons or neutrons which consist of combinations of three quarks, the situation is more complicated and we need to consider the attraction of three charges. This new kind of charge is called color charge, although it has nothing whatsoever to do with the colors of the visible spectrum. The three color charges are called red, green, and blue, like the primary colors, because the mathematical rules obeyed by these three charges are similar to the way the three primary colors combine to form white. Each quark (u, d, s, c, b, and t) has the three possible 581 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 25.5. The combination of a red, a green and a blue quark to form a proton gives a color-neutral or white particle. color charges red, green and blue. Quarks can combine in groups of two or three to form a particle only when the resulting color is white, in a way similar to the formation of neutral atoms by an equal number of positively charged protons in the nucleus and negatively charged orbiting electrons. Thus, a proton, which we know consists of two u quarks and one d quark has a red u quark, a green d quark and a blue u quark. Like the primary colors, the red, green and blue quarks combine to produce a white or color-neutral proton (®gure 25.5). What about mesons, which are composed of a quark and an antiquark? It turns out that antiquarks have the anticolors: cyan, the anticolor of red; magenta, the anticolor of green; and yellow, the anticolor of blue. As pigments, these colors absorb the primary colors and are said to be subtractive colors or complementaries. Cyan is a greenish-blue color that absorbs red; magenta absorbs green; and yellow absorbs blue. When we add a subtractive color to its corresponding primary color we get white. Likewise, when a quark with red color charge is combined with an antiquark with cyan color charge, the result is white, as is the case with the pion (®gure 25.6). The theory that explains the color interactions between quarks is called quantum chromodynamics or QCD, and is modeled after quantum electrodynamics or QED, the most successful theory ever devised. Although from our discussion above it might seem that QCD is a fairly straightforward and simple theory, the equations are much more complicated than in any other theory and the calculations extremely complicated and tedious. QCD is a gauge theory and it is this fact what allows 582 Superforce: Einstein's Dream Figure 25.6. A pion is formed with a red u quark and a cyan d antiquark. The particle has no color charge, since red and cyan combine to produce white. its uni®cation with the electroweak theory. The gauge symmetry associated with QCD is the invariance in the local transformations of color. Since the invariance is local, the color of one quark can change while the other quarks remain unmodi®ed. This change would give color to the particle of which the quark is a constituent. As with the electroweak theory, the way to Figure 25.7. (Cartoon by Leo Cullum.) 583 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS balance this change is with the introduction of new ®elds. The messenger particles of these ®elds are called gluons, of which there are eight, one for each compensating ®eld. The gluons play the same role in quantum chromodynamics as the photon in electrodynamics and the W ‡ , W ÿ and Z0 particles in the weak interaction; they are the messenger particles that convey the force. Gluons carry one color and one anticolor, although not necessarily of a corresponding pair. A gluon can carry, for example, blue-antigreen or red-antiblue. When a quark changes color, a colored gluon is emitted which is then absorbed by another quark. Since the absorbed gluon carries color, the second quark shifts its color in exactly the right way to compensate for the color change that took place in the ®rst quark, keeping the hadron formed by these quarks white. This is the gauge symmetry of QCD. Although the quark colors vary from point to point, all hadrons remain white due to the continual compensation carried by the gluon ®elds. GUTs, the third uni®cation With quantum chromodynamics and the electroweak theory based on the gauge symmetry principle, the next problem was whether these two theories could be uni®ed into a single one. Would it be possible to build a theory treating quarks and leptons on an equal footing? In 1973 Sheldon Glashow and Howard Georgi of Harvard University proposed such a theory. In their Grand Uni®ed Theory or GUT, the electroweak and strong forces are merely two aspects of the same grand force. Symmetry breaking differentiates the two forces into separate ®elds. As before, the local gauge symmetry required in the grand uni®ed theory is compensated by the introduction of new ®elds. In the GUT of Glashow and Georgi, the ®rst and simplest of the theories, twenty-four compensating force ®elds are required. Twelve of the messenger particles for these ®elds are to be identi®ed with the known quanta of the electroweak and strong interactions: the photon, the two Ws and the Z, and the eight gluons of the strong force. The remaining twelve particles are new and are collectively called the X particles. These particles, which can 584 Superforce: Einstein's Dream change leptons into quarks, carry color charge and electric charge of  13 or  43. The spontaneous symmetry-breaking process converts some of the energy of the twelve remaining X particles into mass. This mass, of the order of 1015 GeV/c2 , is roughly a quadrillion times the mass of a proton (about a nanogram), an enormous mass for an elementary particle. The conversion of quarks into leptons and viceversa cannot be seen even at the high energies of the current or planned particle accelerators. It is only at the tremendous energies of 1015 GeV that this connection could be observed. There is, however, no prospect of achieving these energies in an accelerator. Heisenberg's uncertainty principle tells us that the kinetic energy (or the velocity) of a particle is intertwined with the appropriate distance in space. For energies of the order of 1015 GeV, this distance is about 10ÿ29 cm. This is the distance that the X particle traverses as a messenger. At those distances, quarks and leptons become indistinguishable. An electron seen at that distance is no longer an electron but a fundamental quark-lepton entity. Supersymmetry and superstrings Grand uni®ed theories, as we have just seen, unify the electromagnetic, weak, and strong interactions into one single formalism. These theories, of which there are several versions, have not yet passed major experimental tests. However, most physicists agree that the general ideas and techniques common to all these theories are probably correct and that only the implementation of the symmetries to achieve uni®cation is still subject to debate. What about gravity? Before the two nuclear forces were known, Einstein started a lifelong and fruitless effort to unify electromagnetism with gravity. As we have seen, the path to uni®cation was different and gravity has been the last one to be considered. Einstein's general theory of relativity, a theory of gravity, is a gauge theory. It is not, however, a quantum ®eld theory; and therein lies the main obstacle towards uni®cation with the other forces. Physicists have not stood still, however, and they have made some progress in the last ®fteen years towards the inclusion of 585 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS gravity in the uni®cation of all forces. One approach has been to ®nd a powerful new gauge symmetry that unites quarks and leptons with messenger particles. This supersymmetry brings together all quantum particles, including the messenger particle of gravity or graviton, as components of a single master super®eld. The gauge particle responsible for supersymmetry is called the gravitino, with spin 32. The resulting theory became known as supergravity, a theory that incorporates and extends Einstein's theory of gravity. One particular important development physicists discovered was that the mathematical structure of supergravity theories could be greatly simpli®ed if more than the four space-time dimensions are considered. The most popular supergravity theory, for example, was formulated in eleven space-time dimensions: ten space dimensions and one time dimension. Only four of the eleven space-time dimensions are observable; the remaining seven are rolled up to a very small size. The idea of considering higher dimensions in an attempt at uni®cation is not new. In 1919, the German mathematician Theodor Kaluza generalized Einstein's gravitational ®eld equations to a ®ve dimensional space-time. In this representation, the extra ®fth dimension produced a set of equations that turned out to be Maxwell's equations for the electromagnetic ®eld. Electromagnetism, in the context of Kaluza's theory, is nothing more than a form of gravity, the gravity of the unseen additional dimension. In 1926, the Swedish physicist Oscar Klein extended and cleaned up Kaluza's theory and calculated the radius of the extra ®fth dimension to be about 10ÿ30 cm. We can visualize the existence of an extra ®fth dimension that cannot be observed by considering, for example, a pipeline, like the Alaska pipeline that brings crude petroleum to the lower forty-eight states. When seen from a large distance, the pipeline appears to be a wiggly line, with only one dimension. Of course when we look at it from a closer distance, the other two dimensions become apparent and what looked like a point of the line is actually a circle (®gure 25.8). Although, a nice idea at the time, the Kaluza±Klein theory turned out to be extremely restrictive and no one has been able to apply it to the other forces. The Kaluza±Klein theory was almost forgotten until the early 1960s when Gabriele Veneziano of CERN proposed a 586 Superforce: Einstein's Dream Figure 25.8. (a) A pipe line seen from afar looks like a broken line. (b) When seen from a closer distance, its real dimensions become apparent. mathematical model to explain the existence of many very shortlived hadrons that had been observed in experiments at CERN and at other high-energy physics laboratories throughout the world. Closer investigation of this new mathematical model by Veneziano and other physicists revealed that this new theory described the quantized motion of subatomic strings. During the late 1970s and early 80s, Michael Green of Queen Mary College in London and John Schwarz of the California Institute of Technology advanced Veneziano's idea and solved some mathematical inconsistencies. The current version of this theory stems from the work of Green and Schwarz who showed in 1984 that superstring theory, as it is called today, had enough symmetry to ban all mathematical inconsistencies. According to superstring theory, all elementary particles are represented by strings no longer than 10ÿ35 m, which make them some 1020 times smaller than a proton. These strings can vibrate like a guitar string and each vibrational mode corresponds to a particle. The frequency of vibration of a string determines the energy and therefore the mass of the particle. There are open strings and closed strings. Open strings have endpoints. Quantities such as electric or color charge are attached to the endpoints of open strings. These open strings can interact with other open strings by joining their endpoints to form another string (®gure 25.9). Open strings can also split into two strings. An open string can become a closed string by joining its endpoints. Superstring theory, constructed in a ten-dimensional space, automatically includes gravity, in addition to the other three forces. According to this theory, the laws of physics are 587 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 25.9. (a) Two open strings can combine to form a third string. (b) An open string can split into two new strings. (c) Closed strings can also combine and split. approximations to a much richer theory that operates on an unimaginably small scale. In recent years, a new theory, called M-theory, proposes that superstrings are actually the projection in ten-dimensional space of eleven-dimensional membranes or p-branes, which are the fundamental constituents of matter. Although there is a great deal of activity in this area and the theory promises to unify all of physics without any of the mathematical problems encountered by all the other approaches, there are still very few experimental predictions to test the validity of the theory. However, it points to one direction that physics might take. The creation of the universe The recent developments in our understanding of matter have allowed us to pierce a few of the veils that cloud the age-old question of the origin of the universe. As we said in chapter 11, matter and energy during the ®rst few moments after the universe began were under conditions of very high pressure and very high energy. In our cold universe today, we recognize four different interactions: the electromagnetic force, the weak nuclear force, the strong nuclear force, and the gravitational force. The strength of the electromagnetic force is determined by the electron. The force between two electrons, however, depends on how fast they are moving. Each electron is surrounded by a sea 588 Superforce: Einstein's Dream Figure 25.10. Cloud of virtual electron±positron pairs surrounding an electron. of virtual electron±positron pairs that owe their existence to Heisenberg's uncertainty principle (®gure 25.10). These particles appear out of nothing and disappear almost immediately after being created. The only requirement is that they recombine and annihilate in time to satisfy the uncertainty principle. As we saw in chapter 22, Heisenberg's uncertainty principle states that h : 2 This uncertainty relation means that during the interval
t an electron±positron pair of total energy
E can be created out of nothing; if the pair recombines and annihilates itself before the time
t is up, no experiment can detect any missing energy. The electron±positron pairs that surround an electron at any given time are oriented so that the virtual positrons are attracted toward the electron and the negatively charged virtual electrons are repelled by it. These particles are continuously appearing and disappearing, creating a cloud of virtual pairs around the electron. This cloud shields the electron from other incoming electrons, reducing the strength of their interaction. For an electron that stays far away, the positive and negative virtual charges surrounding the ®rst electron will cancel out and the interaction is the regular Coulomb interaction that we studied in chapter 12. However, if this electron approaches the ®rst electron with high enough energy, it can penetrate this cloud, leaving some of the virtual electrons behind. What lies ahead is an electron
E
t  589 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS surrounded by a shield of virtual positrons which reduce the effect of the repulsion. If the energy of the approaching electron is high enough, it can penetrate far into the cloud, leaving these positrons behind and seeing the bare electron, thus feeling the full strength of the electrical repulsion. The electric force, then, seems stronger to electrons with high energy or equivalently to those at high temperatures. Quarks are also surrounded by a cloud of virtual quark± antiquark pairs with the color charge polarized in a similar fashion as with the electrons. There is a screening of the color charge due to this shielding effect. The situation here is more complicated, however, because the gluons, carriers of the color charge, also carry color. There is a second cloud of colored gluons surrounding the quark which carry color charge of the same type (®gure 25.11). If, for example, the original quark carries red color charge, the cloud of virtual quark±antiquark pairs will carry red and antired color charges arranged so that the antired is closer to the red quark. The second cloud of virtual gluons carries red color charge and this produces an antiscreening effect, opposite to the screening effect of the quark±antiquark pair, Figure 25.11. A quark is surrounded by a cloud of quark±antiquark pairs and by an overlapping cloud of virtual gluons that carry the same type of color charge as the original quark. These two clouds produce competing effects and the overall result is a cloud with a net color charge of the same type as that of the quark. 590 Superforce: Einstein's Dream which weakens the force between interacting quarks. There are two competing phenomena taking place here. One is the screening of the virtual gluons which has the same effect as that between interacting electrons. The other is the antiscreening of the gluons just mentioned. When a high-energy quark approaches another quark and gets past the screening, the antiscreening of the gluons makes the interaction weaker, exactly the opposite of what takes place between interacting electrons. This property of quarks is called asymptotic freedom, conveying the idea that if the energy were in®nite, the interaction would become weaker and weaker until it would ®nally vanish; the quarks would feel no forces and behave as free particles. The weak interaction is also mediated by massive particles, the W ‡ , W ÿ and Z particles. A similar effect takes place here. The weak interaction becomes weaker as the energy of the interaction increases. In our cold universe, due to symmetry breaking, the four interactions have different strengths. The strong and weak interactions are stronger than the electromagnetic interaction, and gravity is the weakest. However, as we have just seen, at very high energies the electromagnetic interaction becomes stronger and the strong and weak interactions weaker. At some point very high in energy these three interactions have equal strength (®gure 25.12). Theoretical calculations place this energy at about 1015 GeV. These enormous energies only existed for a brief moment after the creation of the universe. In our laboratories, we have achieved energies of about 1000 GeV. At those very high energies, then, all the forces of nature except gravity were uni®ed. For a few very tiny fractions of a second only gravity and this uni®ed force existed. At energies even higher than that, when the universe was less than 10ÿ43 second old, gravity was uni®ed with the other forces and only one superforce existed. The ®rst moments of the universe The picture that modern physics paints of the evolution of the universe is that of complete simplicity from the very moment of creation up to 10ÿ43 second. This is an incredibly small interval 591 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Figure 25.12. Evolution of the forces of nature. Due to symmetry breaking, the forces have very different strengths. In the past, when the universe was very hot and dense, the electromagnetic, weak, and strong forces were one and the same. of time; one that we are incapable of comprehending. Physicists are making great progress toward the understanding of his small period in the life of the universe. The main dif®culty lies with the fact that, during that extremely brief time, the universe was a microscopic object, subject to the laws of quantum mechanics, which means that the theory of gravity must be combined with quantum mechanics before we can achieve a complete understanding. At the present, we lack a theory of quantum gravity. At the 10ÿ43 second mark the complete symmetry was broken and the superforce was split into gravity and the GUT force. This period in the life of the universe is known as the GUT era. The next important landmark took place when the universe was 10ÿ35 second old, as the strong color force becomes distinct, and the grand uni®cation symmetry was broken at an energy of 1015 GeV. During the next period in the life of the universe only three forces existed: gravity, the strong color force, and the electroweak force. At 10ÿ12 second the universe had cooled down and the 592 Superforce: Einstein's Dream Figure 25.13. The universe has evolved from total symmetry through a process of symmetry-breaking where the four known forces of nature are separated. energies were of the order of 1000 GeV. These conditions are now possible to reproduce in the laboratory. From now on, the four forces familiar to us today control everything in the universe. This symmetry-breaking process is illustrated in ®gure 25.13. When the universe was about 10ÿ5 second old (one hundredth of a millisecond), the quarks became con®ned into protons and neutrons. One second after the Big Bang, there were eight protons for every neutron, the present abundance ratio. One minute after the instant of creation, the universe had cooled down due to its expansion, so that nuclei could be formed without immediately being shredded into pieces again. This process lasted for about seven additional minutes and the universe behaved like a giant fusion reactor producing helium from the fusion of hydrogen nuclei. Calculations show that at the end of that era the ratio of hydrogen to helium was three to one, exactly the proportion observed today. 593 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Nothing much happened for the next 100 000 years. Then the universe entered a new phase: the age of the atom. Since atoms are electrically neutral, photons, which interact only with charged matter, begin to uncouple. Three hundred thousand years after The frontiers of physics: The cosmic background explorer In April 1992 scientists presented in Washington, DC the results of what the renowned physicist Stephen Hawking called ``the discovery of the century, if not of all time.'' The physicists showed the extremely precise measurements taken with NASA's Cosmic Background Explorer (COBE) satellite which allowed them to detect the very remnants of creation. Instruments aboard the COBE satellite measured small ¯uctuations in the cosmic microwave background radiation. These ¯uctuations are believed to represent gravitational ripples that could have seeded galaxy formation. After its launch in late 1989, COBE's instruments had measured the spectrum of the microwave background radiation. COBE's microwave spectrum reproduced perfectly a black body radiation curve of 2.73 K, in accordance with the basic Big Bang theory. However, a perfectly smooth radiation curve would not have allowed the existence of tiny concentrations of matter that must have been formed in the early universe. These unevennesses in the early universe would eventually evolve into the galaxies and clusters of galaxies observed today. The COBE more recent measurements showed minuscule variations of 30 millionths of a kelvin from the 2.73 K background temperature. ``It's the missing link,'' said Berkeley cosmologist Joseph Silk. The very small ¯uctuations detected, however, do not seem to be enough to account for the rapid (on a cosmic scale) formation of galaxies observed. Although scientists are very happy to have ®nally detected the predicted ¯uctuations, they are hard at work attempting to devise other mechanisms that could help explain the formation of the cosmos. 594 Superforce: Einstein's Dream its birth, the universe became transparent to light. Photons embarked now on an independent existence and continued to cool off as the universe expanded. We see them today as the 2.7 K background radiation that permeates the universe. After the uncoupling of the photons from matter the universe entered the present phase: the era of structure. After one billion years, matter began to coalesce into galaxies and gas began to ascrete into stars. Most of those ®rst-generation stars did not live for very long and ended their existences in powerful explosions called supernovas (®gure 11.6). These spewed out carbon, oxygen, silicon and iron. New stars were born out of the matter of the explosion mixed with the surrounding gas in the galaxies. Millions of years later, the protostar nebula from which our Sun and planet Earth were formed contained the ashes of the early supernova explosions. 595 APPENDIX A POWERS OF TEN In physics we deal with quantities that range from the very small to the immensely large. The distance to the nearest galaxy in kilometers, for example, would require many zeros if we were to write it in the conventional way. The mass of an electron in kilograms, a very small number, would require writing 26 zeros after the decimal point. We can avoid these dif®culties if we use powers of ten to write these very large and very small numbers. The product 10  10  10  10  10  10 where the factor 10 occurs 6 times, can be written as 106 : Suppose that we now have the product 10  10  10  10  10  10  10  10  10 ˆ 109 where the factor 10 occurs 9 times. We can write this last product as or 10  10  10  10  10  10†  10  10  10† 106  103 : We can see from the above example that and, in general, that 106  103 ˆ 109 10m  10n ˆ 10 m ‡ n† 596 Appendix A To multiply powers of ten, then, we add the exponents. Suppose that now we want to obtain the result of 106 103 which can be written as 10  10  10  10  10  10 ˆ 10  10  10 ˆ 103 : 10  10  10 We can then see that 106 ˆ 103 103 and, in general, 10m ˆ 10 m ÿ n† 10n To divide powers of ten, we subtract the exponents of the numerator and denominator. If the exponents m and n are the same (equal to 4, for example), the expression 104 ˆ 10 4 ÿ 4† ˆ 100 : 104 Since 104 is equal to 1, then 104 100 ˆ 1 Another important case occurs when the exponent of the numerator is equal to 0: 100 ˆ 10 0 ÿ 4† ˆ 10ÿ4 104 since 100 equals 1, then 1 ˆ 10ÿ4 104 597 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS or, in general, 1 ˆ 10ÿn 10n For example, 1 ˆ 10ÿ7 107 1 ˆ 1012 : 10ÿ12 and What happens when the exponent is a fraction? Consider for 1 example 102 (or 100:5 ). If we multiply 10 raised to the one half by itself we get 1, since we know already that to multiply powers of ten we add the exponents. That is, 1 1 102  102 ˆ 1: 1 1 Since 102 multiplied by itself gives 1, 102 must be the square root of 10, or p 1 102 ˆ 10 ˆ 3:16: 1 If we now multiply 103 by itself three times, we also get 1, since 1 1 1 3 ‡ 3 ‡ 3 ˆ 1: 1 1 1 1 103  103  103 ˆ 1: We can see that 103 is the cube root of 10, or p  1 3 103 ˆ 10 ˆ 2:15: 598 APPENDIX B THE ELEMENTS Element Symbol Actinium Aluminum Americium Antimony Argon Arsenic Astatine Barium Berkelium Beryllium Bismuth Boron Bromine Cadmium Calcium Californium Carbon Cerium Cesium Chlorine Chromium Cobalt Copper Curium Dysprosium Einsteinium Erbium Ac Al Am Sb Ar As At Ba Bk Be Bi B Br Cd Ca Cf C Ce Cs Cl Cr Co Cu Cm Dy Es Er Atomic number (Z) 89 13 95 51 18 33 85 56 97 4 83 5 35 48 20 98 6 58 55 17 24 27 29 96 66 99 68 599 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Element Symbol Atomic number (Z) Europium Fermium Fluorine Francium Gadolinium Gallium Germanium Gold Hafnium Helium Holmium Hydrogen Indium Iodine Iridium Iron Krypton Lanthanum Lawrencium Lead Lithium Lutetium Magnesium Manganese Mendelevium Mercury Molybdenum Neodymium Neon Neptunium Nickel Niobium Nitrogen Nobelium Osmium Oxygen Palladium Phosphorus Platinum Eu Fm F Fr Gd Ga Ge Au Hf He Ho H In I Ir Fe Kr La Lw Pb Li Lu Mg Mn Md Hg Mo Nd Ne Np Ni Nb N No Os O Pd P Pt 63 100 9 87 64 31 32 79 72 2 67 1 49 53 77 26 36 57 103 82 3 71 12 25 101 80 42 60 10 93 28 41 7 102 76 8 46 15 78 600 Appendix B Element Symbol Plutonium Polonium Potassium Praseodymium Promethium Protactinium Radium Radon Rhenium Rhodium Rubidium Ruthenium Samarium Scandium Selenium Silicon Silver Sodium Strontium Sulfur Tantalum Technetium Tellurium Terbium Thallium Thorium Thulium Tin Titanium Tungsten Uranium Vanadium Xenon Ytterbium Yttrium Zinc Zirconium Pu Po K Pr Pm Pa Ra Rn Re Rh Rb Ru Sm Sc Se Si Ag Na Sr S Ta Tc Te Tb Tl Th Tm Sn Ti W U V Xe Yb Y Zn Zr Atomic number (Z) 94 84 19 59 61 91 88 86 75 45 37 44 62 21 34 14 47 11 38 16 73 43 52 65 81 90 69 50 22 74 92 23 54 70 39 30 40 601 APPENDIX C NOBEL PRIZE WINNERS IN PHYSICS 1901 Wilhelm Konrad RoÈntgen 1902 Hendrik Antoon Lorentz Pieter Zeeman 1903 Antoine Henri Becquerel Pierre Curie Marie Sklowdowska-Curie 1904 Lord Rayleigh (John William Strutt) 1905 Philipp Eduard Anton von Lenard 1906 Joseph John Thomson 1845±1923 1853±1928 1865±1943 1852±1908 1859±1906 1867±1934 1842±1919 For the discovery of x-rays. For their work on the in¯uence of magnetism on radiation. For his discovery of radioactivity. For their joint research on nuclear radiation phenomena. For his research on the densities of the gases and for his discovery of argon. 1862±1947 For his work on cathode rays. 1856±1940 For his research on the conduction of electricity by gases. 1907 Albert Abraham Michelson 1852±1931 For his optical instruments and for measuring the speed of light. 1908 Gabriel Lippmann 1845±1921 For his method of reproducing colors photographically based on interference techniques. 1909 Guglielmo Marconi 1874±1937 For their development of wireless 1850±1918 telegraphy. Carl Ferdinand Braun 1910 Johannes Diderik van der 1837±1932 For his research on the equation of Waals state for gases and liquids. 1911 Wilhelm Wien 1864±1928 For his work on heat radiation. 1912 Nils Gustaf Dalen 1869±1937 For his invention of automatic regulators for use in lighthouses. 1913 Heike Kamerlingh Onnes 1853±1926 For his work on the properties of matter at low temperatures and for liquefying helium. 1914 Max von Laue 1879±1960 For his discovery of the diffraction of x-rays in crystals. 1915 William Henry Bragg 1862±1942 For their analysis of crystal William Lawrence Bragg 1890±1971 structure using x-rays. 1917 Charles Glover Barkla 1877±1944 For his study of atoms by x-rays scattering. 602 Appendix C 1918 Max Planck 1919 Johannes Stark 1920 Charles-Edouard Guillaume 1921 Albert Einstein 1922 Niels Bohr 1923 Robert Andrews Millikan 1924 Kark Manne Georg Siegbahn 1925 James Franck Gustav Hertz 1926 Jean Baptiste Perrin 1927 Arthur Holly Compton Charles Thomson Rees Wilson 1928 Owen Willans Richardson 1929 Prince Louis-Victor de Broglie 1930 Sir Chandrasekhara Venkata Raman 1932 Werner Heisenberg 1933 1935 1936 1937 1938 1858±1947 For his discovery of quanta of energy. 1874±1957 For his discovery of the splitting of spectral lines in electric ®elds 1861±1938 For his discovery of invar, a nickel-steel alloy. 1879±1955 For his explanation of the photoelectric effect. 1885±1962 For his model of the atom. 1868±1953 For his measurement of the charge of the electron and for his experimental work on the photoelectric effect. 1888±1979 For his research in x-ray spectroscopy. 1882±1964 For their research on electron± 1887±1975 atom collisions. 1870±1942 For his work on the discontinuous structure of matter and for measuring the size of atoms. 1892±1962 For his discovery of the Compton effect 1869±1959 For inventing the cloud chamber which makes visible the paths of charged particles. 1879±1959 For his discovery of the thermionic effect. 1892±1987 For his discovery of the wave nature of electrons. 1888±1970 For his work on light scattering. 1901±1976 For the development of quantum mechanics. Erwin SchroÈdinger 1887±1962 For the development of wave mechanics. Paul Adrien Maurice Dirac 1902±1984 For the development of relativistic quantum mechanics. James Chadwick 1891±1974 For the discovery of the neutron. Victor Franz Hess 1883±1964 For the discovery of cosmic radiation. Carl David Anderson 1904±1984 For the discovery of the positron. Clinton Joseph Davisson 1881±1958 For their experimental discovery 1892±1975 of the diffraction of electrons by George Paget Thomson crystals, con®rming de Broglie's hypothesis. Enrico Fermi 1901±1954 For producing new radioactive elements by means of neutron irradiation. 603 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS 1939 Ernest Orlando Lawrence 1943 Otto Stern 1901±1958 For the invention of the cyclotron. 1888±1969 For his discovery of the magnetic moment of the proton. 1944 Isidor Isaac Rabi 1898±1988 For his discovery of the nuclear magnetic resonance method that records the magnetic properties of nuclei. 1945 Wolfgang Pauli 1900±1958 For the discovery of the exclusion principle. 1946 Percy Williams Bridgman 1882±1961 For his work in the ®eld of highpressure physics. 1947 Sir Edward Victor 1892±1965 For his study of the physics of the Appleton upper atmosphere. 1948 Patrick Maynard Stuart 1897±1974 For his discoveries in nuclear Blackett physics with cloud-chamber photographs of cosmic rays. 1949 Hideki Yukawa 1907±1981 For his prediction of the existence of mesons. 1950 Cecil Frank Powell 1903±1969 For his photographic method of studying nuclear processes and his discoveries of new mesons. 1951 Sir John Douglas Cockcroft 1897±1967 For their work on the 1903±1995 transmutation of atomic nuclei Ernest Thomas Sinton using a particle accelerator. Walton 1952 Felix Bloch 1905±1983 For their discovery of nuclear Edward Mills Purcell b. 1912 magnetic resonance in liquids are gases. 1953 Frits Zernike 1888±1966 For his invention of the phasecontrast microscope. 1954 Max Born 1882±1970 For his interpretation of the wave function as probability. Walther Bothe 1891±1957 For his coincidence method for studying subatomic particles. 1955 Willis Eugene Lamb b. 1913 For his discoveries concerning the ®ne structure of the hydrogen spectrum. Polykarp Kusch 1911±1993 For his precision determination of the magnetic moment of the electron. 1910±1989 For their development of the 1956 William Shockley 1908±1991 transistor. John Bardeen 1902±1987 Walter Houser Brattain 1957 Chen Ning Yang b. 1922 For their prediction that parity is Tsung Dao Lee b. 1926 not conserved in beta decay. 1958 Pavel Aleksejevic Cerenkov 1904±1990 For the discovery of Cerenkov 1908±1990 radiation. Il' ja Michajlovic Frank Igor' Evgen' evic Tamm 1895±1971 For his interpretation of Cerenkov radiation. 604 Appendix C 1959 Emilio Gino Segre Owen Chamberlain 1960 Donald Arthur Glaser 1905±1989 For their discovery of the b. 1920 antiproton. b. 1926 For the development of the bubble chamber. 1961 Robert Hofstadter 1915±1990 For his discovery of the internal structure of the nucleons. Rudolf Ludwig MoÈssbauer b. 1929 For his discovery of the MoÈssbauer effect regarding recoilless emission of -rays. 1962 Lev Davidovic Landau 1908±1968 For his theoretical work on the super¯uidity of liquid helium. 1963 Eugene P Wigner 1902±1995 For his discovery and application of symmetry principles to elementary particle theory. Maria Goeppert Mayer 1906±1972 For their work concerning the J Hans D Jensen 1907±1973 shell structure of the nucleus. b. 1915 1964 Charles H Townes For the development of masers Nikolai G Basov b. 1922 and lasers. Alexander M Prochorov b. 1916 1965 Sin-itiro Tomonaga 1906±1979 For their development of quantum Julian Schwinger 1918±1994 electrodynamics. Richard P Feynman 1918±1988 1966 Alfred Kastler 1902±1984 For the development of optical methods for studying energy levels in atoms. 1967 Hans Albrecht Bethe b. 1906 For discoveries concerning the energy production in stars. 1968 Luis W Alvarez 1911±1988 For the discovery of resonance states of elementary particles. 1969 Murray Gell-Mann b. 1929 For his theoretical work regarding the classi®cation of elementary particles. 1970 Hannes AlveÂn b. 1908 For discoveries in magnetohydrodynamics. Louis Neel b. 1904 For his discoveries concerning antiferromagnetism and ferrimagnetism. 1971 Dennis Gabor 1900±1979 For his development of the principles of holography. 1908±1991 For their development of a theory 1972 John Bardeen Leon N Cooper b. 1931 of superconductivity. J Robert Schrieffer b. 1931 1973 Leo Esaki b. 1925 For the discovery of tunneling in semiconductors. Ivar Giaever b. 1929 For the discovery of tunneling in superconductors 605 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS 1973 Brian D Josephson b. 1940 For his theoretical work on the properties of currents through a tunnel barrier. 1974 Antony Hewish b. 1924 For the discovery of pulsars. Sir Martin Ryle 1918±1984 For his work in radiointerferometry. For their work on the structure of b. 1922 1975 Aage Bohr the atomic nucleus. b. 1926 Ben Mottelson 1917±1986 James Rainwater 1976 Burton Richter b. 1931 For their independent discovery Samuel Chao Chung Ting b. 1936 of J and psi particles. For their quantum-mechanical b. 1923 1977 Philip Warren Anderson study of solids. b. 1905 Nevill Francis Mott John Hasbrouck Van Vleck 1899±1980 1978 Peter L Kapitza 1894±1984 For his fundamental work in low-temperature physics. Arno A Penzias b. 1926 For the discovery of cosmic Robert Woodrow Wilson b. 1936 microwave background radiation. For their uni®ed theory of the b. 1932 1979 Sheldon Lee Glashow weak and electromagnetic forces. b. 1926 Abdus Salam b. 1933 Steven Weinberg For the discovery of parity 1980 James W Cronin b. 1931 violations in the decay of neutral b. 1923 Val L Fitch K mesons. 1981 Nicolaas Bloemergen b. 1920 For their development of laser Arthur Leonard Schawlow 1921±1999 spectroscopy. Kai M Siegbahn b. 1918 For the development of highresolution electron spectroscopy. 1982 Kenneth Geddes Wilson b. 1936 For his work regarding phase transitions. 1983 Subrehmanyan 1910±1995 For his work on the structure and Chandrasekhar evolution of stars. William A Fowler 1911±1995 For his work on the formation of the chemical elements. 1984 Carlo Rubbia b. 1934 For their discovery of the W and Z Simon van der Meer b. 1925 particles, the carriers of the weak interaction. 1985 Klaus von Klitzing b. 1943 For his discovery of the quantized Hall effect. 1986 Ernst Ruska 1906±1988 For the invention of the electron microscope. Gerd Binnig b. 1947 For the invention of the scanningHeinrich Rohrer b. 1933 tunneling electron microscope. 1987 Karl Alex Muller b. 1927 For their discovery of high J George Bednorz b. 1950 temperature superconductors. For their production of neutrino b. 1922 1988 Leon Lederman beams and their discovery of the b. 1932 Melvin Schwartz mu neutrino. b. 1921 Jack Steinberger 606 Appendix C 1989 Norman Ramsay Hans Dehmelt Wolfgang Paul 1990 Jerome Friedman Henry Kendall Richard Taylor 1991 Pierre-Gilles de Gennes 1992 Georges Charpak 1993 Russel Hulse Joseph Taylor 1994 Bertram N Brockhouse Clifford G Shull 1995 Martin L Perl Frederick Reines 1996 David M Lee Douglas D Osheroff Robert C Richardson 1997 Steven Chu Claude Cohen-Tannoudji William D Phillips 1998 Robert B Laughlin Horst L Stomer Daniel C Tsui 1999 Gerardus 'T Hooft Martinus J G Veltman 2000 Zhores I Alferov Herbert Kroemer Jack S Kilby b. 1915 For the development of atomic resonance spectroscopy. b. 1922 For their development of 1913±1993 techniques for trapping single atoms. b. 1930 For experiments that revealed the 1926±1999 existence of quarks. b. 1929 b. 1932 For his research on superconductors, polymers and liquid crystals. b. 1924 For his development of elementary particle detectors. b. 1950 For discovering evidence for b. 1941 gravitational waves. b. 1918 For contributions to the b. 1915 development of neutron scattering techniques in condensed matter studies. b. 1927 For experimental contributions to b. 1918 lepton physics b. 1931 For their discovery of b. 1945 super¯uidity in helium-3. b. 1937 For the development of methods b. 1948 to cool and trap atoms with lasers. b. 1938 b. 1948 b. 1950 For their discovery of a new form b. 1949 of quantum ®eld with fractionally b. 1939 charged excitations. b. 1946 For elucidating the quantum b. 1931 structure of electroweak interactions in physics. b. 1930 For work (which) has laid the b. 1928 foundations of modern b. 1923 information technology (IT), particularly through their invention of rapid transistors, laser diodes, and integrated circuits (chips). 607 APPENDIX D PHYSICS TIME-LINE Ancient Greeks 425 BC 280 BC 240 BC 235 BC 130 BC 130 BC Democritus proposes that all matter is made of small indivisible particles, which he calls ``atoms.'' Aristarchus of Samos determines the relative distances of the Sun and the Moon from the Earth. He also determines the relative sizes of the Sun, the Moon and the Earth. These considerations lead him to propose that the Earth revolves around the Sun. Archimedes discovers his principle of buoyancy (Archimedes' Principle). Eratosthenes develops a method to measure the circumference of the Earth. Hipparchus estimates the size of Moon from the parallax of an eclipse. Ptolemy develops his theory of the motion of the heavenly bodies. According to his theory, the Earth is at the center of the universe and the Sun and known planets revolve around it. Pre-Galilean Physics 1269 1514 AD Petrus de Maricourt conducts experiments with magnets and magnetic compasses. Nicolaus Copernicus develops his heliocentric theory. (He publishes it in 1543, a few days before his death.) 608 Appendix D Classical Physics 1592 1600 1604 1609 1609 1613 1619 1621 1638 1651 1662 1665±1666 1668 1672 Galileo Galilei invents the thermometer. William Gilbert publishes De Magnete which starts the modern treatment of magnetism. He also shows that the Earth is a magnet. Galileo Galilei proves that falling bodies are accelerated towards the ground at a constant rate. He also shows that the distance for a falling object increases as the square of the time. Johannes Kepler publishes his ®rst and second laws of planetary motion in a book entitled Astronomia Nova. Galileo Galilei builds a telescope after hearing of its invention. Galileo Galilei introduces his principle of inertia. Johannes Kepler publishes his third law of planetary motion. Willebrord van Roijen Snell introduces the law of refraction. Galileo introduces the concept of the relativity of motion in his Two New Sciences. Blaise Pascal shows that pressure applied at one point in a liquid is transmitted unchanged to all points in the liquid (Pascal's Principle). Robert Boyle, while experimenting with gases, shows that if a ®xed amount of a gas is kept at a constant temperature, the pressure and the volume of the gas follow a simple mathematical relationship. Isaac Newton begins his work on the motion of bodies. He also completes his theory of colors, develops the main ideas of the calculus, and his law of gravitation. Isaac Newton designs and builds a re¯ecting telescope. Isaac Newton, in a letter to the Royal Society, describes his experiments explaining the nature of color. This letter became Newton's ®rst published scienti®c paper. 609 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS 1676 1714 1738 1742 1747 1766 1777 1787 1798 1798 1800 1802 1802 1804 Robert Hooke proposes his law relating the elongation of a spring to the force applied to produce that elongation. Gabriel Fahrenheit introduces the mercury thermometer and his new scale of temperature. Daniel Bernoulli develops the foundations of hydrodynamics. Anders Celsius proposes a new temperature scale. Benjamin Franklin conducts experiments that show that one type of electri®cation could be neutralized by the other type. This indicated to him that the two types of electricity were not just different; they were opposites and calls one type positive and the other negative. Joseph Priestley proposes that the force between electric charges follows an inverse square law. Charles de Coulomb invents a torsion balance to measure the force between electrically charged objects (Coulomb's law). Jacques-Alexander Charles discovers the relationship between the change in volume of a gas with temperature. He fails to publish his discovery. Henry Cavendish adapts the torsion balance invented by Coulomb to measure the gravitational constant. Benjamin Thompson, Count Rumford, introduces the idea that heat is a form of motion. Alessandro Volta invents the electric battery. Thomas Young, in a landmark experiment, demonstrates that light is a wave phenomenon. Gian Domenico Romagnosi proposes in a newspaper article that an electric current affects a magnetic current. His discovery is largely ignored. Oersted, a better known scientist, was to discover the same phenomenon in 1819. Joseph Louis Gay-Lussac, without knowledge of Charles' work of 1787, discovers the relationship between the expansion of a gas at constant pressure and the temperature. This discovery is now known as Gay-Lussac's law. 610 Appendix D 1808 1814 1819 1820 1820 1822 1827 1831 1838 1842 1843 1846 1848 1850 1851 1868 John Dalton develops his atomic theory. Joseph von FraunhoÈfer invents the spectroscope and observes the absorption lines in the Sun's spectrum two years later. Hans Christian Oersted discovers that an electric current de¯ects a magnetic compass. His discovery, published in a scienti®c journal, gets noticed. Andre AmpeÁre gives mathematical form to Oersted's discovery. In modern language, AmpeÁre's law states that: an electric current creates a magnetic ®eld. Biot and Savart propose a force law between an electric current and a magnetic ®eld. Andre AmpeÁre shows that two wires carrying electric currents attract each other. Georg Ohm shows that current and voltage are related by a simple relationship, known today as Ohm's law. Michael Faraday showed experimentally that a changing magnetic ®eld produces an electric current (Faraday's law). Friedrich Bessel ®rst observes the parallax of a star with the aid of a telescope. Christian Doppler proposes his Doppler Effect for sound and light waves. James Joule measures the electrical equivalent of heat. Gustav Kirchhoff proposes his rules of electrical circuits (Kirchhoff's laws). William Thomson, Lord Kelvin, devises what is now known as the absolute temperature scale or Kelvin scale. Rudolf Gottlieb, known as Clausius, states the second law of thermodynamics. Armand Fizeau measures the velocity of light in a moving medium. James Clerk Maxwell proposes the electromagnetic nature of light and suggests that electromagnetic waves exist and are observed as light. 611 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS 1869 1873 1887 Dmitri Mendeleyev proposes his periodic table of the chemical elements. Johannes van der Waals develops his theory of intermolecular forces in ¯uids. Heinrich Hertz generates electromagnetic waves in his laboratory. Modern Physics 1887 1895 1890 1897 1898 1898 1900 1905 1905 1905 1905 1906 1909 1911 1911 1913 1915 Albert Michelson and E W Morley, in a landmark experiment, demonstrate the absence of the ether, a substance previously postulated to ®ll all space. Wilhelm RoÈntgen discovers X-rays. James Prescott Joule measures the mechanical equivalent of heat. J J Thomson determines the charge to mass ratio of the electron. Pierre and Marie Curie discover the radioactive elements radium and polonium. Ernest Rutherford discovers alpha and beta radiation. Max Planck introduces the concept of quanta in black body radiation and Planck's constant. Albert Einstein explains Brownian motion. Albert Einstein explains the photoelectric effect. Albert Einstein publishes his special theory of relativity. Albert Einstein postulates the equivalence of mass and energy. Albert Einstein proposes quantum explanation of the speci®c heat laws for solids. Robert Millikan measures the charge on the electron. Heike Kamerlingh Onnes introduces his theory of superconductivity. Ernest Rutherford discovers the nucleus of the atom. Niels Bohr proposes his quantum theory of atomic orbits. Albert Einstein publishes his general theory of relativity. 612 Appendix D 1916 1917 1918 1923 1925 1926 1926 1927 1927 1930 1932 1932 1942 1948 1948 1953 1954 1956 1957 1961 Karl Schwarzschild calculates the critical radius of curvature of space±time around a collapsing star at which light cannot escape. Albert Einstein presents his theory of stimulated emission, the foundation for the laser. Emmy NoÈther proposes the mathematical relationships between symmetry and conservation laws of physics. Louis de Broglie predicts the wave nature of particles. Werner Heisenberg develops matrix mechanics, the ®rst quantum mechanical theory. Erwin SchroÈdinger develops wave mechanics, an alternate quantum mechanical theory. Werner Heisenberg proposes the uncertainty principle. Niels Bohr proposes the principle of complementarity. Niels Bohr develops the Copenhagen interpretation of quantum mechanics. Ernest Orlando Lawrence and M Stanley Livingston invent the cyclotron. James Chadwick identi®es the neutron. Werner Heisenberg proposes that the nucleus of an atom is composed of protons and neutrons. Enrico Fermi obtains the ®rst self sustaining ®ssion reaction. Sin-itiro Tomonaga, Julian Schwinger, and Richard Feynman develop quantum electrodynamics (QED). John Bardeen, Walter Brattain, and William Shockley invent the transistor. Charles Townes invents the maser. C N Yang and Robert L Mills propose a non-abelian gauge theory. Murray Gell-Mann and Kazuhiko Nishijima introduce the strangeness quantum number. John Bardeen, Leon Cooper, and John R Schrieffer propose their BCS theory of superconductivity. Sheldon Glashow introduces the neutral intermediate vector boson of electroweak interactions. 613 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS 1961 1964 1964 1965 1965 1967 1974 1977 1981 1981 1982 1983 1994 2000 Murray Gell-Mann and Yuval Ne'eman independendently discover the SU(3) octet symmetry of hadrons. Peter Higgs, Robert Brout, and F Englert introduce the Higgs mechanism of symmetry breaking. Murray Gell-Mann and George Zweig independently propose the quark theory of hadrons. John Stewart Bell states and proves a powerful theorem (Bell's theorem), which gives the theoretical limits on the correlations between the results of simultaneous measurements done on two separated particles. The limits on these correlations are given by Bell in the form of an inequality. Arno Penzias and Robert Wilson measure the cosmic background radiation. Steven Weinberg and Abdus Salam independently propose the electroweak uni®cation which is based on signi®cant contributions by Sheldon Glashow. The three would later share the Nobel Prize in physics for their theory. Howard Georgi and Sheldon Glashow propose the SU(5) as a Grand Uni®ed Theory and predict decay of the proton. A Fermilab team detects the bottom quark. Michael Green and John Schwarz propose what becomes known as Type I superstring theory. Gerd Binnig and Heinrich Rohrer invent the scanning tunneling microscope. Alain Aspect performs an experiment that is considered to con®rm the non-local aspects of quantum mechanics. Carlo Rubbia leads a team that detects the W and Z bosons at CERN. A Fermilab team detects the top quark. Tantalizing hints of the existence of the Higgs boson are seen in experiments with the Large Electron Positron collider at CERN, the European Laboratory for Particle Physics. 614 GLOSSARY Absolute Zero: Temperature at which no thermal energy can be extracted from an object. It is the minimum temperature attainable. It is equal to ÿ273.158C. Acceleration: The rate at which velocity changes. The SI units of acceleration are m/s2 . Alpha decay: If a nucleus contains too many protons, it is unstable and emits an alpha particle, which is a nucleus of helium-4. Alpha particle: See alpha decay. A stable nuclear particle that consists of two protons and two neutrons. An alpha particle is the nucleus of helium. Amorphous solid: See Crystal. AmpeÁre's law: An electric current produces a magnetic ®eld. Amplitude: The amplitude of an oscillation is the maximum displacement of the medium from its equilibrium position. Angular momentum: A measure of the rotation of an object. It is the tendency of a rotating object to keep rotating because of its inertia. Angular momentum can be expressed as L ˆ I!. The angular momentum of a body is conserved if the net external torque acting on the object is zero. This is the law of conservation of angular momentum. Angular velocity: The rate of change of angular displacement with time. Antimatter: Antimatter particles, called antiparticles, are identical to ordinary matter except that if the particle has electric charge, its antiparticle would have the opposite charge. If a particle has no charge, like the photon, it is its own antiparticle. Archimedes' principle: An object partially or completely submerged in a ¯uid is buoyed up by a force equal to the weight of the ¯uid displaced by the object. 615 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Atomic mass unit, amu: A unit of mass used in the atomic realm. 1 amu ˆ 1:660 540 2  10ÿ27 kg. Atomic number: The total number of protons in a nucleus. Average speed: De®ned as the total distance traveled divided by the time taken to travel this distance. The units of speed are units of distance divided by units of time. The SI unit is the meter per second (m/s). Baryon: A subatomic particle composed of three quarks held together by the color force. Beta decay: If a nucleus contains too many neutrons it is unstable and decays by emitting a beta particle, which is an electron. Beta particle: See beta decay. An electron that is emitted from the nucleus of an atom undergoing beta decay. Binding energy: The total energy of the nucleus is less than the total energy of its separated nucleons. This energy difference is called binding energy. Black body: An object that absorbs all radiation incident upon it. It is also a perfect emitter of radiation. Black hole: If a star has a mass of more than 3 solar masses, gravitational compression will make the star so dense that the escape velocity from it becomes greater than the speed of light. The star contracts to a single point, called a singularity or ``black hole.'' Boyle's law: See Ideal gas law. Buoyant force: Upward force exerted by a ¯uid on a ¯oating or immersed object as a reaction to the force exerted by the object to displace the ¯uid. Calorie: The amount of heat required to raise the temperature of 1 gram of water by 18C. It is equal to 4.186 J. Capacitor: A device for the storage of electrical energy. It consists of two oppositely charged metal plates separated by an insulator. Centripetal acceleration: An object moving with a constant speed v in a circular path of radius r has an acceleration directed toward the center of the circle called centripetal acceleration. It has a magnitude v2 =r. Chain reaction: A reaction in which some of the products initiate further reactions of the same kind allowing the reaction to become self-sustaining. 616 Glossary Charles's law: Another name for Gay-Lussac's law (q.v.). Coherent radiation: Electromagnetic radiation such as is seen in radio waves and laser beams, where all the radiation is of a single frequency and all the photons are in phase (in step). The coherence length is a measure of the quality of the coherence; the bandwidth is another. Color charge: A measure of the strength of the strong interaction. Compound: If the atoms retain their identities while they attract each other owing to the mutual attraction of their respective ions (ionic bond), the atoms are said to form a compound. Concave mirror: A curved mirror in which the interior surface is the re¯ecting surface. Conservative and nonconservative forces: When the work done by an unbalanced force acting on a body depends only on the initial and ®nal positions of the body, the force is said to be a conservative. If the work done depends on the path taken by the body, the force producing this motion is said to be nonconservative. Constructive interference: See interference. Convex mirror: A curved mirror which has the exterior surface as the re¯ecting one. coulomb: SI unit of electric charge. One coulomb is the charge of 6:25  1018 electrons or an equal number of protons. Coulomb's law: The force exerted by one charged object on another varies inversely as the square of the distance separating the objects and is proportional to the product of the magnitude of the charges. The force is along the line joining the charges and is attractive if the charges have opposite signs and repulsive if they have the same sign. If we call q1 and q2 the magnitudes of the two charges and r, the distance between their centers, we can state Coulomb's law as an equation: F ˆ k q1 q2 =r2 †. The value of Coulomb's constant k is 9  109 N m2 =C2 . Covalent bond: A type of chemical attraction that depends on the fact that the presence of two electrons in a certain region of space is energetically advantageous. In a covalent bond, atoms are bound together by sharing electrons. Critical angle: When light is passing from a medium of higher index of refraction to one of low index of refraction, the 617 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS critical angle is the angle of incidence for which the angle of refraction is 908 (i.e., the emergent beam travels along the interface). Crystal: The forces that bind the atoms together in a solid are strong enough for the solid to maintain its shape. If the atoms arrange themselves in a pattern that is repeated through the substance, the solid is called a crystal. Solids that do not form these patterns are said to be amorphous. de Broglie wavelength: The wavelength associated with a particle, equal to the ratio of Planck's constant to the momentum of the particle. decibel: The unit of sound level, a measure of relative sound levels. Density: The mass per unit volume of a substance. The SI unit is the kilogram per cubic meter (kg/m3 ). Destructive interference: See interference. Dewpoint: See Humidity. Diffraction: The spreading out of waves on passing through a narrow aperture. Diode: A device that acts like a switch in an electric circuit, permitting the ¯ow of current in only one direction. Doppler effect: The change in frequency perceived by a listener who is in motion relative to a source of sound. Ef®ciency: The ratio of the useful work performed by a machine to the total amount of energy required to operate it. Elastic collision: A collision in which the kinetic energy is conserved. Elastic potential energy: In a spring of force constant k stretched a distance x, the elastic potential energy is 12 kx2 . Electric charge: A property of subatomic particles that is responsible for electric and magnetic phenomena. The fundamental charge is the charge of one electron or one proton and has a magnitude of 1:602  10ÿ19 C. Electric current: The rate at which charge ¯ows in a conductor. If during a time t an amount of charge q ¯ows past a particular point in a conductor, the electric current is i ˆ q=t. The unit of current is the ampere (A), which is a fundamental SI unit. Electric ®eld: Property of space around an electric charge. The electrostatic force per unit charge. 618 Glossary Electric potential difference: See Voltage. Electromagnetic wave: Propagation of oscillating electric and magnetic ®elds through space. Electron: A fundamental particle, one of the main constituents of matter. The electron has an electric charge of ÿ1:602  10ÿ19 C and a mass of 9:1094  10ÿ31 kg or 5:486  10ÿ4 amu. Electron-volt (eV): Unit of energy used when dealing with atoms or electrons. 1 eV ˆ 1:602  10ÿ19 J. Electrostatic force: See Coulomb's law. Electroweak force: Uni®cation of electromagnetism and the weak nuclear force. The triplet of massive bosons W ‡ , W ÿ , and Z, along with the massless photons, are the mediators of this force. Energy: The capacity to do work or the result of doing work. Entropy: From a Greek word that means transformation, entropy is a measure of the disorder of a system. Escape velocity: The escape velocity of an object on the surface of the earth is the minimum velocity that we must impart to the object so that it escapes the gravitational grasp of the earth. Event horizon: See Schwartzchild radius. A sphere around a black hole with a radius equal to the Schwartzchild radius. No particle inside this sphere can escape the gravitational attraction of the black hole. Faraday's law of induction: The induced voltage in a circuit is proportional to the rate of change of the magnetic ®eld. Field: The concept of ®eld is used to specify a quantity for all points in a particular region of space. The electric ®eld describes the property of the space around an electrically charged object. A charged body distorts the space around it in such a way that any other charged body placed in this space feels a force that is given by Coulomb's law. The electric ®eld strength E is the Coulomb force felt by a test charge q0 that is placed in the ®eld divided by the magnitude of this test charge q0 , E ˆ F=q0 . The direction of the electric ®eld vector is the direction of the force on a positive test charge. Fission: See Nuclear ®ssion. Fluids: Substances in which the binding forces are weaker than in solids, so that the atoms or molecules do not occupy 619 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS ®xed positions, and move at random. Liquids and gases are ¯uids. Focal point: The point at which all of the rays gathered by a lens, curved mirror, or optical instrument pass. Frame of reference: See reference frame. Frequency: The number of wave crests that pass a given point per second. The unit of frequency is the hertz, Hz. f-stop: The ratio of the focal length of a lens to the diameter of its aperture. Fundamental charge: The charge on one electron or one proton, e ˆ 1:6  10ÿ19 C. The electric charge on an charged object always occurs in integral multiples of the fundamental charge. Fundamental forces: There are four fundamental forces in nature: gravitational, electromagnetic, strong, and weak. The strong force, a short-range force, holds the nucleus together. The weak force, also a short-range force, is responsible for radioactive beta-decay processes. Fundamental units: The fundamental quantities in mechanics are length, mass, and time. The corresponding fundamental SI units are the meter, the kilogram and the second. The other fundamental SI units are the ampere, lumen, kelvin and mole. Fusion: See Nuclear fusion. Galilean Principle of Relativity: The laws of mechanics are the same in all inertial frames of reference. This means that there is no special or absolute reference frame. Thus, there is no absolute standard of rest; uniform motion has to be referred to an inertial frame. Gamma decay: If a nucleus is left in an excited state after an alpha or beta process, it will decay to the ground state by emitting one or more photons, called gamma rays. Gamma rays: Electromagnetic radiation with frequencies greater than about 3  1019 Hz and wavelengths smaller than about 10ÿ11 m. Gauge symmetry: Physical theories that remain invariant under changes taking place everywhere in the universe are said to obey a global gauge symmetry. When the changes are different at every point in space, the theory is said to obey a local gauge symmetry. To maintain a local symmetry, in which different changes take place at different points or to different objects, a compensating change must take place. 620 Glossary Gay-Lussac's law: See Ideal gas law. Gravitational force: See Law of Universal Gravitation. Gravitational potential energy: The energy that a body possesses by virtue of its separation from the Earth's surface. For an object of mass m situated at a height h above the ground, the gravitational potential energy is PEgrav ˆ mgh. Gravitational red shift: Einstein showed that, according to general relativity, time runs more slowly in a gravitational ®eld and that celestial objects in a strong gravitational ®eld would show a spectral shift toward longer wavelengths. Gravity: See Law of Universal Gravitation. Hadrons: Particles that participate in the strong interaction. Hadrons are not fundamental particles; they have a de®nite extension. Hadrons that decay into a proton and another stable particle are baryons. The remaining hadrons are the mesons. Half-life: The time required for half the nuclei in a given radioactive sample to decay. Heat: The thermal energy transferred from a warmer object to a cooler object. The SI unit of heat is the joule; another unit of heat, de®ned during the times of the caloric theory, is the calorie, cal, which is the amount of heat required to raise the temperature of 1 gram of water by 18C. The relation between calories and joules is 1 cal ˆ 4:186 J. Heat capacity: The heat required to increase the temperature of a mass m of the substance an amount
T. The speci®c heat capacity, or heat capacity per unit mass, is the heat required to raise the temperature of a unit mass of a substance by one kelvin. If Q is the amount of heat required; m, the mass of the substance, and
T the change in temperature, the speci®c heat capacity c ˆ Q=m
T. The SI unit of speci®c heat capacity is the joule per kilogram kelvin ( J/kg K). Heat of fusion: See latent heat. Heat of vaporization: See latent heat. Heisenberg's Uncertainty Principle: It is not possible to measure the exact position and the exact momentum of a particle simultaneously. hertz: The SI unit of frequency. One cycle per second. Higgs ®eld: See Higgs mechanism. A quantum ®eld with very special properties that allows it to give mass to the elementary particles when they interact with this ®eld. 621 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Higgs mechanism: See Higgs ®eld. The Higgs mechanism is a special set of circumstances such that the state in which the Higgs ®eld has its lowest energy is one of broken symmetry. Hologram, holography: The recording of an image by recording the standing-wave pattern caused by the interaction of two coherent beams of radiation, one having been modi®ed by interaction with the object. Humidity: Measure of the amount of water present in the air at any given time. Absolute humidity (AH) is the total mass of water vapor present in the air per unit volume, generally given in g=m3 . Humidity at saturation, HS, is the mass per unit volume of water vapor required to saturate the air. Relative humidity, RH, is the ratio of the absolute humidity to the humidity at saturation: RH ˆ AH=HS. The temperature at which the air saturates is called the dew point. Ideal gas: Any gas in which the cohesive forces between molecules are negligible and the collisions between molecules are perfectly elastic. Collisions between the molecules of an ideal gas conserve both momentum and kinetic energy. If an ideal gas is kept at constant temperature, the pressure is inversely proportional to its volume; that is, the product of the pressure and the volume is a constant. This is Boyle's law. The constant is the same for all gases. If the pressure of an ideal gas is kept constant, a change in volume is proportional to the change in absolute temperature. This is Gay-Lussac's law, also known as Charles' law. Ideal gas law: By combining Boyle's law and Gay-Lussac's law into one single expression, we obtain the ideal gas law, PV ˆ constant  T. Image: Strictly, optical image. Formed where light rays intersect or where they appear to have originated from. A real image is one formed by light rays actually intersecting whereas a virtual image is an image formed by light rays which appear to come from a point in space. Index of refraction: For a transparent substance, the ratio of the speed of light in vacuum to that in the substance. Inelastic collision: A collision in which kinetic energy is not conserved. Momentum is conserved. Inertia: The tendency of an object to resist any change in its state of motion. 622 Glossary Inertial reference frame: A reference frame in which the law of inertia holds. Inertial reference frames move at constant velocities. Infrared radiation: Electromagnetic radiation in the region of the spectrum between about 4  1014 and 1011 Hz and wavelengths between about 7:5  10ÿ7 m and 3  10ÿ3 m. Instantaneous speed: The speed that an object has at any given instant. Intensity: The rate at which a wave transports energy. Interference: Two or more trains of the same frequency sharing the same space will interfere constructively or destructively, depending on whether the combined amplitude is greater or less than the component wave amplitudes. Internal energy: The internal energy, U, of a system is the sum of all forms of energy, thermal energy and potential energy. Thermal energy is the sum of all the random kinetic energies of the atoms and molecules in a substance and potential energy is the energy stored in the molecules, atoms, and nuclei of a substance. Invariance: If a system remains unchanged after some operation is performed on it, we say that the system is invariant under that operation. Inverse square law: A mathematical expression in which a value for a quantity varies inversely with the square of the distance. Ion: An atom or molecule with a net electric charge. Ionic bond: Bonding due to the electrical attraction between oppositely charged ions. Ionizing radiation: This is produced by a particle or a photon with enough energy to remove an electron from an atom. Isobaric process: A process that occurs at constant pressure. In this case, the work done is W ˆ P
V. Isotope: One of several forms of an element having the same number of protons but a different number of neutrons. Joule ( J): The SI unit of energy or work, equal to a newton meter (Nm). Kepler's Laws of Planetary Motion: In the early 1600s, Kepler discovered the three laws of planetary motion that bear his name: Law of orbits: Each planet moves around the sun in an elliptical orbit, with the sun at one focus. 623 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Law of areas: A planet moves around the sun at a rate such that the line from the sun to the planet sweeps out equal areas in equal intervals of time. Harmonic law or law of periods: The squares of the periods of any two planets are proportional to the cubes of their average distances from the sun. Kinetic energy: The energy that an object has by virtue of its motion. It is equal to one-half the product of the mass m† and the square of the speed v†: KE ˆ 12 mv2 . Laser radiation: Laser is an acronym for light ampli®cation by stimulated emission of radiation. A laser is a device which produces a narrow beam of single-wavelength, coherent radiation (q.v.) by stimulated emission of photons. Latent heat: The heat absorbed or released by one kilogram of a substance during a phase transition. If the transition is from solid to liquid or vice versa, it is called latent heat of fusion, Lf . If the transition involves the liquid and gas phases of a substance, it is called the latent heat of vaporization, Lv . The heat required to melt a solid of mass m is given by Q ˆ mLf ; the heat required to vaporize a liquid of mass m is Q ˆ mLv . Laws of re¯ection: The angle of re¯ection is equal to the angle of incidence. The incident ray, the re¯ected ray and the normal are all in the same plane. Law of refraction (Snell's law): The angle of refraction is in a constant relationship to the angle of incidence, and the incident and refracted rays are in the same plane as the normal. Law of Universal Gravitation: Any two objects of mass M and m, separated by a distance r, will attract each other with a force proportional to the product of their masses and inversely proportional to the square of their distance apart. The constant of proportionality is the universal constant G, with a value of 6:67  10ÿ11 N m2 =kg2 . Laws of thermodynamics: These are numbered zeroth, ®rst, second, and third: 0 If two objects are each in thermal equilibrium with a third object, they are in thermal equilibrium with each other. 1 In an isolated system, the total internal energy of a system remains constant, although it can change from one kind to another. 624 Glossary 2 Heat does not pass spontaneously from a cold to a hot object. Another way of stating this is: All natural changes take place in the direction of increasing entropy. 3 It is impossible to reach absolute zero temperature in a process with a ®nite number of steps. Length contraction (relativistic): An observer in motion relative to an object measures the length of that object along the direction of motion to be contracted when compared with the length measured by an observer at rest relative to the object. Leptons: Particles that interact via the weak force. All leptons are truly elementary particles, without internal structure. Leptons are classi®ed in three generations, each containing a charged lepton and a neutrino. Lever arm: The perpendicular distance from the center of rotation to the point of application of a force. light year: The distance traveled by light in one year. It is equal to about 9:5  1012 km. Magnetic ®eld: The property of space around a magnet. Because magnetic poles exist only in pairs, magnetic ®eld lines do not start or end anywhere, an essential difference from electric ®eld lines, which start on positive charges and end on negative charges. Magnetosphere: The volume around the Earth that is in¯uenced by the Earth's magnetic ®eld. It is believed to be caused by motions of the metallic core which produce electric currents in the hot, electrically conductive material; these currents ¯ow upward and are in turn carried around by the Earth's fast rotation. The magnetosphere traps some matter from the solar wind (q.v.). Magni®cation: In a lens or mirror system, the ratio of the size of the optical image to the size of the object. Mass number: The total number of protons and neutrons in a nucleus. Maxwell's equations: The four equations by which James Clerk Maxwell described the relationship between electricity and magnetism and provided a model for the propagation of electromagnetic radiation. To state them precisely requires a use of vector calculus. Meniscus: The curved surface of a liquid in a container produced by the cohesive forces between the liquid 625 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS molecules and the adhesive forces between the liquid and the container. Meson: Particle with a mass that falls between the mass of the electron and the mass of the proton. Mesons are combinations of a quark and an antiquark. Metastable state: An excited energy state of an atom with a longer life time than that of regular excited states. meter: SI unit of length. The meter is de®ned as the distance traveled by light in 1/299 792 458 of a second. Microwaves: Electromagnetic radiation in the region of the spectrum between about 3  108 and 3  1011 Hz and wavelengths between about 10ÿ4 m and 1 m. Molecule: A structure formed when atoms combine in such a way as to share some of their electrons. Moment of inertia: The moment of inertia of a body measures its resistance to change in its state of rotation about a given axis. Muon: A fundamental particle with a mass about 200 times that of the electron. A muon is a lepton that decays into an electron and neutrinos. Newton: The SI unit of force. One newton is one kilogram metre per second squared (kgm/s2 ). Newton's laws of motion: Newton's First Law: Every body continues in its state of rest or of uniform motion in a straight line unless it is compelled to change that state by forces impressed upon it. Newton's Second Law: The acceleration of an object is directly proportional to the net force acting on it and inversely proportional to its mass. Newton's Third Law: To every action there is always an equal reaction. The mutual actions of two bodies upon each other are always equal and directed to contrary parts. NoÈther's theorem: The theorem that establishes the connection between symmetry and the laws of physics. It can be stated as follows: For every continuous symmetry in the laws of physics there exists a corresponding conservation law. A continuous symmetry is one in which the corresponding transformation can be varied continuously, as in a rotation. Nuclear ®ssion: The event which occurs when a heavy nucleus splits into two smaller nuclei (called ®ssion fragments). 626 Glossary Nuclear fusion: This takes place when two light nuclei are fused together to form a heavier nucleus. Object and image distances (conjugate foci): The distance from the object and image respectively from an optical mirror or lens. For a plane mirror, the object distance is always equal to the image distance. Ohm's law: The current ¯owing through a conductor is directly proportional to the voltage V that exists between the two ends of the conductor, or i ˆ V=R, where R is the resistance of the conductor. Pair annihilation: See pair production. When a particle encounters its antiparticle, they annihilate each other, disappearing in a burst of photons. Pair production: See pair annihilation. The inverse process, in which high energy photons create a positron-electron pair. Pascal's principle: This states that the pressure applied to a liquid is transmitted undiminished to all points of the liquid and to the walls of the container. Period: The time required to complete one cycle of a periodic motion. Period is the inverse of frequency (q.v.). Photoelectric effect: Light of a certain frequency incident on a substance causes electrons to be emitted from the substance. Photon: Quantum of light. The photon is the mediator of the electric and magnetic forces. The character of the force depends on the polarization of the exchanged photon. Longitudinal and time-like polarization mediate the electrostatic force while the magnetic force is mediated by the other two polarizations. The photon is a boson with spin 1 and zero mass. Pion: The particle that mediates the strong force. Also called the -meson. Polarization: Orientation of the oscillation vector of a wave or of the rotation axis of a spinning object. Positron: An antielectron. A fundamental particle with the same mass as the electron and a positive electric charge of the same magnitude as that of the electron. A constituent of antimatter. Potential energy: The energy that an object has by virtue of its position in a ®eld. Power: The rate at which work is done or energy is released. 627 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Pressure: Force per unit area. The SI unit of pressure is the pascal (Pa). One pascal is one newton per square meter (N/m2 ). Normal atmospheric pressure at sea level is 101.3 kPa or 1 atm. Principle of equivalence: This states that it is impossible to distinguish the effects of accelerated motion from the effects of gravity. It extends the relativity principle to accelerated frames of reference. The principle of equivalence can be stated in the alternative form: Gravitational mass and inertial mass are equivalent and no experiment can distinguish one from the other. Proper time: The time interval measured by an observer in his own reference frame. Proton: One of the main constituents of matter. The proton has an electric charge of 1:602  10ÿ19 C and a mass of 1:6726  10ÿ27 kg or 1.007 276 amu. Quanta: Packets of energy, introduced in 1900 by Max Planck to explain the behavior of the radiation emitted by a hot body. Albert Einstein generalized this revolutionary concept and stated that light behaves both as a wave and as quanta of energy or photons (q.v.). Quantum chromodynamics (QCD): The theory that explains the color interactions between quarks. This theory is modeled after quantum electrodynamics or QED. Quarks: Quarks are believed to be truly fundamental particles. Hadrons are thought to be composed of quarks. There are six ¯avors or varieties of quarks: Up and down, strange and charm, and bottom and top. Like leptons, quarks are also grouped in generations. The strong force arises from the interaction between quarks. Quarks possess a kind of charge called color charge: red, green and blue. All hadrons are color-neutral or ``white.'' radian: The central angle in a circle subtented by an arc length equal to the radius of the circle. It is equal to 57.38. Radio waves: Electromagnetic radiation in the region of the spectrum smaller than about 3  108 Hz and wavelengths greater than about 1 m. Radioactive decay: See radioactivity. Radioactivity: Emission of several particles such as electrons, photons, neutrons, neutrinos or positrons, due to the decay of unstable nuclei. 628 Glossary Resistance: In a conducting medium, the ratio of the voltage to the current is a constant, the resistance of the conductor. The units of resistance are ohms, . Schwartzchild radius: See event horizon. The radius to which a given object must be reduced so that its escape velocity equals the speed of light. It is the event horizon of a black hole. Semiconductor: Materials with electrical conductivities that are intermediate between those of conductors and insulators. The conductivity of a semiconductor is changed by the addition of small amounts of impurities to its crystal structure. Solar wind: The stream of energetic particles emitted by the Sun. Sound: A mechanical longitudinal wave that propagates through a medium with frequencies that range from a fraction of a hertz to several megahertz. Audible waves are sound waves with frequencies between 20 and 20 000 Hz. Sound waves with frequencies below 20 Hz are called infrasonic waves and those with frequencies above 20 000 Hz are called ultrasonic waves. Space-time: A four-dimensional geometry consisting of the three coordinates of space and one of time. Speci®c heat: The heat required to increase the temperature of 1 gram of a substance by one degree Celsius. Speed: See Velocity. The magnitude of the velocity. Speed of sound: This depends on the elastic and inertial properties, and temperature, of the transmitting medium. In air, the speed of sound at 208C is 343 m/s. Standing waves: In general, the resultant of two identical wave motions of equal amplitude and wavelength traveling in opposite directions. The points that do not move are called nodes. Standing waves can be seen on a stretched string ®xed at both ends. The natural frequencies of vibration form a harmonic series. Any two coherent beams of radiation whose paths cross will generate a standing waveform, and this is the principle of holography (q.v.). Strong force: See nuclear force. Holds the nucleons together in a nucleus. It is a short-range force, becoming negligible at distances greater that 10ÿ15 m. The strong force acts on protons and neutrons but not on electrons, neutrinos or 629 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS photons. The strong force is 137 times stronger than the electromagnetic force. Supergravity: Theory that attempts to unify gravity with the other three forces with the use of a powerful new gauge symmetry that unites quarks and leptons with messenger particles called supersymmetry. Supergravity theories are formulated in more than four space-time dimensions. Superstring theory: A theory that promises to provide a uni®ed description of all the forces of nature. According to this theory, all elementary particles are represented by strings, open or closed, no more than 10ÿ35 m in dimensions. Surface tension: The intermolecular forces that act on the molecules on the surface of a liquid to make the surface of the liquid as small as possible. These forces are also responsible for the rising of the liquid in very thin tubes, a phenomenon known as capillarity. Symmetry: If something remains unchanged after some operation is performed on it, it is said to be symmetric under that operation. Temperature: A measure of the average random kinetic energy per molecule of a substance. Thermal expansion: The proportional change in length or area or volume when a change in temperature has occurred. Time dilation: Time in the moving reference frame always ¯ows more slowly than in the stationary reference frame. Torque: The product of the applied force and the lever arm length. The ability to rotate an object depends on the applied torque. Total internal re¯ection: The re¯ection that occurs when light is incident from a medium with a high index of refraction to one with a low index of refraction at angles of incidence greater than the critical angle (q.v.). The light beam then obeys the laws of re¯ection (q.v.). Transistor: A semiconductor device that can act as a current switch and as an electronic ampli®er in a circuit. Ultraviolet radiation: Electromagnetic radiation in the region of the spectrum between about 7:5  1014 and 3  1018 Hz and wavelengths between about 4  10ÿ7 m and 10ÿ10 m. Uncertainty principle: See Heisenberg's Uncertainty Principle. Uniform motion: Motion at a constant velocity. 630 Glossary Uniformly accelerated motion: Motion with constant acceleration. One important example of uniformly accelerated motion is the vertical motion of an object falling towards the ground due to the gravitational attraction of the Earth. Another is circular motion at constant speed. Universal law of gravitation: See Law of universal gravitation. Vector quantities: Quantities that require both magnitude and direction for their complete speci®cation, e.g. velocity. Velocity: The speed and the direction of motion of an object. Virtual particles: Particles that exist only for the brief moment allowed by Heisenberg's uncertainty principle. Visible light: Electromagnetic radiation in the region of the spectrum between about 4  1014 and 7:5  1014 Hz and wavelengths between about 7:5  10ÿ7 m and 4  10ÿ7 m. Voltage: The change in electric potential energy of a charge divided by the magnitude of that charge. Wave: A mechanism for the transmission of energy in which the medium itself does not travel. In particular, electromagnetic radiation does not need a medium to propagate. Wavelength: The distance between two identical points of a periodic wave. Weak force: See strong force. Responsible for radioactive -decay processes, such as the transformation within the nucleus of a neutron into a proton or a proton into a neutron. The weak force controls many of the reactions that produce energy in the sun and the stars. The weak force is some hundred thousand times weaker than the strong force. Weight: The gravitational force with which the Earth attracts an object towards its center when the object is on or near the Earth's surface. Work function: The minimum amount of energy required to release electrons from a particular metal. Work: When a constant force acts on an object along the direction of motion of the object, the work done on the object is equal to product of the force and the distance that the object moves. The SI unit of work is the joule ( J), equal to 1 newton meter (Nm). X-rays: Electromagnetic radiation in the region of the spectrum between about 3  1016 and 1021 Hz and wavelengths between about 10ÿ8 m and 3  10ÿ13 m. 631 INDEX Abott, Edwin A 475 absolute humidity 214 absolute zero 224, 233±4 absorption spectrum 419 acceleration 34±5, 58, 469, 471, 472 due to gravity 37, 40 accommodation 401 action and reaction, law of 59±61 activated-charcoal detectors 551 addition of velocities 464±8 adhesive forces 182 ñther 45, 446 air 45, 167, 168 air bag systems 90 airplane wing 185 Almagest 114 alpha decay 532, 534±5 alpha particles 137, 138, 160 alpha rays 137 alpha-track devices 551 Alvarez, Luis 10±13 Alvarez, Walter 10±13 amber 247, 268 amorphous materials 164 AmpeÁre, Andre Marie 296±7, 307 AmpeÁre's law 297, 406 amplitude 325, 328 Anderson, Carl D 555 Andromeda 458 angle of incidence 373, 384, 391 angle of re¯ection 372 angle of refraction 384, 391 angular momentum 102±7 angular velocity 100±1 antielectrons 555 antimatter 553±5 antineutrino 535 antinode 359 antiparticles 555 antiphase 329 anvil 348 aperture 395 Apollo missions 125 applied electricity 267±90 aqueous humor 399 Arago, Dominique 424 Archimedes 26, 176 Archimedes' principle 177±8 Aristarchus 111, 112, 124 Aristotle 44±7, 133 arti®cial vision 403 Asaro, Frank 11 associated production 565 astronauts 321 Astronomia Nova 117 astronomy 111, 114, 117 atmosphere (unit) 169 atmospheric pressure 168±72, 211, 212 atomic clock 17 atomic hypothesis 133 atomic mass number 154, 160 atomic mass unit 18, 155 atomic number 153±4, 599±601 atomic theory 496±510 atoms 6, 7, 8, 133±50 Bohr model 145±7, 308, 503±6 early concept 134 632 Index atoms (continued ) ®rst models 136±40 new mechanics 511±14 physics 496 Rutherford's nuclear model 140 Thompson's model 137 atria 190 attractive nuclear force 156 audio frequencies 343 auditory canal 348 aurora borealis 306 automobile ef®ciency 86±7 automobile emissions 86 automobile engines 224 average speed 27±30 avian magnetic navigation 307 Avogadro's number 5 Babylonians 111 Bardeen, John 286 Barham, Peter 213 barometer 170, 171 Bartholin, Erasmus 425 baryon number 563±4 baryon octet 566 baryons 563±4 base 286 Basov, N G 433 bastard wing 188±9 battery 135, 268±71 BCS theory 289, 290 Becquerel, Antione Henri 136 Bednorz, J Georg 289±90 bel (unit) 346 Bell, Alexander Graham 346 Bell, John Stewart 529 Bell's inequality 529 Bell's theorem 529 Benton, Stephen 437 Berliner Tageblatt 151 Bernoulli, Daniel 184 Bernoulli's principle 184±6 Bessel, Friedrich 112 beta decay 533, 535±6 beta rays 137 Big Bang 237, 238, 593 bimetallic strip 217±18 binding energy 157, 542 binding energy per nucleon 159, 160, 542 binding forces 165 bird migration 307 black body radiation 496±9 black dwarf 491 black holes 230, 489±95 blood pressure 190±2 Bohm, David 288 Bohr model 145±7, 308, 503±6 Bohr, Niels 83, 140, 145±7, 419, 421, 503, 511, 527 boiling 210±13 boiling point 211 Boltzmann, Ludwig 240 Born, Max 512, 516 bow wave 367 Boyle, Robert 93, 221±3, 342 Boyle's law 223, 225 Bradley, James 408±9 brain, chaos 336±7 brake system 175 Brattain, Walter 286 bright-line 419 Brout, Robert H 579 Bruger, Dionys 475 B-scan 369 bubble chamber 300±1 Buehler, Martin 258 buoyancy 176±9 Cabrera, Blas 293±4 calcite crystals 429 calculus 31, 52, 122 caloric ¯uid 195±6 calorie (unit) 205 camera 393±4 cancer therapy 552 cannon balls 95±7 capacitance 263±4 capacitor 263±4 capillarity 179±84 car seat belt 54 carbon-14 548±9 carbon monoxide 86 cardiovascular system 186±92 Cassegrain focus 399 Cassini 407 633 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS cathode 135 cathode ray tube (CRT) 135 cathode rays 135 cats, twisting 106±7 Cavendish, Henry 121, 251 CD-ROM drive 101 Celsius, Anders 200 Celsius scale 200±1 centigrade scale 200±1 centripedal acceleration 108±9 centripedal force 108±9, 121 cesium atom 17 cesium clock 17 Chadwick, James 153 chain reaction 541, 543 chaos 333±7, 430 brain 336±7 chaotic motion 6, 334 charge independence 156, 157 charm 568±9 chemical energy 62, 66, 78 chloride ion 148, 150 Chu, Paul C W 289 ciliary muscles 401 Clausius, Rudolf 230, 232 Clausius statement 229 cochlea 349, 350 cochlear duct 349 cochlear implant 352 Cockcroft, J D 302 coef®cient of linear expansion 216±17 Cohen, I Bernard 122 coherent light 431 coherent waves 329, 330 cohesive forces 182 collector 286 collisions 94±5 color 413±17 color charge 581, 590 color force 581±4 commutator 313, 314 compact disc player 434±5 compound 148 Compton, Arthur H 421 concave mirror 376, 397 condensation 209 conduction band 282, 283 conduction electrons 272, 274, 288, 289 conductors 267, 281 conservation laws 563±5 conservation of electric charge 535, 540, 563 conservation of energy 78±97, 563 principle of 80±2 conservation of mechanical energy 80±2 conservation of momentum 91±3 conservation of nucleon number 535, 540 conservative force 75±7, 261 constant angular velocity (CAV) 101 constant linear velocity (CLV) 101 constructive interference 328±30 converging lens 387±8, 394, 399, 402, 404 convex mirror 379, 380 Cooper, Leon N 288 Cooper pairs 288±9 Copenhagen interpretation of quantum mechanics 527 Copernicus, Nicolaus 114±18 cornea 399, 404 coronary sinus 189 Cosmic Background Explorer (COBE) satellite 594 Coulomb, Charles 251, 294 Coulomb force 254 Coulomb interactions 589 coulomb (unit) 253 Coulomb's constant 253 Coulomb's law 250±4, 298, 316 covalent bond 148 Cowan, Clyde L 535 Cretaceous 10, 12 critical angle 390, 391 critical mass 543 crystal structure 208 crystals 164 cubit 13 Cui, Wei 494 Curie, Pierre and Marie 136 curve balls 187±9 curved mirrors 376±80 cyclotron 302±4 Dalton, John 134 634 Index dark-line 6, 419, 421 Da Vinci, Leonardo 25, 405 Davisson, C J 507 Davy, Sir Humphrey 310 de Broglie, Louis 506±9, 514±15 De Magnete 247±8, 292 De Natura Rerum 291 De Revolutionibus 114 Debye, Peter 515 decad 13 decibel (unit) 346 deferents 112 Democritus 134 DeMoivre, Abraham 119 Denisyuk, Yu N 436 density 165±6, 220 common substances 167 dental cavities 275 Descartes, Rene 407 destructive interference 328±30 deuterium 154 deuterium nucleus 155 dew point 215 diaphragm 395 diastole 190 diastolic pressure 192 diatomic molecules 202 diatonic scale 355 diffraction 325, 422 diffuse re¯ection 373 diffusion 232, 240 diodes 284, 286 dipole 308 Dirac equation 554 Dirac ®eld 554 Dirac, Paul Adrien Maurice 293, 514, 553±5 direction 31 direction of time 229 Discourses and Mathematical Demonstrations Concerning Two New Sciences Pertaining to Mechanics and Local Motion see Two New Sciences displacement node 359 Ditto, William D 337 diverging lens 387, 396, 402 donor 284 doping 283 Doppler, Christian 362 Doppler effect 362±5, 420, 487 Doppler shift 485, 487±8 double-slit experiment 518±19, 521 drift velocity 272±4 du Fay, Charles FrancËois de Cisterney 248 ear 346±51 eardrum 348 Earth 45, 59, 60, 98±100, 111±13, 121±7 earthquakes 339 Earth's composition 341 Earth's dimensions 20 Earth's magnetism 304±6 Earth's motion 409, 442, 447 Earth's velocity 446, 447 Earwicker, H C 568 Eddington, Arthur 482 ef®ciency 82±7 eightfold way 566 Einstein, Albert 4±6, 8, 81±2, 140, 144, 145, 421, 431, 432±3, 449±53, 486, 500, 511, 527, 585 general theory of relativity 469±95, 503 mass±energy equivalence 465±8 postulates 452±3, 469 simulataneous events 460 spacetime continuum 473±9 special theory of relativity 157, 441±68, 496, 502 Einstein's formula 158 elastic collisions 94±5 elastic potential energy 72±4 electric car 271±2 electric charge 134, 248±50, 261, 406, 563, 575 electric circuit 275±8 electric current 268±70, 280±1, 295±8 electric ®eld 253±6, 272, 284, 371, 427 electric potential 260±2, 277 electric potential difference 262 electric potential energy 261±2 electric power 280±1 electrical energy 88, 280±1, 369 storage 262±6 635 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS electrical repulsion 156 electrical symbols 277 electricity 134, 247±66 see also applied electricity electri®cation 248 electrodes 135 electroencephalogram (EEG) 336±7 electromagnetic energy 381 electromagnetic ®eld 575 electromagnetic force 588 electromagnetic induction 311 electromagnetic interaction 557 electromagnetic radiation 371, 496 electromagnetic spectrum 411±12 electromagnetic waves 370, 406, 407, 411, 413, 445 electromagnetism 247±8, 291±318 electron collisions 430 electron microscopes 523±6 electron migration 284±5 electron neutrino 562 electron pump 264 electron volt 66, 262 electronic ear implants 352 electrons 8, 135, 136, 148, 155, 250, 253, 260, 264, 308, 491 electrostatic forces, Mars 258 electrostatic repulsion 155 electroweak force 580 electroweak uni®cation 575±81 elektron 247 elementary particles 553±70 classi®cation 561±2 elements 599±601 four 45 ellipse 116 emission spectrum 419 emitter 286 empirical method 8 endolymph 351 energy 62±77 concept 62, 66 heat as 195±8 transformation 78±9 energy band structures 282 energy conservation 86±7 energy conversion 84±5 energy gap 282 energy level 145±7 energy level diagram 146, 505 energy losses 82±4, 87 energy of mass 81, 82 energy of motion 68 energy of position 69±73 Englert, F 579 entropy 230, 233±9 and time 239±43 EoÈtvoÈs, Roland von 127, 473 epicycles 112, 113 EPR experiment 527±8 equant 113 equilibrium 55 Eratosthenes 20±1 escape velocity 492±3 European Space Agency 258 eustachian tube 348 evaporation 210±13 exchange forces 558±9 expansion 232 of water 218±20 experimentum crucis 415 exposure 395 extraordinary beam 425 eye 399±404, 422 eyepiece 396 f stops 395 Fahrenheit, Gabriel 200 Fahrenheit scale 200±1 falling bodies 37±40 Faraday, Michael 134±5, 248, 254, 309, 316 Faraday's law of induction 309±11, 316, 406 farsightedness 402, 404 Fermi, Enrico 84, 535, 547 Feynman diagram 558, 559, 561 Feynman, Richard 133, 516, 558 ®ber optics 392±3 ®fth force 129 Finlay-Freundlich, Erwin 482 Finnegans Wake 566, 568 ®re 45 ®rst law of thermodynamics 226±9 FitzGerald, George 448 Fizeau, Armand Hippolyte Louis 410 636 Index ¯avor doublets 570 ¯uids 164±92 de®nition 165 in motion 184±6 ¯uorescence 306 focal length 386, 395 focal point 377 foot (unit) 13 forbidden energy gap 282 force, concept of 43±4 force constant 73 force per unit area 167 forward bias 285 Foucault, Jean Bernard LeÂon 410 fovea 402 Franklin, Benjamin 134, 197, 248±50 FraunhoÈfer, Joseph von 6, 417 frequency 324, 328, 343 Fresnel, Augustin 405, 424 friction 29, 76±7, 82, 196, 198 Frisch, Otto 540 FroÈhlich, Herbert 288 fundamental charge 253, 256±60 fundamental forces 555±8 fundamental frequency 333, 359 fundamental mode 331±2, 354 fundamental units 15±17 furlongs 13 fusion 207±9 Gabor, Dennis 435 Galaxy 458±60 Galen 199 Galilean principle of relativity 441±5, 464, 469 Galilean satellites of Jupiter 396, 407 Galilean telescope 396±7 Galileo 26±7, 34±8, 40±2, 45±6, 118, 123, 168, 199±200, 342, 395±7, 441 dialog with Aristotle 47 Law of Inertia 48±52 Two New Sciences 26, 34±6, 168, 407, 441 Galois, Evariste 565±6 gamma decay 533, 536±7 gamma ray detector 550 gamma rays 137, 539, 550 Gamow, George 238 ganglion cells 403 gas, de®nition 165 gas-recombinant lead±acid batteries 271 gauge invariance 573 gauss 298 Gay-Lussac, Joseph Louis 223 Gay-Lussac's law 225 Geiger counter 516 Geiger, Hans 137, 138 Gell-Mann, Murray 8, 565±8 General Theory of Relativity 469±95, 503 generator 312±15 geocentric model 112 geodesic 479 Georgi, Howard 584 germanium 283 Germer, L H 507 Gilbert, William 247, 292 Glashow, Sheldon 21, 568, 577, 584 global gauge invariance 573 Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) System 128±9 global SU(2) gauge symmetry 576 gluon 584 Goldstein, Eugen 151 Gottlieb, Rudolf 229 gradient-index lenses (GRINs) 389±90 grand uni®ed theory (GUT) 584±8, 592 gravitational ®eld 254, 470, 481, 485 gravitational force 44, 229, 251, 492, 556 gravitational mass 127, 472 gravitational potential difference 269 gravitational potential energy 69±73 gravitational red shift 487 gravitational time dilation 485±9 gravitino 586 graviton 586 gravity 52, 110, 472, 555±6, 585±6, 592 acceleration due to 40, 41 Green, Michael 7, 587 Gregory, James 397 Grimaldi, Francesco Maria 422 ground state 146, 430 group theory 565, 571 637 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS guitar 357 hadron 561±2 Hahn, Otto 540 hair cells 349±51, 352 Hale telescope 400 half-life 537, 550 Halley, Edmond 53, 119 hammer 348 Harkings, William D 153 harmonic law 117, 118, 121 Harmonici Mundi 117 harmonics 332±3, 354, 356, 360±2 Hawking, Stephen 493 hearing loss 352 heart 189±92 heat 195±220 as form of energy 195±8 mechanical equivalent of 199 heat capacity 205±6 heat dissipated by electric current 281 heat energy 203 heat of fusion 207±9 heat of vaporization 207±9 heavy hydrogen 154 heavy water 154 Heisenberg, Werner 6±7, 151±3, 509, 511±14, 560, 576 Heisenberg's uncertainty principle 517±22, 528, 533, 559, 585, 589 heliocentric model 112, 114 helium atom 159 Helmholtz, Hermann von 446 heptatonic scale 355 herapathite crystals 426 Hertz, Heinrich 318, 411±12, 499 hidden symmetry 579 hidden variables 527 Higgs ®eld 579 Higgs mechanism 579, 580 Higgs, Peter 579 Hilbert, David 572 hole 283, 284 hologram 435±7 holography 435±7 Hooke, Robert 119, 442 Hooke's Law 73 horizontal canal 351 horizontal velocity 41±2 horsepower 85±7 Hubble, Edwin 237, 365 Hubble Space Telescope 237 Hubble's constant 237 Hubble's law 237 humidity 213±15 at saturation 215 Huyghens, Christiaan 93, 94, 95, 405, 407, 422 hydraulic lift 174±5 hydrogen, atomic properties 147 hydrogen atom 218±19, 420, 505, 506 hydrogen bomb 546 hydrogen nucleus 155 hyperopia 404 ice, open structure 219 ice cream 213 ice crystals 219 ideal black body 497 ideal gas 224 ideal gas law 221±5 image 374, 375 image distance 376 image reversal 375 impact theory of mass extinctions 9 impulse 88±91 impurities 267 incident ray 385 induction, Faraday's law of 309±11, 316, 406 inelastic collisions 94±5 inertial con®nement 546 inertial frames of reference 56, 463 inertial mass 127, 472 inertial reference frame 56, 443±5, 463 Infeld, Leopold 460 inferior canal 351 inferior vena cava 189 infrasonic wave 343 inkjet printer 265 inner ear 349 instantaneous speed 30±1 insulators 267 interaction energy 506 interference 328 interference pattern 329, 518±19 638 Index Knoll, Max 523 Kopernigk, Mikolaj (Nicolaus Copernicus) 114±18 K±T boundary layer 11, 12 intergalactic travel 458±60 internal energy 226, 227, 229 inverse-square law 294, 556 inverted image 397 ionic bond 148 ionizing radiation 549 ions 148 iridium 11±13 iris diaphragm 395 iron atoms 578 isochoric process 228 isothermal process 228 isotopes 154 Jefferson, Thomas 13 Joint Institute for Laboratory Astrophysics 129 Joule, James 66, 67, 198, 199, 281 joule per kilogram per Kelvin 206 joule (unit) 66, 158, 205 Joule's law 281 Joyce, James 566, 568 Jupiter 407 Galilean satellites 396, 407 magnetosphere 305 Kaluza±Klein theory 586 Kaluza's theory 586 Keller, Mark W 264 Kelvin, Lord (William Thompson) 68, 201, 240 Kelvin temperature scale 201, 223 kelvin (unit) 201 Kepler, Johannes 396 Kepler's First Law 117, 483 Kepler's laws of planetary motion 114±18 Kepler's Second Law 116, 117 Kepler's Third Law (harmonic law) 117, 118, 121 kilogram 14, 17 kinetic energy 68±9, 74, 78±81, 95, 196, 201±2, 211, 216, 300, 467, 501 rotational 202, 205 transitional 202, 205 vibrational 205 Kirchhoff, Gustav 418±19 Klein, Oscar 83 labyrinth 349, 351 Land, Edwin P 426 Langevin, Paul 515 Large Magellanic Cloud 491 lasers 430±5 latent heat 209 latent heat of fusion 209 latent heat of vaporization 209 Lavoisier, Antoine 195 law of action and reaction 59±61 law of areas 116, 118 law of conservation of angular momentum 107 law of conservation of baryons 563±4 law of conservation of energy 278 law of force 56±8 law of inertia 48±52 law of orbits 117 law of universal gravitation 98, 118±25, 556 historical perspective 110±14 Lawrence, Ernest 302 Lawrence, Wendy 127 laws of mechanics 43±61 laws of spectral analysis 419 lead±acid battery 271 leaning Tower of Pisa 50±1 Lebedev, P N 412 Lederman, Leon 569 Leibniz, Gottfried Wilhelm 66, 571 length 15, 16 length contraction 462±3 lens axis 385 lenses 384±90, 396, 399 see also speci®c types of lens Leonardo da Vinci see Da Vinci, Leonardo lepton 561±2, 570, 585 lepton quantum numbers 564±5 Leucippus 134 lever arm 103 Le Verrier, Joseph 483 Leyden jar 263, 268 639 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS Lie, Sophus 572 light 145, 318, 321, 370, 417 bending 479±83 nature of 405±37 speed of 382, 406±10 wave nature of 405 wave theory of 370, 424 light quanta 144 light rays 389 light waves 142, 370, 405 Lipperschey, Hans 395 liquid, de®nition 165 liquid-drop model of ®ssion 541 liquid helium 289 liquid nitrogen 290 liter 14 local SU(2) symmetry 576 lodestone 247, 292 London, Fritz 287 London, Heinz 287 longitudinal wave 322, 323, 343 Lorentz, Hendrik A 449 Lorentz±FitzGerald contraction 449, 462 Los Alamos National Laboratory 129 loudness 346, 354 Lucretius 247, 291 luminiferous ñther 446 lunar eclipse 371 M-theory 588 Mach 1 366 Mach 2 366 Mach, Ernst 366 macular degeneration 403 Magellanic Cloud 231 magnet discovery 291±2 rotation 578 magnetic bottle 306 magnetic domains 308 magnetic ®eld 292±4, 297, 302, 303, 311, 312, 406, 578 moving charge in 298±301 magnetic force 44, 294 magnetic monopoles 293 magnetic navigation, avian 307 magnetic poles 294 magnetic potential 575 magnetic potential energy 72 magnetic storms 306 magnetism 247±8, 295±8 earth's 304±6 source of 307±9 magnetite 247 magneto-optical drives 295 magnetosphere 305, 306 magnetron 317 magni®cation 388 Maiman, T H 435 Mars 115 electrostatic forces 258 Mars Environmental Compatibility Assessment (MECA) Electrometer 258±9 Marsden, Ernest 139 maser 433 mass 15±17, 19, 82, 104, 123, 127, 468, 579 energy of 81 mass defect 158 mass±energy equivalence 465±8 mass extinctions, impact theory 9 Mathematical Collection, The 114 mathematics and physics 18±21 Maximilian I, elector of Bavaria 6 Maxwell, James Clerk 248, 315±18, 405, 407, 411, 412, 445 Maxwell's equations 315±18, 371, 586 Maxwell's fourth equation 370, 406 Maxwell's third equation 370, 406 measurement 13±15 mechanical energy 68, 369 mechanical equivalent of heat 199 mechanical wave 142, 321 mechanics, laws of 23, 43±61 Meitner, Lise 540 Melvill, Thomas 417 meniscus 182 Mercury magnetic ®eld 304 perihelion 483±5 merry-go-round 98±100 meson 561, 581, 582 Mesopotamis 111 metastable state 431 640 Index meteorite 10±12 meter 14, 15, 17, 20 Michel, Helen 11 Michell, John 294 Michelson, Albert A 410, 446±9 Michelson interferometer 446±8 Michelson±Morley experiment 445±9, 462 microwave oven 317 middle ear 348 migratory birds 307 Milky Way Galaxy 98 mille passus 13 Millikan, Robert A 257, 260 Mills, Robert L 576, 580 mirrors, re¯ection 374±5 modes of vibration 331±2 molecular motion 6 molecules 5, 6, 147±50 collision 240 moment of inertia 104 momentum 88±91 conservation of 91±3 Moon 122±3, 371, 493 measuring the distance to 124±5 moons 396 motion 25±42 ancient ideas 44±5 of projectiles 40±2 projectiles 40±2 understanding 25 uniform 26±7 uniform linear 441 uniformly accelerated 35±7 motors 312±15 Mount Palomar 399, 400 MuÈller, K Alex 289±90 multimode ®bers 393 muon 457 muon neutrino 562 music 352±6 musical instruments 357±62 musical scales 354±5 Musschenbroeck, Pieter van 262±33 myopia 402 Mysterium Cosmographicum 115 NaCl molecule 150 Nagaoka, Hantaro 140 NASA 258, 594 nasopharynx 349 natural frequency 333 natural motion 45 NAVSTAR 2 488 near point 402 nearsightedness 402 Neeman, Yuval 565 negative electric charge 134, 249±50 negative ion 148 Nernst, Harmann Walther 233, 234 neutrino 84, 535, 562 neutron 8, 9, 83±4, 151±3, 155, 160, 533 neutron star 491 Newton, Isaac 31, 52, 108, 142, 397, 399, 413±17, 422, 425, 555±6 First Law 52, 122, 445 law of universal gravitation 98, 118±25, 556 historical perspective 110±14 laws of motion 43±61 Principia 53, 56, 125 Second Law 56±8, 121, 127 Third Law 59±61 newton second (unit) 91 Newtonian focus 399 Newtonian mechanics 483 Newton's cradle 94 newtons per square meter 168 Nishijima, Kazuhiko 565 Nobel Prize winners in physics 602±7 node 331, 359 noise 352 nonconservative force 75±7, 81 Northern Lights 306 NoÈther, Amalie Emmy 572 NoÈther's theorem 573 n-type semiconductor 283, 284 nuclear bomb 544 nuclear energy 540±6 nuclear energy level 161±3 nuclear energy level diagram 162 nuclear explosion 543 nuclear ®ssion 540 nuclear force 156, 157, 532, 533 641 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS nuclear fusion 545±6 nuclear physics 532±52 applications 546±51 nuclear reactions 82, 538±40 nuclear reactor 544, 545 nucleon 153, 157, 161, 162 nucleon orbits 163 nucleus 8, 139, 151±63, 532 composition 153±5, 532 size and shape 159±61 nuclide 154 object 375 object distance 375 objective 396, 397 octave 354, 355 Oersted, Hans Christian 248, 295±7 Ohm, Georg Simon 274 ohm (unit) 275 Ohm's law 270±5, 281 oil drop experiment 260 Oldenburg, Henry 413, 414 Oldham, R D 340 Onnes, Kamerlingh 287 open structure 219 optical axis 376 optical ®ber 392±3 optical instruments 393±9 optical pumping 431 optics 370±404 orbital motion 125±9 orbiting clock 488 ordinary beam 425 organ of Corti 349, 350, 352 organ pipe 359±62 Orion Nebula 489 oscillation 332±3, 339, 364 otocondria 351 otoconia 351 otolithic membrane 351 oval window 348 overtone 356 oxygen atom 218±19 oxygen molecule 203 p-branes 588 pair annihilation 555, 556 pair production 467, 555, 556 Pais, Abraham 565 parallax 112 parallel connection 279±80 parallel plate capacitor 263 parallel rays 385 parallelogram method 33 partial constant angular velocity (PCAV) 101 particle accelerator 9, 301±4, 585 particles 8, 553±70 particles of light 422, 502, 511 Pascal, Blaise 168, 173 Pascal's principle 173±4 Path®nder mission 258 Pauli exclusion principle 533 Pauli, Wolfgang 83±4, 535 Pemberton, Henry 119 Penrose, Roger 493 pentatonic scale 355 Peregrinus de Maricourt, Petrus 247, 291±2, 295 perihelion precession 483 period 325 permanent magnet 307 Philosophiae Naturalis Principia Mathematica see Principia photoelectric effect 499±503 photomultiplier tube 502, 503 photon 144, 146, 239, 420, 422, 431, 501, 503±5, 550, 558, 576, 577, 580 physical color 413 physics and mathematics 18±21 and other sciences 9±13 concepts 21 overview 3±21 time-line 608±14 piano 358±9 piezoelectric crystals 369 piezoelectric effect 369 pi meson see pion pinhole camera 393±4 pion 559±61, 583 pitch 354, 357, 363, 364 Planck, Max 140, 143±5, 257, 496, 498, 503 Planck's constant 499, 514, 521 Planck's formula 520 642 Index plane mirror 376 plane wave 326 planetary motion, Kepler's laws of 114±18 p±n junction 285 p±n junction diode 284 p±n±p transistor 286 Podolsky, Boris 527 Poincare cycle time 241 PoincareÂ, Henri 241 Poincare recurrence 241 point-contact design 286 polarization 422, 425±30 Polaroid 427±9 polonium 136 polyvinyl chloride (PVC) 148 Popper, Karl R 8, 9 population inversion 431 positive electric charge 134, 155, 249±50 positive ion 148 positron 535, 555 positron-electron pair 555 Positron Emission Tomography (PET) 549 potential difference 262, 266, 269, 272 potential drop 278±9 potential energy 69±73, 78±80, 146, 208, 209, 226, 279 power 85±8 powers of ten 596±8 pressure 166±76, 185, 223 liquid 172±6 pressure cooker 212, 213 priciple of superposition 325±8 Priestley, Joseph 250±1 Prigogine, Ilya 241 prime focus 399, 400 Princeton Tokamak Fusion Test Reactor 546 principal quantum number 146 principle of conservation of mechanical energy 80±2 principle of conservation of momentum 93 principle of equivalence 469±73 principle of relativity 452±3, 469 prism 391±2, 417 projectiles, motion of 40±2 Prokhorov, A M 433 proper length 462±3 proton 8, 9, 151±3, 155, 300, 466, 491, 533, 582 proton beams 552 Ptolemy, Claudius 112±13 p-type semiconductor 283, 284 Pythagoras 111, 342, 352±4 quality 354±6 quanta 141±5, 144, 498 quantity of motion 92 quantum chromodynamics (QCD) 582, 584 quantum electrodynamics (QED) 558, 582 quantum ®eld 554 theory 554, 559 quantum mechanics 147, 152, 161, 163, 509±31, 527 beginnings 511 Quantum Mechanics 553 quantum numbers 163 quantum physics 496 quantum teleportation 530±1 quark 9, 565±8, 581, 582, 585, 590, 591 quark quantum numbers 569 radiation 143 radiation damage 550 radiation exposure 550 radio waves 412 radioactive dating 548±9 radioactive decay 533, 549 radioactive isotopes 549±1 radioactive nucleus 156±7 radioactivity 136, 137, 532±7 biological effects 549±1 radium 136 radon 551 radon-222 550 rare earth elements 289 recombination 284±5 red giant 490 reference frames 56, 443±5, 457, 463, 485 reference level 69 643 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS re¯ection 370±80 from mirrors 374±5 re¯ector 397 re¯ector telescope 398 refraction 370, 380±4 indices of 384 see also lenses Reines, Frederick 535 relative humidity 215 relativistic mass 467±8 relativistic quantum ®eld theory 554 relativity see Galilean principle of relativity; General Theory of Relativity; Special Theory of Relativity resistance 273, 275, 281 resistor 277 combinations 278±80 resonance 333±7, 515 retina 401, 403 retinosis pigmentosa 403 reverse bias 285 reversibility paradox 240 revolution 98 Richter, Burton 569 right-hand rule 297, 298 rock 341 rockets 95±7 rods and cones 401, 403 Romagnosi, Gian Domenico 296 RoÈmer, Olaus 407 RoÈntgen, Wilhelm Conrad von 136 Rosen, Nathan 527 rotation 98 rotational inertia 104 rotational motion 98±102 rotational symmetry 579 round window 349 Rubbia, Carlo 581 Rumford, Count, (Benjamin Thompson) 197±8 Ruska, Ernst 507, 523 Rutherford, Ernest 83, 137±40, 151, 153, 157, 538 saccule 351 Salam, Abdus 577, 580 Sandage, Alan 237 satellites 110, 126, 305, 488, 594 saturation 156 scalar quantities 31 scanning electron microscope (SEM) 524±5 scanning tunneling microscope (STM) 525±6 Schawlow, A L 433 Schrieffer, John R 288 SchroÈdinger, Erwin 3, 509, 515, 516 Schwarz, John 7, 587 Schwarzschild, Karl 492 Schwarzschild radius 492, 493 Schwinger, Julian 558 science distinguishing feature 8 modern 45±8 scienti®c knowledge 9 scienti®c method 7±9 scienti®c theory 8 second law of thermodynamics 229±33 seismic waves 339±41 semicircular canals 351 semiconductors 267, 281±7 n-type 283, 284 p-type 283, 284 series connection 278 Shaw, Robert S 335 shells 163 Shelton, Ian 491 Shockley, William 286 shockwaves 365±7 short range force 156 shutter 395 SI units 14±17, 28, 66, 87, 121, 158, 168, 205, 206, 262, 281, 298 see also speci®c units Sidereus Nuncius 396 silicon 283, 284 Simon, A W 421 simultaneity 460±1 single-mode ®ber 393 singularity 493 sino-auricular node 190 Snell's law 384 Snow C P 229 sodium chloride 164 644 Index sodium ion 148 solar eclipse 371 solar ¯ares 306 solar spectrum 6 Solar System 98, 110 solids 164 sound 342±69 nature of 342±3 speed of 343±6, 366, 368 sound intensity 347 sound level 346, 347 sound waves 142, 321, 327, 354 intensity 346 sounding box 357 Southern Lights 306 Space Shuttle Discovery 127 Space, Time, and Gravitation 482 spacecraft 125±9 spacetime continuum 473±9 spacetime drag 494 Special Theory of Relativity 157, 441±68, 496, 502 speci®c heat capacity 206±7 spectra 417±21 spectral lines 7 specular re¯ection 373 speed and direction 31 average 27±30 instantaneous 30±1 units of 28 spherical aberration 385, 389 spherical lens 389 spherical mirror 376 sphygmomanometer 190±2 spontaneous emission 430 spontaneous symmetry breaking 577, 580 spring coil (or ``Slinky'') 322±3 standard atmosphere 170 standing (or stationary) wave 330±3, 335, 506±9 Stanford Linear Accelerator Laboratory (SLAC) 9 states of matter 164±5 stationary (or standing) wave 330±3, 335, 506±9 stationary orbits 145 Stella, Luigi 494 stellar aberration 408±9 stellar parallax 408 stimulated emission 432±3 stirrup 348 strange particles 565 Strassmann, Fritz 540 streamlines 184, 187 strong nuclear force 156, 557 structure of matter 133 Stuckey, William 118 subatomic particles 8, 83 sul®tes 149 sulfur dioxide 149 Sun 111±12, 115±18, 121, 409, 479, 487 superconductor 287±90 superforce 571±95 supergravity 586 superior canal 351 superior vena cava 189 supernova 12, 491 explosions 230, 231 superstrings 585±8 theory 7, 587 supersymmetry 585±8 surface tension 179±84, 339 symbols of elements 599±601 symmetry 571±3 global 573±5 local 573±5 symmetry-breaking 593 symmetry group O(3) 578 Syncom 2 110 systole 190 systolic pressure 191±2 Tacoma Narrows Bridge 334 tau neutrino 562 telephone tones 344±5 telescope 395±9 temperature 195±220, 223, 224, 228 temperature change 216±17 temperature measurement 199±201 terrela 292 Tertiary 10, 12 tesla 298 Thales of Miletus 111, 133 ``The Two Cultures'' 229 645 SUPERSTRINGS AND OTHER THINGS thermal energy 81, 203, 205±6, 226 thermal expansion 215±18 thermodynamics, laws of 221±43 thermography 204 thermometer 199 thermostat 217 thin lenses 386 third law of thermodynamics 233±5 Thompson, Benjamin, (Count Rumford) 197±8 Thompson, William see Kelvin, Lord Thomson, Sir Joseph John 135±6, 257 'T Hooft, Gerard 580, 581 thorium-234 550 thought experiment 453, 470 timbre 354 time 15, 16 and entropy 239±43 direction of 239±40 time dilation 453±60 gravitational 485±9 time-line, physics 608±14 Tomonaga, Sin-Itiro 558 tooth decay 275 torque 102±7 torr (unit) 170 Torricelli, Evangelista 168, 170 torsion balance 251±2 torsional wave 322 total energy 226 total internal energy 226 total internal re¯ection 390±2 total mechanical energy 80 tourmaline 429 Townes, Charles H 432±3 Townsend J S 257 transformation of energy 78±9 transistor 284, 286 translational motion 98 transmission electron microscope (TEM) 523 transverse wave 322, 326, 425 tumor detection 504±5 twisting cats 106±7 Two New Sciences 26, 34±6, 168, 407, 441 tympanic annulus 348 tympanic canal 349 tympanic membrane 350 tympanum 348 ultrasonic waves 343 ultrasound 367±9 ultraviolet catastrophe 498 uniform linear motion 53, 441 uniformly accelerated motion 35±7 units 13 see also SI units and speci®c units universal gravitation 52 Newton's law of 98, 118±25, 556 universe 110±14 creation 588±92 expansion 238 ®rst moments 591±5 origin 235±9 uranium ®ssion reaction 542 uranium-235 541±4 uranium-238 550 Ursa Major 237 utricle 351 valence band 282, 284 valence electrons 272 Van Allen belt 306 Van Allen, James 305 van der Meer, Simon 581 vaporization 207±9 vector quantity 31, 89 vectors 31±4 addition 33 components 34 resultant 33 velocity 31, 185, 443 addition 464±8 Veneziano model 587 ventricle 189, 190 ventricular ®brillation 335 vertical motion 42 vestibular canal 349 vestibular membrane 350 vibration 331±2 View of Sir Isaac Newton's Philosophy, A 119 Viking Lander missions 258 violin 357 virtual electron±positron pairs 589 646 Index virtual image 378 viscosity 5 vitreous body 401 Vitruvius 342 volcanic eruption 12 volt (unit) 262 Volta, Count Alessandro 262±3, 268 voltage 262 volume 223, 224 Wallis, John 93 Walton, E T S 302 water 45, 148, 211 contraction 218 expansion 218±20 water molecules 218±19 water vapor 213±15 water waves 230, 321, 337±9 Watt, James 85, 87 watt (unit) 87±8, 281 wave equation 516 wave mechanics 514±17 wave motion 141, 143, 321±41 wave nature of light 405 wave theory of light 370, 424 waveforms 356 wavelength 324±5, 329, 332±3, 364, 382, 413, 424 waves 141±5 in phase 329 nature of 321±3 overlapping 328 properties of 323±5 weak nuclear force 533, 557 weight 60, 123 Weinberg, Steven 579 Weindler, Peter 307 Weyl, Hermann 573 white dwarf 490 Wien, Wilhelm 152 Wilson H A 257 wind instrument 359 WinderoÈe, Rolf 302 winemaking 149 Wollaston, William 417 work 66, 74, 76, 88 concept 62±5 work-energy theorem 74, 185 work function 501, 502 Wu, Mau-Kuen 289 X particles 584±5 X-rays 550 Yang, C N 576, 580 Young, Thomas 66, 142, 405, 421±4 Young's modulus 422 Yukawa, Hideki 559±60 zeroth law of thermodynamics 225±6 Zweig, George 8, 566 647